almo company manufactures and sells adjustable canopies that att 274061

Almo Company manufactures and sells adjustable canopies that attach to motor homes and trailers. The market covers both new unit purchases as well as replacement canopies. Almo developed its 2010 business plan based on the assumption that canopies would sell at a price of $400 each. The variable costs for each canopy were projected at $200, and the annual fixed costs were budgeted at $100,000. Almo’s after tax profit objective was $240,000; the company’s effective tax rate is 40 percent.

While Almo’s sales usually rise during the second quarter, the May financial statements reported that sales were not meeting expectations. For the first five months of the year, only 350 units had been sold at the established price, with variable costs as planned, and it was clear that the 2010 after tax profit projection would not be reached unless some actions were taken. Almo’s president assigned a management committee to analyze the situation and develop several alternative courses of action. The following mutually exclusive alternatives, labeled A, B, and C, were presented to the president.

A. Reduce the sales price by $40. The sales organization forecasts that with the significantly reduced sales price, 2,700 units can be sold during the remainder of the year.

Total fixed and variable unit costs will stay as budgeted.

B. Lower the variable costs per unit by $25 through the use of less expensive materials and slightly modified manufacturing techniques. The sales price will also be reduced by $30, and sales of 2,200 units for the remainder of the year are forecast.

C. Cut fixed costs by $10,000, and lower the sales price by 5 percent. Variable costs per unit will be unchanged. Sales of 2,000 units are expected for the remainder of the year.

Required:

1. Determine the number of units that Almo Company must sell in order to break even assuming no changes are made to the selling price and cost structure.

2. Determine the number of units that Almo Company must sell in order to achieve its after tax profit objective.

3. Determine which one of the alternatives Almo Company should select to achieve its annual after tax profit objective. Be sure to support your selection with appropriate calculations.

4. The precision and reliability of CVP analysis are limited by several underlying assumptions. Identify at least four of these assumptions. (CMA adapted)

bill johnson sales manager and diane buswell controller at c 274094

Bill Johnson, sales manager, and Diane Buswell, controller, at Current Designs are beginning to analyze the cost considerations for one of the composite models of the kayak division. They have provided the following production and operational costs necessary to produce one composite kayak.

Kevlar® …………………………………………..$250 per kayak

Resin and supplies ………………………………$100 per kayak

Finishing kit (seat, rudder, ropes, etc.) ………….$170 per kayak

Labor …………………………………………….$420 per kayak

Selling and administrative expenses—variable …. $400 per kayak

Selling and administrative expenses—fixed …….$119,700 per year

Manufacturing overhead—fixed ………………..$240,000 per year

Bill and Diane have asked you to provide a cost volume profit analysis, to help them finalize the budget projections for the upcoming year. Bill has informed you that the selling price of the composite kayak will be $2,000.

Instructions

(a) Calculate variable costs per unit.

(b) Determine the contribution margin per unit.

(c) Using the contribution margin per unit, determine the break even point in units for this product line.

(d) Assume that Current Designs plans to earn $270,600 on this product line. Using the contribution margin per unit, calculate the number of units that need to be sold to achieve this goal.

(e) Based on the most recent sales forecast, Current Designs plans to sell 1,000 units of this model. Using your results from part (c), calculate the margin of safety and the margin of safety ratio.

blazer delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service last year 274101

Blazer Delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service. Last year 80% of its revenue came from the delivery of mailing “pouches” and small, standardized delivery boxes (which provides a 10% contribution margin). The other 20% of its revenue came from delivering non standardized boxes (which provides a 60% contribution margin). With the rapid growth of Internet retail sales, Blazer believes that there are great opportunities for growth in the delivery of non standardized boxes. The company has fixed costs of $12,000,000.

Instructions

(a) What is the company’s break even point in total sales dollars? At the break even point, how much of the company’s sales are provided by each type of service?

(b) The company’s management would like to hold its fixed costs constant, but shift its sales mix so that 60% of its revenue comes from the delivery of non standardized boxes and the remainder from pouches and small boxes. If this were to occur, what would be the company’s break even sales, and what amount of sales would be provided by each service type?

canastar group sells three lines of prepared foods into a 274115

Canastar Group sells three lines of prepared foods into a marketplace where total demand is 240 million cases. Canastar’s market share is 2 ?1 percent; the average selling price per case is $30 and their variable costs per case are $23. Canastar spends $15 million on marketing and sales expenses. Other operational expenses add up to $6 million. The lemonade mix and the corndogs are both positive in terms of net profit before taxes, with lemonade contributing the greater share. Canastar’s cheese line produces a net negative profit. Last year, the Group’s internally produced accounting information system was voted best in the food industry for its ability to track inventory and accurately predict cost variations.

1. What is Canastar Group’s marketing return on sales (ROS)? Show your work.

a) 10.6%

b) 12%

c) 15%

d) 140%

e) 180%

2. If Canastar Group lowered its prices by 10% and spent an additional $5 million on marketing, causing a boost in market share to 4%, what would the approximate net marketing contribution be? Show your work.

candyland inc produces a particularly rich praline fudge each 274118

Candyland Inc. produces a particularly rich praline fudge. Each 10 ounce box sells for $5.60. Variable unit costs are as follows:

Pecans ……………………..$0.70

Sugar ………………………..0.35

Butter ………………………1.85

Other ingredients …………..0.34

Box, packing material ………0.76

Selling commission …………0.20

Fixed overhead cost is $32,300 per year. Fixed selling and administrative costs are $12,500 per year. Candyland sold 35,000 boxes last year.

Required:

1. What is the contribution margin per unit for a box of praline fudge? What is the contribution margin ratio?

2. How many boxes must be sold to break even? What is the break even sales revenue?

3. What was Candyland’s operating income last year?

4. What was the margin of safety?

5. Suppose that Candyland Inc. raises the price to $6.20 per box but anticipates a sales drop to 31,500 boxes. What will be the new break even point in units? Should Candyland raise the price? Explain.

carbex inc produces cutlery sets out of high quality wood and 274121

Carbex, Inc., produces cutlery sets out of high quality wood and steel. The company makes a standard cutlery set and a deluxe set and sells them to retail department stores throughout the country. The standard set sells for $60, and the deluxe set sells for $75. The variable expenses associated with each set are given below.



The company’s fixed expenses each month are:



Salespersons are paid on a commission basis to encourage them to be aggressive in their sales efforts. Mary Parsons, the financial vice president, watches sales commissions carefully and has noted that they have risen steadily over the last year. For this reason, she was shocked to find that even though sales have increased, profits for the current month—May—are down substantially from April. Sales, in sets, for the last two months are given below:



Required:

1. Prepare contribution format income statements for April and May. Use the following headings:



Place the fixed expenses only in the Total column. Do not show percentages for the fixed expenses.

2. Explain the difference in net operating incomes between the two months, even though the same total number of sets was sold in each month.

3. What can be done to the sales commissions to improve the sales mix?

a. Using April’s sales mix, what is the break even point in sales dollars?

b. Without doing any calculations, explain whether the break even points would be higher or lower with May’s sales mix than April’s salesmix.

carlyle lighting products produces two different types of lamps 274123

Carlyle Lighting Products produces two different types of lamps: a floor lamp and a desk lamp. Floor lamps sell for $30, and desk lamps sell for $20. The projected income statement for the coming year follows:

Sales ………………………………..$600,000

Less: Variable costs …………………400,000

Contribution margin ……………….$200,000

Less: Fixed costs ……………………150,000

Operating income …………………..$ 50,000

The owner of Carlyle estimates that 60 percent of the sales revenues will be produced by floor lamps and the remaining 40 percent by desk lamps. Floor lamps are also responsible for 60 percent of the variable expenses. Of the fixed expenses, one third are common to both products, and one half are directly traceable to the floor lamp product line.

Required:

1. Compute the sales revenue that must be earned for Carlyle to break even.

2. Compute the number of floor lamps and desk lamps that must be sold for Carlyle to break even.

3. Compute the degree of operating leverage for Carlyle Lighting Products. Now assume that the actual revenues will be 40 percent higher than the projected revenues. By what percentage will profits increase with this change in sales volume?

cheryl montoya picked up the phone and called her boss 274134

Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, the vice president of marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation: ?oWes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the president yesterday:’

?oWhat’s the problem???

?oThe president wanted to know the break even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out:’

?oI’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow up meeting at 9:00.??

Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners in its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:



Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptable numbers of customers.

The company has an extremely effective lean production system, so there are no beginning or ending work in process or finished goods inventories.

Required:

1. What is the company’s over all break even point in total sales dollars?

2. Of the total fixed costs of $400,000, $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely.

a. What is the break even point in units for each product?

b. If the company sells exactly the break even quantity of each product, what will be the overall profit of the company? Explain thisresult.

fiinance 308 422080

Which of the following statements is CORRECT?

a. If a firm has the highest price/earnings ratio of any firm in its industry, then, other things held constant, this suggests that the board of directors should fire the president. b. If a firm has the highest market/book ratio of any firm in its industry, then, other things held constant, this suggests that the board of directors should fire the president. c. Other things held constant, the higher a firm’s expected future growth rate, the lower its P/E ratio is likely to be. d. The higher the market/book ratio, then, other things held constant, the higher one would expect to find the Market Value Added (MVA). e. If a firm has a history of high Economic Value Added (EVA) numbers each year, and if investors expect this situation to continue, then its market/book ratio and MVA are both likely to be below average.

accounting 422107

Which of the following statements is true with regard to depreciation expense?

Choosing double declining balance over straight line will produce a greater total depreciation expense over the asset’s life.
Different companies in the same industry always depreciate similar assets by the same methods.
A company should use the depreciation method that best matches expense recognition with the use of the asset.
A company using straight line will show a smaller book value for assets than if the same company uses double declining balance.

accounting deprecitation journals 422119

The following transactions and adjusting entries were completed by a local delivery company called Super Swift. The company uses straight line depreciation for delivery vehicles, and double declining balance depreciation for buildings, and straight line amortization for franchise rights.

January 2, 2010

Paid $77,000 cash to purchase a small warehouse building near the airport. The building has an estimated life of 20 years, and a residual value of $20,000.

July 1, 2010

Paid $30,200 cash to purchase a delivery van. The van has an estimated useful life of five years, and a residual value of $7,200.

October 2, 2010

Paid $420 cash to paint a small office in the warehouse building.

October 13, 2010 Paid $170 cash to get the oil changed in the delivery van.
December 1, 2010

Paid $78,000 cash to UPS to begin operating Super Swift business as a franchise using the name The UPS Store. This franchise right expires in five years.

December 31, 2010

Recorded depreciation and amortization on the delivery van, warehouse building, and franchise right.

June 30, 2011

Sold the warehouse building for $65,725 cash. (Record the depreciation on the building prior to recording its disposal.)

December 31, 2011

Recorded depreciation on the delivery van and amortization on the franchise right. Determined that the franchise right was not impaired in value.

Give the journal entries required on each of the above dates

Jan. 2 (Click to select)Gain on disposalVehiclesCashEquipmentLandBuildingLoss on disposalFranchise rights
(Click to select)Gain on disposalLandCashVehiclesLoss on disposalFranchise rightsEquipmentBuilding
July 1 (Click to select)BuildingCashFranchise rightsLoss on disposalEquipmentVehiclesGain on disposalLand
(Click to select)Loss on disposalCashGain on disposalFranchise rightsEquipmentLandVehiclesBuilding
Oct 2 (Click to select)CashFranchise rightsNotes payableRepairs and maintenance expenseDepreciation expenseBuildingAccounts payableLand
(Click to select)Notes payableAccounts payableCashLandBuildingRepairs and maintenance expenseDepreciation expenseVehicles
Oct 13 (Click to select)Depreciation expenseAccounts payableRepairs and maintenance expenseFranchise rightsCashAmortization expenseAccumulated depreciationAccounts receivable
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciationAccounts receivableRepairs and maintenance expenseCashDepreciation expenseAccounts payableFranchise rightsAmortization expense
Dec 1 (Click to select)VehiclesLandNote payableBuildingDepreciation expenseFranchise rightsCashAccumulated depreciation
(Click to select)CashNote payableLandVehiclesBuildingDepreciation expenseAccumulated depreciationFranchise rights
Dec. 31 (Click to select)Accumulated depreciation vehiclesAmortization expenseCashDepreciation expenseFranchise rightsAccumulated depreciation bldg.Gain on disposal Loss on disposal
(Click to select)Gain on disposal CashFranchise rightsAccumulated depreciation vehiclesAmortization expenseAccumulated depreciation bldg.Loss on disposal Depreciation expense
(Click to select)Depreciation expenseLoss on disposalGain on disposal Amortization expenseCashAccumulated depreciation vehiclesFranchise rightsAccumulated depreciation bldg.
(Click to select)Depreciation expenseAccumulated depreciation bldg.Accumulated depreciation vehiclesGain on disposal Franchise rightsCashLoss on disposalAmortization expense
(Click to select)Depreciation expenseCashAmortization expenseAccumulated depreciation bldg.Gain on disposal Franchise rightsLoss on disposalAccumulated depreciation vehicles
2011
June 30 (Click to select)Accounts receivableAccumulated depreciation vehiclesAccumulated depreciation bldg.Depreciation expenseLoss on disposalAmortization expenseFranchise rightsBuilding
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciation bldg.Loss on disposalFranchise rightsAccumulated depreciation vehiclesBuildingDepreciation expenseAccounts receivableAmortization expense
June 30 (Click to select)Loss on disposalFranchise rightsVehiclesImpairment lossGain on disposal CashAccumulated depreciation bldg.Accumulated depreciation vehicles
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciation bldg.Accumulated depreciation vehiclesGain on disposal Franchise rightsCashVehiclesLoss on disposalImpairment loss
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciation vehiclesImpairment lossGain on disposal VehiclesAccumulated depreciation bldg.Franchise rightsCashLoss on disposal
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciation bldg.Accounts payableCashLoss on disposalAmortization expenseBuildingDepreciation expenseAccounts receivable
Dec. 31 (Click to select)Impairment lossFranchise rightsAmortization expenseCashDepreciation expenseAccumulated depreciation bldg.BuildingAccumulated depreciation vehicles
(Click to select)Amortization expenseDepreciation expenseAccumulated depreciation bldg.Franchise rightsAccumulated depreciation vehiclesBuildingCashImpairment loss
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciation bldg.BuildingAccumulated depreciation vehiclesCashFranchise rightsAmortization expenseImpairment lossDepreciation expense
(Click to select)BuildingImpairment lossAccumulated depreciation bldg.Amortization expenseCashDepreciation expenseAccumulated depreciation vehiclesFranchise rights

show work on how to get to answers for positive ratings

accounting 2302 422128

Folson Company is planning to produce 4,250,000 speakers for the coming year. Actual production was 4,000,000 speakers. Each speaker requires 0.80 direct labor hours per unit. Predetermined overhead rates are calculated using expected production, measured in direct labor hours. The budgeted variable overhead for the coming year is $680,000. The actual variable overhead incurred was $714,000. The applied variable overhead for the year is Answer

a. $800,000.
b. $714,000.
c. $640,000.
d. $680,000.
e. none of these.

hospital accounting 422148

ØEach question needs beanswered in 1.5 pages typewritten, double spaced 10 pt. type.

Ø Please complete 4 out of 6 questions. All responses must be in essay form. In your response please address all facets of the question being posed. While your notes should provide ample information to thoroughly answer each question, feel free to use other reference sources.

1.Discuss the role of the AICPA in establishing performance standards in hospital accounting. Give specific examples of their efforts to revise and improve the quality of accounting practice in health care organizations.

2.Although Sarbanes Oxley compliance is currently voluntary for non profit hospitals Bigalke and Roach (2005) suggest that all hospitals prepare an implementation plan to ensure GAAP guided accounting practices and transparent financial reporting. Based on your course readings and investigation, provide a summary of an implementation plan that you would recommend to enhance accurate accounting practice in regards to improved internal controls, financial statements, policy making and full disclosure by corporate officers and board members.

3.Interim financial statements provide information about financial performance at the time the statements are prepared.Why is this important to internal decision makers, vendors and interested citizens? How does the posting of expense accruals improve the accuracy of interim statements?

4.What is the function of hospital accounting? How does it serve the needs of internal and external stakeholders of the hospital? Provide detailed examples to support your position.

5.Describe in detail how the accounting information processing steps from journalizing to the preparation of financial statements with closing entries. Show at each stephow the processmaintains the integrityof the basic accounting equation :

Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity(Net Assets)

6.How do the accounting practices of tax exempt and non tax exempt health care corporations differ in recording the distribution of operating profits to the “owners” of the corporation?

discuss the role of the aicpa in establishing performance standards in hospital acco 422161

? Each question needs be answered in 1.5 pages typewritten, double spaced 10 pt. type. ? Please complete 4 out of 6 questions. All responses must be in essay form. In your response please address all facets of the question being posed. While your notes should provide ample information to thoroughly answer each question, feel free to use other reference sources. 1. Discuss the role of the AICPA in establishing performance standards in hospital accounting. Give specific examples of their efforts to revise and improve the quality of accounting practice in health care organizations. 2. Although Sarbanes Oxley compliance is currently voluntary for non profit hospitals Bigalke and Roach (2005) suggest that all hospitals prepare an implementation plan to ensure GAAP guided accounting practices and transparent financial reporting. Based on your course readings and investigation, provide a summary of an implementation plan that you would recommend to enhance accurate accounting practice in regards to improved internal controls, financial statements, policy making and full disclosure by corporate officers and board members. 3. Interim financial statements provide information about financial performance at the time the statements are prepared. Why is this important to internal decision makers, vendors and interested citizens? How does the posting of expense accruals improve the accuracy of interim statements? 4. What is the function of hospital accounting? How does it serve the needs of internal and external stakeholders of the hospital? Provide detailed examples to support your position. 5. Describe in detail how the accounting information processing steps from journalizing to the preparation of financial statements with closing entries. Show at each step how the process maintains the integrity of the basic accounting equation : Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity(Net Assets) 6. How do the accounting practices of tax exempt and non tax exempt health care corporations differ in recording the distribution of operating profits to the “owners” of the corporation?

Attachments:

flexible budget variance 422165

Fort Worth Company is a printer and binder of specialized booklets and pamphlets. Last year, the company’s sales manager estimated sales to be 10,000 booklets and pamphlets combined. The sales manager also estimated that the items would retail for approximately $10 each. Various production costs, including direct and indirect material, direct and indirect labor, and variable overhead, were estimated to total $50,000, while fixed costs were estimated to be $20,000.

During the year, Fort Worth’s unit sales equaled its production of 12,000 units. Because of changing market conditions”specifically, competition”the average selling price fell to just $9.50 per unit. There were increased variable costs as well that resulted in average per unit variable costs of $6. At the end of the year, the company’s controller accumulated fixed costs and found them to be $21,000.

Required:

If required, round your answers to two decimal places. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

Prepare a report to show the difference between the actual contribution margin and the budgeted contribution margin per the static budget.

Fort Worth Company
Static Budget Difference Actual Results
Units sold & produced
Sales price per unit $ $
Sales revenue $ $ SelectOverUnderItem 7 $
Less: variable costs SelectOverUnderItem 11
Contribution margin $ $ SelectOverUnderItem 15 $

Then, compare the actual contribution margin and the budgeted contribution margin per the flexible budget.

Fort Worth Company
Flexible Budget Flexible Budget Variance Actual Results
Units sold
Sales price $ $
Sales revenue $ $ SelectOverUnderItem 23 $
Less: variable costs SelectOverUnderItem 27
Contribution margin $ $ SelectOverUnderItem 31 $

financial accounting help for statement of cash flows 422216

Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are all cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

GALLEY CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2011 and 2010
2011 2010
Assets
Cash $ 168,000 $ 130,000
Accounts receivable 83,000 73,000
Merchandise inventory 620,000 515,000
Equipment 335,000 273,000
Accum. depreciation”Equipment (155,000) (102,000)




Total assets $ 1,051,000 $ 889,000








Liabilities and Equity
Accounts payable $ 152,000 $ 114,000
Income taxes payable 22,000 19,000
Common stock, $2 par value 600,000 570,000
Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock 200,000 155,000
Retained earnings 77,000 31,000




Total liabilities and equity $ 1,051,000 $ 889,000









GALLEY CORPORATION
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
Sales $ 1,793,000
Cost of goods sold 1,088,000


Gross profit 705,000
Operating expenses
Depreciation expense $ 53,000
Other expenses 497,000 550,000




Income before taxes 155,000
Income taxes expense 24,000


Net income $ 131,000





Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions
a.

Purchased equipment for $62,000 cash.

b.

Issued 15,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share.

c.

Declared and paid $85,000 in cash dividends.

Required:

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its cash inflows and cash outflows from operating activities according to the indirect method. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

GALLEY CORPORATION
Statement of Cash Flows
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
Cash flows from operating activities
$
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net
cash provided by operating activities:

Net cash operating activities $
Cash flows from investing activities
Cash flows from financing activities

Net cash financing activities

$
Cash balance at beginning of 2011

Cash balance at end of 2011 $



accounting 422233

Gemini, LLC, invested $1 million in a state of the art information system that promises to reduce processing costs for its purchasing activities by $120,000 per year for the by Savings Explorer” href=”http://sjc.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do#” class=”c1″>next 10 years. The company will scrap its old information system and will receive no money as a consequence. The new system will be depreciated over 10 years at a rate of $100,000 per year. Gemini’s tax rate is 30 percent, and the company has a 7 percent after taxcost of capital.

Required:

What is the after tax net present value of Gemini’s new information system? Use thetime value of money charts as needed for your calculations. If required, use a minus sign to indicate a negative net present value. Do not round intermediate amounts. Round your final answer to two decimal places.

please check my answer for me and help on the ones i did not answer 422250

In general, a CPA will satisfy his professional responsibilities under the Statement on Standards for Tax Services when recommending a tax return position if he complies with the standards imposed by the applicable tax authority. (Points : 5) True
False

2. Taxpayers are generally allowed to claim deductions for expenditures unless a specific tax provision indicates the expenditure is not deductible. (Points : 5)

True
False

3. Joanna received $60,000 compensation from her employer, the value of her stock in ABC company appreciated by $5,000 during the year (but she did not sell any of the stock), she received $30,000 of life insurance proceeds from the death of her husband. What is the amount of Joanna’s gross income from these items? (Points : 5)

$60,000
$65,000
$95,000
$97,000

4. Sally received $50,000 of compensation from her employer and she received $400 interest from a corporate bond. What is the amount of Sally’s gross income from these items? (Points : 5)

$0
$400
$50,000
$50,400

5. The standard deduction amount for married filing separately taxpayers (MFS) is less than the standard deduction amount for married filing jointly taxpayers.

(Points : 5)

True
False

6. Margaret was issued a $150 speeding ticket. This is: (Points : 5)

A tax because payment is required by law
A tax because the payment is not related to any specific benefit received from the government agency collecting the ticket
Not a tax because it is considered a fine intended to punish illegal behavior
A tax because it is imposed by a government agency
Not a tax because Margaret could have avoided payment if she did not speed

7. If a taxpayer is due a refund, she does not have to file a tax return. (Points : 5)

True
False

8. The standard deduction amount varies by filing status. (Points : 5)

True
False

9. Which of the following statements regarding realized income is true? (Points : 5)

Taxpayers need not include realized income in gross income unless a specific provision of the tax code requires them to do so.
Realized income requires some type of transaction or exchange with a second party.
Once income is realized it may not be excluded from gross income.
None of the above statements is true.

10. Rowanda could not settle with the IRS at the appeals conference. If she wants to litigate the issue but does not have sufficient funds to pay the proposed tax deficiency, Rowanda should litigate in the: (Points : 5)

U.S. District Court.
U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals.
U.S. Court of Federal Claims.
U.S. Tax Court.
None of the above.

11. If Marc requests an extension to file his tax return, the latest he could file his return without penalty is: (Points : 5)

September 15th.
October 15th.
August 15th.
November 15th.
None of the above.

12. Dominic earned $1,500 this year, and his employer withheld $200 of federal income tax from his salary. Assuming that Dominic will have zero tax liability this year, he: (Points : 5)

is required to file a tax return.
is not required to file a tax return but should file a return anyway.
is required to file a tax return but should not file because he owes no tax.
is not required to file a tax return and should not file a return.
None of the above.

13. Anna is a qualifying child of her parents. However, she was recently married. Anna and her husband filed a joint return. If they had filed separately, Anna would have owed no taxes, though her husband would have owed just $5. Because Anna herself owed no taxes, her parents can still claim her as a dependent. (Points : 5)

True
False

14. Which of the following is not a factor that determines whether a taxpayer is required to file a tax return? (Points : 5)

Filing status
Taxpayer’s gross income
Taxpayer’s employment
Taxpayer’s age

15. Linsey has a very complex tax return and it looks like she will not be able to file her tax return by its due date. When is her tax return due? What are Linsey’s options for paying her tax due and filing her tax return this year? What are the consequences if Linsey does not file or pay her tax timely? Be specific. (Points : 10)
Her tax return is due on April 15th. Any individual or corporation unable to file a tax return by the original due date can, by that same deadline, request a six month extension to file, which is granted automatically by the IRS. An extension allows the taxpayer to delay filing a tax return but does not extend the due date for tax payments. Thus, when a taxpayer files an extension, she must estimate how much tax will be owed. If a taxpayer fails to pay the entire balance of tax owed by the original due date of the tax return, the IRS charges the taxpayer interest on the underpayment from the due date of the return until the taxpayer pays the tax. As you might guess, the IRS imposes penalties on taxpayers failing to comply with the tax law. In the case of failure to file a tax return, the penalty equals 5 percent of the tax due for each month (or partial month) that the return is late. However, the maximum penalty is generally 25 percent of the tax owed, and the failure to file penalty does not apply if the taxpayer owes no tax.

16. Marc, a single taxpayer, earns $60,000 in taxable income and $5,000 in interest from an investment in city of Birmingham Bonds. Using the U.S. tax rate schedule for year 2012, what is his effective tax rate (rounded)? Be sure to show all work to receive full credit.

(Points : 10)
60,000 35,350 = 24,650 24,560

17. The Tanakas filed jointly in 2012. They reported $16,000 of itemized deductions and they have two children, one of whom qualifies as their dependent. The 2012 standard deduction amount is $11,900 and each exemption is $3,800. What is the total amount of from AGI deductions they are allowed to claim on their 2012 tax return? Show all work to receive full credit. (Points : 10)

accounting for managers 125 422270

Accounting for Managers 125

Document Preview:

? HYPERLINK “http://coursesite.umtweb.edu/bin/common/course.pl?course_id=_846_1” t “content” ?ACCT125 1. ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS (ACCT125 1)? > TAKE ASSESSMENT: EXAM 1????Take Assessment: Exam 1 Top of Form ?? Name?Exam 1 ??Instructions???Multiple Attempts?This Test allows 2 attempts. This is attempt number 2. ??Force Completion?This Test can be saved and resumed later. ???? ? Question Completion Status: ??1?2?3?4?5?6?7?8?9?10?11?12?13?14?15?16?17?18?19?20??21?22?23?24?25?26?27?28?29?30?31?32?33?34?35?36?37?38?39?40??41?42?43?44?45?46?47?48?49?50?51?52?53?54?55?56?57?58?59?60??61?62?63?64?65?66?67?68?69?70?71?72?73?74?75?76?77?78?79?80??81?82?83?84?85?86?87?88?89?90?91?92?93?94?95?96?97?98?99?100?????????????????????????   Question 1 ?1 points   ?? HYPERLINK “javascript:saveItem(‘_11691462_1′,’1’)” ?Save?   ?? ?Stockholders’ Equity will be reduced by all of the following accounts EXCEPT: ??????? ??Revenues ????Expenses ????Dividends ????All of the above reduce Stockholders’ Equity. ????????   Question 2 ?1 points   ?? HYPERLINK “javascript:saveItem(‘_11691463_1′,’2’)” ?Save?   ?? ?For EFG Co., the transaction “Cash sales to customers” would ??????? ??increase total assets. ????decrease total assets. ????have no effect on total assets. ????decrease stockholders’ equity. ???????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

differential analysis and product pricing 422309

Gilroy Corporation is considering new equipment. The equipment can be purchased from an overseas supplier for $3,200. The freight and installation costs for the equipment are $640. If purchased, annual repairs and maintenance are estimated to be $400 per year over the four year useful life of the machine. Alternatively, Gilroy can lease the machine from a domestic supplier for $1,400 per year for four years, with no additional costs.

Prepare a differential analysis dated October 3, 2012 to determine whether Gilroy should lease (Alternative 1) or purchase (Alternative 2) the machine. (Hint: This is a “lease or buy” decision, which must be analyzed from the perspective of the equipment user, as opposed to the equipment owner.) If an amount is zero, enter zero “0”.

Lease Machine (Alternative 1)

Costs:

Purchase Price

Freight and Installation

Repair and Maintenance (4 years)

Lease (4 years)

Income (loss)

Buy Machine (Alternative 2)

Costs:

Purchase Price

Freight and Installation

Repair and Maintenance (4 years)

Lease (4 years)

Income (loss)

Differential Income (Alternative 3)

Costs:

Purchase Price

Freight and Installation

Repair and Maintenance (4 years)

Lease (4 years)

Income (loss)

equivalent units of production 422313

Units of production data for the two departments of Continental Cable and Wire Company for April of the current fiscal year are as follows:
drawing department winding department

working process april 1 5400 units 40 % completed 2200 units 70 % completed
completed and transfer to next
processing department during april 74000 units 73200 untis
work inprocess april 30 4100 units, 55 % complted 3000 units 15 % completed

a. If all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production, determine the direct materials and conversion equivalent units of production for April
for the Drawing Department. Enter all amounts as positive numbers. If an amount is zero or a blank, enter in 0.
Equivalent untis
direct materials conversion

Q ) invontory in process april 1 ___________ _________
Q ) transfer to winding department in april ____________ ____________

b)If all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production, determine the direct materials and conversion equivalent units of production for April for the Winding Department. Enter all amounts as positive numbers. If an amount is zero or a blank, enter in 0.
direct materials conversion
Q ) invontory in process april 1 __________ ___________ ???
Q) transfer to finishing goods in april ___________ _______________

foreign currency exchange rates 422322

Ginvold Co. began operating a subsidiary in a foreign country on January 1, 2011 by acquiring all of the common stock for A?§50,000. This subsidiary immediately borrowed A?§120,000 on a five year note with ten percent interest payable annually beginning on January 1, 2012. A building was then purchased for A?§170,000 on January 1, 2011. This property had a ten year anticipated life and no salvage value and was to be depreciated using the straight line method. The building was immediately rented for three years to a group of local doctors for A?§6,000 per month. By year end, payments totaling A?§60,000 had been received. On October 1, A?§5,000 were paid for a repair made on that date and it was the only transaction of this kind for the year. A cash dividend of A?§6,000 was transferred back to Ginvold on December 31, 2011. The functional currency for the subsidiary was the stickle. Currency exchange rates were as follows:

January 1, 2011 A?§1 = $2.40

October 1, 2011 A?§1 = $2.22

December 31, 2011 A?§1 = $2.28

Average for 2011 A?§1 = $2.16

1. Prepare an income statement for this subsidiary in stickles and then translate these amounts to U.S. dollars.

2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for this subsidiary in stickles and then translate these amounts into U.S. dollars.

3. Prepare a balance sheet for this subsidiary in stickles and then translate these amounts into U.S. dollars.

4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for this subsidiary in stickles and then translate these amounts into U.S. dollars

accounting reporting 422332

You have been given the following information for Ethan Company as of June 1, 2010. Ethan Company purchased a parcel of land and then incurred specific costs for the construction of a new building. Below is a list of these costs: Cost of Parking Lot and gates=$14,000 Cost of filling the building site= $10,000 Legal Fees to buy land= $2,000 Cost of driveway= $9,000 Property Taxes for Jan 1,2010 to June 1, 2010= $5,000 Title Insurance= $2,000 Interest on the construction loan= $13,000 Proceeds from the sale of salvage materials= ($1500) Purchase price of land= $200,000 Cost of the building construction= $650,000 Cost of razing building on lot= $9,500 Cost of grading the lot= $5,000 On April 25, 2010, Bullseye Company purchased all of the outstanding common stock of Vista Company, paying $14,000,000. The book values and fair values of Vista’s assets and liabilities acquired are shown below in dollar amounts: Accounts Book Value Fair Value Accounts Receivables $1,900,000 $1,725,000 Inventories $2,800,000 $4,000,000 Accounts Payable $2,000,000 $2,000,000 Property, Plant and Equipment $8,000,000 $12,625,000 Bonds Payable $4,600,000 $4,225,000

cost accounting 422360

Glade Company produces a single product. The costs of producing and selling a single unit of this product at the company’s current activity level of 8,500 units per month are:

Direct Material: $1.80 ; Direct Labor: $2.00 ; variable manufacturing overhead: $.60 ; Fixed Manufacturing overhead: $4.35 ; Variable selling and manufacturing expenses:$1 ; Fixed selling and manufacturing expenses: $1.

The normal selling price is $23 per unit. The company’s capacity is 10,300 units per month. An order has been received from a potential customer overseas for 1,800 units at a price of $20.00 per unit. This order would not affect regular sales.

Required:
1.

If the order is accepted, by how much will monthly profits increase or decrease? (The order would not change the company’s total fixed costs.)

2.

Assume the company has 500 units of this product left over from last year that are inferior to the current model. The units must be sold through regular channels at reduced prices. What unit cost is relevant for establishing a minimum selling price for these units?

accounting 422395

Gordon knits wool caps for sale at the local ski resorts. He prepared a budget for the production and sale of 150 wool caps. Unfortunately, Gordon fell ill with a bad case of the flu and was able to make and sell only 125 wool caps. Here is Gordon’s budget:

Sales Revenue 1,500.00

Variable costs:

Direct Material (yarn) 375.00

Direct Labor 750.00

Commission to Resort 112.50

Fixed costs 75.00

Net income 187.50

Prepare a flexible budget for Gordon based on the production and sale of 125 wool caps. Input all amounts as positive value. If required, round your final answers to two decimal places. Do not round your intermediate calculations.

calculate balance in the investment account thank you 422422

Grant, Inc. acquired 30% of South Company’s common stock for $350,000 on January 1, 2011. During 2011, South Company reported a

net income of $120,000 and paid dividends totaling $30,000. For 2012, South Company paid 60% of its net income to stockholders

as dividends. On December 31, 2012, Grant, Inc. sold
one half of its investment in South Company for $250,000 cash. Grant, Inc.

reported a gain from selling one half of its investment in South Company on its 2012 income statement (note the amount of the

gain has been intentionally omitted from the given information). Calculate the
balance in the investment in South Company account reported on Grant, Inc.’s December 31, 2011 balance sheet.

Assume the total increase to Grant, Inc.’s 2012 net income resulting from its investment in South Company’s stock was $103,500.

Calculate the
net income reported by South Company in 2012. Do not use decimals in your answer.

Thank you!

accounting question 422451

Greenland Sports, Inc. has been asked to submit a bid to the National Hockey League on supplying 1,000 pairs of professional quality skates. The cost per pair of skates has been determined as follows:

Direct materials $80

Direct Labor $60

Variable Overhead $30

Fixed overhead (allocated) $20

Other non manufacturing costs associated with each pair of skates are:

Variable selling cost (commission) $25

Fixed selling and administrative cost $10

Assume the commission on the sale of skates to the National Hockey League would be reduced to $15 per pair and that available production capacity exists to produce the 1,000 pairs of skates. The lowest price the firm can bid is some price greater than:

A. $185
B. $190
C. $215
D. $225

intro to business 422456

The grid used for identifying the best strategy for competing in a global marketplace measures what two dimensions? (Points : 4)

Pressures for global integration and pressures for local responsiveness
Pressure for local interaction and pressures for global responsiveness
Financial viability and employee satisfaction
Employee satisfaction and management credibility
Pressures for global systems capacity and pressures for local financial success

7. The trend away from using expatriates in top management positions is especially apparent in companies trying to create a(n) __________ culture. (Points : 4)

multinational
transnational
international
global
The trend is equally evident in all of the above structures.

need help with accounting 421534

Fenwick Corporation’s manufacturing and finished goods warehouse facilities burned to the ground on January 31. The loss was fully covered by insurance. The insurance company wanted to know the cost of the inventories destroyed in the fire. The company’s accountants gathered the following information:

Direct materials purchased in January $ 160,000
Work in Process Inventory, January 1 34,000
Materials Inventory, January 1 16,000
Finished Goods Inventory, January 1 30,000
Direct labor costs incurred in January 190,000
Prime costs charged to jobs in January 294,000
Cost of finished goods available for sale in January 450,000
Sales revenue earned in January 500,000
Gross profit as a percentage of January sales 25 %
Manufacturing overhead applied to jobs in January as a percentage of total conversion costs 60 %

Assume that actual manufacturing overhead was exactly equal to the amount applied to production at the time of the fire.

a.

Compute the cost of materials inventory (assume materials inventory is comprised entirely of direct materials) lost in the fire. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Materials inventory $
b. Compute the cost of work in process inventory lost in the fire. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Work in process inventory $
c. Compute the cost of finished goods inventory lost in the fire. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Finished goods inventory $

accounting 421567

Financial data for Bridger, Inc., for last year are as follows:

Bridger, Inc.
Balance Sheet
Beginning
Balance
Ending
Balance
Assets
Cash $ 132,000 $ 128,000
Accounts receivable 347,000 485,000
Inventory 576,000 487,000
Plant and equipment, net 855,000 850,000
Investment in Brier Company 399,000 426,000
Land (undeveloped) 247,000 251,000




Total assets $ 2,556,000 $ 2,627,000








Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 385,000 $ 336,000
Long term debt 1,019,000 1,019,000
Stockholders’ equity 1,152,000 1,272,000




Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 2,556,000 $ 2,627,000









Bridger, Inc.
Income Statement
Sales $ 5,018,000
Operating expenses 4,164,940


Net operating income 853,060
Interest and taxes:
Interest expense $ 119,000
Tax expense 208,000 327,000



Net income $ 526,060





The company paid dividends of $406,060 last year. The Af?cAc‚¬A??oInvestment in Brier CompanyAf?cAc‚¬ on the balance sheet represents an investment in the stock of another company.

Required:
1.

Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment (ROI) for last year. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 1 decimal place.)

Margin %
Turnover
ROI %

2. The board of directors of Bridger, Inc., has set a minimum required return of 19%. What was the company’s residual income last year?

Residual income $

step by step instructions 421584

Financial statements for Pracht Company appear below:

Pracht Company
Statement of Financial Position
December 31, Year 2 and Year 1
(in thousands of dollars)
Year 2 Year 1
Current assets:
Cash and marketable securities $ 180 $ 170
Accounts receivable, net 130 100
Inventory 150 160
Prepaid expenses 50 60




Total current assets 510 490
Noncurrent assets:
Plant and equipment, net 1,880 1,800




Total assets $ 2,390 $ 2,290








Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $ 90 $ 140
Accrued liabilities 110 80
Notes payable, short term 140 130




Total current liabilities 340 350
Noncurrent liabilities:
Bonds payable 490 500




Total liabilities 830 850




Stockholders’ equity:
Preferred stock, $10 par value, 15% 100 100
Common stock, $10 par value 140 140
Additional paid in capital common stock 200 200
Retained earnings 1,120 1,000




Total stockholders’ equity 1,560 1,440




Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 2,390 $ 2,290









Pracht Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2
(dollars in thousands)
Sales (all on account) $ 1,650
Cost of goods sold 1,165



Gross margin 485
Selling and administrative expense 165



Net operating income 320
Interest expense 50



Net income before taxes 270
Income taxes (30%) 81



Net income $ 189







Dividends during Year 2 totaled $29 thousand, of which $15 thousand were preferred dividends. The market price of a share of common stock on December 31, Year 2 was $150.

Required:

a.

Compute the earnings per share (of common stock) for Year 2. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

b.

Compute the price earnings ratio for Year 2.(Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

c.

Compute the dividend payout ratio for Year 2.(Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

d.

Compute the dividend yield ratio for Year 2.(Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

e.

Compute the return on total assets for Year 2. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

f.

Return on common stockholders’ equity for Year 2. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

g.

Compute the book value per share for Year 2.(Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

h.

Compute the working capital for Year 2.(Input your answer in thousands of dollars. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

i.

Compute the current ratio for Year 2. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

j.

Compute the acid test ratio for Year 2. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

k.

Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

l.

Compute the average collection period for Year 2. (Use 365 days in a year. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

m.

Compute the inventory turnover for Year 2. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

n.

Compute the average sale period for Year 2. (Use 365 days in a year. Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)

p.

Compute the debt to equity ratio for Year 2. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

managerial accounting 421594

Finestra Corporation produces a single product that it currently sells for $10. Fixed expenses are $120,000 for the year and variable expenses are $6 per unit. In addition, Finestra’s salespersons are paid a commission of 10% of their sales.

A customer has just approached Finestra to make a special, one time purchase of 10,000 units. These units would not be sold by the salespeople, and therefore no commission would have to be paid. The price Finestra would have to charge on this special order to earn an additional profit of $40,000 is: Question 13 options:

$9.00 per unit
$10.00 per unit
$5.00 per unit
$11.20 per unit

foggy mountain company case study 421671

Foggy Mountain Company manufactures several styles of banjos. Management estimates that during the second quarter of the current year, the company will be operating at 80 percentof normal capacity. Because Foggy Mountain wants to increase utilization of the plant, the company has decided to consider special orders for its products.

Foggy Mountain has just received inquires from a number of companies concerning the possibility of a special order and has narrowed the decision to two companies. The first inquiry is from CCR Company, which would like to market a banjo very similar to the one of Foggy Mountain’s. The CCR banjo would be marketed under CCR’s own label. CCR has offered Foggy Mountain $57.50 per banjo for 20,000 banjos to be shipped by June 1st. The cost data for the Foggy Mountain banjo are as follows: Regular selling price per banjo is $90.00. Costs Per unit: Raw Material is $25.00. Direct Labor(5 hours @ $6) is $30.00. Overhead (2.5 . machine hours @ $4.00) is $10.00. Total Costs is $65.00.

According to the specifications provided by CCR, the banjo that the company wants requires less expensive raw material. Consequently, the raw material would cost only $22 per banjo. Foggy Mountain has estimated that all remaining costs would not change.

The second special order was submitted by Seager & Buffet Company for 7,500 banjos at $75 per banjo. These banjos would be marketed under the Seager & Buffet label and also would be shipped by June 1st. However, the Seager & Buffet model is different from any banjo in the Foggy Mountain product line. The estimated per unit costs are as follows: Raw Material is $32.50. Direct Labor(5 hours @ $6) is $30.00. Overhead(5 machine hours @ $4) is $20.00. Total Costs are $82.50.

In addition, Foggy Mountain would incur $15,000 in additional setup costs and would have to purchase a $22,500 special machine to manufacture these banjos; this machine would be discarded once the special order has been completed.

The Foggy Mountain manufacturing capabilities are limited in the total machine hours available. The plant capacity under normal operations is 900,000 machine hours per year, or 75,000 machine hours per month. The budgeted fixed overhead for the year is $2,160,000. All manufacturing overhead costs are applied to production on the basis of machine hours at $4 per hour. Foggy Mountain will have the entire second quarter to work on the special orders. Management does not expect any repeat sales to be generated from either special order. Company practice precludes Foggy Mountain from subcontracting any portion of an order when special orders are not expected to generate repeat sales.

Cannot use excel and MUST SHOW work

A) What is the excess capacity of machine hours available in the second quarter?

B) What is the variable overhead rate per machine hour?

C) Based on the preceding information and your analysis, would you accept CCR’s offer?

D) What is the unit contribution margin per banjo for the Seager & Buffet order?

E) What is the actual gain (loss) incurred by accepting Seager & Buffet’s offer?

managerial accounting 421681

The following accounts will be used in this problem:

A. Raw materials inventory

B. Accounts payable

C. Cost of goods sold

D. Work in process inventory

E. Manufacturing overhead

F. Wages and salaries expense

G. Accumulated depreciation

H. Depreciation expense

I. Finished goods inventory

J. Wages and salaries payable

K. Prepaid insurance

L. Insurance expense

Required: Enter identifying letters in the blanks below to indicate the accounts debited and credited under a job order costing system for each of the following summary transactions:

Debit Credit

1 Insurance expired on the factory building.

2 Cost of goods sold is recorded.

3 Materials are purchased on account.

4 Direct labor cost is incurred.

5 Cost of goods manufactured is recorded.

6 Salaries are recorded for the sales staff.

7 Depreciation is recorded on the factory building

8 Materials are placed into production.

9 Manufacturing overhead is assigned to units of product.

Hirschman Corporation has provided the following data for the month of April:

Inventories Beginning Ending

Raw materials……………………………………… $ 21,000 $ 35,000

Work in process……………………………………… 17,000 19,000

Finished goods………………………………………. 46,000 38,000

Additional information:

Raw materials purchases…………………………………………………………. $ 76,000

Direct labor cost………………………………………………………………………. 81,000

Manufacturing overhead cost incurred………………………………………… 42,000

Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead cost incurred…… 6,000

Manufacturing overhead cost applied to Work in Process………………… 44,000

Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold in good form.

factory overhead volume variance 421770

The following data is given for the Bahia Company:
Budgeted production 1,000 units
Actual production 980 units
Materials:
Standard price per pound $2.00
Standard pounds per completed unit 12
Actual pounds purchased and used in production 11,800
Actual price paid for materials $23,000
Labor:
Standard hourly labor rate $14 per hour
Standard hours allowed per completed unit 4.5
Actual labor hours worked 4,560
Actual total labor costs $62,928
Overhead:
Actual and budgeted fixed overhead $27,000
Standard variable overhead rate $3.50 per standard labor hour
Actual variable overhead costs $15,500
Overhead is applied on standard labor hours. The factory overhead volume variance is:
a. $65U
b. $540U
c. $540F
d. $65

Please provide explanation with answer

the direct labor time variance is 421775

The following data is given for the Harry Company:

Budgeted production 26,000 units

Actual production 27,500 units

Materials:

Standard price/ounce $6.50

Standard ouncese per completed unit 8

Actual ounces purchased and used in production 228,000

Actual price paid for materials $1,504,800

Labor:

Standard hourly rate $22 per hour

Standard hours allowed per completed unit 6.6

Actual labor hours worked 183,000

Actual total labor costs $4,020,000

Overhead:

Actual and budgeted fixed overhead $1,029,600

Standard variable overhead rate $24.50 per standard labor hour

Actual variable overhead costs $4,520,000

Overhead is applied on standard labor hours.

The direct labor time variance is:

a) 6,000 favorable

b) 6,000 unfavorable

c) 33,000 unfavorable

d) 33,000 favorable

managerial accounting 421802

The following data relate to the operations of Picanuy Corporation, a wholesale distributor of consumer goods:

Current assets as of December 31:
Cash $ 6,300
Accounts receivable $ 36,120
Inventory $ 10,780
Buildings and equipment, net $ 119,200
by Browse to Save”>Accounts payable $ 32,730
Capital stock $ 100,000
Retained earnings $ 39,670

a. The gross margin is 30% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 70% of sales.)
b. Actual and budgeted sales data are as follows:

December (actual) $60,200
January $77,000
February $84,100
March $85,500
April $62,100

c.

Sales are 40% for cash and 60% on credit. Credit sales are collected in the month following sale. The accounts receivable at December 31 are the result of December credit sales.

d. Each month’s ending inventory should equal 20% of the following month’s budgeted cost of goods sold.
e.

One quarter of a month’s inventory purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other three quarters is paid for in the following month. The accounts payable at December 31 are the result of December purchases of inventory.

f.

Monthly expenses are as follows: commissions, $12,750; rent, $2,300; other expenses (excluding depreciation), 8% of sales. Assume that these expenses are paid monthly. Depreciation is $3,170 for the quarter and includes depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter.

g. Equipment will be acquired for cash: $3,100 in January and $8,250 in February.
h.

Management would like to maintain a minimum cash balance of $5,000 at the end of each month. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow and repay in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month, up to a total loan balance of $50,000. The by Browse to Save”>interest rate on these loans is 1% per month, and for simplicity, we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.

by Browse to Save”>

Required:
Using the data above:
1. by Browse to Save”>Complete the following schedule: (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Schedule of Expected Cash Collections
January February March Quarter
Cash sales $30,800 $ $ $
Credit sales 36,120

Total collections $66,920 $ $ $



2.

Complete the following: (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round the “Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements Af?cAc‚¬” Merchandise Purchases” answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Merchandise Purchases Budget
January February March Quarter
Budgeted cost of goods sold $53,900 * $ $ $
Add desired ending inventory 11,774 Af?cAc‚¬

Total needs 65,674
Less beginning inventory 10,780

Required purchases $54,894 $ $ $



*$77,000 sales AfA?” 70% = $53,900.
Af?cAc‚¬ $84,100 AfA?” 70% AfA?” 20% = $11,774.

Schedule of Expected Cash DisbursementsAf?cAc‚¬”Merchandise Purchases
January February March Quarter
December purchases $ 32,730.00 * $ $ $ 32,730.00
January purchases 13,723.50 41,170.50 54,894.00
February purchases
March purchases

Total disbursements $ 46,453.50 $ $ $



*Beginning balance of the accounts payable.

3. Complete the following schedule: (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Schedule of Expected Cash DisbursementsAf?cAc‚¬”Selling and Administrative Expenses
January February March Quarter
Commissions $12,750 $ $ $
Rent 2,300
Other expenses 6,160

Total disbursements $21,210 $ $ $



4.

Complete the following cash budget: (Borrow and repay in increments of $1,000. Input all amounts as positive values except cash deficiency, repayments and interest which should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Picanuy Corporation
Cash Budget
January February March Quarter
Cash balance, beginning $ 6,300.00 $ $ $
Add cash collections 66,920.00

Total cash available 73,220.00

Less cash disbursements:
For inventory 46,453.50
For operating expenses 21,210.00
For equipment 3,100.00

Total cash disbursements 70,763.50

Excess (deficiency) of cash 2,456.50

Financing:
Borrowings
Repayments
Interest

Total financing

Cash balance, ending $ $ $ $



5.

Prepare an absorption costing income statement for the quarter ended March 31. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Picanuy Corporation
Income Statement
For the Quarter Ended March 31
$
Cost of goods sold:
$


Selling and administrative expenses:



$



6. Prepare a balance sheet as of March 31. (Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Picanuy Corporation
Balance Sheet
March 31
Assets
Current assets:
$

Total current assets

Total assets $


Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
$
Stockholders’ equity:
$


Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $


brandon co 421828

The following data have been taken from the budget reports of Brandon company, a merchandising company.

Purchases Sales
January $190,000 $130,000
February $190,000 $230,000
March $190,000 $270,000
April $170,000 $330,000
May $170,000 $290,000
June $150,000 $270,000

Fifty percent of purchases are paid for in cash at the time of purchase, and 25% are paid for in each of the next two months. Purchases for the previous November and December were $180,000 per month. Employee wages are 15% of sales for the month in which the sales occur. Selling and administrative expenses are 25% of the following month’s sales. (July sales are budgeted to be $250,000.) Interest payments of $25,000 are paid quarterly in January and April. Brandon’s cash disbursements for the month of April would be:

rev: 10_27_2011

$230,000
$170,000
$327,000
$277,500

whats the answer to this question 421844

Which of the following expenditures is most likely to be deductible for a construction business?

A.

A fine for a zoning violation.

B.

A tax underpayment penalty.

C.

An “under the table” payment to a government representative to obtain a better price for raw materials.

D.

A payment to a foreign official to expedite an application for a business permit.

E.

An arm’s length payment to a related party for emergency repairs of a sewage line.

pru company balance sheet analysis 421847

i need to have project about this topic for PRU company. i attached a file for format of this homework

Document Preview:

PRU –Prudential Financial SECTION 2: BALANCE SHEET ANALYSIS 1. Using elements listed on your company’s balance sheet, prepare a common size balance sheet using the following format. (Vertical Analysis Chapter 5) COMPANY Account?Current Year?% ?Prior Year?‘ %???????? 2. Using elements listed on your company’s balance sheet calculate the increase or decrease in dollars and percent between the years using the following format. (Year to Year Change Analysis Chapter 5) COMPANY Account?Current Year?Prior Year? +/ $? %???????? 3. Using elements listed on your company’s balance sheet calculate the ratios and amounts using two years prior as the base year (100%) using the following format. Your answers should all be in percentages (Horizontal Analysis Chapter 5). COMPANY Account?Current Year/Base ?Prior Year/Base?????? 4. In thoughtful, well organized paragraphs comment on changes you see in the balance sheet with regards to the company over the two year period.? Among the items to consider:? Comment on any significant changes in the company in assets and liabilities. Comment on any significant changes in the company in the composition of current assets and current liabilities. Which assets in the company have the most significant investment? Is the company financed primarily with debt or equity? Is the debt primarily short term or long term?

Attachments:

reporting operating cash flows by the direct method 421862

The following income statement and selected balance sheet account data are available for Treece, Inc., at December 31, 2011.

Revenue:

Net Sales …………………………………… 2,850,000

Divident Income ….. ……………………… 104,000

Interest Income ……………………………. 70,000

Gain on sales of marketable securities …. 4,000

Total Revenue and Gains ………………. 3,028,000

Costs and Expenses:

Cost of good sold ………………………….. 1,550,000

Operating expense ………………………… 980,000

Interest Expense …………………………… 185,000

Income tax expense ………………………. 90,000

Total Costs and Expenses …………….. 2,805,000

Net Income …………………………………. 223,000

Selected account balances:

End of Year Beginning of Year

Accounts recievable ………………………….. 650,000 ……………………. 720,000

Accrued Interest recievable …………………. 9,000 ……………………….. 6,000

Inventories …………………………………….. 800,000 …………………… 765,000

Short term prepayments …………………….. 20,000 ……………………… 15,000

Accounts Payable (merchandise suppliers)…. 570,000 …………………… 562,000

Accrued operating expense payable ………… 65,000 …………………….. 94,000

Accrued Interest Payable …………………….. 21,000 …………………….. 12,000

Accrued income taxes payable ………………. 22,000 ……………………… 35,000

Additional Information:

1. Divident revenue is recognized on the cash basis. All othe rincome statement amounts are recognized on the accrual basis.

2. Operating expenses include depreciation expense of $ 115,000

Instructions:

a) Prepare a partial statement of cash flows, including only the operating activities section of the statement and using the direct method. Place brackets around numbers representing cash payments. Show supporting computations for the following:

1. Cash recieved from customers

2. Interest and dividents received

3. Cash paid to suppliers and employees

4. Interest paid

5. Income taxes paid

6. Cash used in operating activities

7. Net cash flow from operating activities.

income statement schedule of cost of goods sold 421873

The following information appears in Toledo Toy Company’s records for last year:

Sales revenue…………………………………..$99,300

Administrative costs……………………………19,700

Manufacturing building depreciation………….11,750

Indirect materials and supplies…………………2,150

Sales commissions……………………………….6,800

Raw material inventory, January 1…………….8,200

Direct labor………………………………………16,300

Raw material inventory, December 31…………9,000

Finished goods inventory, January 1…………..4,450

Finished goods inventory, December 31……….3,900

Raw materials purchases………………………10,150

Work in process inventory, December 31…….5,550

Supervisory and indirect labor………………….6,200

Property taxes, manufacturing plant…………..3,700

Plant utilities and power……………………….11,500

Work in process inventory, January 1………..6,600

Prepare an income statement with a supporting schedule of cost of goods sold.

accounting 2 421888

The following information is available for the Blizzard Corporation for

20X3:

Af?o Materials inventory decreased $4,000 during 20X3.

Af?o Materials inventory on December 31, 20X3, was 50% of materials

inventory on January 1, 20X3.

Af?o Beginning work in process inventory was $140,000.

Af?o Ending finished goods inventory was $65,000.

Af?o Purchases of direct materials were $150,000.

Af?o Direct materials used were 2.5 times the cost of direct labor.

Af?o Manufacturing overhead was 50% of the cost of direct labor.

Af?o Total manufacturing costs incurred were $246,400, 80% of cost of

goods manufactured and $150,000 less than cost of goods sold.

Compute:

a) finished goods inventory on January 1, 20X3

b) work in process inventory on December 31, 20X3

c) direct labor incurred

d) manufacturing overhead incurred

e) direct materials used

f) materials inventory on January 1, 20X3

g) materials inventory on December 31, 20X3

equivalent units of production 421915

The following information concerns production in the Baking Department for May. All direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production.

A. Determine the number of units in work in process inventory at the end of the month.

B. Determine the equivalent units of production for direct materials and conversion costs in May. In an amount is zero or blank, enter in Af?cAc‚¬A??o0Af?cAc‚¬.

Equivalent Units of Production for Direct Materials and Conversion Costs

For May

Whole Units

Equivalent Units Direct Materials

Equivalent Units Conversion

Inventory in process, May 1

Started and completed in May

Transferred to finished goods in May

Inventory in process, May 31

Total

aon project network 421924

From the following information, develop an AON project network. Complete the forward and backward pass, compute activity slack, and identify the critical path. How many days will the project take? Attach or insert your AON network. You may use MSP to check your work, but your submitted file should be similar to that shown in figure 6.8 of Larson & Gray.

ID

Description

Predecessor

Time (days)

A

Survey site

None

2

B

Install drainage

A

5

C

Install power lines

A

3

D

Excavate site

B, C

4

E

Pour foundation

D

3

accounting 421945

The following information pertains to questions 13 through 17

Buchanan enterprises is considering investing in a machine that costs $400,000. The machine expected to generate revenues of $175,000 per year for five years. The machine would be depreciated using the straight line method over its five year life and have no salvage value company has a 40 percent income tax rate and desires a rate of return of 10 percent on its capital investments.

13) The internal rate of return of the machine is:

a) Greater than 20%

b) Between 18% and 20%

c) Between 16% and 18%

d) Less than 16%

14. The accounting rate of return of the machine is (round your answer to two decimal places)

a) 11.25%

b) 12.25%

c) 13.25%

d) 14.25%

15. The pay period of the machine is(round your answer to 2 decimal places)

a) 2.82 yrs

b) 2.92 yrs

c) 3.02 yrs

d) 3.12 yrs

16. The net present value of the machine is

a) $179,992

b) $(13,338)

c) $119,367

d) $ (1,966)

17) The profitability index of the machine is(round your answer to two decimal places)

a) 1.10

b) 1.20

c) 1.30

d) 1.40

cost acct 421970

The following information is used for Lucky’s Inc.’s monthly master budget.

June’s balance sheet balances: <?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

Cash

$10,500

Accounts payable

$53,760

Accounts receivable

$80,000

Capital stock

$260,000

Inventory

$26,000

Retained earnings

$2,740

Building and equipment (net)

$200,000

Actual sales for June and budgeted sales for July, August, and September:

June (actual)

$140,000

July (budget)

$320,000

August (budget)

$180,000

September (budget)

$200,000

Sales are 25% cash and 75% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the following month. There are no bad debts.

Gross margin percentage is 60% of sales.

The desired ending inventory is expected to be 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. One fifth of the purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, and the remaining balance is purchased on credit and paid in the following month.

The monthly cash operating expenses are $80,000, including the monthly depreciation expense of $7,000.

During July, Lucky’s Inc. will purchase new office equipment for $17,000 cash.

Dividends of $13,500 were declared and paid in July.

The company must maintain a minimum cash balance of $25,000. A line of credit is used to maintain this balance. Borrowing will be made in increments of $1,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month, and repayments are made at the end of the month. The annual interest rate is 12%, paid when the loan is repaid (ignore accrual of interest).

Required:
Prepare a budgeted income statement, and cash budget for the month of July.

Problem 2:

The Sparkly Corporation has the following budget and actual results.

Budgeted data

Unit sales

30,000

Unit production

30,000

Fixed overhead

Supervision

$54,000

Depreciation

$60,000

Rent

$30,000

Variable costs per unit

Direct materials

$18.00

Direct labor

$25.00

Supplies

$0.25

Indirect labor

$1.20

Electricity

$0.15

Actual results

Unit sales

33,000

Unit production

36,000

Fixed overhead

Supervision

$53,550

Depreciation

$60,000

Rent

$30,000

Variable costs

Direct materials

$642,000

Direct labor

$960,000

Supplies

$7,500

Indirect labor

$30,000

Electricity

$4,500

Required:

(originally part 2) Prepare a performance report for all costs, showing flexible budget variances (indicate F favorable or U unfavorab

accounting 422020

The following merchandise transactions occurred during December for two different companies: Rippen and Burnen. Both companies use a perpetual inventory system.

On December 3, Rippen Corporation sold merchandise on account to Burnen Corp. for $493,000, terms 1/10, n/30. This merchandise originally cost Rippen $310,000.

On December 8, Burnen Corp. returned merchandise to Rippen Corporation for a credit of $3,900. Rippen returned this merchandise to inventory at its original cost of $2,452.
December 12, Burnen Corp. paid Rippen Corporation for the amount owed.

Required:
(a)

Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Rippen Corporation.

What is the amount of net sales to be reported on Rippen Corporation’s income statement?

What is the Rippen Corporation’s gross profit percentage?

thomson company a manufacturing firm has supplied the followin 273881

Thomson Company, a manufacturing firm, has supplied the following information from its accounting records for the last calendar year:

Direct labor cost ………………………………………..$371,500

Purchases of direct materials …………………………… 160,400

Freight in on materials ………………………………… 1,000

Factory supplies used ………………………………….. 37,800

Factory utilities ………………………………………… 46,000

Commissions paid ……………………………………… 80,000

Factory supervision and indirect labor ………………… 190,000

Advertising ……………………………………………. 23,900

Material handling ……………………………………… 26,750

Work in process inventory, January 1 …………………. 201,000

Work in process inventory, December 31 ……………… 98,000

Direct materials inventory, January 1 …………………. 47,000

Direct materials inventory, December 31 ……………… 17,000

Finished goods inventory, January 1 …………………… 28,000

Finished goods inventory, December 31 ………………. 45,200

Required:

1. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured statement.

2. Prepare a cost of goods sold statement.

three possible product cost definitions were introduced 1 val 273883

Three possible product cost definitions were introduced:

(1) Value chain,

(2) Operating, and

(3) Manufacturing. Identify which of the three product cost definitions best fits the following situations (justify your choice):

a. Setting the price for a new product

b. Valuing finished goods inventories for external reporting

c. Determining whether to add a complementary product to the product line

d. Choosing among competing product designs

e. Calculating cost of goods sold for external reporting

f. Deciding whether to increase the price of an existing product

g. Deciding whether to accept or reject a special order, where the price offered is lower than the normal selling price

h. Determining which of several potential new products should be developed, produced, and sold

i. Deciding whether to produce and sell a product whose design and development costs were higher than budgeted

tom young vice president of dunn company a producer of 273888

Tom Young, vice president of Dunn Company (a producer of plastic products), has been supervising the implementation of an activity based cost management system. One of Tom’s objectives is to improve process efficiency by improving the activities that define the processes. To illustrate the potential of the new system to the president, Tom has decided to focus on two processes: production and customer service.

Within each process, one activity will be selected for improvement: molding for production and sustaining engineering for customer service. (Sustaining engineers are responsible for redesigning products based on customer needs and feedback.) Valueadded standards are identified for each activity. For molding, the value added standard calls for nine pounds per mold. (Although the products differ in shape and function, their size, as measured by weight, is uniform.) The value added standard is based on the elimination of all waste due to defective molds (materials is by far the major cost for the molding activity). The standard price for molding is $15 per pound. For sustaining engineering, the standard is 60 percent of current practical activity capacity. This standard is based on the fact that about 40 percent of the complaints have to do with design features that could have been avoided or anticipated by the company.

Current practical capacity (at the end of 2009) is defined by the following requirements:

18,000 engineering hours for each product group that has been on the market or in development for five years or less, and 7,200 hours per product group of more than five years. Four product groups have less than five years’ experience, and 10 product groups have more. There are 72 engineers, each paid a salary of $70,000. Each engineer can provide 2,000 hours of service per year. There are no other significant costs for the engineering activity.

For 2009, actual pounds used for molding were 25 percent above the level called for by the value added standard; engineering usage was 138,000 hours. There were 240,000 units of output produced. Tom and the operational managers have selected some improvement measures that promise to reduce non value added activity usage by 30 percent in 2010. Selected actual results achieved for 2010 are as follows:

Units produced …………… 240,000

Pounds of material ……… 2,600,000

Engineering hours …………. 126,200

The actual prices paid per pound and per engineering hour are identical to the standard or budgeted prices.

Required:

1. For 2009, calculate the non value added usage and costs for molding and sustaining engineering. Also, calculate the cost of unused capacity for the engineering activity.

2. Using the targeted reduction, establish kaizen standards for molding and engineering (for 2010).

3. Using the kaizen standards prepared in Requirement 2, compute the 2010 usage variances, expressed in both physical and financial measures, for molding and engineering. (For engineering, explain why it is necessary to compare actual resource usage with the kaizen standard.) Comment on the company’s ability to achieve its targeted reductions. In particular, discuss what measures the company must take to capture any realized reductions in resource usage.

wayne johnson president of banshee company recently returned f 273892

Wayne Johnson, president of Banshee Company, recently returned from a conference on quality and productivity. At the conference, he was told that many American firms have quality costs totaling 20 to 30 percent of sales. He, however, was skeptical about this statistic.

But even if the quality gurus were right, he was sure that his company’s quality costs were much lower—probably less than 5 percent. On the other hand, if he was wrong, he would be passing up an opportunity to improve profits significantly and simultaneously strengthen his competitive position. The possibility was at least worth exploring. He knew that his company produced most of the information needed for quality cost reporting—but there never was a need to bother with any formal quality data gathering and analysis.

This conference, however, had convinced him that a firm’s profitability can increase significantly by improving quality—provided the potential for improvement exists. Thus, before committing the company to a quality improvement program, Wayne requested a preliminary estimate of the total quality costs currently being incurred. He also indicated that the costs should be classified into four categories: prevention, appraisal, internal failure, and external failure. He has asked you to prepare a summary of quality costs and to compare the total costs to sales and profits. To assist you in this task, the following information has been prepared from the past year, 2010:

a. Sales revenue, $15,000,000; net income, $1,500,000.

b. During the year, customers returned 90,000 units needing repair. Repair cost averages $1 per unit.

c. Four inspectors are employed, each earning an annual salary of $60,000. These four inspectors are involved only with final inspection (product acceptance).

d. Total scrap is 150,000 units. Of this total, 60 percent is quality related. The cost of scrap is about $5 per unit.

e. Each year, approximately 450,000 units are rejected in final inspection. Of these units, 80 percent can be recovered through rework. The cost of rework is $0.75 per unit.

f. A customer cancelled an order that would have increased profits by $150,000. The customer’s reason for cancellation was poor product performance.

g. The company employs three full time employees in its complaint department. Each earns $40,500 a year.

h. The company gave sales allowances totaling $45,000 due to substandard products being sent to the customer.

i. The company requires all new employees to take its three hour quality training program. The estimated annual cost of the program is $30,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a simple quality cost report classifying costs by category.

2. Compute the quality cost to sales ratio. Also, compare the total quality costs with total profits. Should Wayne be concerned with the level of quality costs?

3. Prepare a pie chart for the quality costs. Discuss the distribution of quality costs among the four categories. Are they properly distributed? Explain.

4. Discuss how the company can improve its overall quality and at the same time reduce total quality costs.

5. By how much will profits increase if quality costs are reduced to 2.5 percent of sales?

accounting excercise 11 8 421250

Exercise 11 8 Net Present Value Analysis of Two Alternatives [LO1]

Wriston Company has $400,000 to invest. The company is trying to decide between two alternative uses of the funds. The alternatives are as follows:

A B
Cost of equipment required $ 400,000 $ 0
Working capital investment required $ 0 $ 400,000
Annual cash inflows $ 76,000 $ 65,000
Salvage value of equipment in five years $ 18,000 $ 0
Life of the project 5 years 5 years

The working capital needed for project B will be released for investment elsewhere at the end of five years. Wriston Company uses a 10% discount rate. (Ignore income taxes.)

Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

Required:
a.

Calculate net present value for each project. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign.Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

Net Present Value
Project A $
Project B $

b. Which investment alternative (if either) would you recommend that the company accept?
Project B
Project A

exercise 12 10 dropping or retaining a segment 421257

Exercise 12 10 Dropping or Retaining a Segment [LO2]

Dexter Products, Inc., manufactures and sells a number of items, including an overnight case. The company has been experiencing losses on the overnight case for some time, as shown on the following contribution format income statement:

Dexter Products, Inc.
Income Statement”Overnight Cases
For the Quarter Ended June 30
Sales $ 500,000
Variable expenses:
Variable manufacturing expenses $ 135,000
Sales commissions 53,000
Shipping 10,000



Total variable expenses 198,000



Contribution margin 302,000
Fixed expenses:
Salary of product line manager 20,000
General factory overhead 103,000 *
Depreciation of equipment (no resale value) 43,000
Advertising”traceable 127,000
Insurance on inventories 13,000
Purchasing department 45,000 Ac€



Total fixed expenses 351,000



Net operating loss $ (49000 )







*Allocated on the basis of machine hours.
Ac€ Allocated on the basis of sales dollars.

Discontinuing the overnight cases would not affect the company’s sales of its other product lines, its total general factory overhead, or its total purchasing department expenses.

Required
a.

Compute the increase or decrease of net operating income if the overnight case are continued or discontinued. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive except Decreases in Sales, Decreases in Contribution Margin, and Net Losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Keep Overnight
Cases
Drop Overnight
Cases
Net Operating
Income
Sales $ $ $



Variable expenses:
Variable manufacturing expenses
Sales commissions
Shipping



Total variable expenses



Contribution margin



Fixed expenses:
Salary of line manager
General factory overhead
Depreciation of equipment
Advertising”traceable
Insurance on inventories
Purchasing department



Total fixed expenses



Net operating Income (loss) $ $ $







b. Would you recommend that the company discontinue the manufacture and sale of overnight cases?
Yes
No

make or buy a component 421263

Exercise 12 12 Make or Buy a Component [LO3]

Royal Company manufactures 20,000 units of part R 3 each year for use on its production line. At this level of activity, the cost per unit for part R 3 is:

Direct materials $ 4.10
Direct labor 7.00
Variable manufacturing overhead 3.80
Fixed manufacturing overhead 12.00


Total cost per part $ 26.90





An outside supplier has offered to sell 20,000 units of part R 3 each year to Royal Company for $44.50 per part. If Royal Company accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to manufacture part R 3 could be rented to another company at an annual rental of $523,000. However, Royal Company has determined that $8 of the fixed manufacturing overhead being applied to part R 3 would continue even if part R 3 were purchased from the outside supplier.

Required:
a.

What is the total relevant cost of making the product? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total relevant cost of making the product (20,000 units) $

b. What is the total relevant cost of buying the product? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total relevant cost of buying the product (20,000 units) $
c. What is the opportunity cost of making instead of buying? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total opportunity cost $

d.

How much profits will increase or decrease if the outside supplier’s offer is accepted? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Profits would (Click to select)decreaseincrease by $

i need the answer to A.C.and D

need help fast 421274

Exercise 12 4 Allocating overhead costs among products [LO 3, 4]

Nevin Company makes three products in its factory: plastic cups, plastic tablecloths, and plastic bottles. The expected overhead costs for the next fiscal year include the following.

Factory manager’s salary $ 130,000
Factory utility costs 65,000
Factory supplies 25,000



Total overhead costs $ 220,000







Nevin uses machine hours as the cost driver to allocate overhead costs. Budgeted machine hours for the products are as follows.

Cups 400 hours
Tablecloths 700
Bottles 1,100

Total machine hours 2,200



Required:
(a)

Allocate the budgeted overhead costs to the products. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Product Allocated Cost
Cups $
Tablecloths
Bottles

Total $



direct labor standards for nonmanufacturing expenses 421284

Exercise 23 11 (Algorithmic)
Direct Labor Standards for Nonmanufacturing Expenses

St. Luke Hospital began using standards to evaluate its Admissions Department. The standard was broken into two types of admissions as follows:


Type of Admission
Standard Time to Complete
Admission Record
Unscheduled admission 40 min.
Scheduled admission 20 min.

The unscheduled admission took longer, since name, address, and insurance information needed to be determined at the time of admission. Information was collected on scheduled admissions prior to the admissions, which was less time consuming.

The Admissions Department employs two full time people (40 productive hours per week, with no overtime) at $12.00 per hour. For the most recent week, the department handled 66 unscheduled and 126 scheduled admissions.

a. How much was actually spent on labor for the week?
$

b. What are the standard hours for the actual volume for the week (round to the nearest whole hour)?
hours

c. Calculate the time variance. In your computation, round the standard direct labor rate to the nearest whole cent. If required, use the minus sign to enter a favorable variance as a negative number.

Time variance $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 4

Report how well the department performed for the week.

The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

accounting 421318

Exercise 7 7 Percent of receivables method L.O. P2

Hecter Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.

Days Past Due

Total 0 1 to 30 31 to 60 61 to 90 Over 90
Accounts receivable $ 190,000 $ 132,000 $ 30,000 $ 12,000 $ 6,000 $ 10,000
Percent uncollectible 1 % 2 % 4 % 7 % 12 %

a.

Estimate the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts assuming the company uses 3.5% of total accounts receivable to estimate uncollectibles, instead of the aging of receivables method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Allowance for doubtful accounts $

b.

Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $300 credit. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Dec 31 (Click to select)Accounts receivableSales expense and allowanceEntertainment expenseBad debts expenseStore suppliesNotes payableAllowance for doubtful accountsPrepaid insurance
(Click to select)Sales expense and allowanceStore suppliesAccounts receivableEntertainment expenseAllowance for doubtful accountsNotes payablePrepaid insuranceBad debts expense

c.

Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $200 debit. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Dec 31 (Click to select)Accounts receivableStore suppliesSales expense and allowanceAllowance for doubtful accountsEntertainment expensePrepaid insuranceBad debts expenseNotes payable
(Click to select)Notes payableAllowance for doubtful accountsEntertainment expensePrepaid insuranceAccounts receivableBad debts expenseSales expense and allowanceStore supplies

Exercise 7 8 Writing off receivables L.O. P2

Hecter Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.

Days Past Due

Total 0 1 to 30 31 to 60 61 to 90 Over 90
Accounts receivable $ 190,000 $ 132,000 $ 30,000 $ 12,000 $ 6,000 $ 10,000
Percent uncollectible 1 % 2 % 4 % 7 % 12 %

a.

On February 1 of the next period, the company determined that $1,900 in customer accounts is uncollectible; specifically, $400 for Oxford Co. and $1,500 for Brookes Co. Prepare the journal entry to write off those accounts. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Feb 1 (Click to select)Advertising expenseAllowance for doubtful accountsAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Store suppliesAccounts receivable Oxford Co.Prepaid insuranceCashAccounts payable
(Click to select)Store suppliesAdvertising expensePrepaid insuranceAccounts payableAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Accounts receivable Oxford Co.CashAllowance for doubtful accounts
(Click to select)Accounts receivable Oxford Co.Prepaid insuranceAccounts receivable Brookes Co.CashAccounts payableStore suppliesAllowance for doubtful accountsAdvertising expense

b.

On June 5 of that next period, the company unexpectedly received a $400 payment on a customer account, Oxford Company, that had previously been written off in part a. Prepare the entries necessary to reinstate the account and to record the cash received. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
June 5 (Click to select)Merchandise inventoryAccounts payableAllowance for doubtful accountsCashAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Bad debt expensesAccounts receivable Oxford Co.Interest revenue
(Click to select)Merchandise inventoryAccounts receivable Oxford Co.CashAccounts payableBad debt expensesAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Allowance for doubtful accountsInterest revenue
June 5 (Click to select)Service revenueNotes payableBad debt expensesAccounts receivable Oxford Co.Allowance for doubtful accountsAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Operating expensesCash
(Click to select)Service revenueAccounts receivable Oxford Co.Notes payableAllowance for doubtful accountsBad debt expensesCashAccounts receivable Brookes Co.Operating expenses

managerial accounting 4 12 421327

EXERCISE E4 12 CVP Analysis, Profit Equation
Clyde’s Marina has estimated that fixed costs per month are $300,000 and variable cost
per dollar of sales is $0.40
Required
a. What is the break even point per month in sales?
Enter text answer here.
Selling price: (Relational) Amount
Variable cost: (Relational) Amount
Contribution Margin: (Relational) Formula
Fixed costs: Amount Af· Amount = Formula
b. What level of sales is needed for a monthly profit of $60,000 ?
( Amount + Amount ) Af· Amount = Formula
c. For the month of July, the marina anticipates sales of $1,000,000 What is the expected level of
profit?
( Amount * Amount ) Amount = Formula

managerial accounting 4 12 421332

EXERCISE E4 12 CVP Analysis, Profit Equation
Clyde’s Marina has estimated that fixed costs per month are $300,000 and variable cost
per dollar of sales is $0.40
Required
a. What is the break even point per month in sales? ANSWER Thru N
Enter text answer here.

Selling price: (Relational) AVariable cost: (Relational) BContribution Margin: (Relational) CFixed costs:Amount DAf·Amount E=Formula Fb. What level of sales is needed for a monthly profit of$60,000 ?(Amount G+Amount H) Af·Amount I=Formula Jc. For the month of July, the marina anticipates sales of$1,000,000 What is the expected level of profit?(Amount K*Amount L) Amount M=Formula N REQUIRED answers for A thru N

managerial accounting 5 4 421338

Exercise E5 4 ~ 10 General Information
Xenoc, Inc. produces stereo speakers. The selling price per pair of speakers is $1,800 Costs
involved in production are:
Direct materials $150
Direct labor 200
Variable manufacturing overhead 100
Total variable manufacturing costs per unit $450
Fixed manufacturing overhead per year $540,000
In addition, the company has fixed selling and administrative costs:
Fixed selling costs per year $210,000
Fixed administrative costs per year $110,000
Exercise E5 4 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is the value of ending inventory using full costing?
Variable cost per unit Amount
Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit Amount
Title Formula
Ending inventory under full costing: Formula
Exercise E5 5 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is the value of ending inventory using variable costing?
Ending inventory under variable costing: Formula
Exercise E5 6 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is the cost of goods sold using full costing?
Title Amount
Title Formula
Exercise E5 7 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is variable cost of goods sold?
Title Amount
Title Formula
Text answer as appropriate
Exercise E5 8 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is net income using full costing?
Sales Amount
Less Title Amount
Gross margin Formula
Less Title Amount
Less Title Amount
Net income Formula
Exercise E5 9 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. What is net income using variable costing?
Sales Amount
Less Title Amount
Contribution margin Formula
Less Title Amount
Less Title Amount
Less Title Amount
Net income Formula
Exercise E5 10 During the year, Xenoc produces 1,200 pairs of speakers and sells
1,000 pairs. How much fixed manufacturing overhead is in ending inventory under full costing? Compare
this amount to the difference in the net incomes calculated in Exercises E5 8 and E5 9.
Narrative answer:???

managerial accounting 6 6 421343

Exercise E6 6 Cost Allocation Process
Apex Company’s Copy Department, which does all of the photocopying for the Sales Department and the Administration Department, budgets
the following costs for the year, based on the expected activity of 5,000,000 copies.
Salaries (Fixed) $80,000
Employee benefits (Fixed) 10,000
Depreciation of copy machines (Fixed) 10,000
Utilities (Fixed) 5,000
Paper (Variable) Per copy: $0.01 50,000
Toner (Variable) Per copy: $0.01 50,000
The costs are assigned to two pools, one for fixed and one for variable costs. The costs are then assigned to the Sales Department and the
Administrative Department. Fixed costs are assigned on a lump sum basis, 40% to Sales and 60% to
Administration. The variable costs are assigned at a rate of $0.02 per copy.
Required:
Assuming 4,800,000 copies were made during the year, 2,500,000 for Sales and 2,300,000 for Administration, calculate
the Copy Department costs allocated to Sales and Administration.
Total costs to be allocated:
Title Amount
Title Amount
Title Amount
Title Amount
Total: Formula
Costs allocated to Sales:
Title Formula
Title Formula
Title Formula
Costs allocated to Admin:
Title Formula
Title Formula
Title Formula

managerial accounting 6 8 421347

Exercise E6 8 Allocation of Service Department Costs
Marvin Company has three service departments (S1, S2, and S3) and two production departments (P1 and P2). The following data relate to Marvin’s allocation of service department costs:
Budgeted Costs Nbr of Employees
S1 $4,000,000 80
S2 3,000,000 60
S3 2,000,000 30
P1 200
P2 300
Service department costs are allocated by the direct method. The number of employees is used as the allocation base for all service department costs.
Required:
a. Allocate service department costs to production departments.
Nbr of employees: Total Employees: % of Employees:
P1 Number Number Formula
P2 Number Number Formula
b. Calculate the total service department cost allocated to each production department.
Service
Department
Service Dept.
Costs
Costs Allocated to:
P1 P2
S1 Amount Amount Formula
S2 Amount Amount Formula
S3 Amount Amount Formula
Total: Formula Formula Formula

managerial accounting 7 4 421352

Exercise E7 4 Incremental Analysis
Rustic Interiors, an interior design company, has experienced a drop in business due to an increase in interest rates and a corresponding slowdown in remodeling projects. To stimulate business, the company is considering exhibiting at the Middleton Home and Garden Expo. The exhibit will cost the company
$13,000 for space. At the show, Rustic Interiors will present a slide show on a PC, pass out brochures
that are printed previously, (the company printed more than needed), and show its portfolio of previous

jobs.

The company estimates that revenue will increase by 40,000 over the next year as a result of the exhibit. For the previous year, profit was as follows:

Revenue $210,000

Less:

Design supplies $16,000

Salary of samantha spade (Owner) 82,000

Salary of kim (full time employee) 56,000

Rent 19,000

Utilities 7,000

Depreciation of office equipment 4,000

Printing of advertising materials 800

Advertising in middleton journal 3,000

Travel expenses other then depreciation of autos 2,500

Depreciation of company cars 10,000 200,300

Net income $9,700

Calculate the impact of the exhibit on company profit. Should the company exhibit at the home show?

Supplies as a percent of revenue Percentage

Travel as a percent of revenue ?Percentage?

Increase in revenue ?Amount?

Less:

Title? ?Amount?

Title? ?Amount?

Title? ?Amount?

Increase in profit ?Formula?

Title? ???????

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Problem P7 4 Make or Buy Decision

For most construction projects, Bradley Heating and Cooling buys sheet metal and forms the metal into heating/cooling ducts as needed. The company estimates the costs of making and installing ductwork for Kerry Park shopping mall to be as follows:

Materials $35,000

Labor to form ductwork 3,000

Labor to install ductwork 9,000

Misc. variable costs 1,500

Fixed costs allocated based on labor hours 3,000

Total costs $51,500

The fixed costs relate to the company’s building equipment, and office staff. The company plans on billing the Kerry Park
developer $68,000 or services. Bradley is currently behind schedule on other projects and is paying a late penalty of
$1,200 per day. Walt Bradley, the owner of Bradley Heating and Cooling, is considering ordering prefabricated ductwork for
the Kerry Park job. The prefabricated ductwork will cost $40,000 (including the cost of sheet metal). If Walt
buys the prefabricated ductwork, he’ll be able to reassign workers to another project and avoid 5 days of

late fees.

Required:
Should Bradley make the ductwork or buy it prefabricated?

Dont Buy Prefabricated Buy Prefabricated Buy Difference

Materials ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Title ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Title ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Title ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Title ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Title ?Amount? ?Amount? ?Formula?

Total ?Formula? ?Formula? ?Formula?

fundamentals of financial accounting 4th edition phillips libby libby 421399

Explain the closing entry process and prepare the closing entries in journal form based on the information in question 1.

POST INC. BANK RECONCILIATION

Cash balance per bank $8,200

Cash balance per books (general ledger) $6,500

Outstanding checks $2,460

Check mailed to the bank for deposit had not reached the bank by the statement date. $500

NSF check returned by the bank for accounts receivable $100

July interest earned on the bank statement $20

Check no. 700 for misc. expense cleared the bank for $200; erroneously recorded in our books for $20

~ Prepare a bank reconciliation.

~ Shown the accounting entries that must be made by

~ Matrix Inc. in journal entry and T Account format.

Fill in the blanks:

Sales Revenue $800

Beginning Inventory $100

Purchases $700

Available for Sale ?

Ending Inventory $500

Cost of Goods Sold ?

Gross Profit ?

Operating Expenses $200

Net Income ?

Assume you serve on the board of a local golf and country club. In preparation for renegotiating the club’s bank loans, the president indicates that the club needs to increase its operating cash flows before the end of the current year. The club’s treasurer reassures the president and other board members that he knows a couple of ways to boost the club’s operating cash flows. First, he says, the club can sell some of its accounts receivable to a collections company that is willing to pay the club $97,000 up front for the right to collect $1 00,000 of the overdue accounts. That will immediately boost operating cash flows. Second, he indicates that the club paid about $200,000 last month to relocate the 18th fairway and green closer to the clubhouse. The treasurer indicates that although these costs have been reported as expenses in the club’s own monthly financial statements, he feels an argument can be made for reporting them as part of land and land improvements (a long lived asset) in the year end financial statements that would be provided to the bank. He explains that, by recording these payments as an addition to a long lived asset, they will not be shown as a reduction in operating cash flows.

Required:

1. Does the sale of accounts receivable to generate immediate cash harm or mislead anyone? Would you consider it an ethical business activity?

2. What category in the statement of cash flows is used when reporting cash spent on long lived assets, such as land improvements? What category is used when cash is spent on expenses, such as costs for regular upkeep of the grounds?

3. What facts are relevant to deciding whether the costs of the 18th hole relocation should be reported as an asset or as an expense? Is it appropriate to make this decision based on the impact it could have on operating cash flows?

4. As a member of the board, how would you ensure that an ethical decision is made?

Following is the adjusted trial balance of Post Company. Based on this information prepare a Balance Sheet, Income Statement and Statement of Retained Earnings.

POST COMPANY ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE

Debit Credit

Cash 80,000

Accounts Receivable 12,000

Prepaid Insurance 2,000

Equipment 4,000

Accumulated Depreciation 100

Supplies 400

Accounts Payable 800

Wages Payable 200

Unearned Revenue 1,200

Contributed Capital 82,400

Retained Earnings 0

Sales 16,000

Gas Expense 200

Supply Expense 400

Insurance Expense 400

Depreciation Expense 100

Wage Expense 200

Dividends 1,000

100,700 100,700

what tax year end should xyz use and which test or rule requires this year end 421467

PLEASE EXPLAIN YOUR THEORY ON WHY YOU CHOSE THE ANSWER YOU DID…THANKS!

XYZ, LLC has several individual and corporate members. Abe and Joe, individuals with 4/30 year ends, each have a 23% profits and capital interest. RST, Inc., a corporation with a 6/30 year end, owns a 4% profits and capital interest while DEF, Inc., a corporation with an 8/30 year end, owns a 4.9% profits and capital interest. Finally, thirty other calendar year end individual partners (each with less than a 2% profits and capital interest) own the remaining 45% of the profits and capital interests in XYZ. What tax year end should XYZ use and which test or rule requires this year end?

4/30, principal partners test

4/30, least aggregate deferral test

12/31, principal partners test

12/31, least aggregate deferral test

accounting equation effect 421483

EZ Curb Company completed the following transactions during 2010. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2010.

Jan. 8

Purchased merchandise on account at a cost of $14,000. (Assume a perpetual inventory system.)

17 Paid for the January 8 purchase.
Apr. 1

Received $40,000 from National Bank after signing a 12 month, 6 percent, promissory note.

June 3 Purchased merchandise on account at a cost of $18,000.
July 5 Paid for the June 3 purchase.
Aug. 1

Rented out a small office in a building owned by EZ Curb Company and collected six months’ rent in advance amounting to $6,000. (Use an account called Unearned Rent Revenue.)

Dec. 20

Received a $100 deposit from a customer as a guarantee to return a large trailer “borrowed” for 30 days.

(TIP: Consider whether EZ Curb Company has an obligation to return the money when the trailer is returned.)

Dec. 31

Determined that wages of $6,500 were earned but not yet paid on December 31 (ignore payroll taxes).

Dec. 31 Adjusted the accounts at year end, relating to interest.
Dec. 31 Adjusted the accounts at year end, relating to rent.

Requirement 1:

For each listed transaction and related adjusting entry, indicate the accounts, amounts, and effects ( + for increase, ‘ for decrease, and NE for no effect) on the accounting equation

Requirement 2:

For each transaction and related adjusting entry, state whether the quick ratio is increased,decreased, or there is no change. (Assume EZ Curb Company’s quick ratio has always been greater than 1.0.)

25b 3 421530

Feist Co. expects to sell 400,000 units of its product in the next period with the following results.

Sales (400,000 units) $ 6,000,000
Costs and expenses
Direct materials 800,000
Direct labor 1,600,000
Overhead 400,000
Selling expenses 600,000
Administrative expenses 1,028,000


Total costs and expenses 4,428,000


Net income $ 1,572,000





The company has an opportunity to sell 40,000 additional units at $13 per unit. The additional sales would not affect its current expected sales. Direct materials and labor costs per unit would be the same for the additional units as they are for the regular units. However, the additional volume would create the following incremental costs: (1) total overhead would increase by 16% and (2) administrative expenses would increase by $172,000.

Calculate the combined total net income if the company accepts the offer to sell additional units at the reduced price of $13 per unit. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Normal Volume Additional Volume* Combined Total
(Click to select)OverheadDirect materialsCashSalesDirect labor $ $ $
Costs and expenses
(Click to select)CashSalesDepreciation expenseRent expenseDirect materials
(Click to select)Rent expenseDirect laborCashDepreciation expenseSales
(Click to select)Rent expenseDepreciation expenseSalesCashOverhead
(Click to select)Selling expenseDepreciation expenseCashRent expenseSales
(Click to select)Administrative expensesCashDepreciation expenseRent expenseSales



Total costs and expenses $ $ $



(Click to select)Net incomeNet loss $ $ $







Should the company accept or reject the offer?
The company should reject the offer
The company should accept the offer

for each of the following situations two scenarios are describe 273721

For each of the following situations, two scenarios are described, labeled A and B. Choose which scenario is descriptive of a setting corresponding to activity based responsibility accounting and which is descriptive of financial based responsibility accounting.

Provide a brief commentary on the differences between the two systems for each situation, addressing the possible advantages of the activity based view over the financial based view.

Situation 1

A: The purchasing manager, receiving manager, and accounts payable manager are given joint responsibility for procurement. The charges given to the group of managers are to reduce costs of acquiring materials, decrease the time required to obtain materials from outside suppliers, and reduce the number of purchasing mistakes (e.g., wrong type of materials or the wrong quantities ordered).

B: The plant manager commended the manager of the grinding department for increasing his department’s machine utilization rates—and doing so without exceeding the department’s budget. The plant manager then asked other department managers to make an effort to obtain similar efficiency improvements.

Situation 2

A: Delivery mistakes had been reduced by 70 percent, saving over $40,000 per year. Furthermore, delivery time to customers had been cut by two days. According to company policy, the team responsible for the savings was given a bonus equal to 25 percent of the savings attributable to improving delivery quality. Company policy also provided a salary increase of 1 percent for every day saved in delivery time.

B: Bill Johnson, manager of the product development department, was pleased with his department’s performance on the last quarter’s projects. They had managed to complete all projects under budget, virtually assuring Bill of a fat bonus, just in time to help with this year’s Christmas purchases.

Situation 3

A: ?oHarvey, don’t worry about the fact that your department is producing at only 70 percent capacity. Increasing your output would simply pile up inventory in front of the next production department. That would be costly for the organization as a whole. Sometimes, one department must reduce its performance so that the performance of the entire organization can improve.??

B: ?oSusan, I am concerned about the fact that your department’s performance measures have really dropped over the past quarter. Labor usage variances are unfavorable, and I also see that your machine utilization rates are down. Now, I know you are not a bottleneck department, but I get a lot of flack when my managers’ efficiency ratings drop.??

Situation 4

A: Colby was muttering to himself. He had just received last quarter’s budgetary performance report. Once again, he had managed to spend more than budgeted for both materials and labor. The real question now was how to improve his performance for the next quarter.

B: Great! Cycle time had been reduced and, at the same time, the number of defective products had been cut by 35 percent. Cutting the number of defects reduced production costs by more than planned. Trends were favorable for all three performance measures.

Situation 5

A: Cambry was furious. An across the board budget cut! ?oHow can they expect me to provide the computer services required on less money? Management is convinced that costs are out of control, but I would like to know where—at least in my department!??

B: After a careful study of the accounts payable department, it was discovered that 80 percent of an accounts payable clerk’s time was spent resolving discrepancies between the purchase order, receiving document, and the supplier’s invoice. Other activities such as recording and preparing checks consumed only 20 percent of a clerk’s time. A redesign of the procurement process eliminated virtually all discrepancies and produced significant cost savings.

Situation 6

A: Five years ago, the management of Breeann Products commissioned an outside engineering consulting firm to conduct a time and motion study so that labor efficiency standards could be developed and used in production. These labor efficiency standards are still in use today and are viewed by management as an important indicator of productive efficiency.

B: Janet was quite satisfied with this quarter’s labor performance. When compared with the same quarter of last year, labor productivity had increased by 23 percent. Most of the increase was due to a new assembly approach suggested by production line workers. She was also pleased to see that materials productivity had increased. The increase in materials productivity was attributed to reducing scrap because of improved quality.

Situation 7

A: ?oThe system, not people at work stations, is what converts materials into products. Therefore, process efficiency is more important than labor efficiency—but we also must pay particular attention to those who use the products we produce, whether inside or outside the firm.??

B: ?oI was quite happy to see a revenue increase of 15 percent over last year, especially when the budget called for a 10 percent increase. However, after reading the recent copy of our trade journal, I now wonder whether we are doing so well. I found out that the market expanded by 30 percent, and our leading competitor increased its sales by 40 percent.??

gaston company manufactures furniture one of its product lines 273725

Gaston Company manufactures furniture. One of its product lines is an economy line kitchen table. During last year, Gaston produced and sold 100,000 units for $100 per unit. Sales of the table are on a bid basis, but Gaston has always been able to win sufficient bids using the $100 price. This year, however, Gaston was losing more than its share of bids. Concerned, Larry Franklin, owner and president of the company, called a meeting of his executive committee (Megan Johnson, marketing manager; Fred Davis, quality manager; Kevin Jones, production manager; and Helen Jackson, controller).

Larry: I don’t understand why we’re losing bids. Megan, do you have an explanation?

Megan: Yes, as a matter of fact. Two competitors have lowered their price to $92 per unit. That’s too big a difference for most of our buyers to ignore. If we want to keep selling our 100,000 units per year, we will need to lower our price to $92. Otherwise, our sales will drop to about 20,000 to 25,000 per year.

Helen: The unit contribution margin on the table is $10. Lowering the price to $92 will cost us $8 per unit. Based on a sales volume of 100,000, we’d make $200,000 in contribution margin. If we keep the price at $100, our contribution margin would be $200,000 to $250,000. If we have to lose, let’s just take the lower market share. It’s better than lowering our prices.

Megan: Perhaps. But the same thing could happen to some of our other product lines. My sources tell me that these two companies are on the tail end of a major quality improvement program—one that allows them significant savings. We need to rethink our whole competitive strategy—at least if we want to stay in business. Ideally, we should match the price reduction and work to reduce the costs to recapture the lost contribution margin.

Fred: I think I have something to offer. We are about to embark on a new quality improvement program of our own. I have brought the following estimates of the current quality costs for this economy line. As you can see, these costs run about 16 percent of current sales. That’s excessive, and we believe that they can be reduced to about 4 percent of sales over time.

Scrap ………………………………………….. $ 700,000

Rework …………………………………………. 300,000

Rejects (sold as seconds to discount houses) …… 250,000

Returns (due to poor workmanship) …………… 350,000

Total …………………………………………. $1,600,000

Larry: This sounds good. Fred, how long will it take for you to achieve this reduction?

Fred: All these costs vary with sales level, so I’ll express their reduction rate in those terms. Our best guess is that we can reduce these costs by about 1 percent of sales per quarter. So it should take about 12 quarters, or three years, to achieve the full benefit. Keep in mind that this is with an improvement in quality.

Megan: This offers us some hope. If we meet the price immediately, we can maintain our market share. Furthermore, if we can ever reach the point of reducing the price below the $92 level, then we can increase our market share. I estimate that we can increase sales by about 10,000 units for every $1 of price reduction beyond the $92 level. Kevin, how much extra capacity for this line do we have?

Kevin: We can handle an extra 30,000 or 40,000 tables per year.

Required:

1. Assume that Gaston immediately reduces the bid price to $92. How long will it be before the unit contribution margin is restored to $10, assuming that quality costs are reduced as expected and that sales are maintained at 100,000 units per year (25,000 per quarter)?

2. Assume that Gaston holds the price at $92 until the 4 percent target is achieved. At this new level of quality costs, should the price be reduced? If so, by how much should the price be reduced, and what would be the increase in contribution margin? Assume that price can be reduced only in $1 increments.

3. Now assume that Gaston begins the quality improvement program but does not immediately reduce the bid price. Instead, prices will be reduced when profitable to do so. Assume that prices can be reduced only by $1 increments. Identify when the first future price change (if any) should occur.

4. Discuss the differences in viewpoints concerning the decision to decrease prices and the short run contribution margin analysis done by Helen, the controller. Did quality cost information play an important role in the strategic decision making illustrated by the problem?

huebert company provided the following information for last year 273755

Huebert Company provided the following information for last year:

Beginning inventories:

Direct materials …………………….$ 52,700

Work in process ……………………. 25,000

Finished goods ……………………… 75,000

Ending inventories:

Direct materials …………………….$ 42,700

Work in process ……………………. 50,000

Finished goods …………………….. 140,000

During the year, direct materials purchases amounted to $270,000, direct labor cost was $304,000, and overhead cost was $506,000. During the year, 25,000 units were completed.

Required:

1. Calculate the total cost of direct materials used in production.

2. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured. Calculate the unit manufacturing cost.

3. Of the unit manufacturing cost calculated in Requirement 2, assume $11 is direct materials and $12 is direct labor. What is the prime cost per unit? Conversion cost per unit?

in the 1400s europeans valued the gold gems drugs and 273772

In the 1400s, Europeans valued the gold, gems, drugs, and spices that came from the Orient. However, these goods were very costly, since they could be transported to Europe only via long overland caravans. Portuguese sailors tried to reach the Orient by sea—around Africa. Christopher Columbus felt that a shorter, easier route lay to the west. He offered Queen Isabella of Spain a business proposition: financing for three completely outfitted ships, honors, titles, and a percentage of the trade in exchange for opening up a direct route to the Indies and establishing a city devoted to trade. King John II of Portugal had previously turned down his offer, but Queen Isabella accepted. On August 3, 1492, the Nina, Pinta, and Santa Maria set sail from Palos, Spain.

Required:

Form a cooperative learning group (typically a group of four or five). Using a single piece of paper and a pen, record the ideas/responses of each member of the group to the following two items:

1. Suppose a communication device had existed in 1492 that permitted Isabella to talk with Columbus for 15 minutes once each month during the eight month voyage. What types of accounting information would she have wanted to obtain regarding the success of the enterprise? Write down a list of the questions she might have asked (each group member in turn should come up with a question).

2. Classify each question as a financial accounting (F) or cost management (CM) type of question. Do the questions change as the months progress?

jackson company has installed a jit purchasing and manufacturing 273780

Jackson Company has installed a JIT purchasing and manufacturing system and is using backflush accounting for its cost flows. It currently uses the purchase of materials as the first trigger point and the completion of goods as the second trigger point. During the month of August, Jackson had the following transactions:

Raw materials purchased ……. $810,000

Direct labor cost ……………… 135,000

Overhead cost ………………… 675,000

Conversion cost applied ……… 877,500*

*$135,000 labor plus $742,500 overhead.

There were no beginning or ending inventories. All goods produced were sold with a 60 percent markup. Any variance is closed to Cost of Goods Sold. (Variances are recognized monthly.)

Required:

1. Prepare the journal entries that would have been made using a traditional accounting approach for cost flows.

2. Prepare the journal entries for the month using backflush costing.

jerry goff president of harmony electronics was concerned abou 273783

Jerry Goff, president of Harmony Electronics, was concerned about the end of the year marketing report that he had just received. According to Emily Hagood, marketing manager, a price decrease for the coming year was again needed to maintain the company’s annual sales volume of integrated circuit boards. This would make a bad situation worse.

The current selling price of $18 per unit was producing a $2 per unit profit—half the customary $4 per unit profit. Foreign competitors keep reducing their prices. To match the latest reduction would reduce the price from $18 to $14. This would put the price below the cost to produce and sell it. How could the foreign firms sell for such a low price? Determined to find out if there were problems with the company’s operations, Jerry decided to hire Jan Booth, a well known consultant who specializes in methods of continuous improvement. Jan indicated that she felt that an activity based management system needed to be implemented. After three weeks, Jan had identified the following activities and costs:

Batch level activities:

Setting up equipment ………………… $ 125,000

Materials handling ……………………… 180,000

Inspecting products …………………….. 122,000

Product sustaining activities:

Engineering support …………………… 120,000

Handling customer complaints ………… 100,000

Filling warranties ………………………. 170,000

Storing goods ……………………………. 80,000

Expediting goods ……………………….. 75,000

Unit level activities:

Using materials ………………………… 500,000

Using power ……………………………… 48,000

Manual insertion labora …………………. 250,000

Other direct labor ………………………. 150,000

Total costs ………………………….. $1,920,000b

a Diodes, resistors, and integrated circuits are inserted manually into the circuit board.

b This total cost produces a unit cost of $16 for last year’s sales volume.

Jan reported that some preliminary activity analysis shows that per unit costs can be reduced by at least $7. Since Emily had indicated that the market share (sales volume) for the boards could be increased by 50 percent if the price could be reduced to $12, Jerry became quite excited.

Required:

1. What is activity based management? What connection does it have to continuous improvement?

2. Identify as many non value added costs as possible. Compute the cost savings per unit that would be realized if these costs were eliminated. Was Jan correct in her preliminary cost reduction assessment? Discuss actions that the company can take to reduce or eliminate the non value added activities.

3. Compute the target cost required to maintain current market share while earning a profit of $4 per unit. Now, compute the target cost required to expand sales by 50 percent. How much cost reduction would be required to achieve each target?

4. Assume that Jan suggested that kaizen costing be used to help reduce costs. The first suggested kaizen initiative is described by the following: switching to automated insertion would save $60,000 of engineering support and $90,000 of direct labor. Now, what is the total potential cost reduction per unit available? With these additional reductions, can Harmony Electronics achieve the target cost to maintain current sales? To increase it by 50 percent? What form of activity analysis is this kaizen initiative: reduction, sharing, elimination, or selection?

5. Calculate income based on current sales, prices, and costs. Now, calculate the income using a $14 price and a $12 price, assuming that the maximum cost reduction possible is achieved (including Requirement 4’s kaizen reduction). What price should be selected?

organizational plan and financial plan develop key parts of an organizational plan 273784

Develop key parts of an organizational plan.

  1. Describe the legal form of your business (proprietorship, partnership, or corporation).
  2. Justify the legal form you selected by detailing its advantages over other forms.
  3. Identify the positions and describe the roles of the executive management team.
  4. Address whether or not you will use a board of directors and / or a board of advisors and why.

Develop the rudiments of a financial plan:

  1. Explain the financial requirements for the venture, including the amounts needed for cash flow and profitability.
  2. Create a cost of operating report for your venture.
  3. Prepare a break even analysis for your venture.
  4. Explain the sources of funding for the venture.
  5. Research and cite at least five (5) reputable academic sources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one inch margins on all sides; references must follow APA or school specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student’s name, the professor’s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine the organization plan options and how the organizational structure aligns with the business strategy.
  • Analyze the financial planning process for a new venture.
  • Analyze different sources of capital to determine the appropriate financing for a business venture.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in entrepreneurship and innovation.
  • Write clearly and concisely about entrepreneurship and innovation using proper writing mechanics.

jordan company produced 150 000 floor lamps during the past cale 273788

Jordan Company produced 150,000 floor lamps during the past calendar year. Jordan had 2,500 floor lamps in finished goods inventory at the beginning of the year. At the end of the year, there were 11,500 floor lamps in finished goods inventory. The lamps sell for $50 each. Jordan’s accounting records provide the following information for the past year:

Purchases of direct materials …………………………$1,675,000

Direct materials inventory, January ………………….. 1 380,000

Direct materials inventory, December 31 ……………. 327,000

Direct labor …………………………………………… 2,000,000

Indirect labor …………………………………………. 790,000

Depreciation, factory building ……………………….. 1,100,000

Depreciation, factory equipment ……………………… 630,000

Property taxes on the factory …………………………. 65,000

Utilities, factory ………………………………………. 150,000

Insurance on the factory ………………………………. 200,000

Research and development ……………………………. 120,000

Salary, sales supervisor ………………………………… 85,000

Commissions, salespersons ……………………………. 370,000

General administration ………………………………… 390,000

Work in process inventory, January 1 …………………. 450,000

Work in process inventory, December 31 ……………… 750,000

Finished goods inventory, January 1 …………………… 107,500

Finished goods inventory, December 31 ………………. 489,000

Required:

1. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured statement.

2. Compute the cost of producing one floor lamp last year.

3. Prepare an income statement on an absorption costing basis.

cruz company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it mak 273789

Cruz Company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011. its Cash account shows an $11.352 debit balance. Cruz’s June 30 bank statement shows $10,332 on deposit in the bank. a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $1,713. b. The June 30 bank statement included a $23 debit memorandum for bank services; Cruz has not yet recorded the cost of these services. c. In reviewing the bank statement, a $90 check written by Cruz Company was mistakenly recorded in Cruz Company’s books at $99. d. June 30 cash receipts of $2.724 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement. e. The bank statement included a $5 credit for interest earned on the cash in the bank. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Cruz Company using the above information. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “S” sign in your response.)

CRUZ COMPANY Bank Reconciliation June 30, 2011

Bank statement balance Add: (Click to select)

Book balance Add: I (Click to select)

I (Click to select)

Deduct: Deduct:

I (Click to select)

H I H I

I (Click to select)

Adjusted bank balance Adjusted book balance

$I

Attachments:

kelly gray production manager was upset with the latest perfor 273792

Kelly Gray, production manager, was upset with the latest performance report, which indicated that she was $100,000 over budget. Given the efforts that she and her workers had made, she was confident that they had met or beat the budget. Now, she was not only upset but also genuinely puzzled over the results. Three items—direct labor, power, and setups—were over budget. The actual costs for these three items follow:

Actual Costs

Direct labor …………. $210,000

Power ………………… 135,000

Setups ………………… 140,000

Total …………………. $485,000

Kelly knew that her operation had produced more units than originally had been budgeted, so more power and labor had naturally been used. She also knew that the uncertainty in scheduling had led to more setups than planned. When she pointed this out to John Huang, the controller, he assured her that the budgeted costs had been adjusted for the increase in productive activity. Curious, Kelly questioned John about the methods used to make the adjustment.

John: If the actual level of activity differs from the original planned level, we adjust the budget by using budget formulas—formulas that allow us to predict what the costs will be for different levels of activity.

Kelly: The approach sounds reasonable. However, I’m sure something is wrong here. Tell me exactly how you adjusted the costs of labor, power, and setups.

John: First, we obtain formulas for the individual items in the budget by using the method of least squares. We assume that cost variations can be explained by variations in productive activity where activity is measured by direct labor hours. Here is a list of the cost formulas for the three items you mentioned. The variable X is the number of direct labor hours:

Labor cost = $10X

Power cost = $5,000 + $4X

Setup cost = $100,000

Kelly: I think I see the problem. Power costs don’t have a lot to do with direct labor hours. They have more to do with machine hours. As production increases, machine hours increase more rapidly than direct labor hours. Also, . . .

John: You know, you have a point. The coefficient of determination for power cost is only about 50 percent. That leaves a lot of unexplained cost variation. The coefficient for labor, however, is much better—it explains about 96 percent of the cost variation. Setup costs, of course, are fixed.

Kelly: Well, as I was about to say, setup costs also have very little to do with direct labor hours. And I might add that they certainly are not fixed—at least not all of them.

We had to do more setups than our original plan called for because of the scheduling changes. And we have to pay our people when they work extra hours. It seems as if we are always paying overtime. I wonder if we simply do not have enough people for the setup activity. Supplies are used for each setup, and these are not cheap. Did you build these extra costs of increased setup activity into your budget?

John: No, we assumed that setup costs were fixed. I see now that some of them could vary as the number of setups increases. Kelly, let me see if I can develop some cost formulas based on better explanatory variables. I’ll get back with you in a few days.

Assume that after a few days’ work, John developed the following cost formulas, all with a coefficient of determination greater than 90 percent:

Labor cost = $10X, where X = direct labor hours

Power cost = $68,000 + 0.9Y, where Y = machine hours

Setup cost = $98,000 + $400Z, where Z = number of setups

The actual measures of each of the activity drivers are as follows:

Direct labor hours ……….. 20,000

Machine hours ………….. 90,000

Number of setups …………. 110

Required:

1. Prepare a performance report for direct labor, power, and setups using the direct labor based formulas.

2. Prepare a performance report for direct labor, power, and setups using the multiple cost driver formulas that John developed.

3. Of the two approaches, which provides the more accurate picture of Kelly’s performance? Why?

4. After reviewing the approach to performance measurement, a consultant remarked that non value added cost trend reports would be a much better performance measurement approach than comparing actual costs with budgeted costs—even if activity flexible budgets were used. Do you agree or disagree? Explain.

myers electronics inc produces hand held calculators three o 273812

Myers Electronics, Inc., produces hand held calculators. Three of the major electronic components are produced internally (components 2X334K, 5Y227M, and 8Z555L). There is a separate department in the plant for each component. The three manufactured components and other parts are assembled (by the assembly department) and then tested (by the testing department). Any unit that fails the test is sent to the rework department where the unit is taken apart and the failed component is replaced. Data from the testing department reveal that component 2X334K is the most frequent cause of calculator failure. One out of every 100 calculators fails because of a faulty 2X334K component. Recently, William Dawson was hired to manage the 2X334K department. The plant manager told William that he needed to be more sensitive to the needs of the department’s customers. This charge puzzled William somewhat—after all, the component is not sold to anyone but is used in producing the plant’s calculators.

Required:

1. Explain to William who his ?ocustomers?? are.

2. Discuss how William can be sensitive to his customers. Explain also how this increased sensitivity could improve the company’s time based competitive ability.

3. What role would cost management play in helping William be more sensitive to his customers?

nico parts inc produces electronic products with short life c 273813

Nico Parts, Inc., produces electronic products with short life cycles (of less than two years). Development has to be rapid, and the profitability of the products is tied strongly to the ability to find designs that will keep production and logistics costs low. Recently, management has also decided that post purchase costs are important in design decisions. Last month, a proposal for a new product was presented to management. The total market was projected at 200,000 units (for the two year period). The proposed selling price was $130 per unit. At this price, market share was expected to be 25 percent. The manufacturing and logistics costs were estimated to be $120 per unit.

Upon reviewing the projected figures, Brian Metcalf, president of Nico, called in his chief design engineer, Mark Williams, and his marketing manager, Cathy McCourt. The following conversation was recorded.

Brian: Mark, as you know, we agreed that a profit of $15 per unit is needed for this new product. Also, as I look at the projected market share, 25 percent isn’t acceptable. Total profits need to be increased. Cathy, what suggestions do you have?

Cathy: Simple. Decrease the selling price to $125 and we expand our market share to 35 percent. To increase total profits, however, we need some cost reductions as well.

Brian: You’re right. However, keep in mind that I do not want to earn a profit that is less than $15 per unit.

Mark: Does that $15 per unit factor in preproduction costs? You know we have already spent $100,000 on developing this product. To lower costs will require more expenditure on development.

Brian: Good point. No, the projected cost of $120 does not include the $100,000 we have already spent. I do want a design that will provide a $15 per unit profit, including consideration of preproduction costs.

Cathy: I might mention that postpurchase costs are important as well. The current design will impose about $10 per unit for using, maintaining, and disposing our product. That’s about the same as our competitors. If we can reduce that cost to about $5 per unit by designing a better product, we could probably capture about 50 percent of the market. I have just completed a marketing survey at Mark’s request and have found out that the current design has two features not valued by potential customers.

These two features have a projected cost of $6 per unit. However, the price consumers are willing to pay for the product is the same with or without the features.

Required:

1. Calculate the target cost associated with the initial 25 percent market share. Does the initial design meet this target? Now calculate the total life cycle profit that the current (initial) design offers (including preproduction costs).

2. Assume that the two features that are apparently not valued by consumers will be eliminated. Also assume that the selling price is lowered to $125.

a. Calculate the target cost for the $125 price and 35 percent market share.

b. How much more cost reduction is needed?

c. What are the total life cycle profits now projected for the new product?

d. Describe the three general approaches that Nico can take to reduce the projected cost to this new target. Of the three approaches, which is likely to produce the most reduction?

3. Suppose that the engineering department has two new designs: Design A and Design B. Both designs eliminate the two non valued features. Both designs also reduce production and logistics costs by an additional $8 per unit. Design A, however, leaves post purchase costs at $10 per unit, while Design B reduces post purchase costs to $4 per unit. Developing and testing Design A costs an additional $150,000, while Design B costs an additional $300,000. Calculate the total lifecycle profits under each design. Which would you choose? Explain. What if the design you chose cost an additional $500,000 instead of $150,000 or $300,000?

Would this have changed your decision?

4. Refer to Requirement 3. For every extra dollar spent on preproduction activities, how much benefit was generated? What does this say about the importance of knowing the linkages between preproduction activities and later activities?

photo dive inc manufactures disposable underwater cameras du 273815

Photo Dive, Inc., manufactures disposable underwater cameras. During the last calendar year, a total of 270,000 cameras were made, and 274,000 were sold for $8 each. The actual unit cost per camera produced during the year is as follows:

Direct materials ……………………….$2.25

Direct labor …………………………… 1.50

Variable overhead ……………………. 0.65

Fixed overhead ……………………….. 0.70

Total unit cost …………………………$5.10

Research and development expenses amounted to $70,000. The selling expenses consisted of a commission of $0.25 per unit sold and advertising copayments totaling $36,000. Administrative expenses, all fixed, equaled $83,000. There were no beginning and ending work in process inventories. Beginning finished goods inventory was $30,600 for 6,000 cameras.

Required:

1. Calculate the number of cameras in ending finished goods inventory and their costs.

2. Prepare a cost of goods sold statement for last year.

3. Prepare an absorption costing income statement for last year.

provide at least one example of an appropriate cost driver 273818

Provide at least one example of an appropriate cost driver (allocation base) for each of the following activities.

a. Workers count completed goods before moving them to a warehouse.

b. A logistics manager runs a computer program to determine the materials release schedule.

c. Janitors clean the factory floor after workers have left.

d. Mechanics apply lubricant to machines.

e. Engineers design a product production layout.

f. Engineers set up machines to produce a product.

g. The production supervisor completes the paperwork initiating a work order.

h. The production manager prepares materials requisition forms.

i. Workers move materials from the warehouse to the factory floor.

j. Assembly line machines are operated.

refer to integrative case 9 48 in chapter 9 assume that 273847

Refer to Integrative Case 9 48 in Chapter 9. Assume that all of the facts in Case 9 48 still hold except that the practical capacity of the machinery is 20,000 hours instead of 10,000 hours.

Required

a. Recompute the unit costs for each of the cola products: Diet, Regular, Cherry, and Grape.

b. What is the cost of unused capacity? What do you recommend that Rockness Bottling do with this unused capacity?

c. Now assume that Rockness is considering producing a fifth product: Vanilla cola. Because Vanilla cola is in high demand in Rockness Bottling’s market, assume that it would use 10,000 hours of machine time to make 100,000 units. (Recall that the machine capacity in this case is 20,000 hours, while Diet, Regular, Cherry, and Grape consume only 10,000 hours.) Vanilla cola’s per unit costs would be identical to those of Diet cola except for the machine usage costs. What would be the cost of Vanilla cola? Calculate on a per unit basis, and then in total.

unit3 prinicpal of accountingdb 273860

need 4 paragraph 4paragraphs Details: The Discussion Board (DB) is part of the core of online learning.

Document Preview:

4paragraphs??Details:?The Discussion Board (DB) is part of the core of online learning. Classroom discussion in an online environment requires the active participation of students and the instructor to create robust interaction and dialogue. Every student is expected to create an original response to the open ended DB question as well as engage in dialogue by responding to posts created by others throughout the week. At the end of each unit, DB participation will be assessed based on both level of engagement and the quality of the contribution to the discussion. At a minimum, each student will be expected to post an original and thoughtful response to the DB question and contribute to the weekly dialogue by responding to at least two other posts from students. The first contribution must be posted before midnight (Central Time) on Wednesday of each week. Two additional responses are required after Wednesday of each week. Students are highly encouraged to engage on the Discussion Board early and often, as that is the primary way the university tracks class attendance and participation. The purpose of the Discussion Board is to allow students to learn through sharing ideas and experiences as they relate to course content and the DB question. Because it is not possible to engage in two way dialogue after a conversation has ended, no posts to the DB will be accepted after the end of each unit. You have been hired as the CFO of a new company and are determining the company’s accounting needs. Explain to your staff at least 2 ways in which accounting data are used to make business decisions. Explain at least three related accounting terms or theories.??

Attachments:

terry guentner the production manager was grumbling about the 273865

Terry Guentner, the production manager, was grumbling about the new quality cost system the plant controller wanted to put into place. ?oIf we start trying to track every bit of spoiled material, we’ll never get any work done. Everybody knows when they ruin something. Why bother to keep track? This is a waste of time. Besides, this isn’t the first time scrap reduction has been emphasized. You tell my workers to reduce scrap, and I’ll guarantee it will go away, but not in the way you would like.??

Required:

1. Why do you suppose that the controller wants a written record of spoiled material? If ?oeverybody knows?? what the spoilage rate is, what benefits can come from keeping a written record?

2. Now consider Terry Guentner’s position. In what way(s) could he be correct? What did he mean by his ?oguarantee?? concerning scrap reduction? Can this be avoided? Explain.

the actions listed next are associated with either an activity b 273867

The actions listed next are associated with either an activity based operational control system or a functional based operational control system:

a. Budgeted costs for the maintenance department are compared with the actual costs of the maintenance department.

b. The maintenance department manager receives a bonus for ?obeating?? budget.

c. The costs of resources are traced to activities and then to products.

d. The purchasing department is set up as a responsibility center.

e. Activities are identified and listed.

f. Activities are categorized as adding or not adding value to the organization.

g. A standard for a product’s material usage cost is set and compared against the product’s actual materials usage cost.

h. The cost of performing an activity is tracked over time.

i. The distance between moves is identified as the cause of materials handling cost.

j. A purchasing agent is rewarded for buying parts below the standard price set by the company.

k. The cost of the materials handling activity is reduced dramatically by redesigning the plant layout.

l. An investigation is undertaken to find out why the actual labor cost for the production of 1,000 units is greater than the labor standard allowed.

m. The percentage of defective units is calculated and tracked over time.

n. Engineering has been charged with finding a way to reduce setup time by 75 percent.

o. The manager of the receiving department lays off two receiving clerks so that the fourth quarter budget can be met.

Required:

Classify the preceding actions as belonging to either an activity based operational control system or a functional based control system. Explain why you classified each action as you did.

the administrator of elections for the city of sweetwater has 273868

The administrator of elections for the city of Sweetwater has been asked to perform an activity analysis of its optical scanning center. The optical scanning center reads voter forms into the computer. The result of the activity analysis is summarized as follows:

Activities Activity Cost

Correcting errors identified by election commission ………..$ 96,000

Correcting jams ………………………………………………..84,000

Correcting scan errors …………………………………………48,000

Loading ………………………………………………………..24,000

Logging in control codes (for later reconciliation) ……………18,000

Program scanner ……………………………………………….24,000

Rerunning job due to scan reading errors ……………………..22,000

Scanning ……………………………………………………….52,000

Verifying scan accuracy via reconciling totals …………………20,000

Verifying scanner accuracy with test run ………………………12,000

Total …………………………………………………………$400,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a Pareto chart of the department activities.

2. Use the activity cost information to determine the percentages of total department costs that are prevention, appraisal, internal failure, external failure, and not costs of quality. Round percentages to one decimal place.

3. Determine the percentages of the total department costs that are value and non value added. Round percentages to one decimal place.

4. Interpret the information.

accounting questions ec3076 assignment 1 2013 273880

EC3076 Assignment 1 2013
Question 1
Brown’s Grocery Store
Trial Balance as at 30 September 2012 Dr Cr Adjustments
£’000 £’000 1. The building cost includes land valued at £150,000
Acc Depreciation of Building 80 2. Depreciation is to be provided at 25% reducing balance on equipment and 2% straight line on buildings
Acc. Depreciation of Equipment 80 3. The owner took goods, for his own use, from inventory that cost £15000 no adjustment has been made
Bank Loan 300 4. Insurance includes £8000 for the year to 31 March 2012
Building 390 5. An accrual for heat and light for September 2012 is needed
Capital 286 6. Bank loan interest at 4% is to be provided for
Carriage inwards 34 7. Inventory at 30 September 2012 is valued at cost at £120,000
Cash at bank 225 8. A bad debt of £5000 is to be written off and a provision set up for 2% of the remaining receivables
Discounts allowed 12 9. The owner sold some equipment at the end of the year for £22,000 he has recorded the cash received but
Discounts received 21 nothing else. The equipment originally cost £50,000 4 years ago.
Drawings 50 10. An invoice for a customer for £10,000 as been correctly recorded in sales but credited to payables.
Equipment 260
General expenses 63 You are required to :
Heat and Light 121 (a) Set up a suspense account and explain its uses
Insurance 50 (b) Record journal entries for all of the above adjustments and show that the suspense account is cleared
Payables 60 (c) Prepare an income statement and a balance sheet
Purchases 300
Receivables 110
Returns inwards 45
Returns outwards 25
Sales 576
Inventory at 1 October 2011 100
Wages 120
1655 1653
Question 2
(a) On 1 January 2012 trade receivables were £15070 and on 31 December they were £40130. If £249800 has been received in the year from customers what is the value of credit sales
for the year.
(b) On 1 January 2012 trade receivables were £15070 and on 31 December they were £40130. If £249800 has been received in the year from customers after returns of £7500 and discounts
allowed of £8500 what is the value of credit sales for the year.
(c) A business achieves a constant mark up of 25%. If Sales are £480000 and inventory has risen by £6000 what were the purchases for the period.
(d) A business achieves a constant margin of 25%. If Purchases were £480000 and Sales £560000 what has happened to inventory during the period?
(e) Grace runs a clothing store. On 1 July 2012 her inventory at cost was £8200 and she owed her suppliers £7400. In the 6 months to 31 December her sales (all for cash)were £70,000
and she applies a constant mark up of 40%. On 31 December there was a fire and all of the inventory was destroyed. Grace has paid £42000 to her suppliers since 1 July and owed
a further £9000. What was the value of the stock destroyed by the fire.
(f) In the last question how would the destroyed stock be accounted for? Give answers for with and without insurance.
Please submit a hard copy of your answers to reception before 12pm (noon) on Thursday 28th February
Your work should clearly show which seminar group you attend (eg Monday 2pm)
Feedback will be given in seminars in week 19

Attachments:

help with accounting please answer all the questions 421088

Els Company most recently reconciled its bank statement and book balances of cash on August 31
and it reported two checks outstanding, No. 5888 for $1,038.05 and No. 5893 for $484.25. The following
information is available for its September 30, 2005, reconciliation:
ELS COMPANY

August 31 bank reconciliation:
Outstanding checks:
No. 5888 1,038.05
No. 5893 495.95

From the September 30 bank statement:

September 30 Bank Statement:

Previous balance 16,800.45
Total Checks and Debits 9,620.05
Total Deposits and Credits 11,182.85
Current Balance 18,363.25

Checks and Debits Daily Balance
Date Check Amount Date Amount
09/03 5888 1,038.05 8/31 16,800.45
09/04 5902 731.90 9/3 15,762.40
09/07 5901 1,824.25 9/4 15,030.50
09/17 NSF 588.25 9/5 16,134.25
09/20 5905 937.00 9/7 14,310.00
09/22 5903 399.10 9/12 16,536.90
09/22 5904 2,080.00 9/17 16,948.65
09/28 5907 213.85 9/20 15,011.65
09/29 5909 1,807.65 9/21 19,104.65
9/22 1,625.55
9/25 18,977.25
Deposits and Credits 9/28 18,763.40
Date Description Amount 9/29 16,955.75
09/05 Deposit 1,103.75 9/30 18,363.25
09/12 Deposit 2,226.90
09/21 Deposit 4,093.00
09/25 Deposit 2,351.70
09/30 Interest 2,250.00
09/30 Credit memo 1,385.00

From Els Company’s Accounting Records:

Cash Receipts Deposited: Cash Disbursements:

Date Cash Debit Check No. Cash Credit
Sept. 5 1,103.75 5901 1,824.25
12 2,226.90 5902 731.90
21 4,093.00 5903 399.10
25 2,351.70 5904 2,050.00
30 1,582.75 5905 937.00
11,358.10 5906 859.30
5907 213.85
5908 276.00
5909 1,807.65
9,099.05

Cash Acct. No. 101
Date Explanation PR Debit Credit Balance
Aug. 31 Balance 15,278.15
Sept. 30 Total receipts 11,358.10 26,636.25
30 Total disbursements 9,099.05 17,537.20

Check No. 5904 for computer equipment:
Entered in accounting records 2,050.00
Correct amount of check 2,080.00

Collection of Note:
Credit memorandum from bank 1,400.00
Bank collection fee 15.00

Check figures:
(1) Reconciled balance $18,326
(2) Credit Note Receivable 1,400

Check No. 5904 is correctly drawn for $2,080 to pay for computer equipment; however, the recordkeeper
misread the amount and entered it in the accounting records with a debit to Computer
Equipment and a credit to Cash of $2,050. The NSF check shown in the statement was originally
received from a customer, S. Nilson, in payment of her account. Its return has not yet been
recorded by the company. The credit memorandum is from the collection of a $1,400 note for Els
Company by the bank. The bank deducted a $15 collection fee. The collection and fee are not yet
recorded.
Required
1. Prepare the September 30, 2005, bank reconciliation for this company.
2. Prepare the journal entries to adjust the book balance of cash to the reconciled balance.
Analysis Component
3. The bank statement reveals that some of the prenumbered checks in the sequence are missing.
Describe three situations that could explain this.

cost accounting 421126

Eppes Plating Company plans to sell 120,000 units of a certain product line at a price of $6. There are 10,000 units of the product in the inventory at January 1 and the inventory is to be increased 20% during the year. Two types of materials are used to make the product. Four units of Material A each costing 30 cents are required for each unit of product, and two units of Material B costing 40 cents are required for each unit of product. On January 1 there are 10,000 units of Material A in inventory and 5,000 units of Material B. Plans for the year indicate that 12,000 units of Material A and 6,000 units of Material B are to be produced in 15 minutes of direct labor time. Direct labor is paid at the rate of $8.00 an hour. The variable manufacturing overhead varies at the rate of $.50 per direct labor hour and the fixed manufacturing overhead for the year is estimated at $140,000. Required: a. Prepare a production budget for the year. b. Prepare a materials purchases budget for the year. c. Prepare a labor cost budget for the year. d. Prepare a budget for manufacturing overhead for the year.

a equipment was purchased for 800 000 on january 1 2014 it 421137

A) Equipment was purchased for $800,000 on January 1, 2014. It has an estimated useful life of 8 years and a residual value of $120,000. Depreciation is being computed using the straight line method. What amount should be shown for the Equipment, net of accumulated depreciation, in the company’s December 31, 2015 balance sheet?

a. $595,000.

b. $630,000.

c. $510,000.

d. $715,000.

B) Joe’s Copy Shop bought equipment for $60,000 on January 1, 2013. Joe estimated the useful life to be 3 years with no salvage value, and the straight line method of depreciation will be used. On January 1, 2014, Joe decides that the business will use the equipment for a total of 5 years. What is the revised depreciation expense for 2014?

a. $10,000.

b. $15,000.

c. $20,000.

d. $8,000.

C) Wells Company’s delivery truck, with a cost of $56,000 was destroyed by fire. At the time of the fire, the balance of the Accumulated Depreciation account amounted to $38,000. The company received $32,000 reimbursement from its insurance company. The gain or loss as a result of the fire was

a. $14,000 gain.

b. $24,000 gain.

c. $24,000 loss.

d. $14,000 loss.

questions 421142

EQUITY FUNDING CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Introduction:

Equity Funding was a financial institution primarily engaged in life insurA?­ance. In 1964, its top management commenced to perpetrate a fraud that would take almost ten years to discover. The intent of the fraud was to inflate earnings so that management could benefit through trading their securities at high prices.

History:

In 1960, Equity Funding Corporation of America was founded by four individuals, who assumed equal partnership interests in the firm. Soon after its formation, two of the partners resigned, leaving the small company to Stanley Goldblum, who held the title of president, and Michael Riordan who served as Chairman of the Board. The principle line of business was the selling of life insurance policies. In 1960 Equity Funding Corporation of America began its innovative “Equity Funding Program,” in which it sold life insurance and a mutual fund investment in single packages. Under the program, customers would sign up to buy mutual fund shares every year, and then borrow against them to pay annual premiums on an insurance policy. The development of this innovative financial investment was the trademark of Equity Funding. In 1964, Equity Funding went public and was soon recognized across the country as one of the most innovative companies in the conservative world of life insurance.

Michael Riordan was killed January 1965 in a mudslide that destroyed his home in the Brentwood suburb of Los Angeles, California. With Riordan gone, Stanley Goldblum was appointed the Chairman of the Board. Fred Levin who was a company employee since 1967 was selected by Goldblum to serve as the executive vice president in charge of life insurance operations. Together Goldblum and Levin significantly increased Equity Funding’s revenue and earnings under aggressive, growth oriented management policies.

By 1972, Equity Funding was one of the ten largest life insurance companies in the United States and was the fastest growing company in the industry. When Equity Funding went public in 1964, its assets totaled $9 million and its pretax earnings was $620,000. Eight years later, Equity Funding total assets approached $500 million with pretax earnings of $26 million. Because of the great success of Equity Funding, security analysts recommended Equity Funding common stock as their most popular investment.

As a result of the rise in stock prices in the early 1970s, Goldblum and Levin became staggeringly wealthy and even though both men came from modest backgrounds, they were accepted into the intermost circles of Los Angeles’ celebrity social circuit. Goldblum was a college dropout working in a meat packing plant ten years earlier. Levin on the other hand earned a law degree from DePaul University in Chicago and worked briefly with the state’s regulatory agency whose responsibility was to oversee the state’s insurance industry. While Levin was quick witted and charming and enjoyed wining and dining business associates, Goldblum was a loner who preferred to spend long hours working out on weights. Goldblum saw great promise in Levin when he joined Equity Funding in 1967. Levin reportedly had no qualms about humiliating employees publicly and kept a tight rein over the insurance sales personnel that he supervised. Levin saw advantages of having a network of well connected friends and business associates and used this to his advantage. Both men were widely respected in their professions.

Fraud:

The Equity Funding fraud, like most financial fraud, had a modest beginning. Goldblum was concerned that Equity Funding’s earnings were too low. The scandal began with the overstating the commissions earned on sales. In order to keep share prices up, Mr. Goldblum instructed his CFO to make fictitious entries in certain receivable and income accounts. Goldblum supplied his subordinates with inflated earnings per share figure and instructed them to make whatever increases necessary to support this figure.

The fraud progressed through three major stages: the “inflated earnings phase,” the “foreign phase,” and the “insurance phase.” The inflated earnings phase involved inflating income with bogus commissions supposedly earned through 1oans made to customers. Equity Funding had a funded life insurA?­ance program whereby customers who bought mutual fund shares could obA?­tain a loan from the company to pay the premium on a life insurance policy. After some years the customer would sell off the mutual fund holdings to repay the loan. The mutual fund shares should have appreciated sufficiently so only a partial sale of shares would be required. Thus, the customer had the cash value of the insurance policy and the remaining mutual fund shares as assets from the investment.

The inflated earnings obtained via bogus commissions were supported by manual entries made on the company’s books. Even though supporting docuA?­mentation did not exist for the entries, the company’s auditors failed to detect the fraud. However, the inflated assets did not bring about cash inflows, and the, company started to suffer severe cash shortages because of real operating losses.

To remedy the cash shortage situation, the fraud moved into the second stage, the foreign phase. The company acquired foreign subsidiaries and used these subsidiaries in complex transfers of assets. Funds were brought into the parent company to reduce the funded loans asset account and falsely repreA?­sent customer repayments of their loans. However, even this scheme proved inadequate.

The third stage, the insurance phase, involved the resale of insurance poliA?­cies to other insurance companies. This practice is not unusual in the insurA?­ance business when one company needs cash immediately and another comA?­pany has a cash surplus. Equity Funding created bogus policies. In the short run it attempted to solve its cash problems by selling these policies to another insurance company. In the long run, however, the purchasing company exA?­pected cash receipts from premiums on the policies. Since these policyholders did not exist, Equity Funding either paid premium through the sale of more fake policies or pretended that the policyholder had died. Thus, it was only a matter of time before the fraud could no longer be concealed.

The computer was not used in the fraud until the insurance phase. The task of creating the bogus policies was too big to be handled manually. InA?­stead, a program was written to generate policies. These policies were coded as the now infamous “Class 99.”

Discovery

In the spring of 1973, Equity Funding collapsed in a period of a few weeks when a disgruntled employee who was involved in the fraud but had been fired by Equity Funding management disclosed the existence of a massive financial fraud within the company. The story was so bizarre that many parties associated with the company refused to believe the story. At the request of Equity Funding’s court appointed bankruptcy trustee, the accounting firm of Touche Ross performed a lengthy audit. This audit disclosed that the company had generated more than $2 billion of fictitious insurance policies. Most of these bogus insurance policies were sold to reinsurance companies. To disguise the fictitious nature of these policies from insurance examiners and outside auditors, Goldblum and other company executives would regularly hold midnight “file stuffing” parties. These parties were held to generate supporting documentation for the thousands of nonexistent policyholders that had allegedly purchased life insurance policies from Equity Funding.

The truth was that Equity Funding was never profitable. Prior to collapsing, the company was technically insolvent even though Goldblum had just issued a press release reporting record earnings for 1972, up 17 percent over 1971.

The most alarming feature of this fraud was the number of individuals who were aware of its existence. Dozens of individuals, both Equity Funding employees and external third parties, helped perpetuate and/or conceal the company’s fraudulent schemes. Eventually, federal prosecutors would convict or obtain guilty pleas from twenty two individuals associated with the company, including three of the company’s independent auditors. As many as fifty additional Equity Funding employees, primarily clerical personnel, participated directly or indirectly in the fraud; however, prosecutors chose not to bring criminal charges against them.

The investigation into the Equity Funding fraud revealed that Goldblum and Levin gradually and deliberately induce their co conspirators to become involved in the fraud. More often than not, these individuals were persuaded with significant monetary rewards in the form of stock rights, large salaries and bonuses, and exorbitant expense accounts while Goldblum and other executives reaped the greatest reward from the sale of their Equity Funding stock. In fact, Goldblum reportedly earned more than $5 million from the sale of his stock.

The motivation behind this major fraud appeared to be Goldblum’s persistence to keep the price of the stock high. In fact during 1972, several of Equity Funding co conspirators pleaded with Goldblum to report flat earnings for a period of years. They argued that by doing so the company would have an opportunity to stop the fraudulent practices and become a total legitimate operation. Goldblum refused to cooperate, pointing out that it reported earnings did not increase each year, the company’s stock price would fall.

To protect this scam, Equity Funding executives went to great lengths to conceal their fraudulent activities from the insurance examiners and independent auditors. Examples of these activities included Levin ordering the Equity Funding offices that were being used by the state insurance examiners to be bugged so that he would know the specific questions or issues that they were addressing. Also, company officials ushered out several auditors from their offices on the pretense of lunch at an elegant and busy local restaurant hoping that they would leave their files unlocked. In fact the auditors did and while at lunch other company employees were copying down the insurance policy numbers that had been randomly selected by the auditors for testing. With these numbers on hand, company employees could ensure that these selected files could be created and pass audit inspection.

Aftermath

The stockholders and companies that Equity Funding defrauded suffered hundreds of million dollars in losses. In fact, the value of the stock dropped by more than $15 billion within one week. The conspirators received modest sentences compared to the losses they inflicted.

Goldblum served four years in the Terminal Island federal prison in Long Beach, California, before being paroled. Goldblum returned to the business world as president and chief executive officer of a company that operated a chain of medical care clinics. The auditor of this company at the time was Seidman & Seidman. This was the same audit firm that audited Equity Funding. Shortly after Goldblum was hired, Seidman & Seidman resigned and forfeited the $40,000 annual audit fee because they did not want to be associated with another company that had Goldblum as its chief executive officer.

Levin served only two and one half years at the same facility before being paroled. In fact after his release from prison, he embezzled $250,000 from a small plastics company while acting as its president.

Questions

1. Is it necessary or appropriate for independent auditors to trust the executives of a client? If so, to what extent should auditors trust client management?

2. In evaluating the integrity of the executives of a prospective client, what types of information should auditors obtain, and from what sources would they generally collect this information?

3. In your opinion, was it appropriate for Seidman & Seidman to resign as the audit firm of Goldblum’s new company after he was elected its president and chief executive officer? Under what conditions is it appropriate for a professional firm, such as a CPA firm, to choose not to provide professional services to a company or individual requesting such services?

4. In your opinion, what did the Seidman & Seidman do to contribute to the continued success of the Equity Funding fraud? What could they have done to detect the fraud earlier?

In analyzing this case, take the components of the control environment and discuss how each factor was present or lacking in this situation.

accounting 421147

Ergo Products manufactures a variety of ergonomic household tools including a cordless drill. The cordless drill comes with a battery recharger. Currently, the company manufactures its own recharger for the drill with the following unit costs when 5,000 rechargers are produced each year:

Direct materials

$3.00 per unit

Direct labor

$3.00 per unit

Variable overhead

$1.00 per unit

Fixed overhead

$2.00 per unit

Another manufacturer has offered to supply Ergo with a recharger for a cost of $8 each. Ergo has determined that if they accept the offer, 80% of the fixed overhead allocated to the rechargers will be avoidable.

Question: By what amount will the company’s net income increase or decrease if they outsource? Be sure to indicate if net income would increase or decrease.

Answer: $________

esposito is an italian subsidiary 421162

Esposito is an Italian subsidiary of a U.S. Company. Esposito’s ending inventory is valued at the average cost for the last quearter of the year. The following account balances are available for Esposito for 2011:

Beginning inventory E 20,000 (E = Euro)

Purchases E400,000

Ending inventory E15,000

Relevant exchange rates follow:

4th quarter average, 2010 $.93 = E1 (E = Euro)

December 31, 2010 .94 = E1

Average 2011 .96 = E1

4th quarter average, 2011 .99 = E1

December 31, 2011 1.01 = E1

1. Compute the cost of goods sold for 2011 in U.S. dollars using the temporal method

2. Compute the cost of goods sold for 2011 in U.S. dollars using the current rate method

3. Compute ending inventory for 2011 under the temporal method

4. Compute ending inventory for 2011 under the current rate method

accounting 421206

Question 1 A&O Corp. had the following selected account balances as of 12/31/2012 before adjusting entries were made. Cash $90,000 Insurance expense 18,000 Accounts receivable 16,000 Supplies 6,400 Equipment 90,000 Accumulated depreciation 28,000 Unearned advertising revenue 5,000 Salaries expense 10,000 Rent expense 18,000 A&O’s accountant has provided you the following information: Insurance was paid in advance on 10/1/2012 for a one year period starting 10/1/2012 and the entire amount ($18k) was recorded in the insurance expense account.

Document Preview:

Question 1 A&O Corp. had the following selected account balances as of 12/31/2012 before adjusting entries were made. Cash?$90,000??Insurance expense? 18,000??Accounts receivable?16,000??Supplies? 6,400??Equipment?90,000??Accumulated depreciation? 28,000??Unearned advertising revenue?5,000??Salaries expense? 10,000??Rent expense?18,000?? A&O’s accountant has provided you the following information: Insurance was paid in advance on 10/1/2012 for a one year period starting 10/1/2012 and the entire amount ($18k) was recorded in the insurance expense account. Supplies remaining on hand at the end of the year were $3,000. Equipment was purchased on 10/1/2012 and it is being depreciated over 10 years by the straight line method. The salvage value of the equipment is $0. A&O has completed 50% advertising services due to clients, whose advance cash payments were recorded above. Rent ($18,000) was paid in advance on 11/30/2012, for 6 months (11/30/2012 to5/31/2013) and A&O recorded the entire amount as rent expense on that date. Prepare the adjusting journal entries for each of the 5 items above (do not write any explanations). Show all supporting computations. Use the answer sheet provided. Question 2 Presented below is the pretax information for Aloma Corporation, for the year 2012: Sales?$6,000,000??Cost of goods sold? 2,950,000??Interest revenue?60,000??Loss from abandonment of plant assets?300,000??Selling expenses?600,000??Administrative expenses?440,000??Unusual and infrequent loss from earthquake?90,000??Gain on disposal of a segment of the business. The corporation will no longer be in that business in the future.? 290,000?? Instructions: Present all applicable information in a proper format (according to GAAP), to prepare a multiple step income statement. The company has 300,000 shares outstanding and a federal tax rate of 30%. Prepare an EPS section in proper format (round to two decimals). Use the answer sheet provided. Question 3…

Attachments:

you are an accountant in the budgetary projections and special 273607

You are an accountant in the budgetary, projections, and special projects department of American Conductor, Inc., a large manufacturing company. The president, William Brown, asks you on very short notice to prepare some sales and income projections covering the next 2 years of the company’s much heralded new product lines. He wants these projections for a series of speeches he is making while on a 2 week trip to eight East Coast brokerage firms. The president hopes to bolster American’s stock sales and price.

You work 23 hours in 2 days to compile the projections, hand deliver them to the president, and are swiftly but graciously thanked as he departs. A week later you find time to go over some of your computations and discover a miscalculation that makes the projections grossly overstated. You quickly inquire about the president’s itinerary and learn that he has made half of his speeches and has half yet to make. You are in a quandary as to what to do.

Instructions

(a) What are the consequences of telling the president of your gross miscalculations?

(b) What are the consequences of not telling the president of your gross miscalculations?

(c) What are the ethical considerations to you and the president in this situation?

zelmer company uses budgets in controlling costs the august 201 273619

Zelmer Company uses budgets in controlling costs. The August 2010 budget report for the company’s Assembling Department is as follows.

?

The monthly budget amounts in the report were based on an expected production of 60,000 units per month or 720,000 units per year. The Assembling Department manager is pleased with the report and expects a raise, or at least praise for a job well done. The company president, however, is unhappy with the results for August, because only 58,000 units were produced.

Instructions

(a) State the total monthly budgeted cost formula.

(b) Prepare a budget report for August using flexible budget data. Why does this report provide a better basis for evaluating performance than the report based on static budget data?

(c) In September, 64,000 units were produced. Prepare the budget report using flexible budget data, assuming

(1) Each variable cost was 10% higher than its actual cost in August, and

(2) Fixed costs were the same in September as inAugust.

allison sheriff controller of an oil exploration division has 273635

Allison Sheriff, controller of an oil exploration division, has just been approached by Tim Wilson, the divisional manager. Tim told Allison that the projected quarterly profits were unacceptable and that expenses need to be reduced. He suggested that a clean and easy way to reduce expenses is to assign the exploration and drilling costs of four dry holes to those of two successful holes. By doing so, the costs could be capitalized and not expensed, reducing the costs that need to be recognized for the quarter. He further argued that the treatment is reasonable because the exploration and drilling all occurred in the same field; thus, the unsuccessful efforts really were the costs of identifying the successful holes. ?oBesides,?? he argued, ?oeven if the treatment is wrong, it can be corrected in the annual financial statements. Next quarter’s revenues will be more and can absorb any reversal without causing any severe damage to that quarter’s profits. It’s this quarter’s profits that need some help.?? Allison was uncomfortable with the request because generally accepted accounting principles do not sanction the type of accounting measures proposed by Tim.

Required:

1. Using the code of ethics for management accountants, recommend the approach that Allison should take.

2. Suppose Tim insists that his suggested accounting treatment be implemented. What should Allison do?

assume that a company has recently switched to jit manufacturing 273637

Assume that a company has recently switched to JIT manufacturing. Each manufacturing cell produces a single product or major subassembly. Cell workers have been trained to perform a variety of tasks. Additionally, many services have been decentralized. Costs are assigned to products using direct tracing, driver tracing, and allocation. For each cost listed, indicate the most likely product cost assignment method used before JIT and after JIT. Set up a table with three columns: Cost Item, Before JIT, and After JIT. You may assume that direct tracing is used whenever possible, followed by driver tracing, with allocation being the method of last resort.

a. Inspection costs

b. Power to heat, light, and cool plant

c. Minor repairs on production equipment

d. Salary of production supervisor (department/cell)

e. Oil to lubricate machinery

f. Salary of plant supervisor

g. Costs to set up machinery

h. Salaries of janitors

i. Power to operate production equipment

j. Taxes on plant and equipment

k. Depreciation on production equipment

l. Raw materials

m. Salary of industrial engineer

n. Parts for machinery

o. Pencils and paper clips for production supervisor (department/cell)

p. Insurance on plant and equipment

q. Overtime wages for cell workers

r. Plant depreciation

s. Materials handling

t. Preventive maintenance

at the end of 2010 hender chemicals began to implement 273640

At the end of 2010, Hender Chemicals began to implement an environmental quality management program. As a first step, it identified the following costs in its accounting records as environmentally related for the year just ended:

2010

Settling personal injury claims ………………. $1,200,000

Treating and disposing of toxic waste ………… 4,800,000

Cleanup of chemically contaminated soil …….. 1,800,000

Inspecting products and processes ……………… 600,000

Operating pollution control equipment ………….. 840,000

Licensing facilities for producing contaminants … 360,000

Evaluating and selecting suppliers ………………. 120,000

Developing performance measures ……………….. 60,000

Recycling products ……………………………….. 75,000

Required:

1. Prepare an environmental cost report by category. Assume that total operating costs are $60,000,000.

2. Create a pie chart to illustrate the relative distribution percentages for each environmental cost category. Comment on what this distribution communicates to a manager.

avery corporation s northwestern factory provided the following 273641

Avery Corporation’s northwestern factory provided the following information for the last calendar year:

Beginning inventory:

Direct materials ………………$50,800

Work in process ……………… 58,500

Ending inventories:

Direct materials ………………$21,500

Work in process ……………… 23,500

During the year, direct materials purchases amounted to $150,000, direct labor cost was $200,000, and overhead cost was $324,700. There were 100,000 units produced.

Required:

1. Calculate the total cost of direct materials used in production.

2. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured. Calculate the unit manufacturing cost.

3. Of the unit manufacturing cost calculated in Requirement 2, assume $1.70 is direct materials and $3.24 is overhead. What is the prime cost per unit? Conversion cost per unit?

classify each of the following actions as either being associate 273663

Classify each of the following actions as either being associated with the financial accounting system (FS) or the cost management system (CMS):

a. Determining the future cash flows of a proposed JIT manufacturing system

b. Filing financial reports with the SEC

c. Determining the cost of a customer

d. Issuing a voluntary annual report on environmental costs and issues

e. Reducing costs by eliminating activities that do not add value

f. Preparing a performance report that compares actual costs with budgeted costs

g. Preparing financial statements that conform to GAAP

h. Determining the cost of a supplier

i. Using cost information to decide whether to accept or reject a special order

j. Reporting a large contingent liability to current and potential shareholders

classify the following quality costs as prevention costs apprai 273667

Classify the following quality costs as prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, or external failure costs:

1. Inspection of reworked units

2. Inspecting and testing a newly developed product (not yet being sold)

3. Retesting a reworked product

4. Repairing a computer still under warranty

5. Discount allowed to customers because products failed to meet customer specifications

6. Goods returned because they failed to meet specifications

7. The cost of evaluating and certifying suppliers

8. Stopping work to correct process malfunction (discovered using statistical process control procedures)

9. Testing products in the field

10. Discarding products that cannot be reworked

11. Lost sales because of recalled products

12. Inspection of incoming materials

13. Redesigning a product to eliminate the need to use an outside component with a high defect rate

14. Purchase order changes

15. Replacing a defective product

16. Inspecting and testing prototypes

17. Repairing products in the field

18. Correcting a design error discovered during product development

19. Engineering resources used to help selected suppliers improve their product quality

20. Packaging inspection

21. Processing and responding to consumer complaints

22. Training production line workers in new quality procedures

23. Sampling a batch of goods to determine if the batch has an acceptable defect rate

financial accounting comprehensive problem instructions 273669

Financial Accounting

Comprehensive Problem

INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Prepare the journal entries for May.

2. Prepare the general ledger to indicate your balances

3. Prepare the Trial Balances.

4. Journalize the adjusting entries and complete Adj. TB

5. Prepare a multi step Income Statement.

6. Prepare a statement of Retained Earnings.

7. Prepare a report form of Balance Sheet.

8. Journalize the closing entries.

9. Prepare a post closing trial balance.

COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM # 2

Fluorescent Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Fluorescent Co. as of May 1, 2010(unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

110

Cash

$ 19,160

111

Notes Receivable

$ 5,000

112

Accounts Receivable

$ 31,220

115

Merchandise Inventory

$153,900

116

Prepaid Insurance

$ 3,750

117

Store Supplies

$ 2,550

123

Store Equipment

$104,300

124

Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

$ 12,600

210

Accounts Payable

$ 18,450

211

Salaries Payable

310

Common Stock

$113,280

311

Retained Earnings

312

Dividends

$ 10,000

313

Income Summary

410

Sales

$815,750

412

Sales Returns and Allowances

$ 20,600

413

Sales Discounts

$ 13,200

420

Interest Revenue

$ 50

510

Cost of Merchandise Sold

$460,500

520

Sale Salaries Expense

$ 64,400

521

Advertising Expense

$ 18,000

522

Depreciation Expense

523

Store Supplies Expense

529

Miscellaneous Selling Expense

$ 2,800

530

Office Salaries Expense

$ 30,500

531

Rent Expense

$ 18,600

532

Insurance Expense

539

Miscellaneous Administrative Expense

$ 1,650

During May, the last month of the fiscal year, the following transactions were completed.

May 1

Paid Rent for May $2,000.

May 3

Purchased merchandise on account from Tredwell Co., terms 2/10, N/30, FOB shipping point, $10,000.

May 4

Paid Transportation charges on purchase of May 3, $375.

May 6

Sold merchandise on account to Parish CO., Terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $8,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $5,000.

May 7

Received $6,500 cash from Oxford Co. on account, no discount

May 10

Sold Merchandise for cash, $15,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was $9,000.

May 13

Paid for merchandise purchased on May 3, less discount

May 14

Received merchandise returned on sale of May 6, $1,500. The cost of the merchandise returned was $900.

May 15

Paid advertising expense for last half of May, $1,500

May 16

Received cash from sale of May6, less return of May 14, and discount.

May 19

Purchased merchandise for cash, $7,400.

May 19

Paid $5,950 to Lipham Co. on account, no discount.

May 20

Sold merchandise on account to Petroski Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $15,000. The cost of the merchandise is $9,000.

May 21

For the convenience of the customer, paid shipping charges on sale of May $600.

May 21

Received $11,750 cash from Grant Co. on account, no discount.

May 21

Purchased merchandise on account from Walden Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $15,000.

May 24

Returned $3,500 of damaged merchandise purchased on May 21, receiving credit from the seller.

May 26

Refunded cash on sales made for cash, $600. The cost of the merchandise turned was $360.

May 28

Paid sales salaries of $2,750 and office salaries of $1,220.

May 29

Purchased store supplies for cash $350.

May 30

Sold merchandise on account to Hartel Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $23,100. The cost of the merchandise sold was $13,200.

May 30

Received cash from sale of May 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on may 21.

May 31

Paid for purchase of May 21, less return of May 24 and discount.

ADJUSTING ENTRIES:

A.

Merchandise inventory on May 31

$139,750

B.

Insurance expired during the year

$1,250

C.

Store supplies on hand May 31

$1,050

D.

Depreciation for the current year

$7,400

E.

Accrued salaries on May 31:

Sales Salaries

Office Salaries

$350

$180

$530

daspart inc supplies carburetors for a large automobile manufa 273681

Daspart, Inc. supplies carburetors for a large automobile manufacturing company. The auto company has recently requested that Daspart decrease its delivery time. Daspart made a commitment to reduce the lead time for delivery from eight days to two days. To help achieve this goal, engineering and production workers had committed to reduce time for the setup activity (other activities such as moving materials and rework were also being examined simultaneously). Current setup times were 12 hours. Setup cost was $300 per setup hour. For the first quarter, engineering developed a new process design that it believed would reduce the setup time from 12 hours to eight hours. After implementing the design, the actual setup time dropped from 12 hours to nine hours. In the second quarter, production workers suggested a new setup procedure. Engineering gave the suggestion a positive evaluation, and they projected that the new approach would save an additional five hours of setup time. Setup labor was trained to perform the new setup procedures. The actual reduction in setup time based on the suggested changes was six hours.

Required:

1. What kaizen setup standard would be used at the beginning of each quarter?

2. Describe the kaizen subcycle using the two quarters of data provided by Daspart.

3. Describe the maintenance subcycle using the two quarters of data provided by Daspart.

4. How much non value added cost was eliminated by the end of two quarters?

Discuss the role of kaizen costing in activity based management.

5. Explain why kaizen costing is compatible with activity based responsibility accounting while standard costing is compatible with financial based responsibility accounting.

dorothy gotay owns and operates three compufix shops in the 273693

Dorothy Gotay owns and operates three Compufix shops in the Boston area. Compufix repairs and upgrades computers on site. In August, purchases of materials equaled $9,750, the beginning inventory of materials was $850, and the ending inventory of materials was $950. Payments for direct labor during the month totaled $18,570. Overhead incurred was $15,000. The Boston shops also spent $5,000 on advertising during the month. Administrative costs (primarily accounting and legal services) amounted to $3,000 for the month. Revenues for August were $60,400.

Required:

1. What was the cost of materials used for repair and upgrade services during August?

2. What was the prime cost for August?

3. What was the conversion cost for August?

4. What was the total cost of services for August?

5. Prepare an income statement for August.

farris manufacturing company produces component parts for the fa 273710

Farris Manufacturing Company produces component parts for the farm equipment industry and has recently undergone a major computer system conversion. Jay Moulin, the controller, has established a trouble shooting team to alleviate accounting problems that have occurred since the conversion. Jay has chosen Gus Swanson, assistant controller, to head the team that will include Linda Wheeler, management accountant; Cindy Madsen, financial analyst; Randy Lewis, general accounting supervisor; and Max Crandall, financial accountant.

The team has been meeting weekly for the last month. Gus insists on being part of all the team conversations in order to gather information, to make the final decision on any ideas or actions that the team develops, and to prepare a weekly report for Jay. He has also used this team as a forum to discuss issues and disputes about him and other members of Farris’s top management team. At last week’s meeting, Gus told the team that he thought a competitor might purchase the common stock of Farris, because he had overheard Jay talking about this on the telephone. As a result, most of Farris’s employees now informally discuss the sale of Farris’s common stock and how it will affect their jobs.

Required:

Is Gus Swanson’s discussion with the team about the prospective sale of Farris unethical?

Discuss, citing specific standards from the code of ethical conduct to support your position.

(CMA adapted)

for each of the following independent situations calculate the 273719

For each of the following independent situations, calculate the missing values:

1. The Bartlesville plant purchased $352,000 of direct materials during April. Beginning direct materials inventory was $21,000, and direct materials used in production were $300,000. What is ending direct materials inventory?

2. Aston Company produced 12,000 units at an average cost of $6 each. The beginning inventory of finished goods was $4,680. (The average unit cost of beginning inventory was $5.85.) Aston sold 8,900 units. How many units remain in ending finished goods inventory?

3. Beginning WIP was $50,000, and ending WIP was $18,750. If total manufacturing costs added were $93,000, what was the cost of goods manufactured?

4. If the conversion cost is $32 per unit, the prime cost is $19.50, and the manufacturing cost per unit is $39.50, what is the direct materials cost per unit?

5. Total manufacturing costs added for October were $156,900. Prime cost was $90,000, and beginning WIP was $60,000. The cost of goods manufactured was $125,000. Calculate the cost of overhead for October and the cost of ending WIP.

what is randolph s basis in the distributed investment and land 420664

PLEASE SHOW THE DETAILS OF HOW YOU ARRIVED AT ANSWER PLEASE…

Randolph is a 30% partner in the RD Partnership. On January 1, RD distributes $15,000 cash, an investment with a fair value of $20,000 (inside basis of $10,000), and a parcel of land with a fair value of $10,000 (inside basis of $5,000) to Randolph in complete liquidation of his interest. RD has no liabilities at the date of the distribution. Randolph’s basis in RD is $48,000. What is Randolph’s basis in the distributed investment and land?

$10,000 investment, $5,000 land

$22,000 investment, $11,000 land

$20,000 investment, $10,000 land

$20,000 investment, $13,000 land

need help with question 3 and 4 please give detailed calculation answers tyvm 420706

Detmer Holdings AG of Zurich, Switzerland, has just introduced a new fashion watch for which the company is trying to find an optimal selling price. Marketing studies suggest that the company can increase sales by 5,000 units for each SFr2 per unit reduction in the selling price. (SFr2 denotes 2 Swiss francs.) The company’s present selling price is SFr94 per unit, and variable expenses are SFr64 per unit. Fixed expenses are SFr833,100 per year. The present annual sales volume (at the SFr94 selling price) is 25,600 units.

Required:
1.

What is the present yearly net operating income or loss? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “SFr” sign in your response.)

(Click to select)Net operating incomeNet operating loss SFr

2.

What is the present break even point in units and in Swiss franc sales? (Omit the “SFr” sign in your response.)

Break even point in units
Break even point in Swiss franc sales SFr

3.

Assuming that the marketing studies are correct, what is the maximum profit that the company can earn yearly? At how many units and at what selling price per unit would the company generate this profit? (Omit the “SFr” sign in your response.)

Maximum profit SFr
Number of units
Selling price SFr

4.

What would be the break even point in units and in Swiss franc sales using the selling price you determined in (3) above (i.e., the selling price at the level of maximum profits)? (Omit the “SFr” sign in your response.)

Break even point in units
Break even point in Swiss franc sales SFr

week 5 acc557 420726

The Diamond Glitter Company is in the process of preparing its financial statements for 2012. Assume that no entries for depreciation have been recorded in 2012. The following information related to depreciation of fixed assets is provided to you.

1. The company purchased equipment on January 2, 2009, for $165000. At that time, the equipment had an estimated useful life of 7 years with a $25000 salvage value. The equipment is depreciated on a straight line basis. On January 2, 2012, as a result of additional information, the company determined that the equipment has a remaining useful life of 3 years with a $15000 salvage value.

2. During 2012, the company changed from the double declining balance method for its building to the straight line method. The building originally cost $625000. It had a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $50000. The following computations present depreciation on both bases for 2010 and 2011.
2011 2010
Straight line $ 57,500 $ 57,500
Declining balance $ 92,000 $ 115,000

3. The company purchased a machine on July 1, 2010, at a cost of $450000. The machine has a salvage value of $25000 and a useful life of 10 years. The company’s bookkeeper recorded straight line depreciation in 2010 and 2011 but failed to consider the salvage value.

4. The company has failed to accrue sales commissions payable at the end of each of the last 2 years, as follows.
December 31, 2011 $ 5,400
December 31, 2012 $ 4,600

5. In reviewing the December 31, 2011, inventory, the company discovered errors in its inventory taking procedures that have caused inventories for the last 3 years to be incorrect, as follows. The company has already made an entry that established the incorrect December 31, 2012, inventory amount.
December 31, 2010 Understated $ 32,000
December 31, 2011 Understated $ 51,000
December 31, 2012 Overstated $ 9,500

6. At December 31, 2012, the company decided to change to the straight line method depreciation method on its retail display equipment from double declining balance. The equipment had an original cost of $250000 when purchased on January 1, 2011. It has a salvage value of 0 and an 8 year useful life. Depreciation expense recorded prior to 2012 under the double declining balance method was $62500. The company has already recorded 2012 depreciation expense of $46875 using the double declining balance method.
7. Before the current year, the company accounted for its income from long term construction contracts on the completed contract basis. Early this year, the company changed to the percentage of completion basis for accounting purposes but continues to use the completed contract method for tax purposes. Income for the current year has been recorded using the new method. Prior year tax effects must be considered. The following information is available.
Pretax Income
Percentage of Completion Completed Contract
Prior to 2012 $320,000 $180,000
2012 $140,000 $120,000

accounting dickonson products 420737

Dickonson Products is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the last year of operations:

media/05a/05a8ea6b 73c4 4c24 93d9 b1

3. The division’s margin is closest to:
A. 26.4%
B. 10.0%
C. 2.4%
D. 24.0%

5. The division’s return on investment (ROI) is closest to:
A. 0.2%
B. 41.6%
C. 10.0%
D. 1.9%

2. Which of the following three statements are correct?

I. A profit center has control over both cost and revenue.
II. An investment center has control over invested funds, but not over costs and revenue.
III. A cost center has no control over sales.
A. Only I
B. Only II
C. Only I and III
D. Only I and II

advanced accounting 420747

DID THE COST METHOD INVITE EARNINGS MANIPULATION? Prior to GAAP for equity method investments, firms often used the cost method to account for their unconsolidated investments in common stock regardless of the presence of significant influence. The cost method employed the cash basis of income recognition. When the investee declared a dividend, the investor recorded “dividend income.” The investment account typically remained at its original cost ‘ hence the term cost method. Many firms’ compensation plans reward managers based on reported annual income. How might the cost method of accounting for significant investments have resulted in unintended wealth transfers from owners to managers? Do the equity or fair value methods provide similar incentives? Explain. In your own words please.

acct 420787

Dinklemyer Corporation uses direct labor hours as its single cost driver. Actual overhead costs and actual direct labor hours for the first five months of the current year are as follows:

Month Actual Total Overhead Actual Direct Labor Hours
January $ 980,000 19,200
February 950,000 18,400
March 860,000 17,000
April 752,500 12,700
May 760,000 13,200

a.

Compute the company’s estimated variable manufacturing overhead cost per direct labor hour. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Variable manufacturing overhead cost $ per DLH

b.

Estimate the company’s total monthly fixed manufacturing overhead cost. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Fixed manufacturing overhead cost $

c.

Estimate the company’s total manufacturing overhead for June through August if 50,000 total direct labor hours are budgeted for that specific three month period. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total manufacturing overhead $

help test question 420813

Direct Materials, Direct Labor, and Factory Overhead Cost Variance Analysis

Eastern Polymers, Inc., processes a base chemical into plastic.Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 6,800 units of product were as follows:

Standard Costs Actual Costs
Direct materials 8,800 lbs. at $4.70 8,700 lbs. at $4.50
Direct labor 1,700 hrs. at $17.50 1,740 hrs. at $17.80
Factory overhead Rates per direct labor hr.,
based on 100% of normal
capacity of 1,770 direct
labor hrs.:
Variable cost, $3.50 $5,890 variable cost
Fixed cost, $5.50 $9,735 fixed cost

Each unit requires 0.25 hour of direct labor.

Required:

a. Determine the price variance, quantity variance, and total direct materials cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Price variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 2
Quantity variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 4
Total direct materials cost variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 6

b. Determine the rate variance, time variance, and total direct labor cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Rate variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 8
Time variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 10
Total direct labor cost variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 12

c. Determine variable factory overheadControllable Variance, the fixed factory overheadvolume variance, and total factory overhead cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Variable factory overhead controllable variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 14
Fixed factory overhead volume variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 16
Total factory overhead cost variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 18

help test 420818

Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variance Analysis

Best Faucet Company manufactures faucets in a small manufacturing facility. The faucets are made from zinc. Manufacturing has 40 employees. Each employee presently provides 40 hours of labor per week. Information about a production week is as follows:

Standard wage per hour $17.40
Standard labor time per faucet 10 min.
Standard number of lbs. of zinc 1.7 lbs.
Standard price per lb. of zinc $10.25
Actual price per lb. of zinc $10.50
Actual lbs. of zinc used during the week 14,700 lbs.
Number of faucets produced during the week 8,400
Actual wage per hour $17.90
Actual hours per week 1,600 hrs.

Required:

a. Determine the standard cost per faucet for direct materials and direct labor. Round the cost per unit to two decimal places.

Direct materials standard cost per faucet: $
Direct labor standard cost per faucet: $
Total cost per faucet: $

b. Determine theprice variance,quantity variance, and total direct materialscost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Price variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 5
Quantity variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 7
Total direct materials cost variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 9

c. Determine therate variance,time variance, and total direct labor cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Rate variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 11
Time variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 13
Total direct labor cost variance: $ SelectFavorableUnfavorableItem 15

accounting 420823

Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variances

At the beginning of June, Cornerstone Printing Company budgeted 20,000 books to be printed in June at standard direct materials and direct labor costs as follows:

Direct materials $24,000
Direct labor 19,200
Total $43,200

The standard materials price is $0.60 per pound. The standard direct labor rate is $12.00 per hour. At the end of June, the actual direct materials and direct labor costs were as follows:

Actual direct materials $21,800
Actual direct labor 17,400
Total $39,200

There were no direct materials price or direct labor rate variances for June. In addition, assume no changes in the direct materials inventory balances in June. Cornerstone Printing Company actually produced 17,600 units during June.

Determine the direct materials quantity anddirect labor time variances. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

Direct materials quantity variance $___________ Unfavorable

Direct labor time variance $ Unfavorable

accounting 420889

Disk City, Inc. is a retailer for digital video disks. The projected net income for the current year is $1,600,000 based on a sales volume of 210,000 video disks. Disk City has been selling the disks for $22 each. The variable costs consist of the $10 unit purchase price of the disks and a handling cost of $2 per disk. Disk City’s annual fixed costs are $500,000.

Management is planning for the coming year, when it expects that the unit purchase price of the video disks will increase 20 percent. (Ignore income taxes.)

Required:
1. Calculate Disk city’s break even point for the current year in number of video disks. (Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)

2.

What will be the company’s net income for the current year if there is a 15 percent increase in projected unit sales volume? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

3.

What volume of sales (in dollars) must Disk City achieve in the coming year to maintain the same net income as projected for the current year if the unit selling price remains at $22? (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answer to nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

4.

In order to cover a 20 percent increase in the disk’s purchase price for the coming year and still maintain the current contribution margin ratio, what selling price per disk must Disk City establish for the coming year? (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answer to nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

total manufacturing costs 420936

Dolan Manufacturing Company’s accounting records reflect the following inventories:

Dec. 31, 2012 Dec. 31, 2011
Raw materials inventory $620,000 $520,000
Work in process inventory 600,000 320,000
Finished goods inventory 380,000 300,000

During 2012, $800,000 of raw materials were purchased, direct labor costs amounted to $1,000,000, and manufacturing overhead incurred was $960,000.

Dolan Manufacturing Company’s total manufacturing costs incurred in 2012 amounted to

$2,580,000.

$2,760,000.

$2,660,000.

$2,380,000

help please 420951

Donnie Hilfiger has two classes of stock authorized: $1 par preferred and $.01 par value common. As of the beginning of 2012, 230 shares of preferred stock and 2,480 shares of common stock have been issued. The following transactions affect stockholders’ equity during 2012:

Mar. 1 Issues 1,200 shares of common stock for $36 per share.
May 15 Repurchases 530 shares of treasury stock for $27 per share.
Jul. 10 Reissues 90 shares of treasury stock purchased on May 15 for $31 per share.
Oct. 15 Issues 150 shares of preferred stock for $39 per share.
Dec. 1

Declares a cash dividend on both common and preferred stock of $.60 per share to all stockholders of record on December 15. (Hint: Dividends are not paid on treasury stock.)

Dec. 31 Pays the cash dividends declared on December 1.

Donnie Hilfiger has the following beginning balances in its stockholders’ equity accounts on January 1, 2012: Preferred Stock, $230; common Stock, $24.80; Additional Paid in Capital, $75,000; and Retained Earnings, $25,500. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2012, is $9,200.

I NEED HELP ONLY WITH DEC.1!!!! I KNOW TRANSACTION WILL BE: Dividends(D)=?; Dividends payable(C)=?

financial accounting urgent 420966

DORA Company declared and distributed a 25% stock dividend on 17,000 shares of issued and outstanding $5 par value common stock. The market price per share on the declaration date was $13 and was $12 on the distribution date. Which of the following correctly describes the accounting for the declaration and distribution of the stock dividend?

Retained earnings decreased $55,250.
Retained earnings decreased $51,000.
Capital in excess of par increased $29,750.
Common stock increased $55,250.

managerial account chapter 420971

Dorsey Company manufactures three products from a common input in a joint processing operation. Joint processing costs up to the split off point total $336,000 per quarter. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their relative sales value at the split off point. Unit selling prices and total output at the split off point are as follows:

Product Selling Price Quarterly
Output
A $16 per pound 14,600 pounds
B $7 per pound 19,800 pounds
C $27 per gallon 2,300 gallons

Each product can be processed further after the split off point. Additional processing requires no special facilities. The additional processing costs (per quarter) and unit selling prices after further processing are given below:

Product Additional
Processing Costs
Selling Price
A $64,600 $19 per pound
B $80,000 $15 per pound
C $36,300 $31 per gallon

rev: 02 12 2011

9. value:

2.00 points

Required:
(a) Compute the incremental profit (loss) for each product. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Product A Product B Product C
Incremental profit (loss) $ $ $

rev: 02 12 2011 check my workeBook Linkreferences

10. value:

2.00 points

(b) Which product or products be sold at the split off point? ( by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c37″>Select all that apply.)

by Solid Savings” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw hill.com/#” class=”c37″>

rev: 02 12 2011

Product A
Product B
Product C

eBook Linkreferences

11. value:

2.00 points

(c)

Which product or products should be processed further?

rev: 02 12 2011

Product A
Product B
Product C

check my workeBook Linkreferences

chapter 11 net cash inflows and net present value 420983

Doughboy Bakery would like to buy a new machine for putting icing and other toppings on pastries. These are now put on by hand. The machine that the bakery is considering costs $88,000 new. It would last the bakery for eighteen years but would require a $7,000 overhaul at the end of the fifteenth year. After eighteen years, the machine could be sold for $6,000.

The bakery estimates that it will cost $18,000 per year to operate the new machine. The present manual method of putting toppings on the pastries costs $38,000 per year. In addition to reducing operating costs, the new machine will allow the bakery to increase its production of pastries by 7,000 packages per year. The bakery realizes a contribution margin of $0.30 per package. The bakery requires a 13% return on all investments in equipment. (Ignore income taxes.)

1. What are the annual net cash inflows that will be provided by the new machine?

2. Compute the new machine’s net present value. Use the incremental cost approach.

case on job order costing dental practice 420993

Dr. Alyx Hemmings is employed by Mesa Dental. Mesa Dental recently installed a computerized job order costing system to help monitor the cost of its services. Each patient is assigned a

job number when he or she checks in with the receptionist. The receptionist bookkeeper notes

the time the patient enters the treatment area and when the patient leaves the area. This difference between the entry and exit times is the number of patient hours used and the direct labor

time assigned to the dental assistant. (A dental assistant is constantly with the patient.) The

direct labor time assigned to the dentist is 50 percent of the patient hours. (The dentist typically

splits her time between two patients.)

The chartfilled out by the dental assistant provides additional data that is entered into the

computer. For example, the chart contains service codes that identify the nature of the treatment, such as whether the patient received a crown, afilling, or a root canal. The chart not only

identifies the type of service but its level as well. For example, if a patient receives afilling, the

dental assistant indicates (by a service level code) whether thefilling was one, two, three, or four

surfaces. The service and service level codes are used to determine the rate to be charged to the

patient. The costs of providing different services and their levels also vary.

Costs assignable to a patient consist of materials, labor, and overhead. The types of materials

used”and the quantity”are identified by the assistant and entered into the computer by the

bookkeeper. Material prices are kept onfile and accessed to provide the necessary cost information. Overhead is applied on the basis of patient hours. The rate used by Mesa Dental is $32 per

patient hour. Direct labor cost is also computed using patient hours and the wage rates of the

direct laborers. Dr. Hemmings is paid an average of $60 per hour for her services. Dental assistants are paid an average of $20 per hour. Given the treatment time, the software program calculates and assigns the labor cost for the dentist and her assistant; overhead cost is also assigned

using the treatment time and the overhead rate.

The overhead rate does not include a charge for any X rays. The X Ray Department is separate from dental services; X rays are billed and costed separately. The cost of an X ray is $12

perfilm; the patient is charged $15 perfilm. If cleaning services are required, cleaning labor costs

$35 per patient hour.

Glen Johnson, a patient (Job 267), spent 30 minutes in the treatment area and had a twosurfacefilling. He received two Novocaine shots and used three ampules of amalgam. The cost

of the shots was $14 ($7 each). The cost of the amalgam was $6 per ampule. Other direct materials used are insignificant in amount and are included in the overhead rate. The rate charged to

the patient for a two surfacefilling is $110. One X ray was taken.

Required:

1. Prepare a job order cost sheet for Glen Johnson. What is the cost for providing a twosurfacefilling? What is the gross profit earned? Is the X ray a direct cost of the service? Why

are the X rays costed separately from the overhead cost assignment?

2. Suppose that the patient time and associated patient charges are given for the followingfillings:

1 Surface 2 Surface 3 Surface 4 Surface

Time 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes

Charge $90 $110 $150 $175

Compute the cost for eachfilling and the gross profit for each type offilling. Assume that

the cost of Novocaine is $14 for allfillings. Ampules of amalgam start at two and increase

by one for each additional surface. Assume also that only one X rayfilm is needed for all

four cases. Does the increase in billing rate appear to be fair to the patient? Is it fair to the

dental corporation?

complete the requirements for each of the following case 421009

DR PEPPER SNAPPLE GROUP, INC.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (partial)
(In millions) December 31, 2008 December 31, 2007
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents $ 217 $ 72
Accounts receivable (net of allowances of $14 and $21, respectively) 528 543

Consolidated Statements of Operations (partial)
For the Year Ended December 31
(In millions) 2008 2007 2006
Net sales $ 5,640 $ 5,625 $ 4,630
Net (loss) income $ (314) $ 500 $ 526

The company also reported bad debt expense of $8 million in 2008, $14 million in 2007, and $10 million in 2006.

Record the company’s write offs of uncollectible accounts for 2008. (Enter your answers in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

General journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Bills payableAccounts payableNotes payableAllowance for uncollectible accountsAccounts receivableNotes receivableSalesBills receivable
(Click to select)SalesAccounts payableBills receivableNotes receivableAccounts receivableNotes payableBills payableAllowance for uncollectible accounts

Assuming all sales were on credit, what amount of cash did Dr Pepper Sna

pple Group collect from customers in 2008? (Enter your answer in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cash collections for 2008 $

Compute the company’s net profit margin for the three years presented. (Negative values should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Net Profit Margin
2006 %
2007 %
2008 %

accounting 2302 question 26 14 421039

eBook Learning Objective 2Learning Objective 3 Exercise 26 14 (Algorithmic) Average Rate of Return, Cash Payback Period, Net Present Value Method Great Plains Transportation Inc. is considering acquiring equipment at a cost of $98,000. The equipment has an estimated life of 10 years and no residual value. It is expected to provide yearly net cash flows of $49,000. The company’s minimum desired rate of return for net present value analysis is 10%.Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound Interest Present Value of an Annuity of $1 at Compound InterestYear6 .9430.9090.8930.8700.83321.8331.7361.6901.6261.52832.6732.4872.4022.2832.10643.4653.1703.0372.8552.58954.2123.7913.6053.3532.99164.9174.3554.1113.7853.32675.5824.8684.5644.1603.60586.2105.3354.9684.4873.83796.8025.7595.3284.7724.031107.3606.1455.6505.0194.192 a. The average rate of return, giving effect to straight line depreciation on the investment. If required, round your answer to one decimal place. % b. The cash payback period.Select2345678Item 2 years c. Compute the net present value. Use the above table of the present value of an annuity of $1. Round to the nearest dollar.Present value of annual net cash flows:$ Less amount to be invested:$ Net present value:$

25c 3 421078

Elite Company is planning to add a new product to its line. To manufacture this product, the company needs to buy a new machine at a $488,000 cost with an expected four year life and a $18,000 salvage value. All sales are for cash, and all costs are out of pocket except for depreciation on the new machine. Additional information includes the following. (Use Table B.1)

Expected annual sales of new product $ 1,950,000
Expected annual costs of new product
Direct materials 470,000
Direct labor 672,000
Overhead excluding straight line depreciation on new machine 337,000
Selling and administrative expenses 162,000
Income taxes 30 %

Required:
1.

Compute straight line depreciation for each year of this new machine’s life. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Straight line depreciation $

2.

Determine expected net income and net cash flow for each year of this machine’s life. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net income $
Net cash flow $

3.

Compute this machine’s payback period, assuming that cash flows occur evenly throughout each year.(Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

Payback period years

4.

Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return, assuming that income is earned evenly throughout each year. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Accounting rate of return %

5.

Compute the net present value for this machine using a discount rate of 6% and assuming that cash flows occur at each year end. (Hint: Salvage value is a cash inflow at the end of the asset’s life.) (Round “PV Factor” to 4 decimal places. Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net present value $

determine the financial impact of the special order 421083

Ellis Enterprises produces high quality blankets sold to hotels and resorts. Blankets must be well made because of frequent washings. Currently, Holt sells 10,000 blankets at $60 each with the capacity to produce 12,000 blankets. Ellis is considering a special order from a hotel chain in Kenya for 1,000 blankets at a price of $45. Currently, Ellis had the following costs:

Unit Costs $250,000

Product Level Costs $40,000

Facility Costs $125,000

If Ellis accepts the special order, they will incur an additional $2 per blanket in foreign currency transaction costs. No other product or facility costs will change.

1.) Determine the financial impact of the special order on Ellis. Prepare your analysis in good form.

2.) What other factors should Ellis consider in taking the special order?

statement of cash flows indirect method 419985

The comparative balance sheet of Hinson Enterprises, Inc. at December 31,2013 and 2012 is as follows

Dec. 31 2013 Dec. 31, 2012

Cash 128275 157325

Accounts Receivable 196525 211750

Merchandise inventory 281400 261800

Prepaid expense 11725 8400

equipment 573125 469875

Accumulated depreciation Equipment (149450) (115675)

1041600 993475

Accounts Payable (merchandise creditors) 218925 207900

Mortgage notes Payable 0 294000

Common Stocks, $1 par 91000 21000

Paid in capital in excess of par common 455000 280000

stock

Retained earnings 276675 190575

1041600 993475

Additional data obtained from the income statement and from an examination of the accounts in the ledger for 2013 are as follows:

A)Net income 220500

B) Depreciation reported on the Income statement 72975

C) Equipment was Purchased at a cost of 142450 and fully decpreciated equipment costing 39200 was discarded with no salvage realized

D) the morgage note payable was not due until 2014, but the terms permitted eailer payment without penalty

E) 7000 shares of common stocks were issued at $35 for cash

F) Cash dividends declared and paid, 134400

Prepare a statement a cash flow using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activites. If needed, use the minus sign to indicate cash outflows, negative amounts or a decrease in cash.

accounting depreciation methods 420015

Compare three depreciation methods

Newbirth Coatings Company purchased waterproofing equipment on January 2, 2009, for $682,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of four years, or 6,800 operating hours, and aresidual value of $56,400. The equipment was used for 2,600 hours during 2009, 2,100 hours in 2010, 1,200 hours in 2011, and 900 hours in 2012.

Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2010, 2011, and 2012, by (a) thestraight line method, (b) theunits of production method, and (c) thedouble declining balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the four years by each method. Do not round your intermediate calculations. Enter all amounts positive numbers.

blueprint problem cost based decision making keep or drop decisions 420041

Complete the table to compare the effects of dropping the ski line of products. Enter all amounts as positive numbers except for a net loss. If an amount is zero, enter “0”. The cost data for the each department is shown below.

Snowboards Skateboards Skis
Sales $175,000 $180,000 $160,000
Less: variable expenses 70,000 36,000 56,000
Contribution margin $105,000 $144,000 $104,000
Less: fixed expenses:
Salaries $61,250 $63,000 $64,000
Depreciation 14,000 27,000 32,000
Advertising 4,000 9,000 48,000
Net income (loss) $25,750 $45,000 $ 40,000
Alternatives Differential Effect
Keep Drop Increase/Decrease
Sales $ $
Less: variable expenses
Contribution margin $ $
Less: fixed expenses:
Salaries $ $ $
Depreciation
Advertising
Net income (loss) $ $ $

cost management accounting 420083

Confer Company produces two different metal components used in medical equipment (Component X and Component Y). The company has three processes: molding, grinding, and finishing. In molding, molds are created, and molten metal is poured into the shell. Grinding removes the gates that allowed the molten metal to flow into the mold’s cavities. In finishing, rough edges caused by the grinders are removed by small, handheld pneumatic tools. In molding, the setup time is one hour. The other two processes have no setup time required. The demand for Component X is 600 units per day, and the demand for Component Y is 1,000 units per day. The minutes required per unit for each product are as follows:

Minutes Required per Unit of Product
Molding Grinding Finishing
Component X 5 10 15

Component Y 10 15 20

The company operates one eight hour shift. The molding process employs 24 workers (who each work eight hours). Two hours of their time, however, are used for setups (assuming both products are produced). The grinding process has sufficient equipment and workers to provide 400 grinding hours per shift.

The Finishing Department is labor intensive and employs 70 workers, who each work eight hours per day. The only significant unit level variable costs are materials and power. For Component X, the variable cost per unit is $40 and for Component Y, it is $50. Selling prices for X and Y are $90 and $110, respectively. Confer’s policy is to use two setups per day: an initial setup to produce all that is scheduled for Component X and a second setup (changeover) to produce all that is scheduled for Component Y. The amount does not necessarily correspond to each product’s daily demand.

REQUIRED:
a) Calculate the time (in minutes) needed each day to meet the daily market demand for Component X and Component Y. What is the major internal constraint facing Confer Company?
b) Describe how Confer should exploit its major binding constraint. Specifically, identify the product mix that will maximize contribution margin and calculate the maximum obtainable contribution margin using your suggested product mix.
c) Assume that manufacturing engineering has found a way to reduce the molding setup time from one hour to 10 minutes. Explain how this affects the product mix and total contribution margin.

individual tax return problem 2 420100

*This one has me beyond confused. I would be grateful to anyone who can help me out. The textbook that the problem came from is McGraw Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities, 2013 edition, Appendix C. Thanks so much!

INDIVIDUAL TAX RETURN PROBLEM 2 Required:

  • Use the following information to complete Karl and Ellie Frederickson’s 2011 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps.

  • You may need the following forms to complete the project: Form 1040 and Schedule A. The forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

Facts:

  1. Karl Frederickson is employed as a human resources manager for Toys Unlimited, Inc., and Ellie is a financial planner for her mother’s company, Frederickson Investments, Inc., a full service wealth planning firm. They provide the following information:

    • They both want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

    • They live at 9876 Fighting Irish Lane, South Bend, IN.

    • Karl’s birthday is 7/17/1965 and his Social Security number is 555 12 6789.

    • Ellie’s birthday is 9/11/1967 and her Social Security number is 987 65 4321.

    • Karl or Ellie do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

  2. Karl received a Form W 2 from Toys Unlimited, Inc. that contained the following information:

    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 1 Wages, tips, other compensation: $45,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 2 Federal income tax withheld: 7,500
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 3 Social Security wages: 45,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 4 Social Security tax withheld: 1,890
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 5 Medicare wages and tips: 45,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 6 Medicare tax withheld: 653
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 17 State income tax: 2,200
  3. Ellie received a Form W 2 from Frederickson Investments, Inc. that contained the following information:

    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 1 Wages, tips, other compensation: $85,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 2 Federal income tax withheld: 12,500
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 3 Social Security wages: 85,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 4 Social Security tax withheld: 3,570
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 5 Medicare wages and tips: 85,000
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 6 Medicare tax withheld: 1,233
    Af?cAc‚¬A??c Line 17 State income tax: 4,200

Page C 3

Karl and Ellie incurred the following medical expenses for the year:

Af?cAc‚¬A??c Transportation to Chicago for Karl’s cancer treatment: 2,000 miles
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Unreimbursed hospital charges for Karl: $6,500
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Unreimbursed prescription drug charges for Karl and Ellie: 1,750
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Unreimbursed physician charges for Karl and Ellie: 2,200
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Unreimbursed prescription glasses for Ellie: 150
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Laser hair treatment for Ellie (so that she will no longer need to shave her legs) 2,000

Karl and Ellie paid $12,000 of interest payments on their primary residence (acquisition debt of $225,000). They also paid $1,750 of interest expense on Ellie’s car loan and $500 of interest on their Visa card.

Karl and Ellie paid $4,000 of real estate taxes on their home and $1,000 of real estate tax on a vacant lot they purchased with the hope of building their dream home in the future. They also paid $3,000 in sales tax on Ellie’s car and other purchases and $1,000 of ad valoreum tax on their cars.

Karl and Ellie made the following contributions this year:

Af?cAc‚¬A??c American Red Cross $Af?cAc‚¬A?’200
Af?cAc‚¬A??c United Way 150
Af?cAc‚¬A??c St. Joseph’s Catholic Church 8,000
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Food for the family of Hannah Barbara (a neighbor who suffered a tragic car accident this past year). 225
Af?cAc‚¬A??c Stock transfer to the University of Notre Dame (originally purchased for $1,000 in 2005) 750

Karl incurred $4,000 of unreimbursed meals and entertainment related to his job. Ellie incurred $1,200 of expenses for investment publications, and last year they paid their CPA $500 to prepare their tax return.

The roof on Karl and Ellie’s house was severely damaged in a hail storm. They had to replace the roof ($7,500), which unfortunately was not covered by insurance because of their high deductible ($10,000).

Karl won $5,000 in the state lottery. He has been playing the lottery for years ($10 in lottery tickets every week ($520 in total) that he saves to keep track of the numbers he plays).

accounting 420120

Consider the following activities which take place in a veterinary clinic.

(a.) Cleaning cages

(b.) Heating and air conditioning the clinic

(c.) Sending blood work to a lab

(d.) Dispensing medicine

Which of the following statements is(are) true? Question 18 options:

Service entities cannot use ABC for overhead allocation.
Cleaning cages is a facility level activity.
Dispensing medicine is a facility level activity.
Heating and air conditioning the clinic is a facility level activity.
Sending blood work to a lab is a facility level activity.

accounting ii please help me on this 420135

Consider the following transactions for Sleek’s Furniture:

a. incurred and paid web site expenses, $2100

b. incurred and paid manufacturing wages, $17,000

c. purchased materials on account, $15,000

d. used in production: direct materials, $9,000; indirect materials, $1,500

e.assigned $17,000 of manufacturing labor to jobs, 55% of which was direct labor and 45% of which was indirect labor

f.recorded manufacturing overhead; depreciation on plant, $11,000; plant insurance, $1,000; plant property tax, $4,100 (credit property tax payable)

g. allocated manufacturing overhead to jobs, 160% of direct labor costs

h. completed production, $32,000

i. sold inventory on account, $24,000; cost of goods sold, $16,000

Journalize the transactions in Sleek’s GENERAL JOURNAL

what happens to roi 420182

The controllable margin plus the additional income, and the average operating assets plus the new machine must be used in to determine the new ROI.

Dax Pet Foods compiled the following information for the year for its dog division

Average operating assets $3,500,000
Controllable margin 315,000

Dax’s corporate office expects the division to earn a minimum return of 8%. Suppose the dog division invests in a new machine that will produce a new dog food product. The machine is expected to generate $19,500 of controllable profit and will cost $150,000. If Dax buys the new machine, what happens to ROI?

a.It will be 9%.

b.

It will increase to 9.16%

c.

It will become 9.6%.

costello 420325

Costello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

Direct materialsAf?cAc‚¬”2 pound plastic at $7.46 per pound $ 14.92
Direct laborAf?cAc‚¬”1.50 hours at $11.00 per hour 16.50
Variable manufacturing overhead 9.75
Fixed manufacturing overhead 11.25
Total standard cost per unit $52.42

The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $14 per direct labor hour ($21.00 AfA?A?· 1.50). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 9,000 direct labor hours (6,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $58,500 ($6.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $67,500 ($7.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,600 units were as follows.

Direct materials (9,340 pounds) $ 72,292
Direct labor (6,730 hours) 75,645
Variable overhead 67,811
Fixed overhead 30,919
Total manufacturing costs $246,667

The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.

gaap 420353

With countries around the world adopting IFRS, many argue that the IASB should tailor its standards to meet the needs of small enterprises. One view is that the board should create standards for SMEs, specifically those that do not have public accountability. Others, however, believe that full IFRS are suitable for all entities. The board also needs to determine which entities the IASB SME standards should be intended for. One view is that public accountability should be the distinguishing factor. Full IFRS, rather than SME IFRS, should be required for companies that are public. Others believe the IASB should set forth characteristics of SMEs and let individual countries determine whether the companies qualify as an SME. Another possibility would be to use a size test to determine the enterprise’s classification.

1. Should the IASB develop a separate set of standards for SMEs or are existing IFRS suitable for all companies, should there be a distinction between small and large companies?

foreign currency coyote corp a u s company in texas had the following series of tran 420368

Coyote Corp. (a U.S. company in Texas) had the following series of transactions in a foreign country during 2011:

Mar. 1 bought inventory costing 60,000 pesos on credit

May 1 sold 60% of the inventory for 54,000 pesos on credit

Aug. 1 collected 48,000 pesos from customers

Sept. 1 paid 36,000 pesos from customers

The appropriate exchange rates during 2011 were as follows:

Mar. 1 $.20 = 1 peso

May 1 $.22 = 1 peso

Aug 1 $.23 = 1 peso

Sept. 1 $.24 = 1 peso

Dec. 31 $.25 = 1 peso

1. Prepare all journal entries in U.S. dollars along with any Dec. 31 adjusting entries. Coyote uses a perpetual inventory system.
2. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 balance sheet for Inventory?
3. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 income statement for Cost Of Goods Sold?
4. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 income statement for Sales?
5. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 balance sheet for Accounts Receivable?
6. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 balance sheet for Accounts Payable?
7. What amount will Coyote Corp report in its 2011 balance sheet for Cash?

need help 420442

Daba Company manufactures two products, Product F and Product G. The company expects to produce and sell 1,970 units of Product F and 2,700 units of Product G during the current year. The company uses activity based costing to compute unit product costs for external reports. Data relating to the company’s three activity cost pools are given below for the current year:

Total Activity

Activity Cost Pool Total Cost Product F Product G Total
Machine setups $ 36,570 164 setups 101 setups 265 setups
Purchase orders $ 281,880 1,310 orders 1,120 orders 2,430 orders
General factory $ 131,250 2,310 hours 3,940 hours 6,250 hours

Required:

Using the activity based costing approach, determine the overhead cost for each product line. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Product F Product G
Overhead cost $ $

director labor hours 420447

Daguio Corporation uses direct labor hours in its predetermined overhead rate. At the beginning of the year, the total estimated manufacturing overhead was $305,040. At the end of the year, actual direct labor hours for the year were 16,800 hours, manufacturing overhead for the year was underapplied by $16,800, and the actual manufacturing overhead was $299,040. The predetermined overhead rate for the year must have been:

$17.46 per direct labor hour
$17.74 per direct labor hour
$15.93 per direct labor hour
$16.80 per direct labor hour

managerial accounting 420472

Data concerning Moscowitz Corporation’s single product appear below:

<?xml:namespace prefix = v ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:vml” /> <?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” /> per unit percent of sales

Selling price $160 100%

Variable expenses 96 60%

Contribution margin $64 40%

Fixed expenses are $375,000 per month. The company is currently selling 8,000 units per month. The marketing manager would like to cut the selling price by $15 and increase the advertising budget by $23,000 per month. The marketing manager predicts that these two changes would increase monthly sales by 3,100 units. What should be the overall effect on the company’s monthly net operating income of this change?

A. decrease of $128,900

B. increase of $426,500

C. increase of $8,900

D. increase of $128,900

accounting help 420482

Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:

  1. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $800,000 on February 16. The stand of timber is estimated at 5,000,000 board feet. During the current year, 1,400,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.
  2. On December 31, the company determined that $870,000 ofgoodwill was impaired.
  3. Governmental and legal costs of $861,600 were incurred on June 30 in obtaining apatent with an estimated economic life of 12 years. Amortization is to be for one half year.

Instructions:

1. Determine the amount of the amortization, depletion, or impairment for the current year for each of the foregoing items. Do not round your intermediate calculations but round your final answers to the nearest dollar.

Item Impairment, Amortization or Depletion Expense
a. $
b. $
c. $

financial accouting fundamentals qs 4 4 is wrong 420508

The debits and credits don’t equal at the end, meaning it’s wrong?

April 1: Sold merchandise for 3,000, granding customer terms of 2/10 EOM. Invoice dated April 1st. Cost of merchandise is 1,800.

April 4th: Customer in April 1st sale returned merchandise and recieved credit for 600. The merchandise, which cost 360 is returned to inventory.

April 11: Received payment for the amount due from April 1st sale less the return on April 4th.

At the end I get Debit = $8112 and Credit = $8208, which isn’t correct since they don’t equal eachother?

April 1st:

A/P DR 3,000.

Sales CR 3,000

Cost of goods sold DR 1,800

Merchandise Inventory CR 360

April 4th:

Sales return and allowance DR 600

A/R CR 600

Merchandise Inventory DR 360

Cost of goods sold CR 360

April 11th:

Cash DR 2352

Sales discount CR 48

A/R CR 2400

problem b 5 420546

On December 1, Showcase Interiors purchased a shipment of furniture from Colonial House by paying $10,500 cash and issuing an installment note payable in the face amount of $28,800. The note is to be paid in 24 monthly installments of $1,200 each. Although the note makes no mention of an interest charge, the rate of interest usually charged to Showcase Interiors in such transactions is 1A??1 percent per month. Use Table PV’2 (in Exhibit B 9) a. Compute the present value of the note payable, using a discount rate of 1A??1 percent per month. (Round your PV factor to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Present value $ b. Prepare the journal entries in the accounts of Showcase Interiors on (Round your PV factor to 3 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response): 1. December 1, to record the purchase of the furniture (debit Inventory). 2. December 31, to record the first $1,200 monthly payment on the note and to recognize interest expense for one month by the effective interest method. Date General Journal Debit Credit Dec. 1 Dec. 31 c. Show how the liability for this note would appear in the balance sheet at December 31. (Assume that the note is classified as a current liability.) (Round your PV factor to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Notes payable $

additional paid in capital 420571

At December 31, 2010, the records of Seacrest Enterprises provided the following selected and incomplete data:

Common stock (par $0.50; no changes during 2010).
Shares authorized, 10,000,000.
Shares issued, ? ; issue price $10 per share.
Shares held as treasury stock, 50,000 shares, cost $11 per share.
Net income for 2010, $2,400,000.
Common stock account $750,000.
Dividends declared and paid during 2010, $1 per share.
Retained earnings balance, January 1, 2010, $36,400,000.

The balance in the Additional paid in capital account would be $_____ ??

intermediate accounting problem basic and diluted earnings 420576

On December 31, 2012, Brisbane Company had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding and 30,000 shares of 7%, $50 par, cumulative preferred stock outstanding. On February 28, 2013, Brisbane purchased 24,000 shares of common stock on the open market as treasury stock paying $40 per share. Brisbane sold 6,000 treasury shares on Spetmeber 30, 2013, for $45 per share. Net income for 2013 was $180,905. Also outstanding during the year were fully vested incentive stock opetions giving key personnel the option to buy 50,000 common shares at $40. The market price of the common shares averaged $50 during 2013.

Compute Brisbane’s basic and diluted earnings per share (rounded to 2 decimal places) for 2013. Show work.

THANK YOU

accounting 420653

Deskins Clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall men’ssuits. The company has used a standard cost system. In May 2008,11,200 suits were produced. The following standard and actual costdata applied to the month of May when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used.

CostElement

Standard (per unit)

Actual

Direct materials 8 yards at $4.30 per yard $371,050 for 90,500 yards
($4.10 per yard)
Direct labor 1.2 hours at $13.50 per hour $201,630 for 14,300 hours
($14.10 per hour)
Overhead 1.2 hours at $6.00 per hour $49,000 fixed overhead
$37,000 varibale overhead
(fixed $3.30; variable $2.50)

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Atnormal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000, andbudgeted variable overhead was $35,000.

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantityvariances for (1) materials and (2) labor

(b) Calculate the manufacuring overhead controllable variance and the manufacturing overhead volume variance as well as the total manufacturing overhead variance.

managerial accounting 419377

Carr Company produces a single product. During the past year, Carr manufactured 29,650 units and sold 24,600 units. Production costs for the year were as follows:

Fixed manufacturing overhead $563,350
Variable manufacturing overhead $243,130
Direct labor $145,285
Direct materials $222,375

Sales totaled $1,070,100, variable selling expenses totaled $140,220, and fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $210,515. There were no units in beginning inventory. Assume that direct labor is a variable cost.

The contribution margin per unit would be:

I KNOW THE ANSWER IS 17.20 BUT I DONT KNOW WHY! PLEASE GIVE ME A STEP BY STEP EXPLANATION. OVERWISE I WILL NOT RATE! THANK YOU!

managerial accounting 419387

CASE 3A ‘ AUERBACH ENTERPRISES

Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout

North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and

models of automobiles and trucks. The company’s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska.

MaxiFlow uses a few complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test.

On the other hand, Alaska uses many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process.

MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs which total $135 per unit, while Alaska’s direct materials

requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.

Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air

conditioners. The company has used a company wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but

the new controller, Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with

the next year.

The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing

departments within the company:

Overhead Machine

Costs Hours

Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000

Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000

Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000

Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000

Total $480,000 80,000

Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units

requires the following number of hours in each department:

MaxiFlow Alaska

Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16

Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74

Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8

Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66

Total 116 164

Required:

1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.

2. Compute a company wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.

3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company wide

rate? Why or why not?

floating investments strategy and the analysis of capital investments 419393

Case Background

Jim was excited as he drove into the car park at Floating Investments Limited. The senior management meeting was scheduled for 9 AM and his proposal was the major item on the agenda. Jim’s o?cial title was Projects Manager and he was responsible for initiating and overseeing new projects. This particular project was close to Jim’s heart because it involved sailing”an activity that Jim had spent many years pursuing both socially and competitively. Jim believed that his project was well suited to Floating Investments as it was an extension of existing business.

Floating Investments Limited specializes in marine investment projects. Projects previously undertaken by the company include construction of canals and moorings for a major residential development and redevelopment of ‘Fisherman’s Wharf’ in the downtown area. Given the nature of these projects, including the length of time over which the initial investments were recovered, the degree of risk involved was generally higher than more traditional investment projects.

Although Jim had completed a business degree at University, he was determined that his accounting background would not overshadow his career choice as an operational manager. Last night he had told his wife: “This project sells itself. The idea is good. I know the sailing world and we’ve got the big picture sorted out. Newland Harbor has only one marina to serve over 6000 boats, 80% of which cannot get marina berths and use moorings that sailors must row to. We’ve already got the site and the contractor lined up to build a new marina. All we need is management’s go ahead. The accountants can sort out the dollars and cents later.”

The Chief Executive O?cer (CEO) opened the meeting and after the preliminaries gave Jim the signal to present his proposal. Jim knew the CEO was an experienced yachtsman and was con?dent that he would support the project. He started his proposal by describing the current shortage of marina berths and the size of the market, emphasizing that the local Port Authority owned the only existing marina. Because the Authority charged only a minimal rental, anyone who possessed a berth generally kept it and there was an elaborate (and lucrative) black market in trading the license to those on the waiting list.

Jim continued, “The proposed marina is designed for 500 boats and we estimate that it will take two years to build commencing 1 November 2001. Because of the shortage of marina berths it is expected that all berths will be leased from 1 November 2003. The 50 acre site we intend using for the project was purchased several years ago for $268,000 as part of the Fisherman’s Wharf development, although it was never used for that project.

Construction of the marina falls into three stages:

1. Construction of sea walls, dredging the seabed, excavations for marina o?ces and service facilities, and road access.

2. Inserting piles and assembling pontoons.

3. Constructing buildings and facilities such as marina o?ce, chandlery, repair workshops, and waste disposal.

The most favorable tender, from a reputable construction company, indicates a total construction cost of $12,000,000 payable as follows:

10% payable prior to commencement (31 October 2001)

40% payable one year later

40% payable on completion (31 October 2003)

10% retention payable one year after completion

There will be three categories of berths:

Category A for boats between 12 and 18 meters in length: 50 berths

Category B for boats between 8 and 12 meters in length: 300 berths

Category C for boats between 6 and 8 meters in length: 150 berths

I am sure you will agree that this is an excellent project and an exciting opportuA?­nity for the company.”

Jim sat down. The CEO spoke: “That site you had in mind. We’ve just had an o?er from a real estate developer of $7000 per acre. How does that a?ect your project?” Peter Shrivers from marketing also asked: “How much are you going to charge for the berths? I know that the Port Authority charges $4500 for my 10 meter ketch. How does this compare? And what is the bottom line on this?”

Jim was silent. He hadn’t thought that management would want the ?nancial details so soon. Help came from an unexpected quarter. Emma Nautically, the Financial Controller spoke: ”Figuring out a price is not going to be easy because there has not been a proper market for marina berths in Newland before. A sensible ?rst step would be to calculate the minimum rental for the project to break even. At the same time we can commission a market survey to ?nd out what price boat owners will be prepared to pay for the berths. We also need to consider other issues such as tax e?ects, in?ation, and the opportunity cost of funds. Why don’t Jim and I sit down and sort out a formal ?nancial analysis and present it at the next manageA?­ment meeting this time next month?”

To Jim’s great relief, the meeting agreed to Emma’s suggestion. He was o? the hook, at least for the moment. After the meeting had ended, he thanked Emma. She laughed: “It always pays to buy some time particularly when it’s a big project. You had the big picture okay but at the end of the day, the ?nancials have got to be sorted out. I know you majored in management accounting at University so you can probably remember how to do this type of analysis. Let me give you some further information.” Jim started taking notes.

Emma continued: “The tax rate is 50% and 4% depreciation on a straight line basis will be allowed for 80% of the construction cost. The company’s cost of capital is 16.6% after allowing for tax and in?ation. Based on current needs and past experience, 16.6% should cover the required rate of return to shareholders, debt repayment, and include a factor for the risk involved in this type of investment. Let’s assume that cash ?ows take place at the end of each year. What about operating costs and working capital?”

Jim replied: “I estimated that the lease rentals, maintenance and supervisory costs and land values will rise in line with in?ation, which is expected to be 6% annually over the life of the marina. Annual maintenance and supervisory costs are estimated to be $60,000 at current prices. Working capital requirements are not expected to be signi?cant.”

Emma asked: “What will the time horizon be? We will need to think about termA?­inal values as they can often determine the success or otherwise of a project.”

Jim considered her question: “We intend that the lease periods for each berth will be for a twenty year period; in other words, the period from 1 November 2003 to 31 October 2023. It’s probably safest to assume initially that the land will be the only valuable asset at the end of 2023.”

Emma gave Jim’s reply some thought and then said, “Okay, I think that we have enough information now to do the analysis. There are two things we need to do. First, we have to calculate the amount of annual, pre tax lease rental that must be generated in order for the project to break even. Calculate this amount for the ?rst year of operations.”

“Second, using this ?rst year amount, calculate how much an owner of a 10 metre yacht will pay in the ?rst year. We can then compare this with the amount Peter Shrivers pays. I guess a simple way of doing this is to use the mid points of the size ranges to calculate the total meters.”

Jim returned home that evening. “How did it go?” asked his wife. Jim confessed: “I think I would have been out of a job if it hadn’t been for the accountants. Have you seen my old management accounting books? I’m going to need them.”

Required

Identify the information that Jim needs to present to the Board at the next meeting, providing calculations using the data supplied. Set out all the assumptions that need to be made and examine their reasonableness and consequences if vioA?­lated.

Include in your information set an analysis of the risks inherent in this type of investment and discuss the ways in which management of these risk factors can be incorporated in the project.

cash flow and npv 419403

The Catseye Marble Co is thinking of replacing a manual production process with a machine. The manual process requires three relatively unskilled workers and a supervisor. Each worker makes $17,500 a year and the supervisor earns $24,500. The new machine can be run with only one skilled operator who will earn $41,000. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional third of all wages and salaries. The machine costs $150,000 and has a tax depreciation life of five years. Catseye elects straight line depreciation for tax purposes. A service contract covers all maintenance for $5,000 a year. The machine is expected to last six years, at which time it will have no salvage value. The machines’ output will be virtually indistinguishable from that of the manual process in both quality and quantity. There are no other operating differences between the manual and the machine processes. Their marginal tax rate is 35% and its cost of capital is 10%. a) Calculate the incremental cash flows associated with the project to acquire the machine b) Calculate the project’s payback and NPV. Would you accept or reject the project.

net cash in operating activities and financing activities 419435

Cezar Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:

Cezar Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
Balance
Beginning
Balance
Assets:
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents $ 50,000 $ 34,000
Accounts receivable 18,000 24,000
Inventory

60,000

54,000

Total current assets

128,000

112,000

Property, plant, and equipment 364,000 340,000
Less accumulated depreciation

187,000

154,000

Net property, plant, equipment

177,000

186,000

Total assets

$305,000

$298,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $ 12,500 $ 14,000
Accrued liabilities 47,500 54,000
Income taxes payable

49,000

44,000

Total current liabilities 109,000 112,000
Bonds payable

82,000

74,000

Total liabilities

191,000

186,000

Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock 27,000 34,000
Retained earnings

87,000

78,000

Total stockholders’ equity

114,000

112,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$305,000

$298,000

The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Its net income for the year was $15,000 and its cash dividends were $6,000. The company did not retire any bonds payable or issue any common stock during the year. Its net cash provided by operating activities and net cash used in financing activities are:

net cash provided by operating activities, $45,000; net cash used in financing activities,$5,000
net cash provided by operating activities, $39,000; net cash used in financing activities,$14,000
net cash provided by operating activities, $39,000; net cash used in financing activities,$5,000
net cash provided by operating activities, $45,000; net cash used in financing activities,$14,000

***If you respond to help out on this problem please provide your solution or work to the answer so I can understand.

Thanks ; )

managerial accounting chapter 12 problem 10 419440

Ch12 P10

PROBLEM 12 10. Economic Value Added and the Balanced Scorecard [LO 6,7,8] Spectrum Book Company has two divisions: The Brick and Mortar division sells books through more than 100 bookstores throughout the United States; the Internet division was formed 18 months ago and sells books via the Internet. Data for the past year are:

Brick and Mortar Division

Internet Division

Total assets

$180,000,000

$17,200,000

Noninterest bearing current liabilities

7,800,000

2,800,000

Interest expense

1,400,000

465,000

Net income (loss)

30,900,000

(1,250,000)

Tax rate

40%

‘0’

Cost of capital

13%

15%

Required

  • a. Evaluate the two divisions in terms of economic value added (EVA).
  • b. Explain why it might be better to evaluate the Internet division in terms of a balanced scorecard rather than just using EVA.
  • c. Consider the customer and internal processes dimensions of the balanced scorecard. Suggest two measures for each dimension that would be appropriate for the Brick and Mortar division and two measures for each dimension that would be appropriate for the Internet division.
  • d. A strategy map diagrams the relationship across the dimensions of the balanced scorecard. Identify the potential links between the customer and internal processes dimensions you identified in part c.

managerial accounting 419445

Chandler Ltd. estimates sales for the second quarter of 2014 will be as follows.

Month Units
April 2,520
May 2,420
June 2,360

The target ending inventory of finished products is as follows.

March 31 2,020
April 30 2,260
May 31 2,140
June 30 2,370

2 units of material are required for each unit of finished product. Production for July is estimated at 2,660 units to start building inventory for the fall sales period. Chandler’s policy is to have an inventory of raw materials at the end of each month equal to 60% of the following month’s production requirements.

Raw materials are expected to cost $6 per unit throughout the period.

Calculate the May raw materials purchases in dollars.

Calclulate the May raw material purchase cost.

Thanks in advance.

accounting 11 chapter 20 codes easy 419465

Chapter 20

A selected list of accounts used by Cline Manufacturing Company follows:

Code Code

A Cash F Accounts Payable

B Accounts Receivable G Factory Labor

C Raw Materials Inventory H Manufacturing Overhead

D Work In Process Inventory I Cost of Goods Sold

E Finished Goods Inventory J Sales

Cline Manufacturing Company uses a job order system and maintains perpetual inventory records.

Instructions

Place the appropriate code letter in the columns indicating the appropriate account(s) to be debited and credited for the transactions listed below.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

Account(s) Account(s)

Transactions Debited Credited

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

1. Raw materials were purchased on account.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

2. Issued a check to Dixon Machine Shop for

repair work on factory equipment.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

3. Direct materials were requisitioned for Job 280.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

4. Factory labor was paid as incurred.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

5. Recognized direct labor and indirect labor used.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

6. The production department requisitioned indirect

materials for use in the factory.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

7. Overhead was applied to production based on a

predetermined overhead rate of $8 per labor hour.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

8. Goods that were completed were transferred to

finished goods.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

9. Goods costing $80,000 were sold for $105,000

on account.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

10. Paid for raw materials purchased previously

on account.

“”””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””””

accounting please help 419477

CHAPTER 23

QS 23 14 Cash receipts L.O. P1

The Candy Shoppe reports the following sales forecast: August, $110,000; September, $120,000. Cash sales are normally 25% of total sales and all credit sales are expected to be collected in the month following the date of sale. Prepare a schedule of cash receipts for September. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

CANDY SHOPPE
Cash Receipts Budget
For The Month Ended September 30
$

Total cash receipts

QS 23 16 Cash disbursements for merchandise L.O. P1

T Mart purchased $100,000 of merchandise in August and expects to purchase $120,000 in September. Merchandise purchases are paid as follows: 25% in the month of purchase and 75% in the following month.

Compute cash disbursements for merchandise for September. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
T MART
Cash Disbursements for Merchandise (Budgeted)
For The Month Ended September 30
Cash disbursements for September purchases $
Cash disbursements for August purchases $

Total cash disbursements $

QS 23 23 Sales budget L.O. P1

Shay, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the quarter ending March 31. It sells a single product for $25 per unit. Budgeted sales for the next four months follow.

January February March April
Sales in units 1,200 1,000 1,600 1,400

Prepare a sales budget for the months of January, February, and March. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

SHAY INC.
Sales Budget
For January, February, and March
Budgeted Unit Sales Budgeted Unit Price Budgeted Total Sales
January $ $
February
March



Totals for the quarter $

QS 23 24 Cash receipts budget L.O. P1

Shay, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the quarter ending March 31. It sells a single product for $25 per unit. Budgeted sales for the next four months follow.

January February March April
Sales in units 1,200 1,000 1,600 1,400

In addition, sales are 40% cash and 60% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The January 1 balance in accounts receivable is $10,000. Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash receipts for January, February, and March. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

SHAY INC.
Cash Receipts Budget
For January, February, and March
January February March
$ $ $



Cash receipts from



Total cash receipts $ $ $





QS 23 25 Selling expense budget L.O. P1

Shay, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the quarter ending March 31. It sells a single product for $25 per unit. Budgeted sales for the next four months follow.

January February March April
Sales in units 1,200 1,000 1,600 1,400

In addition, sales commissions are 10% of sales and the company pays a sales manager a salary of $5,000 per month. Sales commissions and salaries are paid in the month incurred.

Prepare a selling expense budget for January, February, and March. (Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

SHAY INC.
Selling Expense Budget
For January, February, and March
January February March
$ $ $
% % %






Total selling expenses $ $ $
$

accounting 419537

Chapter 8 BTN 8 1

1. 1. For both fiscal year end February 27, 2010 and February 28, 2009, identify the total amount of cash and cash equivalent. Determine the percentage this amount represents of total current asset, total liabilities, total shareholders’ equity and total assets for both years. Comment on any trend.

Comment (Explaination)

1. February 27, 2010 and February 28, 2009,use the information in the statement of cash flow to determine the percentage change between beginning and ending year amount of cash and cash equivalent

2. Compute the day’s sales uncollected as of February 27, 2010 and February 28, 2009.Has the collection of receivables improved? Are accounts receivables an important asset for RIM? Explain.

3. Use RIM financial statement for fiscal years ending February 27, 2010.Recompute its days sales uncollected for fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010.Compare this days sales uncollected for 2010 and 2009.

chapter 8 exercise 4 cash flow calculations and net present value 419548

Chapter 8 Exercise 4:

4. Cash flow calculations and net present value

On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net present value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.

b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.

c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

statement of cash flows help 419573

Charlotte Company’s net income last year was $83,000. Changes in the company’s balance sheet accounts for the year appear below:

Increases
(Decreases)
Cash $ (3,500)
Accounts receivable $ 21,000
Inventory $ 28,000
Prepaid expenses $ (3,500)
Long term investments $ 39,000
Property, plant and equipment $ 69,000
Accumulated depreciation $ 45,000
Liability and Equity Accounts:
Accounts payable $ (28,000)
Accrued liabilities $ 18,000
Income taxes payable $ 48,000
Bonds payable $ (59,000)
Common stock $ 29,000
Retained earnings $ 70,000

The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment, sell any long term investments, issue any bonds payable, or repurchase any of its own common stock during the year. The company declared and paid a cash dividend.

Required:

a.

Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year. (Use the indirect method.) (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Statement of Cash Flows
Operating activities:
(Click to select)Net lossNet income $
Adjustments to convert net income to cash basis:
(Click to select)Increase in accounts receivableDecrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in accounts payableIncrease in inventoryDecrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in income taxes payableDepreciationDecrease in accounts receivableDecrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts payableDecrease in inventory $
(Click to select)Decrease in accounts payableDecrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts receivableDecrease in prepaid expensesDepreciationDecrease in inventoryIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in inventoryIncrease in accounts payableIncrease in prepaid expensesDecrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in income taxes payableIncrease in accrued liabilities
(Click to select)Increase in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts receivableDecrease in prepaid expensesDecrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts payableIncrease in inventoryDepreciationDecrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in accounts payableDecrease in inventoryIncrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in accrued liabilities
(Click to select)Decrease in accounts payableIncrease in accounts payableDecrease in accounts receivableDecrease in inventoryIncrease in income taxes payableIncrease in accrued liabilitiesDecrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in accounts receivableDepreciationDecrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in inventoryIncrease in prepaid expenses
(Click to select)Increase in accounts receivableDepreciationIncrease in prepaid expensesDecrease in inventoryIncrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts receivableIncrease in accounts payableIncrease in inventoryDecrease in accounts payableDecrease in income taxes payableIncrease in accrued liabilitiesDecrease in prepaid expensesDecrease in accrued liabilities
(Click to select)Decrease in accrued liabilitiesDecrease in accounts receivableIncrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in accounts receivableDecrease in inventoryDepreciationIncrease in accrued liabilitiesDecrease in income taxes payableDecrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in inventoryIncrease in income taxes payableDecrease in accounts payableIncrease in accounts payable
(Click to select)Decrease in prepaid expensesIncrease in accounts payableIncrease in accounts receivableDecrease in accounts payableIncrease in income taxes payableIncrease in inventoryDecrease in accrued liabilitiesDecrease in inventoryDepreciationIncrease in accrued liabilitiesIncrease in prepaid expensesDecrease in accounts receivableDecrease in income taxes payable


Net cash (Click to select)used forprovided by operating activities $



b.

Prepare the investing activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Statement of Cash Flows
Investing activities:
(Click to select)Purchase of long term investmentsPurchase of property, plant and equipmentIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in inventoryIncrease in accounts payable $
(Click to select)Purchase of property, plant and equipmentIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in inventoryPurchase of long term investmentsIncrease in accounts payable

Net cash (Click to select)provided byused for investing activities $



c.

Prepare the financing activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Statement of Cash Flows
Financing activities:
(Click to select)Increase in inventoryIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in common stockRetirement of bonds payableIssuance of common stockIncrease in accounts payableCash dividends $
(Click to select)Issuance of common stockIncrease in accounts payableIncrease in inventoryCash dividendsIncrease in common stockIncrease in accounts receivableRetirement of bonds payable
(Click to select)Issuance of common stockIncrease in inventoryIncrease in accounts receivableIncrease in common stockCash dividendsRetirement of bonds payableIncrease in accounts payable

Net cash (Click to select)used forprovided by financing activities

prepare journal entries perpetual inventory system partial income statement showing 419694

Clay pooll Hardwares is only hardware store in a remote area of northern Minnesota. Some of Claypools tranactions during the current year are as followed:

Nov 5th Sold Lumber on account to Bemmidji Construction for $13,390. The inventory subsidary ledger shows the cost of the this merchandise was $9,105.

Nov 9th Purchased Tools on account from Owatonna Tool Company, $3,800.

Dec 5th Collected in cash the $13,390 account recivable from Bemidji Construction.

Dec 9th Paid the $3,800 owed to Owatonna Tool Company.

Claypools personnel counted the inventory on hand and determined its cost to be $182,080. The accounting records however, indicate inventory of 183,790 and a cost of goods sold of $695,222. The physcial count of inventory was observed by the company’s auditors and is considered correct. (Inventory Shrinkage).

A. Prepare joural entries to record theses transactions and events in the accounting records of Claypool Hardware. (The company uses a Perpetual inventory system).

B. Prepare a partial income statement showing the companies Gross profit for the year. (Net Sales for the year amount to $1,024,900.

accounting 213 419724

Clopack Company manufactures one product that goes through one processing department called Mixing. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Mixing Department. The company uses the weighted average method to account for units and costs. Its Work in Process T account for the Mixing Department for June follows (all forthcoming questions pertain to June):

Work in ProcessAf?cAc‚¬”Mixing Department


June 1 balance 32,000 Completed and transferred ?
Materials 141,245 to Finished Goods
Direct labor 90,500
Overhead 108,000


June 30 balance ?



The June 1 work in process inventory consisted of 4,900 pounds with $17,380 in materials cost and $14,620 in conversion cost. The June 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion. During June 37,400 pounds were started into production. The June 30 work in process inventory consisted of 7,800 pounds that were 100% complete with respect to materials and 50% complete with respect to conversion.

Required:
Prepare the journal entries to record the raw materials used in production and the direct labor cost incurred.

General Journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Work in process mixingRaw materials inventorySalaries and wages payableManufacturing overheadPurchases of raw materialsAccounts receivableAccounts payableCost of goods sold
(Click to select)Raw materials inventoryWork in process mixingManufacturing overheadCost of goods manufacturedAccounts payableSalaries and wages payableFinished goodsCost of goods sold
(Click to select)Work in process mixingSalaries and wages payableRaw materials inventoryManufacturing overheadFinished goodsCost of goods soldAccounts payablePurchases of raw materials
(Click to select)Salaries and wages payableRaw materials inventoryWork in process mixingAccounts receivableFinished goodsPurchases of raw materialsManufacturing overheadAccounts payable

check my workreferencesebook & resources

managerial accounting please help 3 parts please check others 419784

Company assembles all of its products in the Assembly Department. Budgeted cost for the
operation of this department for the year have been set as follows:
COMPANY
Budget costs for Assembly Department:
Variable costs:
Direct materials $900,000
Direct labor 675,000
Utilities 45,000
Indirect labor 67,500
Supplies 22,500
Total variable costs 1,710,000
Fixed costs:
Insurance 8,000
Supervisory Salaries 90,000
Depreciation 160,000
Equipment rental 42,000
Total fixed costs 300,000
Total budgeted costs $2,010,000
Budgeted direct labor hours 75,000
Part 3: Actual activities and costs:
Actual direct labor hours worked 73,000
Standard direct labor hours allowed 70,000
Actual variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $124,100
Actual fixed manufacturing overhead cost incurred 301,600
Since the assembly work is done mostly by hand, operating activity in this department is best
measured by direct labor hours. The cost formulas used to develop the budgeted costs above are
valid over a relevant range of 60,000 to 90,000 direct labor hours per year.
Required:
1. Prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget for the Assembly Department using increments
of 15,000 direct labor hours. (The company does not include direct materials and direct labor
costs in the flexible budget.)

abc costing price per unit from job 103 please help 419859

A company has identified the folloing overhead costs and cost drivers for the coming year:

Overhead Item Cost Driver Budgeted Cost Budgeted Activity Level

Machine setup Number of setups $20,000 200

Inspection Number of inspections 130,000 6,500

Material handling Number of material moves 80,000 8,000

Engineering Engineering hours 50,000 1,000

Estimated direct labor cost was $100,000 and Estimated direct materials cost was $280,000. The following information was collected on three jobs that were completed during the year:

Job 101 Job 102 Job 103

Direct materialls $5,000 $12,000 $8,000

Direct labor $2,000 $2,000 $4,000

Units completed 100 50 200

Number of setups 1 2 4

Number of inspections 20 10 30

Number of material moves 30 10 50

Engineering hours 10 50 10

The comapny desires a mark up of 40%. If the company uses activity based costing (ABC), the price of each unit of JOB 103 would be:

A. $98

B. $100

C. $116 This answer is incorrect

D. $140

liquidating liabilities 419875

A company that was to be liquidated had the following liabilities:
INCOME TAXES 10,400

NOTES PAYABLE (SECURED BY LAND) 156,000

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 107,900

SALARIES PAYABLE TO EMPLOYEES (15,000 FOR JOHN & 2,800 FOR ANN) 17,800

BONDS PAYABLE 81,000

ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES FOR LIQUIDATION 26,000

The company had the following assets:

BOOK VALUE FAIR VALUE

CURRENT ASSETS 104,000 42,900

LAND 130,000 117,000

BUILDINGS & EQUIPMENT 130,000 143,000

1.

Total assets available to pay liabilities with priority and unsecured creditors are calculated to be what amount?

2.

Total liabilities with priority are calculated to be what amount?

3.

Required:
Assets available for unsecured creditors after payment of liabilities with priority are calculated to be what amount?

4.

Total unsecured nonpriority liabilities are calculated to be what amount?

5.

Total payment on notes payable is calculated to be what amount? (Round the payout percentage to one decimal place.)

differential analysis for discontinued product 419880

A company needs to know if they should discontinue a product.

Product Stats:

Sales = $200,000

Variable costs = $125,000

Fixed costs = $50,000

Total cost of goods sold $175,000

Gross profit $25,000

Variable selling and admin. expenses $28,000

Fixed selling and admin. expenses $22,000

Total selling and admin. expenses $50,000

Income (loss) from operations $25,000

A

B

C

D

1

Differential Analysis

2

Continue Product (Alt. 1) or Discontinue Product (Alt. 2)

3

4

Continue
(Alternative 1)

Discontinue
(Alternative 2)

Differential Effect

on Income

(Alternative 2)

5

Revenues

6

Costs:

7

Variable cost of goods sold

8

Variable selling and admin. expenses

9

Fixed costs

10

Income (Loss)

Af?cAc‚¬”$25,000

Af?cAc‚¬”$???????

Af?cAc‚¬”$ ????????

I’m really confused how the Income (loss) for Alternative 1 ends up being $25,000. When I try I don’t end up with that number. Could you please show me what to do for the first column Alternative 1? I want to compare and see what I’m doing wrong, thanks.

accounting 419897

This company prepares financial statements only once a year. In
accounting for uncollectible accounts it uses the allowance method.
For the most recent year give general journal entries for the following.

Beginning of the year balances:no journal entries needed for begenning
Accounts Receivable 411,212
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 8,690
Uncollectible Accounts Expense ?

1 Sales for the year were 1,662,000. 75% of sales are credit sales

2 Collection on credit sales for the year were 970,000

3 Wrote off 8300 of specific customer accounts

4a At year end estimate uncollectible accts to be 1.25% of credit sales

4b Instead of 4a, the company ages it receivables and estimated 8700
as uncollectible

drowning in accounting 419959

A company has total assets of $5,670,482, common stock of 2,181,111, retained earnings of $1,128,473. What is the company’s debt ratio? 58.37% 71.34% 42.03% 41.63% 38.46% Based on the data given below, which of the following statements are true? Analysis Base Case Period Period (A) $1,400 $(4,400) (B) (10,200) 1,200 (C) 9,000 (D) 0 $10,200 A percent change either cannot be computed or is not meaningful for cases B and C The percent change for case C is 100% A percent change either cannot be computed or is not meaningful for cases A, B and C A percent change either cannot be computed or is not meaningful for case C A percent change either cannot be computed or is not meaningful for cases A,B,C and D A company had a profit margin of 7%. If net income equaled $40,000 and average total assets equaled $338,000, how much were net sales? (Rounded to the nearest whole dollar.) $23,660 $571,429 $483 $2,800 $298,000 A company had a return on common stockholders’ equity of 28%. Net income equaled $230,000 and average common stockholders’ equity equaled $730,000. Compute the amount of the preferred dividends declared. $230,000 $25,600 $500,000 $204,400 $64,400 A company has sales of $2,498,422, a gross profit ratio of 21%, a days’ sales in inventory ratio of 12.8, and total current assets of $543,600. What is the ending inventory for the year? $42,469 $ 18,931 $114,156 $404,180 $69,217 A company has long term notes payable of $179,625, taxes of $9,900, ending merchandise inventory of $454,290, interest expense of $14,450, net sales of $724,000 a gross profit ratio of 30%, a times interest earned ratio of 4.63, and total assets of $1,304,417. What is the company’s earnings before interest and taxes? $192,850 $217,200 $46,911 $112,741 $66,904 Selected comparative income statement amounts for a company are shown below. Using 2009 as the base year for a horizontal analysis, compute the account with the most significant percentage change. 2009 2010 Sales $380,000 $500,000 General and Administrative Expenses $28,000 $30,800 Interest Expense $1,800 $1,800 Miscellaneous Expense $130 $140 Cannot be determined from the given data General and Administrative Expenses Miscellaneous Expense Interest Expense Sales A company had a return on common stockholders’ equity of 24%. Net income equaled $680,000 and average common stockholders’ equity equaled $2,500,000. Compute the amount of preferred dividends declared. $601,042 $1,280,000 $1,820,000 $80,000 $600,000 A company is preparing a common size balance sheet and wishes the base amount to be the total amount of assets. What are the 2009 and 2010 common size percents (rounded) for cash? 2009 2010 Cash $21,800 $31,800 Total current assets 101,200 141,800 Property and equipment 112,900 202,300 Long term investments 12,200 4,000 Intangible assets 16,100 48,000 Other long term assets 11,200 13,200 Total assets 253,600 409,300 8% in 2009 and 7% in 2010 9% in 2009 and 8% in 2010 The percent cannot be computed for 2009 and 9% in 2010 19% in 2009 and 21 in 2010 22% in 2009 and 22% in 2010

budgeted sales for the month 419122

Below is budgeted production and sales information for Flushing Company for the month of December:

Product X Product Y

Estimated beginning inventory 30,000 units 18,000 units

Desired ending inventory 34,000 units 17,000 units

Region I, anticipated sales 320,000 units 260,000 units

Region II, anticipated sales 180,000 units 140,000 units

The selling price for product XXX is $6 and for product ZZZ is $15.

Budgeted sales for the month are:

a) $2,040,000

b)$4,680,000

c)$6,692,000

d) $9,000,000

Budgeted prouction for product XXX during the month is:

a) 496,000 units

b) 504,000 units

c) 542,000 units

d) 572,000 units

Budgeted production for product ZZZ during the month is:

a. 403,000 units

b. 390,000 units

c. 399,000 units

d. 423,000 units

amount of inventory on absorption costing balance sheet 419177

A business operated at 100% capacity during its first month and incurred the following costs:

production costs (10,000 units)

direct materials 80,000

direct labor 120,000

variable facctory overhead 140,000

fixed operating epxneses 40,000

380,000

operating expenses:

variable operating expenses 65,000

fixed operating expenses 25,000

90,000

If 1,000 units remain unsold at the end of the month, what is the amount of inventory that would be reported on the absorption costing balance sheet?

a) $38,000

b $40,500

c) $34,000

d) $47,000

please show calculations

cash flows 419219

media/107/107bd71a b934 48e9 8f5a 76

c. purchased equipment costing 96,375 by paying 25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

d. borrowed 3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

e. paid 31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

f. issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

g. declared and paid cash dividends of 62,125.

prepair a complete statement of cash flows using above pictures. report its operating activities using the indirent method. identify the debits and credits in the analysis of changes columns that correspond to following events:

a. net income was 73,750

b. accounts receivable increased

c. merchandize inventory increased.

d. prepaid expenses decreased.

e. accounts payable decreased.

f. depreciation expense was 18,750.

g. sold equipment costing 46,875, with accumulated depreciation of 28,125 for 13,625 cash. this yeilded a loss of 5,125

h. purchased equipment costing 96,375 by paying 25,000 cash and (i) by signing a long term note payable for the balance.

j. borrowed 3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable

k. paid 31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

l. issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

m. declared and paid cash dividends of 62,125

what is j d s basis in his clampett inc stock after all transactions in 2013 419269

PLEASE SHOW CALCULATIONS ON HOW YOU ARRIVED AT YOUR ANSWER…THANKS!

Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2013, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2013, was $30,000. For 2013, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is J.D.’s basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock after all transactions in 2013?

$40,000.
$30,000.
$20,000.
$10,000.
None of these.

acct direct labor budget 419324

Capati Corporation is working on its direct labor budget for the next two months. Each unit of output requires 0.41 direct labor hours. The direct labor rate is $8.50 per direct labor hour. The production budget calls for producing 2,300 units in August and 2,200 units in September. The company guarantees its direct labor workers a 40 hour paid work week. With the number of workers currently employed, that means that the company is committed to paying its direct labor work force for at least 960 hours in total each month even if there is not enough work to keep them busy.<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

Required: Construct the direct labor budget for the next two months.

August September Required production in units Direct labor hours per unit Total direct labor hours needed Total direct labor hours paid Direct labor cost per hour $ $ Total direct labor cost $ $

accounting help 419335

Cardinal Company is considering a project that would require a $2,765,000 investment in equipment with a useful life of five years. At the end of five years, the project would terminate and the equipment would be sold for its salvage value of $200,000. The company’s discount rate is 12%. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows:

Sales $ 2,861,000
Variable expenses 1,101,000


Contribution margin 1,760,000
Fixed expenses:
Advertising, salaries, and other
fixed out of pocket costs
$ 705,000
Depreciation 513,000


Total fixed expenses 1,218,000


Net operating income $ 542,000





Click here to view Exhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using table.

Required:

What is the present value of the project’s annual net cash inflows? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

Present value $

accounting help 419340

Cardinal Company is considering a project that would require a $2,815,000 investment in equipment with a useful life of five years. At the end of five years, the project would terminate and the equipment would be sold for its salvage value of $500,000. The company’s discount rate is 18%. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows:

Sales $ 2,865,000
Variable expenses 1,015,000


Contribution margin 1,850,000
Fixed expenses:
Advertising, salaries, and other
fixed out of pocket costs
$ 750,000
Depreciation 463,000


Total fixed expenses 1,213,000


Net operating income $ 637,000





Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

Required:

What is the project profitability index for this project? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to 2 decimal places.)

Project profitability index

barsoux inc weighted average 418696

Barsoux Inc. uses the weighted average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company’s first processing department for a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:
Units in process 1,300
Percent complete with respect to materials 70%
Percent complete with respect to conversion 80%
Costs in the beginning inventory:
Materials cost $ 2,650
Conversion cost $ 6,736
Units started into production during the month 35,000
Units completed and transferred out 34,300
Costs added to production during the month:
Materials cost $ 563,405
Conversion cost $ 472,606
Work in process, ending:
Units in process 2,000
Percent complete with respect to materials 50%
Percent complete with respect to conversion 20%

Required:

Using the weighted average method:

a.

Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs. (Carry calculations out to the nearest tenth of a cent.)

Materials Conversion
Equivalent units of production

b.

Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

Materials Conversion
Cost per equivalent unit $ $

c.

Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

Materials Conversion Total
Cost of units completed and transferred out $ $ $

d.

Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

Materials Conversion Total
Cost of ending work in process inventory $ $ $

betty whose tax rate is 33 is in the business of breeding a 418861

Betty, whose tax rate is 33%, is in the business of breeding and racing horses. Except for the transactions below, she has no other sales or exchanges and she has no unrecaptured net Sec. 1231 losses. Consider the following transactions that occur during the year:

A?· A building with an adjusted basis of $300,000 is destroyed by fire. Insurance proceeds of $500,000 are received, but Betty does not plan to replace the building. The building was built 12 years ago at a cost of $430,000 and used to provide lodging for her employees. Straight line depreciation has been used.

A?· Four acres of the farm are condemned by the state to widen the highway and Betty receives $50,000. The land was inherited from her mother 15 years ago when its FMV was $15,000. Her mother purchased the land for $10,300. Betty does not plan to purchase additional land.

A?· A racehorse purchased four years ago for $200,000 was sold for $550,000. Total depreciation allowed using the straight line method amounts to $160,000.

A?· Equipment purchased three years ago for $200,000 is exchanged for $100,000 of IBM common stock. The adjusted basis of the equipment is $120,000. If straight line depreciation had been used, the adjusted basis would be $152,000.

A?· An uninsured pony with an adjusted basis of $20,000 and FMV of $35,000, which her daughter uses only for personal use, is injured while attempting a jump. Because of the injury, the uninsured pony has to be destroyed by a veterinarian.

Task(s):

a. What amount of Sec. 1245 ordinary income must be recognized?

b. What amount of Sec. 1250 ordinary income must be recognized?

c. Will the loss resulting from the destruction of her daughter’s pony be used to determine net Sec. 1231 gains or losses?

d. What is the amount of the net Sec. 1231 gain or loss?

e. After all of the netting of gains or losses is completed, will the gain resulting from the involuntary conversion of the building be treated as LTCG?

f. What is the amount of her unrecaptured Sec. 1250 gain?

big oak lumber is a lumber yard on angel isla 418876

Big Oak Lumber is a lumber yard on Angel Island. Some of Big Oak’s transactions during the current year are as follows.

Apr:15 Sold lumber on account to Hard Hat Construction, $19,700. The inventory subsidary ledger shows the cost of this merchandise was $10,300.

Apr 19 Purchased lumber on account from LHP Company, $3,700.

May 10 Collected in cash the $19,700 account receivable from Hard Hat Construction.

May 19 Paid the $3700 owed LHP Company

Dec 31 Big Oak’s personnel counted the inventory on hand and determined is cost to be $114,000. The accounting records, however, indicate inventory of $116,500 and a cost of goods sold of $721,000. The physical count of the inventory was observed by the company’s auditors and is considered correct

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events in the accounting records of Big Oak Lumber.(The company uses a perpetual inventory system

blomdahl corporation makes a product with the following stadard costs 418937

Blomdahl Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:
Inputs Standard Quantity
or Hours
Standard Price
or Rate
Direct materials 5.2 kilos $ 6.00 per kilo
Direct labor 0.3 hours $ 22.00 per hour
Variable overhead 0.3 hours $ 2.00 per hour

The company reported the following results concerning this product in October.
Actual output 8,100 units
Raw materials used in production 43,130 kilos
Actual direct labor hours 2,570 hours
Purchases of raw materials 46,700 kilos
Actual price of raw materials $ 5.70 per kilo
Actual direct labor rate $ 23.70 per hour
Actual variable overhead rate $ 1.80 per hour

The materials price variance is recognized when materials are purchased. Variable overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours.

a. computer the materials quantity variance

b. materials price variance

c. computer the labor efficiency variance

d. compute the labor rate variance

e. compute the variable overhead efficiency variance

f. compute the variable overhead rate variance

cost based decision making keep or drop decisions 418954

Blueprint Problem: Cost Based Decision Making Keep or drop decisions

Differential Analysis: Keep or Drop Decisions

Managers must often decide between two or more alternatives. Differential analysis is used in decision making. When using differential analysis, it is important to only include those amounts that are different between the alternatives.Differential cost is subtracted fromdifferential revenue to determinedifferential income/loss.

Differential analysis requires that relevant costs must be identified. When determining which costs are relevant, which of the following statements is true?

SelectAll fixed costs are irrelevant.All mixed costs are relevant.All variable costs are relevant.Relevancy must be determined on a case by case basis.Correct 1 of Item 1

For example, a manufacturing company may have a segment or product that is operating at a loss. The decision to keep the segment/product or discontinue it is called akeep or drop decision and uses differential analysis to assist in the decision making process.

Differential analysis is only one step in deciding to keep or drop the segment or product. Management must also take into consideration nonquantitative data. If the company drops a product, will it affect the sales of other products? If employees are laid off or terminated, will it affect employee morale? These nonquantitative issues will influence the success or failure of a keep or drop decision.

Hide Feedback Correct Check My Work Feedback

While fixed costs are usually not relevant to a keep or drop decision, there are cases where they can be changed or eliminated.

APPLY THE CONCEPTS: Calculate remaining cost in a keep or drop decision

Len Corporation makes three products: snowboards, skateboards, and skis. The contribution margin income statement for each department is provided:

Snowboards Skateboards Skis
Sales $175,000 $180,000 $160,000
Less: variable expenses 70,000 36,000 56,000
Contribution margin $105,000 $144,000 $104,000
Less: fixed expenses:
Salaries $61,250 $63,000 $64,000
Depreciation 14,000 27,000 32,000
Advertising 4,000 9,000 48,000
Net income (loss) $25,750 $45,000 $ 40,000

The net income for skis has been negative for several periods despite management’s efforts to increase sales and decrease expenses. Therefore, Len Corporation is considering discontinuing production of skis. If the ski line is dropped, all variable costs currently associated with that department will be eliminated, as will all advertising costs, but only 70% of the salaries currently associated with that department will be eliminated. If the ski line is dropped, what amount of salaries will remain?
Select$0$44,800$19,200$64,000Correct 1 of Item 2

Hide Feedback Correct Check My Work Feedback

Salaries are often mixed costs, with some relevant to the decision and some fixed, at least over the short term. Thus, a percentage must often be estimated to split the cost category into its two components.

APPLY THE CONCEPTS: Calculate differential income in a keep or drop decision

Complete the table to compare the effects of dropping the ski line of products. Enter all amounts as positive numbers except for a net loss. If an amount is zero, enter “0”. The cost data for the each department is shown below.

Snowboards Skateboards Skis
Sales $175,000 $180,000 $160,000
Less: variable expenses 70,000 36,000 56,000
Contribution margin $105,000 $144,000 $104,000
Less: fixed expenses:
Salaries $61,250 $63,000 $64,000
Depreciation 14,000 27,000 32,000
Advertising 4,000 9,000 48,000
Net income (loss) $25,750 $45,000 $ 40,000
Alternatives Differential Effect
Keep Drop Increase/Decrease
Sales $ $
Less: variable expenses
Contribution margin $ $
Less: fixed expenses:
Salaries $ $ $
Depreciation
Advertising
Net income (loss) $ $ $

Based on the analysis, Len Corporation should SelectkeepdropCorrect 22 of Item 3 the ski line. If the ski line is dropped, its overall income will SelectdecreaseincreaseCorrect 23 of Item 3.

Hide Feedback Partially Correct Check My Work Feedback

Use the information in the previous sections to divide the costs into their relevant and non relevant portions, in order to decide which items change with the “Drop” decision.

If the company loses more money when they select the “Drop” alternative over the “Keep” alternative, they are usually better off keeping the business to contribute to overall fixed costs.

harris company produces a single product last year harris manufactured 17 000 units 418978

Harris Company produces a single product. Last year, Harris manufactured 17,000 units and sold 13,000 units.

Production costs for the year were as follows:

Production Cost Data

Direct materials $153,000

Direct labor $110,500

Variable manufacturing overhead $204,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead $255,000

Sales were $780,000 for the year, variable selling and administrative expenses were $88,400, and fixed

selling and administrative expenses were $170,000. There was no beginning inventory. Assume that direct

labor is a variable cost.

The contribution margin per unit was

A.$32.50.

B.$25.70.

C.$27.30.

D.$17.50.

human resource 418993

  1. Borderline Cafeterias has discovered that most of its wait staff is white, while most of its kitchen staff is minority. When interviewed by the local news anchor, the CEO of Borderline Cafeterias says, “There has been no conscious or deliberate practice to staff the cafeterias in a discriminatory manner, it just happened to turn out this way.” The CEO’s argument is and example of:? Answer
    Disparate treatment
    Blind discrimination
    Disparate impact
    Discriminatory intent

3.85 points

Question 7

  1. When does the burden of proof fall on the employer? Answer
    When there is Affirmative Action Plan in place
    When it is a class action suit
    The burden of proof remains on the plaintiff until the case goes to court before jury
    When the court rules that a prima facie case has been made

3.85 points

Question 8

  1. Which of the following would be defined as retaliation under EEO laws? Answer
    A hospital demotes a radiology technician who has complained about ethnic discrimination.
    An Employer fires a supervisor who discriminates against a protective class member.
    A dismissed employee files a false complaint of discrimination with the EEOC.
    The EEOC targets an employer with a history of unlawful discrimination.

3.85 points

Question 9

  1. The 1991 Civil Rights Act requires that plaintiffs bringing discrimination charges must ? Answer
    Show a pattern of discrimination against a particular protected class.
    Identify the particular employer practices being challenged and that protected class status played some factor.
    Identify majority group members who benefited from the illegal actions.
    Provided evidence of financial harm caused by the employer’s actions.

3.85 points

Question 10

  1. Under the 1991 Civil Rights Act, employers must show that an individual’s race, color, religion, sex or national origin? Answer
    Was not the deciding factor in the employment decision.
    Did not limit that individual’s employment options.
    Caused no financial hardship to the individual.
    Played no factor in their employment practices.

3.85 points

Question 11

  1. The ________________ allows victims of discrimination on the basis of sex, religion, or disability to receive both compensatory and punitive damages in cases of intentional discrimination. Answer
    Civil Rights Act of 1991
    Americans with Disabilities Act
    Title VII, Civil Rights Act of 1964
    Executive Order 11246

3.85 points

Question 12

  1. Which agency is responsible for enforcing nondiscrimination in government contracts? Answer
    The Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs
    The U.S. Contracts and Agreements Agency
    The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission
    The National Labor Relations Board

3.85 points

Question 13

  1. The major provision of the Pregnancy Discrimination Act of 1978 is that? Answer
    Pregnant employees are to be given 12 weeks family leave without pay.
    Pregnant employees are entitled to 12 weeks paid maternity leave.
    Maternity leave is to be treated the same as other personal or medical leaves.
    Employers cannot discriminate against employees based on material status.

3.85 points

Question 14

  1. For the purpose of job similarity under the Equal Pay Act, jobs must have? Answer
    Identical job titles.
    Comparable requirements of KSA’s.
    A common core of tasks.
    Similar value of contributions to the organization.

3.85 points

Question 15

  1. The fundamental job duties of the employment position that an individual with a disability holds or desires are called:? Answer
    Job specifications.
    Essential job functions.
    Reasonable accommodations.
    Minimum job requirements.

3.85 points

Question 16

  1. _______ is the medication or adjustment to a job or work environment that enables a qualified individual with a disability to enjoy equal employment opportunity. Answer
    Access improvement
    Workplace restructuring
    Job modification
    Reasonable accommodation

3.85 points

Question 17

  1. The CEO of Ponchatoula Manufacturing is conferring with the vice president of HR about inevitable layoffs that are due to long term declines in orders. The CEO wants to lay off poor performing employees first. Looking at the list of employees and their performance rankings, the CEO sees Carl’s name. Carl has had consistently below average performance appraisals for the last 5 years. Carl is 72 and has been with the firm 41 years. The vice president of HR advises the CEO:? Answer
    “Don’t touch Carl; he is protected by the ADEA because he’s over 70.”
    “You can consider Carol for layoff because of his long term poor performance.”
    “The ADEA protects employees who have over 40 year’s seniority with the firm. We can’t lay Carl off.”
    The ADEA requires employers to lay off employees in order of reverse seniority, so Carl must be retained and more junior employees are to be laid off.

3.85 points

Question 18

  1. The Immigration Reform and Control Act Answer
    Permits employers to hire only U.S. Citizens.
    Permits employers to require more documentation from some prospective employees than from others to ensure that illegal aliens are not hired.
    Prevents employers from discriminating against undocumented aliens.
    Makes it illegal for an employer to discriminate based on national origin.

3.85 points

Question 19

  1. Which of the following statements is TRUE with regard to sexual orientation and gay rights? Answer
    The Supreme Court had not decided whether gay men and lesbians have rights under the equal protection amendment to the U.S. Constitution.
    Transvestites are considered disabled under the ADA.
    Federal law prohibits discrimination based on sexual orientation.
    State and city laws banning discrimination based on sexual orientation have typically been held invalid by the individual state supreme courts.

3.85 points

Question 20

  1. Susan, the school principal, is interviewing applicants for a position as an elementary school teacher in an isolated rural community in North Dakota. Which of the following questions is LEGAL? Answer
    Are you married? It is really hard to meet single people out here, and we have had a lot of single teachers quit.
    Most people here are church goers. We find that our teachers fit better into the community if they have the same values. Would you be active in any of the churches here?
    All of our students are native English speakers. What languages do you speak and write fluently?
    Have you ever been arrested for child abuse, child pornography, or any other offense?

depr tax problem 419008

During 2012, TM had huge success (and had no §179 limitations) and Steve acquired more assets the next year to increase its production capacity. These are the assets acquired during 2013:

Asset Cost Date Placed in Service
Computers & Info. System $40,000 03/31/2013
Luxury Autoâ? 80,000 05/26/2013
Assembly Equipment 475,000 08/15/2013
Storage Building 400,000 11/13/2013

â? Used 100% for business purposes. Use 2012 limitations for 2013.

TM generated a taxable income in 2013 before any §179 expense of $732,500.

  1. Compute maximum 2012 depreciation deductions including §179 expense (ignoring bonus depreciation).

  2. Compute maximum 2013 depreciation deductions including §179 expense (ignoring bonus depreciation).

  3. Compute maximum 2013 depreciation deductions including §179 expense, but now assume that Steve would like to take bonus depreciation.

  4. Ignoring part (c), now assume that during 2013, Steve decides to buy a competitor’s assets for a purchase price of $350,000. Compute maximum 2013 cost recovery including §179 expense (ignoring bonus depreciation). Steve purchased the following assets for the lump sum purchase price.

    Asset Cost? Date Placed in Service
    Inventory $20,000 09/15/2013
    Office furniture 30,000 09/15/2013
    Machinery 50,000 09/15/2013
    Patent 98,000 09/15/2013
    Goodwill 2,000 09/15/2013
    Building 130,000 09/15/2013
    Land 20,000 09/15/2013
  5. Complete Part I of Form 4562 for part (b).

accounting 419013

Boswell Electric prepared the following condensed income statements for two successive years:

2011 2010
Sales $ 3,000,000 $ 2,950,000
Cost of goods sold 1,300,000 1,000,000




Gross profit on sales $ 1,700,000 $ 1,950,000
Operating expenses 400,000 450,000




Net income $ 1,300,000 $ 1,500,000









At the end of 2010 (right hand column above), the inventory was understated by $27,000, but the error was not discovered until after the accounts had been closed and financial statements prepared at the end of 2011. The balance sheets for the two years showed owner’s equity of $670,000 at the end of 2010 and $665,000 at the end of 2011. (Boswell is organized as a sole proprietorship and does not incur income taxes expense.)

a. Compute the corrected net income figures for 2010 and 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
2011 2010
Corrected net income $ $

b.

Compute the gross profit amounts and the gross profit percentages for each year on the basis of corrected data. (Round your percentage answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)

2011 2010
Gross profit amount $ $
Gross profit percentage % %

c. Which of the following statements is false?
Owner’s equity at the end of 2011 should be increased by $27,000 to $697,000.
Owner’s equity at the end of 2011 requires no correction.
Owner’s equity at the end of 2010 should be increased by $27,000 to $697,000.

accounting 419018

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $ 36.00 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 03 Purchase 9 $20.00
May 10 Sale 4
May 17 Purchase 13 $18.00
May 20 Sale 5
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 12 $24.00

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the ending inventory value for the month of May using the FIFO inventory cost method.

what variance will appear on the performance report for controllable margin 419033

Boyce Manufacturing Co.’s operates 3 profit centers. The clothing center’s static budget at 6,000 units of production includes $30,000 for direct labor, $6,000 for direct materials, $12,000 for variable factory overhead, and controllable fixed costs of $24,000. Actual activity was 5,800 units with actual costs of $29,500 for direct labor, $11,500 for variable factory overhead, controllable fixed costs of $24,200, and $6,100 for direct materials. All units produced were budgeted to be sold for $16 each. Actual sales totaled $93,960. What variance will appear on the performance report for controllable margin?

a.$260F.

b.$760F.

c.$1,100F

Please show me the detail that how u get ur answser.

should brett compnay replace the truck 419059

Brett Company is considering replacing one of its delivery trucks. The truck in question was purchased two years ago at a cost of $47,000. At the time of purchase the truck was expected to have $5,000 salvage value at the end of its six year life. Given the use of the straight line depreciation, the truck has a current book value of $33,000. If sold today, the company could get $25,000 for the truck. It costs $28,000 per year to operate the existing truck. The new truck would cost $50,000 and would cost only $22,000 per year to operate. The new truck would be depreciated on a straight line basis over its four year useful life to its expected salvage value of $7,500. The company’s required rate of return is 14%. Ignore income taxes.

Should Brett company replace the truck? why or why not?

brian f 419082

media/db4/db4825e6 9e0d 40d0 92ea 5f

Brian Furniture, Inc. manufactures a variety of desks, chairs, tables, and shelf units which are sold to public school systems throughout the Midwest. The controller of the company’s School Desk Division is currently preparing a budget for the second quarter of 2012. The following sales forecast has been developed by the division’s sales manager:

The inventory of finished desk and chair sets at the end of each month must be equal to 30% of the budgeted sales for the next month. On April 1, there will be 1,950 units of desk and chair sets on hand.
Work in process inventories are negligible and can be safely ignored.
Each desk and chair set requires 10 board feet of pine planks. Pine planks cost $0.75 per board foot, and the division ends each month with enough pine to cover 20% of the next month’s production requirements. This requirement will be met on April 1 of 2012.

Required:

Prepare a production budget and a materials purchases budget for April, May, and June and in total for the three month period.

intro to business 418039

An advantage of licensing as a method of entering global competition is that the (Points : 4)

licensing company need not bear the costs and risks of opening up an overseas market.
licensing company has control over its technology.
licensing company has control over quality levels.
licensing company has lower communication costs.
licensee has lower production costs.

9. Despite differences across cultures, research suggests that regardless of nationality or religion, most people embrace which of the following values? (Points : 4)

self centeredness
competitiveness
compassion
workaholism
sincerity

10. An advantage of joint ventures in the international marketplace is (Points : 4)

the local partner may have a greater knowledge of local consumer tastes and preferences.
the local partner may have a greater understanding of local business practices and regulations.
costs of developing the new market are shared with the joint venture partner.
the risks of entering the new market are shared with the joint venture partner.
All of the above are advantages of joint ventures.

math 418106

Allstate Insurance Company identified the 10 safest and 10 least safe U.S. cities from among the 500 largest cities in the United States, based on the mean number of years drivers went between automobile accidents. The cities on both lists were the smaller cities on the list of the 500 largest. Using facts about the sampling distribution model of the sample mean, why is this not surprising? In the smaller cities the distribution of the mean number of years drivers go between accidents is bimodal, which makes it more likely they will be in the safest and least safe cities. Large cities are not on the safest list because their mean time between accidents is reduced by people who “stage” accidents for purposes of insurance fraud. More people in larger cities drive older cars that are more accident prone. Accident statistics are more accurate in the smaller cities. Smaller cities are safer, but a few accident prone drivers (outliers) in some small cities decreases the mean number of years between accidents, resulting in these cities being listed on the least safe list. Larger cities have a higher incidence of hit and run accidents. Traffic congestion in larger cities decreases the mean number of years drivers go between accidents but not enough to place larger cities in the least safe group. Cities in which the mean is based on a smaller number of drivers will have greater variation in their means and are therefore more likely to be both safest and least safe.

direct method 418177

Andrews Inc., a greeting card company, had the following statements prepared as of December 31, 2012.

ANDREWS INC.
COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011
12/31/12 12/31/11
Cash $5,890 $8,992
Accounts receivable 62,200 49,131
Short term investments (available for sale) 34,888 18,110
Inventory 39,922 60,138
Prepaid rent 4,991 4,047
Equipment 153,710 128,060
Accumulated depr.”equipment (34,823 ) (25,013 )
Copyrights 46,037 49,864
Total assets $312,815 $293,329
Accounts payable $45,929 $42,103
Income taxes payable 4,149 5,970
Salaries and wages payable 7,871 3,817
Short term loans payable 7,962 9,818
Long term loans payable 60,143 67,132
Common stock, $10 par 104,300 104,300
Contributed capital, common stock 28,790 28,790
Retained earnings 53,671 31,399
Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $312,815 $293,329

ANDREWS INC.
INCOME STATEMENT
FOR THE YEAR ENDING DECEMBER 31, 2012
Sales $339,167
Cost of goods sold 175,290
Gross margin 163,877
Operating expenses 119,690
Operating income 44,187
Interest expense $11,436
Gain on sale of equipment 2,094 9,342
Income before tax 34,845
Income tax expense 6,792
Net income $28,053

Additional information:

1. Dividends in the amount of $5,781 were declared and paid during 2012.
2. Depreciation expense and amortization expense are included in operating expenses.
3. No unrealized gains or losses have occurred on the investments during the year.
4. Equipment that had a cost of $31,120 and was 70% depreciated was sold during 2012.

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method.

net present value 418194

Anita Vasquez received $130,000 from her mother’s estate. She placed the funds into the hands of a broker, who purchased the following securities on Anita’s behalf:

a.

Common stock was purchased at a cost of $65,000. The stock paid no dividends, but it was sold for $150,000 at the end of four years.

b.

Preferred stock was purchased at its par value of $18,000. The stock paid a 8% dividend (based on par value) each year for four years. At the end of four years, the stock was sold for $13,500.

c.

Bonds were purchased at a cost of $47,000. The bonds paid $2,820 in interest every six months. After four years, the bonds were sold for $53,000. (Note: In discounting a cash flow that occurs semiannually, the procedure is to halve the discount rate and double the number of periods. Use the same procedure in discounting the proceeds from the sale.) (Ignore income taxes.)

The securities were all sold at the end of four years so that Anita would have funds available to start a new business venture. The broker stated that the investments had earned more than a 22% return, and he gave Anita the following computation to support his statement:

Common stock:
Gain on sale ($150,000 ‘ $65,000) $ 85,000
Preferred stock:
Dividends paid (8% Af— $18,000 Af— 4 years) 5,760
Loss on sale ($13,500 ‘ $18,000) (4,500)
Bonds:
Interest paid ($2,820 Af— 8 periods) 22,560
Gain on sale ($53,000 ‘ $47,000) 6,000


Net gain on all investments $ 114,820





$114,820 Af· 4 years

= 22.1%
$130,000

Click here to view Exhibit 11B 1 andExhibit 11B 2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

Required:
1a.

Using a 22% discount rate, compute the net present value of each of the three investments. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

Net Present Value
Common stock $
Preferred stock $
Bonds $

1b. On which investment did Anita earn a 22% rate of return?
Common stock
Preferred stock
Bonds
None

2. Considering all three investments together, did Anita earn a 22% rate of return?
Yes
No
3.

Anita wants to use the $216,500 proceeds ($150,000 + $13,500 + $53,000 = $216,500) from sale of the securities to open a fast food franchise under a 10 year contract. What net annual cash inflow must the store generate for Anita to earn a 14% return over the 10 year period? Assume that the project will yield same annual cash inflow each year. Anita will not receive back her original investment at the end of the contract. (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.)

Annual net cash inflow $

accounting 1 please help 418219

Please answer as many of these as you can. It would be VERY helpful in total there are 7 i need this as possible as it is due in 5 hours haha thanks in advanced

PROBLEM

Adjusting Entries Sarah Company’s trial balance on December 31, 2013 (the end of its annual accounting period), included the following account balances before adjustments:

Debit Credit
Notes Receivable $10,000
Insurance 3,000

Delivery Equipment 14,000

Building 60,000

Unearned Rent $4,320

Notes Payable 7,200

Reviewing the company’s recorded transactions and accounting records for 2013, you find the following data pertaining to the December 31, 2013 adjustments:

Required:
Prepare the adjusting entries that are necessary to bring Sarah’s accounts up to date on December 31, 2013. Each journal entry explanation should summarize your calculations. No calculations = no points for me…

1. On July 2, 2013, the company had accepted a $10,000, 9 month, 10% (annual rate) note receivable from a customer. The interest is to be collected when the note is collected
2. On August 2, 2013, the company had paid $3,000 for a 2 year insurance policy.
3. The building was acquired in 1998 and is being depreciated using the straight line method over a 25 year lief. It has an estimated residual value of $8,000.

4. The delivery equipment was purchased on April 2, 2013. It is to be depreciated using the straight line method over a 10 year life, with an estimated residual value of $2,000.

5. On September 1, 2013, the company had received 2 years’ rent in advance ($4320) for a portion of a building it is renting to Victoria Company.
6. On December 1, 2013, the company had issued a $7,200, 30month, 12% (annual rate) note payable to a supplier. The interest is to be paid when the note is paid.
7. On January 2, 2013, the company purchased $1,000 of office supplies. A physical count on December 31, 2013, revealed that there are $400 of office supplies still on hand. No supplies were on hand at the beginning of the year.

can anyone answer these questions comes from horngren cost ac 418274

Can anyone answer these questions? comes from horngren cost accounting 14th edition book problem 12 27:

Executive suites operates a 100 suite hotel in a busy business park. During April, a 30 day month, Executive Suites experienced a 90% occupancy rate from Monday evening through Thursday evening (weeknights), with business travelers making up virtually all of its guests. On Friday through Saturday evenings (weekend nights), however, occupancy dwindled to 20%. Guests on these nights were all leisure travelers. (There were 18 weeknights and 12 weekend nights in April). Executive suites charges $68 per night for a suite., Fran Jackson has recently been hired to manage the hotel, and is trying to devise a way to increase the hotel’s profitability. The following information relates to Execuite Suites costs:

Fixed Costs:

Depreciation $20,000 per month

Administrative costs $35,000 per month

Housekeeping and Supplies $12,000 per month

Breakfast $5,000 per month

Variable Costs:

Housekeeping and supplies $25 per room night

Breakfast $5 per breakfast served

Executive Suite offers free breakfast to guests. In April, there were an average of 1.0 breakfasts served per room night on weeknights and 2.5 breakfasts served per room night on weekend nights.

1. Calculate the average cost per guest night for April. What was Executive Suites’ operating income or loss for the month?

2. Fran Jackson estimates that if Executive Suites increases the nightly rates to $80, weeknight occupancy will only decline to 85%. She also estimates that if the hotel reduces the nightly rate on weekend nights to $50, occupancy on those nights will increase 50%. Would this be a good move for Executive Suites? Show your calculations.

3. Why would the $30 price difference per night be tolerated by the weeknight guests?

4. A discount travel clearing house has approached Executive Suites with a proposal to offer last minute deals on empty rooms on both weeknights and weekend nights. Assuming that there will be an average of 2 breakfasts served per night per room, what is the minimum price that Executive Suites could accept on the last minute rooms?

(if you answer any of the questions please explain how you got your figures, thanks!)

how much incomes does j d recognize as a result 418340

PLEASE SHOW HOW YOU ARRIVE AT ANSWER, PLEASE:

Assume that at the end of 2012, Clampett, Inc. (an S corporation) distributes long term capital gain property (fair market value of $40,000, basis of $25,000) to each of its four equal shareholders (aggregate distribution of $160,000). At the time of the distribution, Clampett, Inc. has no corporate E&P and J.D. has a basis of $15,000 in his Clampett, Inc. stock. How much income does J.D. recognize as a result of the distribution?

$0.

$15,000.

$25,000.

$40,000.

None of these.

how much of the 30 000 loss from candy apple can john deduct currently 418345

PLEASE SHOW HOW YOU ARRIVE AT YOUR ANSWER. THANKS!

John, a limited partner of Candy Apple, LP, is allocated $30,000 of ordinary business loss from the partnership. Before the loss allocation, his tax basis is $20,000 and at risk amount is $10,000. John also has ordinary business income of $20,000 from Sweet Pea, LP as a general partner and ordinary business income of $5,000 from Red Tomato, as a limited partner. How much of the $30,000 loss from Candy Apple can John deduct currently?

$5,000

$10,000

$25,000

$30,000

need help with accounting 418350

Arrow Products typically earns a contribution margin ratio of 25 percent and has current fixed costs of $80,000. Arrow’s general manager is considering spending an additional $20,000 to do one of the following:

1.

Start a new ad campaign that is expected to increase sales revenue by 5 percent.

2.

License a new computerized ordering system that is expected to increase Arrow’s contribution margin ratio to 30 percent.

Sales revenue for the coming year was initially forecast to equal $1,200,000 (that is, without implementing either of the above options).

a 1

Compute the projected operating income for each option? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Operating income
Ad Campaign $
Ordering System $

a 2

For each option, how much will projected operating income increase or decrease relative to initial predictions?

Thus projected operating income will by $ if the ad campaign is chosen.

Thus projected operating income will by $ if the ordering system is chosen.

b.

By what percentage would sales revenue need to increase to make the ad campaign as attractive as the ordering system? (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Percentage increase %

help figuring out common stock 418366

Assume that Ali Perry, Byron Myers, and Brenton Taylor of Inogen to launch a new retail chain to market their portable oxygen systems. This chain, named O to Go, requires $500,000 of start up capital. The three contribute $375,000 of personal assets in return for 15,000 shares of common stock, but they need to raise another $125,000 in cash. There are two alternative plans for raising the additional cash. Plan A is to sell 3,750 shares of common stock to one or more investors for $125,000 cash. Plan B is to sell 1,250 shares of cumulative preferred stock to one or more investors for $125,000 cash (this preferred stock would have a $100 par value, an annual 8% dividend rate, and be issued at par).

  1. If the new business is expected to earn $72,000 of after tax net income in the first year, what rate of return on beginning equity will the three (as a group) earn under each alternative? Which plan will provide the higher expected return to them?
  2. If the new business is expected to earn $16,800 of after tax net income in the first year, what rate of return on beginning equity will the three (as a group) earn under each alternative? Which plan will provide the higher expected return to them?

Analyze and interpret the differences between the results for parts 1 and 2.

depreciation accounting methods 418381

Assume that a company buys land with a building on it for $1,500,000. At the time of purchase the company planned to tear the old building down and build a new building. The cost to tear down and dispose of the old building was $150,000 and they sold some material for $25,000. The cost to build the new building was $5,500,000 and the cost to grade the lot and landscape was $600,000. It is expected the life of the building is 25 40 years with a salvage value of $2,000,000 to $3,000,000.

Discussion Questions:

1. If management desired the smallest depreciation possible, what recommendation would you make? Support your recommendation by calculations. Why might the company want to do this?

2. If management desired the largest depreciation possible what recommendation would you make? Support your recommendation by calculations. Why might the company want to do this?

accounting 418396

Assume that the following cases are independent and rely on the following data. Make entries on the books of both companies.

Jensen Co. Merton Co.

Equipment (cost) $900,000 $1,650,000

Accumulated depreciation 290,000 900,000

Fair value of equipment 700,000 700,000

1. Jensen Co. and Merton Co. traded the above equipment. The exchange has commercial substance.

Jensen Co.’s Books: Merton Co.’s Books:

2. Jensen Co. and Merton Co. traded the above equipment. The exchange lacks commercial substance.

Jensen Co.’s Books: Merton Co.’s Books:

Assume that the following cases are independent and rely on the following data. Make entries on the books of both companies.

Jensen Co. Merton Co.

Equipment (cost) $900,000 $1,650,000

Accumulated depreciation 290,000 1,050,000

Fair value of equipment 560,000 700,000

Cash received (paid) (140,000) 140,000

3. Jensen Co. and Merton Co. traded the above equipment. The exchange has commercial substance.

Jensen Co.’s Books: Merton Co.’s Books:

4. Jensen Co. and Merton Co. traded the above equipment. The exchange lacks commercial substance.

Jensen Co.’s Books: Merton Co.’s Books:


lessee lessor assume that on january 1 2012 elmer s restaurants 418411

Assume that on January 1, 2012, Elmer’s Restaurants sells a computer system to Liquidity Finance Co. for $510,000 and immediately leases the computer system back. The relevant information is as follows.

1. The computer was carried on Elmer’s books at a value of $450,000.
2. The term of the noncancelable lease is 10 years; title will transfer to Elmer.
3. The lease agreement requires equal rental payments of $83,000.11 at the end of each year.
4. The incremental borrowing rate for Elmer is 12%. Elmer is aware that Liquidity Finance Co. set the annual rental to ensure a rate of return of 10%.
5. The computer has a fair value of $680,000 on January 1, 2012, and an estimated economic life of 10 years.
6. Elmer incurs executory costs of $9,000 per year. (Use Accounts Payable)

Prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and the lessor for 2012 to reflect the sale leaseback agreement. No uncertainties exist, and collectibility is reasonably certain. To record amortization of profit on sale use Depreciation Expense account and not Sales Revenue account.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 50,250.25.)

applied overhead 418443

Athens Corporation uses a job cost system and applies manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of machine hours. The company’s accountant estimated that overhead and machine hours would total $800,000 and 50,000, respectively, for 20×1. Actual costs incurred follow.

DIrect Material Used $250,000

Direct Labor $300,000

Manufacturing Overhead $816,000

The manufacturing overhead figure presented above excludes $27,000 of sales commissions incurred by the firm. An examination of job cost records revealed that 18 jobs were sold during the year at a total cost of $2,960,000. These goods were sold to customers for $3,720,000. Actual machine hours worked totaled 51,500, and Athens adjusts under or overapplied overhead at year end to Cost of Goods Sold.

Determine the amount of under/over applied overhead at year end.

problem 25 6a product pricing and profit analysis with bottleneck operations 418453

Atlas Steel Company produces three grades of steel: high, good, and regular grade. Each of these products (grades) has high demand in the market, and Atlas is able to sell as much as it can produce of all three. The furnace operation is a bottleneck in the process and is running at 100% of capacity. Atlas wants to improve steel operation profitability. The variable conversion cost is $12 per process hour. The fixed cost is $410,000. In addition, the cost analyst was able to determine the following information about the three products:

media/2f3/2f3779d6 93f6 45f2 9f6f 48

The furnace operation is part of the total process for each of these three products. Thus, for example, 5 of the 15 hours required to process High Grade steel are associated with the furnace.

1. Determine the unit contribution margin for each product.

media/350/350b4024 6f43 4dac 9980 fe

Could someone help please??

major help 418464

Attached are the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for Wholesale Distributors for the years 20X7 & 20X8.

Additional Information. Capital Stock Issued and Outstanding 10,000 shares.

This company is offering an additional 5,000 shares of stock at $25 per share

Required:

Perform a Vertical and Horizontal analysis on this company

Dec 31, 07

Dec 31, 08

ASSETS

Current Assets

Checking/Savings

Company Checking Account

36,857.66

84,444.87

Company Savings Account

25,000.00

25,000.00

Petty Cash Account

500.00

500.00

Total Checking/Savings

62,357.66

109,944.87

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Receivable

40,202.50

56,835.69

Total Accounts Receivable

40,202.50

56,835.69

Other Current Assets

Inventory Asset

51,060.47

127,651.18

Prepaids

Prepaid Insurance

0.00

0.00

Prepaid Taxes

800.00

800.00

Total Prepaids

800.00

800.00

Security Deposits

1,200.00

1,200.00

Total Other Current Assets

53,060.47

129,651.18

Total Current Assets

155,620.63

296,431.74

Fixed Assets

Accumulated Depreciation

(923.04)

(1,833.52)

Automobiles & Trucks

45,632.00

45,632.00

Computer & Office Equipment

19,453.00

19,453.00

Machinery & Equipment

25,963.00

25,963.00

Total Fixed Assets

90,124.96

89,214.48

TOTAL ASSETS

245,745.59

385,646.22

LIABILITIES & EQUITY

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

Accounts Payable

3,990.80

5,986.20

Total Accounts Payable

3,990.80

5,986.20

Credit Cards

QuickBooks Credit Card

1,249.12

1,300.00

Total Credit Cards

1,249.12

1,300.00

Other Current Liabilities

Line of Credit

104,618.08

136,003.50

Payroll Taxes Payable

1,565.31

1,612.27

SEC125 Payable

100.00

100.00

Total Payroll Liabilities

1,665.31

1,712.27

Total Other Current Liabilities

106,283.39

137,715.77

Total Current Liabilities

111,523.31

145,001.97

Total Liabilities

111,523.31

145,001.97

Equity

Common Stock

10,000.00

10,000.00

Additional Paid in Capital

33,949.80

33,949.80

Retained Earnings

0.00

90,272.48

Net Income

90,272.48

106,421.96

Total Equity

134,222.28

240,644.24

TOTAL LIABILITIES & EQUITY

245,745.59

385,646.21

0.00

(0.00)

differential analysis involving opportunity costs 418478

On August 1, Matrix Stores Inc. is considering leasing a building and purchasing the necessary equipment to operate a retail store. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $150,000 of 6% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 16 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled:

Cost of store equipment: $150000

Life of store equipment: 16 years

Estimated residual value of store equipment: $18000

Yearly costs to operate the store, excluding depreciation of store equipment $56000

Yearly expected revenues ‘ years 1 ‘ 8 $75000

Yearly expected revenues ‘ years 9 ‘ 16 $70000

Prepare a differential analysis as of August 1, 2012, presenting the proposed operation of the store for the 16 years (Alternative 1) as compared with investing in U.S. Treasury bonds (Alternative 2). If an amount is zero, enter zero “0”.

Operate Retail Store (Alternative 1)

Revenues

Costs

Costs to operate store

Cost of equipment less residual value

Income (Loss)

Invested in Bonds (Alternative 2)

Revenues

Costs

Costs to operate store

Cost of equipment less residual value

Income (Loss)

Differential Effect on Income (Alternative 2)

Revenues

Costs

Costs to operate store

Cost of equipment less residual value

Income (Loss)

need help 418499

Austin Enterprises makes and sells three types of dress shirts. Management is trying to determine the most profitable mix. Sales prices, demand, and use of manufacturing inputs follow:

Basic Classic Formal
Sales price $ 31 $ 65 $ 191
Maximum annual demand (units) 20,100 10,100 30,100
Input requirement per unit
Direct material 0.6 yards 0.2 yards 0.5 yards
Direct labor 0.6 hours 1.9 hours 7.1 hours

Costs
Variable costs
Materials $ 19 per yard
Direct labor $ 15 per hour
Factory overhead $ 3 per direct labor hour
Marketing 10 % of sales price
Annual fixed costs
Manufacturing $ 36,100
Marketing $ 8,010
Administration $ 30,100

The company faces two limits: (1) the volume of each type of shirt that it can sell (see maximum annual demand) and (2) 30,100 direct labor hours per year caused by the plant layout.

Requirement 1:
Show supporting data in good form.

How much operating profit could the company earn if it were able to satisfy the annual demand? (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total contribution margin $
Total fixed costs

Total operating profit $



Requirement 2:

Which of the three product lines makes the most profitable use of the constrained resource, direct labor?

(Click to select)FormalsClassicsBasics

Requirement 3:
Given the information in the problem so far, what product mix do you recommend?
(Click to select)Basics and FormalsClassics and BasicsClassics and Formals

Requirement 4:

How much operating profit should your recommended product mix generate? (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your intermediate calculations to nearest whole number. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total contribution margin $
Total fixed costs

Total operating profit $



Requirement 5:

Suppose that the company could expand its labor capacity by running an extra shift that could provide up to 10,100 more hours. The direct labor cost would increase from $15 to $20 per hour for all hours of direct labor used. What additional product(s) should Austin manufacture and what additional profit would be expected with the use of the added shift? (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Austin should manufacture $ (Click to select)BasicsFormalsClassics
Additional profit would be $

accounting 203 418659

Bard Manufacturing uses a job order cost accounting system. During one month Bard purchased $198,000 of raw materials on credit; issued materials to production of $195,000 of which $30,000 were indirect. Bard incurred a factory payroll of $150,000, paid in cash, of which $40,000 is classified as indirect labor. Bard uses a predetermined overhead application rate of 150% of direct labor cost. The total manufacturing costs added during the period are:

$440,000.
$540,000.
$570,000.
$500,000.
$470,000.

acct 225 net operating income questions 418665

Barker Company has a single product called a Zet. The company normally produces and sells 84,000 Zets each year at a selling price of $48 per unit. The company’s unit costs at this level of activity are given below:

Direct materials $ 8.50
Direct labor 9.00
Variable manufacturing overhead 2.80
Fixed manufacturing overhead 9.00 ($756,000 total)
Variable selling expenses 1.70
Fixed selling expenses 3.50 ($294,000 total)


Total cost per unit $ 34.50





A number of questions relating to the production and sale of Zets are given below. Each question is
independent.

Required:
1.

Assume that Barker Company has sufficient capacity to produce 113,400 Zets each year without any increase in fixed manufacturing overhead costs. The company could increase sales by 35% above the present 84,000 units each year if it were willing to increase the fixed selling expenses by $110,000.

a. Calculate the incremental net operating income (Negative amount should be indicated with a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations.)

Incremental net operating income $

b. Would the increased fixed selling expenses be justified?
No
Yes

2.

Assume again that Barker Company has sufficient capacity to produce 113,400 Zets each year. The company has an opportunity to sell 29,400 units in an overseas market. Import duties, foreign permits, and other special costs associated with the order would total $26,460. The only selling costs that would be associated with the order would be $1.80 per unit shipping cost. Compute the per unit break even price on this order. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

Break even price per unit $

3.

One of the materials used in the production of Zets is obtained from a foreign supplier. Civil unrest in the supplier’s country has caused a cutoff in material shipments that is expected to last for three months. Barker Company has enough material on hand to operate at 25% of normal levels for the three month period. As an alternative, the company could close the plant down entirely for the three months. Closing the plant would reduce fixed manufacturing overhead costs by 35% during the three month period and the fixed selling expenses would continue at two thirds of their normal level. What would be the impact on profits of closing the plant for the three month period? (Input the amount as a positive value. Round your intermediate calculations of units produced and sold to the nearest whole number. Do not round your other intermediate calculations. Round your final answer to nearest whole number.)

Net of closing the plant $

4.

The company has 700 Zets on hand that were produced last month and have small blemishes. Due to the blemishes, it will be impossible to sell these units at the normal price. If the company wishes to sell them through regular distribution channels, what unit cost figure is relevant for setting a minimum selling price? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

Relevant unit cost $

5.

An outside manufacturer has offered to produce Zets and ship them directly to Barker’s customers. If Barker Company accepts this offer, the facilities that it uses to produce Zets would be idle; however, fixed manufacturing overhead costs would continue at 30%. Because the outside manufacturer would pay for all shipping costs, the variable selling expenses would be reduced by 60%. Compute the unit cost that is relevant for comparison to the price quoted by the outside manufacturer. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

Total relevant unit cost $

orton industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 273380

Orton Industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years. The houses are constructed in sections to be assembled on customers’ lots. Orton expanded into the precut housing market when it acquired Urbina Company, one of its suppliers. In this market, various types of lumber are precut into the appropriate lengths, banded into packages, and shipped to customers’ lots for assembly. Orton designated the Urbina Division as an investment center.

Orton uses return on investment (ROI) as a performance measure with investment defined as average operating assets. Management bonuses are based in part on ROI. All investments are expected to earn a minimum rate of return of 16%. Urbina’s ROI has ranged from 20.1% to 23.5% since it was acquired. Urbina had an investment opportunity in 2011 that had an estimated ROI of 19%. Urbina’s management decided against the investment because it believed the investment would decrease the division’s overall ROI.

Selected financial information for Urbina are presented below. The division’s average operating assets were $12,300,000 for the year 2011.

URBINA DIVISION

Selected Financial Information

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales ………………. $26,000,000

Contribution margin …. 9,100,000

Controllable margin ….. 2,460,000

Instructions

(a) Calculate the following performance measures for 2011 for the Urbina Division.

(1) Return on investment (ROI).

(2) Residual income.

(b) Would the management of Urbina Division have been more likely to accept the investment opportunity it had in 2011 if residual income were used as a performance measure instead of ROI? Explain your answer.

you have just been promoted to position of customer service manager of passport musi 273429

You have just been promoted to the position of Customer Service Manager of Passport Music Designs, Inc., a manufacturer of computer music supplies in Akron, Ohio. Your predecessor just lost this position because of poor communication skills. Revise the following letters and memoranda (which were drafted by the previous manager) and provide appropriate dates, inside addresses, and salutations where necessary. Be sure to follow the guidelines of the 5 C’s of effective communication. You may refer to our class lecture, your text, or to the optional reference manuals cited on the syllabus. Spelling, grammar, punctuation, and correct document formats will count significantly in this assignment as well as on your Midterm exam. Correct document formatting is part of this assignment. You are to submit 8 complete and distinct documents.
Each document must be dated correctly.

Remember, you must produce
8 separate and correctly formatted documents. Also bear in mind that all 8 of these exercises are examples of BAD WRITING. You will have to revise each of them extensively. In fact, if you are not making considerable revisions, you are not applying the textbook principles properly. Please save all 8 documents in a file called Passport. Use hard page breaks (control + enter) after each document so that you have one document, Passport, containing 8 pages. Remember to use the format guides (changing spacing to single and 0,0) described on the home page under How to Set Margins for Letters.

If you are working on this assignment with proper attention to detail and text concepts, it should take a minimum of two hours and as much as three or four hours to complete these eight documents. Do not make the mistake of copying this document into Word and then applying brief revisions. There are serious problems with these documents, and it will take a great deal of analysis to produce effective correspondence. Each document must be formatted correctly according to the textbook references and my reference material on the home page.

Remember: you must send one eight page document as a Word attachment in Blackboard Learn by the stated deadline. If you submit the draft by the stated deadline, you will have the opportunity to improve your grade by revising your work and resubmitting a final version. If you do not submit the draft on time, then your only grade will be the final version.

I have provided the solutions for the first two documents under “Solutions.” Try them first and then check to see if you are on the right track.

Problem 1

(Be sure to add correct complimentary closing lines; the tone also needs to be improved. Check the posted solution if you are having trouble.)

The first letter is to be sent to Mr. Bernard Olsen, 155 Main Street, Elmsford, NY 10523 Dear Sir (or do you need a more personal salutation?):

Since we do not have the necessary financial information about you, we can not ship your order at this time.

We have enclosed the appropriate forms. All questions must be answered immediately. When satisfactory data concerning your credit reputation are established, copies of
Building A Computer Music Library will go forward.

A reprint from our monograph,
Music Today is enclosed for your interest.

Problem 2

(Avoid excessive use of the passive voice in this letter. Also, try to be as helpful as possible to the customer. Be as specific as possible about the date—include the day of the week.)

Mr. and Mrs. Jeffrey Contino, 293 Evandale Road, Akron, OH 44302 Dear Sir (find the correct salutation):

We received your letter requesting information about our new after school music program for elementary school students. It would appear that your son Jeremy is indeed eligible.

In order for you to learn more about our program, you are invited to attend our Open House on March 19. At that time our music teachers will be available to answer your questions. We are pretty sure that from our wide selection of instruments one is likely to find the one that is highly suitable to their circumstances. Herewith, please do us the honor of attending by completing the attached form and returning it to us post haste. We are serving refreshments and want to make sure we have enough. All efforts will be expended to make sure you and your son enjoy the open house.

Problem 3

(This letter needs improvement in organization and sentence structure. There are too many short sentences that can be combined together for a more even flow). Be sure to use bullets to set off the individual components of the tuition. In addition, remember that the percent sign cannot be used in a letter or a memorandum—only in a table. Therefore, you must use the word percent.)

Letter to: Mrs. Stacey McHenry, 2830 Concourse Plaza, Akron, OH 44307 Dear Mrs. McHenry:

Enclosed is a booklet describing our new after school music program for elementary school students. This is in response to your recent letter.

The yearly tuition is $2,300, however, since your son has already attended our summer program, you would receive a 15% discount. This means that you would pay only ?.

The tuition includes the following: one hour weekly lesson with ear training and sight singing. One monthly recital. All music books and CD support. We hope you will enroll your son. You may use the order blank on the reverse side.

Problem 4

(The language in this letter is too stiff and unfriendly. Be very specific about the features of Version 6 and try to persuade the customer that these improvements more than justify the modest $50 increase in price. Version 6 offers a new transposition feature as well as 24 hour customer support. Ask her to contact you in case she wants to order the new version for an additional $50. Be sure to use the correct personal title in the inside address. Watch the personal title in the inside address. Be sure it conforms to the one in the salutation, which, by the way, is incorrect.)

Letter to Theresa Carlson, 86 Channing Road, Eastchester, NY 10709 Dear Miss. Carlson: (be sure to correct the salutation).

Regrettably, our entire stock of Intertrack sequencing software Version 5.0 is completely exhausted, therefore your order can not be filled at this time.

We are herewith returning your check for $575. If you wish to place another order, please add $50, for this new shipment of Version 6.0 will be more expensive.

Problem 5

(The following message is much too wordy. See if you can trim the body to fewer than 50 words. Hint: start with “May I please. . . “ Also, be sure to format the a.m. correctly!! Be sure to format the memorandum correctly by leaving one blank line between each of the headings and a triple space after the subject line.)

TO: Deloris Knight

FROM: YOU

DATE:

SUBJECT: THIRD FLOOR CONFERENCE ROOM

It is hereby requested that the undersigned be permitted the exclusive use of the Third Floor Conference Room on the date of April 4 for the purpose of conducting a meeting with the personal in the programming department.

Occupancy of this room is desired between the hours of of 9 and 10:30a.m. If the subject room is otherwise occupied, notification is desired in order that other arrangements may be made.

Problem 6

(This letter’s language is too stiff and formal; remember that every letter is potentially a sales letter; try to be as helpful as possible in the future.)

Professor Charles W. Hughes, Music Department, Oberlin College, College Way, Oberlin, OH 46781

Dear Professor Hughes

I am in receipt of your letter in which you request 30 copies of Passport’s “Transpose It” software for use in your elementary music theory classes at Oberlin College.

Arrangements have been made to send one copy and site license of the above mentioned software to you. The site license allows you to load the software on every computer on your campus. We consider it a great honor and tribute to our company that it’s software should be selected for the purpose described in your communication.

Problem 7

(Try to rewrite and clarify the following memorandum; it contains stilted language that needs to be made more natural. Also, remember there should be three paragraphs. The memo has far too much extraneous information and passive voice. Be sure to create bullets with parallel structure. Watch the grammatical errors.)

TO: Joyce Chapman, Director of Education

FROM: M. E. Ross, President

DATE:

SUBJECT:

The Board of Directors has approved a new policy, enclosed herewith, with reference to tuition refunds to those teachers who take advanced courses in music theory, composition, and conducting. Passport Music is committed to supporting every teacher who wishes to improve their technique. It is highly recommended that you distribute an individual copy of these guidelines to each teacher under your direct supervision. The following requirements must be met if you wish to receive a refund:

The course must be approved in advance by Joel Rossen

Grade of B or higher

Application received by August 1 for fall courses and January 15 for spring courses

You can of course contact me if you need further information.

Problem 8

(The ending of this letter is completely incorrect, since it contains archaic language. Try to improve it. Also, watch the misplaced modifier in the first sentence.)

Ms. Diana Barnes 307 West 36th Street New York, NY 10041

Dear Ms. Barnes:

Having reviewed more then 50 applications for our field representative position, you are our top choice for this exciting opportunity to join our excellent sales force.

We are ready to invite you to our home office here in Akron to open discussions about this position however we must first verify that you have completed the course in computer/digital music software applications that you began at SUNY Purchase last September.

Unless you provide a current transcript, we can not procede further.

Thanking you in advance, I remain

Sincerely yours,

Attachments:

rokat corporation is a manufacturer of tables sold to schools 273439

Rokat Corporation is a manufacturer of tables sold to schools, restaurants, hotels, and other institutions. The table tops are manufactured by Rokat, but the table legs are purchased from an outside supplier. The assembly department takes a manufactured table top and attaches the four purchased table legs. It takes 18 minutes of labor to assemble a table. The company follows a policy of producing enough tables to ensure that 40 percent of next month’s sales are in the finished goods inventory. Rokat also purchases sufficient materials to ensure that materials inventory is 60 percent of the following month’s scheduled production. Rokat’s sales budget in units for the next quarter is as follows:

July ……………………..2,300

August ………………….2,500

September ………………2,100

Rokat’s ending inventories in units for June 30 are as follows:

Finished goods ………………….1,900

Materials (legs) ………………….4,000

Required:

1. Calculate the number of tables to be produced during August.

2. Disregarding your response to Requirement 1, assume the required production units for August and September are 1,600 and 1,800, respectively, and the July 31 materials inventory is 4,200 table legs. Compute the number of table legs to be purchased in August.

3. Assume that Rokat Corporation will produce 1,800 units in September. How many employees will be required for the assembly department in September? (Fractional employees are acceptable since employees can be hired on a part time basis. Assume a 40 hour week and a 4 week month.)

(CMA adapted)

working with a segmented income statement 273459

Exercise 6 14 Working with a Segmented Income Statement [LO4]

[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

Marple Associates is a consulting firm that specializes in information systems for construction and landscaping companies. The firm has two offices—one in Houston and one in Dallas. The firm classifies the direct costs of consulting jobs as variable costs. A segmented contribution format income statement for the company’s most recent year is given below:

Office

Total Company Houston Dallas
Sales $ 787,500 100.0 % $ 157,500 100 % $ 630,000 100 %
Variable expenses 425,250 54.0 47,250 30 378,000 60












Contribution margin 362,250 46.0 110,250 70 252,000 40
Traceable fixed expenses 176,400 22.4 81,900 52 94,500 15












Office segment margin 185,850 23.6 $ 28,350 18 % $ 157,500 25 %
















Common fixed expenses not
traceable to offices
126,000 16.0




Net operating income $ 59,850 7.6 %









referencesebook & resources

eBook: SEGMENTED INCOME STATEMENTS AND THE CONTRIBUTION APPROACH
Section Break Exercise 6 14 Working with a Segmented Income Statement [LO4]

1. value:

10.00 points

Exercise 6 14 Part 1

Required:
1.

By how much would the company’s net operating income increase if Dallas increased its sales by $78,750 per year? Assume no change in cost behavior patterns.

Net operating income $

check my workreferencesebook & resources

eBook: SEGMENTED INCOME STATEMENTS AND THE CONTRIBUTION APPROACH
Worksheet Exercise 6 14 Part 1

the controller of harrington company wants to improve the compan 273491

The controller of Harrington Company wants to improve the company’s control system by preparing a month by month cash budget. The following information is for the month ending July 31, 2011.

June 30, 2011 cash balance …………………………………. $45,000

Dividends to be declared on July 15* ………………………… 12,000

Cash expenditures to be paid in July for operating expenses … 36,800

Amortization expense in July ………………………………….. 4,500

Cash collections to be received in July ………………………. 89,000

Merchandise purchases to be paid in cash in July …………… 56,200

Equipment to be purchased for cash in July …………………. 20,500

*Dividends are payable 30 days after declaration to shareholders of record on the declaration date.

Harrington Company wants to keep minimum cash balance of $25,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cash budget for the month ended July 31, 2011, and indicate how much money, if any, Harrington Company will need to borrow to meet its minimum cash requirement.

(b) Explain how cash budgeting can reduce the cost of short term borrowing.

the current designs staff has prepared the annual manufacturing 273495

The Current Designs staff has prepared the annual manufacturing budget for the rotomolded line based on an estimated annual production of 4,000 kayaks during 2013. Each kayak will require 54 pounds of polyethylene powder and a finishing kit (rope, seat, hardware, etc.). The polyethylene powder used in these kayaks costs $1.50 per pound, and the finishing kits cost $170 each. Each kayak will use two kinds of labor—2 hours of type I labor from people who run the oven and trim the plastic, and 3 hours of work from type II workers who attach the hatches and seat and other hardware. The type I employees are paid $15 per hour, and the type II are paid $12 per hour.

Manufacturing overhead is budgeted at $396,000 for 2013, broken down as follows.

Variable costs

Indirect materials ………….. $ 40,000

Manufacturing supplies ……… 53,800

Maintenance and utilities ……. 88,000

181,800

Fixed costs

Supervision ………………….. 90,000

Insurance ……………………. 14,400

Depreciation ………………… 109,800

214,200

Total ……………………………… $396,000

During the first quarter, ended March 31, 2013, 1,050 units were actually produced with the following costs.

Polyethylene powder ………………………… $ 87,000

Finishing kits …………………………………. 178,840

Type I labor …………………………………….. 31,500

Type II labor ……………………………………. 39,060

Indirect materials ………………………………. 10,500

Manufacturing supplies ……………………….… 14,150

Maintenance and utilities ………………………. 26,000

Supervision ……………………………….. 20,000

Insurance …………………………………… 3,600

Depreciation ………………………………. 27,450

Total ……………………………………. $438,100

Instructions

(a) Prepare the annual manufacturing budget for 2013, assuming that 4,000 kayaks will be produced.

(b) Prepare the flexible budget for manufacturing for the quarter ended March 31, 2013. Assume activity levels of 900, 1,000, and 1,050 units.

(c) Assuming the rotomolded line is treated as a profit center, prepare a flexible budget report for manufacturing for the quarter ended March 31, 2013, when 1,050 units were produced.

the manufacturing overhead budget for edmonds company contains t 273503

The manufacturing overhead budget for Edmonds Company contains the following items.

?

The budget was based on an estimated 2,000 units being produced. During the past month, 1,500 units were produced, and the following costs incurred.

?

Instructions

(a) Determine which items would be controllable by Mark Farris, the production manager.

(b) How much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1,500 units?

(c) Prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget report for Mr. Farris.

(d) Prepare a responsibility report. Include only the costs that would have been controllable by Mr. Farris. Assume that the supervision cost above includes Mr. Farris’s salary of $10,000, both at budget and actual. In an attached memo, describe clearly for Mr. Farris the areas in which his performance needs to beimproved.

the panamerican transportation company uses a responsibility rep 273510

The Panamerican Transportation Company uses a responsibility reporting system to measure the performance of its three investment centers: Planes, Taxis, and Limos. Segment performance is measured using a system of responsibility reports and return on investment calculations.

The allocation of resources within the company and the segment managers’ bonuses are based in part on the results shown in these reports. Recently, the company was the victim of a computer virus that deleted portions of the company’s accounting records. This was discovered when the current period’s responsibility reports were being prepared. The printout of the actual operating results appeared as follows.



Instructions

Determine the missing pieces of information above.

on this sheet fill in the 4th column with the appropriate journal subjournal ledger 273522

On this sheet, fill in the 4th column with the appropriate Journal, Subjournal, Ledger, or Subledger where information should be recorded. Use the appropriate journal/subjournal to record journal entries. Transfer this information to the appropriate subledger/ledger. Update the General Ledger at the end of each day as indicated in the ‘Date’ column of this sheet. Do not enter values in the blue columns The values in those cells are calculated automatically.

Accounting Treatments for This Assignment:

Gross method for Sales and Purchases

Direct Write off method for uncollectable accounts

Perpetual Inventory System

Document Preview:

Sheet 2 Sheet 1 Fin. Adj. Bal. G.L. AP PPE Inv AR General Cash Macros Purch. Sales Desc. Info Customer List Account Key Inventory Information Supplier ID Customer No. Customer Name Credit Limit Acct. No. Acct. Name Item ID Item Name Item Price Item Cost Supplier Name A00001 Kahn, Oliver Sales INV 001 Lawnmower C01 Garden Supply A00002 Lawal, Rashid Sales Discounts INV 002 Hedge Clippers C02 Plant Life A00003 Anderson, Susan Gains INV 003 Weed Eater C03 John Deere A00004 COGS INV 004 Shovel C04 Tools, Inc. A00005 Hurt, Marcus Interest Expense INV 005 20lb Mulch C05 Fastenal A00006 Wallace, Peter INV 006 20lb Fertilizer A00007 Uhlmann, Alex Losses INV 007 Pesticide A00008 Knote, Andrew Cash INV 008 Plant Seeds A00009 Mosiman, Andrew Accounts Receivable INV 009 Wheelbarrow A00010 Morris, Lauren INV 010 50ft Water Hose A00011 Kahn Jr., Oliver Inventory INV 011 100ft Water Hose PP&E Accounts Payable Notes Payable Interest Payable Retained Earnings Trans. No. Date Transaction Description Cust. No. Cust. Name Inv. No. Inv. Name Inv. Cost Quantity Credit Sale? Supplier No. Purchase Amount Credit? Debit Credit Customer Balance Balance Notes Trans. No Number In Number Out Supplier Balance AP Balance General Ledger End of Day Check Figures: Individual Ledgers to GL Acct. Bal Ledger Bal. Account No. Account Name Individual Ledgers Balance? Company Balance Sheet Income Statement ASSETS REVENUES EXPENSES Total Assets LIABILITIES AND OWNERS’ EQUITY Liabilities Total Liabilities Owners’ Equity Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Dr. Cr. Where to put information? Inv. Price You must enable Macros to do this homework. “Macros not enabled” warning screen To Enable Macros in Excel 2007 or 2010, Click the ‘Options’ Button above the formula bar. Under ‘Macro’, Select ‘Enable this Content’ and click ‘OK’ Amt Credit Amt Cash If using an…

Attachments:

the sports equipment division of duncan donnegal company is oper 273525

The Sports Equipment Division of Duncan Donnegal Company is operated as a profit center. Sales for the division were budgeted for 2011 at $900,000. The only variable costs budgeted for the division was cost of goods sold ($440,000) and selling and administrative ($60,000). Fixed costs were budgeted at $100,000 for cost of goods sold, $90,000 for selling and administrative and $70,000 for no controllable fixed costs. Actual results for these items were:

Sales ……………………… $880,000

Cost of goods sold

Variable …………………… 409,000

Fixed ………………………. 105,000

Selling and administrative

Variable …………………….. 61,000

Fixed ………………………… 67,000

Noncontrollable fixed ……… 80,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the Sports Equipment Division for 2011.

(b) Assume the division is an investment center, and average operating assets were $1,000,000. The noncontrollable fixed costs are controllable at the investment center level. Compute ROI.

managerial accounting 273533

Edge Equipment Co. manufactures and markets a number of rope products. Management is considering the future of Product XT, a special rope for hang gliding, that has not been as profitable as planned. Since Product XT is manufactured and marketed independently of the other products, its total costs can be precisely measured. Next year’s plans call for a $310 selling price per 100 yards of XT rope. Its fixed costs for the year are expected to be $421,600, up to a maximum capacity of 550,000 yards of rope. Forecasted variable costs are $186 per 100 yards of XT rope.

1(a)

Estimate Product XT’s break even point in terms of sales units. (1 unit = 100 yards.)

Estimate Product XT’s break even point in terms of sales dollars.
(Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your final answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response).

there are many useful resources regarding budgeting available on 273544

There are many useful resources regarding budgeting available on websites. The following activity investigates the results of a comprehensive budgeting study.

Address: http://www.accountingweb.com/whitepapers/centage_ioma.pdf,

Instructions

Go the address above and then answer the following questions.

(a) What are cited as the two most common ?opain points?? of budgeting?

(b) What percentage of companies that participated in the survey said that they prepare annual budgets?

Of those that prepare budgets, what percentage say that they start the budgeting process by first generating sales projections?

(c) What is the most common amount of time for the annual budgeting process?

(d) When evaluating variances from budgeted amounts, what was the most commonly defined range of acceptable tolerance levels?

(e) The study defines three types of consequences for varying from budgeted amounts. How does it describe ?osevere?? consequences?

manage budget and financial weekly roster and costing 273569

Weekly Roster and Costing

No Name Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Total Hours

No Name Total Hours Rate of Pay Weekly Wage Super Annual Leave Sick Leave Total WeeklyCost Month Monthly Wage Cost

1 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 January $0

2 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 February $0

3 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 March $0

4 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 April $0

5 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 May $0

6 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 June $0

7 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 July $0

8 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 August $0

9 0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 September $0

0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 October $0

0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 November $0

0 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 December $0

Total Weekly Wage $0

Daily Wage Cost $0 Total Annual Wage $0

Document Preview:

Sheet1 Marketing and Promotion Costing Roster and Costing Depreciation Balance Sheet P&L Statement Cash Flow Forecasting Tempelate _Toc532098155 _Toc532098156 January February March April May June July August September October November December Total Sales Food Beverage Cost of Sales Total Sales Total Cost of Sales Gross Profit Total Gross Profit Other Costs Total Other Costs Net Profit Bank Account Opening Balance Current Month Closing Balance Actual Cost Year 1 Year2 Year3 Residual Balance Sheet Assets Cash Flow Statement Wages/Salery Electricity Water Gas Rent Telephone Insurance Internet Office expences Other expences Licence Rates Advisor Bank Interest Bank Over Draft Owners Equity Plant and Equipment Stock in hand Cash at Bank Total Assets Total Liability Capital Liability & Owners Equity Liability Percentage Depreciation for 3 years Asset registers Sales Forcasting Restaurant Jan Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Feb Mar Average Spend Apl Bevrages No.of Customers Aug Revenue Sep Oct Nov Total weekly Revenue Dec Average revenue perday Cost of goods Average cost of goods Total weekly cost of goods Average Cost per day Weekly Roster and Costing No Name Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Total Hours Rate of Pay Weekly Wage Annual Leave Sick Leave Total Cost Total Weekly Wage Month Monthly Wage Cost Daily Wage Cost Average Depreciation per Month Weekly Cost Forecast Mix Weekly Sales Forecast Mix Monthly Cost Monthly Revenue Total Annual Wage Depreciation Super Total WeeklyCost Sno Marketing Strategy Apr Jun Jul Marketing and Promotion Strategy & Costing Total Marketing Cost Monthly Marketing Cost Marketing Profit and Loss…

list and define four ethical standards codes of professional conduct that ar 417907

List and define four ethical standards (codes of professional conduct) that are part of the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountant’s Code of Professional Conduct. Give an example of an imaginary situation where the management accountant would be in breach of each of these standards (one situation for each standard/code).

Question 2: (Total 4 Marks)

Consider any product/brand (for ‘a’) and the given service sector company (for ‘b’) and describe the aspects of the products that you
value as a customer (name any
four ‘values’ for each category).

  1. A recent model car
  2. ‘City Link’ membership (an electronic toll road billing device)

Question 3: (Total 14 Marks)

Armidale Aluminium Company, a manufacturer of recyclable soft drink cans, had the following inventory balances at the beginning and end of the current year:

Inventory Account January 1($) December 31($)
Raw Material 120,000 140,000
Work in Process 240,000 230,000
Finished Goods 300,000 330,000

During the year the company purchased $500,000 of raw material and spent $800,000 on direct labour. Manufacturing overhead costs were as under:

Indirect Materials 20,000
Indirect Labour 50,000
Depreciation on Plant and Equipment 200,000
Electricity 50,000
Other 60,000

Sales revenue was 2,210,000 for the year. Selling and administrative expenses for the year amounted to 220,000. The firm’s tax rate is 40%.

Required:

  1. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured
  2. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold
  3. Prepare an income statement for the company

Question 4: (Total 15 Marks)

Kinzhong, a florist, operates retail stores in several shopping malls. The average selling price of an arrangement is $30 and the average cost of each sale is $18. A new mall is opening where Kinzhong wants to locate a store, but the location manager is not sure about the rent method to accept. The mall operator offers the following three options for its retail store rentals:

  1. paying a fixed rent of $15,000 a month, or
  2. paying a base rent of $9,000 plus 10% of revenue received, or
  3. paying a base rent of $4,800 plus 20% of revenue received up to a maximum rent of $25,000.

Required:

  1. For each option, compute the breakeven sales and the monthly rent paid at break even.
  2. Compare option 1 with, i. Option 2, and with ii. Option 3, and analyse, at what level of sale both options will have same preference (for both i, and ii), and how these preferences will change if sale goes beyond those levels.

Attachments:

use the following information to complete form 940 and schedule a on pages 5 36 to 5 417911

As the accountant for Runson Moving Company, you are preparing the company’s annual return, Form 940 and Schedule A. Use the following information to complete Form 940 and Schedule A on pages 5 36 to 5 38.

The net FUTA tax liability for each quarter of 2013 was as follows: 1st, $220.10; 2nd, $107.60; 3rd, $101.00; and 4th, $56.10 plus the credit reduction.

Since the net FUTA tax liability did not exceed $500, the company was not required to make its first deposit of FUTA taxes until January 31, 2014. Assume that the electronic payment was made on time.

a. One of the employees performs all of his duties in another state”Arizona.

b. Total payments made to employees during calendar year 2013:

c. Employer contributions in California into employees’ 401(k) retirement plan: $3,500.

d. Payments made to employees in excess of $7,000: $36,500 ($11,490 from Arizona and $25,010 from California).

e. Form is to be signed by Mickey Vixon, Vice President.

f. Phone number ” (219) 555 8310.

accounting management ethical standards codes of professional conduct 417924

Question 1: (Total 7 Marks)

List and define four ethical standards (codes of professional conduct) that are part of the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountant’s Code of Professional Conduct. Give an example of an imaginary situation where the management accountant would be in breach of each of these standards (one situation for each standard/code).

Question 2: (Total 4 Marks)

Consider any product/brand (for ‘a’) and the given service sector company (for ‘b’) and describe the aspects of the products that you value as a customer (name any four ‘values’ for each category).

1. A recent model car

2. ‘City Link’ membership (an electronic toll road billing device)

Question 3: (Total 14 Marks)

Armidale Aluminium Company, a manufacturer of recyclable soft drink cans, had the following inventory balances at the beginning and end of the current year:

Inventory Account January 1($) December 31($)

Raw Material 120,000 140,000

Work in Process 240,000 230,000

Finished Goods 300,000 330,000

During the year the company purchased $500,000 of raw material and spent $800,000 on direct labour. Manufacturing overhead costs were as under:

Indirect Materials 20,000

Indirect Labour 50,000

Depreciation on Plant and Equipment 200,000

Electricity 50,000

Other 60,000

Sales revenue was 2,210,000 for the year. Selling and administrative expenses for the year amounted to 220,000. The firm’s tax rate is 40%.

Required:

1. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured

2. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold

3. Prepare an income statement for the company

Question 4: (Total 15 Marks)

Kinzhong, a florist, operates retail stores in several shopping malls. The average selling price of an arrangement is $30 and the average cost of each sale is $18. A new mall is opening where Kinzhong wants to locate a store, but the location manager is not sure about the rent method to accept. The mall operator offers the following three options for its retail store rentals:

1. paying a fixed rent of $15,000 a month, or

2. paying a base rent of $9,000 plus 10% of revenue received, or

3. paying a base rent of $4,800 plus 20% of revenue received up to a maximum rent of $25,000.

Required:

1. For each option, compute the breakeven sales and the monthly rent paid at break even.

2. Compare option 1 with, i. Option 2, and with ii. Option 3, and analyse, at what level of sale both options will have same preference (for both i, and ii), and how these preferences will change if sale goes beyond those levels.

Attachments:

production budget 417966

Accu Weight, Inc. produces a small and large version of its popular electronic scale. The anticipated unit sales for the scales by sales region are as follows:

Small Scale Large Scale
North Region unit sales 20,500 39,700
South Region unit sales 22,100 23,200
Total 42,600 62,900

The finished goods inventory estimated for May 1, 2013, for the small and large scale models is 1,500 and 2,000 units, respectively. The desired finished goods inventory for May 31, 2013, for the small and large scale models is 1,100 and 2,200 units, respectively.

Hide

Prepare a production budget for the small and large scales for the month ended May 31, 2013.

Accu Weight, Inc.
Production Budget
For the Month Ending May 31, 2013
Units Small Scale
Units Large Scale
Expected units to be sold
Correct 7
Correct 8
  • Less estimated inventory, May 1, 2013
  • Plus desired inventory, May 31, 2013

Correct 9

Correct 10
Correct 11
Total
Correct 13
Correct 14
  • Less estimated inventory, May 1, 2013
  • Plus desired inventory, May 31, 2013

Correct 15

Correct 16
Correct 17
Total units to be produced
Correct 19
Correct 20

accounting help 417987

Activity based product costing

Alabama Paper Company manufactures three products (computer paper, newsprint, and specialty paper) in a continuous production process. Senior management has asked the controller to conduct an activity based costing study. The controller identified the amount of factory overhead required by the critical activities of the organization as follows:

Activity Activity Cost Pool
Production $451,400
Setup 263,200
Moving 72,000
Shipping 152,000
Product Engineering 92,400
Total $1,031,000

Theactivity bases identified for each activity are as follows:

Activity Activity Base
Production Machine hours
Setup Number of setups
Moving Number of moves
Shipping Number of customer orders
Product Engineering Number of test runs

The activity base usage quantities and units produced for the three products were determined from corporate records and are as follows:

Machine Hours Number of
Setups
Number of
Moves
Number of
Customer Orders
Number of
Test Runs
Units
Computer Paper 3,260 180 180 760 70 8,150
Newsprint 2,070 270 270 2,090 440 5,175
Specialty Paper 2,070 250 450 950 190 5,175
Total 7,400 700 900 3,800 700 18,500

Each product requires 0.9 machine hour per unit.

If required, round all per unit amounts to the nearest cent.

1. Determine theactivity rate for each activity.

Production $ per machine hour
Setup $ per setup
Moving $ per move
Shipping $ per cust. ord.
Product Engineering $ per test run

2. Determine the total and per unit activity cost for all three products. Round per unit answers to the nearest cent.

Total Activity Cost Activity Cost per Unit
Computer Paper $ $
Newsprint $ $
Specialty Paper $ $

3. Why aren’t the activity unit costs equal across all three products since they require the same machine time per unit?

The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

computing fixed variable total costs with different activity level 417991

At an activity level of 7,600 units, Haas Corporation’s total variable cost is $463,600 and its total fixed cost is $364,884.

Required:

For the activity level of 7,800 units, compute: (a) the total variable cost; (b) the total fixed cost; (c) the total cost; (d) the average variable cost per unit; (e) the average fixed cost per unit; and (f) the average total cost per unit. Assume that this activity level is within the relevant range. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your average values to two decimal places.)

(a) Variable cost $
(b) Fixed cost $
(c) Total cost $
(d) Average variable cost per unit $
(e) Average fixed cost per unit $
(f) Average total cost per unit $

prepare the closing entries 418017

The adjusted trial balance shown below is for Rich Company at the end of its fiscal year.

Rich Company

Trial Balance

March 31, 2011

Cash $12,900

Accounts Receivable 9,400

Office Supplies 700

Prepaid Insurance 2,500

Office Equipment 16,000

Accum. Depr: office Equipment $4,800

Accounts Payable 5,800

Salaries Payable 1,100

Unearned rent revenue 600

Common stock 10,000

Retained 5,600

Dividends 3,800

Service revenue 39,600

Rent revenue 14,400

Salaries expense 20,100

Office supplies expense 1,800

Rent expense 12,000

insurance expense 1,500

depreciation expense 1,200

$81,900 $81,900

Prepare the closing entries at March 31

(Please show exactly how it should be written, in the correct format and spacing please, thank you!!)

essentials of federal income taxation chapter 5 personal itemized deductions 417693

31a) Marcus (ssn 397 73 8399) and Debra Cross own three homes. Information regarding the amount of acquisition indebtedness, as well as interest and taxes paid on each home during the year is as follows.

Acquisition Interest. Taxes

Indebtedness. Paid. Paid

Principal residence. $240,000. $18,330. $2,400

Vacation home #1. $300,000. $18,583. $2,800

Vacation home # 2. $350,000. $19,044. $3,400

During 2012 the crosses made cash gifts totaling $12,000 to various qualified public charities. The Crosses gifted 150 shares of stock to their church during 2012. They purchased 100 shares of the stock for $10 a share in 2008. The other 50 shares were purchased earlier in 2012 for $18 a share. At the times the shares were donated to the church, their fair market value was $24 a share. The Crosses only other itemized deductions for 2012 were $4,240 that their employers withheld from their paychecks for state income taxes. The Crosses AGI for 2012 is $214,540. Compute the Crosses total itemized deductions and prepare their schedule A.

account 417698

39. Lott Bicycle Company has been manufacturing its own seats for its

bicycles. The company is currently operating at 100% of capacity,

and variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the

rate of 60% of direct labor cost. The direct materials and direct

labor cost per unit to make the bicycle seats are $8.00 and $9.00,

respectively. Normal production is 50,000 bicycles per year.

A supplier offers to make the bicycle seats at a price of $20 each.

If the bicycle company accepts this offer, all variable

manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $30,000 of fixed

manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the bicycle seats

will have to be absorbed by other products.

INSTRUCTIONS

Prepare the incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy

the bicycle seats. Should Lott Bicycle Company buy the seats from the outside supplier?

a. MAKE $20000 adv. b. BUY Af?cAc‚¬” 120000 adv.

c. BUY $20000adv. d. MAKE $120000 adv.

40. Benson Company produced and sold 20,000 units of product and is

operating at 80% of plant capacity. Unit information about its

product is as follows:

Sales Price $70

Variable manufacturing cost $45

Fixed manufacturing cost ($300,000/20,000) 15 60

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Profit per unit $10

The company received a proposal from a foreign company to buy 4,000

units of Benson Company’s product for $50 per unit. This is a

one time only order and acceptance of this proposal will not affect

the company’s regular sales. The president of Benson Company is

reluctant to accept the proposal because he is concerned that the

company will lose money on the special order.

INSTRUCTIONS

Prepare a schedule reflecting an incremental analysis of this

proposal and indicate the effect the acceptance of this order might

have on the company’s income.

a. Might INCREASE income by $20,000. b. Might INCREASE income by $120,000.

c. Might DECREASE income by $120,000. d. Might DECREASE income by $20,000.

41. Carter Company manufactures cappuccino makers. For the first eight

months of 2013 the company reported the following operating results

while operating at 80% of plant capacity:

Sales (500,000 units) $75,000,000

Cost of goods sold 45,000,000

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Gross profit 30,000,000

Operating expenses 24,000,000

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Net income $ 6,000,000

An analysis of costs and expenses reveals that variable cost of

goods sold is $80 per unit and variable operating expenses are

$30 per unit.

In September, Carter Company receives a special order for 40,000

machines at $120 each from a major coffee shop franchise.

Acceptance of the order would result in $10,000 of shipping costs

but no increase in fixed expenses.

INSTRUCTIONS

Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order. Should Carter Company accept the special order?

a. ACCEPT. b. REJECT.

42. Monroe Enterprises relies heavily on a copier machine to process the

paperwork. Recently the copy clerk has not been able to process all

the necessary copies within the regular work week.

Management is considering updating the copier machine with a faster

model.

Current Copier New Model

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Original purchase cost $10,000 $20,000

Accumulated depreciation 8,000 Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Estimated operating costs (annual) 9,000 4,000

Useful life 5 years 5 years

If sold now, the current copier would have a salvage value of

$1,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the

current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is

expected to have zero salvage value after five years.

INSTRUCTIONS

Prepare an analysis to show whether the company should retain or

replace the machine.

a. RETAIN income up $45000. b. REPLACE income up by $6000.

c. RETAIN income down $39000. d. REPLACE income down by $6,000.

43. Simon Forest Corporation operates two divisions, the Timber

Division and the Consumer Division. The Timber Division manufactures

and sells logs to paper manufacturers. The Consumer Division

operates retail lumber mills which sell a variety of products in the

do it yourself homeowner market. The company is considering

disposing of the Consumer Division since it has been consistently

unprofitable for a number of years. The income statements for the

two divisions for the year ended December 31, 2013 are presented

below:

Timber Consumer

Division Division Total

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Sales $1,500,000 $ 400,000 $1,900,000

Cost of goods sold 900,000 300,000 1,200,000

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Gross profit 600,000 100,000 700,000

Selling & administrative expenses 250,000 150,000 400,000

Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬” Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”Af?cAc‚¬”

Net income $ 350,000 $( 50,000) $ 300,000

In the Consumer Division, 70% of the cost of goods sold are variable

costs and 30% of selling and administrative expenses are variable

costs. The management of the company feels it can save $50,000 of

fixed cost of goods sold and $40,000 of fixed selling expenses if it

discontinued operation of the consumer division.

INSTRUCTIONS

If the company had discontinued the division for 2013, determine what net income would have been.

a. Might have been $350,000. b. Might have been a loss of $55,000.

c. Might have been $295,000. d. Might have been a loss of $295,000.

acct 417704

4.A 60 day, 12% note for $10,000, dated May 1, is received from a customer on account. The maturity value of the note is

Answer

a. $10,200
b. $10,000
c. $11,200
d. $9,800

5. Who pays the freight cost when the terms are FOB destination?

Answer

a. the buyer
b. either the buyer or the seller
c. the customer
d. the seller

6. Use the following information to answer the following questions.

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $60 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 3 Purchase 5 $30
May 10 Sale 3
May 17 Purchase 10 $34
May 20 Sale 6
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 10 $40

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the ending inventory for the month of May using the LIFO inventory cost method. Answer

a. $494
b. $520
c. $422
d. $502

7. If the physical count of the inventory revealed $72,000 of merchandise on hand and the inventory records reported $73,200, what would be the necessary adjusting entry to record inventory shortage?

Answer

a. Cost of Merchandise Sold debit $1,200; Merchandise Inventory credit $1,200.
b. Merchandise inventory debit $1,200; Cost of Merchandise Sold credit $1,200.
c. Merchandise inventory debit $72,000; Cost of Merchandise Sold credit $72,000.
d. Cost of Merchandise Sold debit $73,200; Merchandise Inventory credit $72,000.

sales revenue and direct materials 417713

4.
Bartlow, Inc had the folling income statement for the month of May.

Sales Revenue 428,000
Cost of goods sold 205,440
Gross Margin 222,560
Less:
Selling Expenses 81,320
Administrative Expenses 72,760
Operating Income 68,480

What was the sales revenue percent?

1. 100%
2. 48%
3. 52%
4. 16%

5.
Junko company makes typewriters. During the year Junko manufactured 97,000 typewriters. Finished goods Inventory had the following units on hand:

January 1 1,260
December 31 1,040

How many typewriters did Junko sell during the year?
1. 96,780
2. 97,220
3. 97,000
4. 98,260

6.
In July, Econo company purchased materials costing 21,000 dollars and incurred direct labor costs of 18,000 dollars. Overhead totaled 32,000 dollars for the month. Information on the inventories was a follows:

July 1 July 31
Materials 6,200 7,100
Work in Process 700 1,200
Finished goods 3,300 2,700

What is the cost of direct materials used in July?
1. 21,000
2. 20,100
3. 21,900
4. 20,500

homework 417724

4. value:

25.00 points

A family friend has asked your help in analyzing the operations of three anonymous companies operating in the same service sector industry. Supply the missing data in the table below: (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round immediate calculations, but round your final answers to the nearest whole number. )

Company

A B C
Sales $ 400,000 $ 750,000 $ 600,000
Net operating income $ $ 45,000 $
Average operating assets $ 160,000 $ $ 150,000
Return on investment (ROI) 20% 18% %
Minimum required rate of return:
Percentage 15% % 12%
Dollar amount $ $ 50,000 $
Residual income $ $ $ 6,000

carabiner co sold 28 000 annual magazine subscriptions for 40 during december 2012 t 417730

Carabiner Co. sold 28,000 annual magazine subscriptions for $40 during December 2012. These new subscribers will receive monthly issues, beginning in January 2013. In addition, the business had taxable income of $130,000 during the first calendar quarter of 2013. The federal tax rate is 40%. A quarterly tax payment will be made on April 15, 2013.

Prepare the Current Liabilities section of the balance sheet for Carabiner Co. on March 31, 2013

E8 2

Notes payable

Obj|2

A business issued a 30 day, 7% note for $36,000 to a creditor on account. Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of recording (a) the issuance of the note and (b) the payment of the note at maturity, including interest.

E8 3

Recording income taxes

Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of recording the following selected transactions of Sid’s Leather Co.

Apr. 15.

Paid the first installment of the estimated income tax for the current fiscal year ending December 31, $29,000. No entry had been made to record the liability.

a.

Calculate the employer’s payroll taxes, using the following rates: state unemployment, 4.3%; federal unemployment, 0.8%.

b.

Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of recording the accrual of payroll taxes.

E8 4

Deferred income taxes

Obj|2

Warehouse System Inc. recognized service revenue of $960,000 on its financial statements in 2011. Assume, however, that the tax code requires this amount to be recognized for tax purposes in 2012. The taxable income for 2011 and 2012 is $7,100,000 and $8,900,000, respectively. Assume a tax rate of 40%.

Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of the tax expense, deferred taxes, and taxes payable for 2011 and 2012, respectively.

E8 5

Accrued product warranty

Fungus Audio Works Inc. warrants its products for one year. The estimated product warranty is 3% of sales. Assume that sales were $680,000 for January. In February, a customer received warranty repairs requiring $4,200 of parts.

  • a. Determine the warranty liability at January 31, the end of the first month of the current year.
  • b. What accounts are decreased for the warranty work provided in February?

E8 6

Accrued product warranty

Obj|2

Ford Motor Company disclosed the following estimated product warranty payable for two recent years.

Dec. 31.

Recorded the estimated income tax liability for the year just ended and the deferred income tax liability, based on the April 15 transaction and the following data

Fungus Audio Works Inc. warrants its products for one year. The estimated product warranty is 3% of sales. Assume that sales were $680,000 for January. In February, a customer received warranty repairs requiring $4,200 of parts

a.

Determine the warranty liability at January 31, the end of the first month of the current year.

b.

What accounts are decreased for the warranty work provided in February?

E8 6

Accrued product warranty

Obj|2

Ford Motor Company disclosed the following estimated product warranty payable for two recent years.

December 31

Year 2

Year 1

(in millions)

Product warranty payable

$2,643

$3,147

Ford’s sales were $128,954 million in Year 2 and $116,283 million in Year 1. Assume that the total paid on warranty claims during Year 2 was $2,176 million.

a.

Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements for the Year 2 product warranty expense.

b.

Assuming $2,176 million in warranty claims paid during Year 2, explain the $501 ($3,147 $2,646) million decrease in the total warranty liability from Year 1 to Year 2

E8 7

Contingent liabilities

Several months ago, Maltese Chemical Company experienced a hazardous materials spill at one of its plants. As a result, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) fined the company $750,000. The company is contesting the fine. In addition, an employee is seeking $300,000 damages related to the spill. Lastly, a homeowner has sued the company for $180,000. The homeowner lives 15 miles from the plant, but believes that the incident has reduced the home’s resale value by $180,000.

Maltese’s legal counsel believes that it is probable that the EPA fine will stand. In addition, counsel indicates that an out of court settlement of $90,000 has recently been reached with the employee. The final papers will be signed next week. Counsel believes that the homeowner’s case is much weaker and will be decided in favor of Maltese. Other litigation related to the spill is possible, but the damage amounts are uncertain.

a.

Illustrate the effects of the contingent liabilities associated with the hazardous materials spill on the accounts and financial statements.

b.

Prepare a note disclosure relating to this incident

E8 8

Contingent liabilities

The following note accompanied recent financial statements for
Goodyear Tire and Rubber Company:

We are a defendant in numerous lawsuits alleging various asbestos related personal injuries purported to result from alleged exposure to certain asbestos products manufactured by us or present in certain of our facilities. Typically, these lawsuits have been brought against multiple defendants in state and federal courts. To date, we have disposed of approximately 90,700 claims by defending and obtaining the dismissal thereof or by entering into a settlement. The sum of our accrued asbestos related liability, … including legal costs totaled approximately $365 million through December 31, 2010. …

  • a. Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of recording the contingent liability of $365,000,000.
  • b. Why was the contingent liability recorded?

E8 9

Calculate payroll

b. Net pay, $1,749.75

An employee earns $35 per hour and 1.5 times that rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. Assume that the employee worked 52 hours during the week, and that the gross pay prior to the current week totaled $62,000. Assume further that the social security tax rate was 6.0% (on earnings up to $100,000), the Medicare tax rate was 1.5%, and federal income tax to be withheld was $128.

a.

Determine the gross pay for the week.

b.

Determine the net pay for the week.

E8 10

Summary payroll data

Obj|2

? (3) Total earnings, $314,400

In the following summary of data for a payroll period, some amounts have been intentionally omitted:

Earnings:
1. At regular rate ?
2. At overtime rate $ 45,200
3. Total earnings ?
Deductions:
4. FICA tax 21,750
5. Income tax withheld 57,900
6. Medical insurance 29,150
7. Union dues ?
8. Total deductions 117,900
9. Net amount paid 196,500
Accounts increased:
10. Factory Wages 220,600
11. Sales Salaries ?
12. Office Salaries 40,000

Calculate the amounts omitted in lines (1), (3), (7), and (11).

E8 11

Recording payroll taxes

Obj|2

According to a summary of the payroll of Apline Publishing Co., $460,000 was subject to the 7.5% FICA tax. Also, $39,000 was subject to state and federal unemployment taxes.
Top of Form
PageGo to the specified printed page number
Bottom of Form
Print Activate the

a.

Calculate the employer’s payroll taxes, using the following rates: state unemployment, 4.3%; federal unemployment, 0.8%.

b.

Illustrate the effects on the accounts and financial statements of recording the accrual of payroll taxes.

Attachments:

need help please show steps 417804

7. The following data have been taken from the budget reports of Brandon company,a merchandising company .

Ja nuary ………….

Pm’C11 1ses

$160,000

Sales

$100,000

Febuary………..

$160,000

$200 000

March ………..…..

$160,000

$240,000

April……………….

$140,000

$300,000

May…..………..….

$140,000

$260,000

June ….…....…..

$120,000

$240,000

Forty percentof purchases are paid for in cash at the time of purchase, and 30% are paid for in each of the next two months.Purchases for the previous Novemberand December were$150,000 per month. Employee wages are 10% of sales for the month in which the sales occur.Selling and administrative expenses are 20% of the following month’ssales. (July sales are budgeted to be $220,000.) Interest payments of $20,000 are paid quarterlyin January and April. Brandon’s cash disbursements for the month of April would be:

A. $140,000

B. $254,000

C.$200,000

D. $248,000

acctt 417819

8. On August 1, Kim Company accepted a 90 day note receivable as payment for services provided to Hsu Company. The terms of the note were $10,000 face value and 6% interest. On October 30, the journal entry to record the collection of the note should include a

Answer

a. debit to Interest Receivable for $150
b. debit to Notes Receivable for $10,000
c. credit to Notes Receivable for $10,150
d. credit to Interest Revenue for $150

9. If ending inventory for the year is understated, net income for the year is overstated.

Answer True
False

10. Use the following information to answer the following questions.

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $60 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 3 Purchase 5 $30
May 10 Sale 3
May 17 Purchase 10 $34
May 20 Sale 6
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 10 $40

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the cost of merchandise sold for the sale of May 20 using the FIFO inventory cost method. Answer

a. $196
b. $250
c. $180
d. $204

11. Use the following information to answer the following questions.

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $60 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 3 Purchase 5 $30
May 10 Sale 3
May 17 Purchase 10 $34
May 20 Sale 6
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 10 $40

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the ending inventory value for the month of May using the FIFO inventory cost method.

Answer

a. $494
b. $520
c. $422
d. $502

equity method 417900

Abraham, Inc., a New Jersey corporation, operates 57 bakeries throughout the northeastern section of the United States. In the past, its founder, James Abraham, owned all the company’s entire outstanding common stock. However, during the early part of this year, the corporation suffered a severe cash flow problem brought on by rapid expansion. To avoid bankruptcy, Abraham sought additional investment capital from a friend, Dennis Bostitch, who owns Highland Laboratories. Subsequently, Highland paid $700,000 cash to Abraham, Inc., to acquire enough newly issued shares of common stock for a one third ownership interest. At the end of this year, the accountants for Highland Laboratories are discussing the proper method of reporting this investment. Once argues for maintaining the asset at its original cost: Af?cAc‚¬A??oThis purchase is no more than a loan to bail out the bakeries. Mr. Abraham will continue to run the organization with little or no attention paid to us. After all, what does anyone in our company know about baking bread? I would be surprised if Abraham does not reacquire these shares as soon as the bakery business is profitable again.Af?cAc‚¬ One of the other accountants disagrees, stating that the equity method is appropriate. Af?cAc‚¬A??oI realize that our company is not capable of running a bakery. However, the official rules state that we must have only the ability to exert significant influence. With one third of the common stock in our possession, we certainly have that ability. Whether we use it or not, this ability means that we are required to apply the equity method.Af?cAc‚¬<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

fugate company manufactures expensive watch cases sold as souven 273157

Fugate Company manufactures expensive watch cases sold as souvenirs. Three of its sales departments are: Retail Sales, Wholesale Sales, and Outlet Sales. The Retail Sales Department is a profit center. The Wholesale Sales Department is a cost center. Its managers merely take orders from customers who purchase through the company’s wholesale catalog. The Outlet Sales Department is an investment center, because each manager is given full responsibility for an outlet store location. The manager can hire and discharge employees, purchase, maintain, and sell equipment, and in general is fairly independent of company control.

Jane Duncan is a manager in the Retail Sales Department. Richard Wayne manages the Wholesale Sales Department. Jose Lopez manages the Golden Gate Club outlet store in

San Francisco. The following are the budget responsibility reports for each of the three departments.

?

Instructions

(a) Determine which of the items should be included in the responsibility report for each of the three managers.

(b) Compare the actual results with the budget. Decide which results should be called to the attention of each manager.

glendo industries balance sheet at december 31 2010 is presen 273171

Glendo Industries’ balance sheet at December 31, 2010, is presented below and on the next page.

?



Additional information accumulated for the budgeting process is as follows.

Budgeted data for the year 2011 include the following.

?

To meet sales requirements and to have 3,000 units of finished goods on hand at December 31, 2011, the production budget shows 9,000 required units of output. The total unit cost of production is expected to be $20. Glendo Industries uses the first in, first out (FIFO) inventory costing method. Selling and administrative expenses include $4,000 for depreciation on equipment. Interest expense is expected to be $3,500 for the year. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income before income taxes.

All sales and purchases are on account. It is expected that 60% of quarterly sales are collected in cash within the quarter and the remainder is collected in the following quarter. Direct materials purchased from suppliers are paid 50% in the quarter incurred and the remainder in the following quarter. Purchases in the fourth quarter were the same as the materials used. In 2011, the company expects to purchase additional equipment costing $19,000. It expects to pay $8,000 on notes payable plus all interest due and payable to December 31 (included in interest expense $3,500, above). Accounts payable at December 31, 2011, includes amounts due suppliers (see above) plus other accounts payable of $5,700. In 2011, the company expects to declare and pay a $5,000 cash dividend. Unpaid income taxes at December 31 will be $5,000. The company’s cash budget shows an expected cash balance of $7,950 at December 31, 2011.

Instructions

Prepare a budgeted income statement for 2011 and a budgeted balance sheet at December 31, 2011. In preparing the income statement, you will need to compute cost of goods manufactured (direct materials _ direct labor _ manufacturing overhead) and finished goods inventory (December 31,2011).

historically pine hill wood products has had no significant bad 273194

Historically, Pine Hill Wood Products has had no significant bad debt experience with its customers. There are no cash sales; all sales are made on credit. Payments for credit sales have been received as follows:

40 percent of credit sales in the month of the sale.

30 percent of credit sales in the first subsequent month.

25 percent of credit sales in the second subsequent month.

5 percent of credit sales in the third subsequent month.

The sales forecast is as follows.

January ……………….$95,000

February ……………… 65,000

March ………………… 70,000

April …………………. 80,000

May ………………….. 85,000

Required:

1. What is the forecasted cash inflow for Pine Hill Wood Products for May?

2. Due to deteriorating economic conditions, Pine Hill Wood Products has now decided that its cash forecast should include a bad debt adjustment of 2 percent of credit sales, beginning with sales for the month of April. Because of this policy change, what will happen to the total expected cash inflow related to sales made in April? (CMA adapted)

in an effort to improve budgeting the controller for zebro 273205

In an effort to improve budgeting, the controller for Zebro Products has developed a flexible budget for overhead costs. Zebro Products makes two types of paper based cloths: counter wipes and floor wipes. Zebro expects to produce 500,000 rolls of each product during the coming year. Counter wipes require 0.01 direct labor hour per roll, and floor wipes require 0.05. The controller has developed the following cost formulas for each of the four overhead items:

Cost Formula__________

Maintenance ……………………$10,000 + $0.20 A? DLH

Power …………………………..$0.50 A? DLH

Indirect labor …………………..$43,600 + $1.50 A? DLH

Rent ……………………………$24,000

Required:

1. Prepare an overhead budget for the expected activity level for the coming year.

2. Prepare an overhead budget that reflects production that is 10 percent higher than expected (for both products) and a budget for production that is 20 percent lower than expected.

jantzen manufacturing inc operates the patio furniture division 273249

Jantzen Manufacturing Inc. operates the Patio Furniture Division as a profit center. Operating data for this division for the year ended December 31, 2010, are as shown below.
Budget
Difference
from Budget

Sales $2,507,800 $64,810 F
Cost of goods sold
Variable 1,304,000 43,910 F
Controllable fixed 207,490 7,210 U
Selling and administrative
Variable 222,400 7,480 U
Controllable fixed 54,560 3,990 U
Noncontrollable fixed costs 76,840 5,470 U

In addition, Jantzen Manufacturing incurs $185,670 of indirect fixed costs that were budgeted at $178,080. Twenty percent (20%) of these costs are allocated to the Patio Furniture Division.

Complete the responsibility report for the Patio Furniture Division for the year.

JANTZEN MANUFACTURING INC.
Patio Furniture Division
Responsibility Report
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Difference
Favorable F
Budget
Actual
Unfavorable U

Sales $
$
$
FU
Variable costs
Cost of goods sold FU
Selling & admin.

UF
Tot. variable costs

FU
Contribution margin

FU
Controllable fixed costs
Cost of goods sold UF
Selling & admin.

UF
Tot. fixed costs

FU
Controllable margin $
$
$
FU

Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question

kitchen care inc kci is a manufacturer of toaster ovens 273268

Kitchen Care Inc. (KCI) is a manufacturer of toaster ovens. To improve control over operations, the president of KCI wants to begin using a flexible budgeting system, rather than use only the current master budget. The following data are available for KCI’s expected costs at production levels of 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.

Variable costs

Manufacturing ……… $6 per unit

Administrative ……… $3 per unit

Selling ……………… $1 per unit

Fixed costs

Manufacturing ……….. $150,000

Administrative ……….. $ 80,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget for each of the possible production levels: 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.

(b) If KCI sells the toaster ovens for $15 each, how many units will it have to sell to make a profit of $250,000 before taxes?

larussa inc is preparing its annual budgets for the year 273279

Larussa Inc. is preparing its annual budgets for the year ending December 31, 2011.

Accounting assistants furnish the data shown below.

?

An accounting assistant has prepared the detailed manufacturing overhead budget and the selling and administrative expense budget. The latter shows selling expenses of $660,000 for product JB 50 and $360,000 for product JB 60, and administrative expenses of $540,000 for product JB 50 and $340,000 for product JB 60. Income taxes are expected to be 30%.

Instructions

Prepare the following budgets for the year. Show data for each product. You do not need to prepare quarterly budgets.

(a) Sales

(b) Production

(c) Direct materials not allocated to the products.)

(d) Direct labor

(e) Income statement

manning plumbing company is a newly formed company specializing 273289

Manning Plumbing Company is a newly formed company specializing in plumbing services for home and business. The owner, Peyton Manning, had divided the company into two segments: Home Plumbing Services and Business Plumbing Services. Each segment is run by its own supervisor, while basic selling and administrative services are shared by both segments. Peyton has asked you to help him create a performance reporting system that will allow him to measure each segment’s performance in terms of its profitability. To that end, the following information has been collected on the Home Plumbing Services segment for the first quarter of 2012.



Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the first quarter of 2012 for the Home Plumbing Services segment.

(b) Write a memo to Peyton Manning discussing the principles that should be used when preparing performancereports.

network computing devices inc was founded in 1988 in mountain 273332

Network Computing Devices Inc. was founded in 1988 in Mountain View, California. The company develops software products such as X terminals, Z mail, PC X ware, and related hardware products. Presented below is a discussion by management in its annual report.

NETWORK COMPUTING DEVICES, INC.

Management Discussion

The Company’s operating results have varied significantly, particularly on a quarterly basis, as a result of a number of factors, including general economic conditions affecting industry demand for computer products, the timing and market acceptance of new product introductions by the Company and its competitors, the timing of significant orders from large customers, periodic changes in product pricing and discounting due to competitive factors, and the availability of key components, such as video monitors and electronic subassemblies, some of which require substantial order lead times. The Company’s operating results may fluctuate in the future as a result of these and other factors, including the Company’s success in developing and introducing new products, its product and customer mix, and the level of competition which it experiences. The Company operates with a small backlog. Sales and operating results, therefore, generally depend on the volume and timing of orders received, which are difficult to forecast. The Company has experienced slowness in orders from some customers during the first quarter of each calendar year due to budgeting cycles common in the computer industry. In addition, sales in Europe typically are adversely affected in the third calendar quarter as many European customers reduce their business activities during the month of August.

Due to the Company’s rapid growth rate and the effect of new product introductions on quarterly revenues, these seasonal trends have not materially impacted the Company’s results of operations to date. However, as the Company’s product lines mature and its rate of revenue growth declines, these seasonal factors may become more evident. Additionally, the Company’s international sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, and an increase or decrease in the value of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies could make the Company’s products less or more competitive in those markets.

Instructions

(a) Identify the factors that affect the budgeting process at Network Computing Devices, Inc.

(b) Explain the additional budgeting concerns created by the international operations of the company.

on january 1 2011 the batista company budget committee has 273361

On January 1, 2011 the Batista Company budget committee has reached agreement on the following data for the 6 months ending June 30, 2011.

?

The ending raw materials and finished goods inventories at December 31, 2010, follow the same percentage relationships to production and sales that occur in 2011.Three pounds of raw materials are required to make each unit of finished goods. Raw materials purchased are expected to cost $4 per pound.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a production budget by quarters for the 6 month period ended June 30, 2011.

(b) Prepare a direct materials budget by quarters for the 6 month period ended June 30,2011.

organic pastures is a 400 acre farm on the outskirts of 273367

Organic Pastures is a 400 acre farm on the outskirts of the Kentucky Bluegrass, specializing in the boarding of broodmares and their foals. A recent economic downturn in the thoroughbred industry has led to a decline in breeding activities, and it has made the boarding business extremely competitive. To meet the competition, Organic Pastures planned in 2012 to entertain clients, advertise more extensively, and absorb expenses formerly paid by clients such as veterinary and blacksmith fees.

The budget report for 2012 is presented below. As shown, the static income statement budget for the year is based on an expected 21,900 boarding days at $25 per mare. The variable expenses per mare per day were budgeted: Feed $5, Veterinary fees $3, Blacksmith fees $0.30, and Supplies $0.55. All other budgeted expenses were either semi fixed or fixed.

During the year, management decided not to replace a worker who quit in March, but it did issue a new advertising brochure and did more entertaining of clients.1



1Data for this case are based on Hans Sprohge and John Talbott, ?oNew Applications for Variance Analysis,?? Journal of Accountancy (AICPA, New York), April 1989, pp. 137–141.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Based on the static budget report:

(1) What was the primary cause(s) of the loss in net income?

(2) Did management do a good, average, or poor job of controlling expenses?

(3) Were management’s decisions to stay competitive sound?

(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for the year based on boarding days.

(c) Based on the flexible budget report, answer the three questions in part (a) above.

(d) What course of action do you recommend for the management of Organic Pastures ?

accounting 417452

1. (TCOs 2 & 3) During the year, Zander is transferred by his employer from Seattle to San Diego. His moving expenses are not reimbursed and are as follows:

Cost of moving household furnishings

$9,000

Transportation

$1,000

Meals

$800

Lodging

$1,400

His qualified moving expenses are: (Points : 5)

$12,200.
$11,800.
$11,400.
$10,000.
None of the above

3. (TCOs 1, 2, 3, & 11) In satisfying the support test and the gross income test for claiming a dependency exemption, a scholarship received by the person being claimed is handled the same way for each test. Do you agree or disagree with this statement? Why? (Points : 10)

4. (TCOs 1, 2, 3, & 11) DeWayne is a U.S. citizen and resident. He spends much of each year in the United Kingdom on business. He is married to Petula, a U.K. citizen and resident of London. DeWayne has heard that it is possible that he can file a joint income tax return for U.S. purposes. If this is so, what are the constraints he should consider in making any such decision? (Points : 10)

accounitng fo rnon majors multiple choice 417458

1. As time passes, fixed assets, other than land, lose their capacity to provide useful services. To account for this decrease in usefulness, the cost of fixed assets is systematically allocated to expense through a process called (Points : 2)

equipment allocation.
depreciation. x
accumulation.
matching.

2. Deferred expenses (prepaid expenses) are items initially recorded as assets but are expected to become __________ over time. (Points : 2)

Liabilities
Assets
stockholders’ equity
Expenses

3. Accrued revenues would appear on the balance sheet as (Points : 2)

assets.
liabilities.
stockholders’ equity.
prepaid expenses.

4. The __________ is prepared with various sections, subsections, and captions that aid in its interpretation and analysis. (Points : 2)

accounting equation
retained earnings statement
intangible asset section
classified balance sheet

5. Unearned rent, representing rent paid for the next six months’ occupancy, would be reported on the landlord’s balance sheet as a(n) (Points : 2)

asset.
x liability.
capital stock.
revenue.

6. Current liabilities are usually due within (Points : 2)

one month or less.
one week or less.
one year or less.
more than one year.

7. Updating accrual accounting records prior to preparing financial statements is called (Points : 2)

the closing process.
converting to cash basis accounting.
x the adjustment process.
going concern adjustments.

8. A&M Co. provided services of $1,000,000 to clients on account. How does this transaction affect A&M’s accounts? (Points : 2)

Increase accounts receivable and cash by $1,000,000 each
Increase accounts receivable and revenues by $1,000,000 each
Increase accounts receivable and unearned revenues by $1,000,000 each
No effect at this time

9. On April 1, Tule, Inc. paid $3,600 for an insurance premium on a three year insurance policy. How does this transaction affect Tule’s accounts? (Points : 2)

Increase insurance expense and decrease cash by $3,600 each
x Increase prepaid insurance and decrease cash by $3,600 each
Increase unearned insurance and decrease cash by $3,600 each
No effect at this time

10. Using accrual accounting, revenue is recorded and reported only (Points : 2)

when cash is received without regard to when the services are rendered.
x when the services are rendered without regard to when cash is received.
when cash is received at the time services are rendered.
if cash is received after the services are rendered.

11. What method of accounting records transactions when revenue has been earned or the expense has been incurred but no cash has been exchanged? (Points : 1)

Earned
Cash
Double entry
Accrual

12. On April 1, Tule Inc. paid $3,600 for an insurance premium on a three year insurance policy. At the end of December, Tule’s fiscal year end, what should be the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account? (Points : 1)

$2,700
$3,600
$2,400
$0

13. Unearned revenue is what type of an account? (Points : 1)

Asset
Revenue
Stockholders’ equity
Liability

14. An example of an accrued revenue is __________. (Points : 1)

interest accrued on a note receivable
interest accrued on a note payable
unearned revenues
salaries owed to employees

15. During July, wages expense of $25,000 was reported on the income statement. If wages payable at July 1st was $2,000, and wages of $20,000 were paid during July, how much was accrued wages payable on July 31st? (Points : 1)

$2,000
$1,500
$7,000
$1,000

16. The financial statements are affected by which type(s) of adjustments?
AccrualsDeferrals (Points : 1)

Yes Yes
Yes No
No Yes
No No

17. Phil’s Lawn Service provides lawn care services to residential customers on a weekly or monthly basis. Occasionally, Phil’s Lawn Service will sell some of its used equipment or will rent some of its specialized equipment to other lawn service companies. Which of the following would be reported as “Revenues” on Phil’s income statement? (Points : 1)

Lawn service revenue.
Rental revenue.
Revenue from sales of equipment.
All of the above are correct.

18. Canyon Candy Co. began operations on January 1, 2011, by purchasing $2,000 of supplies. At the end of its first year of operations, $1,400 of supplies were on hand. Additionally, during the year, the company purchased $900 of supplies. The year end adjusting entry for Canyon would include a debit to supplies expense for: (Points : 1)

$1,500
$2,900
$500
$2,500

19. When reconciling net income to net cash flows from operating activities on the statement of cash flows, a decrease in accounts payable would __________. (Points : 1)

be added back
be subtracted
be shown in the financing activities section
be shown in the investing activities section

20. A&M Co. provided services of $1,000,000 to clients on account. How does this transaction affect A&M’s accounts? (Points : 1)

If using the accrual method, increase accounts receivable and cash by $1,000,000 each.
If using the accrual method, increase accounts receivable and revenues by $1,000,000 each.
If using the cash method, increase accounts receivable and unearned revenues by $1,000,000 each.
If using the cash method, increase cash and revenues by $1,000,000 each.

Assume the November transactions for Hoover Co. are as follows:

a. Provided services of $15,600 on account.
b. Purchased supplies on account $800.
c. Received cash of $10,900 from clients for services previously billed.
d. Paid $2,400 for a one year insurance policy.
e. Paid dividends of $1,500 to stockholders.

Record the transactions, using the integrated financial statement framework that follows:
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

21. For transaction A, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $15,600, Accounts Receivable is increased $15,600
Accounts Receivable is increased $15,600, Retained Earnings is increased $15,600
Accounts Payable is increased $15,600, Retained Earnings is increased $15,600
Cash is decreased $15,600, Accounts Receivable is decreased $15,600

22. For transaction B, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Supplies is decreased $800, Note Payable is decreased $800
Cash is decreased $800, Supplies is increased $$800
Supplies is increased $800, Accounts Payable is increased $800
Cash is decreased $800, Note Payable is decreased $800

23. For transaction C, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $10,900, Accounts Receivable is decreased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Capital Stock increased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Note Payable is decreased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Retained Earnings is increased $$10,900

24. For transaction D, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $2,400, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,400
Cash is decreased $2,400, Prepaid Insurance is increased $2,400
Cash is decreased $2,400, Retained Earnings is increased $2,400
Cash is increased $2,400, Equipment is decreased $2,400

25. For transaction E, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $1,500, Note Payable is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,500, Capital Stock is decreased $1,500
Cash is decreased $1,500, Retained Earnings is decreased $1,500
Cash is increased $1,500, Retained Earnings is increased $1,500

accounting for non majors multiple choice 417463

1. As time passes, fixed assets, other than land, lose their capacity to provide useful services. To account for this decrease in usefulness, the cost of fixed assets is systematically allocated to expense through a process called (Points : 2)

equipment allocation.
depreciation. x
accumulation.
matching.

2. Deferred expenses (prepaid expenses) are items initially recorded as assets but are expected to become __________ over time. (Points : 2)

Liabilities
Assets
stockholders’ equity
Expenses

3. Accrued revenues would appear on the balance sheet as (Points : 2)

assets.
liabilities.
stockholders’ equity.
prepaid expenses.

4. The __________ is prepared with various sections, subsections, and captions that aid in its interpretation and analysis. (Points : 2)

accounting equation
retained earnings statement
intangible asset section
classified balance sheet

5. Unearned rent, representing rent paid for the next six months’ occupancy, would be reported on the landlord’s balance sheet as a(n) (Points : 2)

asset.
x liability.
capital stock.
revenue.

6. Current liabilities are usually due within (Points : 2)

one month or less.
one week or less.
one year or less.
more than one year.

7. Updating accrual accounting records prior to preparing financial statements is called (Points : 2)

the closing process.
converting to cash basis accounting.
x the adjustment process.
going concern adjustments.

8. A&M Co. provided services of $1,000,000 to clients on account. How does this transaction affect A&M’s accounts? (Points : 2)

Increase accounts receivable and cash by $1,000,000 each
Increase accounts receivable and revenues by $1,000,000 each
Increase accounts receivable and unearned revenues by $1,000,000 each
No effect at this time

9. On April 1, Tule, Inc. paid $3,600 for an insurance premium on a three year insurance policy. How does this transaction affect Tule’s accounts? (Points : 2)

Increase insurance expense and decrease cash by $3,600 each
x Increase prepaid insurance and decrease cash by $3,600 each
Increase unearned insurance and decrease cash by $3,600 each
No effect at this time

10. Using accrual accounting, revenue is recorded and reported only (Points : 2)

when cash is received without regard to when the services are rendered.
x when the services are rendered without regard to when cash is received.
when cash is received at the time services are rendered.
if cash is received after the services are rendered.

Assume the November transactions for Hoover Co. are as follows:
a. Provided services of $15,600 on account.
b. Purchased supplies on account $800.
c. Received cash of $10,900 from clients for services previously billed.
d. Paid $2,400 for a one year insurance policy.
e. Paid dividends of $1,500 to stockholders.

Record the transactions, using the integrated financial statement framework that follows:
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

11. For transaction A, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $15,600, Accounts Receivable is increased $15,600
Accounts Receivable is increased $15,600, Retained Earnings is increased $15,600
Accounts Payable is increased $15,600, Retained Earnings is increased $15,600
Cash is decreased $15,600, Accounts Receivable is decreased $15,600

12. For transaction B, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Supplies is decreased $800, Note Payable is decreased $800
Cash is decreased $800, Supplies is increased $$800
Supplies is increased $800, Accounts Payable is increased $800
Cash is decreased $800, Note Payable is decreased $800

13. For transaction C, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $10,900, Accounts Receivable is decreased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Capital Stock increased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Note Payable is decreased $10,900
Cash is increased $10,900, Retained Earnings is increased $$10,900

14. For transaction D, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $2,400, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,400
Cash is decreased $2,400, Prepaid Insurance is increased $2,400
Cash is decreased $2,400, Retained Earnings is increased $2,400
Cash is increased $2,400, Equipment is decreased $2,400

15. For transaction E, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $1,500, Note Payable is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,500, Capital Stock is decreased $1,500
Cash is decreased $1,500, Retained Earnings is decreased $1,500
Cash is increased $1,500, Retained Earnings is increased $1,500

bam 306 priciples of economics 4 417483

1. Which type of retailer tends to be the most frequently shopped?

a. Convenience stores

b. Department stores

c. Supermarkets

d. Off price retailers

e. Superstores

2. As a result of the great success of corporate chains, many independent stores choose to band

together in either a voluntary chain or a(n) ________.

a. factory outlet

b. warehouse club

c. independent off price retailer

d. retailer cooperative

e. convenience cooperative

3. While all retailers would like to achieve ________ while charging ________, the two seldom

happen together.

a. low volume; low markups

b. high volume; cut rate markups

c. high volume; low markups

d. high volume; high markups

e. low volume; high markups

4. In store demonstrations, displays, contests and visiting celebrities are examples of ________.

a. agent promotions

b. sales promotions

c. product life cycling

d. franchises

e. broker promotions

5. In response to a(n) ________, many retailers have cut costs, used price promotions and added

new value pitches to their positioning.

a. down economy

b. up economy

c. shift in retail technology

d. dot com boom

e. dot com meltdown

6. The merging of consumers, products, prices and retailers is called ________.

a. consumer convergence

b. retail clustering

c. price merging

d. retail convergence

e. retail conglomeration

7. ________ buy mostly from producers and sell to retailers and industrial consumers.

a. Discount stores

b. Wholesalers

c. Independents

d. Factory outlets

e. Megaretailers

8. ________ are the largest group of wholesalers. The group can be divided into the two broad

types of full service and limited service.

a. Brokers

b. Specialty wholesalers

c. Agents

d. Manufacturer sellers

e. Merchant wholesalers

9. ________, or manufacturers’ representatives, represent a buyer or seller on a more permanent

basis.

a. Franchises

b. Retailers

c. Agents

d. Brokers

e. Intermediaries

10. 7 Eleven, Stop N Go, and Circle K, small stores that traditionally have had a primary market of

young, blue collar men, are examples of ________.

a. specialty stores

b. department stores

c. supermarkets

d. category killers

e. convenience stores

11. Which of the following types of retailers is most likely to practice everyday low pricing (EDLP)?

a. Convenience stores

b. Department stores

c. Discount stores

d. Full service retailers

e. Category killers

12. The promotion mix is the company’s primary communication activity; the marketing mix must

be coordinated for the greatest communication impact. What is NOT included in the entire

marketing mix?

a. Price

b. Promotion

c. Competitor

d. Place

e. Product

13. Marketing communicators must do all of the following EXCEPT ________.

a. choose the media through which to send a message

b. determine the communication objectives

c. collect feedback

d. identify the target audience

e. deliver products to the customer

14. In the AIDA model, the D stands for ________.

a. decoding

b. demand

c. desire

d. data

e. do it yourself

15. All of the following are strategies a marketer would use to lead consumers into making the fi nal

step toward a purchase EXCEPT which one?

a. Offer premiums

b. Offer special promotional prices

c. Use extensive “teaser” advertising

d. Offer rebates

e. email selected customers inviting them in for a visit

16. Moral appeals are directed to the audience’s sense of what is “right” and ________.

a. positive

b. affordable

c. traditional

d. proper

e. emotional

17. A marketer is making decisions about the headline, copy, illustration and colors for a print ad.

The marketer is making decisions about the ________.

a. message channel

b. message content

c. message format

d. message medium

e. message structure

18. Which promotional tool is most effective in building up buyers’ preferences, convictions and,

most importantly, actions?

a. Sales promotion

b. Public relations

c. Segmented advertising

d. Mass market advertising

e. Personal selling

19. Which promotional mix strategy directs marketing efforts toward fi nal consumers?

a. Pulse

b. Buzz

c. Pull

d. Push

e. Blitz

20. HP’s advertising agency assembles words and illustrations into an advertisement that will

convey the company’s intended brand message. In the communication process, HP is

____________.

a. messaging

b. encoding

c. decoding

d. sending

e. responding

21. A long standing charge against intermediaries is that they mark up prices beyond the

___________.

a. resale value

b. promotion cost

c. delivery charges

d. going market price

e. value of their services

22. Advertising “puffery” is a term for ________.

a. subliminal appeals to consumers

b. emotional appeals to consumers

c. a straightforward promotional message

d. innocent exaggeration for effect

e. value added promotions

23. The two major citizen movements to keep business in line are environmentalism and ________.

a. protectionism

b. antimonopoly legislation

c. interstate commerce

d. innovation

e. consumerism

24. All of the following are choices for internal and external “greening” and “beyond greening”

activities EXCEPT ________.

a. consumerism

b. new clean technology

c. product stewardship

d. pollution prevention

e. sustainability vision

25. The philosophy of ________ holds that a company’s marketing should support the best long run

performance of the marketing system.

a. consumer oriented marketing

b. environmentalism

c. the free enterprise system

d. the sustainable marketing concept

e. corporate social responsibility

accounting problem 417494

1. Use the below information to answer the following questions:
2007 2008
Sales $2,870 $3,080
Depreciation 413 413
Cost of goods sold 987 1121
Other Expenses 238 196
Interest 192 221
Cash 1505 1539
Accounts Receivables 1992 2244
Short term Notes Payable 291 273
Long term debt 5040 5880
Net fixed assets 12,621 12,922
Accounts Payable 1581 1533
Tax rate 34% 34%
Inventory 3542 3640
*Payout ratio 52% 52%

A. Create the Income Statements for 2007 and 2008 (including dividends paid and retained earnings).

B. Create the Balance Sheets for 2007 & 2008. Remember that the Owner’s Equity section. A+L+OE, so OE=total A total L.

C. Create the statement of Cash Flows for 2008.

D. What is the CFFA for 2008?

bam 306 principles of marketing 3 417504

1. What are the two ways that a company can obtain new products?

a. New product development and acquisition

b. Line extension and brand management

c. Market mix modifi cation and research and development

d. Service development and product extension

e. Internal development and brand management

2. Your fi rm added three new products earlier this year to increase variety for customers. Two of

them failed to reach even minimal sales. Which of the following is LEAST likely to have been

the cause of their failure?

a. Competitors fought back harder than expected.

b. The products were priced too high.

c. The product launch was ill timed.

d. The products were advertised incorrectly.

e. Research was too extensive.

3. Your fi rm asks you to consult external sources for new product ideas. All of the following are

common external sources EXCEPT ________.

a. trade shows and magazines

b. suppliers

c. competitors

d. customers

e. the fi rm’s executives

4. A ________ is the way consumers perceive an actual or potential product.

a. concept test

b. test market

c. product concept

d. product image

e. product idea

5. A review of the sales, costs and profi t projections for a new product to fi nd out whether they

satisfy the company’s objectives is called a ________.

a. proposal

b. product acceptance

c. marketing strategy development

d. business analysis

e. business feasibility plan

6. In order to get their new products to market more quickly, many companies are adopting a

faster, team oriented approach called ________.

a. sequential product development

b. phased in new product development

c. team based new product development

d. simulated new product development

e. market development

7. Some products that have entered the decline stage have been cycled back to the growth stage

through ________.

a. customer centered product development

b. promotion or repositioning

c. concept testing

d. business analysis

e. innovation management

8. In which stage of the PLC will promotional expenditures be high in an attempt to respond to

increasing competition?

a. Adoption

b. Decline

c. Maturity

d. Product development

e. Growth

9. Most products in the marketplace are in the ________ stage of the product life cycle.

a. growth

b. introduction

c. development

d. decline

e. maturity

10. Although test marketing costs can be high, they are often small when compared with ________.

a. the costs of a major mistake

b. the costs of idea generation

c. business analysis costs

d. research and development costs

e. prototype development costs

11. ________ uses buyers’ perceptions of what a product is worth, not the seller’s cost, as the key

to pricing.

a. Variable cost

b. Product image

c. Price elasticity

d. Customer value based pricing

e. Cost based pricing

12. Costs that do not vary with production or sales level are referred to as ________.

a. variable costs

b. fi xed costs

c. unit costs

d. total costs

e. target costs

13. Rent, electricity and executive salaries are examples of ________.

a. variable costs

b. marketing costs

c. accumulated costs

d. total costs

e. fi xed costs

14. Costs that vary directly with the level of production are referred to as ________.

a. target costs

b. unit costs

c. fi xed costs

d. variable costs

e. total costs

15. Break even pricing, or a variation called ________, is when the fi rm tries to determine the price

at which it will break even or make the profi t it is seeking.

a. value based pricing

b. customer based pricing

c. target return pricing

d. competition based pricing

e. fi xed cost pricing

16. Which of the following involves setting prices based on competitors’ strategies, costs, prices

and market offerings?

a. Competition based pricing

b. Market based pricing

c. Target return pricing

d. Added value pricing

e. Good value pricing

17. If demand changes greatly with a small change in price, we say the demand is ________.

a. variable

b. inelastic

c. elastic

d. fi xed

e. value based

18. By defi nition, ________ is used when a fi rm sells a product or service at two or more prices,

even though the difference in price is not based on differences in cost.

a. variable pricing

b. reference pricing

c. cost plus pricing

d. segmented pricing

e. fl exible pricing

19. The Sherman, Clayton and Robinson Patman Acts are all federal laws that were enacted to

curb the formation of ________.

a. monopolies

b. oligopolies

c. competitive markets

d. limited partnerships

e. international markets

20. The Robinson Patman Act seeks to prevent unfair ________ by ensuring that sellers offer the

same price terms to customers at a given price level.

a. treatment of small retailers

b. price discrimination

c. dynamic pricing

d. price collusion

e. marketing

21. A corporate VMS has the advantage of controlling the entire distribution chain through

________.

a. contracts among separate members

b. mass distribution

c. franchise agreements

d. a profi t maximizing strategic plan

e. single ownership

22. In a ________, two or more companies at one level join together to develop a new marketing

opportunity.

a. franchise

b. horizontal marketing system

c. corporate VMS

d. conventional distribution channel

e. multichannel distribution system

23. Which type of distribution is used when the producer wants more than one, but fewer than all,

of the intermediaries who are willing to carry its products?

a. Corporate

b. Intensive

c. Selective

d. Exclusive

e. Administered

24. Steve’s Physco Skates sells its products to Walmart, who then sells them to the consumer. This

is an example of a(n) ________.

a. direct marketing channel

b. indirect marketing channel

c. retailer channel

d. corporate vertical marketing system

e. producer channel

25. Which product will most likely be exclusively distributed?

a. BMW cars

b. Levi’s blue jeans

c. Bazooka bubble gum

d. Coca Cola

e. Prairie Farms yogurt

need help woth this asap accounting for non majors 417514

1. XYZ Company deposited $15,000 in a bank account in return for issuing shares in the corporation. This transaction would affect which two financial statement elements? (Points : 1)

Assets and stockholders’ equity
Assets and liabilities
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
None of these choices

2. If a $20,000 purchase of equipment for cash is INCORRECTLY recorded as an increase to equipment and as an increase to cash, at the end of the period, assets will: (Points : 1)

exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $10,000.
equal liabilities and stockholders’ equity.
exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $40,000.

3. A business pays cash to settle its phone bill. How would this be recorded? (Points : 1)

Decrease assets (cash) and decrease retained earnings (phone expense).
Increase assets (cash) and decrease retained earnings (phone expense).
Decrease assets (cash) and increase retained earnings (phone expense).
Increase assets (cash) and increase retained earnings (phone expense).

4. A utility bill was received on October 31, 2011, for services received during October 2011. The bill was paid in November 2011. Under the accrual basis of accounting, when would the utility expense be recorded? (Points : 1)

In October
When it was paid
In November
Not recorded at all

5. The payment of $10,000 for expenses was recorded by Spears Co. as an increase in cash of $10,000, and a decrease in retained earnings of $10,000. What is the effect of this error on the accounting equation? (Points : 1)

Total assets will exceed total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
Total assets will exceed total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $10,000.
Total assets will be less than total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
The error will not affect the accounting equation.

6. For EFG Co., the transaction “Purchase of store equipment with cash” would __________. (Points : 1)

increase total assets
decrease total assets
have no effect on total assets
increase expenses

7. Which of the following would result in no net change in assets? (Points : 1)

Stock issued for cash.
Expenses paid with cash.
Cash collected for fees earned.
Equipment purchased for cash.

8. A to Z Corporation engaged in the following transaction: “Issued a $30,000 note payable to borrow cash from the bank.” On the Statement of Cash Flows, the transaction would be classified as __________. (Points : 1)

Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
This transaction would not appear on the Statement of Cash Flows.

9. Payment of cash dividends are recorded as: (Points : 1)

a decrease in cash and an increase in expenses.
a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.
an increase in dividend expense and a decrease in cash.
a decrease in cash and a decrease in capital stock.

10. The income statement for August indicates net income of $50,000. The corporation also paid $10,000 in dividends during the same period. If there was a $20,000 beginning balance in stockholders’ equity, what is the ending balance in stockholders’ equity? (Points : 1)

$40,000
$70,000
$10,000
$60,000

1. For EFG Co., the transaction “Payment of interest expense” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets. X
decrease total assets.
have no effect on total assets.
increase stockholders’ equity.

2. Johnson, Inc. paid rent expense of $3,500 for the month of October. How are the accounts affected due to this transaction? (Points : 2)

Increase in cash $3,500 and increase in retained earnings $3,500
Increase in cash $3,500 and decrease in retained earnings $3,500
Decrease in cash $3,500 and decrease in retained earnings $3,500X
Decrease in cash $3,500 and increase in retained earnings $3,500

3. The basic financial statements do NOT include the (Points : 2)

income statement.
tax return X
balance sheet.
statement of cash flows.

4. For EFG Co., the transaction “Purchase of store equipment with cash” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets. X
decrease total assets.
have no effect on total assets.
decrease stockholders’ equity.

5. For EFG Co., the transaction “Payment of dividends” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets.
decrease total assets. X
have no effect on total assets.
increase stockholders’ equity.

6. Receiving cash for fees earned affects which financial statement elements? (Points : 2)

Assets only
Stockholders’ equity only
Assets and stockholders’ equity
Assets and liabilities X

7. Which of the following accounts is a stockholders’ equity account? (Points : 2)

Cash
Capital Stock X
Prepaid Insurance
Accounts Payable

8. Rush Corporation borrowed $25,000 from the bank. Which of the following accurately shows the effects of the transaction? (Points : 2)

Increase cash $25,000 and decrease notes payable $25,000
Increase cash $25,000 and increase notes payable $25,000 X
Decrease cash $25,000 and decrease notes payable $25,000
Decrease cash $25,000 and increase notes payable $25,000

9. The payment of a liability (Points : 2)

decreases assets and stockholders’ equity.
increases assets and decreases liabilities.
decreases assets and increases liabilities.
decreases assets and decreases liabilities. X

10. Stockholders’ Equity will be reduced by all of the following accounts EXCEPT: (Points : 2)

Revenues
Expenses
Dividends
All of the above reduce Stockholders’ Equity. X

Indicate the effect of each transaction during the month of October 2011 using the given accounting equation.

a. Opened a business bank account for Jones, Inc., with an initial deposit of $45,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Paid rent on the office building for the month, $2,000.
c. Received cash for fees earned of $5,000.
d. Purchased equipment, $7,000.
e. Paid salaries for the month, $1,000.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
Cash Equipment Notes Payable Capital Stock Retained Earnings

1. For transaction A, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $45,000, Capital Stock is increased $45,000
Cash is increased $45,000, Retained Earnings is increased $45,000
Note Payable is increased $45,000, Retained Earnings is increased $45,000
Cash is increased $45,000, Note Payable is increased $45,000

2. For transaction B, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $2,000, Note Payable is decreased $2,000
Cash is decreased $2,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,000
Note Payable is decreased $2,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,000
Cash is decreased $2,000, Note Payable is increased $2,000

3. For transaction C, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $5,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Capital Stock increased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Note Payable is decreased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Retained Earnings is increased $5,000

4. For transaction D, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $7,000, Equipment is increased $7,000
Cash is decreased $7,000, Equipment is increased $7,000
Cash is decreased $7,000, Retained Earnings is increased $7,000
Cash is increased $7,000, Equipment is decreased $7,000

5. For transaction E, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $1,000, Note Payable is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,000, Capital Stock is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $1,000
Cash is increased $1,000, Retained Earnings is increased $1,000

accounting 417520

1. XYZ Company deposited $15,000 in a bank account in return for issuing shares in the corporation. This transaction would affect which two financial statement elements? (Points : 1)

Assets and stockholders’ equity
Assets and liabilities
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
None of these choices

2. If a $20,000 purchase of equipment for cash is INCORRECTLY recorded as an increase to equipment and as an increase to cash, at the end of the period, assets will: (Points : 1)

exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $10,000.
equal liabilities and stockholders’ equity.
exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
exceed liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $40,000.

3. A business pays cash to settle its phone bill. How would this be recorded? (Points : 1)

Decrease assets (cash) and decrease retained earnings (phone expense).
Increase assets (cash) and decrease retained earnings (phone expense).
Decrease assets (cash) and increase retained earnings (phone expense).
Increase assets (cash) and increase retained earnings (phone expense).

4. A utility bill was received on October 31, 2011, for services received during October 2011. The bill was paid in November 2011. Under the accrual basis of accounting, when would the utility expense be recorded? (Points : 1)

In October
When it was paid
In November
Not recorded at all

5. The payment of $10,000 for expenses was recorded by Spears Co. as an increase in cash of $10,000, and a decrease in retained earnings of $10,000. What is the effect of this error on the accounting equation? (Points : 1)

Total assets will exceed total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
Total assets will exceed total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $10,000.
Total assets will be less than total liabilities and stockholders’ equity by $20,000.
The error will not affect the accounting equation.

6. For EFG Co., the transaction “Purchase of store equipment with cash” would __________. (Points : 1)

increase total assets
decrease total assets
have no effect on total assets
increase expenses

7. Which of the following would result in no net change in assets? (Points : 1)

Stock issued for cash.
Expenses paid with cash.
Cash collected for fees earned.
Equipment purchased for cash.

8. A to Z Corporation engaged in the following transaction: “Issued a $30,000 note payable to borrow cash from the bank.” On the Statement of Cash Flows, the transaction would be classified as __________. (Points : 1)

Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
This transaction would not appear on the Statement of Cash Flows.

9. Payment of cash dividends are recorded as: (Points : 1)

a decrease in cash and an increase in expenses.
a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.
an increase in dividend expense and a decrease in cash.
a decrease in cash and a decrease in capital stock.

10. The income statement for August indicates net income of $50,000. The corporation also paid $10,000 in dividends during the same period. If there was a $20,000 beginning balance in stockholders’ equity, what is the ending balance in stockholders’ equity? (Points : 1)

$40,000
$70,000
$10,000
$60,000

1. For EFG Co., the transaction “Payment of interest expense” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets. X
decrease total assets.
have no effect on total assets.
increase stockholders’ equity.

2. Johnson, Inc. paid rent expense of $3,500 for the month of October. How are the accounts affected due to this transaction? (Points : 2)

Increase in cash $3,500 and increase in retained earnings $3,500
Increase in cash $3,500 and decrease in retained earnings $3,500
Decrease in cash $3,500 and decrease in retained earnings $3,500X
Decrease in cash $3,500 and increase in retained earnings $3,500

3. The basic financial statements do NOT include the (Points : 2)

income statement.
tax return X
balance sheet.
statement of cash flows.

4. For EFG Co., the transaction “Purchase of store equipment with cash” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets. X
decrease total assets.
have no effect on total assets.
decrease stockholders’ equity.

5. For EFG Co., the transaction “Payment of dividends” would (Points : 2)

increase total assets.
decrease total assets. X
have no effect on total assets.
increase stockholders’ equity.

6. Receiving cash for fees earned affects which financial statement elements? (Points : 2)

Assets only
Stockholders’ equity only
Assets and stockholders’ equity
Assets and liabilities X

7. Which of the following accounts is a stockholders’ equity account? (Points : 2)

Cash
Capital Stock X
Prepaid Insurance
Accounts Payable

8. Rush Corporation borrowed $25,000 from the bank. Which of the following accurately shows the effects of the transaction? (Points : 2)

Increase cash $25,000 and decrease notes payable $25,000
Increase cash $25,000 and increase notes payable $25,000 X
Decrease cash $25,000 and decrease notes payable $25,000
Decrease cash $25,000 and increase notes payable $25,000

9. The payment of a liability (Points : 2)

decreases assets and stockholders’ equity.
increases assets and decreases liabilities.
decreases assets and increases liabilities.
decreases assets and decreases liabilities. X

10. Stockholders’ Equity will be reduced by all of the following accounts EXCEPT: (Points : 2)

Revenues
Expenses
Dividends
All of the above reduce Stockholders’ Equity. X

Indicate the effect of each transaction during the month of October 2011 using the given accounting equation.

a. Opened a business bank account for Jones, Inc., with an initial deposit of $45,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Paid rent on the office building for the month, $2,000.
c. Received cash for fees earned of $5,000.
d. Purchased equipment, $7,000.
e. Paid salaries for the month, $1,000.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
Cash Equipment Notes Payable Capital Stock Retained Earnings

1. For transaction A, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $45,000, Capital Stock is increased $45,000
Cash is increased $45,000, Retained Earnings is increased $45,000
Note Payable is increased $45,000, Retained Earnings is increased $45,000
Cash is increased $45,000, Note Payable is increased $45,000

2. For transaction B, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $2,000, Note Payable is decreased $2,000
Cash is decreased $2,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,000
Note Payable is decreased $2,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $2,000
Cash is decreased $2,000, Note Payable is increased $2,000

3. For transaction C, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $5,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Capital Stock increased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Note Payable is decreased $5,000
Cash is increased $5,000, Retained Earnings is increased $5,000

4. For transaction D, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is increased $7,000, Equipment is increased $7,000
Cash is decreased $7,000, Equipment is increased $7,000
Cash is decreased $7,000, Retained Earnings is increased $7,000
Cash is increased $7,000, Equipment is decreased $7,000

5. For transaction E, what is the effect of the transaction on the accounting equation? (Points : 3)

Cash is decreased $1,000, Note Payable is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,000, Capital Stock is decreased $1,000
Cash is decreased $1,000, Retained Earnings is decreased $1,000
Cash is increased $1,000, Retained Earnings is increased $1,000

accounting fifo lifo 417529

On May 10, Hudson Computing sold 74 Millennium laptop computers to Apex Publishers. At the date of this sale, Hudson’s perpetual inventory records included the following cost layers for the Millennium laptops:

Purchase Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Apr. 9 61 $ 1,200 $ 73,200
May 1 45 $ 1,600 72,000



Total on hand 106 $ 145,200







Prepare journal entries to record the cost of the 74 Millennium laptops sold on May 10, assuming that Hudson Computing uses the (Round your intermediate and final answer to nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

a.

Specific identification method (57 of the units sold were purchased on April 9, and the remaining units were purchased on May 1).

b. Average cost method.
c. FIFO method.
d. LIFO method.

acct 417554

11. Use the following information to answer the following questions.

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $60 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 3 Purchase 5 $30
May 10 Sale 3
May 17 Purchase 10 $34
May 20 Sale 6
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 10 $40

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the ending inventory value for the month of May using the FIFO inventory cost method.

Answer

a. $494
b. $520
c. $422
d. $502

12. A debit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Answer

a. is the normal balance for that account.
b. indicates that actual bad debt write offs have been less than what was estimated.
c. cannot occur if the percentage of receivables method of estimating bad debts is used.
d. indicates that actual bad debt write offs have exceeded previous provisions for bad debts.

13. Use the following information to answer the following questions.

The Boxwood Company sells blankets for $60 each. The following was taken from the inventory records during May. The company had no beginning inventory on May 1.

Date Product Z Units Cost
May 3 Purchase 5 $30
May 10 Sale 3
May 17 Purchase 10 $34
May 20 Sale 6
May 23 Sale 3
May 30 Purchase 10 $40

Assuming that the company uses the perpetual inventory system, determine the cost of merchandise sold for the sale of May 20 using the LIFO inventory cost method.

Answer

a. $240
b. $196
c. $124
d. $204

14. Which of the following accounts has a normal debit balance?

Answer

a. Sales Returns and Allowances
b. Interest Revenue
c. Sales
d. Accounts Payable

15. Merchandise with a sales price of $800 is sold on account with term 2/10, n/30. The journal entry to record the sale would include a

Answer

a. Credit to Sales for $800
b. Debit to Accounts Receivable for $784
c. debit to Cash for $800
d. Debit to Sales Discounts for $16

16. A retailer purchases merchandise with a catalog list price of $15,000. The retailer receives a 15% trade discount and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. How much cash will be needed to pay this invoice within the discount period?

Answer

a. $15,000
b. $12,495
c. $12,750
d. $14,700

17. Abbott Company uses the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts. Abbott estimates that 3% of net credit sales will be uncollectible. On January 1, 2010, the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $2,400. During 2010, Abbott wrote off accounts receivable totaling $1,800 and made credit sales of $100,000. There were no Sales Returns or Sales Discounts during the year. After the adjusting entry, the December 31, 2010, balance in the Bad Debt Expense would be

Answer

a. $7,200
b. $1,200
c. $3,000
d. $3,600

18.

During periods of increasing costs, the use of the FIFO method of costing inventory will yield an inventory amount for the balance sheet that is higher than LIFO would produce.

Answer True
False

problem 13 12 alden inc 417569

13.12 Alden, Inc., has hired you to review its internal controls for the purchase, receipt, storage, and issuance of raw materials. You observed the following:

‘ Raw materials, which consist mainly of high cost electronic components, are kept in a locked storeroom. Storeroom personnel include a supervisor and four clerks. All are well trained, competent, and adequately bonded. Raw materials are removed from the storeroom only upon written or oral authorization by a production supervisor.

‘ No perpetual inventory records are kept; hence, the storeroom clerks do not keep records for goods received or issued. To compensate, the storeroom clerks perform a physical inventory count each month.

‘ After the physical count, the storeroom supervisor matches the quantities on hand against a predetermined reorder level. If the count is below the reorder level, the supervisor enters the part number on a materials requisition list that is sent to the accounts payable clerk. The accounts payable clerk prepares a purchase order for each item on the list and mails it to the supplier from whom the part was last purchased.

‘ The storeroom clerks receive the ordered materials upon their arrival. The clerks count all items and verify that the counts agree with the quantities on the bill of lading. The bill of lading is then initialed, dated, and filed in the storeroom to serve as a receiving report.

Required

a. Describe the weaknesses that exist in Alden’s expenditure cycle.

b. Suggest control procedures to overcome the weaknesses noted in part a.

c. Discuss how those control procedures would be best implemented in an integrated ERP system using the latest developments in IT. (CPA Examination, adapted)

accounting 417580

14. (TCOs 2 & 11) Jojo decided to care for her Uncle Vince in his old age. Jojo was unaware that her uncle had securities valued with a fair market value of $75,000 at the time she started caring for her uncle. Uncle Vince made no promise to Jojo regarding payment for his care. However, the cost of comparable care in a nursing home would have been $50,000. Vince executed a will that gave the securities to Jojo. The fair market value of the securities at the time of Vince’s death was $175,000. Jojo was Vince’s favorite relative, and Jojo did not need the money. Jojo’s gross income from the receipt of the stock is: (Points : 5)

$0.
$50,000.
$75,000.
$175,000.
None of the above

15. (TCOs 2 & 11) Upon the recommendation of a physician, Roberto has a therapeutic pool installed in his personal residence. He suffers from severe muscular degeneration disease. If Roberto does not use the pool on a regular basis, his muscles will deteriorate to the point that he will be unable to walk. In connection with this pool, Roberto incurs and pays the following amounts during the current year:

Therapeutic pool and cost of installation

$11,000

Increase in utility bills due to the pool

$400

Cost of certified appraisal

$500

The pool has an estimated useful life of 5 years. The appraisal was to determine the value of Roberto’s residence with and without the pool. The appraisal states that the pool increased the value of Roberto’s residence by $4,000. Disregarding percentage limitations, how much of the above expenditures qualify for the medical expense deduction in the current year? (Points : 5)

$11,900
$11,400
$7,500
$7,400
None of the above

1. (TCO 1) The federal income tax applicable to corporations: (Points : 5)

requires the determination of adjusted gross income.
allows a deduction for dependency exemptions.
allows a deduction for personal exemptions.
allows a deduction for the standard deduction.
None of the above

2. (TCOs 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, & 10) Jude has a NLTCG of $25,000 and a NSTCL of $30,000. What is Jude’s 2011 capital loss deduction if Jude’s adjusted gross income for 2011 (before considering capital asset transactions) is $90,000? (Points : 5)

$90,000
$30,000
$25,000
$3,000
None of the above

3. (TCOs 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, & 10) Paris is a cash basis landlord. An earthquake destroyed one of his residential rental buildings. Even though the lease required the tenants (all cash basis) to continue to pay rent, Paris accepts a payment of $2,000 in full cancellation of the lease. As a result of these events: (Points : 5)

Paris has $2,000 of ordinary income.
Paris has $2,000 of capital gain.
Paris’s tenants have $2,000 of ordinary income.
Paris has a $2,000 capital loss.
None of the above

4. (TCOs 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, & 10) Equity considerations can be used to justify: (Points : 5)

the foreign tax credit.
the credit for child and dependent care expenses.
the deduction for charitable contributions.
the tax treatment of prepaid subscription revenue.
None of the above

5. (TCOs 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, & 10) During the current year, Carolyn is supported as follows:

Percent of Support

Torie (a son)

24%

Brad (a son)

10%

Rosemary (a daughter)

27%

Jerome (unrelated but a good
friend of the family)

15%

Self support

24%

During the year, Carolyn lives with Torie in his home for 10 months and in her home for 2 months. Under a multiple support agreement, who could qualify for the dependency deduction for Carolyn? (Points : 5)

Torie or Brad
Torie or Rosemary
Torie, Brad, or Jerome
Torie, Brad, Rosemary, or Jerome
None of the above

6. (TCOs 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, & 10) Which statement is true with respect to letter rulings? (Points : 5)

They are issued by the Regional Office of the IRS.
They deal with completed transactions.
They may be requested for any area of taxation.
They are issued at the request of the taxpayer.
None of the above

7. (TCO 6 ) Which, if any, of the following property is subject to A?§ 1245 recapture? (Points : 5)

Land
Residential real estate
Goodwill subject to amortization
Nonresidential real estate for which straight line depreciation is used that is placed in service after 1980 and before 1987
None of the above

8. (TCO 6) Leopard Corporation has ordinary income from operations of $50,000, net long term capital gain of $20,000, and net short term capital loss of $30,000. What is the taxable income for 2011? (Points : 5)

$40,000
$47,000
$50,000
$70,000
None of the above

9. (TCO 6) During 2011, taxpayers decided to sell their residence, which had a basis of $350,000. They had owned and occupied the residence for 8 years. To make it more attractive to prospective buyers, they had it painted in April at a cost of $5,000 and paid for the work immediately. They sold the house in May for $500,000. Broker’s commissions and other selling expenses amounted to $30,000. They purchased a new residence in June for $250,000. What is the realized gain? (Points : 5)

$150,000
$120,000
$115,000
$0
None of the above

10. (TCO 6) Herbert exchanges a business machine, which has an adjusted basis of $40,000, for a new machine worth $40,000. In addition, he receives cash of $10,000. What is the recognized gain or loss and the basis of the new machine? (Points : 5)

$0 and $10,000
$0 and $50,000
$10,000 and $50,000
$10,000 and $40,000
None of the above

11. (TCOs 2, 6, & 11) Claudia sells property for a sales price of $170,000. In addition, Karma, the buyer, pays $5,000 in property taxes that had accrued during the year while the property was still legally owned by Claudia. Claudia paid $9,000 in commissions and $1,500 in legal fees connected with the sale of her property. What is the amount realized by Claudia from the sale of her property? (Points : 5)

$175,000
$173,500
$170,000
$164,500
$159,500

acctt 417595

19. Which of the following methods is appropriate for a business whose inventory consists of a relatively small number of unique, high cost items?

Answer

a. FIFO
b. average
c. LIFO
d. specific identification

20. Sales to customers who use bank credit cards such as MasterCard and Visa are usually recorded by a

Answer

a. debit to Bank Credit Card Sales, debit to Credit Card Expense, and a credit to Sales
b. debit to Cash and a credit to Sales
c. debit to Cash, credit to Credit Card Expense, and a credit to Sales
d. debit to Sales, debit to Credit Card Expense, and a credit to Cash

21. The collection of an account that had been previously written off under the allowance method of accounting for uncollectibles

Answer

a. requires a correcting entry for the period in which the account was written off.
b. does not affect net income in the period it is collected.
c. will increase net income in the period it is collected.
d. will decrease net income in the period it is collected.

22. If the direct write off method of accounting for uncollectible receivables is used, what general ledger account is credited to write off a customer’s account as uncollectible?

Answer

a. Interest Expense
b. Uncollectible Accounts Expense
c. Accounts Receivable
d. Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

23.

Dorman Co. sold merchandise to Smith Co. on account, $18,000, terms 2/15, net 45. The cost of the merchandise sold is $15,500. Dorman Co. issued a credit memo for $1,750 for merchandise returned that originally cost $1,400. The Smith Co. paid the invoice within the discount period. What is amount of
net sales from the above transactions? Answer

a. $15,925
b. $16,250
c. $13,818
d. $14,100

24. Merchandise subject to terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, is sold on account to a customer for $25,000. The seller paid freight costs of $2,000 and issued a credit memo for $10,000 prior to payment. What is the amount of the cash discount allowable?

Answer

a. $130
b. $170
c. $250
d. $150

25. A check drawn by a company for $270 in payment of a liability was recorded in the journal as $720. What entry is required in the company’s accounts?

Answer

a. debit Cash; credit Accounts Receivable
b. debit Accounts Receivable; credit Cash
c. debit Cash; credit Accounts Payable
d. debit Accounts Payable; credit Cash

26.

On October 1, Black Company receives a 6% interest bearing note from Reese Company to settle a $20,000 account receivable. The note is due in six months. At December 31, Black should record interest revenue of Answer

a. $1,200
b. $300
c. $600
d. $0

27.

Two methods of accounting for uncollectible accounts are the Answer

a. allowance method and the net realizable method.
b. allowance method and the accrual method.
c. direct write off method and the allowance method.
d. direct write off method and the accrual method.

ethical decision making issues in managerial accounting 417609

Ethical decision making: Issues in Managerial Accounting

Outlines: ØIntroduction ·Definition ·Boundaries ØLiterature on Ethics in Managerial Accounting ØThe Issues ·Examples ·Violations

  • Research Design
  • Participants
  • Analysis
  • Results
  • Limitations
  • Conclusions
  • References
Document Preview:

The research paper should be a minimum of 9 pages (excluding the title and reference pages) (Font: Times New Roman, Font size: 12, Margins: 1 inch, Line Spacing: 1.15). Integrate Real world example in your writing. Ethical decision making: Issues in Managerial Accounting Outlines: Introduction Definition Boundaries Literature on Ethics in Managerial Accounting The Issues Examples Violations Research Design Participants Analysis Results Limitations Conclusions References???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

e x 20 1 417638

During 2009 (its first year of operations) and 2010, Batali Foods used the FIFO inventory costing method for both financial reporting and tax purposes. At the beginning of 2011, Batali decided to change to the average method for both financial reporting and tax purposes.

Income components before income tax for 2011, 2010, and 2009 were as follows ($ in millions)

Revenues $420 (20011), $390 (2010), $380 (2009)

Cost of goods sold(FIFO) 46 , 40 , 38

Cost of goods sold(average) 62 , 56 , 52

Operating expenses 254 , 250 , 242

Dividends of $20 million were paid each year. Batali’s fiscal year ends December 31.

Required:

1.Prepare the journal entry at the beginning of 2011 to record the change in accounting principle. (Ignore income taxes.)

2.Prepare the 2011’2010 comparative income statements.

3.Determine the balance in retained earnings at January 1, 2010, as Batali reported previously using the FIFO method.

4.Determine the adjustment to the January 1, 2010, balance in retained earnings that Batali would include in the 2011’2010 comparative statements of retained earnings or retained earnings column of the statements of shareholders’ equity to revise it to the amount it would have been if Batali had used the average method.

psmith fed tax 417658

During 2011, Doris paid the following interest charges:

Home mortgage $6,000
On loan to purchase a new car $1,500
On student loan $800

If Doris itemizes her deductions for 2011, then the amount deductible for interest expense as an itemized deduction is: (Points : 5)

$1,500.
$6,000.
$7,500.
$8,300.
None of the above

4. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) Isabel’s income from her investments for the current year is as follows:

Gain on the sale of Rosebud Country school bonds $3,000
Interest on Rosebud County school bonds $8,500
Interest received during the year on U.S. government bonds $6,500
Total $18,000

Isabel’s gross income from the above is: (Points : 5)

$3,000.
$9,500.
$15,000.
$18,000.
None of the above

5. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) Under the terms of a divorce agreement, Troy is to pay his wife Brook $1,200 per month. The payments are to be reduced to $800 per month when their 12 year old child reaches age 18. During the current year, Troy paid $14,400 under the agreement. Assuming all of the other conditions for alimony are satisfied, Troy can deduct from gross income (and Brook must include in gross income) as alimony: (Points : 5)

$0.
$4,800.
$9,600.
$14,400.
None of the above

6. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) During the current year, Harold sustained a serious injury in the course of his employment. As a result of the injury sustained, he received the following payments during the year:

Unemployment compensation $7,000
Worker’s compensation $5,000
Reimbursement from his employer’s accident and health plan for medical expenses paid by Harold $1,000
Damages for physical personal injuries $8,000

What is the amount to be included in Harold’s gross income for the current year? (Points : 5)

$5,000
$6,000
$7,000
$8,000
None of the above

7. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) IRA contributions should be treated as: (Points : 5)

a deduction from AGI subject to the 2 percent of AGI floor.
a deduction from AGI not subject to the 2 percent of AGI floor.
not deductible.
deductible for AGI.
None of the above

8. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) Which of the following items would be a miscellaneous itemized deduction on Schedule A of Form 1040 not subject to the 2% of AGI floor? (Points : 5)

Appraisal fees
Impairment related work expenses of a handicapped person
Hobby losses
Professional dues
None of the above

9. (TCOs 7, 8, & 9) Matt and Shanekwa, ages 45 and 44, respectively, file a joint tax return for 2011. They provided all of the support for their 24 year old son, who had $2,500 of gross income. Their 23 year old daughter, a full time student until her graduation on June 14, 2011, earned $6,000, which was 45% of her total support during 2011. Her parents provided the remaining support. Matt and Shanekwa also provided total support for Shanekwa’s father who is a citizen and life long resident of Portugal. How many personal and dependency exemptions can Matt and Shanekwa claim on their 2011 income tax return? (Points : 5)

Five
Four
Three
Two
None of the above

10. (TCOs 2, 8, & 9) If a vacation home is used primarily for personal use (rented for less than 15 days per year), which of the following is true? (Points : 5)

All expenses are deductible from AGI.
Expenses must be allocated between rental and personal use.
Depreciation is allowed as a deduction.
All rental income is excluded from AGI.
None of the above

11. (TCOs 2, 8, & 9) Victoria, whose husband died in December 2009, maintained a household in which her dependent son lives. What is Victoria’s filing status for the tax year 2011? (Points : 5)

Surviving spouse
Single
Married, filing separately
Head of household
None of the above

12. (TCOs 2 & 11) Which, if any, of the following transactions will not accelerate the gain on an installment note? (Points : 5)

Gift of the installment note
Sale of the installment note
Cancellation of the installment note
Transfer between spouses
None of the above

13. (TCOs 2 & 11) Tyler has a 30% interest in the XY partnership. In the current year, the partnership has sales of $2,000,000, cost of goods sold of $1,300,000, and $300,000 in operating expenses. Tyler withdrew $150,000 from the partnership during the year, but his partner did not withdraw anything. (Points : 5)

Tyler must report $120,000 gross income from the partnership for the year.
The partnership is taxable on $400,000 for the year, and Tyler must include $120,000 in gross income.
Tyler must report $150,000 gross income from the partnership for the year.
Tyler is not required to recognize any income from the partnership for the year.
None of the above

14. (TCOs 2 & 11) Jojo decided to care for her Uncle Vince in his old age. Jojo was unaware that her uncle had securities valued with a fair market value of $75,000 at the time she started caring for her uncle. Uncle Vince made no promise to Jojo regarding payment for his care. However, the cost of comparable care in a nursing home would have been $50,000. Vince executed a will that gave the securities to Jojo. The fair market value of the securities at the time of Vince’s death was $175,000. Jojo was Vince’s favorite relative, and Jojo did not need the money. Jojo’s gross income from the receipt of the stock is: (Points : 5)

$0.
$50,000.
$75,000.
$175,000.
None of the above

15. (TCOs 2 & 11) Upon the recommendation of a physician, Roberto has a therapeutic pool installed in his personal residence. He suffers from severe muscular degeneration disease. If Roberto does not use the pool on a regular basis, his muscles will deteriorate to the point that he will be unable to walk. In connection with this pool, Roberto incurs and pays the following amounts during the current year:

Therapeutic pool and cost of installation $11,000
Increase in utility bills due to the pool $400
Cost of certified appraisal $500

The pool has an estimated useful life of 5 years. The appraisal was to determine the value of Roberto’s residence with and without the pool. The appraisal states that the pool increased the value of Roberto’s residence by $4,000. Disregarding percentage limitations, how much of the above expenditures qualify for the medical expense deduction in the current year? (Points : 5)

$11,900
$11,400
$7,500
$7,400
None of the above

accounting help 417663

In 2013, the Marion Company purchased land containing a mineral mine for $1,900,000. Additional costs of $753,000 were incurred to develop the mine. Geologists estimated that 460,000 tons of ore would be extracted. After the ore is removed, the land will have a resale value of $100,000.

To aid in the extraction, Marion built various structures and small storage buildings on the site at a cost of $186,300. These structures have a useful life of 10 years. The structures cannot be moved after the ore has been removed and will be left at the site. In addition, new equipment costing $86,800 was purchased and installed at the site. Marion does not plan to move the equipment to another site, but estimates that it can be sold at auction for $4,000 after the mining project is completed.

In 2013, 56,000 tons of ore were extracted and sold. In 2014, the estimate of total tons of ore in the mine was revised from 460,000 to 547,500. During 2014, 86,000 tons were extracted, of which 66,000 tons were sold.

Required:
1.

Compute depletion and depreciation of the mine and the mining facilities and equipment for 2013 and 2014. Marion uses the units of production method to determine depreciation on mining facilities and equipment. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

2013 2014

Depletion of mineral mine

Depreciation of structure

Depreciation of equiptment

2.

Compute the book value of the mineral mine, structures, and equipment as of December 31, 2014. (Do not round intermediate calculations.)

Book Value

Mineral mine

Structures

Equiptment

act 417674

28. When the allowance method is used to account for uncollectible accounts, Bad Debts Expense is debited when

Answer

a. a sale is made.
b. management estimates the amount of uncollectibles.
c. an account becomes bad and is written off.
d. a customer’s account becomes past due.

29. Addison, Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. The following is information about one inventory item for the month of September:

Sep. 1 Inventory 20 units at $20
4 Sold 10 units
10 Purchased 30 units at $25
17 Sold 20 units
30 Purchased 10 units at $30

If Addison uses FIFO, the cost of the ending merchandise inventory on September 30 is Answer

a. $650
b. $750
c. $700
d. $800

30.

Addison, Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. The following is information about one inventory item for the month of September:

Sep. 1 Inventory 20 units at $20
4 Sold 10 units
10 Purchased 30 units at $25
17 Sold 20 units
30 Purchased 10 units at $30

If Addison uses LIFO, the cost of the ending merchandise inventory on September 30 is Answer

a. $750
b. $700
c. $800
d. $650

31. Using the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible receivables, the entry to reinstate a specific receivable previously written off would include a

Answer

a. debit to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
b. debit to Accounts Receivable
c. credit to Accounts Receivable
d. credit to Bad Debt Expense

32. Journal entries based on the bank reconciliation are required in the company’s accounts for

Answer

a. bank errors
b. outstanding checks
c. deposits in transit
d. book errors

33.

The Corbit Corp. sold merchandise for cash, $7,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $3,950. The journal entry(s) to record this transaction would be Answer

a. Cash 7,200
Merchandise Inventory 7,200

Cost of Merchandise Sold 3,950
Sales 3,950

b. Cash 7,200
Sales 7,200

Cost of Merchandise Sold 3,950
Merchandise Inventory 3,950

c. Cash 7,200
Sales 7,200

Cost of Merchandise Sold 7,200
Merchandise Inventory 7,200

d. Cash 3,950
Sales 3,950

Cost of Merchandise Sold 3,950
Merchandise Inventory 3,950

34. The entry to record the return of merchandise from a customer would include a

Answer

a. credit to Sales
b. debit to Sales
c. debit to Sales Returns and Allowances
d. credit to Sales returns and Allowances

accounting help probable transactions simple 417683

3.

Selected accounts of Kosar Manufacturing Company at year end appear below:

DR I CR

RAW MATERIALS INVENTORY

(a) 40,000 I (d) 35,000

WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY

(d) 35,000 I (g) 140,000

(e) 75,000

(f) 100,000

FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY

(g) 140,000 I (h) 120,000

COST OF GOODS SOLD

(h) 120,000 I

FACTORY LABOR

(b) 110,000 I (e) 110,000

MANUFACTURING OVERHEAD

(c) 75,000 I (f) 100,000

(e) 35,000

Instructions

Explain the probable transaction that took place for each of the items identified by letters in the accounts. For example:

(a) Raw materials costing $40,000 were purchased.

accounting 417688

3. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) Which of the following qualifies for the medical expense deduction? (Points : 5)

Funeral expenses
Toiletries
Nonprescription drugs
Weight reduction programs related to obesity
None of the above

4. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) During the year, Marcus went from Sacramento to Portland, Maine. After six days of business meetings, he took three days of vacation to go sightseeing. Marcus’ expenses for the trip are as follows:

Airfare

$600

Lodging (9 days x $80)

$720

Meals (9 days x $70)

$630

Airport limo

$60

Marcus’ deduction is: (Points : 5)

$1,150.
$1,350.
$1,695.
$2,010.
None of the above

5. (TCOs 3, 4, 5, & 7) In 2010, Colin, the sole proprietor of a video rental store, pays a $4,000 premium for medical insurance for himself and his family. Lynette, one of Colin’s employees, pays a $2,000 premium for a medical insurance policy for herself. Which of the following statements is TRUE? (Points : 5)

Colin may deduct $4,000 as a deduction from AGI.
Colin may deduct $4,000 as a deduction for AGI.
Lynette may deduct $1,400 as a deduction for AGI.
Lynette may deduct $2,000 as a deduction for AGI.
None of the above

accounting quiz 1 chance 35 minutes to do only pelase help urgent 417207

1.Expenses that are incurred directly or entirely in connection with the sale of merchandise are classified as (Points : 2)

selling expenses.
general expenses.
other expenses.
administrative expenses.

2.Sometimes a(n) __________ is offered to buyers as a means of encouraging them to pay before the end of the credit period. (Points : 2)

accounts receivable
credit card
sales discount
cash sale

3.Generally, the revenue account for a merchandising business is entitled (Points : 2)

Sales.
Net Sales.
Gross Sales.
Gross Profit.

4.The difference between sales and cost of merchandise sold for a merchandising business is (Points : 2)

sales.
net sales.
gross sales.
gross profit.

5.The credit terms of a sale are normally indicated on a(n) (Points : 2)

purchase order.
invoice.
bill of lading.
account receivable.

6.Gross profit is determined by subtracting the cost of merchandise sold from what? (Points : 2)

The cost of merchandise purchased
Fees earned
Accounts receivable
Net sales

7.Multiple step income statements show: (Points : 2)

gross profit but not income from operations.
neither gross profit nor income from operations.
both gross profit and income from operations.
income from operations but not gross profit.

8.Inventory shortage is recorded when (Points : 2)

merchandise is returned by a buyer.
merchandise purchased from a seller is incomplete or short.
merchandise is returned to a seller.
there is a difference between a physical count of inventory and inventory records.

9.Dig, Inc. had the following merchandise transactions in October:

Purchases

$50,000

Purchase returns

$ 4,000

Purchase discounts

$ 1,000

Transportation in

$ 2,000

What is the total cost of merchandise purchased for Dig, Inc.? (Points : 2)

$50,000
$47,000
$52,000
$48,000

10.Which of the following would be subtracted from gross profit to reach operating income? (Points : 2)

Operating expenses
Other expenses
Income taxes
All of these

review 417231

1.<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

Which of the following is not a basic question that each economy must answer?

A) Which resources are scarce?

B) For whom shall the goods be produced?

C) How shall goods be produced?

D) What goods shall be produced?

2.

If Kim can either wash 10 cars or wax 2 cars during a day, and Vince can either wash 17 cars or wax 2 cars during a day, then according to the law of comparative advantage,

A) Vince’s opportunity cost of waxing a car is less than Kim’s.

B) their total output can be expanded if Kim specializes in waxing and Vince in washing.

C) their total output can be expanded if Kim specializes in washing and Vince in waxing.

D) it would be impossible for Vince and Kim to increase their total output through specialization and mutual exchange.

3.

The following question(s) relate(s) to the material in the addendum to Chapter 2. Use the production possibilities data for Lebos and Slavia below to answer the question(s).

Table 2 4

Lebos Slavia Food Clothing Food Clothing 0 8 0 8 2 6 1 6 4 4 2 4 6 2 3 2 8 0 4 0

Refer to Table 2 4. Which of the following is correct?

A) In Lebos, the opportunity cost of producing one unit of food is equal to one unit of clothing.

B) In Slavia, the opportunity cost of producing one unit of food is equal to two units of clothing.

C) The opportunity cost of producing food in Lebos is less than the opportunity cost of producing food in Slavia.

D) All of the above are correct.

4.

Which of the following is NOT true of opportunity cost?

A) Opportunity costs are subjective because they depend upon how the decision maker values his or her options.

B) Opportunity costs are only the monetary costs of lost options.

C) Opportunity costs are the highest valued alternative sacrificed in order to choose an option.

D) Only the decision maker can determine his or her opportunity costs for any particular action.

5.

Assume the demand curve for cookies is downward sloping. If the price of cookies falls from $1.50 to $1.25 per dozen,

A) the demand for cookies will fall.

B) the demand for cookies will rise.

C) a larger quantity of cookies will be demanded.

D) a smaller quantity of cookies will be demanded.

6.

The price of a good will tend to rise when

A) there is excess demand for the good.

B) there is excess supply of the good.

C) demand for the good decreases.

D) the supply of the good increases.

7.

If we observe an increase in the price of a good and a decrease in the amount of the good bought and sold, this could be explained by

A) an increase in the supply of the good.

B) an increase in the demand for the good.

C) a decrease in the demand for the good.

D) a decrease in the supply of the good.

8.

Suppose demand increases and supply increases. Which of the following will happen?

A) Equilibrium price will rise, fall, or stay the same while equilibrium quantity will decrease.

B) Equilibrium price will rise, fall, or stay the same while equilibrium quantity will increase.

C) Equilibrium quantity will rise, fall, or stay the same and equilibrium price will increase.

D) Equilibrium quantity will rise, fall, or stay the same while equilibrium price will decrease.

E) The change in equilibrium price and quantity cannot be determined.

9.

The invisible hand principle, as developed by Adam Smith in The Wealth of Nations, states that

A) government control over economic activity is essential for the talents of individuals to be directed toward their highest valued use.

B) the economic wealth of a nation is determined by a nation’s holdings of precious metals, such as gold and silver.

C) public policy should prohibit domestic producers from selling their goods to foreigners.

D) competitive markets will bring individual self interest and the public interest into harmony.

10.

<?xml:namespace prefix = v ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:vml” />

Refer to Figure 3 18. Which area represents the increase in consumer surplus when the price falls from P1 to P2?

A) ABD

B) ACF

C) DEF

D) BCFD

11.

According to the law of supply, as the price of a good decreases

A) buyers will buy more of the good.

B) sellers will produce more of the good.

C) buyers will buy less of the good.

D) sellers will produce less of the good.

12.

If the demand for a good increases, which of the following will generally occur in a market setting?

A) The price of the good will decrease.

B) The supply of the good will increase.

C) The quantity supplied will increase.

D) Producer profits will fall.

13.

Other things constant, as the price of a resource increases,

A) the quantity of the resource demanded falls.

B) the quantity of the resource supplied falls.

C) the price of the product the resource helps to produce falls.

D) there is less of an incentive for users of the resource to find substitute resources.

14.

If a government price control succeeds in affecting price, it can be expected to lead to a corresponding

A) decrease in the quantity of sales only if the price is forced down.

B) decrease in the quantity of sales if the price is forced down and an increase in the volume of sales if the price is forced up.

C) decrease in the quantity of sales whether the price is forced up or down.

D) increase in the quantity of sales whether the price is forced up or down.

15.

When a price floor is imposed above the equilibrium price of a commodity,

A) quantity demanded will be greater than quantity supplied for the good.

B) the quantity demanded by consumers will be greater than at the equilibrium price.

C) a shortage of the good will develop.

D) a surplus of the good will develop.

16.

If Heather’s tax liability increases from $10,000 to $13,500 when her income increases from $30,000 to $40,000, her marginal tax rate is

A) 33 percent.

B) 35 percent.

C) 50 percent.

D) 60 percent.

17.

According to the Laffer curve,

A) an increase in tax rates will always cause tax revenues to increase.

B) when marginal tax rates are high, an increase in tax rates is likely to cause tax revenues to increase.

C) when marginal taxes are low, an increase in tax rates will probably cause tax revenues to decline.

D) when marginal tax rates are high, a reduction in tax rates may increase tax revenue.

18.

When the government increased its involvement in rescue efforts on Mount McKinley (the tallest peak in North America), the number of mountain climbing deaths

A) decreased slightly.

B) decreased substantially.

C) remained the same.

D) increased.

19.

Use the figure below to answer the following question(s).

Refer to Figure 4 7. The supply curve S1 and the demand curve D indicate initial conditions in the market for gasoline. A $.60 per gallon excise tax on gasoline is levied, which shifts the supply curve from S1 to S2. Imposing the tax causes the equilibrium price of gasoline to increase from

A) $.80 to $1.40.

B) $.80 to $1.50.

C) $.90 to $1.50.

D) $.90 to $1.40.

20.

Refer to Figure 4 7. The supply curve S1 and the demand curve D indicate initial conditions in the market for gasoline. A $.60 per gallon excise tax on gasoline is levied, which shifts the supply curve from S1 to S2. Which of the following states the actual burden of the tax?

A) $.50 for buyers and $.10 for sellers

B) $.50 for sellers and $.10 for buyers

C) The entire $.60 falls on sellers.

D) The entire $.60 falls on buyers.

21.

Use the figure below to answer the following question(s).

Refer to Figure 4 9. The market for gasoline was initially in equilibrium at point b and a $.40 excise tax is illustrated. Which of the following states the actual burden of the tax?

A) $.20 for buyers and $.20 for sellers

B) $.30 for buyers and $.10 for sellers

C) The entire $.40 falls on sellers.

D) The entire $.40 falls on buyers.

22.

Refer to Figure 4 17. Suppose a price floor of $7.00 is imposed. As a result,

A) buyers’ total expenditure on the good decreases by $20.00.

B) the supply curve will shift to the left so as to now pass through the point (Q = 40, P = $7.00).

C) the quantity of the good demanded decreases by 20 units.

D) the price of the good continues to serve as the rationing mechanism.

23.

Refer to Figure 4 25. The equilibrium price before the tax is imposed is

A) P1

B) P2

C) P3

D) impossible to determine from the figure.

24.

Black markets that operate outside the legal system are often characterized by

A) low profits for suppliers.

B) lower opportunity costs for suppliers and buyers.

C) decreased prices.

D) the use of violence as a means of settling disputes.

25.

Suppose external costs are present in a market which results in the actual market price of $50 and market output of 800 units. How does this outcome compare to the efficient, ideal equilibrium?

A) The efficient outcome would be greater than 800 units.

B) The efficient outcome would be less than 800 units.

C) The efficient outcome would also be 800 units.

D) The efficient price would be less than $50.

26.

Suppose external costs are present in a market which results in the actual market price of $84 and market output of 320 units. How does this outcome compare to the efficient, ideal equilibrium?

A) The efficient price would be higher than $84.

B) The efficient price would be lower than $84.

C) The efficient price would also be $84.

D) The efficient output would be greater than 320 units.

27.

Compared to ideal economic efficiency, when the production of a good generates external benefits, competitive markets will likely result in an output that is too

A) large and a price that is too high.

B) large and a price that is too low.

C) small and a price that is too high.

D) small and a price that is too low.

28.

A car sells at different prices at different dealerships in a local market. If a consumer has imperfect information about the price of a car at each dealership, he should

A) always gather all available information about prices.

B) gather information about prices until the expected marginal benefit of more information equals the marginal cost of gathering it.

C) gather information about prices only if it can be gathered without cost.

D) ignore information about prices because it is irrelevant to making an “optimally imperfect” decision.

29.

The problem created when it is difficult to exclude nonpaying customers is called the

A) consumption payment link problem.

B) free rider problem.

C) public sector dilemma.

D) asymmetric information problem.

30.

Which of the following provides the best summary of the basic idea of public choice analysis?

A) Public choice analysis applies the principles of economics to political science topics.

B) Public choice analysis takes the principles of political science and applies them to the traditional topics of economics.

C) Public choice analysis uses the principle of majority rule to determine the efficiency of an action.

D) Public choice analysis indicates there is a sharp distinction between economic and political topics.

31.

In a representative democracy, government action results from the

A) choices of voters.

B) legislative decisions by politicians.

C) political action of organized interest groups.

D) complex interaction of all of the above.

32.

Which of the following increases the political power of special interest groups and makes counterproductive government action more likely?

A) logrolling and pork barrel legislation

B) the rational ignorance effect

C) public goods

D) both a and b, but not c

33.

Use the figure below to answer the following question(s).

Figure 6 1 illustrates the four possibilities of the distribution of costs and benefits among voters for a government project. For which type would the government most likely fail to undertake many projects that would be considered efficient or productive (in other words, do too few of them relative to economic efficiency)?

A) type A

B) type B

C) type C

D) type D

34.

Despite many differences, the market and public sectors are similar in which one of the following respects?

A) In both sectors, income (or power) is distributed on the basis of the same criterion.

B) Consumers in the market sector and voters in the public sector are equally well informed.

C) Voluntary exchange, rather than compulsion, is characteristic of both sectors.

D) It will be costly to use scarce goods, whether through the private or the public sector.

35.

Studies indicate that the demand for fresh tomatoes is much more elastic than the demand for salt. These findings reflect that

A) tomatoes are a necessity while salt is a luxury.

B) it takes longer for consumers to adjust to a change in the price of salt than to a change in the price of tomatoes.

C) salt will not spoil as easily as fresh tomatoes.

D) more good substitutes exist for fresh tomatoes than for salt.

36.

The principle of diminishing marginal utility says that

A) as more of a good or service is consumed, demand will decrease.

B) as more of a good or service is consumed, the price will rise.

C) the marginal utility of additional units consumed will increase.

D) the marginal utility of additional units consumed will decline.

37.

The demand curve for a good is very unlikely to be perfectly vertical because

A) scarcity and limited income restrict the ability of consumers to afford goods as they become very expensive.

B) as the price of a good rises to high enough levels, the incentive for other suppliers to invent new substitutes for the good increases.

C) consumers generally do not care about the price of the goods they consume.

D) both a and b are true.

38.

As the period for firms to expand output is lengthened, the elasticity of the market supply curve will

A) approach zero.

B) increase.

C) decrease.

D) remain the same since time does not affect the elasticity of market supply.

39.

The price elasticity of demand for automobiles measures the responsiveness of

A) consumer purchases to a change in the price of automobiles.

B) consumer purchases to a change in the quality of automobiles.

C) supplier production levels to a change in the price of automobiles.

D) consumer purchases of automobiles to a change in their income.

40.

Which of the following is true regarding the price elasticity of demand?

A) Demand is generally more elastic in the long run than in the short run.

B) Along a single demand curve, demand elasticity decreases as you move down the curve (to lower prices).

C) A demand curve that is flatter (has a less steep slope) is relatively more elastic than a demand curve that has a steeper slope.

D) All of the above are true.

41.

Essay (Answer ONE of the Following Question)

‘ Economists maintain that the price of a product has no effect on demand. How can this be true?

‘ National defense is considered a public good because there appears to be no limits to the nonrivalry in consumption characteristic, and exclusion of nonpayers is impossible. Are there any other goods that so perfectly meet both public goods criteria?

‘ Congressman Localstuff always votes for a balanced budget amendment to the U.S. Constitution. He also always votes for spending bills supported by the leadership of his political party. Is this rational?

accounting 417257

1)

Giga Stuff, Inc. has a number of divisions. One division, Sophistosand, makes a component, component X, that is used in the manufacture of DVD players. Another division, Videostuff, makes DVD players that use component X and needs 60,000 units of component X per year. Sophistosand incurs the following costs for one unit of component X:

Direct materials $0.30
Direct labor 0.15
Variable overhead 0.70
Fixed overhead 1.00
Total $2.15

Sophistosand has capacity to make 400,000 units of component X per year, but due to a soft market, only plans to produce and sell 320,000 units next year. Videostuff currently buys component X from an outside supplier for $2.50 each (the same price that Sophistosand receives). Refer to Figure 12 4. Assume that Sophistosand and Videostuff have agreed on a transfer price of $2.20. What is the total benefit for Sophistosand?

$18,000
$132,000
$63,000
$69,000
$81,000

2)
Giga Stuff, Inc. has a number of divisions. One division, Sophistosand, makes a component, component X, that is used in the manufacture of DVD players. Another division, Videostuff, makes DVD players that use component X and needs 60,000 units of component X per year. Sophistosand incurs the following costs for one unit of component X:

Direct materials $0.30
Direct labor 0.15
Variable overhead 0.70
Fixed overhead 1.00
Total $2.15

Sophistosand has capacity to make 400,000 units of component X per year, but due to a soft market, only plans to produce and sell 320,000 units next year. Videostuff currently buys component X from an outside supplier for $2.50 each (the same price that Sophistosand receives). Refer to Figure 12 4. Assume that Sophistosand and Videostuff have agreed on a transfer price of $2.20. What are the total cost savings for Videostuff?

$18,000
$132,000
$63,000
$69,000
$81,000

managerial accounting help please 3 questions 417272

  1. 1.) The Hamblen Company has budgeted production for the next five quarters as follows:

    2004 2004 2004 2004 2005

    Quarter …………… First Second Third Fourth First

    Production in units … 10,000 12,000 16,000 14,000 11,000

    Four pounds of raw materials are required for each unit produced. Raw materials on hand at the start of the year totals 4,000 lbs. The raw materials inventory at the end of each quarter should equal 10% of the next quarter’s raw material needs.

    The raw materials inventory at the end of 2004 is expected to be:

    2.) The Martin Company had a finished goods inventory of 55,000 units on January 1. It’s projected sales for the next four months were: January 200,000 units; February 180,000 units; March 210,000 units; and April 230,000 units. The Martin Company wishes to maintain a desired ending finished goods inventory of 20% of the following months sales.What would be the budgeted production for February?

    3.) During December, Johnson company had the following cash information: The ending November cash balance is budgeted to be $40,000. Cash receipts are $840,000, and cash disbursements are $890,000 during December. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000. What is the minimum cash loan that must be planned to be borrowed from the Bank during December?

calclate net present value acct rate of return arr payback period 417277

1. The Hilltop Corporation is considering (as of 1/1/08) the replacement of an old machine that is currently being used. The old machine is fully depreciated but can be used by the corporation through 2011. If Hilltop decides to replace the old machine, Baker Company has offered to purchase it for $50,000 on the replacement date. The disposal value of the old machine would be zero at the end of 2011.

If the replacement occurs, a new machine would be acquired from Busby Industries on January 2, 2008. The purchase price of $500,000 for the new machine would be paid in cash at the time of replacement. Due to the increased efficiency of the new machine, estimated annual cash savings of $150,000 would be generated through 2011, the end of its expected useful life. The new machine is expected to have a zero disposal price at the end of 2011.

If Hilltop requires investments to earn an 8 percent return, the net present value for replacing the old machine with the new machine is?

Referring to above problem, the payback period to replace the old machine with the new machine is

a. 3.3 years. b. 3.0 years. c. 4.0 years. d. 2.5 years

2. A company is contemplating the purchase of a new machine that will cost $31,500 and generate additional revenues of $23,250 a year. Additional costs, other than depreciation, will be $12,000 a year. The estimated life of the machine will be 7 years, and there will be no salvage value.

What is the ARR?

3. Lamar Company is studying a project that would have an eight year life and require a $1,600,000 investment in equipment. At the end of the eight years, the project would terminate and the equipment would have no salvage value. Below are estimates of the annual revenues and costs associated with the project for the eight year period.

Estimate annual sales revenue $3M

Estimated annual variable costs, 60% of sales revenue

Estimated annual fixed costs $700,000

The straight line depreciation method would be used.

The company requires an ARR of at least 18% on all investments.

What is the ARR for this investment?

4.More Toppings, Inc. is considering the purchase of a new oven in their pizzaria. It will cost $105,000 and generate annual cash inflows of $15,000.

What is the payback period

(PLEASE SHOW WORK AND HOW THE PROBLEM WAS FIGURED)

PLEASE LET ME KNOW IF YOU NEED THE NPV PERIOD OR PERCENTAGE AMOUNTS

taxation 417284

1.

Individual proprietors report their business income and deductions on:

A.

Form 1065

B.

Form 1120S

C.

Schedule C

D.

Schedule A

E.

Form 1041

2.

According to the Internal Revenue Code A?§162, deductible business expenses must be one of the following?

A.

incurred for the production of investment income

B.

ordinary and necessary

C.

minimized

D.

appropriate and measurable

E.

personal and justifiable

3.

Which of the following expenditures is most likely to be deductible for a construction business?

A.

A fine for a zoning violation.

B.

A tax underpayment penalty.

C.

An “under the table” payment to a government representative to obtain a better price for raw materials.

D.

A payment to a foreign official to expedite an application for a business permit.

E.

An arm’s length payment to a related party for emergency repairs of a sewage line.

4.

Paris operates a talent agency as a sole proprietorship, and this year she incurred the following expenses in operating her talent agency. What is the total deductible amount of these expenditures?
$1,000 dinner with a film producer where no business was discussed
$500 lunch with sister Nicky where no business was discussed
$700 business dinner with a client but Paris forgot to keep any records (oops!)
$900 tickets to the opera with a client following a business meeting

A.

$450

B.

$900

C.

$1,100

D.

$1,200

E.

$800

5.

Don operates a taxi business, and this year one of his taxis was damaged in a traffic accident. The taxi was originally purchased for $32,000 and the adjusted basis was $2,000 at the time of the accident. The taxi was repaired at a cost of $2,500 and insurance reimbursed Don $700 of this cost. What is the amount of Don’s casualty loss deduction?

A.

$1,300.

B.

$2,500.

C.

$1,800.

D.

$2,000.

E.

Don is not eligible for a casualty loss deduction.

6.

Taffy Products uses the accrual method and reports on a calendar year. On July 1st of this year Taffy paid $48,000 for warehouse rent and $18,000 for insurance on the contents of their warehouse. The rent and insurance covers the next 12 months. What amount, if any, can Taffy deduct for rent and insurance this year?

7.

Which of the following would be considered an improvement rather than a routine maintenance?

A.

Oil change

B.

Engine overhaul

C.

Wiper blade replacement

D.

Air filter change

8.

Which of the following depreciation conventions are not used under MACRS?

A.

Full month

B.

Half year

C.

Mid month

D.

Mid quarter

E.

All of these are used under MACRS

9.

The MACRS recovery period for automobiles and computers is:

A.

3 years

B.

5 years

C.

7 years

D.

10 years

E.

None of these

10.

Jasmine started a new business in the current year. She incurred $10,000 of start up costs. How much of the start up costs can be immediately expensed for the year?

A.

$0

B.

$2,500

C.

$5,000

D.

$10,000

E.

None of these

11.

Janey purchased machinery on April 8th of the current year. The relevant costs for the year are as follows: machinery for $10,000, $800 shipping, $50 for delivery insurance, $500 for installation, $750 for sales tax, $150 for the annual tune up, and $200 of property taxes (an annual tax on business property). What is Janey’s tax basis for the machinery?

12.

During August of the prior year, Julio purchased an apartment building that he used as a rental property. The basis was $1,400,000. Calculate the maximum depreciation expense during the current year?

accounting accounting 417299

1. Jasmine Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,400 units, April 13,700, May 16,400 and June 21,500. Jasmine Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 20% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May?

2. Toimi has forecast sales for the next three months as follows: July 4,800 units, August 6,300 units, September 8,300 units. Toimi’s policy is to have an ending inventory of 45% of the next month’s sales needs on hand. July 1 inventory is projected to be 2,100 units. Selling and administrative costs are budgeted to be $24,000 per month plus $6 per unit sold. What are budgeted selling and administrative expenses for July?

3. Brimson has forecast production for the next three months as follows: July 5,500 units, August 6,900 units, September 7,900 units. Monthly manufacturing overhead is budgeted to be $17,700 plus $13 per unit produced. What is budgeted manufacturing overhead for July?

accounting 202 help 417324

1. A manufacturing company prepays its insurance coverage for a three year period. The premium for the three years is $2,700 and is paid at the beginning of the first year. Eighty percent of the premium applies to manufacturing operations and 20% applies to selling and administrative activities. What amounts should be considered product and period costs respectively for the first year of coverage?

Option A

Option B

Option C

Option D

2. Hayne Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated machine hours for the upcoming year. Data for the most recently completed year appear below:

The predetermined overhead rate for the recently completed year was closest to:

$7.89

$30.95

$24.52

$32.41

accounting 417329

1. Medford Tooling uses a standard cost system to account for the costs of its one product. Standards are 4 sheets of 1/2 inch steel at $110 per sheet and 14 hours of labor at a standard wage rate of $13. During July, Medford Tooling produced 600 units. Materials purchased and used totaled 2,540 sheets at a total cost of $268,850. Payroll totaled $112,930 for 8,770 hours worked.

……..(With the explanation please)…………..

a. Direct materials price variance

b. Direct materials quantity variance

c. Direct labor rate variance

d. Direct labor efficiency variance

2. Superior Coop uses a standard cost system to account for the costs of its one product. Variable overhead is applied using direct labor hours. Standards allowed for each unit are 3 hours of labor at a variable overhead rate of $10. During November, Superior Coop produced 2300 units. Payroll totaled $97,780 for 7,140 hours worked. Variable overhead incurred total $73,230.

a. Variable overhead rate variance

b. Variable overhead efficiency variance

3. Ashland South Shore Co. produces thingamajigs and uses a standard cost system. Variable overhead is applied using direct labor hours. Standards allowed for each unit are 5.2 hours of labor at a standard variable overhead rate of $6.50. During December, Ashland South Shore Co. produced 3,100 thingamajigs. Materials purchases totaled 20,800 pounds at a total cost of $224,780. Materials usage totaled 20,970 pounds. Payroll totaled $183,660 for 17,140 hours worked. Variable overhead incurred totaled $109,140.

a. Variable overhead rate variance

b. Variable overhead efficiency variance

Can you please provide the explanation as well??

acc 202 help 417355

1. A partial listing of costs incurred at Backes Corporation during November appears below:

The total of the period costs listed above for November is:

$244,000

$321,000

$348,000

$77,000

2. The following cost data pertain to the operations of Mancia Department Stores, Inc., for the month of February:

The Brentwood Store is just one of many stores owned and operated by the company. The Shoe Department is one of many departments at the Brentwood Store. The central warehouse serves all of the company’s stores.

What is the total amount of the costs listed above that are NOT direct costs of the Brentwood Store?

$152,000

$92,000

$79,000

$38,000

accounting 417360

1. After posting the second closing entry to the income summary account, the balance will be equal to

Answer

a.

zero

b.

revenues for the period

c.

retained earnings

d.

the net income or (loss) for the period

Question 2

1.

All of the following below are needed for the calculation of straight line depreciation except

Answer

a.

units produced

b.

residual value

c.

estimated life

d.

cost

Question 3

1.

On which financial statement will Income Summary be shown?

Answer

a.

retained earnings statement

b.

balance sheet

c.

income statement

d.

none of these

Question 4

1.

All companies must use a calendar year as their fiscal year.

Answer True
False

Question 5

1.

A company has merchandise inventory costing $175 on hand at the beginning of the year. During the period, merchandise costing $635 is purchased. At year end, merchandise inventory costing $160 is on hand. The cost of merchandise sold for the year is

Answer

a.

$970

b.

$300

c.

$650

d.

$620

Question 6

1.

The process of transferring the cost of metal ores and other minerals removed from the earth to an expense account is called

Answer

a.

deferral

b.

depletion

c.

amortization

d.

depreciation

Question 7

1.

The journal entry a company records for the issuance of bonds when the contract rate and the market rate are the same is

Answer

a.

debit Cash, credit Premium on Bonds Payable and Bonds Payable

b.

debit Bonds Payable, credit Cash

c.

debit Cash, credit Bonds Payable

d.

debit Cash and Discount on Bonds Payable, credit Bonds Payable

Question 8

1.

Fixed assets are ordinarily presented in the balance sheet

Answer

a.

at current market values

b.

at replacement costs

c.

in a separate section along with intangible assets

d.

at cost less accumulated depreciation

Question 9

1.

If the market rate of interest is 10%, a $10,000, 12%, 10 year bond that pays interest semiannually would sell at an amount

Answer

a.

that cannot be determined.

b.

less than face value.

c.

greater than face value.

d.

equal to the face value.

Question 10

1.

The specific identification inventory method should be used when the inventory consists of identical, low cost units that are purchased and sold frequently.

Answer

True
False

Question 11

1.

Computer equipment was acquired at the beginning of the year at a cost of $65,000 that has an estimated residual value of $3,000 and an estimated useful life of 5 years. Determine the 2nd year’s depreciation using straight line depreciation.

Answer

a.

$13,000

b.

$12,400

c.

$24,800

d.

$26,000

Question 12

1.

If bonds are issued at a discount, it means that the

Answer

a.

market interest rate is lower than the contractual interest rate.

b.

financial strength of the issuer is suspect.

c.

market interest rate is higher than the contractual interest rate.

d.

bondholder will receive effectively less interest than the contractual rate of interest.

Question 13

1.

Bonds with a face amount $1,000,000, are sold at 98. The entry to record the issuance is

Answer

a.

Cash 980,000
Bonds Payable 980,000

b.

Cash 980,000
Discount on Bonds Payable 20,000
Bonds Payable 1,000,000

c.

Cash 980,000
Premium on Bonds Payable 20,000
Bonds Payable 1,000,000

d.

Cash 1,000,000
Premium on Bonds Payable 20,000
Bonds Payable 980,000

Question 14

1.

For accounting purposes, stated value is treated the same way as par value.

Answer True
False

Question 15

1.

Which of the following is not an asset?

Answer

a.

inventory

b.

owner’s equity

c.

cash

d.

investments

answers to accounting ii quiz questions part 4 417370

1. Question :

Discontinued operations need to be treated separately from regular business operations on the ________.

CORRECT income statement

2. Question :

A technique for evaluating a series of financial statement data over a period of time is called ________ analysis.

CORRECT horizontal

3. Question :

The cash from operations to current liabilities ratio is a ________ ratio.

CORRECT liquidity

4. Question :

The return on assets ratio is a ________ ratio. 10. ________

CORRECT profitability

5. Question :

Ratios used to determine whether or not a company can earn a satisfactory rate of return are ________.

CORRECT profitability ratios

6. Question :

Ratios used to determine whether or not a company’s stock is a good investment are ________

CORRECT market indicators

7. Question :

Profitability ratios are used to determine whether or not a ________.

CORRECT company can earn a satisfactory rate of return

8. Question :

Investors diversify in order to ________.

CORRECT minimize the risks of stock ownership

9. Question :

Comprehensive income is the total ________.

CORRECT of all items that affect shareholders’ equity except transactions with the owners

10. Question :

If a company plans to hold debt securities until they mature, they are called ________.

CORRECT held to maturity securities

11. Question :

Earnings per share equals ________.

CORRECT net income divided by the weighted average shares of outstanding common stock

12. Question :

X Company began selling appliances this year. The company president has decided not to record any warranty expense or estimated warranty liability because the company’s products are so good that he does not expect to have to make any warranty repairs. This accounting choice would be considered ________.

CORRECT aggressive

13. Question :

W Company just bought ten new cars for its salespeople to use. The company expects to use these cars for two or three years and then replace them. If W Company calculates straight line depreciation using an estimated useful life of three years, this accounting choice would be considered ________.

CORRECT aggressive

14. Question :

Tastee Bakery just bought a new delivery truck, which the bakery plans to use for four or five years before replacing it. If the company calculates straight line depreciation using an estimated useful life of five years, this accounting choice would be considered ________.

CORRECT aggressive

15. Question :

How can you tell if a company is taking big bath charges this year?

CORRECT Compare this year’s income statement with several previous years’, looking for unusual expenses or write offs.

16. Question :

Which of the following may indicate a company is setting up a cookie jar reserve this year?

CORRECT The current year’s estimated warranty liability is significantly larger than prior years’.

17. Question :

Which of the following is evidence of a company’s positive ethical climate?

CORRECT The company’s executives require all new employees to attend an ethics workshop.

18. Question :

Who is responsible for a company’s internal controls?

CORRECT the CEO and CFO

19. Question : Which of the following is an indication of good corporate governance?

CORRECT A company has a board of directors with highly qualified members who are independent of the management team.

20. Question :

IFRS are more ________.

CORRECT principle based than U.S. GAAP

answers to accounting ii quiz part 3 417380

1. Question :

Which stock offers shareholders preference in receiving dividends?

CORRECT preferred stock

2. Question :

Paid in capital includes ________

CORRECT capital stock and additional paid in capital

3. Question :

Stock that has been sold and then repurchased by the issuing corporation is called ________ stock.

CORRECT treasury

4. Question :

The owners of common stock do NOT have the specific right to ________.

CORRECT receive dividends automatically each year

5. Question :

AZ Best, Inc.’s corporate charter allows it to issue 1,500,000 shares of common stock. In 2011, its first year of business, the company sold 200,000 shares of common stock. In 2011, the company bought back 5,000 shares to be held as treasury stock. At December 31, 2011, how many shares of common stock are authorized?

CORRECT 1,500,000 shares

6. Question :

AZ Best, Inc.’s corporate charter allows it to issue 1,500,000 shares of common stock. In 2011, its first year of business, the company sold 200,000 shares of common stock. In 2011, the company bought back 5,000 shares to be held as treasury stock. At December 31, 2011, how many shares of common stock are outstanding?

CORRECT 195,000 shares

7. Question :

Cartier, Inc.’s corporate charter authorizes it to sell 1 million shares of $0.50 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2011, the company had sold 500,000 shares for $4 each. Cartier has 20,000 shares of treasury stock that cost $100,000. On the December 31, 2011 balance sheet, the number of shares issued is ________ shares.

CORRECT 500,000

8. Question : Distributions of a corporation’s earnings to its shareholders are called ________.

CORRECT dividends

9. Question :

The date of payment is the date ________.

CORRECT when cash is actually paid to the shareholders

10. Question :

Noncumulative preferred stock means that ________.

CORRECT the board of directors has the option to decide whether past unpaid dividends will be paid to preferred shareholders

11. Question :

Dividends ________.

CORRECT are the distribution of profits

12. Question :

When a company buys shares of its own stock and holds them as treasury stock, ________.

CORRECT its earnings per share will increase

13. Question :

A corporation’s distribution of new shares of stock to the corporation’s current shareholders is called a ________.

CORRECT stock dividend

14. Question :

Retained earnings is the ________.

CORRECT beginning retained earnings plus net income minus dividends

15. Question :

Team Shirts issued 20,000 shares of stock for $20 per share. This transaction increased Cash $400,000 and increased ________ $400,000.

CORRECT Paid in capital

16. Question :

PDG Corporation had a return on equity of 18%. Beginning and ending shareholders’ equity for the corporation were $570,000 and $560,000 respectively. There were 350,000 common shares and no preferred shares outstanding. What was net income for the year?

CORRECT $101,700

17. Question :

Use the following information for Equitable, Inc. to answer the following question(s). Equitable issued no new common stock and had 100,000 common shares issued and outstanding during 2011. Equitable has no preferred stock.

Net income for the year ended, December 31, 2011$370,000

Retained earnings, December 31, 2010$280,000

Retained earnings, December 31, 2011$360,000

Total shareholders’ equity at December 31, 2011$725,000

Total liabilities at December 31, 2010$105,000

Total liabilities at December 31, 2011$385,000

Total assets at December 31, 2010$750,000

What was return on equity for the year ended December 31, 2011?

CORRECT 54.0%

18. Question :

Earnings per share is ________.

CORRECT net income, minus preferred dividends, divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding

19. Question :

A measure of how well a company produces income with the amount of investment that common shareholders have made in the company is the ________

CORRECT return on equity

20. Question :

Risks associated with owning an investment in a company’s stock include the risk that ________.

CORRECT the company will not be successful

chapter 15 hw accounting 216 417390

1. Recent financial statements for Madison Company follow:

Madison Company

Balance Sheet

June 30

Assets

Current assets:

Cash $ 24,000

Accounts receivable, net 260,000

Merchandise inventory 380,000

Prepaid expenses 8,000

Total current assets 672,000

Plant and equipment, net 820,000

Total assets $ 1,492,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Liabilities:

Current liabilities $ 270,000

Bonds payable, 8% 360,000

Total liabilities 630,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock, $5 par value $ 150,000

Retained earnings 712,000

Total stockholders’ equity 862,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 1,492,000

Madison Company

Income Statement

For the Year Ended June 30

Sales $ 2,290,000

Cost of goods sold 1,170,000

Gross margin 1,120,000

Selling and administrative expenses 580,000

Net operating income 540,000

Interest expense 28,800

Net income before taxes 511,200

Income taxes 153,360

Net income $ 357,840

Account balances at the beginning of the company’s fiscal year were: accounts receivable, $190,000; and inventory, $280,000. All sales were on account.

Assume that Madison Company paid dividends of $3.35 per share during the year. Also assume that the company’s common stock had a market price of $73.00 per share on June 30 and that there was no change in the number of outstanding shares of common stock during the fiscal year.

Required:

Compute the following:

1.

Earnings per share. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share $

2.

Dividend payout ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place.Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Dividend payout ratio %

3. Dividend yield ratio. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Dividend yield ratio %

4.

Price earnings ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place.)

Price earnings ratio

2. Comparative financial statements for Heritage Antiquing Services for the fiscal year ending December 31 appear on the following page. The company did not issue any new common or preferred stock during the year. A total of 700 thousand shares of common stock were outstanding. The interest rate on the bond payable was 10%, the income tax rate was 40%, and the dividend per share of common stock was $0.75. The market value of the company’s common stock at the end of the year was $21. All of the company’s sales are on account.

Heritage Antiquing Services

Comparative Balance Sheet

(dollars in thousands)

This Year Last Year

Assets

Current assets:

Cash $ 1,100 $ 1,350

Accounts receivable, net 10,600 7,700

Inventory 12,100 11,400

Prepaid expenses 780 650

Total current assets 24,580 21,100

Property and equipment:

Land 10,700 10,700

Buildings and equipment, net 45,844 40,767

Total property and equipment 56,544 51,467

Total assets $ 81,124 $ 72,567

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable $ 19,000 $ 18,400

Accrued payables 1,080 870

Notes payable, short term 160 160

Total current liabilities 20,240 19,430

Long term liabilities:

Bonds payable 9,300 9,300

Total liabilities 29,540 28,730

Stockholders’ equity:

Preferred stock 1,000 1,000

Common stock 700 700

Additional paid in capital 4,000 4,000

Total paid in capital 5,700 5,700

Retained earnings 45,884 38,137

Total stockholders’ equity 51,584 43,837

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 81,124 $ 72,567

Heritage Antiquing Services

Comparative Income Statement and Reconciliation

(dollars in thousands)

This Year Last Year

Sales $ 74,000 $ 66,000

Cost of goods sold 41,000 34,000

Gross margin 33,000 32,000

Selling and administrative expenses:

Selling expenses 11,300 10,500

Administrative expenses 6,900 6,900

Total selling and administrative expenses 18,200 17,400

Net operating income 14,800 14,600

Interest expense 930 930

Net income before taxes 13,870 13,670

Income taxes 5,548 5,468

Net income 8,322 8,202

Dividends to preferred stockholders 50 380

Net income remaining for common stockholders 8,272 7,822

Dividends to common stockholders 525 525

Net income added to retained earnings 7,747 7,297

Retained earnings, beginning of year 38,137 30,840

Retained earnings, end of year $ 45,884 $ 38,137

Required:

Compute the following financial ratios for common stockholders for this year:

1.

Gross margin percentage. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Gross margin percentage %

2.

Earnings per share of common stock. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings $ per share

3.

Price earnings ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place.)

Price earnings ratio

4.

Dividend payout ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Dividend payout ratio %

5.

Dividend yield ratio. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Dividend yield ratio %

6.

Return on total assets. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Return on total assets %

7.

Return on common stockholders’ equity. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Return on common stockholders’ equity %

8.

Book value per share. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Book value

$ per share

bam 306 priciples of marketing 417411

1. Selecting which segments of a population of customers to serve is called ___________.

a. positioning

b. managing the marketing effort

c. market segmentation

d. target marketing

e. customization

2. “Build a better mousetrap and the world will beat a path to your door” refl ects the

___________ concept.

a. target marketing

b. production

c. marketing

d. product

e. selling

3. The set of marketing tools a fi rm uses to implement its marketing strategy is called the

___________.

a. promotion mix

b. TQM

c. marketing mix

d. marketing effort

e. product mix

4. Building, keeping and growing profi table relationships by delivering customer value and

satisfaction is called ___________.

a. customer relationship management

b. customer lifetime value

c. database marketing

d. customer perceived value

e. societal marketing

5. Which of the following is most essential to any defi nition of marketing?

a. Demand management

b. Making a profi t

c. Customer relationships

d. Making a sale

e. The production concept

6. Henry Ford’s philosophy was to perfect the Model T so that its cost could be reduced further for

increased consumer affordability. This refl ects the ___________ concept.

a. selling

b. marketing

c. societal marketing

d. production

e. product

7. Kao Corp., which makes Ban deodorant, invited teenage girls to make an ad that would

encourage other girls to buy the product. This program is an example of ___________.

a. societal marketing

b. consumer generated content

c. the selling orientation

d. partner relationship management

e. the production concept

8. When the economy tightens, customer loyalty and customer retention become ___________ for

marketers.

a. impossible

b. short term but not long term goals

c. more important

d. less important

e. long term but not short term goals

9. ___________ should be market oriented and defi ned in terms of ___________.

a. Strategic plans; company needs

b. Mission statements; customers’ needs

c. Long range plans; company needs

d. Annual plans; product needs

e. Objectives; competitors’ threats

10. Most portfolio analysis methods evaluate SBUs on two dimensions, namely ___________ and

___________.

a. market or industry attractiveness; strength of the SBU’s position

b. market share; strength of the SBU’s position

c. market diversifi cation; relative market share

d. market growth rates; profi ts

e. market penetration; market development

11. The BCG growth share matrix classifi es four types of SBUs. They are ___________,

___________, ___________, and ___________.

a. planning; implementing; leading; controlling

b. stars; cash cows; question marks; dogs

c. product; price; promotion; placement

d. sales; market share; price; promotion

e. market penetration; market development; product development; diversifi cation

12. Which of the following does NOT accurately refl ect a problem with the BCG matrix approach?

a. It is diffi cult to defi ne SBUs and measure market share and growth.

b. It can be time consuming to implement.

c. It focuses on classifying current businesses.

d. It focuses on planning for the future.

e. It can be costly to conduct.

13. The process of customer driven marketing involves which of the following?

a. market segmentation; market targeting; differentiation; positioning

b. marketing analysis; planning; implementation; feedback

c. analysis; targeting; implementation; control

d. problem identifi cation; information search; decision; implementation

e. product; price; promotion; adaptation

14. Effective positioning begins with ___________ the company’s marketing offer in order to give

consumers more perceived value.

a. pricing

b. aligning

c. promoting

d. placing

e. differentiating

15. In the four Ps of the marketing mix, design, packaging, services and variety, all fall under the

category of ___________.

a. place

b. position

c. price

d. promotion

e. product

16. Which of the following measures the profi ts generated by investments in marketing activities?

a. Marketing ROI

b. A marketing audit

c. A budget

d. SWOT analysis

e. An executive summary

17. Which of the following terms is used to describe the factors and forces outside marketing that

affect marketing management’s ability to build and maintain successful relationships with

target customers?

a. Target markets

b. The cultural environment

c. The marketing mix

d. The marketing environment

e. Strategic planning

18. Banks, credit companies, insurance companies and other businesses that help fi nance

transactions or insure against the risks associated with the buying and selling of goods and

services are referred to as ___________.

a. marketing services agencies

b. wholesalers

c. resellers

d. physical distribution fi rms

e. fi nancial intermediaries

19. A consumer organization, environmental group or minority group has challenged your fi rm’s

stand on a local issue. Your fi rm is being challenged by a ___________ public.

a. general

b. local

c. media

d. citizen action

e. government

20. Marketers can take a(n) ___________ by taking aggressive action to affect the publics and

forces in their marketing environments.

a. environmental stance

b. natural perspective

c. proactive stance

d. natural management perspective

e. relationship building perspective

21. The green movement will likely spark the LEAST interest in which of the following?

a. Internet usage

b. Biodegradability

c. Environmentally sustainable strategies

d. Recycling programs

e. Social responsibility

22. ___________ is the systematic design, collection, analysis and reporting of data relevant to a

specifi c marketing situation facing an organization.

a. Causal research

b. The marketing information system

c. Competitive marketing intelligence

d. Marketing research

e. Competitive marketing research

23. The most common research instrument used is the ___________.

a. mechanical device

b. questionnaire

c. people meter

d. live interviewer

e. focus group

24. Which of the following is the best advice about creating research questionnaires?

a. Questions should not be arranged in any particular order.

b. Use simple and direct language.

c. Avoid any personal questions that may make some respondents uncomfortable.

d. Ask diffi cult questions in the beginning to “weed out” uninterested respondents.

e. Ask personal questions in the middle of the instrument.

25. A successful CRM program can be expected to help a company achieve all of the following

EXCEPT ___________.

a. providing higher levels of customer service

b. understanding the competition better

c. developing deeper customer relationships

d. creating offers tailored to specifi c customer requirements

e. understanding how to better build the marketing mix

bam 306 principles of marketing 2 417416

1. ________ is never simple, yet understanding it is the essential task of marketing management.

a. Consumption pioneering

b. Buying behavior

c. Brand personality

d. Understanding the difference between primary and secondary data

e. Early adoption

2. ________ is a person’s pattern of living as expressed in her psychographics, including her

activities, interests and opinions.

a. Personality

b. Motive

c. Lifestyle

d. Culture

e. Social class

3. All of the following make up a person’s lifestyle EXCEPT ________.

a. interests

b. AIO dimensions

c. work

d. dissonance reducing buying behavior

e. opinions

4. A person’s buying choices are infl uenced by four major psychological factors. Which is NOT one

of these factors?

a. Alternative evaluation

b. Learning

c. Perception

d. Motivation

e. Beliefs and attitudes

5. The relationship between the consumer’s expectations and the product’s ________ determines

whether the buyer is satisfi ed or dissatisfi ed with a purchase.

a. recognition

b. brand personality

c. service quality

d. consumer market

e. perceived performance

6. Which of the following is the fi nal stage in the new product adoption process?

a. Evaluation

b. Awareness

c. Trial

d. Acceptance

e. Adoption

7. Stephanie and Jamal attended a sales seminar. Both left the seminar with differing opinions

about what was important to implement in their jobs. Both used the information in different

ways, according to what each already believed was important. They have engaged in ________.

a. selective distortion

b. selective retention

c. perceptual defense

d. selective attention

e. selective attitude

8. In which of the following ways is Boeing like most other large companies?

a. It produces hundreds of products for a wide range of markets.

b. It has an entertainment division.

c. Most of its business comes from fi nal consumers.

d. It has an investment division.

e. Most of its business comes from commercial and industrial customers.

9. Which business buying situation is the marketer’s greatest opportunity and challenge?

a. System rebuy

b. New task

c. Multiple rebuys

d. Straight rebuy

e. Modifi ed rebuy

10. Don Amspacher, in his role on the buying committee, provides information for evaluating the

alternative purchase decisions and helps defi ne and set specifi cations for evaluating

alternatives for purchasing. Don is a(n) ________.

a. gatekeeper

b. infl uencer

c. decider

d. user

e. buyer

11. Status, empathy and persuasiveness are all examples of ________ infl uences on business buyer

behavior.

a. cultural

b. organizational

c. interpersonal

d. environmental

e. individual

12. Business marketers often alert customers to potential problems and then show how their

products provide solutions. These marketers are hoping to infl uence which stage of the

business buying process?

a. General need description

b. Order routine specifi cation

c. Alternative evaluations

d. Performance review

e. Problem recognition

13. In the generally accepted stages of the business buying process, the step following problem

recognition is ________.

a. Supplier search

b. Proposal solicitation

c. Performance review

d. Product value analysis

e. General need description

14. In the case of maintenance, repair, and operating items, buyers may use a ________ rather

than periodic purchase orders.

a. blanket contract

b. binding purchase order

c. negotiable instrument

d. solutions purchase

e. locked in sale

15. There are many factors considered in government buying but ________ is typically the most

important.

a. packaging

b. personal selling

c. price

d. advertising

e. public relations

16. When competitors use differentiated or concentrated marketing, ________ marketing can be

disastrous.

a. differentiated

b. concentrated

c. customized

d. undifferentiated

e. localized

17. Which positioning strategy offers consumers a “good deal” by offering equivalent quality

products or services at a lower price?

a. Less for much less

b. More for less

c. All or nothing

d. Same for less

e. More for the same

18. Ford Motor Company emphasizes “Quality First Ford Tough” in its truck products. In doing so,

the company has developed a differentiation strategy based on ________.

a. positioning

b. products

c. image

d. people

e. services

19. The third level of a product that product planners must consider is a(n) ________ that offers

additional consumer services and benefi ts.

a. image

b. augmented product

c. industrial product

d. brand equity

e. brand extension

20. Products and services fall into two broad classifi cations based on the types of consumers that

use them. Which is one of these broad classes?

a. Materials and parts

b. Industrial products

c. Supplies and services

d. Specialty products

e. Convenience products

21. ________ involves activities undertaken to create, maintain or change attitudes toward

particular cities, states and regions.

a. Organization marketing

b. Place marketing

c. Social marketing

d. Interactive marketing

e. Idea marketing

22. What are the two dimensions of product quality?

a. Conformance and style

b. Performance and resistance

c. Consistency and level

d. Feature and design

e. Design and innovation

23. ________ contributes to a product’s usefulness as well as to its looks.

a. Design

b. Brand

c. Conformance quality

d. Style

e. Functionality

24. A(n) ________ is a name, term, sign, symbol, design or a combination of these that identifi es

the maker or seller of a product or service.

a. service

b. internal marketing

c. external marketing

d. brand

e. co branding

25. In the competition between ________ and ________ brands, retailers have the advantages

of controlling what products will be stocked, where products will be stocked, what prices will

be charged and which products will be featured in print promotions.

a. store; licensed

b. national; manufacturer’s

c. store; private

d. private; distributor

e. national; private

accounting help 417421

1) Standard costs for company products are typically used for all
except which of the following? Question 1 options:

Variance analysis and cost control
Computing production costs in operating budgets
Determining actual costs per unit
Determining the cost of goods completed and transferred to finished goods inventory

2) Performance reports normally include all of the following
except Question 2 options:

standard costs.
normal capacity.
total plantwide overhead costs.
budgeted costs.

3) Which of the following provides an explanation of why the variable overhead rate is separated from the fixed overhead rate in standard costing? Question 3 options:

There is no justifiable reason; their separation is merely to simplify entries.
Both calculations divide by the same direct labor hours, but the numerator is different for each calculation.
The variable overhead rate is calculated using actual direct labor hours, whereas the fixed overhead rate is calculated using normal capacity direct labor hours.
Different application bases are generally appropriate.

4) Multiplying the standard price of direct materials by the standard quantity for direct materials yields Question 4 options:

the direct materials price variance.
the direct materials quantity variance.
the standard direct materials cost.
nothing; the two components should be added together.

5) An expression of the hourly labor pay cost per function or job classification that is expected to exist during the next accounting period is the definition of a Question 5 options:

direct labor time standard.
direct materials quantity standard.
direct labor rate standard.
variable overhead rate.

6) A flexible budget is most useful Question 6 options:

for budgeting and planning purposes.
when actual output equals budgeted output.
as a cost control tool to help evaluate performance.
when a product’s cost structure includes variable costs only.

7) In a standard costing system, standard costs eventually flow into the Question 7 options:

Cost of Goods Sold account.
Standard Cost account.
Selling and Administrative Expenses account.
Sales account.

8) The difference between actual quantity used and standard quantity multiplied by standard price is the equation for computing the Question 8 options:

direct labor efficiency variance.
direct materials price variance.
direct labor rate variance.
direct materials quantity variance.

9) Which of the following statements is
not true? Question 9 options:

Performance reports should be tailored to the responsibilities of the manager or department for which they are prepared.
Performance reports normally report standard costs and variances.
Performance reports should contain space for explanation of variances.
Performance reports do not present the causes of variances.

10) Suppose the standard for a given cost during a period was $80,000. The actual cost for the period was $72,000. Under what circumstances would you consider the variance from budget to be a positive performance indication? Question 10 options:

The cost is fixed, and actual production was 90 percent of the standard level of budgeted production.
The cost is variable, and the standard cost noted above is the cost at a production level lower than the actual production level.
The cost is variable, and actual production was 90 percent of the standard level of production.
The cost is variable, and actual production was 75 percent of the standard level of production

adjusting entries 417426

1. Supplies on hand at December 31, 2011, total $1,000.
2.

The studio pays rent quarterly (every three months). The last payment was made November 1, 2011. The next payment will be made early in February 2012.

3. Studio equipment is being depreciated over 120 months (10 years).
4.

On October 1, 2011, the studio borrowed $24,000 by signing a 12 month, 12 percent note payable. The entire amount, plus interest, is due on September 30, 2012.

5. At December 31, 2011, $3,000 of previously unearned client fees had been earned.
6. Accrued, but unrecorded and uncollected client fees earned total $690 at December 31, 2011.
7. Accrued, but unrecorded and unpaid salary expense totals $750 at December 31, 2011.
8.

Accrued income taxes expense for the entire year ending December 31, 2011, total $7,000. The full amount is due early in 2012.

acct 417431

1. Tanning Company analyzes its receivables to estimate bad debt expense. The accounts receivable balance is $300,000 and credit sales are $1,000,000. An aging of accounts receivable shows that approximately 5% of the outstanding receivables will be uncollectible. What adjusting entry will Tanning Company make if the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,000 before adjustment?

Answer

a. Bad Debt Expense 20,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 20,000
b. Bad Debt Expense 17,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 17,000
c. Bad Debt Expense 15,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 15,000
d. Bad Debt Expense 13,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 13,000

2. Following the completion of the bank reconciliation, an adjusting entry was made that debited cash and credited Interest Revenue. Therefore the bank reconciliation must have included an item that was Answer

a. deducted from the balance per bank statement
b. deducted from the balance per company’s records
c. added to the balance per company’s records
d. added to the balance per bank statement

3. If the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible receivables is used, what general ledger account is credited to write off a customer’s account as uncollectible?

Answer

a. Accounts Receivable
b. Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
c. Uncollectible Accounts Expense
d. Interest Expense

accounting 417447

1. (TCOs 2 & 3) During the year, Zander is transferred by his employer from Seattle to San Diego. His moving expenses are not reimbursed and are as follows:

Cost of moving household furnishings

$9,000

Transportation

$1,000

Meals

$800

Lodging

$1,400

His qualified moving expenses are: (Points : 5)

$12,200.

$11,800.

$11,400.

$10,000.

None of the above

finding profitable sales mix and contribution margin 416582

Working on a McGraw Hill example question and can’t seem to get past part of it…

Bethel Company owns a machine that can produce two specialized products. Production time for Product TLX is three units per hour and for Product MTV is five units per hour. The machine’s capacity is 2,200 hours per year. Both products are sold to a single customer who has agreed to buy all of the company’s output up to a maximum of 3,740 units of Product TLX and 5,235 units of Product MTV. Selling prices and variable costs per unit to produce the products follow.

Product TLX: Selling price per unit: 11.5, Variable costs per unit: 3.45

Product MTV: Selling price per unit: 6.9, Variable costs per unit: 4.14

(1) Determine the company’s most profitable sales mix.

(2) Determine the contribution margin that results from that sales mix.

I got the correct profitable sales mix for the TLX product (which was 3,740 units) but I can’t find the sales mix for the MTV product. I also can’t seem to correctly guess the total contribution margin.

Infinite thanks to you, dear reader. 🙂

xs supply company is developing its annual financial statements at december 31 201 416598

XS Supply Company is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2010. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized: 2010 2009 Balance Sheet at December 31 Cash $ 35,600 $ 30,000 Accounts Receivable 34,400 29,300 Merchandise Inventory 39,600 36,900 Property and Equipment 121,800 101,900 Less: Accumulated Depreciation (29,600 ) (24,800 ) $ 201,800 $ 173,300 Accounts Payable $ 35,800 $ 29,000 Wages Payable 1,150 1,500 Note Payable, Long?Term 38,700 42,300 Contributed Capital 90,050 76,600 Retained Earnings 36,100 23,900 $ 201,800 $ 173,300 Income Statement for 2010 Sales $ 120,600 Cost of Goods Sold 69,800 Other Expenses 38,600 Net Income $ 12,200 Additional Data: a. Bought equipment for cash, $19,900. b. Paid $3,600 on the long?term note payable. c. Issued new shares of stock for $13,450 cash. d. No dividends were declared or paid. e. Other expenses included depreciation, $4,800; wages, $20,500; taxes, $5,600; other, $7,700. f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit. Because there are no liability accounts relating to taxes or other expenses, assume that these expenses were fully paid in cash. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, using the indirect method

yahoo founded in 1995 created the first successful internet search engine like 416621

Yahoo!, founded in 1995, created the first successful Internet search engine. Like other Internet companies, it used a business model based on traditional broadcast media. More than 85% of its revenues came from the sale of banners and sponsorship advertising with the remaining coming from business services and e commerce transactions. The company grew rapidly through acquisitions. By 2001, however, online ad sales declined, forcing out Yahoo’s CEO. Google, a new entrant into the Internet search engine business with superior search engine technology, had begun to eat into Yahoo’s market share. Yahoo was losing its identity. Was it a search engine, a portal, or a media company? Yahoo was still the most visited web site on the Internet with 500 million visitors monthly with revenues of $4.5 billion for the first three quarters of 2006. Google, in contrast, had 380 million visitors with revenues of $7.2 billion for the same period. To better compete with Google’s popular AdWords ranking model, Yahoo launched its new algorithm and ranking model, Panama. Nevertheless, Yahoo’s share of total online searches declined from 30.5% in July 2005 to 28.8% in July 2006. Net income declined in 2006. Yahoo’s problems were compounded by its complex matrix structure. The company’s top down approach stifled creativity. Overlapping responsibilities were slowing down the decision making process and creating conflict. On December 5, 2006, Yahoo’s CEO announced a reorganization of the company into three groups. It was hoped that a new mission statement and a new structure would make Yahoo leaner and more responsive to customers. Would this be enough to turnaround the company? Decision Date: January 2007 2006 FY Sales: $6,426 million 2006 FY Net Income: $751 million DISCUSSION QUESTIONS 1. What are the strengths and weaknesses of Yahoo. 2. What are the opportunities and threats facing Yahoo. 3. What are the strategic factors facing Yahoo. 4. Does Yahoo have any core competencies? If ‘yes’, what are they? 5. Does Yahoo have a distinctive competency? If ‘yes’, what is it? 6. How can Yahoo develop a sustainable strategy for the future? 7. How important is it to Yahoo that its 2 new launched products be successful.

accounting problem 416658

The year end balance sheet of Smithfield Products includes the following stockholders’ equity section
(with certain details omitted):

Stockholders’ equity:
71/2% cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value, 100,000 shares authorized $ 2,700,000
Common stock, $2 par value, 900,000 shares authorized 900,000
Additional paid in capital: Common stock 9,000,000
Retained earnings 2,595,000


Total stockholders’ equity $ 15,195,000





From this information, compute answers to the following questions:
a.

How many shares of preferred stock have been issued?

Number of shares of preferred stock
b.

What is the total amount of the annual dividends paid to preferred stockholders?(Round intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Annual preferred stock dividend $
c.

How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

Number of shares of common stock

d.

What was the average issuance price per share of common stock?(Round your answers to2decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Average issuance price $
e.

What is the amount of legal capital?(Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Legal capital $

f.

What is the total amount of paid in capital?(Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Paid in capital $
g.

What is the book value per share of common stock? (There are no dividends in arrears.)(Round your answers to2decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Book value per share $
h.

Assume that retained earnings at the beginning of the year amounted to $717,500 and that net income for the year was $3,970,000. What was the dividend declared during the year oneach shareof common stock? (Hint: Net income increases retained earnings, whereas dividends decrease retained earnings.)(Round your intermediate and final answers to2decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Dividend per share of common stock $

each year ratings are compiled concerning the performance of new cars during the f 416708

Each year, ratings are compiled concerning the performance of new cars during the first 90 days of use. Suppose that the cars have been categorized according to whether the car needs warranty related repair (yes or no) and the country in which the company manufacturing the car is based (United States or not United States). Based on the data collected, the probability that the new car needs warranty repair is 0.04, the probability that the car was manufactured by a U.S. based company is 0.60, and the probability that the new car needs a warranty repair and was manufactured by a U.S. based company is 0.025. Construct a contingency table or a Venn diagram to evaluate the probabilities of a warranty related repair. What is the probability that a new car selected at random a. needs a warranty repair? b. needs a warranty repair and was manufactured by a U.S. based company? c. needs a warranty repair or was manufactured by a U.S. based company? d. needs a warranty repair or was not manufactured by a U.S. based company?

mosby company 417062

On May 1, 2011, Mosby Company received an order to sell a machine to a customer in Canada at a price of 2,000,000 Mexican pesos. The machine was shipped and payment was received on March 1, 2012. On May 1, 2011, Mosby purchased a put option giving it the right to sell 2,000,000 pesos on March 1, 2012 at a price of $190,000. Mosby properly designates the option as a fair value hedge of the peso firm commitment. The option cost $3,000 and had a fair value of $3,200 on December 31, 2011. The following spot exchange rates apply:
May 1, 2011: spot rate $0.095.
December 31,2011:spot rate $0.094.
March 1,2012:spot rate $0.089.

Mosby’s Incremental borrowing rate is 12 percent, and the present value factor for two months at a 12 percent annual rate is .9803

1. What was the impact on Mosby’s 2011 net income as a result of this fair value hedge of a firm commitment?

2. What was the impact on Mosby’s 2012 net income as a result of this fair value hedge of a firm commitment?

3. What was the overall result of having entered into this hedge of exposure to foreign exchange risk?

accounting help 417072

On May 1, 2013, Hecala Mining entered into an agreement with the state of New Mexico to obtain the rights to operate a mineral mine in New Mexico for $10.9 million. Additional costs and purchases included the following (FV of $1, PV of $1,FVA of $1,PVA of $1,FVAD of $1 andPVAD of $1) (Use appropriate factor(s) from the tables provided.):

Development costs in preparing the mine $ 4,100,000
Mining machinery 152,400
Construction of various structures on site 115,700

After the minerals are removed from the mine, the machinery will be sold for an estimated residual value of $10,000. The structures will be torn down.

Geologists estimate that 890,000 tons of ore can be extracted from the mine. After the ore is removed the land will revert back to the state of New Mexico.

The contract with the state requires Hecala to restore the land to its original condition after mining operations are completed in approximately four years. Management has provided the following possible outflows for the restoration costs:

Cash Outflow Probability
$ 690,000 30 %
790,000 30 %
890,000 40 %

Hecala’s credit adjusted risk free interest rate is 8%. During 2013, Hecala extracted 129,000 tons of ore from the mine. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required:
1.

Determine the amount at which Hecala will record the mine.

2.

Calculate the depletion of the mine and the depreciation of the mining facilities and equipment for 2013, assuming that Hecala uses the units of production method for both depreciation and depletion.

3.

How much accretion expense will the company record in its income statement for the 2013 fiscal year?

4.

Are depletion of the mine and depreciation of the mining facilities and equipment reported as separate expenses in the income statement?

Yes
No

5.

During 2014, Hecala changed its estimate of the total amount of ore originally in the mine from 890,000 to 1,090,000 tons. Calculate the depletion of the mine and depreciation of the mining facilities and equipment for 2014 assuming Hecala extracted 159,000 tons of ore in 2014.

1

accounting 417094

1. Accrualbasis.
Grier & Associates maintains its records on the cash basis. You have been engaged to convert its cash basis income statement to the accrual basis. The cash basis income statement, along with additional information, follows:

No plant assets were sold during 2012.

Cal State San Bernardino, Dept of Accounting & Finance, Prof M. Henry Page 1

Acct 372 TR 2 4pm TAKE HOME PROBLEM as Addendum to Midterm Exam

2. Eight column work sheet.
The trial balance of Winsor Corporation is reproduced on the following page. The information below is relevant to the preparation of adjusting entries needed to both properly match revenues and expenses for the period and reflect the proper balances in the real and nominal accounts.
Instructions
As the accountant for Winsor Corporation, you are to prepare adjusting entries based on the following data, entering the adjustments on the work sheet and completing the additional columns with respect to the income statement and balance sheet. Carefully key your adjustments and label all items. (Due to time constraints, an adjusted trial balance is not required.) Round all computations to the nearest dollar.

  1. (a) Winsor determined that one percent of sales will become uncollectible.

  2. (b) Depreciation is computed using the straight line method, with an eight year life

and $1,000 salvage value.
(c) Salesmen are paid commissions of 10% of sales. Commissions on sales for the last week of December have not been paid.

(d)
(e)
(f)
advance, with monthly payments at $800/mo. This provision has been complied with as of Dec. 31, 2012.

The note was issued on October 1, bearing interest at 8%, due Feb. 1, 2013.

A physical inventory of supplies indicated $340 of supplies currently in stock. Provisions of a lease contract specify payments must be made one month in

Cal State San Bernardino, Dept of Accounting & Finance, Prof M. Henry Page 2

Acct 372 TR 2 4pm TAKE HOME PROBLEM as Addendum to Midterm Exam

3. Income statement and retained earnings statement.
Porter Corporation’s capital structure consists of 50,000 shares of common stock. At December 31, 2012 an analysis of the accounts and discussions with company officials revealed the following information:

Sales revenue $1,100,000
Purchase discounts 18,000
Purchases 692,000
Earthquake loss (net of tax) (extraordinary item) 35,000

Selling expenses 128,000

Cash 60,000
Accounts receivable 90,000
Common stock 200,000
Accumulated depreciation machinery 180,000
Dividend revenue 8,000
Inventory, January 1, 2012 152,000
Inventory, December 31, 2012 125,000
Unearned service revenue 4,400
Interest payable 1,000
Land 370,000
Patents 100,000
Retained earnings, January 1, 2012 290,000
Interest expense 17,000
Administrative expenses 170,000
Dividends declared 24,000
Allowance for doubtful accounts 5000
Notes payable (maturity 7/1/15) 200,000
Machinery 450,000
Materials 40,000
Accounts payable 60,000

The amount of income taxes applicable to ordinary income was $27,600, excluding the tax effect of the earthquake loss which amounted to $15,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement. (b) Prepare a retained earnings statement.

accounting 417099

1. Albertville Inc produces leather handbags. The production budget for the next four months is: July 5,000 units, August 7,000 units, September 7,500 units, October 8,000 units. Each handbag requires 1.3 hours of unskilled labor (paid $8 per hour) and 2.2 hours of skilled labor (paid $15 per hour). How many unskilled labor hours will be budgeted for August?

2. Banburry Place has forecast its sales for the coming months as follows:

Standard Units Deluxe Units

April 101 84

May 116 80

June 136 80

July 163 110

The standard unit sells for $202, the deluxe unit sells for $369

Prepare a sales budget for each of the three months April June as well as the total for the quarter

Present the budget for each product as well as total sales.

Standard Deluxe Total

April ( ) ( ) ( )

accounting multiple questions 417115

1. The basic differences between the financial statements of a merchandising business and a service business include reporting cost of merchandise sold on the income statement and the: (Points : 1)

inclusion of merchandise inventory on the balance sheet as a current asset.
stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet.
other income section of the income statement.
inclusion of a stockholders’ equity statement.

2. Which of the following best describes gross profit? (Points : 1)

Net sales less cost of goods sold.
Total sales less merchandise returns and discounts.
Net sales less operating expenses.
Net sales less cost of goods sold less operating expenses.

3. When using the indirect method of preparing the statement of cash flows, how is each of the following items treated?
Depreciation expense Increase in a current asset (Points : 1)

Add Subtract
Add Add
Subtract Add
Subtract Subtract

4. West, Inc. had beginning inventory of $10,000, purchases of $25,000 and ending inventory of $5,000. What is West’s cost of merchandise sold? (Points : 1)

$10,000
$25,000
$5,000
$30,000

5. If a $10,000 sale is made on January 1st, with terms of 2/10, n/30 how much would the discount be if payment is made on January 9th? (Points : 1)

$10,000
$200
$1,000
$0

6. If a company purchased $2,000 of merchandise on account and paid for it during the discount period with the terms of 2/10, n/30, the effect on the accounts would be: (Points : 1)

decreases Accounts Payable by $2,000 and decreases cash by $2,000.
increases Merchandise Inventory by $2,000 and increases Accounts Payable by $2,000.
decreases Accounts Payable by $1,960 and decreases Merchandise Inventory by $1,960.
decreases Accounts Payable by $2,000, decreases Merchandise Inventory by $40, and decreases Cash by $1,960.

7. Hedgehog Co. sells dog toys and other pet supplies. Compute Hedgehog’s merchandise available for sale for 2011, given the following information:
January 1 inventory $530,000
Purchases 420,000
Purchase returns 50,000
Transportation in 105,000
December 31 inventory 85,000 (Points : 1)

$1,005,000
$1,190,000
$1,105,000
Cannot be determined from the information given.

8. Which term indicates that merchandise is free of transportation charges to the buyer? (Points : 1)

FOB destination
Freight in
FOB shipping point
Transportation in

9. Assume that beginning accounts receivable are $30,000, that there are sales on account of $20,000 during the period, and customers paid $10,000 on their accounts. Under the indirect method of preparing the statement of cash flows, what is the adjustment to net income from these transactions? (Points : 1)

Subtract $10,000 from net income.
Add $10,000 to net income.
Subtract $20,000 from net income.
Add $20,000 to net income.

10. How is inventory shrinkage recorded? (Points : 1)

As a contra asset.
As a reduction to merchandise inventory.
As an increase to merchandise inventory.
As a separate liability account.

accounting accounting accounting 417120

1. Calhoun Inc has forecast purchases on account to be $310,000 in March, $370,000 in April, $421,000 in May, and $499,000 in June. Seventy percent of purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, the remaining 30% are paid in the following month. What are budgeted cash payments for April?

2. Carlton has forecast sales to be $212,000 in February, $276,000 in March, $297,000 in April, and $315,000 in May. The average cost of goods sold is 60% of sales. All sales are made on credit and sales are collected 55% in the month of sale, 30% the month following and the remainder two months after the sale. What are budgeted cash receipts in April?

3. Albertville Inc produces leather handbags. The production budget for the next four months is: July 5,400 units, August 7,600, September 8,100, October 8,300. Each handbag requires 0.3 square meters of leather. Albertville Inc’s leather inventory policy is 35% of next month’s production needs. If the leather policy is met, what will the July 1 inventory be?

accounting ii homework process costing 417125

1.) Cold Spring produces premium bottle water. Cold Spring purchases artesian water, stores the water in large tanks, and then runs the water through 2 processess; filtration and bottling. During February, the filtration proces incurred the following costs inprocessing 190,000 liters:

Wages of workers operating the filtration equipment $21,950

Manufacturing overhead allocated to filtration $25,050

Water $ 150,000

Cold Spring had no beginning inventory in the filtration department in february.

Requirements:

R1)Compute the February Conversion costs in the filtration department.

R2)The filtration department completely processed 190,000 liters in February. What was the filtration cost per liter?

2.)

Refer to Question 1. At Cold Spring, water is added at the beginning of the filtration process. Conversion costs are added evenly throughout the process. Now assume that in February, 125,000 liters were completed and transferred out of the filtration department into the bottling department. The 65,000 units remainingin filtration’s ending work in process inventory were 80% of the way through the filtration process. Recall that Cold Spring had no beginning inventories.

Requirements:

R1)draw a timeline for the filtration process

R2) compute the equivalent units of direct matereials and conversion costs for the filtration department

accounting 417136

1 ) A company purchased $6,000 worth of supplies in August. On August 31, the balance in the Supplies account was $3,200. The adjusting entry includes a: Debit to Supplies Expense for $3,200. Credit to Supplies for $2,800. Debit to Supplies for $2,800. Credit to Cash for $2,800. Credit to Supplies Expense for $2,800. 2 ) PPW Co. leased a portion of its store to another company for eight months beginning on October 1, 2010, at a monthly rate of $800. This other company paid the entire $6,400 cash on October 1, which PPW Co. recorded as unearned revenue. The journal entry made by PPW Co. at year end on December 31, 2010 would include: A debit to Rent Earned for $2,400. A debit to Cash for $6,400. A debit to Unearned Rent for $4,000. A credit to Unearned Rent for $2,400. A credit to Rent Earned for $2,400. 3 ) A company’s Office Supplies account shows a beginning balance of $600 and an ending balance of $400. If office supplies expense for the year is $3,100, what amount of office supplies was purchased during the period? $2,700. $3,500. $3,300. $2,900. $3,700 4) The total amount of depreciation recorded against an asset or group of assets during the entire time the asset or assets have been owned: Is referred to as accumulated depreciation. Is referred to as depreciation expense. Is only recorded when the asset is disposed of. Is referred to as an accrued asset. Is shown on the income statement of the final period. 5) Accrued revenues: Are also called unearned revenues. At the end of one accounting period often result in cash receipts from customers in the next period. Are listed on the balance sheet as liabilities. Are recorded at the end of an accounting period because cash has already been received for revenues earned. At the end of one accounting period often result in cash payments in the next period. 6 ) The usual accounting term for revenues from selling merchandise is: Expenses. Profits. Cost of Goods Sold. Costs. Sales. 7) A company purchased new computers at a cost of $14,000 on September 30, 2010. The computers are estimated to have a useful life of 4 years and a salvage value of $2,000. The company uses the straight line method of depreciation. How much depreciation expense will be recorded for the computers for the year ended December 31, 2010? $875 $250 $3,000 $750 $1,000 8 ) The accounting principle that requires revenue to be reported when earned is the: Time period principle. Revenue recognition principle. Going concern principle. Matching principle. Accrual reporting principle. 9 ) Gross Profit is also called: Gross Sales. Gross Equity. Gross Revenue. Gross Assets. Gross Margin. 10 ) The adjusting entry to record the earned sales that are both unrecorded and not yet received in cash at the end of an accounting period is: Debit Accounts Receivable and credit Sales. Debit Cash and credit Sales. Debit Accounts Receivable and credit Unearned Revenue. Debit Sales and credit Accounts Receivable. Debit Sales and credit Cash. 11 ) Depreciation expense for a period is the portion of a plant asset’s cost that is allocated to that period. True False 12 ) Recording the adjusting entry for Equipment depreciation involves a debit to Depreciation Expense and a credit to Equipment. True False 13 ) Sales returns and allowances and Sales discounts are permanent accounts and therefore are not closed during the closing process. True False 14 ) The cost of unused supplies is reflected in the Supplies account. True False 15 ) Merchandisers, using a periodic inventory system, use accounts such as purchases, purchases returns and allowances, an transportation in to track the costs associated with inventory. True False 16 )Using the straight line depreciation method, the annual depreciation expense on a machine that was purchased for $26,000 having a 4 year life and salvage value of $2,000 would be $6,500. True False 17 ) A company entered into a 2 month contract for $50,000 on April 1. It earned $25,000 of the contract services in April and billed the customer. The company should recognize the revenue when it receives the customer’s check. True False 18) When the cost of prepaid insurance benefits expire, the cost must be transferred to the prepaid insurance account. True False 19 ) Cost of Goods sold is usually the largest single expense on a merchandiser’s income statement. True False 20) In a service company, revenues minus expenses equals net income. True False

please help this chapter is giving me lots of difficulty 417150

1. Conan Company has total fixed costs of $112,000. Its product sells for $37 per unit and variable costs amount to $19 per unit. Next year Conan Company wishes to earn a pretax income that equals 19% of fixed costs. How many units must be sold to achieve this target income level? (Round your answer to the next whole amount.)

14,968
14,908
14,808
7,405

7,424

A company wishes to earn a pretax income equal to 30% of total fixed costs. Its product sells for $52.25 per unit. Total fixed costs equal $157,400 and variable costs per unit are $34.00. How many units must this company sell to meet its goal? (Round answer to complete units.

3,916
10,660
6,018
8,625

11,212

Schmidt Inc., manufactures inexpensive cameras that sell for $55.10. Fixed costs are $802,230 and variable costs are $33.00 per unit. Schmidt can buy a newer production machine that will increase fixed costs by $15,570 per year, but will increase variable costs by 10% per unit. What are the original and the new breakeven points in this situation?

Original 36,300 units; New 37,005 units.
Original 24,310 units; New 41,844 units.
Original 36,300 units; New 42,672 units.
Original 36,300 units; New 43,500 units.
Original 43,500 units; New 37,005 units.
Assume that sales are predicted to be $3,900, the expected contribution margin is $2,730, and a net loss of $350 is anticipated. The break even point in sales dollars is:
$4,668
$4,664
$4,612
$4,690
$4,400

Camden Corporation sells three products (M, N, and O) in the following mix: 3:1:2. Unit price and cost data are:

M N O
Unit sales price $9.2 $6.2 $8.2
Unit variable costs 4.1 3.1 4.1

Total fixed costs are $422,940. The break even point in sales dollars for the current sales mix is:

$458,180
$569,180
$909,180
$798,180
$17,921

If a firm’s forecasted sales are $210,000 and its break even sales are $180,000, the margin of safety in dollars is:

rev: 03_07_2013_QC_27973

$393,000
$390,000
$391,000
$30,000
$389,000
A product sells for $300 per unit, and its variable costs per unit are $137. The fixed costs are $428,000. What is the break even point in dollar sales? (Round the contribution ratio to the nearest whole percent.)
$1,223,218
$792,593
$427,376
$430,626
$789,809

A company’s product sells at $16.00 per unit and has a $7.00 per unit variable cost. The company’s total fixed costs are $127,800.

The break even point in units is:

18,257
5,557
14,200
7,100
7,988
A company manufactures and sells a product for $130 per unit. The company’s fixed costs are $69,640, and its variable costs are $91 per unit. The company’s break even point in units is: (Round your answer to the next whole amount.)
1,930
1,874
1,799
1,786
1,773

accounting help 417155

1. A corporation differs from a proprietorship and a partnership in that

a. a corporation is considered a separate legal entity for taxation purposes.
b. the owners of the corporation do not have a claim on the net assets of the business.

c. assets and liabilities are presented differently on the balance sheet.

d. the cost principle only applies to proprietorships and partnerships.

2. Which of the following statements about small stock dividends is true?

A debit to Retained Earnings for the par value of the shares issued should be made.

a. A small stock dividend decreases total stockholders’ equity.

b. Market value per share should be assigned to the dividend shares.

c. A small stock dividend ordinarily will have no effect on book value per share of stock

d. a debit to Retained Earnings for the par value of the shares issued should be made.

3. When a cash dividend is declared and the company has both cumulative preferred stock and common stock, which of the following must be paid first?

a. Dividends in arrears, common stock.

b. Dividends in arrears, preferred stock.

c. Current dividend, common stock.

d. Current dividend, preferred stock.

computing taxable income 417165

1) During the current year, Donna, a single taxpayer, reports the following items income of income and expenses:<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

Income:

Salary $86,000

Municipal bond interest 1,300

Bank account interest 2,300

Alimony received 24,000

Capital gain on an asset held less than one year 3,000

Rental income from residential rental house 12,500

Expenses/losses:

Interest on principal residence 8,000

Real estate taxes on principal residence 1,000

Capital loss on an asset held less than one year 7,000

Expenses related to rental property

Mortgage interest 6,000

Repairs 2,400

Taxes 700

Depreciation 1,200

Compute Donna’s taxable income. (Show all calculations in good form.)

accounting quiz 45 minutes 417195

1. An element of internal control is (Points : 2)

risk assessment.
journals.
subsidiary ledgers.
controlling accounts.

2. The amount of deposits in transit is included on the bank statement as a(n) (Points : 2)

deduction from the balance per the depositor’s books.
deduction from the balance per bank statement.
addition to the balance per bank statement.
addition to the balance per depositor books.

3. The purpose of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 is to (Points : 2)

restore public confidence and trust in the financial statements of publicly held companies.
require all companies to prepare financial statements.
protect companies from demands of investors, stockholders, and creditors.
do all of these.

4. The objectives of internal control are to (Points : 2)

control the internal organization of the accounting department personnel and equipment.
provide reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded, information is processed accurately, and laws and regulations are complied with.
prevent fraud and promote the social interest of the company.
provide control over Af?cAc‚¬A??ointernal use onlyAf?cAc‚¬ reports and employee internal conduct.

5. The framework that has become widely accepted as the standard by which companies design, analyze, and evaluate internal controls is the (Points : 2)

Internal Control Integrated Framework by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations.
Internal Control Integrated Framework by the Congress of Special Offering.
Internal Control Integrated Framework Commission of Organizations.
Internal Control Localized Structure by the Congress of Special Offerings.

6. The bank reconciliation (Points : 2)

should be prepared by an employee who records cash transactions.
is part of the internal control system.
is for information purposes only.
is sent to the bank for verification.

7. The Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 requires companies and their independent accountants to (Points : 2)

report on the financial activities of the company.
report on any fraud and theft detected in the company.
report on the state of the economy and likelihood of fraud.
report on the effectiveness of the company’s internal controls.

8. Which of the following elements of internal control focuses upon locating weaknesses and improving control effectiveness? (Points : 2)

The control environment
Risk assessment
Control procedures
Monitoring

9. Separating the custody of assets from accounting for assets is a part of which element of internal control? (Points : 2)

Information and communication
Monitoring
Control procedures
The control environment

10. Requiring employees to take annual vacations is part of which element of internal control? (Points : 2)

The control environment
Risk assessment
Control procedures
Monitoring

business information techonology 417202

1 An engineer designed a valve that will regulate water pressure on an automobile engine. The engineer designed the valve such that it would produce a mean pressure of 7.9 lbs/square inch. The valve was tested on 240 engines and the mean pressure was 8.0 lbs/square inch. Assume the standard deviation is known to be 0.8. Is there evidence at the 0.05 level that the valve performs above the specifications?

2 A local police chief claims that less than 60% of all drug related arrests are ever prosecuted. A sample of 800 arrests reveals that 56% of arrests were prosecuted. Is there sufficient evidence at the 0.02 level to substantiate the chief’s claim?

3 A lumber company is making boards that are 2756.0 millimeters tall. If the boards are too long they must be trimmed, and if they are too short they cannot be used. A sample of 28 boards is made, and it is found that they have a mean of 2760.2 millimeters with a variance of 121.00. Is there evidence at the 0.05 level that the boards are either too long or too short? Assume the population is normally distributed.

jones and calenti retail stationery sells its products to other businesses it has pr 592008

(Calculation of Ratios) Jones and Calenti Retail Stationery sells its products to other businesses. It has provided the following information:

Sales

$1,200,000

Cost of sales

450,000

Inventory at end of year

200,000

Accounts receivable at end of year

200,000

Accounts payable at end of year

100,000

Using 250 days as the number of days the business is open, calculate

  1. Days” sales outstanding
  2. Inventory turnover
  3. Days” purchases outstanding

calculate the overhead to sales ratio 592010

(Overhead to Sales Ratio)

Raj Inc. Statement of Comprehensive Income, 2012 (in $millions)

Sales

$155

Cost of sales

45

Gross profit

110

Selling, administration expenses

65

Operating profit before interest and taxes

45

Interest

10

Profit before taxes

35

Taxes

7

Profit after taxes

$28

Calculate the overhead to sales ratio.

equinox services inc statement of comprehensive income in thousands 592012

Equinox Services Inc. Statement of Comprehensive Income (in $thousands)

2012

2011

Income

$34,000

$29,000

Less expenses

16,500

13,000

Operating profit before interest

17,500

16,000

Less interest expense

4,000

2,700

Profit before taxes

13,500

13,300

Tax expense

5,4e0

5,320

Net profit after taxes

8,100

7,980

Less dividends paid

4,1300

3,750

Retained profits

$4,100

$4,230

Number of shares issued

10,000,000

10,000,000

Earnings per share

$0.81

$0.80

Dividend per share

0.40

0.38

Market price of shares

8.55

10.20

an analyst has produced the following ratio analysis and has asked you to comment on 592013

Equinox Services Inc. Statement of Financial Position (in $thousands)

Non current assets Property, plant, & equipment Current assets

Accounts receivable Bank

$21,933

$17,990

7,080

377

4,750
1,250

7,457

6,000

Total assets

$29,390

$23,990

Non current liabilities

Long term loans

2,750

2,000

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

4,300

3,750

Total liabilities

7,050

5,750

Shareholders” equity

Share capital

10,000

10,000

Retained earnings

12,340

8,240

22,340

18,240

Total liabilities and shareholders” equity

$29,390

$23,990

An analyst has produced the following ratio analysis and has asked you to comment on any aspects that you think are important.

equinox services inc ratio analysis 592014

Equinox Services Inc. Ratio Analysis

2012

2011

Sales growth

17.2%

Expense growth

26.9%

Profit growth

9.4%

Interest cover

4.4

5.9

PBIT/sales

39.7%

45.9%

ROCE

53.8%

65.7%

ROI

36.3%

43.8%

Dividend payout

49.4%

47.0%

Dividend yield

4.7%

3.7%

PIE ratio

10.56

12.78

Asset efficiency

1.2

1.2

Days” sales outstanding

76.0

59.8

Working capital

1.7

1.6

Degree of operating leverage

11.0%

9.9%

in reviewing liquidity and leveraging ratios for acorn services inc we can say that 592017

(Liquidity and Leveraging Ratios) In reviewing liquidity and leveraging ratios for Acorn Services Inc., we can say that

  1. Long term debt has increased as a proportion of total capital employed, and liquidity has improved due to the decrease in current liabilities.
  2. Long term debt has decreased as a proportion of total capital employed, and liquidity has declined due to the increase in current liabilities.
  3. Long term debt has increased as a proportion of total capital employed, and liquidity has worsened due to the increase in current liabilities.
  4. Long term debt has decreased as a proportion of total capital employed, and liquidity has improved due to the decrease in current liabilities.
  5. Acorn Services Inc. has produced the following information:
  6. Acorn Services Inc.
  7. Statement of Comprehensive Income for the Year Ended March 31 (in $thousands)

2012

2011

Revenue

$227,138

$227,778

Operating profit

54,094

38,507

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

54,616

38,205

Acorn Services Inc.

Statement of Financial Position for the Year Ended March 31 (in $thousands)

2012

2011

Non current assets

Property, plant and equipment

$88,720

$77,934

Current assets

Accounts receivable

134,860

107,612

Cash at bank

90

4,205

134,950

111,817

Total assets

223,670

189,751

Non current liabilities

Long term loans

2,088

12,264

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

127,799

94,301

Total liabilities

129,887

106,565

Net assets

93,783

83,186

Shareholders” equity

$93,783

$83,186

fortune stationers is open 250 days each year and last year achieved sales of 9 mill 592018

(Calculation of Ratios) Fortune Stationers is open 250 days each year and last year achieved sales of $9 million with a gross profit of 60% of sales. At the end of the year, Fortune”s statement of financial position showed

Accounts receivable

$1,200,000

Inventory

450,000

Accounts payable

1,400,000

Calculate (a) the days” sales outstanding, (b) inventory turnover, (c) days” inventory held, and (d) days” purchases outstanding.

Rockford Inc.
Statement of Comprehensive Income (in $millions)

2012

2011

Turnover

$1,021.5

$847.4

Cost of sales

855.3

710.4

Gross profit

166.2

137.0

Administrative expenses

47.9

29.1

Operating profit

118.3

107.9

Net interest payable

0.9

0.3

Profit on ordinary activities before taxes

117.4

107.6

Taxes

30.7

33.5

Profit on ordinary activities after taxes

86.7

74.1

Dividends

33.3

29.3

Profit retained for the period

$53.4

$44.8

Earnings per share

21.34

18.44

440 million shares were issued at 104 each:

Market value of shares

$1.50

$1.40

Rockford Inc.
Statement of Financial Position (in $millions)

2012

2011

Non current assets

Goodwill

$37.3

$32.3

Property, plant, & equipment

167.6

132.3

Investments

22.5

25.7

227.4

190.3

Current assets

Inventory

135.0

105.3

Accounts receivable

22.5

20.8

Cash at bank

16.2

17.8

173.7

143.9

Total assets

401.1

334.2

Non current liabilities

Long term loans

14.8

13.4

Provision for deferred taxes

9.5

7.6

24.3

21.0

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

159.8

149.6

Total liabilities

184.1

170.6

Net assets

$217.0

$163.6

Equity

Share capital

44.0

44.0

Retained earnings

173.0

119.6

Shareholders” equity

$217.0

$163.6

Calculate sufficient ratios for both 2012 and 2011 to demonstrate the changes in profitability, liquidity, efficiency, leveraging, and shareholder return of Rockford, and comment on the most important changes between 2012 and 2011.

ratunga inc manufactures and sells office furniture to business customers it is list 592019

(Interpretation of Ratios) Ratunga Inc. manufactures and sells office furniture to business customers. It is listed on a stock exchange. A ratio analysis of its statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position over the last four years has identified the following trends:

2012

2011

2010

2009

Sales growth

10.0%

8.5%

8.0%

7.0%

Return on investment (ROI)

5.0%

4.8%

4.5%

4.1%

Return on capital employed (ROCE)

4.0%

4.5%

5.0%

5.3%

Operating profit/sales

6.0%

6.3%

6.5%

6.7%

Gross profit/sales

28.0%

27.0%

26.5%

25.0%

Working capital

104.0%

108.0%

111.0%

112.0%

Acid test (quick ratio)

68.0%

72.0%

73.0%

77.0%

Degree of operating leverage

65.0%

62.0%

60.0%

56.0%

Interest cover

1.7

1.9

2.1

2.3

Asset turnover

108.0%

105.0%

99.0%

94.0%

Days” sales outstanding

61.0

58.0

55.0

57.0

Inventory turnover

15.0

13.0

13.0

12.0

Days” purchases outstanding

72.0

68.0

64.0

61.0

Dividend per share

10c

10c

10c

10c

Dividend payout ratio

65.0%

60.0%

58.0%

58.0%

Dividend yield

4.0%

3.8%

3.5%

3.2%

Price/earnings ratio

9.6

8.5

8.2

7.7

  1. Explain how ratio analysis can be used to interpret business performance, with an emphasis on the different types of ratios that can be used.
  2. Use the above ratios to explain the strengths and weaknesses of the financial performance of Ratunga Inc. over the last four years.

Below is some information from the financial records of Cleereen Co.:

Accounts payable

$ 18,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

Bank overdraft

5,500

Inventory

45,000

Property, plant, and equipment

150,000

Sales

236,500

working capital ratio cleereen s working capital ratio is 592020

Below is some information from the financial records of Cleereen Co.:

Accounts payable

$ 18,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

Bank overdraft

5,500

Inventory

45,000

Property, plant, and equipment

150,000

Sales

236,500

(Working Capital Ratio) Cleereen”s working capital ratio is

  1. 0.85
  2. 2.77
  3. 3.92
  4. 9.15

asset turnover cleereen s asset turnover is 592022

Below is some information from the financial records of Cleereen Co.:

Accounts payable

$ 18,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

Bank overdraft

5,500

Inventory

45,000

Property, plant, and equipment

150,000

Sales

236,500

(Asset Turnover) Cleereen”s asset turnover is

  1. 90.9%
  2. 110.0%
  3. 157.3%
  4. 121.3%

explore customer requirements more closely and identify new products or desirable mo 592026

BALANCED SCORECARD AT CRANFELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT

Consider Cranfeld Office Equipment, manufacturer of four different office chairs: Models A1, A2, B1, and D1. The A1, A2, and B1 models are standard office chairs, designed to provide comfort and style at a relatively low price. The D1 is a more expensive model that was developed only after extensive office ergonomic research.

The D1 model was developed after Don Alpert, the marketing manager, conducted a customer survey that indicated customers were asking for a better quality chair due to posture related problems, like back pain. He felt that there was a substantial market for this better quality product. In the same survey, customers also reported that they were not happy with the quality of the A1, A2, and B1 chair models. Problems with loose parts, poor workmanship, and faulty materials were reported.

In the past, Cranfeld has sourced materials and parts from the most cost effective suppliers. The company has also worked to speed up production efficiency and has increased its overall assembly line efficiency. However, the survey strongly indicated that the company needed to improve the quality of its products if it wanted to retain its current customers, get new customers, and vastly improve its company image.

Overall, Cranfeld has been experiencing declining profits due to increased international competition, with Cranfeld”s competitors offering better quality products. Its competitors are also better at managing costs, so Don and company president Sally Lee feel that they must also focus on cost control.

During 2012, Cranfeld established the following company goals and objectives:

Cost Control

  • Develop stronger relationships with suppliers and implement just in time ordering where possible.
  • Maintain a profit margin of 25% on all sales.
  • Achieve a 5% cost reduction on manufactured products through just in time inventory management.

Sales

  • Sell $100,000 worth of D1 chairs in 2013.
  • Increase sales of A1, A2, and B1 chairs by 15% in 2013 over 2012.

Quality

  • Buy better quality products from suppliers.
  • Lower warranty and repair costs by 50% in 2013.
  • Reduce quality costs by 40% from 2012.
  • Improve the quality of A1, A2, and B1 chairs.
  • Improve customers” perception of the quality of the company”s product.

Other

  • Implement training programs for all employees to increase product quality and customer service focus.
  • Increase employee satisfaction and retention.
  • Explore customer requirements more closely and identify new products or desirable modifications of existing lines.
  • Develop a good reputation over the long term as a manufacturer of quality office chairs.

identify any nonfinancial factors that should be considered before commencing your b 591872

You would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. In preparation for an interview with the bank to discuss your financing needs, you develop answers to the following questions. A number of assumptions are required; clearly note all assumptions that you make.

Instructions

(a) Identify the types of costs that would likely be involved in making this product.

(b) Set up five columns as indicated.

Product Costs

Direct

Direct

Manufacturing

Item

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Period Costs

Classify the costs you identified in (a) into the manufacturing cost classifications of product costs (direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead) and period costs.

(c) Assign hypothetical monthly dollar figures to the costs you identified in (a) and (b).

(d) Assume you have no raw materials or work in process beginning or ending inventories.

Prepare a projected cost of goods manufactured schedule for the first month of operations.

(e) Project the number of helmets you expect to produce the first month of operations. Compute the cost to produce one bicycle helmet. Review the result to ensure it is reasonable; if not, return to part (c) and adjust the monthly dollar figures you assigned accordingly.

(f) What type of cost accounting system will you likely use—job order or process costing?

(g) Explain how you would assign costs in either the job order or process costing system you plan to use.

(h) Classify your costs as either variable or fixed costs. For simplicity, assign all costs to either variable or fixed, assuming there are no mixed costs, using the format shown.

Item

Variable Costs

Fixed Costs

Total Costs

(i) Compute the unit variable cost, using the production number you determined in (e).

(j) Project the number of helmets you anticipate selling the first month of operations. Set a unit selling price, and compute both the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.

(k) Determine your break even point in dollars and in units.

(l) Prepare projected operating budgets (sales, production, direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling and administrative expense, and income statement). You will need to make assumptions for each of the following:

Direct materials budget:

Quantity of direct materials required to produce one

helmet; cost per unit of quantity; desired ending direct

Direct labor budget:

materials (assume none).

Direct labor time required per helmet; direct labor cost

Budgeted income statement:

per hour.

Income tax expense is 45% of income from operations.

(m)Prepare a cash budget for the month. Assume the percentage of sales that will be collected from customers is 75%, and the percentage of direct materials that will be paid in the current month is 75%.

(n) Determine a relevant range of activity, using the number of helmets produced as your activity index. Recast your manufacturing overhead budget into a flexible monthly budget for two additional activity levels.

(o) Identify one potential cause of materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead variances for your product.

(p) Assume that you wish to purchase production equipment that costs $720,000. Determine the cash payback period, utilizing the monthly cash flow that you computed in part (m) multiplied by 12 months (for simplicity).

(q) Identify any nonfinancial factors that should be considered before commencing your business venture.

on the basis of the foregoing data would you recommend that morganstern buy the mach 591874

Morganstern Company is considering the purchase of a new machine. The invoice price of the machine is $170,000, freight charges are estimated to be $4,000, and installation costs are expected to be $6,000. Salvage value of the new equipment is expected to be zero after a useful life of 4 years. Existing equipment could be retained and used for an additional 4 years if the new machine is not purchased. At that time, the salvage value of the equipment would be zero. If the new machine is purchased now, the existing machine would be scrapped. Morganstern’s accountant, Diane Gallup, has accumulated the following data regarding annual sales and expenses with and without the new machine.

1. Without the new machine, Morganstern can sell 10,000 units of product annually at a per unit selling price of $100. If the new unit is purchased, the number of units produced and sold would increase by 20%. The selling price would remain the same.

2. The new machine is faster than the old machine, and it is more efficient in its usage of materials. With the old machine the gross profit rate will be 25% of sales.With the new machine the rate will be 28% of sales.

3. Annual selling expenses are $135,000 with the current equipment. Because the new equipment would produce a greater number of units to be sold, annual selling expenses are expected to increase by 10% if it is purchased.

4. Annual administrative expenses are expected to be $100,000 with the old machine and $113,000 with the new machine.

5. The current book value of the existing machine is $36,000. Morganstern uses straight line depreciation.

6. Morganstern’s management wants a minimum rate of return of 15% on its investment and a payback period of no more than 3 years.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following. (Ignore income tax effects.)

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the 4 years showing whether Morganstern should keep the existing machine or buy the new machine.

(b) Calculate the annual rate of return for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the payback period for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(d) Compute the net present value of the new machine. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(e) On the basis of the foregoing data, would you recommend that Morganstern buy the machine? Why?

what are the most important nonfinancial factors that barone should consider when ma 591875

Barone Company manufactures private label small electronic products, such as alarm clocks, calculators, kitchen timers, stopwatches, and automatic pencil sharpeners. Some of the products are sold as sets, and others are sold individually. Products are studied as to their sales potential, and then cost estimates are made. The Engineering Department develops production plans, and then production begins. The company has generally had very successful product introduction. Only two products introduced by the company have been discontinued.

One of the products currently sold is a multi alarm alarm clock. The clock has four alarms that can be programmed to sound at various times and for varying lengths of time. The company has experienced a great deal of difficulty in making the circuit boards for the clocks. The production process has never operated smoothly. The product is unprofitable at the present time, primarily because of warranty repairs and product recalls. Two models of the clocks were recalled, for example, because they sometimes caused an electric shock when the alarms were being shut off. The Engineering Department is attempting to revise the manufacturing process, but the revision will take another 6 months at least. The clocks were very popular when they were introduced, and since they are private label, the company has not suffered much from the recalls. Presently, the company has a very large order for several items from Kmart Stores. The order includes 5,000 of the multi alarm clocks. When Barone suggested that Kmart purchase the clocks from another manufacturer, Kmart threatened to rescind the entire order unless the clocks were included.

Barone has therefore investigated the possibility of having another company make the clocks for them. The clocks were bid for the Kmart order, based on an estimated $5.50 cost to manufacture, as follows.

Circuit board, 1 each @ $1.00

$1.00

Plastic case, 1 each @ $0.50

0.50

Alarms, 4 @ $0.15 each

0.60

Labor, 15 minutes @ $12/hour

3.00

Overhead, $1.60 per labor hour

0.40

Barone could purchase clocks to fill the Kmart order for $9 from Silver Star, a Korean manufacturer with a very good quality record. Silver Star has offered to reduce the price to $7.50 after Barone has been a customer for 6 months, placing an order of at least 1,000 units per month. If Barone becomes a “preferred customer” by purchasing 15,000 units per year, the price would be reduced still further to $4.50.

Sigma Products, a local manufacturer, has also offered to make clocks for Barone. They have offered to sell 5,000 clocks for $5 each. However, Sigma Products has been in business for only 6 months. They have experienced significant turnover in their labor force, and the local media have reported that the owners may soon face tax evasion charges. The owner of Sigma Products is an electronic engineer, however, and the quality of the clocks is likely to be good.

If Barone decides to purchase the clocks from either Silver Star or Sigma, all the costs to manufacturer could be avoided, except a total of $5,000 in overhead costs for machine depreciation. The machinery is fairly new, and has no alternate use.

Instructions

(a) What is the difference in profit under each of the alternatives if the clocks are to be sold for $13.00 each to Kmart?

(b) What are the most important nonfinancial factors that Barone should consider when making this decision?

(c) What should Barone do in regard to the Kmart order? What should it do in regard to continuing to manufacture the multi alarm alarm clocks? Be prepared to defend your answer.

who are the stakeholders in this situation 591876

DeVito Company operates in a state where corporate taxes and workmen’s compensation insurance rates have recently doubled. DeVito’s president has assigned you the task of preparing an economic analysis and making a recommendation about whether to move the company’s entire operation to Missouri. The president is slightly in favor of such a move because Missouri is his boyhood home, and he also owns a fishing lodge there.

You have just completed building your dream house, moved in, and sodded the lawn. Your children are all doing well in school and sports and, along with your spouse, want no part of a move to Missouri. If the company does move, so will you because your town is a one industry community, and you and your spouse will have to move to have employment. Moving when everyone else does will cause you to take a big loss on the sale of your house. The same hardships will be suffered by your coworkers, and the town will be devastated. In compiling the costs of moving versus not moving, you have latitude in the assumptions you make, the estimates you compute, and the discount rates and time periods you project. You are in a position to influence the decision singlehandedly.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this situation?

(c) What would you do in this situation?

the main functions of management accounting are planning decision making and control 591929

The main functions of management accounting are planning, decision making, and control. Which of the following activities best describes the planning function?

  1. Mark Smith, the president of ABC Industries, analyzed cost data for ABC”s Toronto plant and determined that increasing costs were due to increases in material costs.
  2. Anna Choy developed a 2012 budget for her division.
  3. Noriyasu Tanaka, the financial officer for Great Homes Inc., prepared a variance report that compared actual costs to the budgeted costs for the year.
  4. Amandeep Singh compared the costs of two different methods of producing Product A: an automated method and a more labour intensive method. Based on the information, Amandeep chose the automated method because it resulted in substantial cost savings.

what changes to accounting practices have been made or need to be made to support th 591930

(Changing Accounting Practices) Prior to the Industrial Revolution, single product industries and high labour costs were the norm. After the Industrial Revolution, business changed dramatically. Single product manufacturing companies that relied on human labour were replaced with multiproduct companies that relied on automated processes. Accounting methods also had to change. For instance, budgeting became very important as a control mechanism in decentralized departments.

You could say that today we are experiencing a new type of revolution—the Information Age—and that accounting techniques and practices must also change to reflect this new business environment. Summarize some of the key changes in business practices that have occurred due to the Information Age. What changes to accounting practices have been made or need to be made to support these changes?

identify the most likely purpose for the following information i e will it be used f 591932

(Purposes of Accounting Information) Accounting information (both financial and non financial) can be used for a variety of purposes. Identify the most likely purpose for the following information (i.e., will it be used for scorekeeping, problem solving, or decision making?).

  1. Bohdan prepared the financial statements for the Coil Division of TRS Industries.
  2. Carol prepared an analysis of the variances between actual and budgeted results for her department.
  3. Abdul explained why the Finishing Department of Tree Town Clothing Company did not meet its production expectations.
  4. Cost accountant John Wong prepared a comparative report for the manager of Carlyle Industries on two different production methods for the company”s factory.
  5. A budget report for the Maintenance Department was prepared.
  6. The financial statements for Havoc Manufacturing were made available online.

identify the most likely purpose for the following information i e will it be used f 591933

(Purposes of Accounting Information) Accounting information (both financial and non financial) can be used for a variety of purposes. Identify the most likely purpose for the following information (i.e., will it be used for scorekeeping, problem solving, or decision making):

  1. A bank statement was prepared for a client at RBC.
  2. The sales by division were reported for Apple Computers.
  3. Natiq prepared a scrap report for the Production Department at the Chrysler plant in Brampton, Ontario.
  4. Marita analyzed the effect of changing over to an automated production system in her plant.
  5. Dominique prepared a five year projection for expansion of her business into the Asian market.
  6. Various measures were developed to help assess the business performance of Gifted Golf Warehouse.

can assist with management control for each type of information listed below describ 591934

(Purpose of Accounting Information) Accounting information can be used for the purposes of planning, decision making, or control. For instance, a financial statement such as a statement of comprehensive income can be used to help decide which product lines are profitable for planning purposes. A financial statement can also be used to complete a ratio analysis. Ratio analysis (i.e., comparing financial values from one period on a company”s financial statement to the next period, or from one company”s financial statements to another company”s) can assist with management control. For each type of information listed below, describe whether this information can be used for planning, decision making, and/or control.

  1. A report of the costs for each product produced by the company over the past three years
  2. A report showing sales for the last three quarters
  3. An experience curve study where labour hours have been plotted against the number of units produced to track whether labour hours have decreased with increased production volumes
  4. A variance report showing the variances in actual product costs from budgeted costs
  5. A three year projection developed for the hat division of clothing company; the projection includes introduction of a new product line
  6. A monthly report showing the spoilage costs for the brick division of Buildings Inc.
  7. A performance report for the Cartoon Factory that compares actual performance to expected performance
  8. A study of customer satisfaction ratings

what action should chang take to ease her mind 591936

(Stewardship and Accountability) The owner of Touring Inc., Mei Chang, is concerned about the financial management of her company. When she started up Touring Inc., a company that provides bus tours in Banff, Alberta, she hired Peter Rosen to manage the company. Chang is not highly involved in the operations of her business since she is located in Toronto, Ontario. She has entrusted the management of Touring Inc. to Rosen. Chang recently received financial statements prepared by Rosen for the year ended 2012. She noticed that sales were quite high but that net income was very low. For instance, in July 2012, total sales were $6,800 but reported profits were only $600. Chang is worried that Rosen is not being honest. What action should Chang take to ease her mind?

melinda jenkins a management accountant feels that caro company also needs to focus 591937

(Non Financial Measures of Performance) Caro Company, a multidivisional company, has had a tough year. Because of a slowdown in the economy, Caro has experienced a 25% decline in overall profitability. The company managers are currently developing a performance measurement process to help identify areas where the company needs to improve. Aldo Amatto, the company CEO, particularly wants to be able to identify financial indicators, such as changes in net income and gross margin, as well as return on investment. He also wants to track performance measures to ensure that the company is reaching its cost reduction targets. Melinda Jenkins, a management accountant, feels that Caro Company also needs to focus on non financial performance measures. Is Melinda correct? Why?

identify whether there is an increase or decrease in profit cash flow assets or liab 591961

(Effect of Transactions on Accounting Equation) For each of the following transactions, identify whether there is an increase or decrease in profit, cash flow, assets, or liabilities.

Transaction

Profit

Cash Flow

Assets (excluding cash)

Liabilities

Owner Contributes cash

Buys equipment on credit

Buys inventory on credit

Takes out a loan from the bank

Sells goods on credit

Pays cash for expenses

Pays cash to suppliers

Receives cash from customer

Depreciates equipment

the balances below are shown in alphabetical order in a professional service firm s 591965

(Calculation of Profit and shareholders” equity) The balances below are shown in alphabetical order in a professional service firm”s ledger at the end of a financial year.

Calculate

  1. The profit for the year
  2. The shareholders” equity at the end of the year

Advertising

$15,000

Bank

5,000

Shareholder”s equity at the beginning of the year

71,000

Accounts payable

11,000

Accounts receivable

12,000

Fixed assets

100,000

Income

135,000

Rent

10,000

Salaries

75,000

produce a schedule of transactions under appropriate headings for each account 591983

(Recording of Transactions) Kazam Services begins the month with capital of $200,000 and the following assets and liabilities:

Assets

Liabilities

Property, plant, and equipment

$500,000

Bank overdraft

$ 35,000

Account receivable

$125,000

Account payable

$ 90,000

Long term loan

$300,000

The following transactions took place in the accounting records of the business during the past month:

  • Took out long term loan for new building: $150,000
  • Received from debtors: $45,000
  • Paid to creditors: $30,000
  • Invoiced customers for services carried out: $70,000
  • Paid salaries: $15,000
  • Paid various office expenses: $5,000

In addition, depreciation of $20,000 was provided for the period.

  1. Produce a schedule of transactions under appropriate headings for each account.
  2. Total each account and produce a statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position.

although the operating profit has increased the operating margin has decreased as a 591985

(Statement of Comprehensive Income) Disanity Corporation”s statement of comprehensive income shows the following:

2012

2011

Sales

$1,250,000

$1,175,000

Cost of goods sold

787,000

715,000

Selling and administrative expenses

324,000

323,000

Based on these figures, which of the following statements is true?

  1. Sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses have all increased; therefore, profit, gross margin, and operating margin have all increased.
  2. The operating profit has increased due to sales growth, higher gross margins, and similar expenses.
  3. Although the operating profit has decreased, the operating margin has increased as a result of sales growth and an increase in gross profit.
  4. The operating profit has decreased due to lower gross margins and higher expenses, despite sales growth.
  5. Although the operating profit has increased, the operating margin has decreased as a result of a reduction in the gross margin and higher expenses, despite sales growth.

what is the impact of the following prepayment accrual and provision transactions on 591986

(Accrual Accounting) What is the impact of the following prepayment, accrual, and provision transactions on profit, the statement of financial position, and the statement of cash flows?

  1. A business has 24 motor vehicles that it leases in return for a monthly payment, excluding insurance. The company”s financial year is April 1–March 31, but the annual insurance premium of $400 per vehicle for the calendar year January–December is due for payment on December 31.
  2. A business budgets for energy costs of $6,000 per annum over its financial year January 1–December 31. Bills for usage are sent each quarter on the last day of February, May, August, and November. Historically, 70% of the annual energy cost is spent during the autumn and winter (September–February).
  3. A business with a financial year of April 1–March 31 purchases a new computer network server for $12,000 on June 30. The business depreciates computer hardware at the rate of 20% of cost per annum, beginning the month following purchase.

indicate how the following transactions will be accounted for in the statement of co 591987

(Effect of Transactions on Financial Statements) Indicate how the following transactions will be accounted for in the statement of comprehensive income and the statement of financial position for a company with a fiscal year end of December 31, 2012:

  1. The company receives an invoice on October 1, 2012, for rent for the period November 1, 2012, to April 30, 2013, and pays the invoice on October 20, 2012.
  2. The company buys a machine on June 1 for $28,000. The machine is expected to be used for six years and has an estimated residual value of $4,000.
  3. The company”s accounts receivable balance is $150,000. It has not created a provision for bad debt in the past as customers have always paid their outstanding accounts. On December 20, 2012, the company learns that one of its customers who owes the company $22,000, has filed for bankruptcy and they will probably not receive any of the money owed.

prepare the company s statement of comprehensive income for january 2012 591988

(Statement of Comprehensive Income) Rosi Inc. imports high end wooden furniture from overseas and sells it to furniture stores. The following are amounts extracted from the company”s general ledger for January 2012:

Administrative salaries

$ 5,000

Commission paid to sales people

2,100

De[recitation of office furniture and equipment

2,500

Dividends paid

5,000

Income tax expense

800

Interest paid

12,000

Inventory of furniture for sale January 1

56,000

Inventory of furniture for sale January 31

3,100

Purchase of furniture for sale

178,000

Sales

200,000

Prepare the company”s statement of comprehensive income for January 2012.

although the operating profit has increased the operating margin has decreased as a 592002

Brulé Ltee”s statement of comprehensive income shows the following:

2012

2011

Sales

$1,250,000

$1,175,000

Cost of sales

787,000

715,000

Selling & admin. expenses

324,000

323,000

Based on these figures, which one of the following statements is true?

  1. Sales, cost of sales, and selling and administration expenses have all increased, therefore operating profit, gross margin, and operating margin have all increased.
  2. Although the operating profit has decreased, the operating margin has increased as a result of sales growth and an increase in gross profit.
  3. The operating profit has decreased due to lower gross margins and higher expenses, despite sales growth.
  4. Although the operating profit has increased, the operating margin has decreased as a result of a reduction in the gross margin and higher expenses, despite sales growth.

the financial statements of voyager productions ltd are shown below 592007

Calculation of Ratios) The financial statements of Voyager Productions Ltd. are shown below:

Voyager Productions Ltd.
Statement of Comprehensive Income for the Year Ended December 31 (in $millions)

2012

2011

Turnover

$141.1

$138.4

Cost of sales

58.9

54.9

Gross profit

82.2

83.5

Selling & administrative costs

55.0

54.0

Operating profit

27.2

29.5

Interest payable

6.1

7.5

Profit before taxes

21.1

22.0

Tax on profit

7.3

5.7

Profit after taxes

13.8

16.3

Dividends

8.0

8.0

Retained profit

$5.8

$8.3

Voyager Productions Ltd.
Statement of Financial Position as at December 31 (in $millions)

2012

2011

Non current assets

Tangible assets

$266.7

$265.3

Current assets

Inventory

5.3

5.8

Accounts receivable

15.7

20.9

Other receivables & prepayments

2.4

2.0

Bank

4.9

6.3

28.3

35.0

Total Assets

295.0

300.3

Voyager Productions

Statement of Financial Position as at December 31 (in $millions)

Non current liabilities

Long term loans

96.7

146.1

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

66.8

216

Total Liabilities

163.5

173.7

Net Assets

$131.5

$126.6

Equity

Share capital

81.9

82.8

Retained earnings

49.6

43.8

Shareholders” Funds

$131.5

$126.6

Calculate the following ratios:

  1. Return on investment (ROI)
  2. Return on capital employed (ROCE)
  3. Operating margin
  4. Gross margin
  5. Sales growth
  6. Working capital to sales
  7. Degree of operating leverage
  8. Asset turnover

would your answer be different in b if the productive capacity released by not makin 591848

Shannon Inc. has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps. The company is currently operating at 100% of capacity.Variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the rate of 50% of direct labor cost.The direct materials and direct labor cost per unit to make the lamp shades are $4.00 and $6.00, respectively. Normal production is 40,000 table lamps per year.

A supplier offers to make the lamp shades at a price of $13.50 per unit. If Shannon Inc. accepts the supplier’s offer, all variable manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $40,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the lamp shades will have to be absorbed by other products.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy the lamp shades.

(b) Should Shannon Inc. buy the lamp shades?

(c) Would your answer be different in (b) if the productive capacity released by not making the lamp shades could be used to produce income of $35,000?

determine whether stacy rsquo s basketweaving shop should carry the basic introducto 591849

Stacy McGuire recently opened her own basketweaving studio. She sells finished baskets in addition to the raw materials needed by customers to weave baskets of their own. Stacy has put together a variety of raw material kits, each including materials at various stages of completion. Unfortunately, owing to space limitations, Stacy is unable to carry all varieties of kits originally assembled and must choose between two basic packages.

The basic introductory kit includes undyed, uncut reeds (with dye included) for weaving one basket. This basic package costs Stacy $12 and sells for $27. The second kit, called Stage 2, includes cut reeds that have already been dyed.With this kit the customer need only soak the reeds and weave the basket. Stacy is able to produce the second kit by using the basic materials included in the first kit and adding one hour of her own time (to produce two kits), which she values at $18 per hour. Because she is more efficient at cutting and dying reeds than her average customer, Stacy is able to make two kits of the dyed reeds, in one hour, from one kit of undyed reeds.The kit of dyed and cut reeds sells for $33.

Instructions

Determine whether Stacy’s basketweaving shop should carry the basic introductory kit with undyed and uncut reeds, or the Stage 2 kit with reeds already dyed and cut. Prepare an incremental analysis to support your answer.

should donkey sell or process further why or why not 591850

Donkey Bikes could sell its bicycles to retailers either assembled or unassembled.The cost of an unassembled bike is as follows.

Direct materials

$150

Direct labor

70

Variable overhead (70% of direct labor)

49

Fixed overhead (30% of direct labor)

21

Manufacturing cost per unit

$290

The unassembled bikes are sold to retailers at $400 each.

Donkey currently has unused productive capacity that is expected to continue indefinitely; management has concluded that some of this capacity can be used to assemble the bikes and sell them at $450 each. Assembling the bikes will increase direct materials by $5 per bike, and direct labor by $20 per bike. Additional variable overhead will be incurred at the normal rates, but there will be no additional fixed overhead as a result of assembling the bikes.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the sell or process further decision.

(b) Should Donkey sell or process further? Why or why not?

should the current machine be replaced ignore the time value of money 591851

Crone Enterprises uses a word processing computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Current Machine

New Machine

Original purchase cost

$15,000

$21,000

Accumulated depreciation

6,000

Estimated operating costs

24,000

20,000

Useful life

5 years

5 years

If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value.The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.

Instructions

Should the current machine be replaced? (Ignore the time value of money.)

is judy right about eliminating the ketchum division prepare a schedule to support y 591852

Judy Herzog, a recent graduate of Rolling’s accounting program, evaluated the operating performance of Klumpe Company’s six divisions. Judy made the following presentation to the Klumpe board of directors and suggested the Ketchum Division be eliminated. “If the Ketchum Division is eliminated,” she said, “our total profits would increase by $16,870.”

The Other

Ketchum

Five Divisions

Division

Total

Sales

$1,664,200

$ 98,200

$1,762,400

Cost of goods sold

978,520

76,470

1,054,990

Gross profit

685,680

21,730

707,410

Operating expenses

527,940

38,600

566,540

Net income

$ 157,740

$(16,870)

$ 140,870

In the Ketchum Division, cost of goods sold is $56,000 variable and $20,470 fixed, and operating expenses are $12,000 variable and $26,600 fixed. None of the Ketchum Division’s fixed costs will be eliminated if the division is discontinued.

Instructions

Is Judy right about eliminating the Ketchum Division? Prepare a schedule to support your answer.

compute net income by product line and in total for shatner company if the company d 591853

Shatner Company makes three models of phasers. Information on the three products is given below.

Stunner

Double Set

Mega Power

Sales

$300,000

$500,000

$200,000

Variable expenses

150,000

200,000

140,000

Contribution margin

150,000

300,000

60,000

Fixed expenses

120,000

225,000

90,000

Net income

$ 30,000

$ 75,000

$(30,000)

Fixed expenses consist of $300,000 of common costs allocated to the three products based on relative sales, and additional fixed expenses of $30,000 (Stunner), $75,000 (Double Set), and $30,000 (Mega Power). The common costs will be incurred regardless of how many models are produced. The other fixed expenses would be eliminated if a model is phased out.

Jim Kirk, an executive with the company, feels the Mega Power line should be discontinued to increase the company’s net income.

Instructions

(a) Compute current net income for Shatner Company.

(b) Compute net income by product line and in total for Shatner Company if the company discontinues the Mega Power product line. (Hint: Allocate the $300,000 common costs to the two remaining product lines based on their relative sales.)

(c) Should Shatner eliminate the Mega Power product line? Why or why not?

prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours ar 591854

Freese Company manufactures and sells three products. Relevant per unit data concerning each product are given below.

Product

A

B

C

Selling price

$11

$12

$15

Variable costs and expenses

$4

$8

$9

Machine hours to produce

2

1

2

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin per unit of the limited resource (machine hour) for each product.

(b) Assuming 3,000 additional machine hours are available, which product should be manufactured?

(c) Prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours are (1) divided equally among the products, and (2) allocated entirely to the product identified in (b) above.

compute the net present value of each project does your evaluation change round to n 591856

Suzaki Manufacturing Company is considering three new projects, each requiring an equipment investment of $22,000. Each project will last for 3 years and produce the following cash inflows.

Year

AA

BB

CC

1

$ 7,000

$ 9,500

$13,000

2

9,000

9,500

10,000

3

15,000

9,500

9,000

Total

$31,000

$28,500

$32,000

The equipment’s salvage value is zero. Suzaki uses straight line depreciation. Suzaki will not accept any project with a payback period over 2 years. Suzaki’s minimum required rate of return is 12%.

Instructions

(a) Compute each project’s payback period, indicating the most desirable project and the least desirable project using this method. (Round to two decimals.)

(b) Compute the net present value of each project. Does your evaluation change? (Round to nearest dollar.)

if omega company rsquo s minimum required rate of return is 11 which projects are ac 591858

Omega Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.

Annual

Life of

Project

Investment

Income

Project

22A

$240,000

$13,300

6 years

23A

270,000

21,000

9 years

24A

288,000

20,000

8 years

Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. Omega Company uses the straight line method of depreciation.

Instructions

(a) Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.

(b) If Omega Company’s minimum required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?

project a could be modified by spending 20 000 more initially the net annual cash fl 591859

Vasquez Corporation is considering investing in two different projects. It could invest in both, neither, or just one of the projects. The forecasts for the projects are as follows.

Project A

Project B

Capital investment

$200,000

$300,000

Net annual cash flows

$50,000

$65,000

Length of project

5 years

7 years

The minimum rate of return acceptable to Vasquez is 10%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the net present value of the two projects.

(b) What capital budgeting decision should Vasquez make?

(c) Project A could be modified. By spending $20,000 more initially, the net annual cash flows could be increased by $10,000 per year. Would this change Vasquez’s decision?

what nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision 591860

Korte Company is currently producing 16,000 units per month, which is 80% of its production capacity. Variable manufacturing costs are currently $8.00 per unit. Fixed manufacturing costs are $56,000 per month. Korte pays a 9% sales commission to its sales people, has $30,000 in fixed administrative expenses per month, and is averaging $320,000 in sales per month.

A special order received from a foreign company would enable Korte Company to operate at 100% capacity. The foreign company offered to pay 75% of Korte’s current selling price per unit. If the order is accepted, Korte will have to spend an extra $2.00 per unit to package the product for overseas shipping. Also, Korte Company would need to lease a new stamping machine to imprint the foreign company’s logo on the product, at a monthly cost of $2,500.The special order would require a sales commission of $3,500.

Instructions

(a) Compute the number of units involved in the special order and the foreign company’s offered price per unit.

(b) What is the manufacturing cost of producing one unit of Korte’s product for regular customers?

(c) Prepare an incremental analysis of the special order. Should management accept the order?

(d) What is the lowest price that Korte could accept for the special order to earn net income of $1.20 per unit?

(e) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

what nonfinancial factors should be considered in the decision 591861

The management of Martinez Manufacturing Company has asked for your assistance in deciding whether to continue manufacturing a part or to buy it from an outside supplier.The part, called Tropica, is a component of Martinez’s finished product. An analysis of the accounting records and the production data revealed the following information for the year ending December 31, 2010.

1. The Machinery Department produced 36,000 units of Tropica.

2. Each Tropica unit requires 10 minutes to produce. Three people in the Machinery Department work full time (2,000 hours per year) producing Tropica. Each person is paid $11.00 per hour.

3. The cost of materials per Tropica unit is $2.00.

4. Manufacturing overhead costs directly applicable to the production of Tropica are: indirect labor, $5,500; utilities, $1,300; depreciation, $1,600; property taxes and insurance, $1,000. All of the costs will be eliminated if Tropica is purchased.

5. The lowest price for a Tropica from an outside supplier is $3.90 per unit. Freight charges will be $0.30 per unit, and a part time receiving clerk at $8,500 per year will be required.

6. If Tropica is purchased, the excess space will be used to store Martinez’s finished product. Currently, Martinez rents storage space at approximately $0.60 per unit stored per year. Approximately 6,000 units per year are stored in the rented space.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the make or buy decision. Should Martinez make or buy the part? Why?

(b) Prepare an incremental analysis, assuming the released facilities can be used to produce $10,000 of net income in addition to the savings on the rental of storage space. What decision should now be made?

(c) What nonfinancial factors should be considered in the decision?

compare the total income from operations with the denver division 61 000 to total in 591862

Deskins Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2010 the company reported total income from operations of $61,000 and the following results for the divisions.

Division

Denver

Miami

San Diego

Tacoma

Sales

$455,000

$730,000

$920,000

$515,000

Cost of goods sold

380,000

480,000

576,000

430,000

Selling and administrative expenses

120,000

207,000

246,000

120,000

Income (loss) from operations

$ (45,000)

$ 43,000

$ 98,000

$ (35,000)

(SO

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

Denver

Miami

San Diego

Tacoma

Cost of goods sold

95%

80%

90%

90%

Selling and administrative expenses

80

60

70

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 60% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is deeply concerned about the unprofitable divisions (Denver and

Tacoma).The consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be eliminated.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin for the two unprofitable divisions.

(b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible elimination of (1) the Denver Division and (2) the Tacoma Division. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement using the CVP format for Deskins Manufacturing Company, assuming (1) the Denver Division is eliminated, and (2) the unavoidable fixed costs and expenses of the Denver Division are allocated 30% to Miami, 50% to San Diego, and 20% to Tacoma.

(d) Compare the total income from operations with the Denver Division ($61,000) to total income from operations without this division.

rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases which project do you recommend 591863

Timmons Corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project

Brown

Red

Yellow

Capital investment

$190,000

$220,000

$250,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

25,000

20,000

26,000

2

16,000

20,000

24,000

3

13,000

20,000

23,000

4

10,000

20,000

17,000

5

8,000

20,000

20,000

Total

$ 72,000

$100,000

$110,000

Salvage value is expected to be zero at the end of each project. Depreciation is computed by the straight line method. The company’s minimum rate of return is the company’s cost of capital which is 12%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)

(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases.Which project do you recommend?

assuming that wichita can borrow the money needed for expansion at 10 compute the ne 591864

Wendy Dobson is the managing director of the Wichita Day Care Center. Wichita is currently set up as a full time child care facility for children between the ages of 12 months and 6 years.Wendy is trying to determine whether the center should expand its facilities to incorporate a newborn care room for infants between the ages of 6 weeks and 12 months. The necessary space already exists. An investment of $25,000 would be needed, however, to purchase cribs, high chairs, etc. The equipment purchased for the room would have a 5 year useful life with zero salvage value.

The newborn nursery would be staffed to handle 12 infants on a full time basis.The parents of each infant would be charged $200 weekly, and the facility would operate 52 weeks of the year. Staffing the nursery would require two full time specialists and five part time assistants at an annual cost of $103,800. Food, diapers, and other miscellaneous supplies are expected to total $14,000 annually.

Instructions

(a) Determine (1) annual net income and (2) net cash flow for the new nursery.

(b) Compute (1) the annual rate of return and (2) the cash payback period for the new nursery. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Assuming that Wichita can borrow the money needed for expansion at 10%, compute the net present value of the new room. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(d) What should Wendy conclude from these computations?

what nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision 591866

Haslett Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2011, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity.

Amount

Per Unit

Sales

$4,500,000

$50.00

Cost of goods sold

3,150,000

35.00

Selling and administrative expenses

360,000

4.00

Net income

$ 990,000

$11.00

Fixed costs for the period were: Cost of goods sold $900,000, and selling and administrative expenses $135,000. In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Haslett receives a special order for 9,000 basketballs at $32 each from the European Basketball Association (EBA).Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Haslett Inc. accept the special order?

(c) What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $5.00 per ball?

(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

would the decision be different if finnegan company has the opportunity to produce 6 591867

The management of Finnigan Manufacturing Company is trying to decide whether to continue manufacturing a part or to buy it from an outside supplier. The part, called BIZBE, is a component of the company’s finished product.

The following information was collected from the accounting records and production data for the year ending December 31, 2010.

1. 6,000 units of BIZBE were produced in the Machining Department.

2. Variable manufacturing costs applicable to the production of each BIZBE unit were: direct materials $4.75, direct labor $4.60, indirect labor $0.45, utilities $0.35.

3. Fixed manufacturing costs applicable to the production of BIZBE were:

Cost Item

Direct

Allocated

Depreciation

$1,100

$ 900

Property taxes

500

200

Insurance

900

600

$2,500

$1,700

All variable manufacturing and direct fixed costs will be eliminated if BIZBE is purchased. Allocated costs will have to be absorbed by other production departments.

4. The lowest quotation for 6,000 BIZBE units from a supplier is $66,000.

5. If BIZBE units are purchased, freight and inspection costs would be $0.30 per unit, and receiving costs totaling $750 per year would be incurred by the Machining Department.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for BIZBE.Your analysis should have columns for (1) Make BIZBE, (2) Buy BIZBE, and (3) Net Income Increase/Decrease.

(b) Based on your analysis, what decision should management make?

(c) Would the decision be different if Finnegan Company has the opportunity to produce $6,000 of net income with the facilities currently being used to manufacture BIZBE? Show computations.

(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

reconcile the total income from operations 135 000 with the total income from operat 591868

Tryon Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2011, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $135,000 and the divisional results shown on the page.

Division

I

II

III

IV

Sales

$510,000

$390,000

$310,000

$170,000

Cost of goods sold

300,000

250,000

270,000

150,000

Selling and administrative expenses

60,000

80,000

65,000

70,000

Income (loss) from operations

$150,000

$ 60,000

$ (25,000)

$(50,000)

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

70%

80%

75%

90%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

50

60

70

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (III and IV). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions III and IV.

(b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division III and (2) Division IV. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Tryon Manufacturing, assuming Division IV is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division IV’s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($135,000) with the total income from operations without Division IV.

compute the annual rate of return for each project round to one decimal 591869

Bensen Corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project Ric

Project Rac

Project Roe

Capital investment

$140,000

$150,000

$180,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

13,000

18,000

27,000

2

13,000

17,000

22,000

3

13,000

13,000

16,000

4

13,000

12,000

13,000

5

13,000

9,000

12,000

Total

$ 65,000

$ 69,000

$ 90,000

Depreciation is computed by the straight line method with no salvage value. The company’s cost of capital is 15%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)

(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases.Which project do you recommend?

compute the 1 net present value and 2 internal rate of return for each option hint t 591871

Oklahoma Clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows.The company’s cost of capital is 8%.

Option A

Option B

Initial cost

$135,000

$203,000

Net annual cash flows

$31,000

$40,000

Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)

$50,000

$0

Salvage value

$0

$10,000

Estimated useful life

8 years

8 years

Instructions

(a) Compute the (1) net present value and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint: To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)

(b) Which option should be accepted?

prepare a variance report for the production department with the following columns 1 591778

Imperial Landscaping plants grass seed as the basic landscaping for business campuses. During a recent month the company worked on three projects (Ames, Korman, and Stilles). The company is interested in controlling the material costs, namely the grass seed, for these plantings projects.

In order to provide management with useful cost control information, the company uses standard costs and prepares monthly variance reports.Analysis reveals that the purchasing agent mistakenly purchased poor quality seed for the Ames project.The Korman project, however, received higher than standard quality seed that was on sale.The Stilles project received standard quality seed; however, the price had increased and a new employee was used to spread the seed. Shown below are quantity and cost data for each project.

Actual

Standard

Total

Project

Quantity

Costs

Quantity

Costs

Variance

Ames

500 lbs.

$1,175

460 lbs.

$1,150

$ 25 U

Korman

400

960

410

1,025

65 F

Stilles

500

1,300

480

1,200

100 U

$ 60 U

Instructions

(a) Prepare a variance report for the purchasing department with the following columns: (1) Project, (2) Actual pounds purchased, (3) Actual price, (4) Standard price, (5) Price variance, and (6) Explanation.

(b) Prepare a variance report for the production department with the following columns: (1) Project, (2) Actual pounds, (3) Standard pounds, (4) Standard price, (5) Quantity variance, and (6) Explanation.

prepare an income statement for management for the month ended january 31 2010 591780

Cepeda Company uses a standard cost accounting system. During January, the company reported the following manufacturing variances.

Materials price variance

$1,250 U

Labor quantity variance

$ 725 U

Materials quantity variance

700 F

Overhead variance

800 U

Labor price variance

525 U

In addition, 8,000 units of product were sold at $8.00 per unit. Each unit sold had a standard cost of $6.00. Selling and administrative expenses were $6,000 for the month.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement for management for the month ended January 31, 2010.

an approach that incorporates financial and nonfinancial measures in an integrated s 591781

The following is a list of terms related to performance evaluation.

(1) Balanced scorecard

(2) Variance

(3) Learning and growth perspective

(4) Nonfinancial measures

(5) Customer perspective

(6) Internal process perspective

(7) Ideal standards

(8) Normal standards

Instructions

Match each of the following descriptions with one of the terms above.

(a) The difference between total actual costs and total standard costs.

(b) An efficient level of performance that is attainable under expected operating conditions.

(c) An approach that incorporates financial and nonfinancial measures in an integrated system that links performance measurement and a company’s strategic goals.

(d) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate how well a company develops and retains its employees.

(e) An evaluation tool that is not based on dollars.

(f) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the company from the perspective of those people who buy and use its products or services.

(g) An optimum level of performance under perfect operating conditions.

(h) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness of the company’s value chain.

applied overhead to jobs at the rate of 100 of direct labor cost for standard hours 591782

Peyton Company installed a standard cost system on January 1. Selected transactions for the month of January are as follows.

1. Purchased 18,000 units of raw materials on account at a cost of $4.50 per unit. Standard cost was $4.30 per unit.

2. Issued 18,000 units of raw materials for jobs that required 17,600 standard units of raw materials.

3. Incurred 15,200 actual hours of direct labor at an actual rate of $4.80 per hour. The standard rate is $5.50 per hour. (Credit Wages Payable)

4. Performed 15,200 hours of direct labor on jobs when standard hours were 15,400.

5. Applied overhead to jobs at the rate of 100% of direct labor cost for standard hours allowed.

Instructions

Journalize the January transactions.

materials price variance shows a 2 000 favorable balance accounts payable shows 128 591783

Cesar Company uses a standard cost accounting system. Some of the ledger accounts have been destroyed in a fire. The controller asks your help in reconstructing some missing entries and balances.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Materials Price Variance shows a $2,000 favorable balance. Accounts Payable shows $128,000 of raw materials purchases. What was the amount debited to Raw Materials Inventory for raw materials purchased?

(b) Materials Quantity Variance shows a $3,000 unfavorable balance. Raw Materials Inventory shows a zero balance.What was the amount debited to Work in Process Inventory for direct materials used?

(c) Labor Price Variance shows a $1,500 unfavorable balance. Factory Labor shows a debit of $140,000 for wages incurred.What was the amount credited to Wages Payable?

(d) Factory Labor shows a credit of $140,000 for direct labor used. Labor Quantity Variance shows a $900 unfavorable balance.What was the amount debited to Work in Process for direct labor used?

(e) Overhead applied to Work in Process totaled $165,000. If the total overhead variance was $1,200 unfavorable, what was the amount of overhead costs debited to Manufacturing Overhead?

briefly interpret the overhead controllable and volume variances computed in b 591784

The following information was taken from the annual manufacturing overhead cost budget of Granada Company.

Variable manufacturing overhead costs

$33,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs

$19,800

Normal production level in labor hours

16,500

Normal production level in units

4,125

Standard labor hours per unit

4

During the year, 4,000 units were produced, 16,100 hours were worked, and the actual manufacturing overhead was $54,000.Actual fixed manufacturing overhead costs equaled budgeted fixed manufacturing overhead costs. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, fixed, and variable predetermined manufacturing overhead rates.

(b) Compute the total, controllable, and volume overhead variances.

(c) Briefly interpret the overhead controllable and volume variances computed in (b).

determine how many loans were processed 591785

The loan department of Local Bank uses standard costs to determine the overhead cost of processing loan applications. During the current month a fire occurred, and the accounting records for the department were mostly destroyed. The following data were salvaged from the ashes.

Standard variable overhead rate per hour

$9

Standard hours per application

2

Standard hours allowed

2,000

Standard fixed overhead rate per hour

$6

Actual fixed overhead cost

$13,200

Variable overhead budget based on standard hours allowed

$18,000

Fixed overhead budget

$13,200

Overhead controllable variance

$ 1,500 U

Instructions

(a) Determine the following.

(1) Total actual overhead cost.

(2) Actual variable overhead cost.

(3) Variable overhead cost applied.

(4) Fixed overhead cost applied.

(5) Overhead volume variance.

(b) Determine how many loans were processed.

compute all of the materials and labor variances 591787

Putnam Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

Direct materials—1 pound plastic at $7.00 per pound

$ 7.00

Direct labor—1.5 hours at $12.00 per hour

18.00

Variable manufacturing overhead

11.25

Fixed manufacturing overhead

3.75

Total standard cost per unit

$40.00

The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $10 per direct labor hour ($15.00 _ 1.5). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 7,500 direct labor hours (5,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $56,250 ($7.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $18,750 ($2.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,900 units were as follows.

Direct materials (20,000 pounds)

$ 98,000

Direct labor (19,600 hours)

239,120

Variable overhead

79,100

Fixed overhead

59,000

Total manufacturing costs

$475,220

The purchasing department normally buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

prepare an income statement for management ignore income taxes 591788

Sanchez Manufacturing Company uses a standard cost accounting system to account for the manufacture of exhaust fans. In July 2010, it accumulates the following data relative to 1,800 units started and finished.

Cost and Production Data

Actual

Standard

Raw materials

Units purchased

21,000

Units used

21,000

22,000

Unit cost

$3.40

$3.00

Direct labor

Hours worked

3,450

3,600

Hourly rate

$11.80

$12.50

Manufacturing overhead

Incurred

$101,500

$108,000

Applied

Manufacturing overhead was applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Normal capacity for the month was 3,400 direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted overhead costs were $20 per labor hour variable and $10 per labor hour fixed. Total budgeted fixed overhead costs were $34,000.

Jobs finished during the month were sold for $280,000. Selling and administrative expenses were $25,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the variances for (1) direct materials and (2) direct labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Prepare an income statement for management. Ignore income taxes.

which of the materials and labor variances should be investigated if management cons 591789

Sadler Clothiers manufactures women’s business suits. The company uses a standard cost accounting system. In March 2010, 15,700 suits were made. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of March when normal capacity was 20,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used in production.

Cost Element

Standard (per unit)

Actual

Direct materials

5 yards at $6.80 per yard

$547,200 for 76,000 yards

($7.20 per yard)

Direct labor

1.0 hours at $11.50 per hour

$166,880 for 14,900 hours

($11.20 per hour)

Overhead

1.0 hours at $9.30 per hour

$120,000 fixed overhead

(fixed $6.30; variable $3.00)

$49,000 variable overhead

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $126,000, and budgeted variable overhead costs were $60,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Which of the materials and labor variances should be investigated if management considers a variance of more than 5% from standard to be significant?

compute the price and quantity variances for direct materials and direct labor 591791

Moran Labs performs steroid testing services to high schools, colleges, and universities. Because the company deals solely with educational institutions, the price of each test is strictly regulated. Therefore, the costs incurred must be carefully monitored and controlled. Shown below are the standard costs for a typical test.

Direct materials (1 petrie dish @ $2 per dish)

$ 2.00

Direct labor (0.5 hours @ $20 per hour)

10.00

Variable overhead (0.5 hours @ $8 per hour)

4.00

Fixed overhead (0.5 hours @ $4 per hour)

2.00

Total standard cost per test

$18.00

The lab does not maintain an inventory of petrie dishes. Therefore, the dishes purchased each month are used that month. Actual activity for the month of May 2010, when 2,500 tests were conducted, resulted in the following.

Direct materials (2,530 dishes)

$ 5,313

Direct labor (1,240 hours)

26,040

Variable overhead

10,100

Fixed overhead

5,700

Monthly budgeted fixed overhead is $6,000. Revenues for the month were $58,000, and selling and administrative expenses were $2,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the price and quantity variances for direct materials and direct labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Prepare an income statement for management.

(d) Provide possible explanations for each unfavorable variance.

prepare the january 2010 income statement for management 591792

Harter Manufacturing Company uses standard costs with its job order cost accounting system. In January, an order (Job No. 84) was received for 5,500 units of Product D. The standard cost of 1 unit of Product D is as follows.

Direct materials—1.4 pounds at $4.00 per pound

$ 5.60

Direct labor—1 hour at $9.00 per hour

9.00

Overhead—1 hour (variable $7.40; fixed $8.00)

15.40

Standard cost per unit

$30.00

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Normal capacity for the month of January was 6,000 direct labor hours. During January, the following transactions applicable to Job No. 84 occurred.

1. Purchased 8,100 pounds of raw materials on account at $3.60 per pound.

2. Requisitioned 8,100 pounds of raw materials for production.

3. Incurred 5,100 hours of direct labor at $9.25 per hour.

4. Worked 5,100 hours of direct labor on Job No. 84.

5. Incurred $87,650 of manufacturing overhead on account.

6. Applied overhead to Job No. 84 on the basis of direct labor hours.

7. Transferred Job No. 84 to finished goods.

8. Billed customer for Job No. 84 at a selling price of $280,000.

9. Incurred selling and administrative expenses on account $61,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions.

(b) Post to the job order cost accounts.

(c) Prepare the entry to recognize the total overhead variance.

(d) Prepare the January 2010 income statement for management.

determine the standard materials cost associated with the user manuals and computer 591793

Colaw Professionals, a management consulting firm, specializes in strategic planning for financial institutions. Ken Comer and Mary Linden, partners in the firm, are assembling a new strategic planning model for use by clients. The model is designed for use on most personal computers and replaces a rather lengthy manual model currently marketed by the firm.

To market the new model Ken and Mary will need to provide clients with an estimate of the number of labor hours and computer time needed to operate the model. The model is currently being test marketed at five small financial institutions. These financial institutions are listed below, along with the number of combined computer/labor hours used by each institution to run the model one time.

Computer/Labor Hours

Financial Institutions

Required

Midland National

25

First State

45

Financial Federal

40

Pacific America

30

Lakeview National

30

Total

170

Average

34

Any company that purchases the new model will need to purchase user manuals for the system. User manuals will be sold to clients in cases of 20, at a cost of $300 per case. One manual must be used each time the model is run because each manual includes a nonreusable computer accessed password for operating the system. Also required are specialized computer forms that are sold only by Colaw. The specialized forms are sold in packages of 250, at a cost of $50 per package. One application of the model requires the use of 50 forms. This amount includes two forms that are generally wasted in each application due to printer alignment errors. The overall cost of the strategic planning model to clients is $12,000. Most clients will use the model four times annually. Colaw must provide its clients with estimates of ongoing costs incurred in operating the new planning model, and would like to do so in the form of standard costs.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) What factors should be considered in setting a standard for computer/labor hours?

(b) What alternatives for setting a standard for computer/labor hours might be used?

(c) What standard for computer/labor hours would you select? Justify your answer.

(d) Determine the standard materials cost associated with the user manuals and computer forms for each application of the strategic planning model.

discuss causes of the overhead variances what can management do to improve its perfo 591794

Ed Widner and Associates is a medium sized company located near a large metropolitan area in the Midwest. The company manufactures cabinets of mahogany, oak, and other fine woods for use in expensive homes, restaurants, and hotels. Although some of the work is custom, many of the cabinets are a standard size.

One such non custom model is called Luxury Base Frame. Normal production is 1,000 units. Each unit has a direct labor hour standard of 5 hours. Overhead is applied to production based on standard direct labor hours. During the most recent month, only 900 units were produced; 4,500 direct labor hours were allowed for standard production, but only 4,000 hours were used. Standard and actual overhead costs were as follows.

Standard

Actual

(1,000 units)

(900 units)

Indirect materials

$ 12,000

$ 12,300

Indirect labor

43,000

51,000

(Fixed) Manufacturing supervisors salaries

22,000

22,000

(Fixed) Manufacturing office employees salaries

13,000

11,500

(Fixed) Engineering costs

27,000

25,000

Computer costs

10,000

10,000

Electricity

2,500

2,500

(Fixed) Manufacturing building depreciation

8,000

8,000

(Fixed) Machinery depreciation

3,000

3,000

(Fixed) Trucks and forklift depreciation

1,500

1,500

Small tools

700

1,400

(Fixed) Insurance

500

500

(Fixed) Property taxes

300

300

Total

$143,500

$149,000

Instructions

(a) Determine the overhead application rate.

(b) Determine how much overhead was applied to production.

(c) Calculate the controllable overhead variance and the overhead volume variance.

(d) Decide which overhead variances should be investigated.

(e) Discuss causes of the overhead variances. What can management do to improve its performance next month?

what measure s might the company take to obtain valid data for setting the labor tim 591796

At Camden Manufacturing Company, production workers in the Painting Department are paid on the basis of productivity. The labor time standard for a unit of production is established through periodic time studies conducted by the Lowery Management Department. In a time study, the actual time required to complete a specific task by a worker is observed. Allowances are then made for preparation time, rest periods, and clean up time. Ron Orlano is one of several veterans in the Painting Department.

Ron is informed by Lowery Management that he will be used in the time study for the painting of a new product. The findings will be the basis for establishing the labor time standard for the next 6 months. During the test, Ron deliberately slows his normal work pace in an effort to obtain a labor time standard that will be easy to meet. Because it is a new product, the Lowery Management representative who conducted the test is unaware that Ron did not give the test his best effort.

Instructions

(a) Who was benefited and who was harmed by Ron’s actions?

(b) Was Ron ethical in the way he performed the time study test?

(c) What measure(s) might the company take to obtain valid data for setting the labor time standard?

will your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate addi 591798

Juanita Company must decide whether to make or buy some of its components. The costs of producing 50,000 electrical cords for its floor lamps are as follows.

Direct materials

$60,000

Variable overhead

$12,000

Direct labor

$30,000

Fixed overhead

$8,000

Instead of making the electrical cords at an average cost per unit of $2.20 ($110,000 / 50,000), the company has an opportunity to buy the cords at $2.15 per unit. If the company purchases the cords, all variable costs and one half of the fixed costs will be eliminated.

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis showing whether the company should make or buy the electrical cords. (b)Will your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate additional income of $25,000?

would your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate add 591841

Barney Company must decide whether to make or buy some of its components. The costs of producing 60,000 switches for its generators are as follows.

Direct materials

$30,000

Variable overhead

$45,000

Direct labor

$42,000

Fixed overhead

$60,000

Instead of making the switches at an average cost of $2.95 ($177,000 ÷ 60,000), the company has an opportunity to buy the switches at $2.75 per unit. If the company purchases the switches, all the variable costs and one third of the fixed costs will be eliminated.

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis showing whether the company should make or buy the switches. (b)Would your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate additional income of $30,000?

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 591845

Pender has prepared the following list of statements about decision making and incremental analysis.

1. The first step in management’s decision making process is, “Determine and evaluate possible courses of action.”

2. The final step in management’s decision making process is to actually make the decision.

3. Accounting’s contribution to management’s decision making process occurs primarily in evaluating possible courses of action and in reviewing the results.

4. In making business decisions, management ordinarily considers only financial information because it is objectively determined.

5. Decisions involve a choice among alternative courses of action.

6. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.

7. Costs that are the same under all alternative courses of action sometimes affect the decision.

8. When using incremental analysis, some costs will always change under alternative courses of action, but revenues will not.

9. Variable costs will change under alternative courses of action, but fixed costs will not.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

should wyco company accept the special order why or why not 591846

Wyco Company manufactures toasters. For the first 8 months of 2011, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 75% of plant capacity.

Sales (400,000 units)

$4,000,000

Cost of goods sold

2,400,000

Gross profit

1,600,000

Operating expenses

900,000

Net income

$ 700,000

Cost of goods sold was 70% variable and 30% fixed. Operating expenses were 60% variable and 40% fixed. In September, Wyco Company receives a special order for 40,000 toasters at $6.00 each from Salono Company of Mexico City. Acceptance of the order would result in $8,000 of shipping costs but no increase in fixed operating expenses.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Wyco Company accept the special order? Why or why not?

what assumptions underlie the decision made in part b 591847

Innova Company produces golf discs which it normally sells to retailers for $7 each. The cost of manufacturing 20,000 golf discs is:

Materials

$ 10,000

Labor

30,000

Variable overhead

20,000

Fixed overhead

40,000

Total

$100,000

Innova also incurs 5% sales commission ($0.35) on each disc sold. Mudd Corporation offers Innova $4.75 per disc for 5,000 discs. Mudd would sell the discs under its own brand name in foreign markets not yet served by Innova. If Innova accepts the offer, its fixed overhead will increase from $40,000 to $45,000 due to the purchase of a new imprinting machine. No sales commission will result from the special order.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Innova accept the special order? Why or why not?

(c) What assumptions underlie the decision made in part (b)?

what is the profit or loss of each of these segments perform the profit or loss test 591574

Fireside Corporation is organized into four operating segments. The internal reporting system generated the following segment information:

Revenues from
Outsiders

Intersegment
Transfers

Operating
Expenses

Cards

$1,200,000

$100,000

$900,000

Calendars

900,000

200,000

1,350,000

Clothing

1,000,000

–0–

700,000

Books

800,000

50,000

770,000

The company incurred additional operating expenses (of a general nature) of $700,000.

What is the profit or loss of each of these segments? Perform the profit or loss test to determine which of these segments is separately reportable.

ecru does not allocate its 1 250 000 in common expenses to the various segments perf 591575

Ecru Company has identified five industry segments: plastics, metals, lumber, paper, and finance. It appropriately consolidated each of these segments in producing its annual financial statements. Information describing each segment (in thousands) follows:

Plastics

Metals

Lumber

Paper

Finance

Sales to outside parties

$6,319

$2,144

$636

$347

–0–

Intersegment transfers

106

131

96

108

–0–

Interest income from

outside parties

–0–

19

6

–0–

$27

Interest income from

intersegment loans

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

159

Operating expenses

3,914

1,612

916

579

16

Interest expense

61

16

51

31

87

Tangible assets

1,291

2,986

314

561

104

Intangible assets

72

361

–0–

48

–0–

Intersegment loans

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

664

Ecru does not allocate its $1,250,000 in common expenses to the various segments. Perform testing procedures to determine Ecru’s reportable operating segments.

what minimum revenue amount must any one segment generate to be of significant size 591576

Following is financial information describing the six operating segments that make up Fairfield, Inc. (in thousands):

Segments

Red

Blue

Green

Pink

Black

White

Sales to outside parties

$1,811

$812

$514

$309

$121

$99

Intersegment revenues

16

91

109

–0–

16

302

Salary expense

614

379

402

312

317

62

Rent expense

139

166

81

92

42

31

Interest expense

65

59

82

49

14

5

Income tax expense (savings)

141

87

61

86

64

–0–

Consider the following questions independently. None of the six segments has a primarily financial nature.

a. What minimum revenue amount must any one segment generate to be of significant size to require disaggregated disclosure?

b. If only Red, Blue, and Green necessitate separate disclosure, is Fairfield disclosing disaggregated data for enough segments?

c. What volume of revenues must a single client generate to necessitate disclosing the existence of a major customer?

d. If each of these six segments has a profit or loss (in thousands) as follows, which warrants separate disclosure?

Red

$1,074

Blue

449

Green

140

Pink

($94)

Black

222

White

308

determine the reportable segments by performing each applicable test also describe t 591577

Mason Company has prepared consolidated financial statements for the current year and is now gathering information in connection with the following five operating segments it has identified. Determine the reportable segments by performing each applicable test. Also describe the procedure utilized to ensure that a sufficient number of segments are being separately disclosed. (Figures are in thousands.)

Company Total

Books

Computers

Maps

Travel

Finance

Sales to outside parties

$1,547

$121

$696

$416

$314

–0–

Intersegment sales

421

24

240

39

118

–0–

Interest income— external

97

60

0

0

0

$37

Interest income—

intersegment loans

147

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

147

Assets

3,398

206

1,378

248

326

1,240

Operating expenses

1,460

115

818

304

190

33

Expenses— intersegment sales

198

70

51

31

46

0

Interest expense— external

107

0

0

0

0

107

Interest expense— intersegment loans

177

21

71

38

47

0

Income tax expense (savings)

21

12

41

27

31

8

General corporate expenses

55

Unallocated operating costs

80

apply slatter rsquo s materiality tests to identify the countries to report separate 591578

Slatter Corporation operates primarily in the United States. However, a few years ago, it opened a plant in Spain to produce merchandise to sell there. This foreign operation has been so successful that during the past 24 months the company started a manufacturing plant in Italy and another in Greece. Financial information for each of these facilities follows:

Spain

Italy

Greece

Sales

$395,000

$272,000

$463,000

Intersegment transfers

–0–

–0–

62,000

Operating expenses

172,000

206,000

190,000

Interest expense

16,000

29,000

19,000

Income taxes

67,000

19,000

34,000

Long lived assets

191,000

106,000

72,000

The company’s domestic (U.S.) operations reported the following information for the current year:

Sales to unaffiliated customers

$4,610,000

Intersegment transfers

427,000

Operating expenses

2,410,000

Interest expense

136,000

Income taxes

819,000

Long lived assets

1,894,000

Slatter has adopted the following criteria for determining the materiality of an individual foreign country: (1) sales to unaffiliated customers within a country are 10 percent or more of consolidated sales or (2) long lived assets within a country are 10 percent or more of consolidated long lived assets. Apply Slatter’s materiality tests to identify the countries to report separately.

assume that actual results do not vary from the estimates provided except for that i 591579

Noventis Corporation prepared the following estimates for the four quarters of the current year:

First
Quarter

Second
Quarter

Third
Quarter

Fourth
Quarter

Sales

$1,000,000

$1,200,000

$1,400,000

$1,600,000

Cost of goods sold

400,000

480,000

550,000

600,000

Administrative costs

250,000

155,000

160,000

170,000

Advertising costs

–0–

100,000

–0–

–0–

Executive bonuses

–0–

–0–

–0–

80,000

Provision for bad debts

–0–

–0–

–0–

52,000

Annual maintenance costs

60,000

–0–

–0–

–0–

Additional Information

• First quarter administrative costs include the $100,000 annual insurance premium.

• Advertising costs paid in the second quarter relate to television advertisements that will be broadcast throughout the entire year.

• No special items affect income during the year.

• Noventis estimates an effective income tax rate for the year of 40 percent.

a. Assuming that actual results do not vary from the estimates provided, determine the amount of income to be reported each quarter of the current year.

b. Assume that actual results do not vary from the estimates provided except for that in the third quarter, the estimated annual effective income tax rate is revised downward to 38 percent. Determine the amount of income to be reported each quarter of the current year.

prepare a schedule showing the calculation of net income and earnings per share that 591580

Cambi Company began operations on January 1, 2010. In the second quarter of 2011, it adopted the FIFO method of inventory valuation. In the past, it used the LIFO method. The company’s interim income statements as originally reported under the LIFO method follow:

2010

2011

1stQ

2ndQ

3rdQ

4thQ

1stQ

Sales

$10,000

$12,000

$14,000

$16,000

$18,000

Cost of goods sold (LIFO)

4,000

5,000

5,800

7,000

8,500

Operating expenses

2,000

2,200

2,600

3,000

3,200

Income before income taxes

$4,000

$4,800

$5,600

$6,000

$6,300

Income taxes (40%)

1,600

1,920

2,240

2,400

2,520

Net income

$2,400

$2,880

$3,360

$3,600

$3,780

If the FIFO method had been used since the company began operations, cost of goods sold in each of the previous quarters would have been as follows:

2010

2011

1stQ

2ndQ

3rdQ

4thQ

1stQ

Cost of goods sold (FIFO)

$3,800

$4,600

$5,200

$6,000

$7,400

Sales for the second quarter of 2011 are $20,000, cost of goods sold under the FIFO method is $9,000, and operating expenses are $3,400. The effective tax rate remains 40 percent. Cambi Company has 1,000 shares of common stock outstanding.

Prepare a schedule showing the calculation of net income and earnings per share that Cambi reports for the three month period and the six month period ended June 30, 2011.

determine the cost of goods sold and gross profit amounts to record for the three mo 591581

The following information for Quadrado Corporation relates to the three month period ending September 30, 2011.

Units

Price per Unit

Sales

110,000

$20

Beginning inventory

20,000

12

Purchases

100,000

14

Ending inventory

10,000

–0–

Quadrado expects to purchase 150,000 units of inventory in the fourth quarter of 2011 at a cost of $15 per unit, and to have on hand 30,000 units of inventory at year end. Quadrado uses the lastin, first out (LIFO) method to account for inventory costs. Determine the cost of goods sold and gross profit amounts to record for the three months ending September 30, 2011. Prepare journal entries to reflect these amounts.

whether the company provides any enterprisewide disclosures in addition to disclosur 591582

SEGMENT REPORTING

Many companies make annual reports available on their corporate Internet home page. Annual reports also can be accessed through the SEC’s EDGAR system at www.sec.gov (under Filing Type, search for 10 K). Access the most recent annual report for a company with which you are familiar to complete the following requirements.

Required

Prepare a one page report describing your findings for the following:

1. The company’s reported operating segments and whether they are based on product lines, geographic areas, or some other basis.

2. The importance of each operating segment for the company as a whole in terms of revenues, income, and assets.

3. Whether the company provides any enterprisewide disclosures in addition to disclosures related to its operating segments.

4. Whether the company provides disclosures about major customers.

based solely on the segment information provided prepare a one page report describin 591586

WITHIN INDUSTRY COMPARISON OF SEGMENT INFORMATION

Many companies make annual reports available on their corporate Internet home page. Annual reports also can be accessed through the SEC’s EDGAR system at www.sec.gov (under Filing Type, search for 10 K). Access the most recent annual report for two companies generally considered to be competitors. Possible companies include these:

Beverages: Coca Cola, PepsiCo

Chemical: Dow Chemical, DuPont, Monsanto, Union Carbide

Computer: Apple Computer, Dell, Hewlett Packard, IBM

Food products: Campbell Soup, Heinz, Sara Lee

Petroleum: Chevron, ExxonMobil

Pharmaceutical: Eli Lilly, Merck, Pfizer

Toys: Hasbro, Mattel

Required

Based solely on the segment information provided, prepare a one page report describing and comparing the two companies.

whether contingencies are required to be disclosed in interim reports and if so how 591588

INTERIM REPORTING

Caplan Pharma, Inc., recently was sued by a competitor for possible infringement of the competitor’s patent on a top selling flu vaccine. The plaintiff is suing for damages of $15 million. Caplan’s CFO has discussed the case with legal counsel, who believes it is possible that Caplan will not be able to successfully defend the lawsuit. The CFO knows that current U.S. accounting guidelines require that contingencies (such as lawsuits) must be disclosed in the annual report when a loss is possible. However, she is unsure whether this rule must be applied in the preparation of interim financial statements. She also knows that disclosure is necessary only if the amount is material, but she is unsure whether materiality should be assessed in relation to results for the interim period or for the entire year.

Required

Search current U.S. accounting standards to determine whether contingencies are required to be disclosed in interim reports, and, if so, how materiality is to be determined. Identify the source of guidance for answering these questions.

during the year management decided not to replace a worker who quit in march but it 591716

G Bar Pastures is a 400 acre farm on the outskirts of the Kentucky Bluegrass, specializing in the boarding of broodmares and their foals. A recent economic downturn in the thoroughbred industry has led to a decline in breeding activities, and it has made the boarding business extremely competitive. To meet the competition, G Bar Pastures planned in 2010 to entertain clients, advertise more extensively, and absorb expenses formerly paid by clients such as veterinary and blacksmith fees.

The budget report for 2010 is presented below. As shown, the static income statement budget for the year is based on an expected 21,900 boarding days at $25 per mare. The variable expenses per mare per day were budgeted: Feed $5,Veterinary fees $3, Blacksmith fees $0.30, and Supplies $0.55. All other budgeted expenses were either semi fixed or fixed.

During the year, management decided not to replace a worker who quit in March, but it did issue a new advertising brochure and did more entertaining of clients.

G BAR PASTURES
Static Budget Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2010

Actual

Master
Budget

Difference

Number of mares per day

52

60

8*

Number of boarding days

18,980

21,900

2,920*

Sales

$379,600

$547,500

$167,900*

Less variable expenses:

Feed

104,390

109,500

5,110

Veterinary fees

58,838

65,700

6,862

Blacksmith fees

6,074

6,570

496

Supplies

10,178

12,045

1,867

Total variable expenses

179,480

193,815

14,335

Contribution margin

200,120

353,685

153,565*

Less fixed expenses:

Depreciation

40,000

40,000

–0–

Insurance

11,000

11,000

–0–

Utilities

12,000

14,000

2,000

Repairs and maintenance

10,000

11,000

1,000

Labor

88,000

96,000

8,000

Advertisement

12,000

8,000

4,000*

Entertainment

7,000

5,000

2,000*

Total fixed expenses

180,000

185,000

5,000

Net income

$ 20,120

$168,685

$148,565*

*Unfavorable.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Based on the static budget report:

(1) What was the primary cause(s) of the loss in net income?

(2) Did management do a good, average, or poor job of controlling expenses?

(3) Were management’s decisions to stay competitive sound?

(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for the year based on boarding days.

(c) Based on the flexible budget report, answer the three questions in part (a) above.

(d) What course of action do you recommend for the management of G Bar Pastures?

the outlet sales department is an investment center because each manager is given fu 591717

Fugate Company manufactures expensive watch cases sold as souvenirs. Three of its sales departments are: Retail Sales,Wholesale Sales, and Outlet Sales. The Retail Sales Department is a profit center.The Wholesale Sales Department is a cost center. Its managers merely take orders from customers who purchase through the company’s wholesale catalog. The Outlet Sales Department is an investment center, because each manager is given full responsibility for an outlet store location. The manager can hire and discharge employees, purchase, maintain, and sell equipment, and in general is fairly independent of company control.

Jane Duncan is a manager in the Retail Sales Department. Richard Wayne manages the Wholesale Sales Department. Jose Lopez manages the Golden Gate Club outlet store in San Francisco. The following are the budget responsibility reports for each of the three departments.

Budget

Retail
Sales

Wholesale
Sales

Outlet
Sales

Sales

$ 750,000

$ 400,000

$200,000

Variable costs

Cost of goods sold

150,000

100,000

25,000

Advertising

100,000

30,000

5,000

Sales salaries

75,000

15,000

3,000

Printing

10,000

20,000

5,000

Travel

20,000

30,000

2,000

Fixed costs

Rent

50,000

30,000

10,000

Insurance

5,000

2,000

1,000

Depreciation

75,000

100,000

40,000

Investment in assets

$1,000,000

$1,200,000

$800,000

Actual Results

Retail
Sales

Wholesale
Sales

Outlet
Sales

Sales

$ 750,000

$ 400,000

$200,000

Variable costs

Cost of goods sold

195,000

120,000

26,250

Advertising

100,000

30,000

5,000

Sales salaries

75,000

15,000

3,000

Printing

10,000

20,000

5,000

Travel

15,000

20,000

1,500

Fixed costs

Rent

40,000

50,000

12,000

Insurance

5,000

2,000

1,000

Depreciation

80,000

90,000

60,000

Investment in assets

$1,000,000

$1,200,000

$800,000

Instructions

(a) Determine which of the items should be included in the responsibility report for each of the three managers.

(b) Compare the actual results with the budget. Decide which results should be called to the attention of each manager.

how much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1 500 un 591718

The manufacturing overhead budget for Edmonds Company contains the following items.

Variable costs

Fixed costs

Indirect materials

$24,000

Supervision

$18,000

Indirect labor

12,000

Inspection costs

1,000

Maintenance expense

10,000

Insurance expense

2,000

Manufacturing supplies

6,000

Depreciation

15,000

Total variable

$52,000

Total fixed

$36,000

The budget was based on an estimated 2,000 units being produced. During the past month, 1,500 units were produced, and the following costs incurred.

Variable costs

Fixed costs

Indirect materials

$24,200

Supervision

$19,300

Indirect labor

13,500

Inspection costs

1,200

Maintenance expense

8,200

Insurance expense

2,200

Manufacturing supplies

5,100

Depreciation

14,700

Total variable

$51,000

Total fixed

$37,400

Instructions

(a) Determine which items would be controllable by Mark Farris, the production manager.

(b) How much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1,500 units?

(c) Prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget report for Mr. Farris.

(d) Prepare a responsibility report. Include only the costs that would have been controllable by

Mr. Farris. Assume that the supervision cost above includes Mr. Farris’s salary of $10,000, both at budget and actual. In an attached memo, describe clearly for Mr. Farris the areas in which his performance needs to be improved.

what might the company do to reduce the pressures on managers and decrease the ethic 591719

National Products Corporation participates in a highly competitive industry. In order to meet this competition and achieve profit goals, the company has chosen the decentralized form of organization. Each manager of a decentralized investment center is measured on the basis of profit contribution, market penetration, and return on investment. Failure to meet the objectives established by corporate management for these measures has not been acceptable and usually has resulted in demotion or dismissal of an investment center manager.

An anonymous survey of managers in the company revealed that the managers feel the pressure to compromise their personal ethical standards to achieve the corporate objectives. For example, at certain plant locations there was pressure to reduce quality control to a level which could not assure that all unsafe products would be rejected.Also, sales personnel were encouraged to use questionable sales tactics to obtain orders, including gifts and other incentives to purchasing agents. The chief executive officer is disturbed by the survey findings. In his opinion such behavior cannot be condoned by the company. He concludes that the company should do something about this problem.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders (the affected parties) in this situation?

(b) Identify the ethical implications, conflicts, or dilemmas in the above described situation.

(c) What might the company do to reduce the pressures on managers and decrease the ethical conflicts?

compute muhsin rsquo s total standard cost per unit 591768

Muhsin Company has gathered the information shown on the next page about its product. Direct materials: Each unit of product contains 4.5 pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is 0.5 pounds. Materials cost $4 per pound, but Muhsin always takes the 2% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.25 per pound.

Direct labor: Each unit requires 2 hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average 0.2 hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Muhsin’s employees is $12. Payroll taxes and fringe benfits are an additional $3 per hour. Manufacturing overhead: Overhead is applied at a rate of $6 per direct labor hour.

Instructions

Compute Muhsin’s total standard cost per unit.

compute the total price and quantity variances for materials and labor 591772

Haslett Inc., which produces a single product, has prepared the following standard cost sheet for one unit of the product.

Direct materials (8 pounds at $2.50 per pound)

$20

Direct labor (3 hours at $12.00 per hour)

$36

During the month of April, the company manufactures 230 units and incurs the following actual costs.

Direct materials purchased and used (1,900 pounds)

$4,940

Direct labor (700 hours)

$8,120

Instructions

Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.

provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated a 591773

The direct materials and direct labor data shown on the next page pertain to the operations of Solario Manufacturing Company for the month of August.

Costs

Quantities

Actual labor rate

$13 per hour

Actual hours incurred

and used

4,200 hours

Actual materials price

$128 per ton

Actual quantity of

materials purchased

Standard labor rate

$12 per hour

and used

1,225 tons

Standard materials price

$130 per ton

Standard hours used

4,300 hours

Standard quantity of

materials used

1,200 tons

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.

(b) Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.

prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labor cost variances for march 591774

During March 2010, Hinton Tool & Die Company worked on four jobs. A review of direct labor costs reveals the following summary data.

Job

Actual

Standard

Total

Number

Hours

Costs

Hours

Costs

Variance

A257

220

$ 4,400

225

$4,500

$ 100 F

A258

450

9,900

430

8,600

1,300 U

A259

300

6,150

300

6,000

150 U

A260

115

2,070

110

2,200

130 F

Total variance

$1,220 U

Analysis reveals that Job A257 was a repeat job. Job A258 was a rush order that required overtime work at premium rates of pay. Job A259 required a more experienced replacement worker on one shift. Work on Job A260 was done for one day by a new trainee when a regular worker was absent.

Instructions

Prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labor cost variances for March. The report should have columns for (1) Job No., (2) Actual Hours, (3) Standard Hours, (4) Quantity Variance, (5) Actual Rate, (6) Standard Rate, (7) Price Variance, and (8) Explanation.

compute the predetermined variable overhead rate and the predetermined fixed overhea 591776

Jay Levitt Company produces one product, a putter called GO Putter. Levitt uses a standard cost system and determines that it should take one hour of direct labor to produce one GO Putter. The normal production capacity for this putter is 100,000 units per year. The total budgeted overhead at normal capacity is $800,000 comprised of $200,000 of variable costs and $600,000 of fixed costs. Levitt applies overhead on the basis of direct labor hours.

During the current year, Levitt produced 90,000 putters, worked 94,000 direct labor hours, and incurred variable overhead costs of $186,000 and fixed overhead costs of $600,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the predetermined variable overhead rate and the predetermined fixed overhead rate.

(b) Compute the applied overhead for Levitt for the year.

(c) Compute the total overhead variance.

indicate the effect mdash understate overstate no effect mdash that each of the foll 591515

Indicate the effect—Understate, Overstate, No Effect—that each of the following errors has on 2012 net income and 2013 net income.

2012

2013

(a) Equipment purchased in 2010 was expensed.

(b) Wages payable were not recorded at 12/31/12.

(c) Equipment purchased in 2012 was expensed.

(d) 2012 ending inventory was overstated.

(e) Patent amortization was not recorded in 2013.

roundtree manufacturing co is preparing its year end financial statements and is con 591516

Roundtree Manufacturing Co. is preparing its year end financial statements and is considering the accounting for the following items.

1. The vice president of sales had indicated that one product line has lost its customer appeal and will be phased out over the next 3 years. Therefore, a decision has been made to lower the estimated lives on related production equipment from the remaining 5 years to 3 years.

2. The Hightone Building was converted from a sales office to offices for the Accounting Department at the beginning of this year. Therefore, the expense related to this building will now appear as an administrative expense rather than a selling expense on the current year’s income statement.

3. Estimating the lives of new products in the Leisure Products Division has become very difficult because of the highly competitive conditions in this market. Therefore, the practice of deferring and amortizing preproduction costs has been abandoned in favor of expensing such costs as they are incurred. Identify and explain whether each of the above items is a change in principle, a change in estimate, or an error.

when the year end physical inventory adjustment was made for the current year the co 591517

Palmer Co. is evaluating the appropriate accounting for the following items.

1. Management has decided to switch from the FIFO inventory valuation method to the LIFO inventory valuation method for all inventories.

2. When the year end physical inventory adjustment was made for the current year, the controller discovered that the prior year’s physical inventory sheets for an entire warehouse were mislaid and excluded from last year’s count.

3. Palmer’s Custom Division manufactures large scale, custom designed machinery on a contract basis. Management decided to switch from the completed contract method to the percentage of completion method of accounting for long term contracts. Identify and explain whether each of the above items is a change in accounting principle, a change in estimate, or an error.

prepare oliver rsquo s journal entries to record the purchase of the investment and 591518

Oliver Corporation has owned stock of Conrad Corporation since 2009. At December 31, 2012, its balances related to this investment were:

Equity Investments

$185,000

Fair Value Adjustment (AFS)

34,000 Dr.

Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss—Equity

34,000 Cr.

On January 1, 2013, Oliver purchased additional stock of Conrad Company for $475,000 and now has significant influence over Conrad. If the equity method had been used in 2009–2012, Oliver’s share of income would have been $33,000 greater than dividends received. Prepare Oliver’s journal entries to record the purchase of the investment and the change to the equity method.

what income tax amount does this affiliated group pay for the current period 591519

Clarke has a controlling interest in Rogers’ outstanding stock. At the current year end, the following information has been accumulated for these two companies:

Operating Income

Dividends Paid

Clarke

$500,000

$90,000

(includes a $90,000 net unrealized gain on intra entity inventory transfers)

Rogers

240,000

80,000

Clarke uses the initial value method to account for the investment in Rogers. The operating income figures just presented include neither dividend nor other investment income. The effective tax rate for both companies is 40 percent.

a. Assume that Clarke owns 100 percent of Rogers’s voting stock and is filing a consolidated tax return. What income tax amount does this affiliated group pay for the current period?

b. Assume that Clarke owns 92 percent of Rogers’s voting stock and is filing a consolidated tax return. What amount of income taxes does this affiliated group pay for the current period?

c. Assume that Clarke owns 80 percent of Rogers’s voting stock, but the companies elect to file separate tax returns. What is the total amount of income taxes that these two companies pay for the current period?

d. Assume that Clarke owns 70 percent of Rogers’s voting stock, requiring separate tax returns. What is the total amount of income tax expense to be recognized in the consolidated income statement for the current period?

e. Assume that Clarke owns 70 percent of Rogers’s voting stock so that separate tax returns are required. What amount of income taxes does Clarke have to pay for the current year?

on consolidated financial statements for 2011 what are the income tax expense and in 591520

On January 1, 2010, Piranto acquires 90 percent of Slinton’s outstanding shares. Financial information for these two companies for the years of 2010 and 2011 follows:

2010

2011

Piranto Company:

Sales

$(600,000)

($800,000)

Operational expenses

400,000

500,000

Unrealized gains as of end of year

(included in above figures)

120,000

150,000

Dividend income—Slinton Company Slinton Company:

18,000

36,000

Sales

200,000

250,000

Operational expenses

120,000

150,000

Dividends paid

20,000

40,000

Assume that a tax rate of 40 percent is applicable to both companies.

a. On consolidated financial statements for 2011, what are the income tax expense and the income tax currently payable if Piranto and Slinton file a consolidated tax return as an affiliated group?

b. On consolidated financial statements for 2011, what are the income tax expense and income tax currently payable for each company if they choose to file separate returns?

if lake owns a 90 percent interest in boxwood and a consolidated tax return is filed 591521

Lake acquired a controlling interest in Boxwood several years ago. During the current fiscal period, the two companies individually reported the following income (exclusive of any investment income):

Lake

$300,000

Boxwood

100,000

Lake paid a $90,000 cash dividend during the current year and Boxwood distributed $10,000. Boxwood sells inventory to Lake each period. Unrealized intra entity gains of $18,000 were present in Lake’s beginning inventory for the current year, and its ending inventory carried $32,000 in unrealized profits.

View each of the following questions as an independent situation. The effective tax rate for both companies is 40 percent.

a. If Lake owns a 60 percent interest in Boxwood, what total income tax expense must be reported on a consolidated income statement for this period?

b. If Lake owns a 60 percent interest in Boxwood, what total amount of income taxes must be paid by these two companies for the current year?

c. If Lake owns a 90 percent interest in Boxwood and a consolidated tax return is filed, what amount of income tax expense would be reported on a consolidated income statement for the year?

assume that garrison holds 60 percent of robertson rsquo s voting stock on a separat 591522

Garrison holds a controlling interest in Robertson’s outstanding stock. For the current year, the following information has been gathered about these two companies:

Garrison

Robertson

Operating income

$300,000

$200,000

(includes a $50,000 net unrealized gain on an intra entity transfer)

Dividends paid

32,000

50,000

Tax rate

40%

40%

Garrison uses the cost method to account for the investment in Robertson. Garrison’s operating income figure does not include dividend income for the current year.

a. Assume that Garrison owns 80 percent of Robertson’s voting stock. On a consolidated tax return, what amount of income tax is paid?

b. Assume that Garrison owns 80 percent of Robertson’s voting stock. On separate tax returns, what total amount of income tax is paid?

c. Assume that Garrison owns 70 percent of Robertson’s voting stock. What total amount of income tax expense does a consolidated income statement recognize?

d. Assume that Garrison holds 60 percent of Robertson’s voting stock. On a separate income tax return, what amount of income tax does Garrison have to pay?

assume that the effective tax rate is 30 percent on a consolidated balance sheet pre 591523

Leftwich recently purchased all of Kew Corporation’s stock and is now consolidating the financial data of this new subsidiary. Leftwich paid a total of $650,000 for the company, which has the following accounts:

Fair Value

Tax Basis

Accounts receivable

$110,000

$110,000

Inventory

130,000

130,000

Land

100,000

100,000

Buildings

180,000

140,000

Equipment

200,000

150,000

Liabilities

220,000

220,000

Assume that the effective tax rate is 30 percent. On a consolidated balance sheet prepared immediately after this takeover, what impact does the acquisition of Kew have on the individual asset and liability accounts reported by the business combination?

at the acquisition date house prepared the following fair value allocation schedule 591524

House Corporation has been operating profitably since its creation in 1959. At the beginning of 2009, House acquired a 70 percent ownership in Wilson Company. At the acquisition date, House prepared the following fair value allocation schedule:

Consideration transferred for 70 percent interest in Wilson

$707,000

Fair value of the 30% noncontrolling interest

303,000

Wilson business fair value

$1,010,000

Wilson book value

790,000

Excess fair value over book value

$220,000

Assignments to adjust Wilson’s assets to fair value:

To buildings (20 year life)

$60,000

To equipment (4 year life)

20,000

To franchises (10 year life)

40,000

80,000

To goodwill (indefinite life)

$140,000

House regularly buys inventory from Wilson at a markup of 25 percent more than cost. House’s purchases during 2009 and 2010 and related ending inventory balances follow:

Year

Intra Entity Purchases

Retained Intra Entity Inventory—End of Year (at transfer price)

2009

$120,000

$40,000

2010

150,000

60,000

On January 1, 2011, House and Wilson acted together as co acquirers of 80 percent of Cuddy Company’s outstanding common stock. The total price of these shares was $240,000, indicating neither goodwill nor other specific fair value allocations. Each company put up one half of the consideration transferred. During 2011, House acquired additional inventory from Wilson at a price of $200,000. Of this merchandise, 45 percent is still held at year end.

Using the three companies’ following financial records for 2011, prepare a consolidation worksheet. The partial equity method based on operational earnings has been applied to each investment.

House Corporation

Wilson Company

Cuddy Company

Sales and other revenues

$ (900,000)

($700,000)

($300,000)

Cost of goods sold

551,000

300,000

140,000

Operating expenses

219,000

270,000

90,000

Income of Wilson Company

91,000

–0–

–0–

Income of Cuddy Company

28,000

28,000

–0–

Net income

($249,000)

($158,000)

($70,000)

Retained earnings, 1/1/11

($820,000)

($590,000)

($150,000)

Net income (above)

249,000

158,000

70,000

Dividends paid

100,000

96,000

50,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

($969,000)

($652,000)

($170,000)

Cash and receivables

$220,000

$334,000

$67,000

Inventory

390,200

320,000

103,000

Investment in Wilson Company

807,800

–0–

–0–

Investment in Cuddy Company

128,000

128,000

–0–

Buildings

385,000

320,000

144,000

Equipment

310,000

130,000

88,000

Land

180,000

300,000

16,000

Total assets

$2,421,000

$1,532,000

$418,000

Liabilities

($632,000)

($570,000)

($98,000)

Common stock

820,000

310,000

150,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

969,000

652,000

170,000

Total liabilities and equities

($2,421,000)

($1,532,000)

($418,000)

what worksheet entries are required to consolidate these two companies for 2011 what 591525

Mighty Company purchased a 60 percent interest in Lowly Company on January 1, 2010, for $420,000 in cash. Lowly’s book value at that date was reported as $600,000 and the fair value of the noncontrolling interest was assessed at $280,000. Any excess acquisition date fair value over Lowly’s book value is assigned to trademarks to be amortized over 20 years. Subsequently, on January 1, 2011, Lowly acquired a 20 percent interest in Mighty. The price of $240,000 was equivalent to 20 percent of Mighty’s book and fair value.

Neither company has paid dividends since these acquisitions occurred. On January 1, 2011, Lowly’s book value was $800,000, a figure that rises to $840,000 (Common Stock of $300,000 and Retained Earnings of $540,000) by year end. Mighty’s book value was $1.7 million at the beginning of 2011 and $1.8 million (Common Stock of $1 million and Retained Earnings of $800,000) at December 31, 2011. No intra entity transactions have occurred and no additional stock has been sold. Each company applies the initial value method in accounting for the individual investments.

What worksheet entries are required to consolidate these two companies for 2011? What is the noncontrolling interest in the subsidiary’s net income for this year?

travers has a policy to pay cash dividends each year equal to 40 percent of operatio 591526

On January 1, 2010, Travers Company acquired 90 percent of Yarrow Company’s outstanding stock for $720,000. The 10 percent noncontrolling interest had an assessed fair value of $80,000 on that date. Any acquisition date excess fair value over book value was attributed to an unrecorded customer list developed by Yarrow with a remaining life of 15 years.

On the same date, Yarrow acquired an 80 percent interest in Stookey Company for $344,000. At the acquisition date, the 20 percent noncontrolling interest fair value was $86,000. Any excess fair value was attributed to a fully amortized copyright that had a remaining life of 10 years. Although both investments are accounted for using the initial value method, neither Yarrow nor Stookey have distributed dividends since the acquisition date. Travers has a policy to pay cash dividends each year equal to 40 percent of operational earnings. Reported income totals for 2011 follow:

Travers Company

$300,000

Yarrow Company

160,000

Stookey Company

120,000

Following are the 2011 financial statements for these three companies. Stookey has transferred numerous amounts of inventory to Yarrow since the takeover amounting to $80,000 (2010) and $100,000 (2011). These transactions include the same markup applicable to Stookey’s outside sales.

In each year, Yarrow carried 20 percent of this inventory into the succeeding year before disposing of it. An effective tax rate of 45 percent is applicable to all companies.

Travers Company

Yarrow Company

Stookey Company

Sales

($900,000)

($600,000)

($500,000)

Cost of goods sold

480,000

320,000

260,000

Operating expenses

100,000

80,000

140,000

Net income

($320,000)

($200,000)

($100,000)

Retained earnings, 1/1/11

($700,000)

($600,000)

($300,000)

Net income (above)

320,000

200,000

100,000

Dividends paid

128,000

–0–

–0–

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

($892,000)

($800,000)

($400,000)

Current assets

$444,000

$380,000

$280,000

Investment in Yarrow Company

720,000

–0–

–0–

Investment in Stookey Company

–0–

344,000

–0–

Land, buildings, and equipment (net)

949,000

836,000

520,000

Total assets

$2,113,000

$1,560,000

$800,000

Liabilities

($721,000)

($460,000)

($200,000)

Common stock

500,000

300,000

200,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

892,000

800,000

400,000

Total liabilities and equities

($2,113,000)

($1,560,000)

($800,000)

a. Prepare the business combination’s 2011 consolidation worksheet; ignore income tax effects.

b. Determine the amount of income tax for Travers and Yarrow on a consolidated tax return for 2011.

c. Determine the amount of Stookey’s income tax on a separate tax return for 2011.

d. Based on the answers to requirements (b) and (c), what journal entry does this combination make to record 2011 income tax?

with a tax rate of 40 percent what income tax journal entry is recorded if these two 591527

Politan Company acquired an 80 percent interest in Soludan Company on January 1, 2010. Any portion of Soludan’s business fair value in excess of its corresponding book value was assigned to trademarks. This intangible asset has subsequently undergone annual amortization based on a 15 year life. Over the past two years, regular intra entity inventory sales transpired between the two companies. No payment has yet been made on the latest transfer. Following are the individual financial statements for the two companies as well as consolidated totals for 2011:

Politan Company

Soludan Company

Consolidated Totals

Sales

($800,000)

($600,000)

($1,280,000)

Cost of goods sold

500,000

400,000

784,000

Operating expenses

100,000

100,000

202,500

Income of Soludan

80,000

–0–

–0–

Separate company net income

($280,000)

($100,000)

Consolidated net income

($293,500)

Noncontrolling interest in

Soludan Company’s income

18,700

Controlling interest in

consolidated net income

($274,800)

Retained earnings, 1/1/11

($620,000)

($290,000)

($611,600)

Net income (above)

280,000

100,000

274,800

Dividends paid

70,000

20,000

70,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/

($830,000)

370,000

($816,400)

Cash and receivables

$290,000

$90,000

$360,000

Inventory

190,000

160,000

338,000

Investment in Soludan Company

390,000

–0–

–0–

Land, buildings, and equipment

380,000

260,000

640,000

Trademarks

–0–

–0–

32,500

Total assets

$1,250,000

$510,000

$1,370,500

Liabilities

($270,000)

($60,000)

($310,000)

Noncontrolling interest in

Soludan Company

–0–

–0–

94,100

Common stock

120,000

80,000

120,000

Additional paid in capital

30,000

–0–

30,000

Retained earnings (above)

830,000

370,000

816,400

Total liabilities and equities

($1,250,000)

($510,000)

($1,370,500)

a. What method does Politan use to account for its investment in Soludan?

b. What is the balance of the unrealized inventory gain deferred at the end of the current period?

c. What amount was originally allocated to the trademarks?

d. What is the amount of the current year intra entity inventory sales?

e. Were the intra entity inventory sales made upstream or downstream?

f. What is the balance of the intra entity liability at the end of the current year?

g. What unrealized gain was deferred into the current year from the preceding period?

h. The beginning consolidated Retained Earnings account shows a balance of $611,600 rather than the $620,000 reported by the parent. What creates this difference?

i. How was the ending Noncontrolling Interest in Soludan Company computed?

j. With a tax rate of 40 percent, what income tax journal entry is recorded if the companies prepare a consolidated tax return?

k. With a tax rate of 40 percent, what income tax journal entry is recorded if these two companies prepare separate tax returns?

following are the individual financial statements for the companies for 2011 with co 591528

On January 1, 2009, Alpha acquired 80 percent of Delta. Of Delta’s total business fair value, $125,000 was allocated to copyrights with a 20 year remaining life. Subsequently, on January 1, 2010, Delta obtained 70 percent of Omega’s outstanding voting shares. In this second acquisition, $120,000 of Omega’s total business fair value was assigned to copyrights that had a remaining life of 12 years. Delta’s book value was $490,000 on January 1, 2009, and Omega reported a book value of $140,000 on January 1, 2010.

Delta has made numerous inventory transfers to Alpha since the business combination was formed. Unrealized gains of $15,000 were present in Alpha’s inventory as of January 1, 2011. During the year, $200,000 in additional intra entity sales were made with $22,000 in gains remaining unrealized at the end of the period. Both Alpha and Delta utilized the partial equity method to account for their investment balances.

Following are the individual financial statements for the companies for 2011 with consolidated totals. Develop the worksheet entries necessary to derive these reported balances:

Alpha Company

Delta Company

Omega Company

Consolidated Totals

Sales

($900,000)

($500,000)

200000

($1,400,000)

Cost of goods sold

500,000

240,000

80000

627,000

Operating expenses

294,000

129,000

50000

489,250

Income of subsidiary

144,000

49,000

–0–

–0–

Separate company net income

($250,000)

($180,000)

70000

Consolidated net income

($283,750)

Noncontrolling interest in income

of Delta Company

31,950

Noncontrolling interest in income

of Omega Company

18,000

Controlling interest in consolidated

net income

($233,800)

Retained earnings, 1/1/11

($600,000)

($400,000)

($100,000)

($572,400)

Net income (above)

250,000

180,000

70,000

233,800

Dividends paid

50,000

40,000

50,000

50,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

($800,000)

($540,000)

($120,000)

($756,200)

Cash and receivables

$262,000

$206,000

$70,000

$538,000

Inventory

290,000

310,000

160,000

738,000

Investment in Delta Company

628,000

–0–

–0–

–0–

Investment in Omega Company

–0–

238,000

–0–

–0–

Property, plant, and equipment

420,000

316,000

270,000

1,006,000

Copyrights

–0–

–0–

–0–

206,250

Total assets

$1,600,000

$1,070,000

$500,000

$2,488,250

Liabilities

($600,000)

($410,000)

($280,000)

($1,290,000)

Common stock

200,000

120,000

100,000

200,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/11

800,000

540,000

120,000

756,200

Noncontrolling interest in Delta Company, 12/31/11

–0–

–0–

–0–

146,050

Noncontrolling interest in Omega Company, 12/31/11

–0–

–0–

–0–

96,000

Total liabilities and equities

($1,600,000)

($1,070,000)

($500,000)

($2,488,250)

total entity net income for the three companies less noncontrolling interest in the 591529

INDIRECT SUBSIDIARY CONTROL

Summit owns a 90 percent majority voting interest in Treeline. In turn, Treeline owns a 70 percent majority voting interest in Basecamp. In the current year, each firm reports the following income and dividends. Operating income figures do not include any investment or dividend income.

Operating Income

Dividends Paid

Summit

$345,000

$150,000

Tree line

280,000

100,000

Basecamp

175,000

40,000

In addition, in computing its income on a full accrual basis, Treeline’s acquisition of Basecamp necessitates excess acquisition date fair value over book value amortizations of $25,000 per year. Similarly, Summit’s acquisition of Treeline requires $20,000 of excess fair value amortizations.

Required

Prepare an Excel spreadsheet that computes the following:

1. Treeline’s income including its equity in Basecamp earnings.

2. Summit’s income including its equity in Treeline’s total earnings.

3. Total entity net income for the three companies.

4. Total noncontrolling interest in the total entity’s net income.

5. Difference between these elements:

• Summit’s net income.

• Total entity net income for the three companies less noncontrolling interest in the total entity’s net income. (Hint: The difference between these two amounts should be zero.)

determine the volume of revenues that a single customer must generate to necessitate 591531

Battey Corporation manufactures several products: natural fibers, synthetic fibers, leather, plastics, and wood. It is organized into five operating divisions based on these different products. The company has a number of subsidiaries that perform operations throughout the world. At the end of 2011 as part of the internal reporting process, Battey reported the revenues, profits, and assets (in millions) to the chief operating decision maker:

Revenues by Operating Segment

United
States

Canada

Mexico

France

Italy

Brazil

Natural fibers:

Sales to external customers

$1,739

–0–

$342

$606

–0–

$1,171

Intersegment sales

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

146

Synthetic fibers:

Sales to external customers

290

$116

–0–

–0–

–0–

37

Intersegment sales

12

5

–0–

–0–

–0–

–0–

Leather:

Sales to external customers

230

–0–

57

–0–

$278

55

Intersegment sales

22

–0–

9

–0–

34

9

Plastics:

Sales to external customers

748

286

–0–

83

92

528

Intersegment sales

21

12

–0–

–0–

–0–

72

Wood:

Sales to external customers

116

22

–0–

–0–

–0–

149

Intersegment sales

17

3

–0–

–0–

–0–

28

Operating Profit or Loss
by Operating Segment

United
States

Canada

Mexico

France

Italy

Brazil

Natural fibers

$526

–0–

$92

$146

–0–

$404

Synthetic fibers

21

$8

–0–

–0–

–0–

10

Leather

70

–0–

27

–0–

$94

24

Plastics

182

74

–0–

18

24

68

Wood

18

5

–0–

–0–

–0–

37

Assets by Operating Segment

United States

Canada

Mexico

France

Italy

Brazil

Natural fibers

$1,005

–0–

$223

$296

–0–

$817

Synthetic fibers

163

$50

–0–

–0–

–0–

74

Leather

146

–0–

41

–0–

$150

38

Plastics

425

173

–0–

54

58

327

Wood

66

19

–0–

–0–

–0–

143

Required

a. Determine the operating segments that should be reported separately in Battey’s 2011 financial statements.

b. Determine the geographic areas for which Battey should report revenues separately in its 2011 financial statements. Assume that Battey has elected to define a material country as one in which sales to external customers are 10 percent or more of consolidated sales.

c. Determine the volume of revenues that a single customer must generate to necessitate disclosure of a major customer.

what is the minimum amount of revenue that each of these segments must generate to b 591561

Estilo Company has three operating segments with the following information:

Paper

Pencils

Hats

Sales to outsiders

$8,000

$4,000

$6,000

Intersegment transfers

600

1,000

1,400

In addition, corporate headquarters generates revenues of $1,000.

What is the minimum amount of revenue that each of these segments must generate to be considered separately reportable?

a. $1,800.

b. $1,900.

c. $2,000.

d. $2,100.

with respect to the profit or loss test which of the following statements is not tru 591563

Jarvis Corporation has six different operating segments reporting the following operating profit and loss figures:

K

$ 80,000 loss

L

140,000 profit

M

940,000 loss

N

$440,000 profit

O

90,000 profit

P

100,000 profit

With respect to the profit or loss test, which of the following statements is not true?

a. K is not a reportable segment based on this one test.

b. L is a reportable segment based on this one test.

c. O is not a reportable segment based on this one test.

d. P is a reportable segment based on this one test.

in its segment information for the current year how many reportable segments does qu 591564

Quatro Corp. engages solely in manufacturing operations. The following data pertain to the operating segments for the current year:

Operating Segment

Total Revenues

Profit

Assets at 12/31

A

$10,000,000

$1,750,000

$20,000,000

B

8,000,000

1,400,000

17,500,000

C

6,000,000

1,200,000

12,500,000

D

3,000,000

550,000

7,500,000

E

4,250,000

675,000

7,000,000

F

1,500,000

225,000

3,000,000

Total

$32,750,000

$5,800,000

$67,500,000

In its segment information for the current year, how many reportable segments does Quatro have?

a. Three.

b. Four.

c. Five.

d. Six.

which of the following statements is true 591566

Medford Company has seven operating segments but only four (G, H, I, and J) are of significant size to warrant separate disclosure. As a whole, the segments generated revenues of $710,000 ($520,000 + $190,000) from outside parties. In addition, the segments had $260,000 in intersegment transfers ($220,000 + $40,000).

Outside Sales

Intersegment Sales

G

$120,000

$80,000

H

150,000

50,000

I

160,000

20,000

J

90,000

70,000

Totals

$520,000

$220,000

K

$60,000

–0–

L

70,000

$20,000

M

60,000

20,000

Totals

$190,000

$40,000

Which of the following statements is true?

a. A sufficient number of segments are being reported because those segments have $740,000 in revenues of a total of $970,000 for the company as a whole.

b. Not enough segments are being reported because those segments have $520,000 in outside sales of a total of $710,000 for the company as a whole.

c. Not enough segments are being reported because those segments have $740,000 in revenues of a total of $970,000 for the company as a whole.

d. A sufficient number of segments are being reported because those segments have $520,000 in outside sales of a total of $710,000 for the company as a whole.

prepare in general journal form all entries shapiro should have made in its accounti 591466

(Lessee Entries, Capital Lease with Monthly Payments) Shapiro Inc. was incorporated in 2011 to operate as a computer software service firm with an accounting fiscal year ending August 31. Shapiro’s primary product is a sophisticated online inventory control system; its customers pay a fixed fee plus a usage charge for using the system. Shapiro has leased a large, Alpha 3 computer system from the manufacturer. The lease calls for a monthly rental of $40,000 for the 144 months (12 years) of the lease term. The estimated useful life of the computer is 15 years. Each scheduled monthly rental payment includes $3,000 for full service maintenance on the computer to be performed by the manufacturer. All rentals are payable on the first day of the month beginning with August 1, 2012, the date the computer was installed and the lease agreement was signed. The lease is no cancelable for its 12 year term, and it is secured only by the manufacturer’s chattel lien on the Alpha 3 system. This lease is to be accounted for as a capital lease by Shapiro, and it will be depreciated by the straightline method with no expected salvage value. Borrowed funds for this type of transaction would cost Shapiro 12% per year (1% per month). Following is a schedule of the present value of $1 for selected periods discounted at 1% per period when payments are made at the beginning of each period.

Periods

(months)

Present Value of $1 per Period

Discounted at 1% per Period

1

1.000

2

1.990

3

2.970

143

76.658

144

76.899

Instructions

Prepare, in general journal form, all entries Shapiro should have made in its accounting records during August 2012 relating to this lease. Give full explanations and show supporting computations for each entry. Remember, August 31, 2012, is the end of Shapiro’s fiscal accounting period and it will be preparing financial statements on that date. Do not prepare closing entries.

discuss the nature of this lease in relation to the lessor and compute the amount of 591467

(Lessor Computations and Entries, Sales Type Lease with Unguaranteed Residual Value) George Company manufactures a check in kiosk with an estimated economic life of 12 years and leases it to National Airlines for a period of 10 years. The normal selling price of the equipmen is $278,072, and its unguaranteed residual value at the end of the lease term is estimated to be $20,000. National will pay annual payments of $40,000 at the beginning of each year and all maintenance, insurance, and taxes. George incurred costs of $180,000 in manufacturing the equipment and $4,000 in negotiating and closing the lease. George has determined that the collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable, that no additional costs will be incurred, and that the implicit interest rate is 10%.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease in relation to the lessor and compute the amount of each of the following items.

(1) Lease receivable.

(2) Sales price.

(3) Cost of sales.

(b) Prepare a 10 year lease amortization schedule.

(c) Prepare all of the lessor’s journal entries for the first year.

prepare a schedule to compute for grishell trucking company the discounted present v 591469

(Basic Lessee Accounting with Difficult PV Calculation) In 2011, Grishell Trucking Company negotiated and closed a long term lease contract for newly constructed truck terminals and freight storage facilities. The buildings were erected to the company’s specifications on land owned by the company. On January 1, 2012, Grishell Trucking Company took possession of the lease properties. On January 1, 2012 and 2013, the company made cash payments of $948,000 that were recorded as rental expenses. Although the terminals have a composite useful life of 40 years, the no cancelable lease runs for 20 years from January 1, 2012, with a bargain purchase option available upon expiration of the lease. The 20 year lease is effective for the period January 1, 2012, through December 31, 2031. Advance rental payments of $800,000 are payable to the lessor on January 1 of each of the first 10 years of the lease term. Advance rental payments of $320,000 are due on January 1 for each of the last 10 years of the ease. The company has an option to purchase all of these leased facilities for $1 on December 31, 2031. It also must make annual payments to the lessor of $125,000 for property taxes and $23,000 for insurance. The lease was negotiated to assure the lessor a 6% rate of return.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare a schedule to compute for Grishell Trucking Company the discounted present value of the terminal facilities and related obligation at January 1, 2012.

(b) Assuming that the discounted present value of terminal facilities and related obligation at January 1, 2012, was $7,600,000, prepare journal entries for Grishell Trucking Company to record the:

(1) Cash payment to the lessor on January 1, 2014.

(2) Amortization of the cost of the leased properties for 2014 using the straight line method and assuming a zero salvage value.

(3) Accrual of interest expense at December 31, 2014. Selected present value factors are as follows.

Periods

For an Ordinary Annuity of $1 at 6%

For $1 at 6%

1

.943396

.943396

2

1.833393

.889996

8

6.209794

.627412

9

6.801692

.591898

10

7.360087

.558395

19

11.158117

.330513

20

11.469921

.311805

estimated residual value after 4 years is 1 100 the present value at 8 per year is 8 591472

(Operating Lease vs. Capital Lease) You are auditing the December 31, 2012, financial statements of Hockney, Inc., manufacturer of novelties and party favors. During your inspection of the company garage, you discovered that a used automobile not listed in the equipment subsidiary ledger is parked there. You ask Stacy Reeder, plant manager, about the vehicle, and she tells you that the company did not list the automobile because the company was only leasing it. The lease agreement was entered into on January 1, 2012, with Crown New and Used Cars. You decide to review the lease agreement to ensure that the lease should be afforded operating lease treatment, and you discover the following lease terms.

1. No cancelable term of 4 years.

2. Rental of $3,240 per year (at the end of each year). (The present value at 8% per year is $10,731.)

3. Estimated residual value after 4 years is $1,100. (The present value at 8% per year is $809.) Hockney guarantees the residual value of $1,100.

4. Estimated economic life of the automobile is 5 years.

5. Hockney’s incremental borrowing rate is 8% per year.

Instructions

You are a senior auditor writing a memo to your supervisor, the audit partner in charge of this audit, to discuss the above situation. Be sure to include (a) why you inspected the lease agreement, (b) what you determined about the lease, and (c) how you advised your client to account for this lease. Explain every journal entry that you believe is necessary to record this lease properly on the client’s books. (It is also necessary to include the fact that you communicated this information to your client.)

what would have been the amount capitalized by the lessee upon the inception of the 591473

(Lessee Lessor Accounting for Residual Values) Goring Dairy leases its milking equipment from King Finance Company under the following lease terms.

1. The lease term is 10 years, no cancelable, and requires equal rental payments of $30,300 due at the beginning of each year starting January 1, 2012.

2. The equipment has a fair value and cost at the inception of the lease (January 1, 2012) of $220,404, an estimated economic life of 10 years, and a residual value (which is guaranteed by Goring Dairy) of $20,000.

3. The lease contains no renewable options, and the equipment reverts to King Finance Company upon termination of the lease.

4. Goring Dairy’s incremental borrowing rate is 9% per year. The implicit rate is also 9%.

5. Goring Dairy depreciates similar equipment that it owns on a straight line basis.

6. Collectibility of the payments is reasonably predictable, and there are no important uncertainties surrounding the costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

Instructions

(a) Evaluate the criteria for classification of the lease, and describe the nature of the lease. In general, discuss how the lessee and lessor should account for the lease transaction.

(b) Prepare the journal entries for the lessee and lessor at January 1, 2012, and December 31, 2012 (the lessee’s and lessor’s year end). Assume no reversing entries.

(c) What would have been the amount capitalized by the lessee upon the inception of the lease if:

(1) The residual value of $20,000 had been guaranteed by a third party, not the lessee?

(2) The residual value of $20,000 had not been guaranteed at all?

(d) On the lessor’s books, what would be the amount recorded as the Net Investment (Lease Receivable) at the inception of the lease, assuming:

(1) The residual value of $20,000 had been guaranteed by a third party?

(2) The residual value of $20,000 had not been guaranteed at all?

(e) Suppose the useful life of the milking equipment is 20 years. How large would the residual value have to be at the end of 10 years in order for the lessee to qualify for the operating method? (Assume that the residual value would be guaranteed by a third party.) (Hint: The lessee’s annual payments will be appropriately reduced as the residual value increases.)

what expenses related to this lease will evans incur during the first year of the le 591474

(Lessee Accounting and Reporting) On January 1, 2012, Evans Company entered into a noncancelable lease for a machine to be used in its manufacturing operations. The lease transfers ownership of the machine to Evans by the end of the lease term. The term of the lease is 8 years. The minimum lease payment made by Evans on January 1, 2012, was one of eight equal annual payments. At the inception of the lease, the criteria established for classification as a capital lease by the lessee were met.

Instructions

(a) What is the theoretical basis for the accounting standard that requires certain long term leases to be capitalized by the lessee? Do not discuss the specific criteria for classifying a specific lease as a capital lease.

(b) How should Evans account for this lease at its inception and determine the amount to be recorded?

(c) What expenses related to this lease will Evans incur during the first year of the lease, and how will they be determined?

(d) How should Evans report the lease transaction on its December 31, 2012, balance sheet?

how should breton determine the appropriate amount of earnings to be recognized from 591475

(Lessor and Lessee Accounting and Disclosure) Sylvan Inc. entered into a no cancelable lease arrangement with Breton Leasing Corporation for a certain machine. Breton’s primary business is leasing; it is not a manufacturer or dealer. Sylvan will lease the machine for a period of 3 years, which is 50% of the machine’s economic life. Breton will take possession of the machine at the end of the initial 3 year lease and lease it to another, smaller company that does not need the most current version of the machine. Sylvan does not guarantee any residual value for the machine and will not purchase the machine at the end of the lease term. Sylvan’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%, and the implicit rate in the lease is 9%. Sylvan has no way of knowing the implicit rate used by Breton. Using either rate, the present value of the minimum lease payments is between 90% and 100% of the fair value of the machine at the date of the lease agreement. Sylvan has agreed to pay all executory costs directly, and no allowance for these costs is included in the lease payments. Breton is reasonably certain that Sylvan will pay all lease payments, and because Sylvan has agreed to pay all executory costs, there are no important uncertainties regarding costs to be incurred by Breton. Assume that no indirect costs are involved.

Instructions

(a) With respect to Sylvan (the lessee), answer the following.

(1) What type of lease has been entered into? Explain the reason for your answer.

(2) How should Sylvan compute the appropriate amount to be recorded for the lease or asset acquired?

(3) What accounts will be created or affected by this transaction, and how will the lease or asset and other costs related to the transaction be matched with earnings?

(4) What disclosures must Sylvan make regarding this leased asset?

(b) With respect to Breton (the lessor), answer the following.

(1) What type of leasing arrangement has been entered into? Explain the reason for your answer.

(2) How should this lease be recorded by Breton, and how are the appropriate amounts determined?

(3) How should Breton determine the appropriate amount of earnings to be recognized from each lease payment?

(4) What disclosures must Breton make regarding this lease?

do not discuss the criteria for distinguishing between the leases described above an 591477

(Comparison of Different Types of Accounting by Lessee and Lessor)

Part 1

Capital leases and operating leases are the two classifications of leases described in FASB pronouncements from the standpoint of the lessee.

Instructions

(a) Describe how a capital lease would be accounted for by the lessee both at the inception of the lease and during the first year of the lease, assuming the lease transfers ownership of the property to the lessee by the end of the lease.

(b) Describe how an operating lease would be accounted for by the lessee both at the inception of the lease and during the first year of the lease, assuming equal monthly payments are made by the lessee at the beginning of each month of the lease. Describe the change in accounting, if any, when rental payments are not made on a straight line basis. Do not discuss the criteria for distinguishing between capital leases and operating leases.

Part 2

Sales type leases and direct financing leases are two of the classifications of leases described in FASB pronouncements from the standpoint of the lessor.

Instructions

Compare and contrast a sales type lease with a direct financing lease as follows.

(a) Lease receivable.

(b) Recognition of interest revenue.

(c) Manufacturer’s or dealer’s profit.

Do not discuss the criteria for distinguishing between the leases described above and operating leases.

should the controller rsquo s argument be accepted if she does not really know much 591479

(Lease Capitalization, Bargain Purchase Option) Baden Corporation entered into a lease agreement for 10 photocopy machines for its corporate headquarters. The lease agreement qualifies as an operating lease in all terms except there is a bargain purchase option. After the 5 year lease term, the corporation can purchase each copier for $1,000, when the anticipated fair value is $2,500. Jerry Suffolk, the financial vice president, thinks the financial statements must recognize the lease agreement as a capital lease because of the bargain purchase option. The controller, Diane Buchanan, disagrees: “Although I don’t know much about the copiers themselves, there is a way to avoid recording the lease liability.” She argues that the corporation might claim that copier technology advances rapidly and that by the end of the lease term the machines will most likely not be worth the $1,000 bargain price.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What ethical issue is at stake?

(b) Should the controller’s argument be accepted if she does not really know much about copier technology? Would it make a difference if the controller were knowledgeable about the pace of change in copier technology?

(c) What should Suffolk do?

how should perriman account for the gain on the sale portion of the sale leaseback t 591480

(Sale Leaseback) On January 1, 2012, Perriman Company sold equipment for cash and leased it back. As seller lessee, Perriman retained the right to substantially all of the remaining use of the equipment. The term of the lease is 8 years. There is a gain on the sale portion of the transaction. The lease portion of the transaction is classified appropriately as a capital lease.

Instructions

(a) What is the theoretical basis for requiring lessees to capitalize certain long term leases? Do not discuss the specific criteria for classifying a lease as a capital lease.

(b) (1) How should Perriman account for the sale portion of the sale leaseback ransaction at January 1, 2012?

(2) How should Perriman account for the leaseback portion of the sale leaseback transaction at January 1, 2012?

(c) How should Perriman account for the gain on the sale portion of the sale leaseback transaction during the first year of the lease? Why?

how should shellhammer account for the sale portion of the sale leaseback transactio 591481

(Sale Leaseback) On December 31, 2012, Shellhammer Co. sold 6 month old equipment at fair value and leased it back. There was a loss on the sale. Shellhammer pays all insurance, maintenance, and taxes on the equipment. The lease provides for eight equal annual payments, beginning December 31, 2013, with a present value equal to 85% of the equipment’s fair value and sales price. The lease’s term is equal to 80% of the equipment’s useful life. There is no provision for Shellhammer to reacquire ownership of the equipment at the end of the lease term.

Instructions

(a) (1) Why is it important to compare an equipment’s fair value to its lease payments’ present value and its useful life to the lease term?

(2) Evaluate Shellhammer’s leaseback of the equipment in terms of each of the four criteria for determination of a capital lease.

(b) How should Shellhammer account for the sale portion of the sale leaseback transaction at December 31, 2012?

(c) How should Shellhammer report the leaseback portion of the sale leaseback transaction on its December 31, 2013, balance sheet?

prepare a lease amortization schedule for gill company for the 5 year lease term 591486

The following facts pertain to a non cancelable lease agreement between Lennox Leasing Company and Gill Company, a lessee. (Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

Inception date: May 1, 2012

Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year, beginning with May 1,

2012: $18,829.49

Bargain purchase option price at end of lease term: $4,000.00

Lease term: 5 years

Economic life of leased equipment: 10 years

Lessor’s cost: $65,000.00; fair value of asset at May 1, 2012, $81,000.00

Lessor’s implicit rate: 10%; lessee’s incremental borrowing rate 10%

The lessee assumes responsibility for all executory costs.

Instructions

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease to Gill Company.

(b) Discuss the nature of this lease to Lennox Company.

(c) Prepare a lease amortization schedule for Gill Company for the 5 year lease term.

(d) Prepare the journal entries on the lessee’s books to refl ect the signing of the lease agreement and to record the payments and expenses related to this lease for the years 2012 and 2013. Gill’s annual accounting period ends on December 31. Reversing entries are used by Gill.

prepare the journal entries jensen would make in 2012 and 2013 related to the lease 591458

(Lessee Lessor Entries, Sales Type Lease) Glaus Leasing Company agrees to lease machinery to Jensen Corporation on January 1, 2012. The following information relates to the lease agreement.

1. The term of the lease is 7 years with no renewal option, and the machinery has an estimated economic life of 9 years.

2. The cost of the machinery is $525,000, and the fair value of the asset on January 1, 2012, is $700,000.

3. At the end of the lease term, the asset reverts to the lessor and has a guaranteed residual value of $100,000. Jensen depreciates all of its equipment on a straight line basis.

4. The lease agreement requires equal annual rental payments, beginning on January 1, 2012.

5. The collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable, and there are no important uncertainties surrounding the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

6. Glaus desires a 10% rate of return on its investments. Jensen’s incremental borrowing rate is 11%, and the lessor’s implicit rate is unknown.

Instructions

(Assume the accounting period ends on December 31.)

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease for both the lessee and the lessor.

(b) Calculate the amount of the annual rental payment required.

(c) Compute the present value of the minimum lease payments.

(d) Prepare the journal entries Jensen would make in 2012 and 2013 related to the lease arrangement.

(e) Prepare the journal entries Glaus would make in 2012 and 2013.

discuss what should be presented in the balance sheet the income statement and the r 591459

(Lessee Lessor Entries, Operating Lease) Cleveland Inc. leased a new crane to Abriendo Construction under a 5 year no cancelable contract starting January 1, 2012. Terms of the lease require payments of $33,000 each January 1, starting January 1, 2012. Cleveland will pay insurance, taxes, and maintenance charges on the crane, which has an estimated life of 12 years, a fair value of $240,000, and a cost to Cleveland of $240,000. The estimated fair value of the crane is expected to be $45,000 at the end of the lease term. No bargain purchase or renewal options are included in the contract. Both Cleveland and Abriendo adjust and close books annually at December 31. Collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably certain, and no uncertainties exist relative to reimbursable lessor costs. Abriendo’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%, and Cleveland’s implicit interest rate of 9% is known to Abriendo.

Instructions

(a) Identify the type of lease involved and give reasons for your classification. Discuss the accounting treatment that should be applied by both the lessee and the lessor.

(b) Prepare all the entries related to the lease contract and leased asset for the year 2012 for the lessee and lessor, assuming the following amounts.

(1) Insurance $500.

(2) Taxes $2,000.

(3) Maintenance $650.

(4) Straight line depreciation and salvage value $15,000.

(c) Discuss what should be presented in the balance sheet, the income statement, and the related notes of both the lessee and the lessor at December 31, 2012.

prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and lessor to record the first renta 591460

(Lessee Lessor Entries, Balance Sheet Presentation, Sales Type Lease) Winston Industries and Ewing Inc. enter into an agreement that requires Ewing Inc. to build three diesel electric engines to Winston’s specifications. Upon completion of the engines, Winston has agreed to lease them for a period of 10 years and to assume all costs and risks of ownership. The lease is no cancelable, becomes effective on January 1, 2012, and requires annual rental payments of $413,971 each January 1, starting January 1, 2012. Winston’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%. The implicit interest rate used by Ewing Inc. and known to Winston is 8%. The total cost of building the three engines is $2,600,00. The economic life of the engines is estimated to be 10 years, with residual value set at zero. Winston depreciates similar equipment on a straight line basis. At the end of the lease, Winston assumes title to the engines. Collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably certain; no uncertainties exist relative to unreimbursable lessor costs.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease transaction from the viewpoints of both lessee and lessor.

(b) Prepare the journal entry or entries to record the transaction on January 1, 2012, on the books of Winston Industries.

(c) Prepare the journal entry or entries to record the transaction on January 1, 2012, on the books of Ewing Inc.

(d) Prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and lessor to record the first rental payment on January 1, 2012.

(e) Prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and lessor to record interest expense (revenue) at December 31, 2012. (Prepare a lease amortization schedule for 2 years.)

(f) Show the items and amounts that would be reported on the balance sheet (not notes) at December 31, 2012, for both the lessee and the lessor.

what items and amounts will appear on the lessee rsquo s income statement for the ye 591461

(Balance Sheet and Income Statement Disclosure—Lessee) The following facts pertain to a no cancelable lease agreement between Alschuler Leasing Company and McKee Electronics, a lessee, for a computer system.

Inception date

October 1, 2012

Lease term

6 years

Economic life of leased equipment

6 years

Fair value of asset at October 1, 2012

$300,383

Residual value at end of lease term

–0–

Lessor’s implicit rate

10%

Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate

10%

Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year, beginning with October 1, 2012

$62,700

The collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable, and there are no important uncertainties surrounding the costs yet to be incurred by the lessor. The lessee assumes responsibility for all executor costs, which amount to $5,500 per year and are to be paid each October 1, beginning October 1, 2012. (This $5,500 is not included in the rental payment of $62,700.) The asset will revert to the lessor at the end of the lease term. The straight line depreciation method is used for all equipment. The following amortization schedule has been prepared correctly for use by both the lessor and the lessee in accounting for this lease. The lease is to be accounted for properly as a capital lease by the lessee and as a direct financing lease by the lessor.

Date

Annual
Lease
Payment/
Receipt

Interest (10%)
on Unpaid
Liability/Receivable

Reduction
of Lease
Liability/Receivable

Balance of
Lease
Liability/Receivable

10/01/12

$300,383

10/01/12

$ 62,700

$ 62,700

237,683

10/01/13

62,700

$23,768

38,932

198,751

10/01/14

62,700

19,875

42,825

155,926

10/01/15

62,700

15,593

47,107

108,819

10/01/16

62,700

10,822

51,818

57,001

10/01/17

62,700

5,699*

57,001

–0–

$376,200

$75,817

$300,383

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Assuming the lessee’s accounting period ends on September 30, answer the following questions with respect to this lease agreement.

(1) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s income statement for the year ending September 30, 2013?

(2) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s balance sheet at September 30, 2013?

(3) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s income statement for the year ending September 30, 2014?

(4) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s balance sheet at September 30, 2014?

(b) Assuming the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31, answer the following questions with respect to this lease agreement.

(1) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012?

(2) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012?

(3) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s income statement for the year ending December 31, 2013?

(4) What items and amounts will appear on the lessee’s balance sheet at December 31, 2013?

what items and amounts will appear on the lessor rsquo s balance sheet at december 3 591462

(Balance Sheet and Income Statement Disclosure—Lessor) Assume the same information as.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Assuming the lessor’s accounting period ends on September 30, answer the following questions with respect to this lease agreement.

(1) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s income statement for the year ending September 30, 2013?

(2) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s balance sheet at September 30, 2013?

(3) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s income statement for the year ending September 30, 2014?

(4) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s balance sheet at September 30, 2014?

(b) Assuming the lessor’s accounting period ends on December 31, answer the following questions with respect to this lease agreement.

(1) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012?

(2) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012?

(3) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s income statement for the year ending December 31, 2013?

(4) What items and amounts will appear on the lessor’s balance sheet at December 31, 2013?

prepare the entire journal entries for the lessee for 2012 and 2013 to record the le 591463

(Lessee Entries with Residual Value) The following facts pertain to a no cancelable lease agreement between Faldo Leasing Company and Vance Company, a lessee.

Inception date

January 1, 2012

Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year, beginning with January 1, 2012

$124,798

Residual value of equipment at end of lease term, guaranteed by the lessee

$50,000

Lease term

6 years

Economic life of leased equipment

6 years

Fair value of asset at January 1, 2012

$600,000

Lessor’s implicit rate

12%

Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate

12%

The lessee assumes responsibility for all executory costs, which are expected to amount to $5,000 per year. The asset will revert to the lessor at the end of the lease term. The lessee has guaranteed the lessor a residual value of $50,000. The lessee uses the straight line depreciation method for all equipment.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule that would be suitable for the lessee for the lease term.

(b) Prepare the entire journal entries for the lessee for 2012 and 2013 to record the lease agreement, the lease payments, and all expenses related to this lease. Assume the lessee’s annual accounting period ends on December 31 and reversing entries are used when appropriate.

what amounts would appear on ludwick rsquo s december 31 2014 balance sheet relative 591464

(Lessee Entries and Balance Sheet Presentation, Capital Lease) Ludwick Steel Company as lessee signed a lease agreement for equipment for 5 years, beginning December 31, 2012. Annual rental payments of $40,000 are to be made at the beginning of each lease year (December 31). The taxes, insurance, and the maintenance costs are the obligation of the lessee. The interest rate used by the lessor in setting the payment schedule is 9%; Ludwick’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%. Ludwick is unaware of the rate being used by the lessor. At the end of the lease, Ludwick has the option to buy the equipment for $1, considerably below its estimated fair value at that time. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 7 years, with no salvage value. Ludwick uses the straight line method of depreciation on similar owned equipment.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare the journal entry or entries, with explanations, that should be recorded on December 31, 2012, by Ludwick.

(b) Prepare the journal entry or entries, with explanations, that should be recorded on December 31, 2013, by Ludwick. (Prepare the lease amortization schedule for all five payments.)

(c) Prepare the journal entry or entries, with explanations, that should be recorded on December 31, 2014, by Ludwick.

(d) What amounts would appear on Ludwick’s December 31, 2014, balance sheet relative to the lease arrangement?

what amounts will appear on the lessee rsquo s december 31 2012 balance sheet relati 591465

(Lessee Entries and Balance Sheet Presentation, Capital Lease) On January 1, 2012, Cage Company contracts to lease equipment for 5 years, agreeing to make a payment of $137,899 (including the executor costs of $6,000) at the beginning of each year, starting January 1, 2012. The taxes, the insurance, and the maintenance, estimated at $6,000 a year, are the obligations of the lessee. The leased equipment is to be capitalized at $550,000. The asset is to be depreciated on a double declining balance basis, and the obligation is to be reduced on an effective interest basis. Cage’s incremental borrowing rate is 12%, and the implicit rate in the lease is 10%, which is known by Cage. Title to the equipment transfers to Cage when the lease expires. The asset has an estimated useful life of 5 years and no residual value.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Explain the probable relationship of the $550,000 amount to the lease arrangement.

(b) Prepare the journal entry or entries that should be recorded on January 1, 2012, by Cage Company.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record depreciation of the leased asset for the year 2012.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the interest expense for the year 2012.

(e) Prepare the journal entry to record the lease payment of January 1, 2013, assuming reversing entries are not made.

(f) What amounts will appear on the lessee’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet relative to the lease contract?

what information should be disclosed about a company rsquo s pension plans in its fi 591408

(Basic Terminology) In examining the costs of pension plans, Helen Kaufman, CPA, encounters certain terms. The components of pension costs that the terms represent must be dealt with appropriately if generally accepted accounting principles are to be reflected in the financial statements of entities with pension plans.

Instructions

(a) (1) Discuss the theoretical justification for accrual recognition of pension costs.

(2) Discuss the relative objectivity of the measurement process of accrual versus cash (pay as yougo) accounting for annual pension costs.

(b) Explain the following terms as they apply to accounting for pension plans.

(1) Market related asset value.

(2) Projected benefit obligation.

(3) Corridor approach.

(c) What information should be disclosed about a company’s pension plans in its financial statements and its notes?

explain why pension gains and losses are not recognized on the income statement in t 591409

(Major Pension Concepts) Davis Corporation is a medium sized manufacturer of paperboard containers and boxes. The corporation sponsors a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan that covers its 250 employees. Sid Cole has recently been hired as president of Davis Corporation. While reviewing last year’s financial statements with Carol Dilbeck, controller, Cole expressed confusion about several of the items in the footnote to the financial statements relating to the pension plan. In part, the footnote reads as follows. Note J. The company has a defined benefit pension plan covering substantially all of its employees. The benefits are based on years of service and the employee’s compensation during the last four years of employment. The company’s funding policy is to contribute annually the maximum amount allowed under the federal tax code. Contributions are intended to provide for benefits expected to be earned in the future as well as those earned to date. The net periodic pension expense on Davis Corporation’s comparative income statement was $72,000 in 2012 and $57,680 in 2011. The following are selected figures from the plan’s funded status and amounts recognized in the Davis Corporation’s Statement of Financial Position at December 31, 2012 ($000 omitted).

Actuarial present value of benefit obligations:
Accumulated benefit obligation
(including vested benefits of $636)

$ (870)

Projected benefit obligation

$(1,200)

Plan assets at fair value

1,050

Projected benefit obligation in excess of plan assets

$ (150)

Given that Davis Corporation’s work force has been stable for the last 6 years, Cole could not understand the increase in the net periodic pension expense. Dilbeck explained that the net periodic pension expense consists of several elements, some of which may increase or decrease the net expense.

Instructions

(a) The determination of the net periodic pension expense is a function of five elements. List and briefly describe each of the elements.

(b) Describe the major difference and the major similarity between the accumulated benefit obligation and the projected benefit obligation.

(c) (1) Explain why pension gains and losses are not recognized on the income statement in the period in which they arise.

(2) Briefly describe how pension gains and losses are recognized.

what answers do you believe jill and pete gave to each of these questions 591410

(Implications of GAAP Rules on Pensions) Jill Vogel and Pete Dell have to do a class presentation on GAAP rules for reporting pension information. In developing the class presentation, they decided to provide the class with a series of questions related to pensions and then discuss the answers in class. Given that the class has all read the rules related to pension accounting and reporting, they felt this approach would provide a lively discussion. Here are the questions:

1. In an article in BusinessWeek prior to new rules related to pensions, it was reported that the discount rates used by the largest 200 companies for pension reporting ranged from 5% to 11%. How can such a situation exist, and does GAAP alleviate this problem?

2. An article indicated that when new GAAP rules were issued related to pensions, it caused an increase in the liability for pensions for approximately 20% of companies. Why might this situation occur?

3. A recent article noted that while “smoothing” is not necessarily an accounting virtue, pension accounting has long been recognized as an exception —an area of accounting in which at least some dampening of market swings is appropriate. This is because pension funds are managed so that their performance is insulated from the extremes of short term market swings. A pension expense that reflects the volatility of market swings might, for that reason, convey information of little relevance. Are these statements true?

4. Understanding the impact of the changes required in pension reporting requires detailed information about its pension plan(s) and an analysis of the relationship of many factors, particularly the:

(a) Type of plan(s) and any significant amendments.

(b) Plan participants.

(c) Funding status.

(d) Actuarial funding method and assumptions currently used. What impact does each of these items have on financial statement presentation?

5. An article noted “You also need to decide whether to amortize gains and losses using the corridor method, or to use some other systematic method. Under the corridor approach, only gains and losses in excess of 10% of the greater of the projected benefit obligation or the plan assets would have to be amortized.” What is the corridor method and what is its purpose?

Instructions

What answers do you believe Jill and Pete gave to each of these questions?

write a memo to vickie plato explaining why in some years she must amortize some of 591411

(Gains and Losses, Corridor Amortization) Vickie Plato, accounting clerk in the personnel office of Streisand Corp., has begun to compute pension expense for 2014 but is not sure whether or not she should include the amortization of unrecognized gains/losses. She is currently working with the following beginning of the year present values for the projected benefit obligation and market related values for the pension plan:

Projected Benefit Obligation

Plan Assets Value

2011

$2,200,000

$1,900,000

2012

2,400,000

2,500,000

2013

2,900,000

2,600,000

2014

3,900,000

3,000,000

The average remaining service life per employee in 2011 and 2012 is 10 years and in 2013 and 2014 is 12 years. The net gain or loss that occurred during each year is as follows.

2011

$280,000 loss

2012

85,000 loss

2013

12,000 loss

2014

25,000 gain

(In working the solution, you must aggregate the unrecognized gains and losses to arrive at year end balances.)

Instructions

You are the manager in charge of accounting. Write a memo to Vickie Plato, explaining why in some years she must amortize some of the net gains and losses and in other years she does not need to. In order to explain this situation fully, you must compute the amount of net gain or loss that is amortized and charged to pension expense in each of the 4 years listed above. Include an appropriate amortization schedule, referring to it whenever necessary.

how should ott respond to habbe rsquo s remark about firing non vested employees 591412

(Nonvested Employees—An Ethical Dilemma) Thinken Technology recently merged with College Electronix (CE), a computer graphics manufacturing firm. In performing a comprehensive audit of CE’s accounting system, Gerald Ott, internal audit manager for Thinken Technology, discovered that the new subsidiary did not record pension assets and liabilities, subject to GAAP. The net present value of CE’s pension assets was $15.5 million, the vested benefit obligation was $12.9 million, and the projected benefit obligation was $17.4 million. Ott reported this udit finding to Julie Habbe, the newly appointed controller of CE. A few days later, Habbe called Ott or his advice on what to do. Habbe started her conversation by asking, “Can’t we eliminate the negative income effect of our pension dilemma simply by terminating the employment of nonvested employees before the end of our fiscal year?”

Instructions

How should Ott respond to Habbe’s remark about firing non vested employees?

prepare a pension worksheet for doreen corp that shows the journal entry for pension 591417

The following defined pension data of Doreen Corp. apply to the year 2012.

Defined benefit obligation, 1/1/12 (before amendment)

$560,000

Plan assets, 1/1/12

546,200

Pension asset/liability

13,800 Cr.

On January 1, 2012, Doreen Corp., through plan amendment, grants past service benefits having a present value of

100,000

Discount rate

9%

Service cost

58,000

Contributions (funding)

55,000

Actual (expected) return on plan assets

52,280

Benefits paid to retirees

40,000

Past service cost amortization for 2012

17,000

Instructions

For 2012, prepare a pension worksheet for Doreen Corp. that shows the journal entry for pension expense and the year end balances in the related pension accounts.

using the data above compute pension expense for buhl corp for the year 2012 by prep 591418

Buhl Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan.

Plan assets

$480,000

Defined benefit obligation

625,000

Pension asset/liability

45,000

Unrecognized past service cost

100,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary.

Service cost for 2012

$90,000

Discount rate, 9%

Actual return on plan assets in 2012

57,000

Amortization of past service cost

19,000

Expected return on plan assets

52,000

Unexpected loss from change in defined benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions

76,000

Contributions in 2012

99,000

Benefits paid retirees in 2012

85,000

Instructions

(a) Using the data above, compute pension expense for Buhl Corp. for the year 2012 by preparing a pension worksheet that shows the journal entry for pension expense and the year end balances in the related pension accounts.

(b) At December 31, 2012, prepare a schedule reconciling the funded status of the plan with the pension amount reported on the statement of financial position.

the average remaining service life per employee is 20 years the average time to vest 591419

Linda Berstler Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.

January 1,
2012

December 31,
2012

Vested benefit obligation

$1,500

$1,900

Defined benefit obligation

2,800

3,645

Plan assets (fair value)

1,700

2,620

Discount rate and expected rate of return

10%

Pension asset/liability

–0–

?

Unrecognized past service cost

1,100

?

Service cost for the year 2012

400

Contributions (funding in 2012)

800

Benefits paid in 2012

200

The average remaining service life per employee is 20 years. The average time to vesting past service costs is 10 years.

Instructions

(a) Compute the actual return on the plan assets in 2012.

(b) Compute the amount of the unrecognized net gain or loss as of December 31, 2012. (Assume the January 1, 2012, balance was zero.)

prepare all necessary journal entries for adams for this lease through january 1 201 591442

(Lessee Entries, Capital Lease with Unguaranteed Residual Value) On January 1, 2012, Adams Corporation signed a 5 year no cancelable lease for a machine. The terms of the lease called for Adams to make annual payments of $9,968 at the beginning of each year, starting January 1, 2012. The machine has an estimated useful life of 6 years and a $5,000 unguaranteed residual value. The machine reverts back to the lessor at the end of the lease term. Adams uses the straight line method of depreciation for all of its plant assets. Adams’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%, and the lessor’s implicit rate is unknown.

Instructions

(a) What type of lease is this? Explain.

(b) Compute the present value of the minimum lease payments.

(c) Prepare all necessary journal entries for Adams for this lease through January 1, 2013.

prepare the journal entries on the lessee rsquo s books to reflect the signing of th 591444

(Lessee Entries, Capital Lease with Executory Costs and Unguaranteed Residual Value) Assume that on January 1, 2012, Kimberly Clark Corp. signs a 10 year no cancelable lease agreement to lease a storage building from Trevino Storage Company. The following information pertains to this lease agreement.

1. The agreement requires equal rental payments of $90,000 beginning on January 1, 2012.

2. The fair value of the building on January 1, 2012 is $550,000.

3. The building has an estimated economic life of 12 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $10,000. Kimberly Clark depreciates similar buildings on the straight line method.

4. The lease is nonrenewable. At the termination of the lease, the building reverts to the lessor.

5. Kimberly Clark’s incremental borrowing rate is 12% per year. The lessor’s implicit rate is not known by Kimberly Clark.

6. The yearly rental payment includes $3,088 of executory costs related to taxes on the property.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries on the lessee’s books to reflect the signing of the lease agreement and to record the payments and expenses related to this lease for the years 2012 and 2013. Kimberly Clark’s corporate year end is December 31.

discuss the nature of the lease arrangement and the accounting method that each part 591446

(Type of Lease, Amortization Schedule) Jacobsen Leasing Company leases a new machine that has a cost and fair value of $75,000 to Stadler Corporation on a 3 year no cancelable contract. Stadler Corporation agrees to assume all risks of normal ownership including such costs as insurance, taxes, and maintenance. The machine has a 3 year useful life and no residual value. The lease was signed on January 1, 2012. Jacobsen Leasing Company expects to earn a 9% return on its investment. The annual rentals are payable on each December 31.

Instructions

(a) Discuss the nature of the lease arrangement and the accounting method that each party to the lease should apply.

(b) Prepare an amortization schedule that would be suitable for both the lessor and the lessee and that covers all the years involved.

prepare all necessary journal entries for wadkins for 2012 591447

(Lessor Entries, Sales Type Lease) Wadkins Company, a machinery dealer, leased a machine to Romero Corporation on January 1, 2012. The lease is for an 8 year period and requires equal annual payments of $38,514 at the beginning of each year. The first payment is received on January 1, 2012. Wadkins had purchased the machine during 2011 for $170,000. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by Wadkins. Wadkins set the annual rental to ensure an 11% rate of return. The machine has an economic life of 10 years with no residual value and reverts to Wadkins at the termination of the lease.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of the lease receivable.

(b) Prepare all necessary journal entries for Wadkins for 2012.

discuss the nature of this lease to palmer and woods 591448

(Lessee Lessor Entries, Sales Type Lease) On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.

1. The term of the no cancelable lease is 6 years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease.

2. Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012.

3. The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $200,000, and its cost is $150,000.

4. The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $10,000. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight line basis.

5. Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an 11% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is 12%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown.

6. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

Instructions

(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.)

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease to Palmer and Woods.

(b) Calculate the amount of the annual rental payment.

(c) Prepare all the necessary journal entries for Woods for 2012.

(d) Prepare all the necessary journal entries for Palmer for 2012.

prepare the journal entries on the lessee rsquo s books to reflect the signing of th 591449

(Lessee Entries with Bargain Purchase Option) The following facts pertain to a no cancelable lease agreement between Lennox Leasing Company and Gill Company, a lessee.

Inception date:

May 1, 2012

Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year, beginning with May 1, 2012

$18,829.49

Bargain purchase option price at end of lease term

$ 4,000.00

Lease term

5 years

Economic life of leased equipment

10 years

Lessor’s cost

$65,000.00

Fair value of asset at May 1, 2012

$81,000.00

Lessor’s implicit rate

10%

Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate

10%

The collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable, and there are no important uncertainties surrounding the costs yet to be incurred by the lessor. The lessee assumes responsibility for all executor costs.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease to Gill Company.

(b) Discuss the nature of this lease to Lennox Company.

(c) Prepare a lease amortization schedule for Gill Company for the 5 year lease term.

(d) Prepare the journal entries on the lessee’s books to reflect the signing of the lease agreement and to record the payments and expenses related to this lease for the years 2012 and 2013. Gill’s annual accounting period ends on December 31. Reversing entries are used by Gill.

prepare all of the journal entries for the lessor for 2012 and 2013 to record the le 591451

(Computation of Rental, Journal Entries for Lessor) Fieval Leasing Company signs an agreement on January 1, 2012, to lease equipment to Reid Company. The following information relates to this agreement.

1. The term of the no cancelable lease is 6 years with no renewal option. The equipment has an estimated economic life of 6 years.

2. The cost of the asset to the lessor is $343,000. The fair value of the asset at January 1, 2012, is $343,000.

3. The asset will revert to the lessor at the end of the lease term at which time the asset is expected to have a residual value of $61,071, none of which is guaranteed.

4. Reid Company assumes direct responsibility for all executory costs.

5. The agreement requires equal annual rental payments, beginning on January 1, 2012.

6. Collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable. There are no important uncertainties surrounding the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Assuming the lessor desires a 10% rate of return on its investment, calculate the amount of the annual rental payment required.

(b) Prepare an amortization schedule that would be suitable for the lessor for the lease term.

(c) Prepare all of the journal entries for the lessor for 2012 and 2013 to record the lease agreement, the receipt of lease payments, and the recognition of income. Assume the lessor’s annual accounting period ends on December 31.

prepare the entire journal entries for the lessee for 2012 and 2013 to record the le 591452

(Amortization Schedule and Journal Entries for Lessee) Grady Leasing Company signs an agreement on January 1, 2012, to lease equipment to Azure Company. The following information relates to this agreement.

1. The term of the no cancelable lease is 5 years with no renewal option. The equipment has an estimated economic life of 5 years.

2. The fair value of the asset at January 1, 2012, is $90,000.

3. The asset will revert to the lessor at the end of the lease term, at which time the asset is expected to have a residual value of $7,000, none of which is guaranteed.

4. Azure Company assumes direct responsibility for all executory costs, which include the following annual amounts: (1) $900 to Frontier Insurance Company for insurance and (2) $1,600 to Crawford County for property taxes.

5. The agreement requires equal annual rental payments of $20,541.11 to the lessor, beginning on January 1, 2012.

6. The lessee’s incremental borrowing rate is 12%. The lessor’s implicit rate is 10% and is known to the lessee.

7. Azure Company uses the straight line depreciation method for all equipment.

8. Azure uses reversing entries when appropriate.

Instructions

(Round all numbers to the nearest cent.)

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule that would be suitable for the lessee for the lease term.

(b) Prepare the entire journal entries for the lessee for 2012 and 2013 to record the lease agreement, the lease payments, and all expenses related to this lease. Assume the lessee’s annual accounting period ends on December 31.

prepare the journal entries that ryker inc should make in 2012 591453

(Accounting for an Operating Lease) On January 1, 2012, Secada Co. leased a building to Ryker Inc. The relevant information related to the lease is as follows.

1. The lease arrangement is for 10 years.

2. The leased building cost $3,600,000 and was purchased for cash on January 1, 2012.

3. The building is depreciated on a straight line basis. Its estimated economic life is 50 years with no salvage value.

4. Lease payments are $220,000 per year and are made at the end of the year.

5. Property tax expense of $85,000 and insurance expense of $10,000 on the building were incurred by Secada in the first year. Payment on these two items was made at the end of the year.

6. Both the lessor and the lessee are on a calendar year basis.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries that Secada Co. should make in 2012.

(b) Prepare the journal entries that Ryker Inc. should make in 2012.

(c) If Secada paid $30,000 to a real estate broker on January 1, 2012, as a fee for finding the lessee, how much should be reported as an expense for this item in 2012 by Secada Co.?

what amount should crampton inc report for rent expense for 2012 on this lease 591454

(Accounting for an Operating Lease) On January 1, 2012, a machine was purchased for $900,000 by Floyd Co. The machine is expected to have an 8 year life with no salvage value. It is to be depreciated on a straight line basis. The machine was leased to Crampton Inc. on January 1, 2012, at an annual rental of $180,000. Other relevant information is as follows.

1. The lease term is for 3 years.

2. Floyd Co. incurred maintenance and other executory costs of $25,000 in 2012 related to this lease.

3. The machine could have been sold by Floyd Co. for $940,000 instead of leasing it.

4. Crampton is required to pay a rent security deposit of $35,000 and to prepay the last month’s rent of $15,000.

Instructions

(a) How much should Floyd Co. report as income before income tax on this lease for 2012?

(b) What amount should Crampton Inc. report for rent expense for 2012 on this lease?

prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and the lessor for 2012 to reflect t 591456

(Sale Leaseback) Assume that on January 1, 2012, Elmer’s Restaurants sells a computer system to Liquidity Finance Co. for $510,000 and immediately leases the computer system back. The relevant information is as follows.

1. The computer was carried on Elmer’s books at a value of $450,000.

2. The term of the no cancelable lease is 10 years; title will transfer to Elmer.

3. The lease agreement requires equal rental payments of $83,000.11 at the end of each year.

4. The incremental borrowing rate for Elmer is 12%. Elmer is aware that Liquidity Finance Co. set the annual rental to ensure a rate of return of 10%.

5. The computer has a fair value of $680,000 on January 1, 2012, and an estimated economic life of 10 years.

6. Elmer pays executory costs of $9,000 per year.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries for both the lessee and the lessor for 2012 to reflect the sale leaseback agreement. No uncertainties exist, and collectibility is reasonably certain.

discuss how the gain on the sale should be reported at the end of 2012 in the financ 591457

(Lessee Lessor, Sale Leaseback) Presented below are four independent situations.

(a) On December 31, 2012, Beard Inc. sold computer equipment to Barber Co. and immediately leased it back for 10 years. The sales price of the equipment was $560,000, its carrying amount is $400,000, and its estimated remaining economic life is 12 years. Determine the amount of deferred revenue to be reported from the sale of the computer equipment on December 31, 2012.

(b) On December 31, 2012, Nicklaus Co. sold a machine to Ozaki Co. and simultaneously leased it back for one year. The sales price of the machine was $480,000, the carrying amount is $420,000, and it had an estimated remaining useful life of 14 years. The present value of the rental payments for the one year is $35,000. At December 31, 2012, how much should Nicklaus report as deferred revenue from the sale of the machine?

(c) On January 1, 2012, Barone Corp. sold an airplane with an estimated useful life of 10 years. At the same time, Barone leased back the plane for 10 years. The sales price of the airplane was $500,000, the carrying amount $401,000, and the annual rental $73,975. Barone Corp. intends to depreciate the leased asset using the sum of the years’ digits depreciation method. Discuss how the gain on the sale should be reported at the end of 2012 in the financial statements.

(d) On January 1, 2012, Durocher Co. sold equipment with an estimated useful life of 5 years. At the same time, Durocher leased back the equipment for 2 years under a lease classified as an operating lease. The sales price (fair value) of the equipment was $212,700, the carrying amount is $300,000, the monthly rental under the lease is $6,000, and the present value of the rental payments is $115,753. For the year ended December 31, 2012, determine which items would be reported on its income statement for the sale leaseback transaction.

using the data above compute pension expense for webb corp for the year 2012 by prep 591383

(Pension Worksheet) Webb Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan.

Plan assets

$480,000

Projected benefit obligation

600,000

Pension asset/liability

120,000

Accumulated OCI (PSC)

100,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary.

Service cost for 2012

$90,000

Settlement rate, 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012

55,000

Amortization of prior service cost

19,000

Expected return on plan assets

52,000

Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions

76,000

Contributions in 2012

99,000

Benefits paid retirees in 2012

85,000

Instructions

(a) Using the data above, compute pension expense for Webb Corp. for the year 2012 by preparing a pension worksheet.

(b) Prepare the journal entry for pension expense for 2012.

prepare the journal entry or entries to record pension expense and the employer rsqu 591384

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries, Statement Presentation) Henning Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. The following data relate to the operation of the plan for the year 2012 in which no benefits were paid.

1. The actuarial present value of future benefits earned by employees for services rendered in 2012 amounted to $56,000.

2. The company’s funding policy requires a contribution to the pension trustee amounting to $145,000 for 2012.

3. As of January 1, 2012, the company had a projected benefit obligation of $900,000, an accumulated benefit obligation of $800,000, and a balance of $400,000 in accumulated OCI (PSC). The fair value of pension plan assets amounted to $600,000 at the beginning of the year. The actual and expected return on plan assets was $54,000. The settlement rate was 9%. No gains or losses occurred in 2012 and no benefits were paid.

4. Amortization of prior service cost was $50,000 in 2012. Amortization of net gain or loss was not required in 2012.

Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of the components of pension expense that should be recognized by the company in 2012.

(b) Prepare the journal entry or entries to record pension expense and the employer’s contribution to the pension trustee in 2012.

(c) Indicate the amounts that would be reported on the income statement and the balance sheet for the year 2012.

prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer rsquo s contrib 591385

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries, and Statement Presentation) Ferreri Company received the following selected information from its pension plan trustee concerning the operation of the company’s defined benefit pension plan for the year ended December 31, 2012.

January 1,
2012

December 31,
2012

Projected benefit obligation

$1,500,000

$1,527,000

Market related and fair value of plan assets

800,000

1,130,000

Accumulated benefit obligation

1,600,000

1,720,000

Accumulated OCI (G/L)—Net gain

–0–

(200,000)

The service cost component of pension expense for employee services rendered in the current year amounted to $77,000 and the amortization of prior service cost was $120,000. The company’s actual funding (contributions) of the plan in 2012 amounted to $250,000. The expected return on plan assets and the actual rate were both 10%; the interest/discount (settlement) rate was 10%. Accumulated other comprehensive income (PSC) had a balance of $1,200,000 on January 1, 2012. Assume no benefits paid in 2012.

Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of the components of pension expense that should be recognized by the company in 2012.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer’s contribution to the pension plan in 2012.

(c) Indicate the pension related amounts that would be reported on the income statement and the balance sheet for Ferreri Company for the year 2012.

compute the amount of the other comprehensive income g l as of december 31 2012 591386

(Computation of Actual Return, Gains and Losses, Corridor Test, and Pension Expense) Erickson Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.

January 1,
2012

December 31,
2012

Vested benefit obligation

$1,500

$1,900

Accumulated benefit obligation

1,900

2,730

Projected benefit obligation

2,500

3,300

Plan assets (fair value)

1,700

2,620

Settlement rate and expected rate of return

10%

Pension asset/liability

800

?

Service cost for the year 2012

400

Contributions (funding in 2012)

700

Benefits paid in 2012

200

Instructions

(a) Compute the actual return on the plan assets in 2012.

(b) Compute the amount of the other comprehensive income (G/L) as of December 31, 2012. (Assume the January 1, 2012, balance was zero.)

(c) Compute the amount of net gain or loss amortization for 2012 (corridor approach).

(d) Compute pension expense for 2012.

compute pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and 591388

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries) Latoya Company provides the following selected information related to its defined benefit pension plan for 2012.

Pension asset/liability (January 1)

$ 25,000 Cr.

Accumulated benefit obligation (December 31)

400,000

Actual and expected return on plan assets

10,000

Contributions (funding) in 2012

150,000

Fair value of plan assets (December 31)

800,000

Settlement rate

10%

Projected benefit obligation (January 1)

700,000

Service cost

80,000

Instructions

(a) Compute pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer’s contribution to the pension plan in 2012. Preparation of a pension worksheet is not required. Benefits paid in 2012 were $35,000.

(b) Indicate the pension related amounts that would be reported in the company’s income statement and balance sheet for 2012.

prepare a schedule which reflects the minimum amount of accumulated oci g l amortize 591389

(Amortization of Accumulated OCI (G/L), Corridor Approach, Pension Expense Computation) The actuary for the pension plan of Gustafson Inc. calculated the following net gains and losses.

Incurred during the Year

(Gain) or Loss

2012

$300,000

2013

480,000

2014

(210,000)

2015

(290,000)

Other information about the company’s pension obligation and plan assets is as follows.

As of January 1,

Projected Benefit Obligation

Plan Assets (market related asset value)

2012

$4,000,000

$2,400,000

2013

4,520,000

2,200,000

2014

5,000,000

2,600,000

2015

4,240,000

3,040,000

Gustafson Inc. has a stable labor force of 400 employees who are expected to receive benefits under the plan. The total service years for all participating employees is 5,600. The beginning balance of accumulated OCI (G/L) is zero on January 1, 2012. The market related value and the fair value of plan assets are the same for the 4 year period. Use the average remaining service life per employee as the basis for amortization.

Instructions

Prepare a schedule which reflects the minimum amount of accumulated OCI (G/L) amortized as a component of net periodic pension expense for each of the years 2012, 2013, 2014, and 2015. Apply the “corridor” approach in determining the amount to be amortized each year.

prepare a schedule which reflects the amount of accumulated oci g l to be amortized 591390

(Amortization of Accumulated OCI Balances) Keeton Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its 600 employees. The company’s actuary provided the following information about the plan.

January 1,

December 31,

2012

2012

2013

Projected benefit obligation

$2,800,000

$3,650,000

$4,195,000

Accumulated benefit obligation

1,900,000

2,430,000

2,900,000

Plan assets (fair value and market related asset value)

1,700,000

2,900,000

3,790,000

Accumulated net (gain) or loss (for purposes of the corridor calculation)

–0–

198,000

(24,000)

Discount rate (current settlement rate)

9%

8%

Actual and expected asset return rate

10%

10%

Contributions

1,030,000

660,000

The average remaining service life per employee is 10.5 years. The service cost component of net periodic pension expense for employee services rendered amounted to $400,000 in 2012 and $475,000 in 2013. The accumulated OCI (PSC) on January 1, 2012, was $1,260,000. No benefits have been paid.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated OCI (PSC) to be amortized as a component of net periodic pension expense for each of the years 2012 and 2013.

(b) Prepare a schedule which reflects the amount of accumulated OCI (G/L) to be amortized as a component of pension expense for 2012 and 2013.

(c) Determine the total amount of pension expense to be recognized by Keeton Company in 2012 and 2013.

compute the postretirement benefit expense for 2012 591393

(Postretirement Benefit Expense Computation) Englehart Co. provides the following information about its postretirement benefit plan for the year 2012.

Service cost

$ 90,000

Prior service cost amortization

3,000

Contribution to the plan

56,000

Actual and expected return on plan assets

62,000

Benefits paid

40,000

Plan assets at January 1, 2012

710,000

Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation at January 1, 2012

760,000

Accumulated OCI (PSC) at January 1, 2012

100,000 Dr.

Discount rate

9%

Instructions

Compute the postretirement benefit expense for 2012.

prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan for 2012 and 2013 591394

(2 Year Worksheet) On January 1, 2012, Harrington Company has the following defined benefit pension plan balances.

Projected benefit obligation

$4,500,000

Fair value of plan assets

4,200,000

The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2013, the company amends its pension agreement so that prior service costs of $500,000 are created. Other data related to the pension plan are as follows.

2012

2013

Service cost

$150,000

$180,000

Prior service cost amortization

–0–

90,000

Contributions (funding) to the plan

240,000

285,000

Benefits paid

200,000

280,000

Actual return on plan assets

252,000

260,000

Expected rate of return on assets

6%

8%

Instructions

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan for 2012 and 2013.

(b) For 2013, prepare the journal entry to record pension related amounts.

prepare a pension worksheet presenting all 3 years rsquo pension balances and activi 591395

(3 Year Worksheet, Journal Entries, and Reporting) Jackson Company adopts acceptable accounting for its defined benefit pension plan on January 1, 2011, with the following beginning balances: plan assets $200,000; projected benefit obligation $250,000. Other data relating to 3 years’ operation of the plan are shown on the next page.

2011

2012

2013

Annual service cost

$16,000

$ 19,000

$ 26,000

Settlement rate and expected rate of return

10%

10%

10%

Actual return on plan assets

18,000

22,000

24,000

Annual funding (contributions)

16,000

40,000

48,000

Benefits paid

14,000

16,400

21,000

Prior service cost (plan amended, 1/1/12)

160,000

Amortization of prior service cost

54,400

41,600

Change in actuarial assumptions establishes a December 31, 2013, projected benefit obligation of:

520,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet presenting all 3 years’ pension balances and activities.

(b) Prepare the journal entries (from the worksheet) to reflect all pension plan transactions and events at December 31 of each year.

(c) Indicate the pension related amounts reported in the financial statements for 2013.

prepare the journal entry to record the pension expense and the company rsquo s fund 591396

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries, and Amortization of Loss) Gottschalk Company sponsors a defined benefit plan for its 100 employees. On January 1, 2012, the company’s actuary provided the following information.

Accumulated other comprehensive loss (PSC)

$150,000

Pension plan assets (fair value and market related asset value)

200,000

Accumulated benefit obligation

260,000

Projected benefit obligation

380,000

The average remaining service period for the participating employees is 10 years. All employees are expected to receive benefits under the plan. On December 31, 2012, the actuary calculated that the present value of future benefits earned for employee services rendered in the current year amounted to $52,000; the projected benefit obligation was $490,000; fair value of pension assets was $276,000; the accumulated benefit obligation amounted to $365,000. The expected return on plan assets and the discount rate on the projected benefit obligation were both 10%. The actual return on plan assets is $11,000. The company’s current year’s contribution to the pension plan amounted to $65,000. No benefits were paid during the year.

Instructions

(a) Determine the components of pension expense that the company would recognize in 2012. (With only one year involved, you need not prepare a worksheet.)

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the pension expense and the company’s funding of the pension plan in 2012.

(c) Compute the amount of the 2012 increase/decrease in gains or losses and the amount to be amortized in 2012 and 2013.

(d) Indicate the pension amounts reported in the financial statement as of December 31, 2012.

prepare the journal entries to record the pension expense and the company rsquo s fu 591397

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries for 2 Years) Gordon Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The following information related to the pension plan is available for 2012 and 2013.

2012

2013

Plan assets (fair value), December 31

$699,000

$849,000

Projected benefit obligation, January 1

700,000

800,000

Pension asset/liability, January 1

140,000 Cr.

?

Prior service cost, January 1

250,000

240,000

Service cost

60,000

90,000

Actual and expected return on plan assets

24,000

30,000

Amortization of prior service cost

10,000

12,000

Contributions (funding)

115,000

120,000

Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31

500,000

550,000

Interest/settlement rate

9%

9%

Instructions

(a) Compute pension expense for 2012 and 2013.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the pension expense and the company’s funding of the pension plan for both years.

prepare a schedule based on the average remaining life per employee showing the prio 591399

(Computation of Prior Service Cost Amortization, Pension Expense, Journal Entries, and Net Gain or Loss) Aykroyd Inc. has sponsored a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan for its employees since 1989. Prior to 2012, cumulative net pension expense recognized equaled cumulative contributions to the plan. Other relevant information about the pension plan on January 1, 2012, is as follows.

1. The company has 200 employees. All these employees are expected to receive benefits under the plan. The average remaining service life per employee is 12 years.

2. The projected benefit obligation amounted to $5,000,000 and the fair value of pension plan assets was $3,000,000. The market related asset value was also $3,000,000. Unrecognized prior service cost was $2,000,000.

On December 31, 2012, the projected benefit obligation and the accumulated benefit obligation were $4,850,000 and $4,025,000, respectively. The fair value of the pension plan assets amounted to $4,100,000 at the end of the year. A 10% settlement rate and a 10% expected asset return rate were used in the actuarial present value computations in the pension plan. The present value of benefits attributed by the pension benefit formula to employee service in 2012 amounted to $200,000. The employer’s contribution to the plan assets amounted to $775,000 in 2012. This problem assumes no payment of pension benefits.

Instructions

(Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare a schedule, based on the average remaining life per employee, showing the prior service cost that would be amortized as a component of pension expense for 2012, 2013, and 2014.

(b) Compute pension expense for the year 2012.

(c) Prepare the journal entries required to report the accounting for the company’s pension plan for 2012.

(d) Compute the amount of the 2012 increase/decrease in net gains or losses and the amount to be amortized in 2012 and 2013.

using the preceding data compute pension expense for hanson corp for the year 2012 b 591400

(Pension Worksheet) Hanson Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances related to this plan.

Plan assets (market related value)

$520,000

Projected benefit obligation

700,000

Pension asset/liability

180,000 Cr.

Prior service cost

81,000

Net gain or loss (debit)

91,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the actuary provided the following additional data at December 31, 2012.

Service cost for 2012

$108,000

Settlement rate, 9%; expected return rate, 10%

Actual return on plan assets in 2012

48,000

Amortization of prior service cost

25,000

Contributions in 2012

133,000

Benefits paid retirees in 2012

85,000

Average remaining service life of active employees

10 years

Instructions

Using the preceding data, compute pension expense for Hanson Corp. for the year 2012 by preparing a pension worksheet that shows the journal entry for pension expense. Use the market related asset value to compute the expected return and for corridor amortization.

prepare the journal entries from the worksheet to reflect all pension plan transacti 591401

(Comprehensive 2 Year Worksheet) Lemke Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. The following data relate to the operation of the plan for the years 2012 and 2013.

2012

2013

Projected benefit obligation, January 1

$600,000

Plan assets (fair value and market related value), January 1

410,000

Pension asset/liability, January 1

190,000 Cr.

Prior service cost, January 1

160,000

Service cost

40,000

$ 59,000

Settlement rate

10%

10%

Expected rate of return

10%

10%

Actual return on plan assets

36,000

61,000

Amortization of prior service cost

70,000

50,000

Annual contributions

97,000

81,000

Benefits paid retirees

31,500

54,000

Increase in projected benefit obligation due to changes in actuarial assumptions

87,000

–0–

Accumulated benefit obligation at December 31

721,800

789,000

Average service life of all employees

20 years

Vested benefit obligation at December 31

464,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet presenting both years 2012 and 2013 and accompanying computations and amortization of the loss (2013) using the corridor approach.

(b) Prepare the journal entries (from the worksheet) to reflect all pension plan transactions and events at December 31 of each year.

(c) For 2013, indicate the pension amounts reported in the financial statements.

prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan in 2012 591402

(Comprehensive 2 Year Worksheet) Hobbs Co. has the following defined benefit pension plan balances on January 1, 2012.

Projected benefit obligation

$4,600,000

Fair value of plan assets

4,600,000

The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2013, the company amendsits pension agreement so that prior service costs of $600,000 are created. Other data related to the pension plan are:

2012

2013

Service cost

$150,000

$170,000

Prior service cost amortization

–0–

90,000

Contributions (funding) to the plan

200,000

184,658

Benefits paid

220,000

280,000

Actual return on plan assets

252,000

350,000

Expected rate of return on assets

6%

8%

Instructions

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan in 2012.

(b) Prepare any journal entries related to the pension plan that would be needed at December 31, 2012.

(c) Prepare a pension worksheet for 2013 and any journal entries related to the pension plan as of December 31, 2013.

(d) Indicate the pension related amounts reported in the 2013 financial statements.

compute pension expense for larson corp for the year 2013 by preparing a pension wor 591403

(Pension Worksheet) Larson Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2013, the following balances related to this plan.

Plan assets (market related value)

$270,000

Projected benefit obligation

340,000

Pension asset/liability

70,000 Cr.

Prior service cost

90,000

OCI—Loss

39,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2013, the actuary provided the following additional data at December 31, 2013.

Service cost for 2013

$45,000

Actual return on plan assets in 2013

27,000

Amortization of prior service cost

12,000

Contributions in 2013

65,000

Benefits paid retirees in 2013

41,000

Settlement rate

7%

Expected return on plan assets

8%

Average remaining service life of active employees

10 years

Instructions

(a) Compute pension expense for Larson Corp. for the year 2013 by preparing a pension worksheet that shows the journal entry for pension expense.

(b) Indicate the pension amounts reported in the financial statements.

prepare any journal entries related to the postretirement plan for 2012 and indicate 591404

(Postretirement Benefit Worksheet) Hollenbeck Foods Inc. sponsors a postretirement medical and dental benefit plan for its employees. The following balances relate to this plan on January 1, 2012.

Plan assets

$200,000

Expected postretirement benefit obligation

820,000

Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation

200,000

No prior service costs exist.

As a result of the plan’s operation during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary.

Service cost for 2012 is $70,000

Discount rate is 10%

Contributions to plan in 2012 are $65,000

Expected return on plan assets is $10,000

Actual return on plan assets is $15,000

Benefits paid to employees are $44,000

Average remaining service to full eligibility: 20 years

Instructions

(a) Using the preceding data, compute the net periodic postretirement benefit cost for 2012 by preparing a worksheet that shows the journal entry for postretirement expense and the year end balances in the related postretirement benefit memo accounts. (Assume that contributions and benefits are paid at the end of the year.)

(b) Prepare any journal entries related to the postretirement plan for 2012 and indicate the postretirement amounts reported in the financial statements for 2012.

prepare a worksheet for 2013 and any journal entries related to the postretirement p 591405

(Postretirement Benefit Worksheet—2 Years) Elton Co. has the following postretirement benefit plan balances on January 1, 2012.

Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation

$2,250,000

Fair value of plan assets

2,250,000

The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2013, the company amends the plan so that prior service costs of $175,000 are created. Other data related to the plan are:

2012

2013

Service costs

$ 75,000

$ 85,000

Prior service costs amortization

–0–

12,000

Contributions (funding) to the plan

45,000

35,000

Benefits paid

40,000

45,000

Actual return on plan assets

140,000

120,000

Expected rate of return on assets

8%

6%

Instructions

(a) Prepare a worksheet for the postretirement plan in 2012.

(b) Prepare any journal entries related to the postretirement plan that would be needed at December 31, 2012.

(c) Prepare a worksheet for 2013 and any journal entries related to the postretirement plan as of December 31, 2013.

(d) Indicate the postretirement benefit–related amounts reported in the 2013 financial statements.

discuss the relative objectivity of the measurement process of accrual versus cash p 591406

(Pension Terminology and Theory) Many business organizations have been concerned with providing for the retirement of employees since the late 1800s. During recent decades, a marked increase in this concern has resulted in the establishment of private pension plans in most large companies and in many medium and small sized ones. The substantial growth of these plans, both in numbers of employees covered and in amounts of retirement benefits, has increased the significance of pension costs in relation to the financial position, results of operations, and cash flows of many companies. In examining the costs of pension plans, a CPA encounters certain terms. The components of pension costs that the terms represent must be dealt with appropriately if generally accepted accounting principles are to be reflected in the financial statements of entities with pension plans.

Instructions

(a) Define a private pension plan. How does a contributory pension plan differ from a noncontributory plan?

(b) Differentiate between “accounting for the employer” and “accounting for the pension fund.”

(c) Explain the terms “funded” and “pension liability” as they relate to:

(1) The pension fund.

(2) The employer.

(d) (1) Discuss the theoretical justification for accrual recognition of pension costs.

(2) Discuss the relative objectivity of the measurement process of accrual versus cash (pay as yougo) accounting for annual pension costs.

(e) Distinguish among the following as they relate to pension plans.

(1) Service cost.

(2) Prior service costs.

(3) Vested benefits.

compute the amount that should be reported in the operating activities section of th 591244

The following information is taken from the 2011 general ledger of Pierzynski Company.

Rent

Rent expense

$ 40,000

Prepaid rent, January 1

5,900

Prepaid rent, December 31

9,000

Salaries

Salaries expense

$ 54,000

Salaries payable, January 1

10,000

Salaries payable, December 31

8,000

Sales

Revenue from sales

$170,000

Accounts receivable, January 1

16,000

Accounts receivable, December 31

7,000

Instructions

In each case, compute the amount that should be reported in the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.

complete the table indicating whether each item 1 should be reported as an operating 591245

Where Reported

Cash Inflow,

on Statement

Outflow, or

Transaction

No Effect?

(a) Recorded depreciation expense on the plant assets.

(b) Recorded and paid interest expense.

(c) Recorded cash proceeds from a sale of plant assets.

(d) Acquired land by issuing common stock.

(e) Paid a cash dividend to preferred stockholders.

(f) Distributed a stock dividend to common stockholders.

(g) Recorded cash sales.

(h) Recorded sales on account.

Instructions

Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating (O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule; and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the common stock an 591246

The following account balances relate to the stockholders’ equity accounts of Gore Corp. at year end.

2011

2010

Common stock, 10,500 and 10,000 shares,

respectively, for 2011 and 2010

$160,000

$140,000

Preferred stock, 5,000 shares

125,000

125,000

Retained earnings

300,000

260,000

A small stock dividend was declared and issued in 2011. The market value of the shares was $10,500. Cash dividends were $15,000 in both 2011 and 2010. The common stock has no par or stated value.

Instructions

(a) What was the amount of net income reported by Gore Corp. in 2011?

(b) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the common stock anddividend accounts in 2011.

(c) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (b) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.A small stock dividend was declared and issued in 2011. The market value of the shares was $10,500. Cash dividends were $15,000 in both 2011 and 2010. The common stock has no par or stated value.

Instructions

(a) What was the amount of net income reported by Gore Corp. in 2011?

(b) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the common stock and dividend accounts in 2011.

(c) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (b) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year 591247

The income statement of Elbert Company is presented here.

ELBERT COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended November 30, 2011

Sales

$7,700,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,900,000

Purchases

4,400,000

Goods available for sale

6,300,000

Ending inventory

1,400,000

Cost of goods sold

4,900,000

Gross profit

2,800,000

Operating expenses

1,150,000

Net income

$1,650,000

Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable increased $250,000 during the year, and inventory decreased $500,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $150,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to suppliers of merchandise decreased $340,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable decreased $100,000 during the year.

5. Operating expenses include depreciation expense of $90,000.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended November 30, 2011, for Elbert Company, using the indirect method.

presented below are the financial statements of weller company 591251

Presented below are the financial statements of Weller Company.

WELLER COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 35,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable

33,000

14,000

Merchandise inventory

27,000

20,000

Property, plant, and equipment

60,000

78,000

Accumulated depreciation

(29,000)

(24,000)

Total

$126,000

$108,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$ 29,000

$ 15,000

Accounts payable

7,000

8,000

Income taxes payable

27,000

33,000

Bonds payable

18,000

14,000

Common stock

45,000

38,000

Retained earnings

$126,000

$108,000

Total

$ 29,000

$ 15,000

WELLER COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$242,000

Cost of goods sold

175,000

Gross profit

67,000

Operating expenses

24,000

Income from operations

43,000

Interest expense

3,000

Income before income taxes

40,000

Income tax expense

8,000

Net income

$ 32,000

Additional data:

1. Dividends declared and paid were $25,000.

2. During the year equipment was sold for $8,500 cash. This equipment cost $18,000 originally and had a book value of $8,500 at the time of sale.

3. All depreciation expense, $14,500, is in the operating expenses.

4. All sales and purchases are on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute free cash flow.

prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2011 using the indi 591255

The comparative balance sheets for Ramirez Company as of December 31 are presented on the next page.

RAMIREZ COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 71,000

$ 45,000

Accounts receivable

44,000

62,000

Inventory

151,450

142,000

Prepaid expenses

15,280

21,000

Land

105,000

130,000

Equipment

228,000

155,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(45,000)

(35,000)

Building

200,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

(60,000)

(40,000)

Total

$709,730

$680,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 47,730

$ 40,000

Bonds payable

260,000

300,000

Common stock, $1 par

200,000

160,000

Retained earnings

202,000

180,000

Total

$709,730

$680,000

Additional information:

1. Operating expenses include depreciation expense of $42,000 and charges from prepaid expenses of $5,720.

2. Land was sold for cash at book value.

3. Cash dividends of $15,000 were paid.

4. Net income for 2011 was $37,000. 5. Equipment was purchased for $95,000 cash. In addition, equipment costing $22,000 with a book value of $10,000 was sold for $6,000 cash.

6. Bonds were converted at face value by issuing 40,000 shares of $1 par value common stock.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the indirect method.

condensed financial data of oprah company appear below 591256

Condensed financial data of Oprah Company appear below.

OPRAH COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 92,700

$ 47,250

Accounts receivable

90,800

57,000

Inventories

121,900

102,650

Investments

84,500

87,000

Plant assets

250,000

205,000

Accumulated depreciation

(49,500)

(40,000)

$590,400

$458,900

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 57,700

$ 48,280

Accrued expenses payable

12,100

18,830

Bonds payable

100,000

70,000

Common stock

250,000

200,000

Retained earnings

170,600

121,790

$590,400

$458,900

OPRAH COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$297,500

Gain on sale of plant assets

8,750

Less:

306,250

Cost of goods sold

$99,460

Operating expenses (excluding

depreciation expense)

14,670

Depreciation expense

49,700

Income taxes

7,270

Interest expense

2,940

174,040

Net income

$132,210

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $92,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Investments were sold at cost.

3. Plant assets costing $47,000 were sold for $15,550, resulting in gain of $8,750.

4. A cash dividend of $83,400 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a worksheet for the statement of cash flows using the indirect method. Enter the reconciling items directly in the worksheet columns, using letters to cross reference each entry.

complete the table indicating whether each item 1 should be reported as an operating 591257

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year.

Cash Inflow,

Where Reported

Outflow, or

Transaction

on Statement

No Effect?

(a) Recorded depreciation expense on the

plant assets.

(b) Incurred a loss on disposal of plant assets.

(c) Acquired a building by paying cash.

(d) Made principal repayments on a

mortgage.

(e) Issued common stock.

(f) Purchased shares of another company

to be held as a long term equity

investment.

(g) Paid dividends to common stockholders.

(h) Sold inventory on credit. The company

uses a perpetual inventory system.

(i) Purchased inventory on credit.

(j) Paid wages to employees.

Instructions

Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating (O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule; and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the plant asset acc 591258

The following selected account balances relate to the plant asset accounts of Wegent Inc. at year end.

2011

2010

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

$337,500

$300,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

144,000

96,000

Buildings

750,000

750,000

Depreciation expense

101,500

85,500

Equipment

300,000

240,000

Land

100,000

70,000

Loss on sale of equipment

8,000

0

Additional information:

1. Wegent purchased $95,000 of equipment and $30,000 of land for cash in 2011.

2. Wegent also sold equipment in 2011.

3. Depreciation expense in 2011 was $37,500 on building and $64,000 on equipment.

Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the plant asset accounts in 2011.

(b) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (a) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year 591259

The income statement of Rosenthal Company is presented below. Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable decreased $320,000 during the year, and inventory increased $120,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $175,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to merchandise suppliers increased $50,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable increased $155,000 during the year.

ROSENTHAL COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$5,400,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,780,000

Purchases

3,430,000

Goods available for sale

5,210,000

Ending inventory

1,900,000

Cost of goods sold

3,310,000

Gross profit

2,090,000

Operating expenses

Depreciation expense

105,000

Amortization expense

20,000

Other expenses

945,000

1,070,000

Net income

$1,020,000

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, for Rosenthal Company, using the indirect method.

prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the in 591261

The income statement of Brislin Inc. reported the following condensed information.

BRISLIN INC.

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Revenues

$545,000

Operating expenses

400,000

Income from operations

145,000

Income tax expense

36,000

Net income

$109,000

Brislin’s balance sheet contained these comparative data at December 31.

2011

2010

Accounts receivable

$50,000

$70,000

Accounts payable

30,000

51,000

Income taxes payable

10,000

4,000

Brislin has no depreciable assets. Accounts payable pertain to operating expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

presented below are the financial statements of ortega company 591263

Presented below are the financial statements of Ortega Company.

ORTEGA COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 24,000

$ 33,000

Accounts receivable

25,000

14,000

Merchandise inventory

41,000

25,000

Property, plant, and equipment

$ 70,000

$ 78,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

27,000

43,000

24,000

54,000

Total

$133,000

$126,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 31,000

$ 43,000

Income taxes payable

24,000

20,000

Bonds payable

20,000

10,000

Common stock

25,000

25,000

Retained earnings

33,000

28,000

Total

$133,000

$126,000

ORTEGA COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$286,000

Cost of goods sold

204,000

Gross profit

82,000

Operating expenses

37,000

Income from operations

45,000

Interest expense

7,000

Income before income taxes

38,000

Income tax expense

10,000

Net income

$ 28,000

Additional data:

1. Dividends of $23,000 were declared and paid.

2. During the year equipment was sold for $10,000 cash.This equipment cost $15,000 originally and had a book value of $10,000 at the time of sale.

3. All depreciation expense, $8,000, is in the operating expenses.

4. All sales and purchases are on account.

5. Additional equipment was purchased for $7,000 cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute free cash flow.

condensed financial data of ziebert company are shown below 591265

Condensed financial data of Ziebert Company are shown below.

ZIEBERT COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$102,700

$ 33,400

Accounts receivable

60,800

37,000

Inventories

126,900

102,650

Investments

79,500

107,000

Plant assets

315,000

205,000

Accumulated depreciation

(44,500)

(40,000)

Total

$640,400

$445,050

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 57,700

$ 48,280

Accrued expenses payable

15,100

18,830

Bonds payable

145,000

70,000

Common stock

250,000

200,000

Retained earnings

172,600

107,940

Total

$640,400

$445,050

ZIEBERT COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$297,500

Gain on sale of plant assets

5,000

302,500

Less:

Cost of goods sold

Operating expenses, excluding

depreciation expense

19,670

Depreciation expense

30,500

Income taxes

37,270

Interest expense

2,940

189,840

Net income

$112,660

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $146,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Investments were sold at cost.

3. Plant assets costing $36,000 were sold for $15,000, resulting in a gain of $5,000.

4. A cash dividend of $48,000 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method 591267

Presented below are the comparative balance sheets for Marin Company at December 31.

MARIN COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 41,000

$ 57,000

Accounts receivable

77,000

64,000

Inventory

172,000

140,000

Prepaid expenses

12,140

16,540

Land

110,000

150,000

Equipment

215,000

175,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(70,000)

(42,000)

Building

250,000

250,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

(70,000)

(50,000)

Total

$737,140

$760,540

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 58,000

$ 45,000

Bonds payable

235,000

265,000

Common stock, $1 par

280,000

250,000

Retained earnings

164,140

200,540

Total

$737,140

$760,540

Additional information:

1. Operating expenses include depreciation expense $55,000 and charges from prepaid expenses of $4,400.

2. Land was sold for cash at cost.

3. Cash dividends of $84,290 were paid.

4. Net income for 2011 was $47,890.

5. Equipment was purchased for $80,000 cash. In addition, equipment costing $40,000 with a book value of $33,000 was sold for $37,000 cash.

6. Bonds were converted at face value by issuing 30,000 shares of $1 par value common stock.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method.

what was the amount of interest paid in the year ended december 27 2008 what was the 591268

Refer to the financial statements of PepsiCo’s, presented in Appendix A, and answer the following questions.

(a) What was the amount of net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 27, 2008? For the year ended December 29, 2007?

(b) What was the amount of increase or decrease in cash and cash equivalents for the year ended

December 27, 2008? For the year ended December 29, 2007? (c) Which method of computing net cash provided by operating activities does PepsiCo use?

(d) From your analysis of the 2008 statement of cash flows, did the change in accounts and notes receivable require or provide cash? Did the change in inventories require or provide cash? Did the change in accounts payable and other current liabilities require or provide cash?

(e) What was the net outflow or inflow of cash from investing activities for the year ended December 27, 2008?

(f) What was the amount of interest paid in the year ended December 27, 2008? What was the amount of income taxes paid in the year ended December 27, 2008? (See Note 14.)

using the data provided prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form using the i 591272

Ron Nord and Lisa Smith are examining the following statement of cash flows for Carpino Company for the year ended January 31, 2011.

CARPINO COMPANY

Statement of Cash Flows

For the Year Ended January 31, 2011

Sources of cash

$380,000

From sales of merchandise

420,000

From sale of capital stock

80,000

From sale of investment (purchased below)

55,000

From depreciation

20,000

From issuance of note for truck

6,000

From interest on investments

961,000

Total sources of cash

$380,000

Uses of cash

For purchase of fixtures and equipment

330,000

For merchandise purchased for resale

258,000

For operating expenses (including depreciation)

160,000

For purchase of investment

75,000

For purchase of truck by issuance of note

20,000

For purchase of treasury stock

10,000

For interest on note payable

3,000

Total uses of cash

856,000

Net increase in cash

$ 105,000

Ron claims that Carpino’s statement of cash flows is an excellent portrayal of a superb first year with cash increasing $105,000. Lisa replies that it was not a superb first year. Rather, she says, the year was an operating failure, that the statement is presented incorrectly, and that $105,000is not the actual increase in cash. The cash balance at the beginning of the year was $140,000.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Using the data provided, prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form using the indirect method .The only noncash items in the income statement are depreciation and the gain from the sale of the investment.

(b) With whom do you agree, Ron or Lisa? Explain your position.

who are the stakeholders in this situation 591274

Tappit Corp. is a medium sized wholesaler of automotive parts. It has 10 stockholders who have been paid a total of $1 million in cash dividends for 8 consecutive years. The board’s policy requires that, for this dividend to be declared, net cash provided by operating activities as reported in Tappit’s current year’s statement of cash flows must exceed $1 million. President and CEO Willie Morton’s job is secure so long as he produces annual operating cash flows to support the usual dividend. At the end of the current year, controller Robert Jennings presents president Willie Morton with some disappointing news:The net cash provided by operating activities is calculated by the indirect method to be only $970,000. The president says to Robert, “We must get that amount above $1 million. Isn’t there some way to increase operating cash flow by another $30,000?” Robert answers, “These figures were prepared by my assistant. I’ll go back to my office and see what I can do.” The president replies, “I know you won’t let me down, Robert.” Upon close scrutiny of the statement of cash flows, Robert concludes that he can get the operating cash flows above $1 million by reclassifying a $60,000, 2 year note payable listed in the financing activities section as “Proceeds from bank loan—$60,000.” He will report the note instead as “Increase in payables—$60,000” and treat it as an adjustment of net income in the operating activities section. He returns to the president, saying, “You can tell the board to declare their usual dividend. Our net cash flow provided by operating activities is $1,030,000.” “Good man, Robert! I knew I could count on you,” exults the president.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Was there anything unethical about the president’s actions? Was there anything unethical about the controller’s actions?

(c) Are the board members or anyone else likely to discover the misclassification?

prepare a pension worksheet for rydell corp that shows the journal entry for pension 591380

(Basic Pension Worksheet) The following defined pension data of Rydell Corp. apply to the year 2012.

Projected benefit obligation, 1/1/12 (before amendment)

$560,000

Plan assets, 1/1/12

546,200

Pension liability

13,800

On January 1, 2012, Rydell Corp., through plan amendment,
grants prior service benefits having a present value of

120,000

Settlement rate

9%

Service cost

58,000

Contributions (funding)

65,000

Actual (expected) return on plan assets

52,280

Benefits paid to retirees

40,000

Prior service cost amortization for 2012

17,000

Instructions

For 2012, prepare a pension worksheet for Rydell Corp. that shows the journal entry for pension expense and the year end balances in the related pension accounts.

using the corridor approach compute the amount of net gain or loss amortized and cha 591381

(Application of the Corridor Approach) Kenseth Corp. has the following beginning of the year present values for its projected benefit obligation and market related values for its pension plan assets.

Projected Benefit Obligation

Plan Assets Value

2011

$2,000,000

$2,000,000

2012

2,400,000

2,400,000

2013

2,950,000

2,950,000

2014

3,600,000

3,600,000

The average remaining service life per employee in 2011 and 2012 is 10 years and in 2013 and 2014 is 12 years. The net gain or loss that occurred during each year is as follows: 2011, $280,000 loss; 2012, $90,000 loss; 2013, $11,000 loss; and 2014, $25,000 gain. (In working the solution, the gains and losses must be aggregated to arrive at year end balances.)

Instructions

Using the corridor approach, compute the amount of net gain or loss amortized and charged to pension expense in each of the four years, setting up an appropriate schedule.

determine the amounts of other comprehensive income and comprehensive income for 201 591382

(Disclosures: Pension Expense and Other Comprehensive Income) Taveras Enterprises provides the following information relative to its defined benefit pension plan.

Balances or Values at December 31, 2012

Projected benefit obligation

$2,737,000

Accumulated benefit obligation

1,980,000

Fair value of plan assets

2,278,329

Accumulated OCI (PSC)

210,000

Accumulated OCI—Net loss (1/1/12 balance, –0–)

45,680

Pension liability

458,671

Other pension plan data:

Service cost for 2012

94,000

Prior service cost amortization for 2012

42,000

Actual return on plan assets in 2012

130,000

Expected return on plan assets in 2012

175,680

Interest on January 1, 2012, projected benefit obligation

253,000

Contributions to plan in 2012

93,329

Benefits paid

140,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the note disclosing the components of pension expense for the year 2012.

(b) Determine the amounts of other comprehensive income and comprehensive income for 2012. Net income for 2012 is $35,000.

(c) Compute the amount of accumulated other comprehensive income reported at December 31, 2012.

what conclusions concerning the two companies can be drawn from these data 591032

PepsiCo”s financial statements are presented. Financial statements of The Coca Cola Company are presented. Instructions for accessing and using the complete annual reports of PepsiCo and Coca Cola, including the notes to the financial statements, are also provided in Appendices B and C, respectively.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the following for each company.

(1) Total assets at December 31, 2011, for PepsiCo and for Coca Cola at December 31, 2011.

(2) Accounts (notes) receivable, net at December 31, 2011, for PepsiCo and at December 31, 2011, for Coca Cola.

(3) Net revenues for year ended in 2011.

(4) Net income for year ended in 2011.

(b) What conclusions concerning the two companies can be drawn from these data?

what conclusions concerning these two companies can be drawn from these data 591033

Inc.”s financial statements are presented. Financial statements for Wal Mart Stores, Inc. are presented. Instructions for accessing and using the complete annual reports of Amazon and Wal Mart, including the notes to the financial statements, are also provided in Appendices D and E, respectively.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the following for each company.

(1) Total assets at December 31, 2011, for Amazon and for Wal Mart at January 31, 2012.

(2) Receivables (net) at December 31, 2011, for Amazon and for Wal Mart at January 31, 2012.

(3) Net sales (product only) for year ended in 2011 (2012 for Wal Mart).

(4) Net income for the year ended in 2011 (2012 for Wal Mart).

(b) What conclusions concerning these two companies can be drawn from these data?

how could the mohrs have concluded that the business operated at a net income of 2 4 591035

Kathy and James Mohr, local golf stars, opened the Chip Shot Driving Range on March 1, 2014, by investing $25,000 of their cash savings in the business. A caddy shack was constructed for cash at a cost of $8,000, and $800 was spent on golf balls and golf clubs. The Mohrs leased five acres of land at a cost of $1,000 per month and paid the first month”s rent. During the first month, advertising costs totaled $750, of which $150 was unpaid at March 31, and $400 was paid to members of the high school golf team for retrieving golf balls. All revenues from customers were deposited in the company”s bank account. On March 15, Kathy and James withdrew a total of $1,000 in cash for personal living expenses. A $100 utility bill was received on March 31 but was not paid. On March 31, the balance in the company”s bank account was $18,900.

Kathy and James thought they had a pretty good first month of operations. But, their estimates of profitability ranged from a loss of $6,100 to net income of $2,450.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) How could the Mohrs have concluded that the business operated at a loss of $6,100? Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?

(b) How could the Mohrs have concluded that the business operated at a net income of $2,450? Was this a valid basis on which to determine net income?

(c) Without preparing an income statement, determine the actual net income for March.

(d) What was the revenue recognized in March?

under what circumstances might an otherwise ethical person decide to illegally overs 591038

Some people are tempted to make their finances look worse to get financial aid. Companies sometimes also manage their financial numbers in order to accomplish certain goals. Earnings management is the planned timing of revenues, expenses, gains, and losses to smooth out bumps in net income. In managing earnings, companies’ actions vary from being within the range of ethical activity, to being both unethical and illegal attempts to mislead investors and creditors.

Instructions

Provide responses for each of the following questions.

(a) Discuss whether you think each of the following actions to increase the chances of receiving financial aid is ethical.

(1) Spend down the student”s assets and income first, before spending parents’ assets and income.

(2) Accelerate necessary expenses to reduce available cash. For example, if you need a new car, buy it before applying for financial aid.

(3) State that a truly financially dependent child is independent.

(4) Have a parent take an unpaid leave of absence for long enough to get below the “threshold” level of income.

(b) What are some reasons why a company might want to overstate its earnings?

(c) What are some reasons why a company might want to understate its earnings?

(d) Under what circumstances might an otherwise ethical person decide to illegally overstate or understate earnings?

academic access to the fasb codification is available through university subscriptio 591039

The FASB has developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification (or more simply “the Codification”). The FASB”s primary goal in developing the Codification is to provide in one place all the authoritative literature related to a particular topic. To provide easy access to the Codification, the FASB also developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Codification Research System (CRS). CRS is an online, real time database that provides easy access to the Codification. The Codification and the related CRS provide a topically organized structure, subdivided into topic, subtopics, sections, and paragraphs, using a numerical index system.

You may find this system useful in your present and future studies, and so we have provided an opportunity to use this online system as part of the Broadening Your Perspective section.

Instructions

Academic access to the FASB Codification is available through university subscriptions, obtained from the American Accounting Association, for an annual fee of $150. This subscription covers an unlimited number of students within a single institution. Once this access has been obtained by your school, you should log in and familiarize yourself with the resources that are accessible at the FASB Codification site.

what are the four key goals of the company s sustainability efforts related to the p 591040

This chapter”s Feature Story discusses the fact that although Clif Bar & Company is not a public company, it does share its financial information with its employees as part of its open book management approach. Further, although it does not publicly share its financial information, it does provide a different form of an annual report to external users. In this report, the company provides information regarding its sustainability efforts.

Instructions

Access the 2010 annual report of Clif Bar & Company at the site shown above and then answer the following questions.

(a) What are the Five Aspirations?

(b) What are the four key goals of the company”s sustainability efforts related to the planet? Give one example of a recent initiative, and a measurable outcome for that initiative, that the company has taken related to each goal.

determine normal balances and list accounts in the order they appear in the ledger 591053

The following accounts come from the ledger of SnowGo Company at December 31, 2014.

157

Equipment

$88,000

301 Owner”s Capital

$20,000

306

Owner”s Drawings

8,000

212 Salaries and Wages

201

Accounts Payable

22,000

Payable

2,000

726

Salaries and Wages

200 Notes Payable

19,000

Expense

42,000

732 Utilities Expense

3,000

112

Accounts Receivable

4,000

130 Prepaid Insurance

6,000

400

Service Revenue

95,000

101 Cash

7,000

Determine normal balances and list accounts in the order they appear in the ledger.

Accounts with debit balances appear in the left column, and those with credit balances in the right column.

Total the debit and credit columns to prove equality.

journalize the september transactions use j1 for the journal page number 591054

Bob Sample opened the Campus Laundromat on September 1, 2014. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

1

Bob invested $20,000 cash in the business.

;2

The company paid $1,000 cash for store rent for September.

3

Purchased washers and dryers for $25,000, paying $10,000 in cash and signing a $15,000, 6 month, 12% note payable.

4

Paid $1,200 for a one year accident insurance policy.

10

Received a bill from the Daily News for advertising the opening of the laundromat $200.

20

Bob withdrew $700 cash for personal use.

30

The company determined that cash receipts for laundry services for the month were $6,200.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the September transactions. (Use J1 for the journal page number.)

(b) Open ledger accounts and post the September transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at September 30, 2014.

transactions for the george lynch company for the month of june are presented below 591084

Transactions for the George Lynch Company for the month of June are presented below. Identify the accounts to be debited and credited for each transaction.

June

1

George Lynch invests $5,000 cash in a small welding business of which he is the sole proprietor.

2

Purchases equipment on account for $2,100.

3

$800 cash is paid to landlord for June rent.

12

Sends a bill to M. Rodero for $300 for welding work performed on account.

what amount of net cash provided used by financing activities should be reported in 591215

The following T account is a summary of the cash account of Edmonds Company.

Cash (Summary Form)

Balance, Jan. 1

8,000

Receipts from customers

364,000

Payments for goods

200,000

Dividends on stock investments

6,000

Payments for operating expenses

140,000

Proceeds from sale of equipment

36,000

Interest paid

10,000

Proceeds from issuance of

Taxes paid

8,000

bonds payable

300,000

Dividends paid

50,000

Balance, Dec. 31

306,000

What amount of net cash provided (used) by financing activities should be reported in the statement of cash flows?

the t accounts for equipment and the related accumulated depreciation for pettengill 591219

The T accounts for Equipment and the related Accumulated Depreciation for Pettengill Company at the end of 2011 are shown here.

Equipment

Beg. bal.

80,000

Disposals

22,000

Acquisitions

41,600

End. bal.

99,600

Accumulated Depreciation

Disposals

5,500

Beg. bal.

44,500

Depr. exp.

12,000

End. bal.

51,000

In addition, Pettengill Company’s income statement reported a loss on the sale of equipment

of $4,500.What amount was reported on the statement of cash flows as “cash flow from

sale of equipment”?

grinders corporation issued the following statement of cash flows for 2011 591230

Grinders Corporation issued the following statement of cash flows for 2011.

GRINDERS CORPORATION

Statement of Cash Flows—Indirect Method

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Cash flows from operating activities

Net income

$59,000

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash

provided by operating activities:

Depreciation expense

Loss on sale of equipment

$9,100

Decrease in accounts receivable

3,300

Increase in inventory

9,500

Decrease in accounts payable

(5,000)

Net cash provided by operating activities

(2,200)

14,700

Cash flows from investing activities

73,700

Sale of investments

3,100

Purchase of equipment

27,000)

Net cash used by investing activities

(23,900)

Cash flows from financing activities

Issuance of stock

20,000

Payment on long term note payable

(10,000)

Payment for dividends

(15,000)

Net cash used by financing activities

(5,000)

Net increase in cash

44,800

Cash at beginning of year

13,000

Cash at end of year

$57,800

(a) Compute free cash flow for Grinders Corporation. (b) Explain why free cash flow often provides better information than “Net cash provided by operating activities.”

pioneer corporation had these transactions during 2011 591231

Pioneer Corporation had these transactions during 2011.

(a) Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash.

(b) Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long term note in exchange.

(c) Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000.

(d) Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000.

(e) Sold a long term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash.

(f) Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable.

(g) Paid $18,000 on accounts payable.

Instructions

Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities.

an analysis of comparative balance sheets the current year rsquo s income statement 591232

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Gagliano Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary.

(a) Payment of interest on notes payable.

(h) Issuance of capital stock.

(b) Exchange of land for patent.

(i) Amortization of patent.

(c) Sale of building at book value.

(j) Issuance of bonds for land.

(d) Payment of dividends.

(k) Purchase of land.

(e) Depreciation.

(l) Conversion of bonds into common stock.

(f) Receipt of dividends on investment in stock.

(m) Loss on sale of land.

(g) Receipt of interest on notes receivable.

(n) Retirement of bonds.

Instructions

Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using these four major classifications: operating activity (indirect method), investing activity, financing activity, and significant noncash investing and financing activity.

prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company rsquo s 591235

The current sections of Bellinham Inc.’s balance sheets at December 31, 2010 and 2011, are presented here. Bellinham’s net income for 2011 was $153,000. Depreciation expense was $24,000.

2011

2010

Current assets

Cash

$105,000

$ 99,000

Accounts receivable

110,000

89,000

Inventory

158,000

172,000

Prepaid expenses

27,000

22,000

Total current assets

$400,000

$382,000

Current liabilities

Accrued expenses payable

$ 15,000

$ 5,000

Accounts payable

85,000

92,000

Total current liabilities

$100,000

$ 97,000

Instructions

Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the indirect method.

the three accounts shown below appear in the general ledger of cesar corp during 201 591236

The three accounts shown below appear in the general ledger of Cesar Corp. during 2011.

Equipment

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

160,000

July 31

Purchase of equipment

70,000

230,000

Sept. 2

Cost of equipment constructed

53,000

283,000

Nov. 10

Cost of equipment sold

49,000

234,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

Debit

Debit

Balance

Date

Balance

71,000

Jan. 1

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Nov. 10

equipment sold

41,000

Dec. 31

Depreciation for year

28,000

69,000

Retained Earnings

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

105,000

Aug. 23

Dividends (cash)

14,000

91,000

Dec. 31

Net income

67,000

158,000

Instructions

From the postings in the accounts, indicate how the information is reported on a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. The loss on sale of equipment was $5,000. (Hint: Cost of equipment constructed is reported in the investing activities section as a decrease in cash of $53,000.)

prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method 591237

Scully Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

SCULLY CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

2011

2010

Cash

$ 14,300

$ 10,700

Accounts receivable

21,200

23,400

Land

20,000

26,000

Building

70,000

70,000

Accumulated depreciation

(15,000)

(10,000)

Total

$110,500

$120,100

Accounts payable

$12,370

$31,100

Common stock

75,000

69,000

Retained earnings

23,130

20,000

Total

$110,500

$120,100

Additional information:

1. Net income was $22,630. Dividends declared and paid were $19,500.

2. All other changes in noncurrent account balances had a direct effect on cash flows, except the change in accumulated depreciation. The land was sold for $4,900.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method.

(b) Compute free cash flow.

prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method 591239

Muldur Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

MULDUR CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

2011

2010

Cash

$ 15,200

$ 17,700

Accounts receivable

25,200

22,300

Investments

20,000

16,000

Equipment

60,000

70,000

Accumulated depreciation

(14,000)

(10,000)

Total

$106,400

$116,000

Accounts payable

$ 14,600

$ 11,100

Bonds payable

10,000

30,000

Common stock

50,000

45,000

Retained earnings

31,800

29,900

Total

$106,400

$116,000

Additional information:

1. Net income was $18,300. Dividends declared and paid were $16,400.

2. Equipment which cost $10,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $1,200 was sold for $3,300.

3. All other changes in noncurrent account balances had a direct effect on cash flows, except the change in accumulated depreciation.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method.

(b) Compute free cash flow.

prepare a worksheet for a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method 591240

Comparative balance sheets for Eddie Murphy Company are presented below.

EDDIE MURPHY COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 63,000

$ 22,000

Accounts receivable

85,000

76,000

Inventories

180,000

189,000

Land

75,000

100,000

Equipment

260,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

(66,000)

(42,000)

Total

$597,000

$545,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 34,000

$ 47,000

Bonds payable

150,000

200,000

Common stock ($1 par)

214,000

164,000

Retained earnings

199,000

134,000

Total

$597,000

$545,000

Additional information:

1. Net income for 2011 was $125,000.

2. Cash dividends of $60,000 were declared and paid.

3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000.

4. Common stock was issued for $50,000 cash.

5. Depreciation expense was $24,000.

6. Sales for the year were $978,000.

Instructions

Prepare a worksheet for a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method. Enter the reconciling items directly on the worksheet, using letters to cross reference each entry.

prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method not 591243

The 2011 accounting records of Verlander Transport reveal these transactions and events.

Payment of interest

$ 10,000

Collection of accounts receivable

$182,000

Cash sales

48,000

Payment of salaries and wages

53,000

Receipt of dividend revenue

18,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

Payment of income taxes

12,000

Proceeds from sale of vehicles

12,000

Net income

38,000

Purchase of equipment for cash

22,000

Payment of accounts payable

Loss on sale of vehicles

3,000

for merchandise

115,000

Payment of dividends

14,000

Payment for land

74,000

Payment of operating expenses

28,000

Instructions

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method. (Not all of the items will be used.)

categorize the accounting tasks performed by zimmerman as relating to either the ide 591005

Zimmerman Company performs the following accounting tasks during the year.

Analyzing and interpreting information.

Classifying economic events.

Explaining uses, meaning, and limitations of data.

Keeping a systematic chronological diary of events.

Measuring events in dollars and cents.

Preparing accounting reports.

Reporting information in a standard format.

Selecting economic activities relevant to the company.

Summarizing economic events.

Accounting is “an information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.”

Instructions

Categorize the accounting tasks performed by Zimmerman as relating to either the identification (I), recording (R), or communication (C) aspects of accounting.

identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an 591006

(a) The following are users of financial statements.

Customers

Internal Revenue Service

Labor unions

Marketing manager

Production supervisor

Securities and Exchange Commission

Store manager

Suppliers

Vice president of finance

Instructions

Identify the users as being either external users or internal users.

(b) The following questions could be asked by an internal user or an external user.

Can we afford to give our employees a pay raise?

Did the company earn a satisfactory income?

Do we need to borrow in the near future?

How does the company”s profitability compare to other companies?

What does it cost us to manufacture each unit produced?

Which product should we emphasize?

Will the company be able to pay its short term debts?

Instructions

Identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an external user.

identify which principle or assumption has been violated 591008

The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.

1. Piang Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost. In an effort to provide more relevant information, Piang reports the buildings at fair value in its accounting reports.

2. Delta Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.

3. Luke Witte, owner of Luke”s Photography, records his personal living costs as expenses of the business.

Instructions

For each of the three situations, say if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect. If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.

list the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transacti 591010

Selected transactions for Tara Lawn Care Company are listed below.

1. Made cash investment to start business.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Purchased equipment on account.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Withdrew cash for owner”s personal use.

6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

7. Incurred advertising expense on account.

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.

Instructions

List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and owner”s equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in owner”s equity.

indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results 591011

Kam Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2014.

1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.

2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $17,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Performed computer services to Viking Construction Company for $3,000 cash.

5. Paid Tri State Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Kam invested an additional $29,000 in the business.

7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,200 on account.

Instructions

Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:

(a) An increase in assets and a decrease in assets.

(b) An increase in assets and an increase in owner”s equity.

(c) An increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.

(d) A decrease in assets and a decrease in owner”s equity.

(e) A decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.

(f) An increase in liabilities and a decrease in owner”s equity.

(g) An increase in owner”s equity and a decrease in liabilities.

from an analysis of the change in owner s equity during the year compute the net inc 591013

Iverson Company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated.

December 31

Total Assets

Total Liabilities

2013

$400,000

$250,000

2014

$460,000

$300,000

2015

$590,000

$400,000

Iverson began business on January 1, 2013, with an investment of $100,000.

Instructions

From an analysis of the change in owner”s equity during the year, compute the net income (or loss) for:

(a) 2013, assuming Iverson”s drawings were $15,000 for the year.

(b) 2014, assuming Iverson made an additional investment of $45,000 and had no drawings in 2014.

(c) 2015, assuming Iverson made an additional investment of $15,000 and had drawings of $25,000 in 2015.

determine the missing amounts 591014

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2014, Garba”s Goods and Zahra Enterprises.

Beginning of year:

Garba”s
Goods

Zahra
Enterprises

Total assets

$110,000

$129,000

Total liabilities

85,000

(c)

Total owner”s equity

(a)

80,000

End of year:

Total assets

160,000

180,000

Total liabilities

120,000

50,000

Total owner”s equity

40,000

130,000

Changes during year in owner”s equity:

Additional investment

(b)

25,000

Drawings

29,000

(d)

Total revenues

215,000

100,000

Total expenses

175,000

60,000

Instructions

Determine the missing amounts.

prepare a correct balance sheet 591016

Reza Lang is the bookkeeper for Taylor Company. Reza has been trying to get the balance sheet of Taylor Company to balance. Taylor”s balance sheet is shown below.

TAYLOR COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2014

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$15,000

Accounts payable

$21,000

Supplies

8,000

Accounts receivable

(9,500)

Equipment

46,000

Owner”s capital

67,500

Owner”s drawings

10,000

Total liabilities and

owner”s equity

$79,000

Total assets

$79,000

Instructions

Prepare a correct balance sheet.

determine andrew tym s net income from deer park for 2014 591017

Andrew Tym is the sole owner of Deer Park, a public camping ground near the Lake Mead National Recreation Area. Andrew has compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2014.

Revenues during 2014—camping fees

$140,000

Fair value of equipment

$140,000

Revenues during 2014—general store

65,000

Notes payable

60,000

Accounts payable

11,000

Expenses during 2014

150,000

Cash on hand

23,000

Accounts receivable

17,500

Original cost of equipment

105,500

Instructions

(a) Determine Andrew Tym”s net income from Deer Park for 2014.

(b) Prepare a balance sheet for Deer Park as of December 31, 2014.

prepare the 2014 owner s equity statement for huan feng s legal practice 591019

Presented below is information related to the sole proprietorship of Huan Feng attorney.

Legal service revenue 2014

$335,000

Total expenses 2014

211,000

Assets, January 1, 2014

96,000

Liabilities, January 1, 2014

62,000

Assets, December 31, 2014

168,000

Liabilities, December 31, 2014

100,000

Drawings 2014

?

Instructions

Prepare the 2014 owner”s equity statement for Huan Feng”s legal practice.

prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings c 591020

On April 1, Renato Uhrig established Renato”s Travel Agency. The following transactions were completed during the month.

1. Invested $15,000 cash to start the agency.

2. Paid $600 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased equipment for $3,000 cash.

4. Incurred $700 of advertising costs in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $800 cash for office supplies.

6. Performed services worth $10,000: $3,000 cash is received from customers, and the balance of $7,000 is billed to customers on account.

7. Withdrew $500 cash for personal use.

8. Paid Chicago Tribune $500 of the amount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees’ salaries $2,500.

10. Received $4,000 in cash from customers who have previously been billed in transaction (6).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner”s Capital, Owner”s Drawings, Revenues, and Expenses.

(b) From an analysis of the owner”s equity columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

prepare an income statement for august an owner s equity statement for august and a 591021

Sue Kojima opened a law office on July 1, 2014. On July 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $5,000, Accounts Receivable $1,500, Supplies $500, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $4,200, and Owner”s Capital $8,800. During August, the following transactions occurred.

1. Collected $1,200 of accounts receivable.

2. Paid $2,800 cash on accounts payable.

3. Recognized revenue of $7,500 of which $3,000 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.

4. Purchased additional equipment for $2,000, paying $400 in cash and the balance on account.

5. Paid salaries $2,500, rent for August $900, and advertising expenses $400.

6. Withdrew $700 in cash for personal use.

7. Received $2,000 from Standard Federal Bank—money borrowed on a note payable.

8. Incurred utility expenses for month on account $270.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Owner”s Capital Owner”s Drawings + Revenues Expenses.

(b) Prepare an income statement for August, an owner”s equity statement for August, and a balance sheet at August 31.

prepare an income statement and owner s equity statement for the month of june and a 591022

On June 1, Tamara Eder started Crazy Creations Co., a company that provides craft opportunities, by investing $12,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30 and the revenues and expenses for the month of June.

Cash

$10,150

Service Revenue

$6,700

Accounts Receivable

3,000

Advertising Expense

500

Supplies

2,000

Rent Expense

1,600

Equipment

10,000

Gasoline Expense

200

Notes Payable

9,000

Utilities Expense

150

Accounts Payable

1,200

Tamara made no additional investment in June but withdrew $1,300 in cash for personal use during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and owner”s equity statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2014.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner”s equity statement for June assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of services were performed and billed but not collected at June 30, and (2) $150 of gasoline expense was incurred but not paid.

show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation 591023

Debra Menge started her own consulting firm, Menge Consulting, on May 1, 2014. The following transactions occurred during the month of May.

May

1

Debra invested $7,000 cash in the business.

2

Paid $900 for office rent for the month.

3

Purchased $600 of supplies on account.

5

Paid $125 to advertise in the County News.

9

Received $4,000 cash for services performed.

12

Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.

;

15

Performed $5,400 of services on account.

17

Paid $2,500 for employee salaries.

20

Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.

23

Received a cash payment of $4,000 for services performed on account on May 15.

26

Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.

29

Purchased equipment for $4,200 on account.

30

Paid $275 for utilities.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of May.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at May 31, 2014.

write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and th 591024

Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows.

Farrell
Company

Prasad
Company

Thao
Company

Zinda
Company

January 1, 2014

Assets

$ 80,000

$ 90,000

(g)

$150,000

Liabilities

48,000

(d)

80,000

(j)

Owner”s equity

(a)

40,000

49,000

90,000

December 31, 2014

Assets

(b)

112,000

180,000

(k)

Liabilities

60,000

72,000

(h)

100,000

Owner”s equity

50,000

(e)

82,000

151,000

Owner”s equity changes in year

Additional investment

(c)

8,000

10,000

15,000

Drawings

15,000

(f)

12,000

10,000

Total revenues

350,000

410,000

(i)

500,000

Total expenses

333,000

385,000

350,000

(I)

Instructions

(a) Determine the missing amounts.

(b) Prepare the owner”s equity statement for Farrell Company.

(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the owner”s equity statement to the income statement and balance sheet.

from an analysis of the owner s equity columns compute the net income or net loss fo 591025

Solki”s Repair Shop was started on May 1 by Solki Lee. A summary of May transactions is presented below.

1. Invested $10,000 cash to start the repair shop.

2. Purchased equipment for $5,000 cash.

3. Paid $400 cash for May office rent.

4. Paid $500 cash for supplies.

5. Incurred $250 of advertising costs in the Beacon News on account.

6. Received $6,100 in cash from customers for repair service.

7. Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.

8. Paid part time employee salaries $2,000.

9. Paid utility bills $170.

10. Performed repair services worth $750 on account.

11. Collected cash of $120 for services billed in transaction (10).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions, using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner”s Capital, Owner”s Drawings, Revenues, and Expenses.

(b) From an analysis of the owner”s equity columns, compute the net income or net loss for May.

prepare an income statement for september an owner s equity statement for september 591026

Peter Nimmer opened a veterinary business in Nashville, Tennessee, on August 1, 2014. On August 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, and Owner”s Capital $13,700. During September, the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash on accounts payable.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Recognized revenue of $7,800, of which $2,500 is received in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Withdrew $1,100 cash for personal use.

6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $450.

7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank (money borrowed on a note payable).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Owner”s Capital Owner”s Drawings + Revenues Expenses.

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, an owner”s equity statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.

prepare an income statement and owner s equity statement for the month of may and a 591027

On May 1, R. C. Twining started RC Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, by investing $40,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2014, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.

Cash

$ 3,400

Advertising Expense

$ 600

Accounts Receivable

4,900

Rent Expense

1,200

Equipment

64,000

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

400

Notes Payable

30,000

Gasoline Expense

2,500

Accounts Payable

800

Utilities Expense

400

Service Revenue

8,100

R. C. Twining made no additional investment in May, but he withdrew $1,500 in cash for personal use.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and owner”s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner”s equity statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 worth of services were performed and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of gasoline expense was incurred but not paid.

show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation 591028

Dennis Luljak started his own delivery service, Luljak Deliveries, on June 1, 2014. The following transactions occurred during the month of June.

June

1

Dennis invested $10,000 cash in the business.

2

Purchased a used van for deliveries for $12,000. Dennis paid $2,000 cash and signed a note payable for the remaining balance.

3

Paid $500 for office rent for the month.

5

Performed $4,400 of services on account.

9

Withdrew $200 cash for personal use.

12

Purchased supplies for $150 on account.

15

Received a cash payment of $1,250 for services performed on June 5.

17

Purchased gasoline for $200 on account.

20

Received a cash payment of $1,300 for services performed.

23

Made a cash payment of $600 on the note payable.

26

Paid $250 for utilities.

29

Paid for the gasoline purchased on account on June 17.

30

Paid $1,000 for employee salaries.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of June.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at June 30, 2014.

identify specific asset liability and owner s equity accounts that cookie creations 591030

Natalie Koebel spent much of her childhood learning the art of cookie making from her grandmother. They passed many happy hours mastering every type of cookie imaginable and later creating new recipes that were both healthy and delicious. Now at the start of her second year in college, Natalie is investigating various possibilities for starting her own business as part of the requirements of the entrepreneurship program in which she is enrolled.

A long time friend insists that Natalie has to somehow include cookies in her business plan. After a series of brainstorming sessions, Natalie settles on the idea of operating a cookie making school. She will start on a part time basis and offer her services in people”s homes. Now that she has started thinking about it, the possibilities seem endless. During the fall, she will concentrate on holiday cookies. She will offer individual lessons and group sessions (which will probably be more entertainment than education for the participants). Natalie also decides to include children in her target market.

The first difficult decision is coming up with the perfect name for her business. In the end, she settles on “Cookie Creations” and then moves on to more important issues.

Instructions

(a) What form of business organization—proprietorship, partnership, or corporation—do you recommend that Natalie use for her business? Discuss the benefits and weaknesses of each form and give the reasons for your choice.

(b) Will Natalie need accounting information? If yes, what information will she need and why? How often will she need this information?

(c) Identify specific asset, liability, and owner”s equity accounts that Cookie Creations will likely use to record its business transactions.

(d) Should Natalie open a separate bank account for the business? Why or why not?

prepare the statement of financial position statement 590506

Question 1 [25 marks]
Preparation of a statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income and a statement of
financial position
The summarised trial balance of Amanah Ltd, a manufacturing company, for the year ended 31
December 2013 is provided below:
DR ($) CR ($)
Sales of goods 4,469,000
Interest income 6,000
Cost of sales 2,987,000
Distribution expenses 86,000
Sales and marketing expenses 820,000
Administration expenses 252,000
Interest expense 44,000
Other borrowing expenses 4,000
Income tax expense 85,000
Cash on hand 4,000
Cash on deposit, at call 100,000
Trade debtors 450,000
Allowance for doubtful debts 14,000
Other debtors 93,000
Raw material inventory 188,000
Finished goods inventory 714,000
Land and buildings 257,000
Accumulated depreciation – buildings 36,000
Plant and equipment 1,260,000
Accumulated depreciation plant and equipment 564,000
Patents 48,000
Amortisation of patents 3,000
Goodwill 870,000
Bank loans 66,000
Other loans 570,000
Trade creditors 510,000
Provision for employee benefits 93,000
Warranty provision 37,000
Current tax payable 25,000
Deferred tax payable 135,000
Retained earnings, 31 December 2012 326,000
Dividends paid 150,000
Land revaluation surplus 50,000
Share capital 1,508,000
8,412,000 8,412,000 Page 2 of 6
Additional information:
(a) Shares were issued during 2013 for $120,000.
(b) Share capital was $1,358,000 at 31 December 2012.
(c) Of the $150,000 dividend, $30,000 was reinvested as part of a dividend reinvestment plan.
(d) The balance of land revaluation surplus at 31 December 2012 was $15,000 credit.
(e) During the year ended 31 December 2013, land was revalued upward by $50,000, with related
tax of $15,000.
(f) $30,000 of bank loans is repayable within 1 year.
(g) $110,000 of other loans is repayable within 1 year.
(h) The provision for employee benefits includes $62,000 payable within 1 year.
(i) The warranty provision is in respect of a 12 month warranty given on certain goods sold.
(j) Amanah Ltd uses the single statement format for the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income and classifies expenses by function within the statement.
Required:
Prepare the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
and statement of changes in equity of Amanah Ltd for the year ended 31 December 2013 in accordance
with the requirements of AASB101.
In preparing the above statements, use captions that a listed company is likely to use and provide any
relevant workings and/or explanations where appropriate. Notes to the accounts are not required.
Question 1 Max. marks awarded
SPLOCI
Line items provided on face of statement and title 4.5
Explanation 1
SFP
Line items provided on face of statement and title 9
Explanation/workings 6
SCE
Items provided on statement and title 4.5
Total 25
Page 3 of 6
Question 2 [15 marks]
Company formation – Issue by instalments, oversubscription, forfeiture and reissue
In 2013, City Ltd offered 10,000,000 shares to the public at an issue price of $2 per share, payable as
follows:
$1 on application (application close 15 July)
$1 on allotment (payable within one month of allotment)
By 15 July, applications had been received for 11,000,000 shares. The directors decided to allot shares
on a pro rata basis, with any excess paid on application to be offset against the amount due on
allotment. The shares were allotted on 20 July.
By 20 August, all money was received except for the holder of 1,000,000 shares who failed to make
the payment. On 31 August, as provided for in the constitution, the directors decided to forfeit these
shares. The forfeited shares were auctioned on 15 September as fully paid. An amount of $1.50 is
received for each share sold. The constitution states that any balance in the forfeited shares account is
to be returned to the former shareholder.
Required:
Provide the journal entries to account for the above events. Show all relevant dates and narrations.
Question 2 Max. marks awarded
Journal entries 10
Dates 4
Narrations 1
Total 15
Page 4 of 6
Question 3 [10 marks]
Recognition and measurement for intangible assets
Science Ltd incurred expenditure researching and developing a cure for a common disease in beet root.
At the end of 2013, the management decided that the project was unlikely to succeed because trials of
the prototype had failed.
During 2014, a breakthrough in agricultural science improved changes of the product succeeding and
development resumed. The project was completed in 2014. At the end of that year, costs incurred on the
project were expected to be recoverable. Science Ltd estimated the following pattern of returns for the
project:
Year Returns
2015 10%
2016 20%
2017 30%
2018 30%
2019 10%
At the end of 2019, the product will be at the end of its useful life because the disease found in beet root
would have been eradicated. Cost incurred were summarised below:
Research Development
$’000 $’000
2013 40,000 10,000
2014 12,000 60,000
Required:
(1) How much research and development expenditure should be recognised as an expense in 2013
and 2014? Explain your answer.
(2) How much expenditure should be carried forward (deferred) and reported in the statement of
financial position at the end of 2013 and 2014?
(3) Prepare journal entries for the amortisation of deferred costs in 2015 and 2016, assuming that
actual revenues are as expected. State the amount of deferred expenditure carried forward in the
statement of financial position in relation to the deferred costs.
Question 3 Max. marks awarded
Part (1) 4
Part (2) 2
Part (3) 4
Total 10
Page 5 of 6
Question 4 [10 marks]
Revaluation and de recognition of depreciable assets
Sasimi Ltd acquired a machine on 1 July 2011 at a cost of $300,000. At the date of acquisition, Sasimi
Ltd’s directors determine to depreciate the machine on a straight line basis over a period of six (6)
years, with no residual value. The company elects to adopt the revaluation model subsequent to
acquisition.
On 1 July 2013, the directors estimated the fair value for the machine is $250,000. At that date, it is
determined that the machine will have remaining useful life of five (5) years. On 1 July 2014, the
machine is unexpectedly sold for $220,000.
Assume a tax rate of 30%.
Required:
Prepare journal entries to record the revaluation on 1 July 2013 and the subsequent sale on 1 July 2014.

Attachments:

what is the interest expense for 2012 how much equipment was purchased during the ye 590519

SECTION A: (16 MARKS)

Use your skills to Analyze, compare, criticize, evaluate and justify the answers in a process to solve the assignment.

ANZ Limited

Balance Sheet as at 30th June

$ $
Current Assets 2012 2011
Cash 40,000 60,000
Account Receivables 650,000 300,000
Allowance for doubtful debts (50,000) (50,000)
Inventory 700,000 290,000
1,340,000 600,000
Non Current Assets
Equipment 1,800,000 1,100,000
Accumulated depreciation (550,000) (100,000)
Capitalized borrowing cost 200,000
1,450,000 1,000,000
Total Assets 2,790,000 1,600,000
Current Liabilities
Account payable 670,000 556,000
Tax payable 60,000 44,000
730,000 600,000
Non Current Liabilities
Loan 580,000 600,000
Total Liabilities 1,310,000 1,200,000
Net Assets 1,480,000 400,000
Shareholder’s Equity
Share Capital 1,150,000 250,000
Retained Profit 330,000 150,000
1,480,000 400,000
Sales (all on credit) 1000,000 640,000
Net profit after tax 200,000 128,000
EBIT 290,000 197,000
Tax expenses 41,000 32,000

Required : (Each question is 2 marks)

1.a. What is the interest expense for 2012?

b. How much equipment was purchased during the year?

c. What was the depreciation expense for 2012?

d. Were any share issues? If any, calculate the value.

e. How much in dividend was paid during the year 2012?

f. How much cash was received from customers during the year?

g. How much was paid in tax?

2. Referring to the information in the question, provide four examples of accounting policy choices that ANZ may have made in determining profit that may have increased this year’s profit. (2marks)

SECTION B: (14 MARKS)

(Scenario based)

The general manager of Qantas had two concerns: the company’s worsening cash position ($3000 cash and No bank loan at the end of 2011, No cash and a $7,000 bank loan at the end of 2012) and an inadequate level of net profit. (According to General Manager).

  1. The general manager was confused because the company had a $9,000 profit, yet seemed, as noted above, $10,000 worse off in its cash position. Explain briefly how, in general, this difference between profit and cash change can happen. (2marks)
  2. The general manager proposed changes in the company’s accounting policies in a few areas in an attempt to show a higher profit. He met the company’s auditors to discuss these ideas. What do you think the auditors should have said? (2marks)
  3. For each of the proposed changes below, considered separately and independently, calculate the effect on 2012 net profit and total assets as at 31st December 2012. Assume a company tax rate (Australia) as income tax rate.
  1. The general manager suggested recognizing revenue at an earlier point. If this were done, net account receivables would be increased by $12,000 at 31st December 2011 and by $23,000 at 31st December 2012. (2marks)
  2. The general manager suggested changing the inventory cost policy to FIFO (which would still produce costs less than net receivable value). Doing this would increase 31st December 2011 inventories by $4,000 and 31st December 2012 inventories by $1,000. (2marks)
  3. The general manager suggested that the company not account for deferred income taxes, but rather treat income taxes payable in each year as the income tax expenses. The deferred income tax liability was $2,800 at 31st December 2011 and, without these changes, $2,600 at 31st December 2012. (3marks)
  4. The general manager suggested capitalizing more of the company’s product development costs and amortizing additional capitalized amounts over five years, using the straight line method. If this were done, $4,000 of 2011 expenses would be capitalized at 31st December 2011 and $6,000 of 2012 expenses would be capitalized at 31st December 2012. (3marks)

Attachments:

hi i need help for this assignment i need the answer for 2nd question with an abstra 590525

hi,

i need help for this assignment. i need the answer for 2nd question with an abstract.
Document Preview:

Faculty of Business BUACC5933 Cost and Management Accounting Assignment, Semester one 2014 Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ ?PAGE ?? Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ ?PAGE ?1? ?PAGE ?? 1. General information As per the course description, this assignment constitutes 30 per cent of the total assessment in this course and is due in week 10 of the semester. 2. Purpose BUACC5933 covers a range of important cost and management accounting topics. The main purpose of this assignment is to provide students with the opportunity to extend their knowledge, skills, attitudes and values in connection with some of the topics covered during the course. Students are required to complete the assignment in groups of two and this is intended to foster the development of a capacity to work cooperatively with fellow students (as per the objectives for this course). 3. Formation of groups Students are to complete the assignment in groups of two and do not have any entitlement to adopt some other arrangement (such as completing the assignment individually or in a group of three) without the permission of the lecturer in charge of the course at the location where they are studying. Students who have difficulty arranging membership of a group or who encounter other difficulties (for example, a group member withdraws from the course) should consult their lecturer in charge. Where there are an odd number of students in the class, the lecturer in charge may grant permission for one group of three students to be formed. 4. Requirements Each group is to submit essays on Topic 1 and Topic 2 as listed below. Each essay will carry a weighting of 15 marks out of the 30 marks available for this assessment task. Topic 1: Ethics and budgeting Budgeting is…

Attachments:

acme manufacturing company of portland oregon 590569

Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in house users of the department’s services.

Document Preview:

1050000 2350000 3600000 1400000 R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs: Market Analysis Product Design Product Development Prototype Testing Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are: Cost Drivers Activities Total Estimated Drivers Hours of analysis Number of designs Number of products Number of tests 1500 hours 2500 designs 90 products 500 tests a) Compute the activity based overhead rate for each pool. Use appropriate excel formulas to show your work b) How much cost would be charged to an in house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of Show your work. market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products and requested 92 engineering tests? Total c) How much cost would serve as the basis for for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests? d) What is the benefit to Acme Manufacturing of applying activity based costing to its R&D activity for both in house and outside charging purposes? Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in house users of the department’s services.

Attachments:

i need the following done journalize the transactions enter the beginning balances i 590614

I need the following done:Journalize the transactions,Enter the beginning balances in the accounts and post the journal entries to the stockholders’ equity accounts
(Post entries in the order of journal entries posted in the previous part.),Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014, andCalculate the payout ratio, earnings per share, and return on common stockholders’ equity
(Round earning per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. $2.66 and all other answers to 1 decimal place. 17.5%.)

The stockholders’ equity accounts of Miley Corporation on January 1, 2014, were as follows.

Preferred Stock (8%, $100par noncumulative,4,300shares authorized) $258,000
Common Stock ($5stated value,338,300shares authorized) 1,353,200
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock 10,320
Paid in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock 541,280
Retained Earnings 685,600
Treasury Stock—(4,300common shares) 34,400

During 2014, the corporation had the following transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders’ equity.

Feb.1 Issued5,100shares of common stock for $35,700.
Mar.20 Purchased1,580additional shares of common treasury stock at $8per share.
Oct.1 Declared a8% cash dividend on preferred stock, payable November 1.
Nov.1 Paid the dividend declared on October 1.
Dec.1 Declared a $0.60per share cash dividend to common stockholders of record on December 15, payable December 31, 2014.
Dec.31 Determined that net income for the year was $280,700. Paid the dividend declared on December 1.

accounting 590630

Department G had 3,463 units, one third completed at the beginning of the period, 13,128 units were completed during the period, 1,927 units were one fifth completed at the end of the period, and the following manufacturing costs were debited to the departmental work in process account during the period:

Work in process, beginning of period $34,036
Costs added during period:
Direct materials $115,191
Direct labor $76,794
Factory overhead $25,598

Assuming that all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production and that the first in, first out method of inventory costing is used, what is the total cost of the departmental work in process inventory at the end of the period?

Select the correct answer.

$25,598
$12,359
$22,342
$115,191

write a report on hollate manufacturing case study 590636

Hollate Manufacturing Case Study

About this case study: This case study was developed as a joint effort by the Center for Audit Quality, Financial Executives International, The Institute of Internal Auditors, and the National Association of Corporate Directors. These four organizations have formed the Anti Fraud Collaboration to actively engage in efforts to mitigate the risks of financial reporting fraud. The Collaboration’s goal is to promote the deterrence and detection of financial reporting fraud through the development of education, programs, tools and other related resources. For more information about the Anti Fraud Collaboration and its resources please visit www.AntiFraudCollaboration.org.

Read the case study and make a report.

Document Preview:

Hollate Manufacturing Case StudyAbout this case study: This case study was developed as a joint effort by the Center for Audit Quality, Financial Executives International, The Institute of Internal Auditors, and the National Association of Corporate Directors. These four organizations have formed the Anti Fraud Collaboration to actively engage in efforts to mitigate the risks of financial reporting fraud. The Collaboration’s goal is to promote the deterrence and detection of financial reporting fraud through the development of education, programs, tools and other related resources. For more information about the Anti Fraud Collaboration and its resources please visit www.AntiFraudCollaboration.org. © Copyright 2013Jack Brennahan had his dream job. He had always wanted to head a manufacturing company and five years earlier he received that opportunity at Hollate when he was promoted from the CFO position. He enjoyed the work, the exciting environment he had helped create, and the people around him. As CEO, however, Brennahan understood that the buck stopped with him. He took his responsibilities seriously both in running a successful business and ensuring that the business met all regulatory requirements and ethical expectations of being a good corporate citizen. He never wanted to be ashamed of anything he read in the newspaper about Hollate. Brennahan, however, had just received a call from Cara Porcini, Hollate’s external auditor, followed immediately by a call from Mike Soltany, Hollate’s audit committee chair. They had news that stopped him cold. and a market capitalization of approximately $1.5 billion. HOllatE With one or two exceptions, each division was profitable Hollate began manufacturing products for the home and was maintaining market share. construction industry in the 1950s. For most of its history it comprised one division that made windows CEO JaCk BrEnnaHan and tHE and doors for the Southeastern region of the United…

Attachments:

the balance sheet of chandan limited as on 31 december 1998 was as follows liabiliti 590687

The balance sheet of Chandan Limited as on 31 December 1998 was as follows:

Liabilities Amount Assets Amount

Share capital Fixed assets

10000, 6%

redeemable

preference shares of

Rs. 10 each fully

paid

100000 Land & building 150000

50000 equity shares

of Rs. 10 each fully

paid

500000 Plant & machinery 200000

General reserve 90000 Current assets

Profit & loss A/c 230000 Stock 250000

8% debentures 50000 Debtors 180000

Sundry creditors 70000 Cash and bank 260000

1040000 1040000

The directors of the company decided to:

a. Redeem preference shares at a premium of 5%

b. Redeem debentures at a premium of 10%;

c. Bring out a bonus issue for the equity shareholders of one Rs. 10 equity share held in order to

capitalize a part of the undistributed profit.

Show:

The appropriate journal entries to record the transactions in the books of the company;

The balance sheet as it would appear after the completion of the transactions

you are given information about doha company which is a service co 590691

You are given information about Doha Company which is a service company located in Qatar. You are expected to analyze, record and communicate that information by using Microsoft Excel. You will need to complete the accounting cycle in the following order:

  1. Prepare journal entries in the general journal.
  2. Post the entries to the general ledger.
  3. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in owners’ equity and balance sheet.

Please note that you will be expected to apply basic Excel applications such linking the cells and using formulas (i.e. adding and subtracting information in the different cells). You will be graded on your ability to complete the accounting cycle by employing Excel functions. Should you need to type in items that are not available in the provided information, such as “current asset” in the balance sheet, then please feel free to do so. Additionally, you will need to:

  1. Find information from the internet regarding the different risks that are found in companies.

You will need to provide the source (link to the website) from which you have obtain that information. Alternatively, you can submit a printed copy of the information obtained from the internet.

  1. Please a report write a short report (one page or less) to answer the following:
  1. Assume that Doha Company asked you for a loan. Based on the information in the financial statements, would you agree to give a loan to the company? Explain your answer.
  2. In your opinion, how can information technology help businesses.

Document Preview:

IT Project Description You are given information about Doha Company which is a service company located in Qatar. You are expected to analyze, record and communicate that information by using Microsoft Excel. You will need to complete the accounting cycle in the following order: Prepare journal entries in the general journal. Post the entries to the general ledger. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in owners’ equity and balance sheet. Please note that you will be expected to apply basic Excel applications such linking the cells and using formulas (i.e. adding and subtracting information in the different cells). You will be graded on your ability to complete the accounting cycle by employing Excel functions. Should you need to type in items that are not available in the provided information, such as “current asset” in the balance sheet, then please feel free to do so. Additionally, you will need to: Find information from the internet regarding the different risks that are found in companies. You will need to provide the source (link to the website) from which you have obtain that information. Alternatively, you can submit a printed copy of the information obtained from the internet. Please a report write a short report (one page or less) to answer the following: Assume that Doha Company asked you for a loan. Based on the information in the financial statements, would you agree to give a loan to the company? Explain your answer. In your opinion, how can information technology help businesses.

kelly s boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of 10 590775

Kelly’s Boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of $100,000 in special equipment. One alternative is to borrow $100,000 from a local bank for 10 years at 12 percent per annum. The bank has asked them to produce a 1 year cash budget broken down by months (January through December). Sales of $30,000 are expected in the first month, with each month thereafter increasing 2 percent. Purchases are based on an expected cost of sales of 55 percent and a required ending inventory of 70 percent of next month’s cost of sales. Beginning inventory was $11,000. Sales for January next year are expected to be $40,000. Sales in the previous November and December were $29,000 and $28,000, respectively. Expenses include advertising expense of $900, depreciation expense of $800, interest expense of $1,000, payroll expense of $8,000, supplies expense of $500, and utilities expense of $600 per month throughout the year. All expenses except depreciation are paid in the month during which they are incurred. Collections in the month of sale are expected to be 50 percent, collections in the first month following a sale 40 percent, and in the second month 10 percent. Payments in the month of purchase are expected to be 75 percent, payments in the first month following a purchase 15 percent, and payments in the second month to154155be 10 percent. Purchases in the previous November and December were $16,000 and $17,000, respectively. Proceeds from the $100,000 loan are expected in June, and $100,000 of equipment will be purchased in July. Monthly payments of $1,400 on the loan also begin in July. The beginning cash balance in January was $22,000.

Using the ch6 04 file to start your work, create a cash budget (as you did in the chapter) that is based on the assumptions listed in the previous paragraph. Use Excel’s grouping feature to group operating cash receipts, operating cash payment, cash from (to) operating activities, cash from (to) investing activities, and cash from (to) financing activities and also to group the twelve monthly columns together. Save your file as ch6 04_student_name (replacing student_name with your name).

  • a.Print the newly completed worksheet in Value view, with your name and date printed in the lower left footer and the file name in the lower right footer.
  • b.Print the worksheet from part a, above, in Formula view, with your name and date printed in the lower left footer and the file name in the lower right footer. Print only columns A and B of the cash budget, no assumptions.
  • c.Collapse rows to level 2 and columns to level 1, and then print the worksheet in Value view with your name and date printed in the lower left footer and the file name in the lower right footer. Print cash budget only, no assumptions.
  • d.Collapse rows to level 2 and columns to level 1, and then use what if analysis to calculate end of year cash if the sales growth each month were 5 percent and payroll expense were $20,000 per month. Print the resulting worksheet in Value view, with your name and date printed in the lower left footer and the file name in the lower right footer. Print cash budget only, no assumptions.
  • e.Undo the what if analysis performed in part d. Collapse rows to level 2 and columns to level 1, and then use goal seek to determine what sales growth would be needed to produce an ending cash balance of $100,000. Print the resulting worksheet in Value view with your name and date printed in the lower left footer and the file name in the lower right footer. Print cash budget only, no assumptions.

you are an accountant at yves group accountants investment advisers you ha 590836

You are an accountant at Yves Group
Accountants &
Investment Advisers. You have been approached by a group of investors for your professional advice on investing in Woolworths Ltd. Your client is a strong believer in
Socially Responsible Investing. That would mean adopting an investment strategy which seeks to consider both financial return and social good.

Required:

Go to:

http://www.woolworthslimited.com.au/annualreport/2013/

http://www.woolworthslimited.com.au/CRReport/2013/downloads/Woolworths_Limited_Corporate_Responsibility_Report_2013.pdf

You +1’d this publicly.Undo

and access the company’s annual report and corporate responsibility report for 2013.

Prepare a report for your client. Your report should include:

  1. A description of the core business of the company including full details of its operating activities.
  2. A discussion on any significant issues emerging from the Chairman’s Report.
  3. A discussion on any significant issues emerging from the Managing Director’s Report.
  4. A discussion on company’s Corporate Governance Statement.
  5. A calculation of the key financial ratios for 2013.
  6. An overall assessment of the company and your recommendation on investing in the company.

In making an overall assessment, you may conduct additional research on Woolworths too. For example, http://www.news.com.au/business/woolworths betting on booze profits as it looks to expand hotel empire/story e6frfm1i 1226223987450

http://www.smh.com.au/nsw/big retailers warned in nsw truck clampdown 20131221 2zrwu l

Please note the following:

  • Format: Business report
  • Length: 2000 – 2200 words
  • Due date: Week 10
  • Your work must comply with the University’s General Guide for the Presentation of Academic Work.
  • Two Useful links.
  • http://federation.edu.au/students/assistance support and services/academic support/learning and study/resources
  • http://www.federation.edu.au/current students/assistance, support and services/academic support/learning and study/resources/general guide for the presentation of academic work

Attachments:

100 of capacity during the first month the following data summarize the results for 590837

e Duller Edge Inc. assembles and sells MP3 players. The company began operations on May 1, 2012, and operated at 100% of capacity during the first month. The following data summarize the results for May:

Sales (20,000 units) Production costs (27,000 units): Direct materials 51,998,000 Direct labor 972,000 Variable factory overhead 486,000 Fixed factory overhead 324,000 3,780,000 Selling and administrative expenses: Variable selling and administrative expenses 560,000 Fixed selling and administrative expenses 150,000 710,000

auditing and assurance memo 590870

this is belong to auditing and assurance.

Document Preview:

Holmes Institute HA3032 Memo 02 – Semester 01, 2014 Background: Mr David Buttoneer the owner operator of Buttons by David Pty Ltd. runs a number of button lines. His favourite is a cut stag horn button that has gold filigree. Using a variable costing approach, the revenues and costs per 100 buttons is: Table 1: Buttons by David Pty Ltd. Stag Horn Button Costs per 100 Buttons Sales Revenue $200.00 VC of materials – Stag horn $40.00 – Gold wire 30.00 $90.00 VC of labour – Cutting $ 5.00 – Wire inlay 35.00 – Polishing 8.00 48.00 VC of MO/H – Indirect Materials $ 2.00 – Indirect Labour 5.00 – Other MO/H 15.00 22.00 VC of SG&A 5.00 $165.00 Contribution Margin $ 35.00 FC of MO/H $ 100.00 FC of SG&A 25.00 $125.00 Profit/(loss) before Taxes ($90.00) Required: However, the stag horn button line is not popular with the customers and generates a substantial loss. Currently, the company has 30,000 stag horn buttons in inventory. As the External Auditor and using a standard format memo (i.e. a short report of ½ to 1½ pages) please explain to Mr David Buttoneer: 1) The concept of valuing Inventories at the “Lower of Cost or Market” (cite the AASB Handbook section), 2) The estimated “full absorption cost” of manufacturing 100 stag horn buttons, and 3) The appropriate value for the stag horn buttons inventory in total and per 100 buttons – show calculations to justify your answer. This is to be answered in your groups of 3 6 students, where each group will submit one report with the names and student numbers of all group members in the heading. This assignment is due 20 May/14, in class. The marking rubric that will guide the marking is posted to the assignment section of the HA3032 Blackboard site.

Attachments:

the management of springer plc is considering next year s production and purchases b 590876

The management of Springer Plc is considering next year’s production and purchases budgets.

One of the components produced by the company, which is incorporated into another product before being sold has a budgeted manufacturing cost as follows: $

Direct materials 14

Direct labour (4hours at $3 per hour) 12

Variable overhead (4hours at $2 per hour) 8

Fixed overhead (4 hours at $5 per hour) 20

Total Cost 54

Trigger Plc has offered to supply the above component at a guaranteed price of $50 per unit.

Required:

a. Considering the above criteria only, advise management whether the above component should be purchased from Trigger plc or not.

b. Explain how your above advice would be affected by:

1. As a result of recent government legislation, if Springer Plc continues to manufacture this component the company will incur additional inspection and testing expenses of $56,000 per annum which is not included in the above budgeted manufacturing costs.

2. If the above component is not manufactured by Springer plc the direct labour released will be employed in increasing the production of an existing product which is sold for $90 and which has a budgeted manufacturing costs as follows: $

Direct material 10

Direct labour (8hours at $3 per hour) 24

Variable overhead (8hours at $5 per hour) 16

Fixed overhead (8hours at $5 per hour) 40

90

ifrs 590877

I need you to only answer the questions in the given attachment

Document Preview:

Research case: You are spending the summer working for a local wholesale furniture company, Samson Furniture, Inc. The com pany is considering a proposal from a local financial institution, Old Reliant Financial, to factor Samson’s receiva bles. The company controller is unfamiliar with the prevailing authoritative guidance that deals with accounting for the transfer of financial assets and has asked you to do some research. The controller wants to make sure the arrangement with the financial institution is structured in such a way as to allow the factoring to be accounted for as a sale. Old Reliant has offered to factor all of the company’s receivables on a “without recourse” basis. Old Reliant will remit to Samson 90% of the factored amount, collect the receivables from Samson’s customers, and retain the remaining 10% until all of the receivables have been collected. When Old Reliant collects all of the receivables, it will remit to Samson the retained amount, less a 4% fee (4% of the total factored amount). Required: 1. Explain the meaning of the term without recourse. 2. Access the relevant authoritative guidance on accounting for the transfer of financial assets using the website of the IFRS Foundation and the IASB (http://www.ifrs.org/IFRSs/IFRS ). What conditions must be met for a transfer of receivables to be accounted for as a sale (or in accounting terms, “derecognized”)? What is the specific citation that Samson would rely on in applying that accounting treatment? 3. assuming that the conditions for treatment as a sale are met, prepare Samson’s journal entry to record the factoring of $400,000 of receivables. Assume that the fair value of the last 10% of Samson’s receivables is equal to $25,000. 4. An agreement that both entitles and obligates the transferor, Samson, to repurchase or redeem transferred assets from the transferee, Old Reliant, maintains the transferor’s effective control over those assets, how should the transfer be accounted…

Attachments:

you work as an accountant for a small land development company that desperately need 590918

You work as an accountant for a small land development company that desperately needs additional financing to continue in business. The president of your company is meeting with the manager of a local bank at the end of the month to try to obtain this financing. The president has approached you with two ideas to improve the company’s reported financial position. First, he claims that because a big part of the company’s value comes from its knowledgeable and dedicated employees, you should report their Intellectual Abilities as an asset on the balance sheet. Second, he claims that although the local economy is doing poorly and almost no one is buying land or new houses, he is optimistic that eventually things will turn around. For this reason, he asks you to continue reporting the company’s land on the balance sheet at its cost, rather than the much lower amount that real estate appraisers say its really worth.

Required: Comment on the following questions. Why do you think the president is so concerned with the amount of assets reported on the balance sheet? What accounting concept relates to the presidents first suggestion to report Intellectual Abilities as an asset? What accounting concept relates to the presidents second suggestion to continue reporting land at its cost? Who might be hurt by the presidents suggestions, if you were to do as he asks? What should you do?

this asignment is due this sunday 100 no plagiarism i have a 95 macth sample answer 590933

This asignment is due this sunday.

100% no plagiarism.

I have a 95% macth sample answer from senior student

Document Preview:

ASSIGNMENT On 1 July 2011, Candle Ltd acquired all the shares of Power Ltd on a cum div basis. On this date, the equity of Power Ltd included the following balances: Share Capital $198 000 General Reserve 42 000 Retained Earnings 90 000 At acquisition date, all the identifiable assets and liabilities of Power Ltd were recorded at amounts equal to fair value except for: Carrying Fair Amount Value Vehicles (cost $96 000) $78 000 $84 000 Inventory $28 000 $30 200 Machinery (cost $132 000) 86 000 90 000 Land 165 000 185 000 At 1 July 2011 Power Ltd had recorded goodwill of $12 500 arising from a business combination transaction in 2009. The dividend payable in Power Ltd’s books on 1 July 2011 was $8 000, this dividend was paid on 13 October 2011. The vehicles and machinery were expected to have a further useful life of four (4) and five (5) years respectively. Inventory on hand at 1 July 2011 was all sold by 31 January 2012. The land owned at 1 July 2011 was sold in September 2012 for $215 000. The machinery on hand at 1 July 2011 was sold on 1 September 2013 for $63 500. At 1 July 2011, Power Ltd owned, but had not recorded, an internally generated patent. This patent was considered by Candle Ltd to have a fair value of $48 000 and a remaining useful life of ten (10) years. An impairment test conducted with respect to the patent on 30 June 2013 concluded that its recoverable amount at that date was $2 000 less than its carrying amount. At 30 June 2014, due to deteriorating market conditions a further impairment loss of $10 000 was assessed. Any adjustments for differences between carrying amounts at acquisition date and fair values are made on consolidation. Any valuation reserves created are transferred on consolidation to retained earnings when assets are sold, lost or fully consumed. In June 2012, the directors of Power Ltd declared a share dividend worth $35 000 from the general reserve on hand at 1 July 2011. Additional…

Attachments:

determine the net income that flanagan company reported for december 2014 590959

Presented below is selected information related to Flanagan Company at December 31, 2014. Flanagan reports financial information monthly.

Equipment

$10,000

Utilities Expense

$ 4,000

Cash

8,000

Accounts Receivable

9,000

Service Revenue

36,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

7,000

Rent Expense

11,000

Notes Payable

16,500

Accounts Payable

2,000

Owner”s Drawings

5,000

(a) Determine the total assets of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2014.

(b) Determine the net income that Flanagan Company reported for December 2014.

(c) Determine the owner”s equity of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2014.

prepare the income statement owner s equity statement and balance sheet at july 31 f 590960

Joan Robinson opens her own law office on July 1, 2014. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

  1. Joan invested $11,000 in cash in the law practice.
  2. Paid $800 for July rent on office space.
  3. Purchased office equipment on account $3,000.
  4. Performed legal services to clients for cash $1,500.
  5. Borrowed $700 cash from a bank on a note payable.
  6. Performed legal services for client on account $2,000.
  7. Paid monthly expenses: salaries and wages $500, utilities $300, and advertising $100.
  8. Joan withdraws $1,000 cash for personal use.

Instructions

(a)Prepare a tabular summary of the transactions.

(b)Prepare the income statement, owner”s equity statement, and balance sheet at July 31 for Joan Robinson, Attorney.

determine the net income that howard company reported for december 2014 591004

Presented below is selected information related to Howard Company at December 31, 2014. Howard reports financial information monthly.

Accounts Payable

$ 3,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

$16,500

Cash

4,500

Notes Payable

25,000

Advertising Expense

6,000

Rent Expense

10,500

Service Revenue

51,500

Accounts Receivable

13,500

Equipment

29,000

Owner”s Drawings

7,500

(a) Determine the total assets of Howard Company at December 31, 2014.

(b) Determine the net income that Howard Company reported for December 2014.

(c) Determine the owner”s equity of Howard Company at December 31, 2014.

compute the price efficiency and flexible budget variances for direct materials and 590353

Materials and manufacturing labor variances. Consider the following data collected for Great Homes, Inc.:

Direct Materials

Direct Manufacturing Labor

Cost incurred: Actual inputs x actual prices

$200,000

$90,000

Actual inputs x standard prices

214,000

86,000

Standard inputs allowed for actual output x standard prices

225,000

80,000

Compute the price, efficiency, and flexible budget variances for direct materials and direct manufacturing labor.

comment on the may 2012 results would you continue the ldquo experiment rdquo of usi 590354

Direct materials and direct manufacturing labor variances. GloriaDee, Inc., designs and manufactures T shirts. It sells its T shirts to brand name clothes retailers in lots of one dozen. GloriaDee’s May 2011 static budget and actual results for direct inputs are as follows:

Static Budget

Number of T shirt lots (1 lot = 1 dozen)

500

Per Lot of T shirts:

Direct materials

12 meters at $1.50 per meter = $18.00

Direct manufacturing labor

2 hours at $8.00 per hour = $16.00

Actual Results

Number of T shirt lots sold

550

Total Direct Inputs:

Direct materials

7,260 meters at $1.75 per meter = $12,705.00

Direct manufacturing labor

1,045 hours at $8.10 per hour = $8,464.50

GloriaDee has a policy of analyzing all input variances when they add up to more than 10% of the total cost of materials and labor in the flexible budget, and this is true in May 2011. The production manager discusses the sources of the variances: “A new type of material was purchased in May. This led to faster cutting and sewing, but the workers used more material than usual as they learned to work with it. For now, the standards are fine.”

1. Calculate the direct materials and direct manufacturing labor price and efficiency variances in May 2011. What is the total flexible budget variance for both inputs (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) combined? What percentage is this variance of the total cost of direct materials and direct manufacturing labor in the flexible budget?

2. Gloria Denham, the CEO, is concerned about the input variances. But, she likes the quality and feel of the new material and agrees to use it for one more year. In May 2012, GloriaDee again produces 550 lots of T shirts. Relative to May 2011, 2% less direct material is used, direct material price is down 5%, and 2% less direct manufacturing labor is used. Labor price has remained the same as in May 2011.

Calculate the direct materials and direct manufacturing labor price and efficiency variances in May 2012. What is the total flexible budget variance for both inputs (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) combined? What percentage is this variance of the total cost of direct materials and direct manufacturing labor in the flexible budget?

3. Comment on the May 2012 results. Would you continue the “experiment” of using the new material?

compute the march 2012 price and efficiency variances for direct materials and direc 590356

Continuous improvement The Monroe Corporation sets monthly standard costs using a continuous improvement approach. In January 2012, the standard direct material cost is $45 per unit and the standard direct manufacturing labor cost is $15 per unit. Due to more efficient operations, the standard quantities for February 2012 are set at 0.980 of the standard quantities for January. In March 2012, the standard quantities are set at 0.990 of the standard quantities for February 2012. Assume the same information for March 2012 as in Exercise 7 24, except for these revised standard quantities.

1. Compute the March 2012 standard quantities for direct materials and direct manufacturing labor (to three decimal places).

2. Compute the March 2012 price and efficiency variances for direct materials and direct manufacturing labor (round to the nearest dollar).

show computations of price and efficiency variances for direct materials and direct 590357

Materials and manufacturing labor variances, standard costs. Dunn, Inc., is a privately held furniture manufacturer. For August 2012, Dunn had the following standards for one of its products, a wicker chair:

Standards per Chair

Direct materials

2 square yards of input at $5 per square yard

Direct manufacturing labor

0.5 hour of input at $10 per hour

The following data were compiled regarding actual performance: actual output units (chairs) produced, 2,000; square yards of input purchased and used, 3,700; price per square yard, $5.10; direct manufacturing labor costs, $8,820; actual hours of input, 900; labor price per hour, $9.80.

1. Show computations of price and efficiency variances for direct materials and direct manufacturing labor. Give a plausible explanation of why each variance occurred.

2. Suppose 6,000 square yards of materials were purchased (at $5.10 per square yard), even though only 3,700 square yards were used. Suppose further that variances are identified at their most timely control point; accordingly, direct materials price variances are isolated and traced at the time of purchase to the purchasing department rather than to the production department. Compute the price and efficiency variances under this approach.

comment on possible reasons for the variances you computed 590360

Market Share and Market Size Variances. Rhaden Company produces sweat resistant headbands for joggers. Information pertaining to Rhaden’s operations for May 2011 follows:

Actual

Budget

Units sold

230,550

220,000

Sales revenue

$3,412,140

$3,300,000

Variable cost ratio

68%

64%

Market size in units

4,350,000

4,400,000

1. Compute the sales volume variance for May 2011.

2. Compute the market share and market size variances for May 2011.

3. Comment on possible reasons for the variances you computed.

what information in addition to that provided in the income statements would you wan 590362

Variance analysis, nonmanufacturing setting. Stevie McQueen has run Lightning Car Detailing for the past 10 years. His static budget and actual results for June 2011 are provided next. Stevie has one employee who has been with him for all 10 years that he has been in business. In addition, at any given time he also employs two other less experienced workers. It usually takes each employee 2 hours to detail a vehicle, regardless of his or her experience. Stevie pays his experienced employee $40 per vehicle and the other two employees $20 per vehicle. There were no wage increases in June.

Lightning Car Detailing
Actual and Budgeted Income Statements
For the Month Ended June 30, 2011

Budget

Actual

Cars detailed

200

225

Revenue

$30,000

$39,375

Variable costs

1,500

2,250

Costs of supplies

5,600

6,000

Labor

7,100

8,250

Total variable costs

22,900

31,125

Contribution margin

9,500

9,500

Fixed costs

$13,400

$21,625

Operating income

1. How many cars, on average, did Stevie budget for each employee? How many cars did each employee actually detail?

2. Prepare a flexible budget for June 2011.

3. Compute the sales price variance and the labor efficiency variance for each labor type.

4. What information, in addition to that provided in the income statements, would you want Stevie to gather, if you wanted to improve operational efficiency?

comprehensive variance analysis responsibility issues cma adapted styles inc manufac 590363

Comprehensive variance analysis, responsibility issues. (CMA, adapted) Styles, Inc., manufactures a full line of well known sunglasses frames and lenses. Styles uses a standard costing system to set attainable standards for direct materials, labor, and overhead costs. Styles reviews and revises standards annually, as necessary. Department managers, whose evaluations and bonuses are affected by their department’s performance, are held responsible to explain variances in their department performance reports.

Recently, the manufacturing variances in the Image prestige line of sunglasses have caused some concern. For no apparent reason, unfavorable materials and labor variances have occurred. At the monthly staff meeting, Jack Barton, manager of the Image line, will be expected to explain his variances and suggest ways of improving performance. Barton will be asked to explain the following performance report for 2011:

Actual Results

Static Budget Amounts

Units sold

7,275

7,500

Revenues

$596,550

$600,000

Variable manufacturing costs

351,965

324,000

Fixed manufacturing costs

108,398

112,500

Gross margin

136,187

163,500

Barton collected the following information:

Three items comprised the standard variable manufacturing costs in 2011:

Direct materials: Frames. Static budget cost of $49,500. The standard input for 2008 is 3.00 ounces per unit.

Direct materials: Lenses. Static budget costs of $139,500. The standard input for 2008 is 6.00 ounces per unit.

Direct manufacturing labor: Static budget costs of $135,000. The standard input for 2008 is 1.20 hours per unit.

Assume there are no variable manufacturing overhead costs.

The actual variable manufacturing costs in 2011 were as follows:

Direct materials: Frames. Actual costs of $55,872. Actual ounces used were 3.20 ounces per unit.

Direct materials: Lenses. Actual costs of $150,738. Actual ounces used were 7.00 ounces per unit.

Direct manufacturing labor: Actual costs of $145,355. The actual labor rate was $14.80 per hour.

1. Prepare a report that includes the following:

a. Selling price variance

b. Sales volume variance and flexible budget variance for operating income in the format.

c. Price and efficiency variances for the following:

Direct materials: frames

Direct materials: lenses

Direct manufacturing labor

2. Give three possible explanations for each of the three price and efficiency variances at Styles in requirement 1c.

can you provide a better explanation for the variances that you have calculated on t 590364

Possible causes for price and efficiency variances. You are a student preparing for a job interview with a Fortune 100 consumer products manufacturer. You are applying for a job in the finance department. This company is known for its rigorous case based interview process. One of the students who successfully obtained a job with them upon graduation last year advised you to “know your variances cold!” When you inquired further, she told you that she had been asked to pretend that she was investigating wage and materials variances. Per her advice, you have been studying the causes and consequences of variances. You are excited when you walk in and find that the first case deals with variance analysis. You are given the following data for May for a detergent bottling plant located in Mexico:

Actual

Bottles filled

340,000

Direct materials used in production

6,150,000 oz.

Actual direct material cost

2,275,500 pesos

Actual direct manufacturing labor hours

26,000 hours

Actual direct labor cost

784,420 pesos

Standards

Purchase price of direct materials

0.36 pesos/oz

Bottle size

15 oz.

Wage rate

29.25 pesos/hour

Bottles per minute

0.50

Please respond to the following questions as if you were in an interview situation:

1. Calculate the materials efficiency and price variance, and the wage and labor efficiency variances for the month of May.

2. You are given the following context: “Union organizers are targeting our detergent bottling plant in Puebla, Mexico, for a union.” Can you provide a better explanation for the variances that you have calculated on the basis of this information?

what future problems could result from better bikes rsquo decision to buy a lower qu 590365

Material cost variances, use of variances for performance evaluation. Katharine Stanley is the owner of Better Bikes, a company that produces high quality cross country bicycles. Better Bikes participates in a supply chain that consists of suppliers, manufacturers, distributors, and elite bicycle shops. For several years Better Bikes has purchased titanium from suppliers in the supply chain. Better Bikes uses titanium for the bicycle frames because it is stronger and lighter than other metals and therefore increases the quality of the bicycle. Earlier this year, Better Bikes hired Michael Scott, a recent graduate from State University, as purchasing manager. Michael believed that he could reduce costs if he purchased titanium from an online marketplace at a lower price.

Better Bikes established the following standards based upon the company’s experience with previous suppliers. The standards are as follows:

Cost of titanium

$22 per pound

Titanium used per bicycle

8 lb.

Actual results for the first month using the online supplier of titanium are as follows:

Bicycles produced

800

Titanium purchased

8,400 lb. for $159,600

Titanium used in production

7,900 lb.

1. Compute the direct materials price and efficiency variances.

2. What factors can explain the variances identified in requirement 1? Could any other variances be affected?

3. Was switching suppliers a good idea for Better Bikes? Explain why or why not.

4. Should Michael Scott’s performance evaluation be based solely on price variances? Should the production manager’s evaluation be based solely on efficiency variances? Why it is important for Katharine Stanley to understand the causes of a variance before she evaluates performance?

5. Other than performance evaluation, what reasons are there for calculating variances?

6. What future problems could result from Better Bikes’ decision to buy a lower quality of titanium from the online marketplace?

direct manufacturing labor and direct materials variances missing data cma heavily a 590366

Direct manufacturing labor and direct materials variances, missing data. (CMA, heavily adapted) Morro Bay Surfboards manufactures fiberglass surfboards. The standard cost of direct materials and direct manufacturing labor is $225 per board. This includes 30 pounds of direct materials, at the budgeted price of $3 per pound, and 9 hours of direct manufacturing labor, at the budgeted rate of $15 per hour. Following are additional data for the month of July:

Units completed

5,500 units

Direct material purchases

190,000 pounds

Cost of direct material purchases

$579,500

Actual direct manufacturing labor hours

49,000 hours

Actual direct labor cost

$739,900

Direct materials efficiency variance

$ 1,500 F

There were no beginning inventories.

1. Compute direct manufacturing labor variances for July.

2. Compute the actual pounds of direct materials used in production in July.

3. Calculate the actual price per pound of direct materials purchased.

4. Calculate the direct materials price variance.

the company installed a standard costing system to account for manufacturing costs 590367

Direct materials and manufacturing labor variances, solving unknowns. (CPA, adapted) On May 1, 2012, Bovar Company began the manufacture of a new paging machine known as Dandy. The company installed a standard costing system to account for manufacturing costs. The standard costs for a unit of Dandy follow:

Direct materials (3 lb. at $5 per lb.)

$15.00

Direct manufacturing labor (1/2 hour at $20 per hour)

10.00

Manufacturing overhead (75% of direct manufacturing labor costs)

7.50

$32.50

The following data were obtained from Bovar’s records for the month of May:

Debit

Credit

Revenues

$125,000

Accounts payable control (for May’s purchases of direct materials)

68,250

Direct materials price variance

$3,250

Direct materials efficiency variance

2,500

Direct manufacturing labor price variance

1,900

Direct manufacturing labor efficiency variance

2,000

Actual production in May was 4,000 units of Dandy, and actual sales in May were 2,500 units.

The amount shown for direct materials price variance applies to materials purchased during May. There was no beginning inventory of materials on May 1, 2012. Compute each of the following items for Bovar for the month of May. Show your computations.

1. Standard direct manufacturing labor hours allowed for actual output produced

2. Actual direct manufacturing labor hours worked

3. Actual direct manufacturing labor wage rate

4. Standard quantity of direct materials allowed (in pounds)

5. Actual quantity of direct materials used (in pounds)

6. Actual quantity of direct materials purchased (in pounds)

7. Actual direct materials price per pound

discuss logical explanations for the combination of variances that shayna experience 590368

Direct materials and manufacturing labor variances, journal entries. Shayna’s Smart Shawls, Inc., is a small business that Shayna developed while in college. She began hand knitting shawls for her dorm friends to wear while studying. As demand grew, she hired some workers and began to manage the operation. Shayna’s shawls require wool and labor. She experiments with the type of wool that she uses, and she has great variety in the shawls she produces. Shayna has bimodal turnover in her labor. She has some employees who have been with her for a very long time and others who are new and inexperienced. Shayna uses standard costing for her shawls. She expects that a typical shawl should take 4 hours to produce, and the standard wage rate is $10.00 per hour. An average shawl uses 12 skeins of wool. Shayna shops around for good deals, and expects to pay $3.50 per skein. Shayna uses a just in time inventory system, as she has clients tell her what type and color of wool they would like her to use.

For the month of April, Shayna’s workers produced 235 shawls using 925 hours and 3,040 skeins of wool. Shayna bought wool for $10,336 (and used the entire quantity), and incurred labor costs of $9,620.

1. Calculate the price and efficiency variances for the wool, and the price and efficiency variances for direct manufacturing labor.

2. Record the journal entries for the variances incurred.

3. Discuss logical explanations for the combination of variances that Shayna experienced.

comprehensive variance analysis review sonnet inc has the following budgeted standar 590369

Comprehensive variance analysis review. Sonnet, Inc., has the following budgeted standards for the month of March 2011:

Average selling price per diskette

$ 6.00

Total direct material cost per diskette

$ 1.50

Direct manufacturing labor

Direct manufacturing labor cost per hour

$ 12.00

Average labor productivity rate (diskettes per hour)

300

Direct marketing cost per unit

$ 0.30

Fixed overhead

$ 800,000

Sales of 1,500,000 units are budgeted for March. The expected total market for this product was 7,500,000 diskettes. Actual March results are as follows:

Unit sales and production totaled 95% of plan.

Actual average selling price increased to $6.10.

Productivity dropped to 250 diskettes per hour.

Actual direct manufacturing labor cost is $12.20 per hour.

Actual total direct material cost per unit increased to $1.60.

Actual direct marketing costs were $0.25 per unit.

Fixed overhead costs were $10,000 above plan.

Actual market size was 8,906,250 diskettes.

Calculate the following:

1. Static budget and actual operating income

2. Static budget variance for operating income

3. Flexible budget operating income

4. Flexible budget variance for operating income

5. Sales volume variance for operating income

6. Market share and market size variances

7. Price and efficiency variances for direct manufacturing labor

8. Flexible budget variance for direct manufacturing labor

select a place where you have worked part time or an orga nization in which you have 590383

Select a place where you have worked part time or an orga nization in which you have some acquaintance (relative or friend) and therefore have access. Choose one area of operations (cash receipts, sales, shipping, receiving, or payroll) for review. For the area selected: a. Identify the major transactions processed. b. Select a representative transaction and perform aValkthrough of the transaction to gain an understanding of processing and control procedures implemented to accomplish the control objectives described in the chapter. c. Document the key control procedures using a control objectives framework. d. Identify control procedures you would recommend to improve the organization’s internal controls.

Attachments:

consolidation workseet 590386

Question 2 Jetty Ltd purchased 100% of the shares of Mast Ltd on 1 July 2011.

Document Preview:

?Question 2 Jetty Ltd purchased 100% of the shares of Mast Ltd on 1 July 2011. Financial information for Jetty Ltd and Mast Ltd for the year ended 30 June 2013 (two years after acquisition) is shown below: ?Jetty Ltd?Mast Ltd??Sales revenue?$78,000?$40,000??Proceeds from sale of office furniture? ?3,000??Dividend revenue? 4,400? 1,600??Total income?82,400?44,600??Cost of sales?60,000?30,000??Other expenses?10,800?7,500??Total expenses?70,800?37,500??Profit before income tax?11,600?7,100??Income tax expense?(3,000)?(2,200)??Profit for the year?8,600?4,900??Retained earnings (01/07/2012)?14,500?2,800???23,100?7,700??Interim dividend paid?4,000?2,000??Final dividend declared?8,000?2,400???12,000?4,400??Retained earnings (30/06/2013)?11,100?3,300?? ??????????Additional information: (a)  ?On acquisition date, Jetty Ltd purchased 100% of the shares of Mast Ltd for $50,000. The equity of the two entities at this date was as follows: ?Jetty Ltd?Mast Ltd??Asset revaluation surplus?$25,000?$4,000??Retained earnings ?14,500?2,800??Share capital?50,000?40,000?? ??????????At 1 July 2011, all the identifiable assets and liabilities of Mast Ltd were recorded at fair value except for the following: ?Carrying amount?Fair value??Plant and equipment (cost $80,000)?$60,000?$61,000??Inventory?3,000?3,500?? ??????????All of this inventory was sold by December 2011. The plant and equipment had a remaining useful life of 5 years. Any valuation adjustments are made on consolidation. ????(b)  ?Jetty Ltd records dividends receivable as revenue when dividends are declared. ????(c)  ?The opening inventory of Mast Ltd included goods which cost Mast Ltd $2,000. Mast Ltd purchased this inventory from Jetty Ltd at cost plus 33¹/³ %. ????(d)  ?Intragroup sales totalled $10,000 for the year. Sales from Jetty Ltd to Mast Ltd, at cost plus 10%, amounted to $5,600. The closing inventory of Jetty Ltd included goods which cost Jetty Ltd $4,400. Jetty Ltd purchased this inventory from Mast Ltd…

Attachments:

doha company purchased additional equipment for qr 136 000 cash the company purchase 590406

Doha Company purchased additional equipment for QR 136,000 cash.
The company purchased a building for QR 736,000 cash after the board of directors approved the company’s expansion policy.

a) Prepare journal entries in the general journal.

b) Post the entries to the general ledger.

c) Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in owners’ equity and balance sheet.

The company completed a consulting project for a client in exchange for QR 556,000 cash.
Purchased equipment by paying QR 111,000 cash and signing a note payable for QR 261,000.
Completed consulting services for QR 106,000. The company will collect the amount within 30 days.
Purchased office supplies worth QR 42,000 on account.
Completed consulting services worth QR 129,000. The amount will be collected at a later date.
Doha Company collected QR 65,000 from one of the clients for amounts owed to the company.
The company paid QR 59,000 cash on its accounts payable.
Paid QR 86,000 cash for maintenance of equipment.
The company paid QR 76,000 cash for an advertisement in the local newspaper for the month of October.
Paid QR 336,000 for employee salaries.
An analysis of the company’s insurance policies revealed that QR 41,000 worth of insurance has expired.
An inventory count shows that cost of supplies used by the end of the month was QR 76,000.
Depreciation expense for the equipment was QR 186,000.
The useful life for the building is estimated to be 15 years. There is no salvage value at the end of that useful life.
There are 7 employees that work at Doha Company and they received their salaries at the end of the week. The work week is made up of 5 days starting on Sunday and ending on Thursday. Weekly salary is QR 206,000 and its paid every Thursday. October 31 fell on a Tuesday.
The company provided consulting services worth QR 186,000. The customer had paid for that service in a previous period.

Attachments:

show the required journal malty show the journal entry 590415

In 1911 In atm tan?411 MR phew • prolonot none to Portland °ream,. M “‘”” ‘00,1 elert1MOM .111101] Within three ‘wan. g Imeloiryd a proprietary healthy are prod:xi. and his consulting Ilrm mei Chang MOAK al Enu IMMO (CRIE, Nish, An son nor daughter was nn•+ruo”I in “””kuitt firm so 10 Or (‘hang agreed Io sell (‘ME to LaSalle Camtal n ornate equity gnaw In %a (:appal prop. ne/I ,lair. CME try paying OAF. 110 million kw 1,000,000 “wlY ,,,,, I ‘motion shares at 110 per sham and 310 million for manclatortly o’deeinable gmbirted sow k that paid a lot cumulative annual dividend. CUE watt(‘ then sell ak?og $140 million .3 licinds to financial instutaions through RIMIIM Ititernaloonal Coast investment bank The $48, mill,,,,, investneent horn LaSalle Calmat, pfin Ito $110 1111ihfKi irl411 WWI), Issued debt. would be used to buy Dr Chang •• I 821 000 share. or common Mork for $102 per share ($146.150.000). Boa acne CME swelkt hove adequate cash alter the transaction closed, LaSalle CaPital was 611,1.41e …tied about the exact sae of the del* more 41 May I. 2044, hlo. year Treasuries yielded AAAirated five year corporate bond. yielded 17x • and Km Ina year corporate bonds yiekled 6,03%. John Tilden. tlw LASAIW• panzer IIN11.1/MM the Calf: acquisttion. hoped to pay no more than 7.5%. S111:01140141. IN’ Rainier Internmonal banker managing Medeal. belie ed the market yield to maturity would be between A. Ill. and A 51. kg a small issue horn a highly 1.m•rnfp,1 twin depen?otig on the terms “I pot together three pro?nah !Exhibit IL’ Ms Hupp said. •1A) is a simyeat 8.5% bond. I IR) n a se scar AY. braid. (IC) is a miaryear rcroicOupon bond. Your yield to runt ur .4?,114 he about 4 11k with the 8 Si. bond, 8231, with the 8% bond. and Is 11 a. wall the 7,1.04 0111,00 bond. I rOunded each issue to the ware!’ 35 million SO th?• arnt,u Os you recent UMMY ear h issine Mkt slightly.” Required I. For each proposed issue. prepare journal entries to record the initial bond sale and the tioember 30. 2008. interest payment. Z Explain why the net bond payable change% with each interest payment. For example, explain why the net bond payable lot the zero coupon bond increases front 5137252261 to $143.023822 between May 31.2008, and Ninember 30.2008. Why are there different interest rates on the different bonds. even though they Mature on the same date? Explain in detail. 4 II LaSalle needed to raise about 5200 million, approximately how many 31,000 zero coupon bunds nook) it issue’ 5 Suwrse CME issued $140 millirm of 8% coupon bonds on May 31.2008, toe S138.49%7.16. as in Exhibit 1(13). Also suppose that on May 31, 2010. immediately after it paid the $5.6 million interest payment. ClAE reacquired the entire bond issue km 5141275,000. Show the required journal malty. Show the journal entry if (‘ME instead re•arquired the entire bond issue kit 5137250000.

the partially completed 2010 balance sheet and income statement for nassau corp foll 590452

The partially completed 2010 balance sheet and income statement for Nassau Corp. follows:

Nassau Corporation

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2010

Assets

Current Assets

Cash

$ 38,000

Accounts Receivable

(A1)

Less: Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

(A2)

(A3)

Inventory

(B1)

Total Current Assets

(D1)

Property, Plant & Equipment

Land

(C1)

Building

(C2)

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

$ 15,300

(C3)

Equipment

$ 72,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(D2)

$ 36,000

Total Property, Plant & Equipment

(D3)

Total Assets

$ 495,200

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

$ 37,300

Interest Payable

14,500

Total Current Liabilities

(D4)

Long Term Liabilities

Mortgage payable

(D5)

Total Liabilities

$ 271,800

Stockholders’ Equity

Common Stock

$ 30,000

Retained Earnings

(D6)

Total Stockholders’ Equity

$(D7)

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$(D8)

Nassau Corporation

Income Statement

For the year ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$ 358,000

Cost of Goods Sold

(B2) $180,000

Gross Profit

$ 178,000

Operating Expenses

Selling Expenses

$(D9)

Administrative Expenses

74,000

Total Operating Expenses

$(D10)

Income before Income Taxes

$ 75,000

Income Tax Expense (20%)

(D11)

Net Income

$ (D12)

ALL COMPUTATIONS MUST BE CLEARLY SHOWN.

  1. Nassau Corporation’s accounts receivable balance is $40,000. Of this amount, $34,000 is current and $ 6,000 is past due. From experience, Nassau expects it will collect 95% of the current accounts and 70% of the past due accounts. Compute Nassau’s:

(A1) Accounts receivable

(A2) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

(A3) Net realizable value of accounts receivable

  1. Nassau Corporation uses a periodic inventory system and the weighted average cost flow assumption to account for ending inventory and cost of goods sold. During the year, Nassau sold 45.000 units. The following information pertains to their inventory records.

Quantity in units

Cost per unit

Total cost

Beginning inventory

20,000

$ 2.50

Purchase #1

25,000

4.00

Purchase #2

15,000

6.00

Available for sale

Units sold

45,000

Units in ending inventory

B1(Balance Sheet) Ending Inventory _______________________

B2 (Income Statement) Cost of Goods Sold _______________________

  1. (C1 C3)

Nassau purchases new land and a building this year for $340,000. Of this amount, the value of the land was $34,000 and the value of the building was $306,000 at the time of purchase. $15,300 depreciation was recorded on the building this year.

  1. (D1 D12)

Once the above amounts have been computed, determine:

D1. Total Current Assets

D2. Accumulated Depreciation Equipment

D3. Total Property, Plant & Equipment

D4. Total Current Liabilities

D5. Mortgage Payable

D6. Retained Earnings

D7. Total Stockholders’ Equity

D8. Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity

D9. Selling Expenses

D10. Total Operating Expenses

D11. Income Tax Expense

D12. Net Income

account liability calculate the difference between cash flow from operations and net 590454

QOE assignment (50 marks)

Quality of earnings (QOE) analysis attempts to evaluate whether the reported earnings of a company reflect its true economic earnings, and also evaluates the ability of reported earnings to predict future earnings. This problem asks you to evaluate factors related to QOE for a given company in relation to a comparator company. You must select and justify your choice of comparator company. You are provided with Word templates to organize your response (Exhibits 1 3). Add lines as needed to complete the forms.

Procedure:

  1. Access the December 31, 2010 annual audited financial statements of ProMetic Life Sciences fromwww.sedar.com(posted April 5, 2011). Also access the MD&A that covers these financial statements (posted April 5, 2011).
  2. Use your judgment to identify a comparator company for ProMetic Life Sciences Inc. Choose a public company, listed on the TSX, that files public information on sedar.com, and access its 2010 annual audited financial statements.

Note: Comparator companies might be identified in the financial press. Another possible source is through the sedar.com “Search database” tab. Use the “Industry groups” section. Carefully choose the industry grouping that is appropriate, and request financial statements only for the appropriate time frame in order to reduce the number of files selected. Companies that act as good comparators will share the following characteristics:

  • They will be in the same general business.
  • They will not be conglomerates or involved in many disparate business lines.
  • They will not be in the development stage.
  • They will be approximately the same size.

Length and complexity of the financial statements is another factor; some financial statements are very long and should be avoided. It will be a challenge to satisfy all these conditions; however, the first three are the most critical factors to consider.

Required

  1. (45 marks)
    1. Calculate the difference between cash flow from operations and net income for each company for 2009 and 2010. For example, if the net income (loss) was ($3) and cash flow from operations was $12, the difference would be $15.(2 marks)
    2. Identifyfivedifferent adjustmentson the statement of cash flow (SCF)of ProMetic Life Sciences Inc. that have QOE implications, and explain their significance. You will have to refer to the financial statement notes, especially the accounting policy information, and/or the MD&A, to assess the nature of these items. Items chosen can betransactions or events(for example, the presence of business acquisitions) oraccounting policies(for example, revenue recognition issues)but may not be ratios. High quality answers will be detailed and specific.(32 marks)

Note: No marks will be awarded for using the example provided in Exhibit 2.

These 2010 financial statements comply with Canadian GAAP because they were created before the 2011 IFRS deadline. Do not analyze the nature of differences between Canadian GAAP and IFRS in your solution.

  1. Analyze your comparator company and explain and evaluate similar adjustments, if any exist. Complete the grid in Exhibit 2 of the solution template for each item.(5 marks)
  2. Conclude with your assessment of the relative quality of earnings for ProMetic Life Sciences Inc. and its comparator company, based on your (limited) examination.(6 marks)

Refer to Exhibits 1 and 2 of “Earnings Quality: It’s Time to Measure and Report” (Topic 1.8) and read the discussion in the topic for examples of sensitive areas.

Note: Content addressed may span all topics in
FA2and
FA3. An example item is provided for you on the first section of the grid in Exhibit 2.

  1. Supply the statement of cash flow (SCF) of your comparator company in Exhibit 3 of the solution. (You will lose marks if this is not provided.)

Procedure:

  1. Open the financial statements of your comparator company and go to the SCF.
  2. Right click and hold the button down; move the mouse to highlight the entire SCF content. Hold down the “CRTL” key and then hit the “C” key.
  3. Return to your solution Word document and press “CRTL” and the “V” key. This will copy the material with no spacing, which is acceptable for this submission.

(Alternatively, you may use the “snapshot” tool in Adobe Acrobat.)

  1. (5 marks)

Comment on your choice of comparator company. First, evaluate and contrast the two companies. What justification do you have for the choice you made? Then, comment on the difficulties you experienced in identifying a comparator company. Provide
one or two paragraphsexplaining these points in Exhibit 1 of the solution template.

Attachments:

using a standard format memo discuss the nature and importance of the moral hazard 590459

Using a standard format memo(i.e. a short report of 2 pages discuss the nature and importance of the MORAL HAZARD issue in financial markets and how it is resolved by accounting and auditing.

according to the instructer I need to find an article related to an ethical issue of accounting cited by as many as people, and a I need to attached it with the report. The marking rubric is provided so the report should go through the rubric to get good result as the teacher said. I have attached the rubric as well.

Task Ranking
Task Description
Very poor under standing of task. Little or no value generated.
(0 20 %)
Poor understanding of task. Some value generated.
(20 40 %)
Acceptable under standing of task. Acceptable value
(40 60 %)
Good understanding of task. Good value given.
(60 80 %)
Excellent understanding of task. Excellent value given.
(80 100 %)
1) Headings
(5.0)
Missing a lot or all headings
0.0 1.0
Missing one or more essential features and/ /or poorly organised
1.0 2.0
All headings but poorly organised and/or difficult to read
2.0 3.0
All headings, well organised but some difficulty reading it.
3.0 4.0
All headings are clean & easy to read. e.g.
To: XXXXXX
From: YYYYYYYYY
Date: 27/04/2014
Re: Ideally 6 to 12 words
4.0 5.0
2) Context Line
(15.0)
Little or no insight on the issue with many irrelevancies.
0.0 3.0
A confused statement of the issue with some irrelevancies
3.0 6.0
A clear statement of the issue
6.0 9.0
A clear and concise statement of the issues
9.0 12.0
A clear and concise statement of the issues & consequences
12.0 15.0
2) Action Line
(25.0)
Generally confused with no request or conclusion.
0.0 5.0
A confused request or conclusion—may be poorly placed (e.g. at the end or blended with other parts).
5.0 10.0
An acceptable request or conclusion, given near the start.
10.0 15.0
A good clear concise request or conclusion, given near the start.
15.0 20.0
An excellent clear concise statement of how to resolve the issues.
15.0 25.0
4) Rest of the Memo
(25.0)
Generally confused discussion with little or no linkage to the issues and/or action line.
0.0 5.0
Confused and poorly linked to the issues and/or action line.
5.0 10.0
Acceptable insight plus clear support for the action line.
10.0 15.0
Good insight plus strong, clear, and concise support for the action line.
15.0 20.0
Excellent insight plus strong, clear, and concise support for the action line that is clearly tied to it.
15.0 25.0
Total Mark /70
Adj. to 7.0 /7.0 Student Numbers:

General Comments:

Q2.file attached, pls find it on pdf

write a memo to super bookstore rsquo s management describing how the improved syste 590318

Activity based costing, activity based management, merchandising. Super Bookstore (SB) is a large city bookstore that sells books and music CDs, and has a café. SB operates at capacity and allocates selling, general, and administration (S, G & A) costs to each product line using the cost of merchandise of each product line. SB wants to optimize the pricing and cost management of each product line. SB is wondering if its accounting system is providing it with the best information for making such decisions.

Super Bookstore
Product Line Information
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Books

CDs

Café

Revenues

$3,720,480

$2,315,360

$736,216

Cost of merchandise

$2,656,727

$1,722,311

$556,685

Cost of café cleaning

$ 18,250

Number of purchase orders placed

2,800

2,500

2,000

Number of deliveries received

1,400

1,700

1,600

Hours of shelf stocking time

15,000

14,000

10,000

Items sold

124,016

115,768

368,108

Super Bookstore incurs the following selling, general, and administration costs:

Super Bookstore
Selling, General, & Administration (S, G & A) Costs
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Purchasing department expenses

$ 474,500

Receiving department expenses

432,400

Shelf stocking labor expense

487,500

Customer support expense (cashiers and floor employees)

91,184

$1,485,584

1. Suppose Super Bookstore uses cost of merchandise to allocate all S, G & A costs. Prepare product line and total company income statements.

2. Identify an improved method for allocating costs to the three product lines. Explain. Use the method for allocating S, G & A costs that you propose to prepare new product line and total company income statements. Compare your results to the results in requirement 1.

3. Write a memo to Super Bookstore’s management describing how the improved system might be useful for managing Super Bookstore.

prepare a 2012 sales budget for rouse amp sons assuming that rouse holds prices at 2 590325

Sales budget, service setting. In 2011, Rouse & Sons, a small environmental testing firm, performed 12,200 radon tests for $290 each and 16,400 lead tests for $240 each. Because newer homes are being built with lead free pipes, lead testing volume is expected to decrease by 10% next year. However, awareness of radon related health hazards is expected to result in a 6% increase in radon test volume each year in the near future. Jim Rouse feels that if he lowers his price for lead testing to $230 per test, he will have to face only a 7% decline in lead test sales in 2012.

Assignment Material

1. Prepare a 2012 sales budget for Rouse & Sons assuming that Rouse holds prices at 2011 levels.

2. Prepare a 2012 sales budget for Rouse & Sons assuming that Rouse lowers the price of a lead test to $230. Should Rouse lower the price of a lead test in 2012 if its goal is to maximize sales revenue? Serving trays. Mendez’s beginning inventory for 2012 is 15,000 trays and its target ending inventory is 25,000 trays. Compute the number of trays budgeted for production in 2012.

what is the beginning inventory of four gallon containers on january 1 2012 590328

Revenues and production budget. Purity, Inc., bottles and distributes mineral water from the company’s natural springs in northern Oregon. Purity markets two products: twelve ounce disposable plastic bottles and four gallon reusable plastic containers.

Required 1. For 2012, Purity marketing managers project monthly sales of 400,000 twelve ounce bottles and 100,000 fourgallon containers. Average selling prices are estimated at $0.25 per twelve ounce bottle and $1.50 per fourgallon container. Prepare a revenues budget for Purity, Inc., for the year ending December 31, 2012.

2. Purity begins 2012 with 900,000 twelve ounce bottles in inventory. The vice president of operations requests that twelve ounce bottles ending inventory on December 31, 2012, be no less than 600,000 bottles. Based on sales projections as budgeted previously, what is the minimum number of twelve ounce bottles Purity must produce during 2012?

3. The VP of operations requests that ending inventory of four gallon containers on December 31, 2012, be 200,000 units. If the production budget calls for Purity to produce 1,300,000 four gallon containers during 2012, what is the beginning inventory of four gallon containers on January 1, 2012?

prepare a revenue budget for blue rugs for the year assuming xerxes sells a 200 000 590329

Budgeting; direct material usage, manufacturing cost and gross margin. Xerxes Manufacturing Company manufactures blue rugs, using wool and dye as direct materials. One rug is budgeted to use 36 skeins of wool at a cost of $2 per skein and 0.8 gallons of dye at a cost of $6 per gallon. All other materials are indirect. At the beginning of the year Xerxes has an inventory of 458,000 skeins of wool at a cost of $961,800 and 4,000 gallons of dye at a cost of $23,680. Target ending inventory of wool and dye is zero. Xerxes uses the FIFO inventory cost flow method. Xerxes blue rugs are very popular and demand is high, but because of capacity constraints the firm will produce only 200,000 blue rugs per year. The budgeted selling price is $2,000 each. There are no rugs in beginning inventory. Target ending inventory of rugs is also zero.

Xerxes makes rugs by hand, but uses a machine to dye the wool. Thus, overhead costs are accumulated in two cost pools—one for weaving and the other for dyeing. Weaving overhead is allocated to products based on direct manufacturing labor hours (DMLH). Dyeing overhead is allocated to products based on machine hours (MH).

There is no direct manufacturing labor cost for dyeing. Xerxes budgets 62 direct manufacturing laborhours to weave a rug at a budgeted rate of $13 per hour. It budgets 0.2 machine hours to dye each skein in the dyeing process.

The following table presents the budgeted overhead costs for the dyeing and weaving cost pools:

Dyeing (based on 1,440,000 MH)

Weaving based on 12,400,000 DMLH)

Variable costs

Indirect materials

$ 0

$15,400,000

Maintenance

6,560,000

5,540,000

Utilities

7,550,000

2,890,000

Fixed costs

Indirect labor

347,000

1,700,000

Depreciation

2,100,000

274,000

Other

723,000

5,816,000

Total budgeted costs

$17,280,000

$31,620,000

1. Prepare a direct material usage budget in both units and dollars.

2. Calculate the budgeted overhead allocation rates for weaving and dyeing.

3. Calculate the budgeted unit cost of a blue rug for the year.

4. Prepare a revenue budget for blue rugs for the year, assuming Xerxes sells (a) 200,000 or (b) 185,000 blue rugs (that is, at two different sales levels).

5. Calculate the budgeted cost of goods sold for blue rugs under each sales assumption.

6. Find the budgeted gross margin for blue rugs under each sales assumption.

compute the budgeted purchases of wheels in units and in yen 590330

Revenues, production, and purchases budgets. The Suzuki Co. in Japan has a division that manufactures two wheel motorcycles. Its budgeted sales for Model G in 2013 is 900,000 units. Suzuki’s target ending inventory is 80,000 units, and its beginning inventory is 100,000 units. The company’s budgeted selling price to its distributors and dealers is 400,000 yen (¥) per motorcycle.

Suzuki buys all its wheels from an outside supplier. No defective wheels are accepted. (Suzuki’s needs for extra wheels for replacement parts are ordered by a separate division of the company.) The company’s target ending inventory is 60,000 wheels, and its beginning inventory is 50,000 wheels. The budgeted purchase price is 16,000 yen (¥) per wheel.

1. Compute the budgeted revenues in yen.

2. Compute the number of motorcycles to be produced.

3. Compute the budgeted purchases of wheels in units and in yen.

both budgets may be combined in one schedule the direct manufacturing labor budget s 590331

Budgets for production and direct manufacturing labor. (CMA, adapted) Roletter Company makes and sells artistic frames for pictures of weddings, graduations, and other special events. Bob Anderson, the controller, is responsible for preparing Roletter’s master budget and has accumulated the following information for 2013:

2013

January

February

March

April

May

Estimated sales in units

10,000

12,000

8,000

9,000

9,000

Selling price

$54.00

$51.50

$51.50

$51.50

$51.50

Direct manufacturing labor hours per unit

2.0

2.0

1.5

1.5

1.5

Wage per direct manufacturing labor hour

$10.00

$10.00

$10.00

$11.00

$11.00

In addition to wages, direct manufacturing labor related costs include pension contributions of $0.50 per hour, worker’s compensation insurance of $0.15 per hour, employee medical insurance of $0.40 per hour, and Social Security taxes. Assume that as of January 1, 2013, the Social Security tax rates are 7.5% for employers and 7.5% for employees. The cost of employee benefits paid by Roletter on its employees is treated as a direct manufacturing labor cost.

Roletter has a labor contract that calls for a wage increase to $11 per hour on April 1, 2013. New laborsaving machinery has been installed and will be fully operational by March 1, 2013. Roletter expects to have 16,000 frames on hand at December 31, 2012, and it has a policy of carrying an end of month inventory of 100% of the following month’s sales plus 50% of the second following month’s sales.

Prepare a production budget and a direct manufacturing labor budget for Roletter Company by month and for the first quarter of 2013. Both budgets may be combined in one schedule. The direct manufacturing labor budget should include labor hours, and show the details for each labor cost category.

what are the benefits of using a kaizen approach to budgeting what are the limitatio 590333

Kaizen approach to activity based budgeting (continuation of 6 24). Family Supermarkets (FS) has a kaizen (continuous improvement) approach to budgeting monthly activity costs for each month of 2011. Each successive month, the budgeted cost driver rate decreases by 0.4% relative to the preceding month. So, for example, February’s budgeted cost driver rate is 0.996 times January’s budgeted cost driver rate, and March’s budgeted cost driver rate is 0.996 times the budgeted February 2011 rate. FS assumes that the budgeted amount of cost driver usage remains the same each month.

1. What is the total budgeted cost for each activity and the total budgeted indirect cost for March 2011?

2. What are the benefits of using a kaizen approach to budgeting? What are the limitations of this approach, and how might FS management overcome them?

for each situation described determine where that is with whom a responsibility and 590334

Responsibility and controllability. Consider each of the following independent situations for Anderson Forklifts. Anderson manufactures and sells forklifts. The company also contracts to service both its own and other brands of forklifts. Anderson has a manufacturing plant, a supply warehouse that supplies both the manufacturing plant and the service technicians (who often need parts to repair forklifts) and 10 service vans. The service technicians drive to customer sites to service the forklifts. Anderson owns the vans, pays for the gas, and supplies forklift parts, but the technicians own their own tools.

1. In the manufacturing plant the production manager is not happy with the engines that the purchasing manager has been purchasing. In May the production manager stops requesting engines from the supply warehouse, and starts purchasing them directly from a different engine manufacturer. Actual materials costs in May are higher than budgeted.

2. Overhead costs in the manufacturing plant for June are much higher than budgeted. Investigation reveals a utility rate hike in effect that was not figured into the budget.

3. Gasoline costs for each van are budgeted based on the service area of the van and the amount of driving expected for the month. The driver of van 3 routinely has monthly gasoline costs exceeding the budget for van 3. After investigating, the service manager finds that the driver has been driving the van for personal use.

4. At Bigstore Warehouse, one of Anderson’s forklift service customers, the service people are only called in for emergencies and not for routine maintenance. Thus, the materials and labor costs for these service calls exceeds the monthly budgeted costs for a contract customer.

5. Anderson’s service technicians are paid an hourly wage, with overtime pay if they exceed 40 hours per week, excluding driving time. Fred Snert, one of the technicians, frequently exceeds 40 hours per week. Service customers are happy with Fred’s work, but the service manager talks to him constantly about working more quickly. Fred’s overtime causes the actual costs of service to exceed the budget almost every month.

6. The cost of gasoline has increased by 50% this year, which caused the actual gasoline costs to greatly exceed the budgeted costs for the service vans.

For each situation described, determine where (that is, with whom) (a) responsibility and (b) controllability lie. Suggest what might be done to solve the problem or to improve the situation.

should game guys take the purchase discount 590335

Cash flow analysis, sensitivity analysis. Game Guys is a retail store selling video games. Sales are uniform for most of the year, but pick up in June and December, both because new releases come out and because games are purchased in anticipation of summer or winter holidays. Game Guys also sells and repairs game systems. The forecast of sales and service revenue for the second quarter of 2012 is as follows:

Sales and Service Revenue Budget
Second Quarter, 2012

Month

Expected Sales Revenue

Expected Service Revenue

Total Revenue

April

$ 5,500

$1,000

$ 6,500

May

6,200

1,400

7,600

June

9,700

2,600

ƒ12,300

Total

$21,400

$5,000

$26,400

Almost all the service revenue is paid for by bank credit card, so Game Guys budgets this as 100% bank card revenue. The bank cards charge an average fee of 3% of the total. Half of the sales revenue is also paid for by bank credit card, for which the fee is also 3% on average. About 10% of the sales are paid in cash, and the rest (the remaining 40%) are carried on a store account. Although the store tries to give store credit only to the best customers, it still averages about 2% for uncollectible accounts; 90% of store accounts are paid in the month following the purchase, and 8% are paid two months after purchase.

1. Calculate the cash that Game Guys expects to collect in May and in June of 2012. Show calculations for each month.

2. Game Guys has budgeted expenditures for May of $4,350 for the purchase of games and game systems, $1,400 for rent and utilities and other costs, and $1,000 in wages for the two part time employees.

a. Given your answer to requirement 1, will Game Guys be able to cover its payments for May?

b. The projections for May are a budget. Assume (independently for each situation) that May revenues might also be 5% less and 10% less, and that costs might be 8% higher. Under each of those three scenarios show the total net cash for May and the amount Game Guys would have to borrow if cash receipts are less than cash payments. Assume the beginning cash balance for May is $100.

3. Suppose the costs for May are as described in requirement 2, but the expected cash receipts for May are $6,200 and beginning cash balance is $100. Game Guys has the opportunity to purchase the games and game systems on account in May, but the supplier offers the company credit terms of 2/10 net 30, which means if Game Guys pays within 10 days (in May) it will get a 2% discount on the price of the merchandise.

Game Guys can borrow money at a rate of 24%. Should Game Guys take the purchase discount?

how could the reduction in material and labor costs be accomplished are there any pr 590336

Budgeted costs; kaizen improvements. DryPool T Shirt Factory manufactures plain white and solid colored T shirts. Inputs include the following:

Price

Quantity

Cost per unit of output

Fabric

$ 6 per yard

1 yard per unit

$6 per unit

Labor

$12 per DMLH

0.25 DMLH per unit

$3 per unit

Additionally, the colored T shirts require 3 ounces of dye per shirt at a cost of $0.20 per ounce. The shirts sell for $15 each for white and $20 each for colors. The company expects to sell 12,000 white T shirts and 60,000 colored T shirts uniformly over the year.

DryPool has the opportunity to switch from using the dye it currently uses to using an environmentally friendly dye that costs $1.00 per ounce. The company would still need three ounces of dye per shirt. DryPool is reluctant to change because of the increase in costs (and decrease in profit) but the Environmental Protection Agency has threatened to fine them $102,000 if they continue to use the harmful but less expensive dye.

1. Given the preceding information, would DryPool be better off financially by switching to the environmentally friendly dye? (Assume all other costs would remain the same.)

2. Assume DryPool chooses to be environmentally responsible regardless of cost, and it switchs to the new dye. The production manager suggests trying Kaizen costing. If DryPool can reduce fabric and labor costs each by 1% per month, how close will it be at the end of 12 months to the gross profit it would have earned before switching to the more expensive dye? (Round to the nearest dollar for calculating cost reductions)

3. Refer to requirement 2. How could the reduction in material and labor costs be accomplished? Are there any problems with this plan?

there is no beginning or ending inventory of equipment prepare a budgeted income sta 590337

Budgeted income statement. (CMA, adapted) Easecom Company is a manufacturer of videoconferencing products. Regular units are manufactured to meet marketing projections, and specialized units are made after an order is received. Maintaining the videoconferencing equipment is an important area of customer satisfaction.

With the recent downturn in the computer industry, the videoconferencing equipment segment has suffered, leading to a decline in Easecom’s financial performance. The following income statement shows results for 2011:

Easecom Company Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2011 (in thousands)

Revenues:

Equipment

$6,000

Maintenance contracts

1,800

Total revenues

$7,800

Cost of goods sold

4,600

Gross margin

3,200

Operating costs

Marketing

600

Distribution

150

Customer maintenance

1,000

Administration

900

Total operating costs

2,650

Operating income

$550

Easecom’s management team is in the process of preparing the 2012 budget and is studying the following information:

1. Selling prices of equipment are expected to increase by 10% as the economic recovery begins. The selling price of each maintenance contract is expected to remain unchanged from 2011.

2. Equipment sales in units are expected to increase by 6%, with a corresponding 6% growth in units of maintenance contracts.

3. Cost of each unit sold is expected to increase by 3% to pay for the necessary technology and quality improvements.

4. Marketing costs are expected to increase by $250,000, but administration costs are expected to remain at 2011 levels.

5. Distribution costs vary in proportion to the number of units of equipment sold.

6. Two maintenance technicians are to be hired at a total cost of $130,000, which covers wages and related travel costs. The objective is to improve customer service and shorten response time.

7. There is no beginning or ending inventory of equipment. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012.

who is responsible for the cost of the biscuits at what level is the cost controllab 590338

Responsibility in a restaurant. Barney Briggs owns a restaurant franchise that is part of a chain of “southern homestyle” restaurants. One of the chain’s popular breakfast items is biscuits and gravy. Central Warehouse makes and freezes the biscuit dough, which is then sold to the franchise stores; there, it is thawed and baked in the individual stores by the cook. Each franchise also has a purchasing agent who orders the biscuits (and other items) based on expected demand. In March, 2012, one of the freezers in Central Warehouse breaks down and biscuit production is reduced by 25% for three days. During those three days, Barney’s franchise runs out of biscuits but demand does not slow down. Barney’s franchise cook, Janet Trible, sends one of the kitchen helpers to the local grocery store to buy refrigerated ready to bake biscuits. Although the customers are kept happy, the refrigerated biscuits cost Barney’s franchise three times the cost of the Central Warehouse frozen biscuits, and the franchise loses money on this item for those three days. Barney is angry with the purchasing agent for not ordering enough biscuits to avoid running out of stock, and with Janet for spending too much money on the replacement biscuits.

Who is responsible for the cost of the biscuits? At what level is the cost controllable? Do you agree that Barney should be angry with the purchasing agent? With Janet? Why or why not?

pl owes 5 400 in income taxes that need to be remitted in april pl has cash of 5 200 590339

Cash budget (continuation of 6 33). Assume the following: Pet Luggage (PL) does not make any sales on credit. PL sells only to the public, and accepts cash and credit cards; 90% of its sales are to customers using credit cards, for which PL gets the cash right away less a 2% transaction fee.

Purchases of materials are on account. PL pays for half the purchases in the period of the purchase, and the other half in the following period. At the end of March, PL owes suppliers $8,400. PL plans to replace a machine in April at a net cash cost of $13,800. Labor, other manufacturing costs, and nonmanufacturing costs are paid in cash in the month incurred except of course, depreciation, which is not a cash flow. $22,500 of the manufacturing cost and $12,500 of the nonmanufacturing cost for April is depreciation. PL currently has a $2,600 loan at an annual interest rate of 24%. The interest is paid at the end of each month. If PL has more than $10,000 cash at the end of April it will pay back the loan. PL owes $5,400 in income taxes that need to be remitted in April. PL has cash of $5,200 on hand at the end of March. Prepare a cash budget for April for Pet Luggage.

will the company be able to maintain such a balance during all three months analyzed 590341

Comprehensive problem; ABC manufacturing, two products. Follete Inc. operates at capacity and makes plastic combs and hairbrushes. Although the combs and brushes are a matching set, they are sold individually and so the sales mix is not 1:1. Follette Inc. is planning its annual budget for fiscal year 2011. Information for 2011 follows: Cash budgeting. Retail outlets purchase snowboards from Slopes, Inc., throughout the year. However, in anticipation of late summer and early fall purchases, outlets ramp up inventories from May through August. Outlets are billed when boards are ordered. Invoices are payable within 60 days. From past experience, Slopes’ accountant projects 20% of invoices will be paid in the month invoiced, 50% will be paid in the following month, and 30% of invoices will be paid two months after the month of invoice. The average selling price per snowboard is $450. To meet demand, Slopes increases production from April through July, because the snowboards are produced a month prior to their projected sale. Direct materials are purchased in the month of production and are paid for during the following month (terms are payment in full within 30 days of the invoice date). During this period there is no production for inventory, and no materials are purchased for inventory. Direct manufacturing labor and manufacturing overhead are paid monthly. Variable manufacturing overhead is incurred at the rate of $7 per direct manufacturing labor hour. Variable marketing costs are driven by the number of sales visits. However, there are no sales visits during the months studied. Slopes, Inc., also incurs fixed manufacturing overhead costs of $5,500 per month and fixed nonmanufacturing overhead costs of $2,500 per month.

Projected Sales

May 80 units

August 100 units

June 120 units

September 60 units

July 200 units

October 40 units

Direct Materials and Direct Manufacturing Labor Utilization and Cost

Units per Board

Price per Unit

Unit

Wood

5

$30

board feet

Fiberglass

6

5

yard

Direct manufacturing labor

5

25

hour

The beginning cash balance for July 1, 2012, is $10,000. On October 1, 2011, Slopes had a cash crunch and borrowed $30,000 on a 6% one year note with interest payable monthly. The note is due October 1, 2012.

Using the information provided, you will need to determine whether Slopes will be in a position to pay off this short term debt on October 1, 2012.

1. Prepare a cash budget for the months of July through September 2012. Show supporting schedules for the calculation of receivables and payables.

2. Will Slopes be in a position to pay off the $30,000 one year note that is due on October 1, 2012? If not, what actions would you recommend to Slopes’ management?

3. Suppose Slopes is interested in maintaining a minimum cash balance of $10,000. Will the company be able to maintain such a balance during all three months analyzed? If not, suggest a suitable cash management strategy.

cash budgeting on december 1 2011 the itami wholesale co is attempting to project ca 590342

Cash budgeting. On December 1, 2011, the Itami Wholesale Co. is attempting to project cash receipts and disbursements through January 31, 2012. On this latter date, a note will be payable in the amount of $100,000. This amount was borrowed in September to carry the company through the seasonal peak in November and December.

Selected general ledger balances on December 1 are as follows:

Cash

$ 88,000

Inventory

65,200

Accounts payable

136,000

Sales terms call for a 3% discount if payment is made within the first 10 days of the month after sale, with the balance due by the end of the month after sale. Experience has shown that 50% of the billings will be collected within the discount period, 30% by the end of the month after purchase, and 14% in the following month. The remaining 6% will be uncollectible. There are no cash sales.

The average selling price of the company’s products is $100 per unit. Actual and projected sales are as follows:

October actual

$ 280,000

November actual

320,000

December estimated

330,000

January estimated

250,000

February estimated

240,000

Total estimated for year ending June 30, 2012

$2,400,000

All purchases are payable within 15 days. Approximately 60% of the purchases in a month are paid that month, and the rest the following month. The average unit purchase cost is $80. Target ending inventories are 500 units plus 10% of the next month’s unit sales.

Total budgeted marketing, distribution, and customer service costs for the year are $600,000. Of this amount, $120,000 are considered fixed (and include depreciation of $30,000). The remainder varies with sales. Both fixed and variable marketing, distribution, and customer service costs are paid as incurred.

Prepare a cash budget for December 2011 and January 2012. Supply supporting schedules for collections of receivables; payments for merchandise; and marketing, distribution, and customer service costs.

Input Prices

Direct materials

Plastic

$ 0.20 per ounce

Bristles

$ 0.50 per bunch

Direct manufacturing labor

$12 per direct manufacturing labor hour

Input Quantities per Unit of Output

Combs

Brushes

Direct materials

Plastic

5 ounces

8 ounces

Bristles

16 bunches

Direct manufacturing labor

0.05 hours

0.2 hours

Machine hours (MH)

0.025 MH

0.1 MH

Inventory Information, Direct Materials

Plastic

Bristles

Beginning inventory

1,600 ounces

1,820 bunches

Target ending inventory

1,766 ounces

2,272 bunches

Cost of beginning inventory

$304

$946

Folette Inc. accounts for direct materials using a FIFO cost flow.

Sales and Inventory Information, Finished Goods

Combs

Brushes

Expected sales in units

12,000

14,000

Selling price

$ 6

$ 20

Target ending inventory in units

1,200

1,400

Beginning inventory in units

600

1,200

Beginning inventory in dollars

$ 1,800

$18,120

Folette Inc. uses a FIFO cost flow assumption for finished goods inventory.

Combs are manufactured in batches of 200, and brushes are manufactured in batches of 100. It takes 20 minutes to set up for a batch of combs, and one hour to set up for a batch of brushes. Folette Inc. uses activity based costing and has classified all overhead costs as shown in the following table:

Cost Type

Budgeted Variable

Budgeted Fixed

Cost Driver/Allocation Base

Manufacturing:

Materials handling

$11,490

$15,000

Number of ounces of plastic used

Setup

6,830

11,100

Setup hours

Processing

7,760

20,000

Machine hours

Inspection

7,000

1,040

Number of units produced

Nonmanufacturing:

Marketing

14,100

60,000

Sales revenue

Distribution

0

780

Number of deliveries

Delivery trucks transport units sold in delivery sizes of 1,000 combs or 1,000 brushes.

Do the following for the year 2011:

1. Prepare the revenues budget.

2. Use the revenue budget to

a. find the budgeted allocation rate for marketing costs.

b. find the budgeted number of deliveries and allocation rate for distribution costs.

3. Prepare the production budget in units.

4. Use the production budget to

a. find the budgeted number of setups, setup hours, and the allocation rate for setup costs.

b. find the budgeted total machine hours and the allocation rate for processing costs.

c. find the budgeted total units produced and the allocation rate for inspection costs.

5. Prepare the direct material usage budget and the direct material purchases budgets in both units and dollars; round to whole dollars.

6. Use the direct material usage budget to find the budgeted allocation rate for materials handling costs.

7. Prepare the direct manufacturing labor cost budget.

8. Prepare the manufacturing overhead cost budget for materials handling, setup, and processing.

9. Prepare the budgeted unit cost of ending finished goods inventory and ending inventories budget.

10. Prepare the cost of goods sold budget.

11. Prepare the nonmanufacturing overhead costs budget for marketing and distribution.

12. Prepare a budgeted income statement (ignore income taxes).

what steps can delma company rsquo s top management take to make sure wert rsquo s s 590343

Budgeting and ethics. Delma Company manufactures a variety of products in a variety of departments, and evaluates departments and departmental managers by comparing actual cost and output relative to the budget. Departmental managers help create the budgets, and usually provide information about input quantities for materials, labor, and overhead costs. Wert Mimble is the manager of the department that produces product Z. Wert has estimated these inputs for product Z:

Input

Budget Quantity per Unit of Output

Direct material

4 pounds

Direct manufacturing labor

15 minutes

Machine time

12 minutes

The department produces about 100 units of product Z each day. Wert’s department always gets excellent evaluations, sometimes exceeding budgeted production quantities. Each 100 units of product Z uses, on average, about 24 hours of direct manufacturing labor (four people working six hours each), 395 pounds of material, and 19.75 machine hours. Top management of Delma Company has decided to implement budget standards that will challenge the workers in each department, and it has asked Wert to design more challenging input standards for product Z. Wert provides top management with the following input quantities:

Input

Budget Quantity per Unit of Output

Direct material

3.95 pounds

Direct manufacturing labor

14.5 minutes

Machine time

11.8 minutes

Discuss the following:

1. Are these standards challenging standards for the department that produces product Z?

2. Why do you suppose Wert picked these particular standards?

3. What steps can Delma Company’s top management take to make sure Wert’s standards really meet the goals of the firm?

how do you think the stylists will react to the managers of salons i and ii what can 590344

Human Aspects of Budgeting in a Service Firm. Jag Meerkat owns three upscale hair salons: Hair Suite I, II, and III. Each of the salons has a manager and 10 stylists who rent space in the salons as independent contractors and who pay a fee of 10% of each week’s revenue to the salon as rent. In exchange they get to use the facility and utilities, but must bring their own equipment.

The manager of each salon schedules each customer appointment to last an hour, and then allows the stylist 10 minutes between appointments to clean up, rest, and prepare for the next appointment. The salons are open from 10 A.M. to 6 P.M., so each stylist can serve seven customers per day. Stylists each work five days a week on a staggered schedule, so the salon is open seven days a week. Everyone works on Saturdays, but some stylists have Sunday and Monday off, some have Tuesday and Wednesday off, and some have Thursday and Friday off. Jag Meerkat knows that utility costs are rising. Jag wants to increase revenues to cover at least some part of rising utility costs, so Jag tells each of the managers to find a way to increase productivity in the salons so that the stylists will pay more to the salons. Jag does not want to increase the rental fee above 10% of revenue for fear the stylists will leave, and each salon has only 10 stations, so he feels each salon cannot hire more than 10 full time stylists.

The manager of Hair Suite I attacks the problem by simply telling the stylists that, from now on, customers will be scheduled for 40 minute appointments and breaks will be five minutes. This will allow each stylist to add one more customer per day. The manager of Hair Suite II asks the stylists on a voluntary basis to work one extra hour per day, from 10 A.M. to 7 P.M., to add an additional customer per stylist per day. The manager of Hair Suite III sits down with the stylists and discusses the issue. After considering shortening the appointment and break times, or lengthening the hours of operation, one of the stylists says, “I know we rent stations in your store, but I am willing to share my station. You could hire an eleventh stylist, who will simply work at whatever station is vacant during our days off. Since we use our own equipment, this will not be a problem for me as long as there is a secure place I can leave my equipment on my days off.” Most of the other stylists agree that this is a good solution.

1. Which manager’s style do you think is most effective? Why?

2. How do you think the stylists will react to the managers of salons I and II? What can they do to indicate their displeasure, assuming they are displeased?

3. In Hair Suite III, if the stylists did not want to share their stations with another party, how else could they find a way to increase revenues?

4. How does this relate to the concept of stretch targets?

comprehensive budgeting problem activity based costing operating and financial budge 590345

Comprehensive budgeting problem; activity based costing, operating and financial budgets. Borkenstick makes a very popular undyed cloth sandal in one style, but in Regular and Deluxe. The Regular sandals have cloth soles and the Deluxe sandals have cloth covered wooden soles. Borkenstick is preparing its budget for June 2012, and has estimated sales based on past experience.

Other information for the month of June follows:

Input Prices

Direct materials

Cloth

$3.50 per yard

Wood

$5.00 per board foot

Direct manufacturing labor

$10 per direct manufacturing labor hour

Input Quantities per Unit of Output (per pair of sandals)

Regular

Direct materials

Cloth

1.3 yards

Wood

0

Direct manufacturing labor hours (DMLH)

5 hours

Setup hours per batch

2 hours

Inventory Information, Direct Materials

Cloth

Wood

Beginning inventory

610 yards

800 b.f.

Target ending inventory

386 yards

295 b.f.

Cost of beginning inventory

$2,146

$4,040

Borkenstick accounts for direct materials using a FIFO cost flow assumption.

Sales and Inventory Information, Finished Goods

Regular

Deluxe

Expected sales in units (pairs of sandals)

2,000

3,000

Selling price

$ 80

$ 130

Target ending inventory in units

400

600

Beginning inventory in units

250

650

Beginning inventory in dollars

$15,500

$61,750

Borkenstick uses a FIFO cost flow assumption for finished goods inventory.

All the sandals are made in batches of 50 pairs of sandals. Borkenstick incurs manufacturing overhead costs, marketing and general administration, and shipping costs. Besides materials and labor, manufacturing costs include setup, processing, and inspection costs. Borkenstick ships 40 pairs of sandals per shipment.

Borkenstick uses activity based costing and has classified all overhead costs for the month of June as shown in the following chart:

Cost type

Denominator Activity

Rate

Manufacturing:

Setup

Setup hours

$12 per setup hour

Processing

Direct manufacturing labor hours

$1.20 per DMLH

Inspection

Nonmanufacturing:

Number of pairs of sandals

$0.90 per pair

Marketing and general administration

Sales revenue

8%

Shipping

Number of shipments

$10 per shipment

1. Prepare each of the following for June:

a. Revenues budget

b. Production budget in units

c. Direct material usage budget and direct material purchases budget in both units and dollars; round to dollars

d. Direct manufacturing labor cost budget

e. Manufacturing overhead cost budgets for processing and setup activities

f. Budgeted unit cost of ending finished goods inventory and ending inventories budget

g. Cost of goods sold budget

h. Marketing and general administration costs budget

2. Borkenstick’s balance sheet for May 31 follows. Use it and the following information to prepare a cash budget for Borkenstick for June. Round to dollars All sales are on account; 60% are collected in the month of the sale, 38% are collected the following month, and 2% are never collected and written off as bad debts. All purchases of materials are on account. Borkenstick pays for 80% of purchases in the month of purchase and 20% in the following month. All other costs are paid in the month incurred, including the declaration and payment of a $10,000 cash dividend in June. Borkenstick is making monthly interest payments of 0.5% (6% per year) on a $100,000 long term loan. Borkenstick plans to pay the $7,200 of taxes owed as of May 31 in the month of June. Income tax expense for June is zero. 30% of processing and setup costs, and 10% of marketing and general administration costs are depreciation.

Borkenstick Balance Sheetas of May 31

Assets

Cash

$ 6,290

Accounts receivable

$216,000

Less: Allowance for bad debts

10,800

205,200

Inventories

Direct materials

6,186

Finished goods

77,250

Fixed assets

$580,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

90,890

489,110

Total assets

$784,036

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable

$ 10,400

Taxes payable

7,200

Interest payable

500

Long term debt

100,000

Common stock

200,000

Retained earnings

465,936

Total liabilities and equity

$784,036

3. Prepare a budgeted income statement for June and a budgeted balance sheet for Borkenstick as of

June 30.

is the president rsquo s pleasure justified prepare a revised performance report tha 590350

Flexible budget. Connor Company’s budgeted prices for direct materials, direct manufacturing labor, and direct marketing (distribution) labor per attaché case are $40, $8, and $12, respectively. The president is pleased with the following performance report:

Actual Costs

Static Budget

Variance

Direct materials

$364,000

$400,000

$36,000 F

Direct manufacturing labor

78,000

80,000

2,000 F

Direct marketing (distribution) labor

110,000

120,000

10,000 F

Actual output was 8,800 attaché cases. Assume all three direct cost items shown are variable costs.

Is the president’s pleasure justified? Prepare a revised performance report that uses a flexible budget and a static budget.

why might bank management find the flexible budget based variance analysis more info 590351

Flexible budget preparation and analysis. Bank Management Printers, Inc., produces luxury checkbooks with three checks and stubs per page. Each checkbook is designed for an individual customer and is ordered through the customer’s bank. The company’s operating budget for September 2012 included these data:

Number of checkbooks

15,000

Selling price per book

$ 20

Variable cost per book

$ 8

Fixed costs for the month

$145,000

The actual results for September 2012 were as follows:

Number of checkbooks produced and sold

12,000

Average selling price per book

$ 21

Variable cost per book

$ 7

Fixed costs for the month

$150,000

The executive vice president of the company observed that the operating income for September was much lower than anticipated, despite a higher than budgeted selling price and a lower than budgeted variable cost per unit. As the company’s management accountant, you have been asked to provide explanations for the disappointing September results.

Bank Management develops its flexible budget on the basis of budgeted per output unit revenue and per output unit variable costs without detailed analysis of budgeted inputs.

1. Prepare a static budget based variance analysis of the September performance.

2. Prepare a flexible budget based variance analysis of the September performance.

3. Why might Bank Management find the flexible budget based variance analysis more informative than the static budget based variance analysis? Explain your answer.

calculate the ending balances in work in process and cost of goods sold if the under 590293

Allocation and proration of overhead. Tamden, Inc., prints custom marketing materials. The business was started January 1, 2010. The company uses a normal costing system. It has two direct cost pools, materials and labor and one indirect cost pool, overhead. Overhead is charged to printing jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. The following information is available for 2010.December 30.

Budgeted direct labor costs

$150,000

Budgeted overhead costs

$180,000

Costs of actual material used

$126,500

Actual direct labor costs

$148,750

Actual overhead costs

$176,000

There were two jobs in process on December 31, 2010: Job 11 and Job 12. Costs added to each job as of December 31 are as follows:

Direct materials

Direct labor

Job 11

$3,620

$4,500

Job 12

$6,830

$7,250

Tamden, Inc., has no finished goods inventories because all printing jobs are transferred to cost of goods sold when completed.

1. Compute the overhead allocation rate.

2. Calculate the balance in ending work in process and cost of goods sold before any adjustments for under or overallocated overhead.

3. Calculate under or overallocated overhead.

4. Calculate the ending balances in work in process and cost of goods sold if the under or overallocated overhead amount is as follows:

a. Written off to cost of goods sold

b. Prorated using the ending balance (before proration) in cost of goods sold and work in process control accounts

5. Which of the methods in requirement 4 would you choose? Explain.

calculate under overallocated overhead at the end of april 590294

Job costing—service industry. Cam Cody schedules book signings for science fiction authors and creates e books and books on CD to sell at each signing. Cody uses a normal costing system with two direct cost pools, labor and materials, and one indirect cost pool, general overhead. General overhead is allocated to each signing based on 80% of labor cost. Actual overhead equaled allocated overhead in March 2010. Actual overhead in April was $1,980. All costs incurred during the planning stage for a signing and during the signing are gathered in a balance sheet account called “Signings in Progress (SIP).” When a signing is completed, the costs are transferred to an income statement account called “Cost of Completed Signings (CCS).” Following is cost information for April 2010:

From Beginning SIP

Incurred in April

Author

Materials

Labor

Materials

Labor

N. Asher

$425

$750

$ 90

$225

T. Bucknell

710

575

150

75

S. Brown

200

550

320

450

S. King

650

400

D. Sherman

150

200

The following information relates to April 2010.

As of April 1, there were three signings in progress, N. Asher, T. Bucknell, and S. Brown. Signings for

S. King and D. Sherman were started during April. The signings for T. Bucknell and S. King were completed during April.

1. Calculate SIP at the end of April. Required

2. Calculate CCS for April.

3. Calculate under/overallocated overhead at the end of April.

4. Calculate the ending balances in SIP and CCS if the under/overallocated overhead amount is as follows:

a. Written off to CCS

b. Prorated based on the ending balances (before proration) in SIP and CCS

c. Prorated based on the overhead allocated in April in the ending balances of SIP and CCS (before proration)

5. Which of the methods in requirement 4 would you choose?

how is the cost hierarchy helpful to hamilton in managing its business 590299

Cost hierarchy. Hamilton, Inc., manufactures boom boxes (music systems with radio, cassette, and compact disc players) for several well known companies. The boom boxes differ significantly in their complexity and their manufacturing batch sizes. The following costs were incurred in 2011:

a. Indirect manufacturing labor costs such as supervision that supports direct manufacturing labor, $1,450,000

b. Procurement costs of placing purchase orders, receiving materials, and paying suppliers related to the number of purchase orders placed, $850,000

c. Cost of indirect materials, $275,000

d. Costs incurred to set up machines each time a different product needs to be manufactured, $630,000

e. Designing processes, drawing process charts, making engineering process changes for products, $775,000

f. Machine related overhead costs such as depreciation, maintenance, production engineering, $1,500,000 (These resources relate to the activity of running the machines.)

g. Plant management, plant rent, and plant insurance, $925,000

1. Classify each of the preceding costs as output unit level, batch level, product sustaining, or facility sustaining. Explain each answer.

2. Consider two types of boom boxes made by Hamilton, Inc. One boom box is complex to make and is produced in many batches. The other boom box is simple to make and is produced in few batches.

Suppose that Hamilton needs the same number of machine hours to make each type of boom box and that Hamilton allocates all overhead costs using machine hours as the only allocation base. How, if at all, would the boom boxes be miscosted? Briefly explain why.

3. How is the cost hierarchy helpful to Hamilton in managing its business?

how might vineyard rsquo s management use the cost hierarchy and abc information to 590300

ABC, cost hierarchy, service. (CMA, adapted) Vineyard Test Laboratories does heat testing (HT) and stress testing (ST) on materials and operates at capacity. Under its current simple costing system, Vineyard aggregates all operating costs of $1,190,000 into a single overhead cost pool. Vineyard calculates a rate per test hour of $17 ($1,190,000 ÷ 70,000 total test hours). HT uses 40,000 test hours, and ST uses 30,000 test hours. Gary Celeste, Vineyard’s controller, believes that there is enough variation in test procedures and cost structures to establish separate costing and billing rates for HT and ST. The market for test services is becoming competitive. Without this information, any miscosting and mispricing of its services could cause Vineyard to lose business. Celeste divides Vineyard’s costs into four activity cost categories.

a. Direct labor costs, $146,000. These costs can be directly traced to HT, $100,000, and ST, $46,000.

b. Equipment related costs (rent, maintenance, energy, and so on), $350,000. These costs are allocated to HT and ST on the basis of test hours.

c. Setup costs, $430,000. These costs are allocated to HT and ST on the basis of the number of setup hours required. HT requires 13,600 setup hours, and ST requires 3,600 setup hours.

d. Costs of designing tests, $264,000. These costs are allocated to HT and ST on the basis of the time required for designing the tests. HT requires 3,000 hours, and ST requires 1,400 hours.

1. Classify each activity cost as output unit level, batch level, product or service sustaining, or facility sustaining. Explain each answer.

2. Calculate the cost per test hour for HT and ST. Explain briefly the reasons why these numbers differ from the $17 per test hour that Vineyard calculated using its simple costing system.

3. Explain the accuracy of the product costs calculated using the simple costing system and the ABC system. How might Vineyard’s management use the cost hierarchy and ABC information to better manage its business?

how would you determine whether professional labor costs or professional labor hours 590301

Alternative allocation bases for a professional services firm. The Walliston Group (WG) provides tax advice to multinational firms. WG charges clients for (a) direct professional time (at an hourly rate) and (b) support services (at 30% of the direct professional costs billed). The three professionals in WG and their rates per professional hour are as follows:

Professional

Billing Rate per Hour

Max Walliston

$640

Alexa Boutin

220

Jacob Abbington

100

WG has just prepared the May 2011 bills for two clients. The hours of professional time spent on each client are as follows:

Hours per Client

Professional

San Antonio Dominion

Amsterdam Enterprises

Walliston

26

4

Boutin

5

14

Abbington

39

52

Total

70

70

1. What amounts did WG bill to San Antonio Dominion and Amsterdam Enterprises for May 2011?

2. Suppose support services were billed at $75 per professional labor hour (instead of 30% of professional labor costs). How would this change affect the amounts WG billed to the two clients for May 2011? Comment on the differences between the amounts billed in requirements 1 and 2.

3. How would you determine whether professional labor costs or professional labor hours is the more appropriate allocation base for WG’s support services?

explain how the disaggregation of information could improve or reduce decision quali 590302

Plant wide, department, and activity cost rates. Tarquin’s Trophies makes trophies and plaques and operates at capacity. Tarquin does large custom orders, such as the participant trophies for the Mishawaka Little League. The controller has asked you to compare plant wide, department, and activity based cost allocation.

Tarquin’s Trophies
Budgeted Information
For the Year Ended November 30, 2011

Forming Department

Trophies

Plaques

Total

Direct materials

$13,000

$11,250

$24,250

Direct labor

15,600

9,000

24,600

Overhead Costs

Setup

12,000

Supervision

10,386

Assembly Department

Trophies

Plaques

Total

Direct materials

$ 2,600

$ 9,375

$11,975

Direct labor

7,800

10,500

18,300

Overhead costs

Setup

23,000

Supervision

10,960

Other information follows:

Setup costs vary with the number of batches processed in each department. The budgeted number of batches for each product line in each department is as follows:

Trophies

Plaques

Forming department

40

116

Assembly department

43

103

Supervision costs vary with direct labor costs in each department.

1. Calculate the budgeted cost of trophies and plaques based on a single plant wide overhead rate, if total overhead is allocated based on total direct costs.

2. Calculate the budgeted cost of trophies and plaques based on departmental overhead rates, where forming department overhead costs are allocated based on direct labor costs of the forming department, and assembly department overhead costs are allocated based on total direct costs of the assembly department.

3. Calculate the budgeted cost of trophies and plaques if Tarquin allocates overhead costs in each department using activity based costing.

4. Explain how the disaggregation of information could improve or reduce decision quality.

choose a cost driver for each overhead cost pool and calculate the manufacturing ove 590303

ABC, process costing. Parker Company produces mathematical and financial calculators and operates at capacity. Data related to the two products are presented here:

Mathematical

Financial

Annual production in units

50,000

100,000

Direct material costs

$150,000

$300,000

Direct manufacturing labor costs

$ 50,000

$100,000

Direct manufacturing labor hours

2,500

5,000

Machine hours

25,000

50,000

Number of production runs

50

50

Inspection hours

1,000

500

Total manufacturing overhead costs are as follows:

Total

Machining costs

$375,000

Setup costs

120,000

Inspection costs

105,000

1. Choose a cost driver for each overhead cost pool and calculate the manufacturing overhead cost per unit for each product.

2. Compute the manufacturing cost per unit for each product.

what new insights does the abc system in requirement 2 provide to fs managers 590304

ABC, retail product line profitability. Family Supermarkets (FS) operates at capacity and decides to apply ABC analysis to three product lines: baked goods, milk and fruit juice, and frozen foods. It identifies four activities and their activity cost rates as follows:

Ordering

$100 per purchase order

Delivery and receipt of merchandise

$ 80 per delivery

Shelf stocking

$ 20 per hour

Customer support and assistance

$ 0.20 per item sold

The revenues, cost of goods sold, store support costs, the activities that account for the store support costs, and activity area usage of the three product lines are as follows:

Baked Goods

Milk and Fruit Juice

Frozen Products

Financial data

Revenues

$57,000

$63,000

$52,000

Cost of goods sold

$38,000

$47,000

$35,000

Store support

$11,400

$14,100

$10,500

Activity area usage (cost allocation base)

Ordering (purchase orders)

30

25

13

Delivery (deliveries)

98

36

28

Shelf stocking (hours)

183

166

24

Customer support (items sold)

15,500

20,500

7,900

Under its simple costing system, FS allocated support costs to products at the rate of 30% of cost of goods sold.

1. Use the simple costing system to prepare a product line profitability report for FS.

2. Use the ABC system to prepare a product line profitability report for FS.

3. What new insights does the ABC system in requirement 2 provide to FS managers?

compute the total overhead allocated to each job under a simple costing system where 590306

Activity based costing. The job costing system at Smith’s Custom Framing has five indirect cost pools (purchasing, material handling, machine maintenance, product inspection, and packaging). The company is in the process of bidding on two jobs; Job 215, an order of 15 intricate personalized frames, and Job 325, an order of 6 standard personalized frames. The controller wants you to compare overhead allocated under the current simple job costing system and a newly designed activity based job costing system. Total budgeted costs in each indirect cost pool and the budgeted quantity of activity driver are as follows:

Budgeted Overhead

Activity Driver

Budgeted Quantity
of Activity Driver

Purchasing

$ 70,000

Purchase orders processed

2,000

Material handling

87,500

Material moves

5,000

Machine maintenance

237,300

Machine hours

10,500

Product inspection

18,900

Inspections

1,200

Packaging

39,900

Units produced

3,800

$453,600

Information related to Job 215 and Job 325 follows. Job 215 incurs more batch level costs because it uses more types of materials that need to be purchased, moved, and inspected relative to Job 325.

Job 215

Job 325

Number of purchase orders

25

8

Number of material moves

10

4

Machine hours

40

60

Number of inspections

9

3

Units produced

15

6

1. Compute the total overhead allocated to each job under a simple costing system, where overhead is allocated based on machine hours.

2. Compute the total overhead allocated to each job under an activity based costing system using the appropriate activity drivers.

3. Explain why Smith’s Custom Framing might favor the ABC job costing system over the simple job costing system, especially in its bidding process.

what changes would you recommend for nsb rsquo s premier account 590307

ABC, product costing at banks, cross subsidization. National Savings Bank (NSB) is examining the profitability of its Premier Account, a combined savings and checking account. Depositors receive a 7% annual interest rate on their average deposit. NSB earns an interest rate spread of 3% (the difference between the rate at which it lends money and the rate it pays depositors) by lending money for home loan purposes at 10%. Thus, NSB would gain $60 on the interest spread if a depositor had an average Premier Account balance of $2,000 in 2011 ($2,000 x 3% = $60).

The Premier Account allows depositors unlimited use of services such as deposits, withdrawals, checking accounts, and foreign currency drafts. Depositors with Premier Account balances of $1,000 or more receive unlimited free use of services. Depositors with minimum balances of less than $1,000 pay a $22 a month service fee for their Premier Account.

NSB recently conducted an activity based costing study of its services. It assessed the following costs for six individual services. The use of these services in 2011 by three customers is as follows:

Account Usage

Activity Based Cost
per “Transaction”

Holt

Turner

Graham

Deposit/withdrawal with teller

$ 2.30

42

48

5

Deposit/withdrawal with automatic teller machine (ATM)

0.70

7

19

17

Deposit/withdrawal on prearranged monthly basis

0.40

0

13

62

Bank checks written

8.40

11

1

3

Foreign currency drafts

12.40

4

2

6

Inquiries about account balance

1.40

12

20

9

Average Premier Account balance for 2011

$1,100

$700

$24,600

Assume Holt and Graham always maintain a balance above $1,000, whereas Turner always has a balance below $1,000.

1. Compute the 2011 profitability of the Holt, Turner, and Graham Premier Accounts at NSB.

2. Why might NSB worry about the profitability of individual customers if the Premier Account product offering is profitable as a whole?

3. What changes would you recommend for NSB’s Premier Account?

compute the costs of the widnes coal and st helen rsquo s glass jobs using wigan rsq 590308

Job costing with single direct cost category, single indirect cost pool, law firm. Wigan Associates is a recently formed law partnership. Ellery Hanley, the managing partner of Wigan Associates, has just finished a tense phone call with Martin Offiah, president of Widnes Coal. Offiah strongly complained about the price Wigan charged for some legal work done for Widnes Coal. Hanley also received a phone call from its only other client (St. Helen’s Glass), which was very pleased with both the quality of the work and the price charged on its most recent job. Wigan Associates operates at capacity and uses a cost based approach to pricing (billing) each job. Currently it uses a simple costing system with a single direct cost category (professional labor hours) and a single indirect cost pool (general support). Indirect costs are allocated to cases on the basis of professional labor hours per case. The job files show the following:

Widnes Coal

St. Helen’s Glass

Professional labor

104 hours

96 hours

Professional labor costs at Wigan Associates are $70 an hour. Indirect costs are allocated to cases at $105 an hour. Total indirect costs in the most recent period were $21,000.

1. Why is it important for Wigan Associates to understand the costs associated with individual jobs?

2. Compute the costs of the Widnes Coal and St. Helen’s Glass jobs using Wigan’s simple costing system.

compare the costs of widnes and st helen rsquo s jobs in requirement 2 with those in 590309

Job costing with multiple direct cost categories, single indirect cost pool, law firm (continuation of 5 29). Hanley asks his assistant to collect details on those costs included in the $21,000 indirect cost pool that can be traced to each individual job. After analysis, Wigan is able to reclassify $14,000 of the $21,000 as direct costs:

Other Direct Costs

Widnes Coal

St. Helen’s Glass

Research support labor

$1,600

$ 3,400

Computer time

500

1,300

Travel and allowances

600

4,400

Telephones/faxes

200

1,000

Photocopying

250

750

Total

$3,150

$10,850

Hanley decides to calculate the costs of each job as if Wigan had used six direct cost pools and a single indirect cost pool. The single indirect cost pool would have $7,000 of costs and would be allocated to each case using the professional labor hours base.

1. What is the revised indirect cost allocation rate per professional labor hour for Wigan Associates when total indirect costs are $7,000?

2. Compute the costs of the Widnes and St. Helen’s jobs if Wigan Associates had used its refined costing system with multiple direct cost categories and one indirect cost pool.

3. Compare the costs of Widnes and St. Helen’s jobs in requirement 2 with those in requirement. Comment on the results.

compute the costs of the widnes and st helen rsquo s cases using wigan rsquo s furth 590310

Job costing with multiple direct cost categories, multiple indirect cost pools, law firm (continuation of 5 29 and 5 30). Wigan has two classifications of professional staff: partners and associates. Hanley asks his assistant to examine the relative use of partners and associates on the recent Widnes Coal and St. Helen’s jobs. The Widnes job used 24 partner hours and 80 associate hours. The St. Helen’s job used 56 partner hours and 40 associate hours. Therefore, totals of the two jobs together were 80 partner hours and 120 associate hours. Hanley decides to examine how using separate direct cost rates for partners and associates and using separate indirect cost pools for partners and associates would have affected the costs of the Widnes and St. Helen’s jobs. Indirect costs in each indirect cost pool would be allocated on the basis of total hours of that category of professional labor. From the total indirect cost pool of $7,000, $4,600 is attributable to the activities of partners, and $2,400 is attributable to the activities of associates. The rates per category of professional labor are as follows:

Category of Professional Labor

Direct Cost per Hour

Indirect Cost per Hour

Partner

$100.00

$4,600 ÷ 80 hours = $57.50

Associate

50.00

$2,400 ÷ 120 hours = $20.00

1. Compute the costs of the Widnes and St. Helen’s cases using Wigan’s further refined system, with mul tiple direct cost categories and multiple indirect cost pools.

2. For what decisions might Wigan Associates find it more useful to use this job costing approach rather than the approaches?

the fighter jets are more detailed and require smaller batch sizes the controller ha 590311

Plant wide, department, and activity cost rates. Allen’s Aero Toys makes two models of toy airplanes, fighter jets, and cargo planes. The fighter jets are more detailed and require smaller batch sizes. The controller has asked you to compare plant wide, department, and activity based cost allocations.

Allen’s Aero Toys
Budgeted Information per unit
For the Year Ended 30 November 2010

Assembly Department

Fighters

Cargo

Total

Direct materials

$2.50

$3.75

$ 6.25

Direct manufacturing labor

3.50

2.00

5.50

Total direct cost per unit

$6.00

$5.75

$11.75

Painting Department

Fighters

Cargo

Direct materials

$0.50

$1.00

$ 1.50

Direct manufacturing labor

2.25

1.50

3.75

Total direct cost per unit

$2.75

$2.50

$5.25

Number of units produced

800

740

The budgeted overhead cost for each department is as follows:

Assembly Department

Painting Department

Total

Materials handling

$1,700

$ 900

$ 2,600

Quality inspection

2,750

1,150

3,900

Utilities

2,580

2,100

4,680

$7,030

$4,150

$11,180

Other information follows:

Materials handling and quality inspection costs vary with the number of batches processed in each department. The budgeted number of batches for each product line in each department is as follows:

Fighters

Cargo

Total

Assembly department

150

48

198

Painting department

100

32

132

Total

250

80

330

Utilities costs vary with direct manufacturing labor cost in each department.

1. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on a single plant wide overhead rate, if total overhead is allocated based on total direct costs.

2. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on departmental overhead rates, where assembly department overhead costs are allocated based on direct manufacturing labor costs of the assembly department and painting department overhead costs are allocated based on total direct costs of the painting department.

3. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes if Allen’s Aero Toys allocates overhead costs using activity based costing.

4. Explain how activity based costing could improve or reduce decision quality.

explain how the disaggregation of information could be helpful to rrc rsquo s intent 590312

Department and activity cost rates, service sector. Roxbury’s Radiology Center (RRC) performs X rays, ultrasounds, CT scans, and MRIs. RRC has developed a reputation as a top Radiology Center in the state. RRC has achieved this status because it constantly reexamines its processes and procedures. RRC has been using a single, facility wide overhead allocation rate. The VP of Finance believes that RRC can make better process improvements if it uses more disaggregated cost information. She says, “We have state of the art medical imaging technology. Can’t we have state of the art accounting technology?”

Roxbury’s Radiology Center
Budgeted Information
For the Year Ended May 30, 2011

X rays

Ultrasound

CT scan

MRI

Total

Technician labor

$ 64,000

$104,000

$119,000

$106,000

$ 393,000

Depreciation

136,800

231,000

400,200

792,000

1560,000

Materials

22,400

16,500

23,900

30,800

93,600

Administration

19,000

Maintenance

260,000

Sanitation

267,900

Utilities

121,200

$223,200

$351,500

$543,100

$928,800

$2,714,700

Number of procedures

2,555

4,760

3,290

2,695

Minutes to clean after each procedure

10

10

20

40

Minutes for each procedure

5

20

15

40

RRC operates at capacity. The proposed allocation bases for overhead are as follows:

Administration

Number of procedures

Maintenance (including parts)

Capital cost of the equipment (use Depreciation)

Sanitation

Total cleaning minutes

Utilities

Total procedure minutes

1. Calculate the budgeted cost per service for X rays, Ultrasounds, CT scans, and MRIs using direct technician labor costs as the allocation basis.

2. Calculate the budgeted cost per service of X rays, Ultrasounds, CT scans, and MRIs if RRC allocated overhead costs using activity based costing.

3. Explain how the disaggregation of information could be helpful to RRC’s intention to continuously improve its services.

how can annie use this information for pricing what other factors should she conside 590313

Choosing cost drivers, activity based costing, activity based management. Annie Warbucks runs a dance studio with childcare and adult fitness classes. Annie’s budget for the upcoming year is as follows:

Annie Warbuck’s Dance Studio
Budgeted Costs and Activities
For the Year Ended June 30, 2010

Dance teacher salaries

$62,100

Child care teacher salaries

24,300

Fitness instructor salaries

39,060

Total salaries

$125,460

Supplies (art, dance accessories, fitness)

21,984

Rent, maintenance, and utilities

97,511

Administration salaries

50,075

Marketing expenses

21,000

Total

$316,030

Other budget information follows:

Dance

Childcare

Fitness

Total

Square footage

6,000

3,150

2,500

11,650

Number of participants

1,485

450

270

2,205

Teachers per hour

3

3

1

7

Number of advertisements

26

24

20

70

1. Determine which costs are direct costs and which costs are indirect costs of different programs.

2. Choose a cost driver for the indirect costs and calculate the budgeted cost per unit of the cost driver. Explain briefly your choice of cost driver.

3. Calculate the budgeted costs of each program.

4. How can Annie use this information for pricing? What other factors should she consider?

identify the most appropriate cost driver for each cost category explain briefly you 590314

Choosing cost drivers, activity based costing, activity based management. Pumpkin Bags (PB) is a designer of high quality backpacks and purses. Each design is made in small batches. Each spring, PB comes out with new designs for the backpack and for the purse. The company uses these designs for a year, and then moves on to the next trend. The bags are all made on the same fabrication equipment that is expected to operate at capacity. The equipment must be switched over to a new design and set up to prepare for the production of each new batch of products. When completed, each batch of products is immediately shipped to a wholesaler. Shipping costs vary with the number of shipments. Budgeted information for the year is as follows:

Pumpkin Bags
Budget for costs and Activities
For the Year Ended February 28, 2011

Direct materials—purses

$ 379,290

Direct materials—backpacks

412,920

Direct manufacturing labor—purses

98,000

Direct manufacturing labor—backpacks

120,000

Setup

65,930

Shipping

73,910

Design

166,000

Plant utilities and administration

243,000

Total

$1,559,050

Other budget information follows:

Backpacks

Purses

Total

Number of bags

6,050

3,350

9,400

Hours of production

1,450

2,600

4,050

Number of batches

130

60

190

Number of designs

2

2

4

1. Identify the cost hierarchy level for each cost category.

2. Identify the most appropriate cost driver for each cost category. Explain briefly your choice of cost driver.

3. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit of cost driver for each cost category.

4. Calculate the budgeted total costs and cost per unit for each product line.

5. Explain how you could use the information in requirement 4 to reduce costs.

what factors other than cost do you think uppervale health center should consider in 590315

ABC, health care. Uppervale Health Center runs two programs: drug addict rehabilitation and aftercare (counseling and support of patients after release from a mental hospital). The center’s budget for 2010 follows:

Professional salaries:

4 physicians x $150,000

$600,000

12 psychologists x $75,000

900,000

16 nurses x $30,000

480,000

$1,980,000

Medical supplies

220,000

Rent and clinic maintenance

126,000

Administrative costs to manage patient charts, food, laundry

440,000

Laboratory services

84,000

Total

$2,850,000

Muriel Clayton, the director of the center, is keen on determining the cost of each program. Clayton compiled the following data describing employee allocations to individual programs:

Drug

Aftercare

Total Employees

Physicians

4

4

Psychologists

4

8

12

Nurses

6

10

16

Clayton has recently become aware of activity based costing as a method to refine costing systems. She asks her accountant, Huey Deluth, how she should apply this technique. Deluth obtains the following budgeted information for 2010:

Drug

Aftercare

Total

Square feet of space occupied by each program

9,000

12,000

21,000

Patient years of service

50

60

110

Number of laboratory tests

1,400

700

2,100

1. a. Selecting cost allocation bases that you believe are the most appropriate for allocating indirect costs to programs, calculate the budgeted indirect cost rates for medical supplies; rent and clinic maintenance; administrative costs for patient charts, food, and laundry; and laboratory services.

b. Using an activity based costing approach to cost analysis, calculate the budgeted cost of each program and the budgeted cost per patient year of the drug program.

c. What benefits can Uppervale Health Center obtain by implementing the ABC system?

2. What factors, other than cost, do you think Uppervale Health Center should consider in allocating resources to its programs?

what factors should nivag consider if it has the opportunity to manufacture a new li 590316

Unused capacity, activity based costing, activity based management. Nivag’s Netballs is a manufacturer of high quality basketballs and volleyballs. Setup costs are driven by the number of batches. Equipment and maintenance costs increase with the number of machine hours, and lease rent is paid per square foot. Capacity of the facility is 12,000 square feet and Nivag is using only 70% of this capacity. Nivag records the cost of unused capacity as a separate line item, and not as a product cost. The following is the budgeted information for Nivag:

Nivag’s Netballs
Budgeted Costs and Activities
For the Year Ended August 31, 2012

Direct materials—basketballs

$ 209,750

Direct materials—volleyballs

358,290

Direct manufacturing labor—basketballs

107,333

Direct manufacturing labor—volleyballs

102,969

Setup

143,500

Equipment and maintenance costs

109,900

Lease rent

216,000

Total

$1,247,742

Other budget information follows:

Basketballs

Volleyballs

Number of balls

66,000

100,000

Machine hours

11,000

12,500

Number of batches

300

400

Square footage of production space used

3,360

5,040

1. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit of cost driver for each indirect cost pool.

2. What is the budgeted cost of unused capacity?

3. What is the budgeted total cost and the cost per unit of resources used to produce (a) basketballs and (b) volleyballs?

4. What factors should Nivag consider if it has the opportunity to manufacture a new line of footballs?

how might tracy corporation use information from its abc system to better manage its 590317

Activity based job costing, unit cost comparisons. The Tracy Corporation has a machining facility specializing in jobs for the aircraft components market. Tracy’s previous simple job costing system had two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and a single indirect cost pool (manufacturing overhead, allocated using direct manufacturing labor hours). The indirect cost allocation rate of the simple system for 2010 would have been $115 per direct manufacturing labor hour. Recently a team with members from product design, manufacturing, and accounting used an ABC approach to refine its job costing system. The two direct cost categories were retained. The team decided to replace the single indirect cost pool with five indirect cost pools. The cost pools represent five activity areas at the plant, each with its own supervisor and budget responsibility. Pertinent data are as follows:

Activity Area

Cost Allocation Base

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

Parts

$ 0.40

Lathe work

Lathe turns

0.20

Milling

Machine hours

20.00

Grinding

Parts

0.80

Testing

Units tested

15.00

Information gathering technology has advanced to the point at which the data necessary for budgeting in these five activity areas are collected automatically.

Two representative jobs processed under the ABC system at the plant in the most recent period had the following characteristics:

Job 410

Job 411

Direct material cost per job

$ 9,700

$59,900

Direct manufacturing labor cost per job

$750

$11,250

Number of direct manufacturing labor hours per job

25

375

Parts per job

500

2,000

Lathe turns per job

20,000

59,250

Machine hours per job

150

1,050

Units per job (all units are tested)

10

200

1. Compute the manufacturing cost per unit for each job under the previous simple job costing system.

2. Compute the manufacturing cost per unit for each job under the activity based costing system.

3. Compare the per unit cost figures for Jobs 410 and 411 computed in requirements 1 and 2. Why do the simple and the activity based costing systems differ in the manufacturing cost per unit for each job? Why might these differences be important to Tracy Corporation?

4. How might Tracy Corporation use information from its ABC system to better manage its business?

accounting standards require that the minimum annual rental commitments under both c 590263

Interpreting Lease Disclosures

Triangle Air Lines is one of the largest airlines in the world. It provides scheduled passenger service, airfreight, mail, and other related aviation services. Selected balance sheet information from Triangle’s 1999 annual report is given here, along with Note 4 to the financial statements, describing Triangle’s lease obligations.

Like most airlines, Triangle leases the major portion of its assets. Most of these leases are structured to meet the FASB’s criteria for operating leases. Accounting standards require that the minimum annual rental commitments under both capital and operating leases be disclosed for the ensuing five years and in the aggregate for later years.

Triangle Air Lines, Inc.

Selected Financial Information, 1999 Annual Report

(Dollars in Thousands)

Balance sheet

Current assets

$ 1,698,444

Property and equipment

7,093,312

Other assets

1,369,818

Total

$10,161,574

Current liabilities

$ 3,542,814

Noncurrent liabilities and other credits

4,724,692

Total liabilities

8,267,506

Common stockholders’ equity

1,894,068

Total

$10,161,574

Net loss

$ 506,318

Triangle Air Lines, Inc.

Footnote Disclosures of Lease Obligations

1999 Annual Report

Note 4. Lease Obligations:

The company leases certain aircraft, airport terminal and maintenance facilities, ticket offices, and other property and equipment under agreements with terms of more than one year. Rent expense is generally recorded on a straight line basis over the lease term. Amounts charged to rental expense for operating leases were $997,326,000 in fiscal 1999; $668,848,000 in 1998; and $545,542,000 in fiscal 1997.

On June 30, 1999, the Company’s minimum rental commitments under capital leases and non cancelable operating leases with initial or remaining terms of more than one year were as follows on the next page.

Capital Leases

Operating Leases

Years Ending June 30

(Dollars in Thousands)

1999

$ 19,708

$ 906,698

2000

20,565

896,793

2001

18,323

880,980

2002

18,274

894,651

2003

17,530

901,514

After 2004

72,842

12,851,687

Total minimum lease payments

167,242

$17,332,323

Less: Amounts representing interest

47,423

Present value of future minimum

capital lease payments

119,819

Less: Current obligations under

capital leases

10,321

Long term capital lease obligations

$109,498

Special facility revenue bonds have been issued by certain municipalities and airport authorities to build or improve airport terminal and maintenance facilities that are leased under operating leases by Triangle. Under these lease agreements, the Company is required to make rental payments sufficient to pay principal and interest on the bonds as they become due. On June 30,1999, Triangle guaranteed $679,505,000 principal amount of such bonds.

Note 4 on lease obligations shows that Triangle’s existing operating leases require total minimum lease payments exceeding $17 billion dollars in future years. These operating lease obligations are more than 100 times the company’s capital lease obligations of $167.2 million.

Required

a. Assume that for purposes of financial analysis, you wish to treat Triangle’s operating leases as if they were capital leases. Develop an approximation of the capitalized value of Triangle’s leases, based on the information provided in Note 4.

b. Show how this approximation of the capitalized values of Triangle’s operating leases would affect measurements of total assets, total liabilities, property and equipment, ratio of liabilities to assets, ratio of property, plant, and equipment to assets, and net income.

discuss the differing effects of capitalized leases on balance sheet ratios as compa 590264

Leases

The following note was provided by Adolph Coors Company in its 1997 annual

report:

NOTE 3:

Leases

The Company leases certain office facilities and operating equipment under cancelable and non cancelable agreements accounted for as operating leases. On December 28, 1997, the minimum aggregate rental commitment under all non cancelable leases was (in thousands): 1998, $5,403; 1999, $4,578; 2000, $3,124; 2001, $2,353; and $15,021 for years thereafter. Total rent expense was (in thousands) $13,870, $11,680, and $10,376 for years 1997, 1996, and 1995, respectively.

Required

a. Coors’ total liabilities in 1997 and 1996,respectively,were $675,515,000 and $647,049,000. Based on the information in Note 3, does it seem that the leases were a material component of these liabilities? If not, did the choice to capitalize or expense the lease payments have any material effect on Coors’ debt/asset ratios? Liquidity ratios? Asset turnover ratios?

b. Coors’ net income in 1997 and 1996, respectively, was $82,260,000 and $43,425,000. Again, based on the information in Note 3, was the rent expense a material component of net income? If so, did the choice of capitalizing or expensing the leases have a significant effect on Coors’ EPS? Return on Sales? ROE?

c. Discuss the differing effects of capitalized leases on balance sheet ratios, as compared to profitability ratios.

which company provides more information more useful information what factors might h 590265

Leases

Whole Foods Market, Inc. reported the following information about leases in its 1997 annual report:

Whole Foods Market, Inc. and Subsidiaries

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

(8) Leases

The Company and its subsidiaries are committed under certain capital leases for rental of equipment and certain operating leases for rental of facilities and equipment. These leases expire or become subject to renewal at various dates from 1998 to 2028.The rental expense charged to operations under operating leases for fiscal years 1997, 1996, and 1995 totaled approximately $29,153,000, $24,683,000, and $19,303,000, respectively. Minimum rental commitments required by all non cancelable leases are approximately as follows (in thousands):

Capital

Operating

1998

$ 788

$ 30,817

1999

275

35,252

2000

302

35,473

2001

10

35,512

2002

0

35,205

Future years

0

$335,356

1,375

Less amounts representing interest

179

1,196

Less current installments

695

$ 501

Minimum rentals for operating leases do not include certain amounts of contingent rentals that may become due under the provisions of leases for retail space. These agreements provide that minimum rentals can be increased based on a percent of annual sales from the retail space. During fiscal 1997,1996 ,and 1995, the Company paid contingent rentals of approximately $1,200,000, $981,000,and $587,000,respectively.Certain officers of the Company own approximately 13.4 percent of a business that leases facilities from the Company under a 20 year lease that commenced in fiscal 1995.The Company’s rental income from this lease totaled approximately $582,000 in fiscal years 1997 and 1996 and $96,000 in fiscal year 1995.

Required

a. For the purposes of financial analysis, it may be necessary to treat Whole Food’s operating leases as if they were capital leases. Develop an approximate capitalized value of Whole Food’s lease based on the information provided in Note 8.

b. Show how this amount will affect the results of various ratio calculations ,including the debt to assets ratio, the net income ratio, ROA, and ROE.

c. Compare and contrast Whole Foods’ disclosure of its leases with the disclosures provided by Coors’. Which company provides more information? More useful information? What factors might have resulted in these differences in lease disclosures?

which company shows the most significant shift in the debt to assets ratio 590268

Leases

Access the EDGAR archives (www.sec.gov/edaux/searches ) and locate the most recent 10 K filings for US Air Group and Southwest Airlines. Both these companies rely extensively on the use of leased assets.

Required

a. For each company, determine the total minimum lease payments for operating leases and capital leases, and the present value of the future minimum capital lease payments.

b. Calculate the percentage of the minimum lease payments ’present values for capital leases to the total minimum lease payments.

c. Estimate the present value of the operating lease payments for each company.

d. For each company, calculate the debt to assets ratios before including operating leases and the debt to assets ratios after including operating leases. Note your observations. Which company shows the most significant shift in the debt to assets ratio?

why doesn rsquo t spelling report any pension or postretirement liabilities on its b 590269

Pension Plan Disclosures

Spelling Entertainment Group (SEI), specializing in film and video entertainment, reported the following liabilities on its 1993 balance sheet:

• Accounts payable, accrued expenses, and other liabilities

• Accrued participation expense

• Deferred revenue

• Bank and other debts

• Income taxes

• Net liabilities related to discontinued operations

Required

a. Describe each of these liabilities and the economic events from which they were derived.

b. Identify whether any of these liabilities pertain to pension and/or postretirement expenses. Why might a company not have such liabilities? SEI also reported the following: Benefit Plans: The Company maintained two defined contribution employee retirement plans that covered substantially all nonunion employees of SEI. Contributions by SEI were discretionary or set by formula . . . Expenses under the various employee retirement plans were $463,000,$586,000,and $355,000 for the years ended . . . A significant number of the Company’s production employees are covered by union sponsored, collectively bargained, multiemployer pension plans. The Company contributed approximately $4,259,000, $3,714,000,and $1,383,000 for the years ended . . .The Company does not have any postretirement or postemployment benefits.

Required

c. Explain Spelling’s various pension plans.

d. Why doesn’t Spelling report any pension or postretirement liabilities on its balance sheet? Explain why this might or might not be justified.

does the firm disclose any types of obligations that are not included in the financi 590270

Interpreting Financial Statements: Retirement Benefits

Required

a. Read Note 11.Identify any unfamiliar or unusual terms. Match the terms presented in this chapter to the terms used by Wendy’s.

b. Determine the firm’s total obligations for pension benefits.

c. Determine the amount of the firm’s unfunded obligations for pension benefits.

d. Determine the firm’s expense for pension benefits and non pension benefits.

e. Does the firm disclose any types of obligations that are not included in the financial statements? If so, evaluate the significance of these potential obligations to the extent possible using the information in the financial statements. Why were these potential obligations not included as liabilities?

what discount rate and average rate of return have been adopted by the company 590272

Postretirement Benefits

Access the EDGAR archives (www.sec.gov/edaux/searches ) and locate the most recent 10 K filing by Kmart. Information about Kmart’s pension plan can be found in the Notes to the Financial Statements.

Required

a. What are the total pension assets and liabilities?

b. What is the funding status of the pension plan?

c. What discount rate and average rate of return have been adopted by the company?

d. Identify total assets and total debt as reported on the balance sheet and calculate the debt to assets ratio. Then, including all retirement plan related assets and liabilities, recalculate the values of total assets, total liabilities, and the debt to assets ratio. What do you observe?

e. Now examine the latest 10 K for Wal Mart (available at EDGAR).Should you make the same adjustments for Wal Mart that you made for Kmart? State your reasons.

at the end of 2011 compute the under or over allocated manufacturing overhead under 590277

Actual costing, normal costing, accounting for manufacturing overhead. Destin Products uses a job costing system with two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one manufacturing overhead cost pool. Destin allocates manufacturing overhead costs using direct manufacturing labor costs. Destin provides the following information:

Budget for 2011

Actual Results for 2011

Direct material costs

$2,000,000

$1,900,000

Direct manufacturing labor costs

1,500,000

1,450,000

Manufacturing overhead costs

2,700,000

2,755,000

1. Compute the actual and budgeted manufacturing overhead rates for 2011.

2. During March, the job cost record for Job 626 contained the following information:

Direct materials used

$40,000

Direct manufacturing labor costs

$30,000

Compute the cost of Job 626 using (a) actual costing and (b) normal costing.

3. At the end of 2011, compute the under or over allocated manufacturing overhead under normal costing. Why is there no under or over allocated overhead under actual costing?

calculate the amount of under or overallocated manufacturing overhead 590279

Budgeted manufacturing overhead rate, allocated manufacturing overhead. Gammaro Company uses normal costing. It allocates manufacturing overhead costs using a budgeted rate per machine hour. The following data are available for 2011:

Budgeted manufacturing overhead costs

$4,200,000

Budgeted machine hours

175,000

Actual manufacturing overhead costs

$4,050,000

Actual machine hours

170,000

1. Calculate the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate.

2. Calculate the manufacturing overhead allocated during 2011.

3. Calculate the amount of under or overallocated manufacturing overhead.

compute the over or under allocated manufacturing overhead for each department 590280

Job costing, accounting for manufacturing overhead, budgeted rates. The Lynn Company uses a normal job costing system at its Minneapolis plant. The plant has a machining department and an assembly department. Its job costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and two manufacturing overhead cost pools (the machining department overhead, allocated to jobs based on actual machine hours, and the assembly department overhead, allocated to jobs based on actual direct manufacturing labor costs). The 2011 budget for the plant is as follows:

Machining Department

Assembly Department

Manufacturing overhead

$1,800,000

$3,600,000

Direct manufacturing labor costs

$1,400,000

$2,000,000

Direct manufacturing labor hours

100,000

200,000

Machine hours

50,000

200,000

1. Present an overview diagram of Lynn’s job costing system. Compute the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate for each department.

2. During February, the job cost record for Job 494 contained the following:

Machining Department

Assembly Department

Direct materials used

$45,000

$70,000

Direct manufacturing labor costs

$14,000

$15,000

Direct manufacturing labor hours

1,000

1,500

Machine hours

2,000

1,000

Compute the total manufacturing overhead costs allocated to Job 494.

3. At the end of 2011, the actual manufacturing overhead costs were $2,100,000 in machining and $3,700,000 in assembly. Assume that 55,000 actual machine hours were used in machining and that actual direct manufacturing labor costs in assembly were $2,200,000. Compute the over or under allocated manufacturing overhead for each department.

compute the amount of under or overallocation of manufacturing overhead is the amoun 590282

Accounting for manufacturing overhead. Consider the following selected cost data for the Pittsburgh Forging Company for 2011.

Budgeted manufacturing overhead costs

$7,500,000

Budgeted machine hours

250,000

Actual manufacturing overhead costs

$7,300,000

Actual machine hours

245,000

The company uses normal costing. Its job costing system has a single manufacturing overhead cost pool.

Costs are allocated to jobs using a budgeted machine hour rate. Any amount of under or over allocation is written off to Cost of Goods Sold.

1. Compute the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate. Required

2. Prepare the journal entries to record the allocation of manufacturing overhead.

3. Compute the amount of under or overallocation of manufacturing overhead. Is the amount material? Prepare a journal entry to dispose of this amount.

show posted t accounts for all inventories cost of goods sold manufacturing overhead 590283

Job costing, journal entries. The University of Chicago Press is wholly owned by the university. It performs the bulk of its work for other university departments, which pay as though the press were an outside business enterprise. The press also publishes and maintains a stock of books for general sale. The press uses normal costing to cost each job. Its job costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost pool (manufacturing overhead, allocated on the basis of direct manufacturing labor costs). The following data (in thousands) pertain to 2011:

Direct materials and supplies purchased on credit

$ 800

Direct materials used

710

Indirect materials issued to various production departments

100

Direct manufacturing labor

1,300

Indirect manufacturing labor incurred by various production departments

900

Depreciation on building and manufacturing equipment

400

Miscellaneous manufacturing overhead* incurred by various production departments (ordinarily

550

would be detailed as repairs, photocopying, utilities, etc.)

Manufacturing overhead allocated at 160% of direct manufacturing labor costs

?

Cost of goods manufactured

4,120

Revenues

8,000

Cost of goods sold (before adjustment for under or over allocated manufacturing overhead)

4,020

Inventories, December 31, 2010 (not 2011):

Materials Control

100

Work in Process Control

60

Finished Goods Control

500

1. Prepare an overview diagram of the job costing system at the University of Chicago Press.

2. Prepare journal entries to summarize the 2011 transactions. As your final entry, dispose of the year end under or overallocated manufacturing overhead as a write off to Cost of Goods Sold. Number your entries. Explanations for each entry may be omitted.

3. Show posted T accounts for all inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, Manufacturing Overhead Control, and Manufacturing Overhead Allocated.

prepare journal entries to record the transactions for 2011 including an entry to cl 590284

Journal entries, T accounts, and source documents. Production Company produces gadgets for the coveted small appliance market. The following data reflect activity for the year 2011:

Costs incurred:

Purchases of direct materials (net) on credit

$124,000

Direct manufacturing labor cost

80,000

Indirect labor

54,500

Depreciation, factory equipment

30,000

Depreciation, office equipment

7,000

Maintenance, factory equipment

20,000

Miscellaneous factory overhead

9,500

Rent, factory building

70,000

Advertising expense

90,000

Sales commissions

30,000

Inventories:

January 1, 2011

December 31, 2011

Direct materials

$ 9,000

$11,000

Work in process

6,000

21,000

Finished goods

69,000

24,000

Production Co. uses a normal costing system and allocates overhead to work in process at a rate of $2.50 per direct manufacturing labor dollar. Indirect materials are insignificant so there is no inventory account for indirect materials.

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for 2011 including an entry to close out over or underallocated overhead to cost of goods sold. For each journal entry indicate the source document that would be used to authorize each entry. Also note which subsidiary ledger, if any, should be referenced as backup for the entry.

2. Post the journal entries to T accounts for all of the inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, the Manufacturing Overhead Control Account, and the Manufacturing Overhead Allocated Account.

prepare journal entries number your entries explanations for each entry may be omitt 590285

Job costing, journal entries. Donnell Transport assembles prestige manufactured homes. Its job costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost pool (manufacturing overhead allocated at a budgeted $30 per machine hour in 2011). The following data (in millions) pertain to operations for 2011:

Materials Control, beginning balance, January 1, 2011

$ 12

Work in Process Control, beginning balance, January 1, 2011

2

Finished Goods Control, beginning balance, January 1, 2011

6

Materials and supplies purchased on credit

150

Direct materials used

145

Indirect materials (supplies) issued to various production departments

10

Direct manufacturing labor

90

Indirect manufacturing labor incurred by various production departments

30

Depreciation on plant and manufacturing equipment

19

Miscellaneous manufacturing overhead incurred (ordinarily would be detailed as repairs, utilities,

9

etc., with a corresponding credit to various liability accounts)

Manufacturing overhead allocated, 2,100,000 actual machine hours

?

Cost of goods manufactured

294

Revenues

400

Cost of goods sold

292

1. Prepare an overview diagram of Donnell Transport’s job costing system. Required

2. Prepare journal entries. Number your entries. Explanations for each entry may be omitted. Post to T accounts. What is the ending balance of Work in Process Control?

3. Show the journal entry for disposing of under or over allocated manufacturing overhead directly as a year end write off to Cost of Goods Sold. Post the entry to T accounts.

compute the direct cost rate and the indirect cost rate per architectural labor hour 590286

Job costing; actual, normal, and variation from normal costing. Braden Brothers, Inc., is an architecture firm specializing in high rise buildings. Its job costing system has a single direct cost category (architectural labor) and a single indirect cost pool, which contains all costs of supporting the office. Support costs are allocated to individual jobs using architect labor hours. Braden Brothers employs 15 architects. Budgeted and actual amounts for 2010 are as follows:

Braden Brothers, Inc.

Budget for 2010

Architect labor cost

$2,880,000

Office support costs

$1,728,000

Architect labor hours billed to clients

32,000 hours

Actual results for 2010

Office support costs

$1,729,500

Architect labor hours billed to clients

34,590 hours

Actual architect labor cost rate

$ 92 per hour

1. Compute the direct cost rate and the indirect cost rate per architectural labor hour for 2010 under (a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs.

2. Braden Brother’s architectural sketches for Champ Tower in Houston was budgeted to take 275 hours of architectural labor time. The actual architectural labor time spent on the job was 250 hours. Compute the cost of the Champ Tower sketches using (a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs.

prepare an overview diagram of keating rsquo s job costing system 590288

Service industry, job costing, law firm. Keating & Associates is a law firm specializing in labor relations and employee related work. It employs 25 professionals (5 partners and 20 associates) who work directly with its clients. The average budgeted total compensation per professional for 2011 is $104,000. Each professional is budgeted to have 1,600 billable hours to clients in 2011. All professionals work for clients to their maximum 1,600 billable hours available. All professional labor costs are included in a single direct cost category and are traced to jobs on a per hour basis. All costs of Keating & Associates other than professional labor costs are included in a single indirect cost pool (legal support) and are allocated to jobs using professional labor hours as the allocation base. The budgeted level of indirect costs in 2011 is $2,200,000.

1. Prepare an overview diagram of Keating’s job costing system.

2. Compute the 2011 budgeted direct cost rate per hour of professional labor.

3. Compute the 2011 budgeted indirect cost rate per hour of professional labor.

4. Keating & Associates is considering bidding on two jobs:

a. Litigation work for Richardson, Inc., which requires 100 budgeted hours of professional labor

b. Labor contract work for Punch, Inc., which requires 150 budgeted hours of professional labor

Prepare a cost estimate for each job.

compute the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate for 2011 590289

Proration of overhead. (Z. Iqbal, adapted) The Zaf Radiator Company uses a normal costing system with a single manufacturing overhead cost pool and machine hours as the cost allocation base. The following data are for 2011:

Budgeted manufacturing overhead costs

$4,800,000

Overhead allocation base

Machine hours

Budgeted machine hours

80,000

Manufacturing overhead costs incurred

$4,900,000

Actual machine hours

75,000

Machine hours data and the ending balances (before proration of under or overallocated overhead) are as follows:

Actual Machine Hours

2011 End of Year Balance

Cost of Goods Sold

60,000

$8,000,000

Finished Goods Control

11,000

1,250,000

Work in Process Control

4,000

750,000

1. Compute the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate for 2011.

2. Compute the under or overallocated manufacturing overhead of Zaf Radiator in 2011. Dispose of this amount using the following:

a. Write off to Cost of Goods Sold

b. Proration based on ending balances (before proration) in Work in Process Control, Finished Goods Control, and Cost of Goods Sold

c. Proration based on the overhead allocated in 2011 (before proration) in the ending balances of Work in Process Control, Finished Goods Control, and Cost of Goods Sold

3. Which method do you prefer in requirement 2? Explain.

calculate the ending work in process inventory on december 31 2011 590290

Normal costing, overhead allocation, working backward. Gibson Manufacturing uses normal costing for its job costing system, which has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost category (manufacturing overhead). The following information is obtained for 2011: Total manufacturing costs, $8,000,000

Manufacturing overhead allocated, $3,600,000 (allocated at a rate of 200% of direct manufacturing labor costs) Work in process inventory on January 1, 2011, $320,000 Cost of finished goods manufactured, $7,920,000

1. Use information in the first two bullet points to calculate (a) direct manufacturing labor costs in 2011 and (b) cost of direct materials used in 2011.

2. Calculate the ending work in process inventory on December 31, 2011.

calculate the over or underallocated overhead for each of the molding and painting d 590291

Proration of overhead with two indirect cost pools. New Rise, Inc., produces porcelain figurines.

The production is semi automated where the figurine is molded almost entirely by operator less machines and then individually hand painted. The overhead in the molding department is allocated based on machine hours and the overhead in the painting department is allocated based on direct manufacturing labor hours.

New Rise, Inc., uses a normal costing system and reported actual overhead for the month of May of $17,248 and $31,485 for the molding and painting departments, respectively. The company reported the following information related to its inventory accounts and cost of goods sold for the month of May:

Work in Process

Finished Goods

Cost of Goods Sold

Balance before proration

$27,720

$15,523.20

$115,156.80

Molding Department Overhead Allocated

$ 4,602

$ 957.00

$ 12,489.00

Painting Department Overhead Allocated

$ 2,306

$ 1,897.00

$ 24,982.00

1. Calculate the over or underallocated overhead for each of the Molding and Painting departments for May.

2. Calculate the ending balances in work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold if the under or over allocated overhead amounts in each department are as follows:

a. Written off to cost of goods sold

b. Prorated based on the ending balance (before proration) in each of the three accounts

c. Prorated based on the overhead allocated in May (before proration) in the ending balances in each of the three accounts

3. Which method would you choose? Explain.

prepare closing journal entries related to manufacturing overhead assume that all un 590292

Overview of general ledger relationships. Brady Company uses normal costing in its job costing system. The company produces custom bikes for toddlers. The beginning balances (December 1) and ending balances (as of December 30) in their inventory accounts are as follows:

Beginning Balance 12/1

Ending Balance 12/30

Materials Control

$1,200

$ 7,600

Work in Process Control

5,800

8,100

Manufacturing Department Overhead Control

94,070

Finished Goods Control

3,500

18,500

Additional information follows:

a. Direct materials purchased during December were $65,400.

b. Cost of goods manufactured for December was $225,000.

c. No direct materials were returned to suppliers.

d. No units were started or completed on December 31.

e. The manufacturing labor costs for the December 31 working day: direct manufacturing labor, $3,850, and indirect manufacturing labor, $950.

f. Manufacturing overhead has been allocated at 120% of direct manufacturing labor costs through

1. Prepare journal entries for the December 31 payroll.

2. Use T accounts to compute the following:

a. The total amount of materials requisitioned into work in process during December

b. The total amount of direct manufacturing labor recorded in work in process during December

c. The total amount of manufacturing overhead recorded in work in process during December

d. Ending balance in work in process, December 31

e. Cost of goods sold for December before adjustments for under or overallocated manufacturing overhead

3. Prepare closing journal entries related to manufacturing overhead. Assume that all under or overallocated manufacturing overhead is closed directly to Cost of Goods Sold.

what is the effect of such swaps on a firm rsquo s balance sheet 590177

Conceptual Discussion: Exchanges of Debt or Equity

Many U.S. firms have completed exchanges or swaps of stock for debt. Collectively, such swaps often retire more debt than the value of the stock that is exchanged. In other words, the face value of the debt often exceeds the market value of the stock that is exchanged. Typical swaps might include:

• Convertible preferred stock for common stock

• Debt for convertible preferred stock

• Convertible debt for common stock

• Debt for cash and common stock

Required

a. What do you suppose are the incentives or motivations for such swaps? Why would an investor or owner give up something with a historical cost higher than its current market value?

b. What is the effect of such swaps on a firm’s balance sheet?

who do you think should set rules to control a firm rsquo s choices regarding the di 590178

Debt Disguised as Equity

An American Accounting Association Committee suggested the following in a committee report subtitled “Debt Disguised as Equity” (Accounting Horizons, September 1991, p. 88):

. . . If [debt can be made to look like equity] while at the same time retaining the tax deductibility of the interest on the debt, so much the better. Complex schemes have been thought up to secure these ends, and even relatively simple steps may be taken to disguise a liability as equity. . . . One proposal that the FASB is exploring is to get rid of the distinction altogether.

Required

a. Identify two ways in which a firm might disguise or transform its debt into equity.

b. Identify two reasons why a firm might want to disguise its debt as equity.

List two reasons why a firm might not want to do this.

c. Discuss the ethical implications of disguising debt as equity.

d. Who do you think should set rules to control a firm’s choices regarding the disclosure of debt and equity? Why?

e. What recommendations would you propose to solve these issues?

write a short memo comparing and contrasting the financial structure and risks assoc 590179

Research Project: Shareholders’ Equity

Locate recent annual reports for three companies in the same industry. If such reports are not conveniently available, use a business reference service, such as Moody’s, Standard & Poor’s, Compustate, or the SEC’s EDGAR database to obtain the following information:

• Company name and industry designation

• Preferred stock (number of shares outstanding and dollar amount)

• Common stock (number of shares outstanding and dollar amount)

• Retained earnings

• Total shareholders’ equity

• Total current liabilities

• Total long term liabilities

• Total assets

• Earnings per share

• Market price (year end or representative price)

Required

a. For each company, compute the financial leverage ratios.

b. For each company, prepare a vertical analysis (percentage composition) of its balance sheet.

c. For each company, compute the price to earnings ratio and the market tobook value ratio.

d. Write a short memo comparing and contrasting the financial structure and risks associated with the three companies.

a business editor claimed that ldquo dud is in peril with too much debt rdquo on wha 590180

Interpreting Financial Statements: Shareholders’ Equity

DUD Computer is a private company. DUD’s major product lines are CAD/CAM computer vision design systems, midrange computers, and computer services. DUD had $1.26 billion in debt at the end of 2000, its losses were more than half a billion dollars, and its net worth (retained earnings) was a negative $674.9 million. It will be in default on its loan covenants if it fails to secure new financing by the end of 2002. Its summary financial trends were:

2000

1999

Revenue (in billions)

$1.44

$1.55

Net (loss) (in millions)

($562.8)*

($172.8)

Loss per share

($ 9.02)

($ 3.21)

*Includes nonrecurring charges of $352.2 million.

Required

a. A business editor claimed that “DUD is in peril with too much debt.” On what basis was this comment made?

b. Construct a scenario with high debt levels where such a comment would be premature.

c. Using the data given above, calculate the net loss and loss per share after excluding the nonrecurring charges.

d. The company’s president and CEO suggested that DUD had a positive cash flow and would have been profitable if it weren’t for huge debt payments and write downs. Critique the president’s conclusions. Is it possible for a company with such huge losses to have positive cash flows? Why? Is it also possible for a company’s debt payments to affect its net income? Why?

premier anesthesia is a high tech health services provider that transformed itself f 590181

Financial Statement Impact: Earnings Per Share

Premier Anesthesia is a high tech health services provider that transformed itself from a private company to a public company in 1992. At the end of 1992, its price to earnings ratio was 45.0, based on estimated 1992 earnings. Its quarterly earnings for the first and second quarter of 1992 were, respectively, three cents and six cents a share. Curiously, its year to date EPS at the end of the second quarter of 1992 was 11 cents per share (WSJ, December 8, 1992, p. C1). The company’s market price more than doubled during the last half of 1992 (from less than $6.00 per share to more than $14.00 per share).

Required

a. Comment on the discrepancy between the reported earnings per share data.

b. Comment on Premier Anesthesia’s spectacular share prices relative to its earnings.

Additional Data

A reporter, Mr. Craig Torres, reported that “much of Premier’s interest earnings come from high interest loans to a group of clinics” owned and controlled by Premier’s chairman and largest stockholder (WSJ, December 8, 1992, p. C1). These loans carried interest rates ranging from 12 to 24 percent. Premier also booked management fees from the clinics as operating income. Mr. Torres suggested that “Premier’s earnings come not from the hospital world, but from collecting interest income.” The article was headlined as “Premier Anesthesia’s Earnings Are Bloated by Interest Income” and “Premier Anesthesia’s Earnings Get a Big Boost from Large Injection of Loan Interest Income.” Approximately

42 percent of the firm’s earnings were derived from these related party loans.

a. Find one to two articles (using the library or Internet) on “related party” issues. Summarize the key issues as they reflect financial reporting and ethics.

b. Describe how a company can earn interest income from another company, particularly one that it controls. Comment on the ethical issues of such loans and the reporting of such income, particularly given the market’s response to Premier Anesthesia’s earnings. Also comment on the interest rates, given that the prime rate during this period was around six percent.

Additional Data

Mr. Torres also reported that no buyer had been found for the clinics, so the loans were essentially “bridge” financing until Premier Anesthesia could acquire the clinics. He reported that “Some analysts suspect Premier is deliberately delaying the deal’s closing to keep collecting interest income, and thus to avoid losing an important source of earnings in its first year as a public company” (WSJ, December 8, 1991, p. C2).

a. Reassess your conclusions about the sources of Premier’s earnings and about the ethics of its earnings management tactics.

b. What might you recommend in similar circumstances? Why?

how might lollipops have survived this calamity 590182

Transfer of Cash to Related Companies

Philip Morris was the founder and chairman of Lollipops, Inc. until his death in 1998. The company’s performance had been sharply declining during the 1990s. Because Morris owned the majority of the shares in the company, he was very concerned about the resultant decline in the share prices and market value of Lollipops. To protect his investments, he secretly funneled $300,000,000 from other companies that he owned into purchases of additional Lollipops shares. These new shares were used by the other companies as collateral for bank loans, for financing the purchase of the shares, and for supporting the operations of the other companies. After his death, this series of stock purchases and bank loans was revealed in the financial press, and Lollipops’ shares plummeted in value!

Required

a. In what ways were these transactions unethical?

b. How might Lollipops have survived this calamity?

identify any problems in the firm rsquo s original capital structure or in its most 590184

Research Project: Changes in Capital Structure

Choose one of the companies whose financial statements appear in Appendixes D or E. Obtain the company’s most recent financial statement, or get its balance sheet on the Internet. Find one or two recent articles that describe the company’s changes in its capital structure.

Required

a. Compare the company’s capital structure as of the original financial statements (in the appropriate appendix) to the company’s most recent capital structure.

b. Document or identify any possible reasons for changes in the company’s capital structure.

c. Identify any problems in the firm’s original capital structure or in its most recent capital structure. What might the firm’s managers do to resolve these problems?

d. Identify any inconsistencies in the firm’s behavior. That is, were its actions consistent with the problems that you identified? Discuss these inconsistencies, particularly from the viewpoint of an external analyst who has to make predictions about the future success of the company.

discuss how the firms rsquo capital structures might reflect problems or opportuniti 590185

Research Project: Changes in Capital Structure

Choose an industry. Identify the three largest firms in that industry. Obtain their most recent financial statements or summaries thereof. Obtain one or two recent articles on this industry or on the three selected firms.

Required

a. Discuss the similarities and differences in the three firms’ capital structures.

b. Discuss how these firms might be changing their capital structure, especially in response to industry or market factors.

c. Discuss how the firms’ capital structures might reflect problems or opportunities in this industry.

d. Identify any inconsistencies in the firms’ management of their capital structures.

That is, discuss how each firm’s capital structure is responsive to both its particular circumstances and to industry and market factors. Discuss how the firm might be acting consistently and rationally relative to these factors. Discuss any inconsistencies, particularly from the viewpoint of an external analyst who has to make predictions about the future success of the company.

discuss the possible impact of pfizer rsquo s stock repurchasing plan 590186

Understanding Disclosures in Notes

Pfizer, Inc. provided the following information in the notes to its 1997 financial statements:

12 Common Stock

We effected a two for one split of our common stock in the form of a 100 percent stock dividend in both 1997 and 1995. Both splits followed votes by shareholders to increase the number of authorized common shares. All share and per share information in this report reflects both splits. The board of directors authorized us to repurchase up to $2 billion of our outstanding common stock through September 1998. In 1997, we repurchased approximately 11.4 million shares at an average price of $51 per share and approximately .6 million shares in 1996 at an average price of $44 per share. 13 Preferred Stock Purchase Rights Preferred Stock Purchase Rights granted in 1987 expired in October 1997. Those rights were replaced by new Preferred Stock Purchase Rights that have a scheduled term through October 2007, although that may be extended or redeemed. One right was issued for each share of common stock issued by our company. These rights are not exercisable unless certain change in control events transpire, such as a person acquiring or obtaining the right to acquire beneficial ownership of 15 percent or more of our outstanding common stock or an announcement of a tender offer for at least 30 percent of that stock. The rights are evidenced by corresponding common stock certificates and automatically trade with the common stock unless an event transpires that makes them exercisable. If the rights become exercisable, separate certificates evidencing the rights will be distributed and each right will entitle the holder to purchase from our company a new series of preferred stock at a defined price. The preferred stock, in addition to preferred dividend and liquidation rights, will entitle the holder to vote with the company’s common stock.

The rights are redeemable by us at a fixed price until 10 days, or longer as determined by the board, after certain defined events, or at any time prior to the expiration of the rights.

We have reserved 3.0 million preferred shares to be issued pursuant to these rights. No such shares have yet been issued. At the present time, the rights have no dilutive effect on the earnings per common share calculation.

Required

a. Review Pfizer’s notes. Identify any unusual terms.

b. Reconstruct each of the transactions described by Pfizer. Use the accounting equation to summarize these transactions.

c. Indicate how each of these transactions may affect Pfizer’s (a) EPS and (b) ROE.

d. Discuss the possible impact of Pfizer’s stock repurchasing plan.

e. Discuss the implications of Pfizer’s unissued preferred shares.

f. Identify whether Pfizer’s disclosures are favorable or unfavorable for existing shareholders. Are they advantageous for future shareholders? Why?

discuss the possible impact of lilly rsquo s preferred rights issue 590187

Understanding Disclosures in Notes

Eli Lilly and Company provided the following information in the notes (excerpts) to its 1997 financial statements:

Note 8: Stock Plans

Stock options and performance awards have been granted to officers and other executive and key employees. Stock options are granted at exercise prices equal to the fair market value of the company’s stock at the dates of grant. Generally, options vest 100 percent after three years from the grant date and have a term of 10 years. In October 1995, the company issued its second grant under the Global Shares program. Essentially all employees were given an option to buy 400 shares of the company’s common stock at a price equal to the fair market value of the company’s stock at the date of grant. Options to purchase approximately 10.3 million shares were granted as part of the program. Individual grants generally become exercisable on or after the third anniversary of the grant date and have a term of 10 years.

The company has elected to follow Accounting Principles Board Opinion (APB) No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” and related interpretations in accounting for its stock options. Under APB No. 25, because the exercise price of the company’s employee stock options equals the market price of the underlying stock on the date of grant, no compensation expense is recognized. Total compensation expense for stock based awards reflected in income on a pretax basis was $242.1 million, $164.2 million, and $93.1 million in 1997, 1996, and 1995, respectively. However, SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock Based Compensation,” requires presentation of pro forma information as if the company had accounted for its employee stock options granted subsequent to December 31, 1994, under the fair value method of that statement. For purposes of pro forma disclosure, the estimated fair value of the options is amortized to expense over the vesting period. Under the fair value method, the company’s net income (loss) and earnings (loss) per share would have been as follows:

1997

1996

1995

Net income (loss)

$(424.2)

$1,496.5

$2,285.3

Earnings (loss) per share—diluted

$ (0.39)

$ 1.34

$ 1.98

Because SFAS No. 123 is applicable only to options granted subsequent to December 31, 1994, and the options have a three year vesting period, the pro forma effect will not be fully reflected until 1998.

Note 9: Shareholders’ Equity

On September 15, 1997, the company’s board of directors declared a two for one stock split to be effected in the form of a 100 percent stock dividend payable to shareholders of record at the close of business on September 24, 1997. The outstanding and weighted average number of shares of common stock and per share data in these financial statements have been adjusted to reflect the impact of the stock split for all periods presented. The company now has 1,111,521,927 issued shares of common stock without par value, including 554,331,485 shares issued October 15, 1997, as a result of the stock split. Treasury shares held by the company were not split. The company has an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP) as a funding vehicle for the existing employee savings plan. The ESOP used the proceeds of a loan from the company to purchase shares of common stock from the treasury.

In 1991, the ESOP issued $200 million of third party debt, repayment of which was guaranteed by the company (see Note 7). The proceeds were used to purchase shares of the company’s common stock on the open market. Shares of common stock held by the ESOP will be allocated to participating employees annually through 2006 as part of the company’s savings plan contribution. The fair value of shares allocated each period is recognized as compensation expense. Under the terms of the company’s Shareholder Rights plan, all shareholders of common stock received for each share owned a preferred stock purchase right entitling them to purchase from the company one four hundredth of a share of Series A Participating Preferred Stock at an exercise price of $40.63.

The rights are not exercisable until after the date on which the company’s right to redeem has expired. The company may redeem the rights for $.00125 per right up to and including the tenth business day after the date of a public announcement that a person (the “Acquiring Person”) has acquired ownership of stock having 20 percent or more of the company’s general voting power (the “Stock Acquisition Date”). The plan provides that, if the company is acquired in a business combination transaction at any time after a stock acquisition date, generally each holder of a right will be entitled to purchase at the exercise price a number of the acquiring company’s shares having a market value of twice the exercise price. The plan also provides that, in the event of certain other business combinations, certain self dealing transactions or the acquisition by a person of stock having 25 percent or more of the company’s general voting power, generally each holder of a right will be entitled to purchase at the exercise price a number of shares of the company’s common stock having a market value of twice the exercise price. Any rights beneficially owned by an acquiring person shall not be entitled to the benefit of the adjustments with respect to the number of shares described above. The rights will expire on July 28, 1998 unless redeemed earlier by the company.

Required

a Review Lilly’s notes. Identify any unusual terms.

b. Reconstruct each of the transactions described by Lilly. Use the accounting equation to summarize these transactions.

c. Indicate how each of these transactions may affect Lilly’s (a) EPS and (b) ROE.

d. Discuss the possible impact of Lilly’s preferred rights issue.

e. Discuss the implications of Lilly’s stock option plan.

f. Identify whether Lilly’s disclosures are favorable or unfavorable for existing shareholders. Are they advantageous for future shareholders? Why?

which stock exchange is each company listed on and what is its ticker symbol 590189

Searching for Information: Shareholders’ Equity

In addition to links to corporate home pages or financial information, it also provides current and historical stock price data (as well as other market related data). Access the market related data for Hewlett Packard, Bell Atlantic, and Oracle.

Required

a. Which stock exchange is each company listed on, and what is its ticker symbol?

b. Identify the most recent stock price and price to earnings ratio for each company.

c. What is the EPS and book value per share for each company?

d. For each company, compute the market to book value ratio and the price to earnings ratio (based on the annual EPS identified in part c). Based on these two ratios, which company do you believe has the highest growth expectations as per the market?

is the stock price reaction consistent with the information provided in the financia 590190

Stock Prices & Shareholders’ Equity

which provides links to corporate pages and market related data. The menu contains two options for charts.

Required

a. Set the time horizon so that it will capture enough price history to include the stock prices for Applied Materials on October 12, 1995. Your chart should show a marked price drop for that month. What were the share prices before and after the drop?

b. Use the EDGAR archives (www.sec.gov/edaux/searches ) to locate the 10 K filings for Applied Materials for fiscal 1994 and 1995. Examine the shareholders’ equity section of the consolidated balance sheet for each year. Determine the par value of the common stock and the number of shares of common stock issued and outstanding for each year. Note your observations and check the Notes section for any explanations.

c. Is the stock price reaction consistent with the information provided in the financial statements?

accounting standards require that the minimum annual rental commitments under both c 590230

Delta Air Lines is one of the largest airlines in the world. It provides scheduled passenger service, airfreight, mail, and other related aviation services. Selected balance sheet information from Delta’s 1997 annual report is given here along with Note 8 to the financial statements, describing Delta’s lease obligations.

Like most airlines, Delta leases the major portion of its assets. Most of these leases are structured to meet the FASB’s criteria for operating leases. Accounting standards require that the minimum annual rental commitments under both capital and operating leases be disclosed for the ensuing five years and in the aggregate for later years.

Delta Air Lines, Inc.

Selected Financial Information, 1997 Annual Report

(Dollars in Millions)

Balance sheet

Current assets

$ 2,867

Property and equipment

6,109

Other assets

3,765

Total

$12,741

Current liabilities

$ 4,083

Noncurrent liabilities and other credits

5,651

Total liabilities

9,734

Common stockholders’ equity

3,007

Total

$12,741

Net income

$ 854

Delta Air Lines, Inc.

Footnote Disclosures of Lease Obligations

1997 Annual Report

Note 8. Lease Obligations:

The Company leases certain aircraft, airport terminal and maintenance facilities, ticket offices, and other property and equipment. Rent expense is generally recorded on a straight line basis over the lease term. Amounts charged to rental expense for operating leases were $0.9 billion in fiscal 1997 and fiscal 1996 and $1.1 billion in fiscal 1995.

At June 30, 1997, the Company’s minimum rental commitments under capital leases and non cancelable operating leases with initial or remaining terms of more than one year were as follows:

Years Ending June 30

Capital Leases

Operating Leases

(In Millions)

1998

$101

$ 860

1999

100

860

2000

68

840

2001

57

830

2002

57

850

After 2002

118

9,780

Total minimum lease payments

501

$14,020

Less: Amounts representing interest

117

Present value of future minimum

capital lease payments

384

Less: Current obligations under

capital leases

62

Long term capital lease obligations

$ 322

Required

a. Assume that for purposes of financial analysis, you wish to treat Delta’s operating leases as if they were capital leases. Develop an approximation of the capitalized value of Delta’s leases, based on the information provided in Note 8.

b. Show how your approximation of the capitalized values of Delta’s operating leases would affect your measurements of total assets, total liabilities, property and equipment, the ratio of liabilities to assets, the ratio of property, plant, and equipment to assets, net income, and the ratio of net income to total assets.

assume that a manager wishes to report a relatively high ratio of income to assets i 590243

For a capital lease, the amounts that are initially recorded as leased assets and lease obligations depend on the interest rate used to discount the lease payments. In addition, the discount rate also affects the periodic amounts of expense reported for capital leases.

a. Assume that a manager wishes to report relatively small amounts of leased assets and obligations. Would she prefer a low or a high discount rate? Explain.

b. Assume that a manager wishes to report relatively larger amounts of income in the earlier years of a lease. Would she prefer a low or a high discount rate? Explain.

c. Assume that a manager wishes to report a relatively high ratio of income to assets in the earlier years of a lease. Would she prefer a low or a high discount rate? Explain.

what lease terms should be changed to insure this purchase would be reported as a ca 590255

Lease Versus Purchase

Consider the following terms:

• Annual payments, end of each year, $40,000

• 10 year useful life

• 10 percent borrowing rate

• Straight line benefit pattern

• Zero residual value

• Lease purchase

• Initial deposit upon signing agreement, $20,000, refundable upon satisfying all purchase terms

• Five year lease terms

• Lessor’s fair value of property, $170,000

Required

a. What lease terms should be changed to insure this purchase would be reported as a capital lease?

b. Using the accounting equation, show the first year’s financial statement impact of your revised terms, and compare it to the financial statement impact of the original terms.

why are the capital lease costs higher than the operating lease costs in part b 590257

Capital Versus Operating Lease

Schott Sausages, in trying to lease a sausage machine, is concerned about whether the machine will be reported as a capital or operating lease. Consider the following facts in your deliberations:

• Annual lease payment required, $30,000

• Term of lease and useful life of machine, five years

• Discount rate, 10 percent

Required

a. Should the sausage machine be reported as a capital or operating lease? Why?

b. Calculate the annual expense for the first two years associated with a capital lease, using straight line depreciation and zero residual value. Show the impact of this lease on the accounting equation.

c. Why are the capital lease costs higher than the operating lease costs in part b?

advise hannah on the advantages and disadvantages of a capital versus an operating l 590258

Capital Versus Operating Lease

Hannah Steel Corporation signed a five year lease agreement on January 2, 2000,for the lease of equipment. The annual lease payment required at the end of each year is $4,000.The useful life of the equipment is five years and the fair market value is $18,000.

Required

a. Assume that Hannah’s (the lessee) incremental borrowing rate is eight percent. Calculate the present value of the lease payments.

b. Is this a capital lease or an operating lease?

c. If the lease payments are $4,000 per year, totaling $20,000, why isn’t $20,000 the present value of the lease?

d. Show the impact of this lease on Hannah’s balance sheet. (Hint: Use the accounting equation)

e. Advise Hannah on the advantages and disadvantages of a capital versus an operating lease.

how would a creditor who had leased an airplane to l rsquo alpane whose account is 6 590259

Evaluation of Liabilities: Potential Creditor Viewpoint

L’alpane is a transportation company headquartered in Paris. Its 1999 annual report includes the following liabilities (all in French francs):

1998

1999

Payables to:

Affiliated companies

38,642,541

8,325,461

Third parties

5,162,034

3,705,679

Accrued expenses and provisions

22,655,420

37,042,469

Total liabilities

66,459,995

49,073,609

Required

a. Describe each of L’alpane’s liabilities.

b. All other things being equal, is L’alpane more or less liquid at the end of 1999? Why?

c. How would L’alpane’s lenders react to the firm’s handling of its liabilities? Why?

d. How would a creditor who had leased an airplane to L’alpane, whose account is 60 days past due, react to L’alpane’s management of its liabilities? Why?

e. Relative to many other large companies, does L’alpane owe much money to external parties? What evidence supports this position? Given a natural and long standing aversion to debt by many French companies, does L’alpane’s balance sheet suggest that this firm also avoids debt? Why or why not?

discuss the relative impact of acquiring this asset under an operating lease versus 590260

Ratio Effects: Lease Versus Purchase

Consider the following summary financial statements at the beginning of the period:

Current assets

$ 40,000

Current liabilities

$ 15,000

Other assets

110,000

Other liabilities

113,150

Capital stock

10,000

Retained earnings

11,850

Total

$150,000

Total

$150,000

Net income during the period (exclusive of the lease) was $35,000.Also assume the company entered into a lease with the following terms:

• Annual payments, end of each year, $30,000

• 12 year useful life

• Eight percent borrowing rate

• Straight line benefit pattern

• Zero residual value

• Six year lease term

• Lessor’s fair value of property, $240,000

Required

Use beginning balance sheet data to calculate the following requirements:

a. Calculate the return on equity (ROE) ratio at year end and the financial leverage ratio for this company, assuming that this new asset is reported on the financial statements as a capital lease.

b. Calculate the return on equity (ROE) ratio and the financial leverage ratio for this company, assuming that this new asset is reported on the financial statements as an operating lease.

c. Discuss the relative impact of acquiring this asset under an operating lease versus a capital lease on these financial statements. Show the effects of each option, using the accounting equation.

calculate the roe ratio and the financial leverage ratio for this company assuming t 590261

Ratio Effects: Lease Versus Purchase

Consider the following summary financial statements at the beginning of the period:

Current assets

$1,050,000

Current liabilities

$ 650,000

Other assets

2,450,000

Other liabilities

1,500,000

Capital stock

100,000

Retained earnings

1,250,000

Total

$3,500,000

Total

$3,500,000

Net income during the period (exclusive of the lease) was $250,000.Also consider the following lease terms:

• Annual payments, at year end, $25,000

• Ten year useful life

• Twelve percent borrowing rate

• Straight line benefit pattern

• Zero residual value

• Lease purchase

• Eight year lease term

• Lessor’s fair value of property, $225,000

Required

Use beginning balance sheet data to calculate the following requirements:

a. Calculate the ROE ratio and the financial leverage ratio for this company, assuming that this new asset is reported on the financial statements as a capital lease.

b. Calculate the ROE ratio and the financial leverage ratio for this company, assuming that this new asset is reported on the financial statements as an operating lease.

c. Discuss the relative impact of acquiring this asset under an operating lease versus a capital lease on these financial statements. Demonstrate these effects using the accounting equation.

write a report to the directors of ang co which evaluates each of the three potentia 590140

ANG Co is a manufacturer of high performance processor chips for smart phones and other mobile devices. The company, based in Europe, has grown rapidly over the last five years. It has been able to compete with global competitors through developing a highly skilled and loyal workforce.

The company forecasts continued growth in existing markets and intends to break into the new markets of China and South East Asia. With this in mind, the directors have been examining options for opening a new factory within the next 18 months.

The directors have identified three possible new sites for the factory. You have been appointed as a business consultant to help the business choose which site to develop.

The financial information for each factory is set out in.

Table 9.22

Factory A

Factory B

Factory C

Initial cost

$150m

$150m

$140m

Expected production life

5 years

5 years

4 years

The company accountant has calculated the information shown in.

Table 9.23

Factory A

Factory B

Factory C

Payback period

3 years

2 years

2 years

Accounting rate of return

29%

29%

32%

Net present value

$25.6m

$39.4m

$28.7m

The NPV is calculated using the company’s standard discount rate of 13 per cent. The following further details are provided:

Factory A: This factory will be opened next to the existing factory. This will provide more jobs for people in the area and possible promotion opportunities for existing employees.

Factory B: Factory B will be located in a new enterprise development zone which is situated approximately 150 kilometres from the existing factory. By opening the factory here, the company can take advantage of some generous tax breaks and other incentives offered by the government. Opening this factory will involve moving some of the existing production into the new factory. This will mean making 20 per cent of the existing workforce redundant. (The cost of redundancies is built into the figures above.)

Factory C: This factory will be opened in China. The company will benefit from cheaper labour costs (this is built into the figures above). The company will also be in a strong geographic position to grow sales in the newly opened market in China and South East Asia.

Required:

Write a report to the directors of ANG Co which evaluates each of the three potential investments using the financial and non financial information provided above. State what further information the directors might need to consider before making a final decision.

nuin co manufactures a number of different components for the oil industry the manag 590148

Nuin Co manufactures a number of different components for the oil industry. The management is considering whether to buy in or continue making one of the components (component A). This component currently has a manufacturing cost as follows:

$

Direct labour (4hr @ $12ph)

48

Direct materials

24

Variable overheads (4hr @ $2ph)

8

Fixed overheads (4hr @ $5ph)

20

100 per unit

The direct labour, direct materials and variable overhead costs all relate directly to the production of component A and would not be incurred if production of the component stopped. However, the fixed overheads charge is an apportionment of costs which would still be incurred even if component A were not produced.

Required:

Under each of the three (separate) situations below, advise the management of Nuin Co whether component A should be bought in or made in house:

(a) The purchasing manager has found an external manufacturer that can supply the component A at a guaranteed price of $90 per unit.

(b) The external supplier can offer component A at $90 per unit. If Nuin Co continues to manufacture component A in house, it will need to install new computer controlled manufacturing systems which will have a fixed cost of $50,000 per year.

(C) The external supplier can offer component A at $90 per unit. The manufacture of component A in house requires the use of specialist skilled direct labour. If component A were bought in, that direct labour could be used in the production of component B which is sold for $180 and has a manufacturing cost as follows:

$

Direct labour (8hr @ $12ph)

96

Direct materials

18

Variable overheads (8hr @ $2ph)

16

Fixed overheads (8hr @ $5ph)

40

170 per unit

issue one million shares of common stock at the market price of 15 00 per share in e 590152

Transaction Analysis: Shareholders’ Equity

Use the balance sheet equation to calculate the ending balances in each of the following accounts, given the beginning balances and various transactions during the year.

Beginning Balances

Cash

$ 25,000,000

Other assets

100,000,000

Convertible bonds payable

20,000,000

Convertible preferred stock, $10 par value

30,000,000

Common stock, $10 par value

40,000,000

Retained earnings

35,000,000

Transactions

1. Convert half of the convertible bonds payable to common stock at a conversion price of $40.00 per share.

2. Convert all the convertible preferred stock to common stock at 1.5 shares of preferred stock for each share of common stock (conversion ratio).

3. Purchase 500,000 shares of its own common stock as treasury stock at a market price of $12.50.

4. Earn net income of $17,500,000.

5. Pay dividends of $5,000,000.

6. Issue one million shares of common stock at the market price of $15.00 per share in exchange for a parcel of land priced at $20,000,000.

why did macintosh issue preferred stock what does the seven percent cumulative term 590153

Comprehensive Dividend Problem: Stockholders’ Equity

Macintosh Browning Corporation has the following stockholders’ equity at December 31, 1999:

Seven percent cumulative preferred stock: $120 par,

50,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding

$2,400,000

Common stock: $10 par, 500,000,000 shares

authorized, 300,000 shares issued

3,000,000

Additional paid in capital

900,000

Total contributed capital

6,300,000

Retained earnings

1,200,000

Treasury stock (74,000 shares of common stock)

(1,110,000)

Total stockholders’ equity

$6,390,000

Required

a. Why did Macintosh issue preferred stock? What does the seven percent cumulative term indicate?

b. Assume that the board of directors has not declared a dividend in the past three years (the preferred stock was outstanding during these years). What is the amount of dividends outstanding for the previous three years on these cumulative shares?

c. Why might Macintosh prefer preferred stock rather than additional debt?

d. If the board declared and paid dividends to the preferred and common shareholders during the year, show the effects (use + and and ignore $ amounts) on stockholders’ equity on the date of declaration, date of record, and date of payment.

why would a company issue a stock dividend instead of cash what impact does a stock 590154

Comprehensive Problem: Stockholders’ Equity

LP&G Corporation has the following stockholders’ equity at December 31, 1999:

Common stock: $20 par, authorized 700,000

shares, issued 200,000 shares

$ 4,000,000

Additional paid in capital

3,200,000

Total contributed capital

7,200,000

Retained earnings

5,400,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$12,600,000

During 2000, the following transactions occurred:

1. January 31: A two for one common stock split was declared by the board of directors. The shares were issued and the market price was $110 per share.

2. March 15: The Corporation repurchased 50,000 shares of its common stock as treasury stock at $54 per share.

3. May 31: The board of directors declared a $2 cash dividend per share.

4. June 10: This is the date of record that the board of directors established.

5. June 20: The dividends were paid.

6. August 30: The Corporation granted employee stock options of 20,000 shares. The market price was $54 per share. The exercise price is $54 per share.

7. October 15: The Corporation sold 30,000 shares of its treasury stock for $55 per share.

8. November 25: Employee stock options were exercised. The market price was $56 per share.

Required

a. Set up an accounting equation and record the above transactions.

b. Why did the corporation issue a two for for stock split?

c. Why would a company issue a stock dividend instead of cash? What impact does a stock dividend have on overall stockholders’ equity?

what other considerations might drive open sesame rsquo s decision about this possib 590156

Financial Statement Impact: Debt Versus Equity

The Open Sesame Company has assets of $300,000,000, long term debts of $100,000,000, common stock of $100,000,000, and retained earnings of $100,000,000. Most of the long term debt consists of convertible debt carrying fairly high interest rates that are about five points above the current prevailing market. Open Sesame wants to issue $100,000,000 of new debt at current market rates. It will then “call,” or retire, the existing convertible debt, using the money from the new debt. Because its share prices have also increased 40% over the past several years, Open Sesame is also considering raising additional funds by issuing new shares of common stock. Funds from the common stock issue would then be used to refinance the debt.

Required

a. If Open Sesame issued new debt, what would be the impact on its balance sheet? On its income statement?

b. If Open Sesame issued new common stock, what would be the impact on its balance sheet? What assumption is crucial to answering this question?

c. What other considerations might drive Open Sesame’s decision about this possible refinancing of its long term debt?

d. How might the current creditors be affected if Open Sesame tries to “call,” or retire, its convertible debt? How might they feel? What actions might they take immediately after hearing about the call?

determine the impact on smyth rsquo s capital structure if it purchases 5 000 000 sh 590157

Financial Statement Impact: Debt Versus Equity

Smith Smyth, Inc., has the following capital structure:

Current liabilities

$ 20,000,000

Long term debt

30,000,000

Preferred stock ($10 par value)

40,000,000

Common stock ($1 par value)

40,000,000

Capital in excess of par

20,000,000

Retained earnings

15,000,000

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$165,000,000

Required

a. Determine the impact on Smyth’s capital structure if it issues an additional long term debt of $20,000,000. In other words, show what Smyth’s capital structure will be with the new debt.

b. Determine the impact on Smyth’s capital structure if it converts half the long term debt, including that issued in part a, to common stock at a conversion price of $10.

c. Determine the impact on Smyth’s capital structure if it converts all its preferred stock to common stock. The conversion ratio is 2.5 shares of common stock for each share of preferred stock.

d. Determine the impact on Smyth’s capital structure if it purchases 5,000,000 shares for its common stock at a market price of $12 per share.

e. Determine the impact on Smyth’s capital structure if it suffers losses of $10,000,000 in the next fiscal year.

f. Reconstruct the right side of the balance sheet, reflecting all the above changes, as if they occurred simultaneously. (Hint: Set up an accounting equation and record all the transactions.)

recalculate betsy rsquo s capital structure after suffering losses of 10 million in 590158

Financial Statement Impact: Debt Versus Equity

Bitsy Betsy, Inc. has the following capital structure:

Current liabilities

$ 35,000,000

Long term debt

35,000,000

Preferred stock (no par)

45,000,000

Common stock (no par)

45,000,000

Retained earnings

10,000,000

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$170,000,000

Required

a. Calculate Betsy’s capital structure after issuing $25 million of new debt.

b. Recalculate Betsy’s capital structure after converting half the long term debt, including that issued in part a, to common stock.

c. Recalculate Betsy’s capital structure after converting all its preferred stock to common stock.

d. Recalculate Betsy’s capital structure after suffering losses of $10 million in the next fiscal year.

describe your overall conclusions regarding the two firms 590160

Comparing Financial Ratios of Two Firms

Using Differing Accounting Methods

Two firms provided the following information at the end of 1999 (dollars in millions):

Adam Co.

Zachary Co.

Total assets

$ 105

$ 210

Total liabilities

$ 70

$ 120

Shareholders’ equity

$ 35

$ 90

Net income during 1999

$ 15

$ 25

Shares outstanding during 1999

1 million

1.2 million

Market price per share

$ 125.00

$ 150.00

Required

a. Based on the information above, determine the following items for each firm:

• Earnings per share

• Price to earnings ratio

• Financial leverage ratio

b. Adam used LIFO inventory costing and accelerated depreciation of plant and equipment costs, while Zachary used FIFO costing and straight line depreciation. If Adam had been using the same inventory costing and depreciation methods as Zachary, then Adam’s net income during 1998 would have been higher by $20 million, and the carrying value of Adam’s total assets would have been higher by $85 million. Based on this information, recomputed the three ratios above as if Adam and Zachary used the same accounting methods for inventory and depreciation.

c. Describe your overall conclusions regarding the two firms.

determine the total compensation expense to natalie that would be reported by generi 590161

Stock Options as Executive Compensation

Late in 1999, Natalie Attired, a recent MBA graduate, signed a four year employment contract with Generic Co. that provides her with an annual salary of $90,000. In addition, at the start of each year, 2000 through 2003, Natalie received options to purchase 3,000 shares of Generic’s common stock at the market price when the options were received. These options are exercisable for four years from the date of receipt. Assume the following information related to these options:

Market Price per Share, Beginning of Year

Options Exercised During the Year

Year

2000

$ 50

None

2001

$ 80

4000*

2002

$130

2000**

2003

$ 90

None

*3,000 options at $50.

**2,000 options at $80.

Required

a. Determine the total compensation expense to Natalie that would be reported by Generic in each year from 2000 through 2003.

b. Determine the total economic benefit that Natalie has received (salary plus value of stockholding and options) from Generic over the three year period.

c. Comment on any difference between the results in parts a and b.

what other related information might an external analyst require or prefer 590164

Interpreting Financial Statements: Shareholders’ Equity

Review the balance sheet to determine how and where shareholders’ equity has been reported.

Required

a. Read the Consolidated Statement of Shareholders’ Equity. Identify and discuss any unusual terms.

b. Determine whether Wendy’s has any unusual types of shareholders’ equity. If so, discuss how they might be interpreted by financial analysts. Discuss how Wendy’s managers might view such equity items.

c. Discuss how preferred stock is related to common stock. In your opinion, should they be disclosed separately? Why? Determine why Wendy’s shows preferred stock on its balance sheet and at zero amounts.

d. Discuss several reasons why Wendy’s has treasury stock.

e. Discuss any other unusual concerns regarding Wendy’s shareholders’ equity.

What other related information might an external analyst require or prefer?

discuss any other unusual concerns regarding wendy rsquo s shareholders rsquo equity 590165

Interpreting Financial Statements: Equity Ratio Calculations

Review the financial statements to determine how and where shareholders’ equity has been reported.

Required

a. Calculate Wendy’s financial leverage ratio for each year. Discuss the results.

b. Based on the notes, is there any other way to calculate the leverage ratio? If so, do so by taking a more liberal (or more conservative) approach to reclassifying any convertible securities. Contrast these results. Note: Refer to Note 4 pertaining to convertible debentures (bonds).

c. Calculate the market to book value ratio. If market prices are not disclosed somewhere in the annual report, use other resources to determine the market price at the end of each fiscal year. Discuss the results.

d. Calculate the price to earnings ratio, using the market price determined above and basic earnings per share information. Discuss the results.

e. Discuss any other unusual concerns regarding Wendy’s shareholders’ equity. What other related information might an external analyst prefer?

discuss any other unusual concerns regarding reebok rsquo s shareholders rsquo equit 590166

Interpreting Financial Statements: Shareholders’ Equity

Review the balance sheet to determine how and where shareholders’ equity has been reported.

Required

a. Read the Consolidated Statement of Stockholders’ Equity. Identify and discuss any unusual terms. Trace any numerical disclosures of shareholders’ equity in the notes to corresponding disclosures in the balance sheet.

b. Determine whether Reebok has any unusual types of shareholders’ equity. If so, discuss how they might be interpreted by financial analysts. Discuss how Reebok’s managers might view such equity items.

c. Discuss how paid in capital is related to common stock. Should they be disclosed separately? Why?

d. Determine why Reebok had the same amount of “shares in treasury” each year. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

e. Evaluate the decrease in “unearned compensation.” Why is this item shown as part of shareholders’ equity? Is this account, or the increase, significant? Why?

f. Discuss any other unusual concerns regarding Reebok’s shareholders’ equity. What other related information might an external analyst require or prefer?

discuss any other unusual concerns regarding reebok rsquo s shareholders rsquo equit 590167

Interpreting Financial Statements: Equity Ratio Calculations

Review the financial statements to determine how and where shareholders’ equity has been reported.

Required

a. Calculate the financial leverage ratio for each year. Interpret your results.

b. Based on the notes, is there any other possible way in which the leverage ratio can be calculated? If so, do so by taking a more liberal (or more conservative) approach to reclassifying any convertible securities. Contrast these results with your earlier results.

c. Calculate the market to book value ratio. If market prices are not disclosed somewhere in the annual report, go to your library to determine the market price at the end of each fiscal year. Discuss your results.

d. Calculate the price to earnings ratio, using the market price determined above. Discuss your results.

e. Discuss any other unusual concerns regarding Reebok’s shareholders’ equity. What other related information might an external analyst require or prefer?

what was the aggregate market value of the shares issued by crown during 1999 under 590169

Valuation of Stock Options

Crown Resources, Inc., an international producer of cardboard packaging, reports the following information in its 1999 financial statements:

Stock issued under stock option and employee savings plans: 1,415,711 shares

Resulting changes in shareholders’ equity:

Paid in capital increase

$23,600,000

Treasury stock decrease

7,000,000

Total increase in shareholders’ equity

$30,600,000

The market price of Crown’s common stock averaged about $40 per share during 1999.

Required

a. What was the average amount of proceeds per share that Crown received for the stock issued in 1999 under its stock option and employee savings plans?

b. What was the aggregate market value of the shares issued by Crown during 1999 under these plans?

c. Discuss the difference between the aggregate market value and the aggregate proceeds received by Crown for the stock issued in 1999. Is this interpretation consistent with the accounting treatment? Explain.

how many shares of its own common stock did vicorp purchase in 1992 at what price as 590170

Interpreting Financial Statements: Shareholders’ Equity

Vicorp Restaurants, Inc., headquartered in Denver, operates or franchises 408 midscale restaurants, primarily under the names Bakers Square and Village Inn. Its 1994 balance sheet included the following shareholders’ equity section (in thousands):

1994

1993

1992

Common stock: $0.05 par value,

20,000,000 shares authorized,

9,509,426, 9,911,536, and

10,189,066 issued

$ 476

$ 496

$ 509

Additional paid in capital

91,544

98,338

105,701

Retained earnings

42,846

49,484

32,960

Treasury stock, at cost

(0,0, and 212,851 shares)

0

0

(3,725)

Total shareholders’ equity

$134,866

$148,318

$135,445

Required

a. Explain each item in the shareholders’ equity section of Vicorp’s balance sheet.

b. Why is there such a large discrepancy between the amounts assigned to common stock versus the additional paid in capital?

c. Assuming zero dividends, did Vicorp have positive or negative net income in 1993? in 1994? Why?

d. How many shares of its own common stock did Vicorp purchase in 1992? At what price? Assume that Vicorp did not sell any additional shares in 1992.

e. Could Vicorp issue 10,000,000 shares of common stock to quickly raise additional funds? In which years?

f. Calculate the amount of dividends paid by Vicorp, if any, in 1993 and 1994. For this purpose, assume that Vicorp’s net income was $16,524,000 in 1993, and it had a net loss of $6,638,000 in 1994.

why does the average number of shares outstanding differ from the balances on januar 590171

Interpreting Financial Statements: Earnings per Share

Pierre’s, headquartered in Paris, reports the following note to its 1999 financial statements:

Share Capital: The share capital comprises fully paid shares with a nominal value of 1 FRF [French franc]. Shares at the beginning of the year and changes in the number of shares are as follows:

1999

1998

On January 1

75,452,501

74,442,637

In lieu of cash (stock) dividends

725,402

Exercise of stock options

112,095

140,550

Conversion of bonds

745

3,324

Exercise of staff (employee) options

25,733

On December 31

75,565,341

75,337,646

Information relevant to the earnings per share calculations is as follows:

Average outstanding

75,422,540

75,122,483

Profit attributed to shareholder (FRF)

965,000,000

841,000,000

Required

a. Explain each item in Pierre’s note.

b. What differences might exist between stock options and staff options?

c. Why does the average number of shares outstanding differ from the balances on January 1 and December 31?

d. Calculate Pierre’s earnings per share (EPS).

how would these conclusions change if the repurchases of stock were 100 000 590173

Cash Flow Impact on Shareholders’ Equity

Sigma Designs is a high tech software development company specializing in imaging and multimedia computer applications. Sigma Designs’ statement of cash flows is presented below:

Sigma Designs, Inc.

Statement of Cash Flows

For the Years ended January 31, 1995 and 1994

(Dollars in thousands)

1995

1994

Cash flows from operating activities

Net loss

$(8,773)

$(29,546)

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net

cash provided by operating activities

(summary of all adjustments, net)

(110)

15,885

Net cash provided by (used for)

operating activities

(8,883)

(13,661)

Cash flows from investing activities

Purchases of marketable securities

25,350)

(22,542)

Sales of marketable securities

22,296

33,355

Equipment additions

(721)

(612)

Software development costs (capitalized)

(1,255)

(494)

Other asset transactions

0

183

Net cash provided (used for)

investing activities

(5,030)

9,890

Cash flows from financing activities

Common stock sold

13,201

493

Repayment of long term obligations

1,710

0

Other financing transactions

(1,925)

0

Net cash provided (used for)

financing activities

12,986

493

Decrease in cash and equivalents

$ (927)

$ (3,278)

Required

a. If the majority of payments included in the caption “Other financing transactions” in 1995 was made for repurchasing common stock owned by officers and their family members, how would this new information affect an investor’s views of Sigma Designs?

b. Under what circumstances would a banker loan money to Sigma Designs? Why or why not?

c. How would these conclusions change if the repurchases of stock were $100,000?

d. If Sigma planned to repurchase shares for $2,000,000 and needed to sell more shares or borrow to accomplish this objective, how would this information affect an investor’s views of Sigma Designs?

sigma designs is a high tech software development company specializing in imaging an 590174

Interpreting Financial Statements: Shareholders’ Equity

Consider Sigma Designs’ balance sheets for 1995 and 1994 (dollars in thousands). Sigma Designs is a high tech software development company specializing in imaging and multimedia computer applications.

1995

1994

Assets

Cash and equivalents

$ 881

$ 1,808

Marketable securities

7,349

3,514

Accounts receivable, net of allowances

11,958

7,246

Inventories

9,736

10,602

Prepaid expenses and other

1,086

569

Total current assets

31,010

23,739

Equipment, net

1,343

1,200

Other assets

1,034

1,700

Total assets

$33,387

$26,639

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

Current Liabilities

Bank lines of credit

$ 1,710

$ 0

Accounts payable

9,333

4,207

Accrued salary and benefits

1,748

2,313

Other accrued liabilities

773

2,102

Total current liabilities

13,564

8,622

Long term liabilities

1,102

1,518

Shareholders’ Equity

Common stock

38,820

27,544

Retained earnings (Deficit)

(20,099)

(11,045)

Shareholders’ equity

18,721

16,499

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$33,387

$26,639

Required

a. Concentrate on the equity section of the balance sheet. What major changes have occurred in this section? What may have caused these changes?

b. Because Sigma had a net loss each year, its return on equity (ROE) ratios were negative each year. What aspects of Sigma’s shareholders’ equity would concern investors? Why?

how can it obtain cash for expansion or operating purposes if none of these options 590176

Comprehensive Problem

The Nothing But Cheese (NBC) Company is a small but successful family owned business that specializes in family photography in wholesome circumstances. The company conducts still and video photography of individuals and families in settings that can best be described as “heart warming.” NBC’s photographic techniques are unique, incorporating several patented photographic equipment innovations and improvements. The company fully expects to dominate its market niche within the region in the foreseeable future.

The firm has been in existence for over 40 years and has had a long term philosophy of “no debt” and “family control.” Currently 5,000 shares of $1 par value common stock are outstanding, all of which are held by family members. NBC’s shareholders’ equity section of its December 31, 1996 balance sheet contained the following data:

Common stock: $1 par value, 100,000 shares

authorized, 5,000 shares issued

$ 5,000

Additional paid in capital in excess of par value

595,000

Retained earnings

9,898,000

Total shareholders’ equity

$10,498,000

Sophia Fuji, NBC’s current president, has found three alternative ways of raising additional capital that would be used for both current operating purposes and an expansion to neighboring regions.

• Alternative 1: Issue 40,000 shares of six percent, $100 par value cumulative preferred stock to a local but very wealthy investor. Each share could be converted to four shares of common stock anytime after the year 2000.

• Alternative 2: Borrow $4,000,000 from a local bank at 10 percent with a maturity date at the end of the year 2000.

• Alternative 3: Transform NBC immediately into a public company by issuing 500,000 shares of common stock at an estimated price of $8 per share. Of course, any member of the Fuji family could purchase stock on the open market at the issue date or at any later date.

Required

a. Has NBC been successful in the past? Has it been profitable? What information is needed to answer these questions?

b. How can it obtain cash for expansion or operating purposes if none of these options is successful? In other words, what other options could Sophia also pursue?

c. Show the effects on the shareholders’ equity section of NBC’s balance sheet from each of the three alternatives identified earlier by Sophia.

d. Noting that interest is deductible for tax purposes, while dividends are not, evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of each of the three options. Show the effects on net income of each option.

e. Write a short memo from Sophia to her relatives, recommending one of the three options, while at the same time criticizing the other two options.

f. One of Sophia’s more vocal and complaining relatives responds to your memo and suggests that each of the three options is too expensive and threatens the loss of family control. He suggests that the family members must invest the additional $4,000,000 through purchase of additional shares. Because Sophia has already been told that other Fuji family members will not consider this option, write a short but tactful memo from Sophia to the dissenting family, indicating why your recommendation above (part e) is still preferable.

comment on the performance of the production department based upon the variance anal 590112

Walkon Co manufactures wooden flooring. The company buys timber which it cuts to standard length boards, sands and polishes to sell on to builders. The variance analysis shown in has been produced for the production department for the last accounting period. Table 6.6

$

Material price variance

20,000 (F)

Material usage variance

25,000 (A)

Labour rate of variance

14,000 (A)

Labour efficiency variance

18,000 (F)

Variable overhead expenditure variance

13,000 (A)

Variable overhead efficiency variance

8,000 (F)

Fixed overhead expenditure variance

10,000 (F)

F = favourable variance; A = adverse variance

In response to the variance analysis the production manager has made the following comments:

We were experiencing poor staff morale and a high staff turnover so I increased wage rates during the period. I believe that this has improved staff morale and produced a positive benefit to the company.

I was able to source an alternative supplier of raw materials. I negotiated a very good price which I believe has saved the company a considerable amount of money.

We had a large sanding machine which I felt was not being sufficiently used and was therefore costing the business too much money. I sold this machine and hired a sander only when we needed one.

Required:

Comment on the performance of the production department based upon the variance analysis and the comments from the production manager provided above.

explain why the inclusion within the performance management system of the non financ 590114

Jake Designs is a small firm which specializes as a consultant in product packaging and marketing within the cosmetics industry. The company recently appointed a new finance director, Katie Williams. In her first meeting with the CEO of Jake Designs, Jake McLeod, Katie expressed concerns at the limited focus of the current performance management system. Katie explained that, although the current system provided good details of the financial performance of the business, it is also important to include non financial performance indicators, particularly those which will provide a better indication of the future performance of the business. She has suggested that the following performance measures should be reported to the board of directors:

  • number of customers;
  • average fees per customer;
  • average job completion time;
  • employee turnover rate;
  • employee job satisfaction;
  • level of customer satisfaction;
  • percentage of revenue from new customers.

Jake McLeod is sceptical about Katie’s suggestion. He is concerned that these additional performance measures will just cause more work for the accounting department and may act as a distraction from more important tasks such as ensuring that invoices go out promptly and customers pay on time.

Required:

Explain why the inclusion within the performance management system of the non financial information suggested by Katie will provide a better indication of potential future success of the business.

prepare a cash budget for the first six months of pascal rsquo s business 590118

Pascal starts a furniture making business. Budgeted sales and purchases for the first six months of his business are:

Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

$

$

$

$

$

$

Sales

5,000

6,000

6,500

7,000

6,000

7,000

Purchases

4,000

6,000

4,000

4,000

3,500

4,000

  1. Pascal anticipates that 50 per cent of his sales will be for cash and 50 per cent on credit terms of one month.
  2. Inventory will be kept very low and bought in the month it is sold. Inventory is paid for with cash as it is bought.
  3. Workshop rent is $1,200 per month, paid on the first day of each month.
  4. Pascal has a van. This costs $400 per month. Pascal pays all van costs in cash.
  5. Pascal starts the business with an opening bank balance of $5,000.

Required:

Prepare a cash budget for the first six months of Pascal’s business.

the bank requires a business plan which includes a cash flow forecast jill has prepa 590122

Jill has recently been made redundant from her job as a designer. She has decided to use her redundancy money to realize her dream of starting a business which manufactures and sells high quality greenhouses. In order to start the business Jill has applied for a business start up loan from the bank. The bank requires a business plan, which includes a cash flow forecast. Jill has prepared the cash budget for the first six months of the business.

Table 7.4

June

July

Aug

Sept

Oct

Nov

Receipts

$

$

$

$

$

$

Sales

0

0

40,000

60,000

60,000

80,000

Payments

Materials

0

30,000

20,000

20,000

35,000

50,000

Wages

3,500

3,500

3,500

4,200

4,200

4,200

Drawings

1,750

1,750

1,750

1,750

1,750

1,750

Workshop

900

900

900

900

900

900

Advertising

8,000

1,000

1,000

General

400

400

400

400

400

400

Van

12,000

Land Rover

450

450

450

450

450

450

Equipment

12,000

25,000

Loan

1,200

1,200

1,200

1,200

1,200

39,000

39,200

54,200

28,900

43,900

58,900

Increase/(Decrease)

(39,000)

(39,200)

(14,200)

31,100

16,100

21,100

Opening Balance

55,000

16,000

(23,200)

(37,400)

(6,300)

9,800

Closing Balance

16,000

(23,200)

(37,400)

(6,300)

9,800

30,900

In relation to the cash budget, Jill has provided you with the following information:

  1. The business will commence on 1 June with $55,000 in the bank. $30,000 of this will come from Jill’s redundancy money. The remaining $25,000 will come from a business start up loan.
  2. Jill will rent a workshop unit on an industrial estate. This will cost $900 per month, payable at the start of each month.
  3. A van will be bought in June at a cost of $12,000.
  4. General workshop costs (light, heat, power etc) and the van’s running costs are expected to be $400 per month.
  5. Jill will also lease a Land Rover Discovery car starting in June. The monthly lease payments will be $450, payable on the 10th of each month.
  6. The greenhouses will be sold to local garden centres. Sales are expected to be as follows:

June

July

Aug

Sept

Oct

Nov

Number of greenHouse

10

15

15

20

25

30

The sales price of each greenhouse will be $4,000. In order to stimulate interest from customers, Jill has offered two months’ credit.

7. Purchases of materials, which will be on one month’s credit, are expected to be as follows:

June

July

Aug

Sept

Oct

Nov

$30,000

$20,000

$20,000

$35,000

$50,000

$60,000

8. Jill will initially employ a workshop manager at a cost of $1,500 per month and two further staff at a cost of $1,000 per month each, payable on the last day of the month. When sales reach 20 greenhouses per month, she will employ an additional person at a cost of $700 per month. Jill will herself draw $1,750 cash each month from the business.

9. Jill wishes to undertake a substantial advertising campaign to launch the business. This will cost $8,000 in the first month and $1,000 per month for a further two months, payable in the month incurred.

10. The machinery and equipment needed will be bought immediately at the start of June. Most can be bought second hand for $12,000 cash. Other machinery, costing $25,000, will be bought new on two months’ interest free credit.

11. Repayments on the business loan, including the interest element, will be $1,200 per month. These will be payable on the 15th of the month, commencing in July.

Required:

Analyse Jill’s cash budget and make any recommendations which you feel would improve her cash management.

what price should grogstore charge for the barrels if it wishes to earn a profit mar 590130

Grogstore Co manufactures stainless steel beer barrels. The manufacturing depot has two production departments: cutting and welding. The direct costs of producing each barrel are as follows:

Materials: 2 m2 of stainless steel @ $3 per m2

Labour – cutting: 15 minutes per barrel @ $14 per hour

Labour – welding: 20 minutes per barrel @ $18 per hour

Budgeted overhead costs for next year are:

$

Property costs

92,000

Managers’ salaries:

Cutting department

25,000

Welding department

28,000

General administration costs

143,000

Machine power

28,000

The following information relates to each of the production departments:

Cutting

Welding

Total

Floare Space(sq.m)

35

25

60

Nomber of employees

6

10

16

Labour hour

9,000

17,000

26,000

What price should Grogstore charge for the barrels if it wishes to earn a profit mark up on total costs of 30 per cent?

discuss the advantages and disadvantages for printit co of changing to a marginal co 590136

Printit Co provides rapid printing and design services to the public and small businesses. The business, which has 12 employees, operates out of a high street shop which includes office space. The company undertakes 400 to 500 jobs each month. It currently operates a full cost plus pricing system, and as each job is unique it must be priced individually. The accountant, who works part time, is struggling to keep on top of the task of pricing each job. She has suggested that the company should move to a marginal cost plus pricing system as this would make pricing much easier.

Required:

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages for Printit Co of changing to a marginal cost plus pricing system from its existing full cost plus pricing system.

if the capital investment has a required rate of return of 12 per cent what is its n 590138

A company is considering investing in a new production facility at a cost of $120 million. The new facility is expected to produce annual cost savings as set out in The facility is expected to have a useful life of eight years, before becoming obsolete and requiring replacement. The company has a policy of depreciating all assets on a straight line basis. Table 9.21

Year

Annual cost savings

1

$30m

2

$35m

3

$40m

4

$45m

5

$30m

6

$26m

7

$15m

8

$15m

Required:

Evaluate the investment using the following techniques:

(a) Payback period – the company considers a capital investment to be acceptable if it pays back within four years. Should the company make the investment?

(b) ARR – what is the accounting rate of return on the average capital employed?

(c) NPV – if the capital investment has a required rate of return of 12 per cent, what is its net present value? Should the company make the investment?

you should state whether you agree with the accounting treatment in each case if you 590139

Freshfare Co is a food retailer with 25 stores in the south of the country in which it operates. The board of directors are currently considering expansion into the north of the country by opening a large new store in a major northern city.

The investment in the new store is estimated to cost $40m. This will be financed mainly through a new bank loan of $35m at a cost of 8 per cent a year. The investment is expected to pay back within three years with an IRR of 22 per cent.

You have been asked to make a presentation on the proposed investment at the next meeting of the board of directors. The directors have raised some queries regarding the calculations in the investment appraisal and would like you to address the following points in your presentation:

  1. A feasibility study for the new store has already been completed at a cost of $28,000. This cost has not been included in the investment appraisal calculations.
  2. The interest payments on the bank loan of $35m will be payable quarterly. These payments have not been included in the investment appraisal calculations.
  3. The chief accountant proposes to charge 5 per cent of central office administration costs to the new store. This charge has not been included in the investment appraisal calculations.
  4. The company has a policy of depreciating all new investments on a straight line basis over four years. No depreciation charge has been included in the investment appraisal calculations.
  5. When the new store opens, it will be managed by one of the company’s most experienced store managers. This manager earns $40,000 per year and this cost has been included in the investment appraisal calculations. When the manager moves to the new store, her assistant manager will be promoted to take over her current job. The assistant manager currently earns $25,000 per year but will receive a salary increase to $30,000 per year when he is promoted.

Required:

Make notes for your presentation to the board of directors which explain the treatment of each of the five issues above. You should state whether you agree with the accounting treatment in each case. If you disagree with the accounting treatment, you should explain why and propose an alternative.

discuss the resort rsquo s problem with specific reference to the strategy it used t 590072

A small resort hotel that caters primarily to the family trade set as an objective an increase of 5 percent in its rooms occupancy over the next 12 months. Its strategy for achieving this was to convert some unused ground floor storage space into a conference room that could seat about 30 people. It then marketed the resort property to businesses and organizations that agreed to hold two or three day meetings and use the guest rooms overnight. During the first conference that the hotel booked, the conference organizer complained severely about noise from children using the outdoor swimming pool and recreation facilities immediately outside the window area of the conference room. Furthermore, the conference room delegates found there was no provision to have an evening meal served to them in the meeting room so that they could continue their discussions in private. Conference delegates were obliged to use the resort’s regular dining room, where other residents were also seated. When subsequent conference groups arrived, they made the same complaints, and the resort found that negative word of mouth publicity had created difficulties for them in booking further conference groups. As a result, they did not achieve the desired increase in occupancy. Discuss the resort’s problem with specific reference to the strategy it used to achieve its objective.

for each separate item state in which of the four areas of the problem solving proce 590073

The concierge’s department of a large hotel normally has a head concierge and nine concierges on duty during the day shift for the peak tourist months. During the past peak month, there have been far more than the normal number of guest complaints about the slow service received, creating a problem for the rooms department manager. The following are descriptions of several situations or events pertaining to the concierge service department. For each separate item, state in which of the four areas of the problem solving process the item belongs. The four areas are defining the problem, identifying alternatives, gathering information, and making the decision.

a. Several guests have complained to the front office manager that they are experiencing a longer than usual wait for service or that they have been receiving poor service.

b. The bell service department has priorities for jobs. The check out baggage of guests is handled first. Second is guest check in baggage.

Third is delivery of other items to guest rooms. Fourth is the sale of airport limousine, bus tour, and theater tickets. Fifth is other requests for service.

c. One guest complained that their theater tickets were for the wrong night.

d. One guest suggested replacing the head concierge with a better organizer.

e. One guest complained that a request to have flowers purchased and delivered to another guest’s room was never carried out.

f. The paging system that allows the head concierge to signal to concierges when they are away from the service area has malfunctioned three times in the last month and has taken as long as 24 hours to repair.

g. One of the desk clerks suggests that the sale of theater and bus tour tickets be handled by a new person who will operate strictly on a commission basis.

h. The rooms department manager will consider having a commission arrangement for next summer, since it is too late to do anything about it this year.

i. The head concierge suggests hiring one more concierge.

j. One concierge has been away sick for the past two weeks.

k. A sick concierge was replaced by a temporary employee who was not familiar with the hotel and its operating procedures. The replacement’s work was marginal.

l. Guests who complain are advised of the concierge desk’s order of priorities.

m. During the past month, the hotel’s occupancy has been 10 percentage points above normal for that month, creating extra demands by guests for service.

n. The rooms department manager has approved the hiring of one extra temporary concierge for as long as occupancy stays above normal.

o. A new paging system will be purchased with a maintenance contract guaranteeing instant service.

however george thinks that the investment required to develop it for skiing would no 590074

In late January 2006, George Ray, president of Restoration Resort Ltd., is concerned about how he could finance the more than $200,000 he estimates he needs to convert, improve, and expand the company’s resort facilities. The resort has very little cash, and George and his wife have about $20,000 in savings. The land on which the resort is located has been in the Ray family for 40 years. The 12 unit motel was constructed 25 years ago. The motel is open year round. Occupancy of rooms in the peak summer months (mid June to mid September) is 100 percent, but a lower occupancy during the shoulder and winter months reduces overall annual occupancy to 60 percent. In the winter months, the rooms are rented on a monthly basis. About 20 years ago, a swimming pool was added along with a change house, snack bar/souvenir shop, and a 20 space trailer park. The trailer park is only open during the summer months (approximately 150 days), and, during that period, spaces are 90 percent occupied. Although losses occurred in earlier years, the resort is now reasonably profitable. However, the resort has not until now been considered the main business of the Ray family, since both George (who inherited the resort from his parents 10 years ago) and his wife work at other jobs and look at the resort as a part time business. It has become increasingly apparent to them that, because of the economic times, they will have to make changes to the resort and work at it full time if it is to remain successful.

After considerable thought and discussion, the Rays decided that the following changes would have to be made to bring the resort up to a standard acceptable to today’s traveling public:

a. Add eight fully furnished 400 square foot cabins with a potential of 32 additional overnight guests.

b. Fill in the pool, which has become badly corroded from minerals in the water. This pool has been fully depreciated.

c. Construct a new 3,300 square foot swimming pool.

d. Renovate and modernize the combined frame change house and snack bar.

e. Add an extension to the change house that includes shower rooms for trailer park guests and houses the resort’s office.

f. Expand the trailer park area from 20 to 50 stalls and provide electrical and sewer hookup to all stalls.

In addition to the Restoration Resort land, George personally owns land that includes a hill at the back of the property, which has potential for skiing. This piece of land is estimated to be worth about $50,000 at today’s prices. However, George thinks that the investment required to develop it for skiing would not make the project currently feasible, even though it might considerably improve the winter rooms occupancy. The investment costs for the proposed changes to the property are estimated as follows:

Construction/renovation of buildings

$128,000

Swimming pool

27,000

Furniture, equipment and fixtures

16,000

Trailer park site improvements

21,000

Contingency

10,000

Total

$202,000

A balance sheet for the year ending December 31, 2005, follows, as do income statements for the years 2004 and 2005.

Restoration Resort Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2005

Assets

Current Assets

Cash

$ 8,700

Inventory

3000

$ 11,700

Fixed Assets

Land

$ 70,200

Buildings

83,800

Furniture & equipment

14,600

Swimming pool

15,400

Station wagon

5,600

$189,600

Accumulated depreciation

64,200

125,400

Total Net Assets

$137,100

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current Liabilities

Bank loan

$ 4,300

Accounts payable

2,100

Current mortgage

12,800

$ 19,200

Long term Liabilities

Mortgage

24,600

Loan from shareholder

8,700

33,300

Owner Equity

Capital—shares issued

$ 40,000

Retained earnings

44,600

44,600

Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity

$137,100

Year Ending
Dec. 31, 2004

Year Ending
Dec. 31, 2005

Sales Revenue

Rooms and trailer rentals

$65,100

$74,400

Snack bar/souvenir shop

13,900

$89,000

26,700

$101,100

Expenses

Salaries and wages

$36,700

$40,100

Maintenance and repairs

14,100

16,200

Supplies and other expenses

9,000

9,900

Interest

3,200

2,800

Depreciation

6900

69,900

6300

75300

Income before tax

$19,100

$25800

Income tax

4800

6400

Net Income

$14300

$19400

Restoration Resort retained earnings statement:

Year Ending
Dec. 31, 2004

Year Ending
Dec. 31, 2005

Retained earnings beginning of year

$10,900

$25,200

Add: net income for year

14300

19,400

Retained earnings, end of year

$25,200

$44,600

Revenue for the year 2006 is estimated to be about 5 percent above year 2005, primarily as a result of a price increase, rather than an increase in occupancy. Expenses are estimated in total to be about 5 percent higher than in 2005.

a. Given the balance sheet and income statements, calculate whatever financial ratios (see Chapter 4) you think are appropriate that will indicate the financial health of the Restoration Resort.

b. List the information that you would like to have that is not shown on the financial statements, but would make it easier to carry out some financial projections as a preliminary step before going ahead with a complete feasibility study for expansion.

assuming that the new business is a separate legal entity how does this affect the a 590076

Let us suppose that you wish to start your own business, Mobius Inc. The following transactions shown in examples Mobius (1) to Mobius (3) represent the first week of trading for the entity.

On day 1, you opt to put financial distance between you and the trading entity and transfer $1,000 from your personal bank account to a bank account you hold in the name of the new enterprise – Mobius Inc.

Assuming that the new business is a separate legal entity, how does this affect the accounting equation?

Assets Liabilities=Shareholders Fund(Your Injection Of Capital)

$1000 $0=$1000

NOTE: As you can see, the accounting equation captures both sides of the transaction and only by making the entry twice does the equation (and, by extension, the statement of financial position) balance.

you take out a loan with a coupon rate of 10 per cent for the full amount from your 590083

Until this point, everything has been straightforward. You’re now ready to move to the next level, and the following worked exercise shows how tangible non current assets are accounted for. Though there are many standards, IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment is a good vehicle to allow us to discuss in more detail the prudence and accruals conventions.

The previous exercise concluded at the end of week 2. Let us pick up the exercise at the start of week 3. The closing position looked like this (ie opening statement of financial position as of first day of week 3):

Mobius Inc

Summarized Statement of Financial Position

As at the start of week 3

Assets

Non current assets

Computer

500.00

Printer/scanner

100.00

Current assets

Cash at bank

1,450.00

Inventories

Raw materials

0.00

Finished goods

533.33

Trade receivables – amounts owed by customers

900.00

Liabilities

Loan from friend

(500.00)

Trade payables – amounts owed to suppliers

(800.00)

Net assets

2,183.33

Shareholder’s funds (capital and reserves)

Capital

1,000.00

Retained profits (weeks 1 & 2)

1,183.33

Shareholder’s funds

2,183.33

The following information is relevant to weeks 3 and 4:

Tangible non current assets

(a) By the end of week 4, which marks the conclusion to your first full month’s trading, you have noticed signs of wear and tear appearing on both of your tangible non current assets – the printer/scanner and the computer. You believe that the printer will continue effectively for 20 months, at which point it will be scrapped. The computer is unlikely to be usable for business purposes after 40 months but you know a friend will buy it off you at that time for $100.

(b) On the first day of week 3 you decide to buy a new motor vehicle which will be used exclusively for business purposes. The useful economic life of the motor vehicle is estimated to be five years, at which stage the terminal value would be $0. The invoice from the supplier showed the following costs:

$

Motor vehicle

19,500

Delivery charge

500

Additional extras:

Non standard black matt paint job

1,000

Convertible roof function

2,000

Tank of petrol

150

Road tax (for the year)

200

Total

23,350

You take out a loan with a coupon rate of 10 per cent for the full amount from your bank to finance the purchase. The interest is paid quarterly in arrears. The principal (ie capital amount borrowed) is due to be repaid in full in five years’ time.

let us once again consider the statements of financial position and income for mobiu 590084

At the end of every accounting period, it is highly likely that a company will need to make a series of period end adjustments. The depreciation of non current assets is an example of one of these. Frequently the adjustments are correcting entries, accounting for estimates or adjusting the figures to an accruals basis. Let us once again consider the statements of financial position and income for Mobius Inc as at the end of week 4.

The following information is relevant:

(i)Mobius Inc had a telephone line installed along with a broadband connection during the third week of trading. The phone company invoices quarterly in arrears and you have not yet received your first invoice. This transaction has not been recorded in your accounting records and therefore is not included within the financial statements above. You have estimated that the usage during this first period of account will cost approximately $100.

(ii)On the last day of week 4, you found a suitable location to base the business. The monthly rental cost is $1,000 and the landlord required you to pay in advance. You paid in cash.

(iii)Mobius Inc sold $20,000 of product on credit terms. The total amount owed by customers (from all transactions) at the end of the period was $4,900.

(iv)Mobius Inc bought a further $9,000 of raw materials on credit during weeks 3 and 4 of trading. Exactly $8,000 worth was converted into finished goods, of which three quarters were sold. The remainder were held as inventories at the end of the period. These were the only goods held at the end of the period as those finished goods brought forward from weeks 1 and 2 were sold during week 3. Suppliers were owed $2,000 in total at the end of the accounting period.

based on this information prepare a statement of financial position and an income st 590085

For a long time, you have been wondering how to convert your passion for rock climbing into a business opportunity. During a recent climbing trip you met Chris, a climbing gear designer. He agreed to give you 100 chalk bags and 100 climb oriented t shirts for $4 and $5 respectively. You came to an agreement with him that you’d make payments on an ad hoc basis as the goods were sold. As soon as you arrived home you listed the first 30 chalk bags and 50 t shirts on an internet based auction site. These sold within 3 days of listing them for $8 and $10 respectively. Half of these customers paid immediately. You offered 20 day terms on the sales and your past experiences tell you that customers tend to take full advantage of this policy.

Required:

Based on this information, prepare a statement of financial position and an income statement.

goblin combe plc hired a new corporate communication team it is confidently expected 590086

State which of the following items could appear as an asset on the statement of financial position of Goblin Combe plc, a leading premium drinks business:

  • $150,000 of product sold during the year to Troillus Direct Inc under 40 day credit terms. The amount remained outstanding at the end of the year and management believe that the amount will never be paid.
  • Goblin Combe plc holds $22 million of finished goods inventories as at the year end. Of this amount, $500,000 relates to a product which was banned from sale during the year. The directors have ascertained that this particular product is highly effective as paint remover. A buyer has been found for this and they are willing to pay $100,000 for the full quantity of this otherwise unsaleable stock.
  • A competing company produced a popular whisky called ‘Arbol’. Goblin Combe plc acquired the company (and by default the ‘Arbol’ brand) at the start of the year for $30 million. The fair value of the assets less liabilities, at that time, was estimated to be $10 million.
  • Goblin Combe plc hired a new corporate communication team. It is confidently expected that their services will lead to an increase in profits by over $12 million per annum.
  • A product was developed by a rival company, Old Down Quarry Inc. The directors of Goblin Combe plc decided to buy the exclusive rights to manufacture and distribute this product for the next four years at a cost of $2 million. The new drink has already proved successful and sales have exceeded expectations.

some of the machinery quickly proved to be unnecessary and was sold during the year 590087

Trading continues apace for your new business Climb On! The products have proved to be popular and, seeing this as your opportunity to seize the day, you decided to expand and grow the business.

Here follows a summary of your cash book, ie all cash transactions during the year to 31 December 2013:

Cash In

Cash Out

Description

$

Description

$

Cash sales

32,000

Payments to suppliers

49,000

Receipts in respect of credit sales

106,000

Purchase of machinery

55,000

Capital invested (transfer from private bank account)

30,000

Rent and rates

7,800

Bank loan

45,000

Utilities

3,500

Interest received

200

Insurance

1,200

Sale of machinery

2,500

Telephone

300

Postage and packaging

200

Website development costs

1,500

Travel/climbing trips

10,500

General expenses

6,300

Wages (staff)

12,000

Drawings (your remuneration)

8,000

Interest paid

2,300

Balance carried forward

58,100

215,700

215,700

The following information is also available:

(a)The machinery was purchased on 1 April 2013. The estimated useful economic life of these assets is four years. The residual value is estimated to be $nil. You may assume a full year’s depreciation in the year of purchase but none in the year of sale.

(b)Some of the machinery quickly proved to be unnecessary and was sold during the year for $2,500. The original cost was $5,000.

(c)Utilities bills of £400 were still owed as at 31 December 2013.

(d)Closing inventories as at 31 December 2013 were $14,000.

(e)Trade receivables as at 31 December 2013 were $10,500.

(f)Trade payables as at 31 December 2013 were $18,000.

(g)You need to provide for $1,500 of accounting fees as at 31 December 2013.

this is an example of an intangible asset which can be capitalized the acquisition c 590088

  • Definition reminder: an asset is a resource controlled by an entity as a result of past events and from which economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.
  • Under normal circumstances, the $150,000 would have been included as an asset and shown as part of the trade receivables balance. However, it would appear that the amount is not recoverable (ie economic benefits are not expected to flow to the entity) and therefore should be written off and not appear as an asset at the year end.
  • Accounting tends towards prudence and inventories should be included at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Therefore, the final value of finished goods inventories in the statement of financial position will be $21.6 million, ie $22m – $0.5m + $0.1m.
  • The assets acquired are worth $10 million but the cash being paid is $30 million. We know that cash will be reduced by $30 million and assets will increase by $10 million. Therefore an accounting entry is required for the difference between these two figures. Essentially the company is paying for the intangible value of the entity, so taking the cost to the income statement as an expense would be inappropriate.
  • In accounting terminology this difference is referred to as goodwill. In accounting we tend towards prudence and therefore there are rules which determine whether an intangible asset can be included on the statement of financial position. In this instance, the difference between the consideration payable for a business and the aggregate fair value of its identifiable assets less liabilities can be classified as (purchased) goodwill and included on the statement of financial position as an intangible asset. At the end of each accounting period an impairment test will highlight whether this intangible asset is being included at an appropriate value.
  • Human capital is an example of an asset class which cannot be capitalized. Though there has been a great deal of professional and academic debate about the ‘rights’ and ‘wrongs’ of this approach, ultimately employees are not capitalized. Amounts paid to employees should be taken directly to the income statement.
  • This is an example of an intangible asset which can be capitalized. The acquisition cost should be matched against the expected life span. Annual impairment tests are required to ensure that that asset is being carried forward each year at an appropriate value.

shows the recently issued summarized financial statements of hawk and sparrow for th 590095

Hawk Limited (Hawk) manufacture and distribute washing machines. The board of directors (BoD) have been concerned for some time that their share of the market has been in decline, mainly as a result of industry wide competition. They are also aware that to a certain extent the industry has become the victim of its own success as washing machines have become more reliable and durable and therefore do not need replacing as regularly. Therefore, the BoD are considering making an investment in Sparrow Limited (Sparrow). Sparrow manufacture dishwashers. The BoD believe that the synergistic gains will include advantages over competitors from shared technologies, a greater distribution network, an increase in skilled employees and management, and a shared clerical and manufacturing headquarters.

shows the recently issued (summarized) financial statements of Hawk and Sparrow for the year ended 31 October 2013. Table 3.6

Statements of comprehensive income

Hawk

Sparrow

2013

2012

2013

2012

£000s

£000s

£000s

£000s

Revenue

12,000

13,000

9,500

7,800

Cost of sales

(8,000)

(8,200)

(4,100)

(2,600)

Gross profit

4,000

4,800

5,400

5,200

Operating expenses

(2,500)

(2,550)

(2,600)

(2,700)

Finance costs

(550)

(500)

(900)

(300)

Profit before tax

950

1,750

1,900

2,200

Income tax expense

(300)

(600)

(800)

(900)

Profit for the period

650

1,150

1,100

1,300

Statements of financial position

Non current assets

13,075

12,000

11,000

6,000

Current assets

2,600

2,800

1,500

1,400

Current liabilities

(3,200)

(3,000)

(2,500)

(1,500)

Non current liabilities

(275)

(250)

(4,500)

(1,500)

12,200

11,550

5,500

4,400

Equity and reserves

12,200

11,550

5,500

4,400

Current assets include:

Inventories

800

900

700

400

Trade receivables

1,000

1,800

750

600

Bank

800

100

50

400

Current liabilities include:

Trade payables

1,550

1,300

650

400

Other payables

1,200

1,200

1,000

200

Current tax payable

450

500

850

900

Required:

(a) The BoD of Hawk Limited have asked you to analyse the position and performance of Sparrow Limited.

(b) As part of this analysis, the BoD have also asked that you use the information above to compare and contrast the position and performance of Hawk Limited with Sparrow Limited. They have asked you to conclude your analysis by stating, with reasons, whether you feel Hawk Limited should make a bid to acquire Sparrow Limited.

mr lee also increased the autonomy of successful businesses by eliminating cross bus 590109

Samsung, the South Korean based multinational conglomerate, arrived at its current world leading position through a process of benchmarking and refinement. When he succeeded his father as Samsung Group chairman in 1987, Lee Kun Hee set about transforming the conglomerate from a Korean competitor to a global leader. Mr Lee insisted that the Group’s subsidiaries should measure their performance against global leaders in their field, rather than benchmark against other Korean companies. Business units that did not measure up to global performance, such as sugar and paper processing, were divested even though they were profitable, because they were not capable of achieving leadership in global markets. Investment was concentrated on a handful of businesses deemed capable of competing globally. Mr Lee also increased the autonomy of successful businesses by eliminating cross business subsidies and below market transfer prices, thereby freeing the businesses to compete more effectively in global markets.

prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in sh 589965

Alternative investment models, more complex D&D. Mast Corporation purchased a 75% interest in the common stock of Shaw Company on January 1, 20X4, for $462,500 cash. Shaw had the following balance sheet on that date:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$80,000

Current liabilities

$50,000

Inventory

40,000

Common stock ($5 par)

50,000

Land

100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Buildings and equipment (net)

200,000

Retained earnings

200,000

Patent

30,000

Total assets

$450,000

Total liabilities and equity

$450,000

Appraisals indicated that the book values for inventory and buildings and equipment, and patent are below fair values. The inventory had a fair value of $50,000 and was sold during 20X4.

The buildings and equipment have an appraised fair value of $300,000 and a remaining life of 20 years. The patent, which has a 10 year life, has an estimated fair value of $50,000. Any remaining excess is goodwill.

Shaw Company reported the following income earned and dividends paid during 20X4 and 20X5:

Retained earnings, January 1, 20X4

$200,000

Net income, 20X4

$70,000

Dividends paid in 20X4

20,000

50,000

Balance, December 31, 20X4

$250,000

Net income, 20X5

$48,000

Dividends paid in 20X5

20,000

28,000

Balance, December 31, 20X5

$278,000

Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Shaw Company and determine the balance in the Investment in Shaw Company on Mast Company’s books as of December 31, 20X5, under the following methods that could be used by the parent, Mast Company: simple equity, sophisticated equity, and cost.

prepare the 20×1 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution s 589966

Equity method, first year, eliminations, statements. Pepper Company purchased an 80% interest in Salt Company for $250,000 in cash on January 1, 20X1, when Salt Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$50,000

Depreciable fixed assets

200,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Retained earnings

150,000

Total assets

$300,000

Total liabilities and equity

$300,000

Any excess of the price paid over book value is attributable only to the fixed assets, which have a 10 year remaining life. Pepper Company uses the simple equity method to record its investment in Salt Company.

The following trial balances of the two companies were prepared on December 31, 20X1:

Pepper

Salt

Current Assets

60,000

130,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

400,000

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation

106,000

20,000

Investment in Salt Company

266,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

40,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X1

200,000

150,000

Sales

150,000

100,000

Expenses

110,000

75,000

Subsidiary Income

20,000

Dividends Declared

5,000

Total

0

0

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare all the eliminations and adjustments that would be made on the 20X1 consolidated worksheet.

3. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

4. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated balance sheet.

prepare the 20×2 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution s 589967

Equity method, second year, eliminations, statements. The trial balances of Pepper and Salt companies of Exercise 3 for December 31, 20X2, are presented as follows:

Pepper

Salt

Current Assets

152,000

115,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

400,000

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation

130,000

40,000

Investment in Salt Company

270,000

Current Liabilities

80,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X2

260,000

170,000

Sales

200,000

100,000

Expenses

160,000

85,000

Subsidiary Income

12,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

Total

0

0

Pepper Company continued to use the simple equity method.

1. Prepare all the eliminations and adjustments that would be made on the 20X2 consolidated worksheet.

2. Prepare the 20X2 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

if you did not solve exercise 4 prepare the 20×2 consolidated income statement and i 589969

Sophisticated equity method, second year, eliminations, statements. The trial balances of Pepper and Salt companies of Exercise 5 for December 31, 20X2, are presented as follows:

Pepper

Salt

Current Assets

152,000

115,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

400,000

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation

130,000

40,000

Investment in Salt Company

260,000

Current Liabilities

80,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X2

255,000

170,000

Sales

200,000

100,000

Expenses

160,000

85,000

Subsidiary Income (from Salt Company)

7,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

Total

0

0

Pepper Company continued to use the sophisticated equity method.

1. Prepare all the eliminations and adjustments that would be made on the 20X2 consolidated worksheet.

2. If you did not solve Exercise 4, prepare the 20X2 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

if you did not solve exercise 3 or 5 prepare the 20×1 consolidated income statement 589970

Cost method, first year, eliminations, statements. (Note: Read carefully. This is not the same as Exercise 3 or 5.) Pepper Company purchased an 80% interest in Salt Company for $250,000 in cash on January 1, 20X1, when Salt Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$50,000

Depreciable fixed assets

200,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Retained earnings

150,000

Total assets

$300,000

Total liabilities and equity

$300,000

Any excess of the price paid over book value is attributable only to the fixed assets, which have a 10 year remaining life. Pepper Company uses the cost method to record its investment in Salt Company. The following trial balances of the two companies were prepared on December 31, 20X1:

Pepper

Salt

Current Assets

60,000

130,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

400,000

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation

106,000

20,000

Investment in Salt Company

250,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

40,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X2

200,000

150,000

Sales

150,000

100,000

Expenses

110,000

75,000

Dividend Income (from Salt Company)

4,000

Dividends Declared

5,000

Total

0

0

1. If you did not solve Exercise 3 or 5, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare all the eliminations and adjustments that would be made on the 20X1 consolidated worksheet.

3. If you did not solve Exercise 3 or 5, prepare the 20X1 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

4. If you did not solve Exercise 3 or 5, prepare the 20X1 consolidated balance sheet.

if you did not solve exercise 4 or 6 prepare the 20×2 consolidated income statement 589971

Cost method, second year, eliminations, statements. The trial balances of Pepper and Salt companies of Exercise 7 for December 31, 20X2, are presented as follows:

Pepper

Salt

Current Assets

152,000

115,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

400,000

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation

130,000

40,000

Investment in Salt Company

250,000

Current Liabilities

80,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X2

244,000

170,000

Sales

200,000

100,000

Expenses

160,000

85,000

Dividend Income (from Salt Company)

8,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

Total

0

Pepper Company continued to use the cost method.

1. Prepare all the eliminations and adjustments that would be made on the 20X2 consolidated worksheet.

2. If you did not solve Exercise 4 or 6, prepare the 20X2 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

prepare an amortization schedule for the years 20×1 20×2 20×3 and 20×4 589972

Amortization procedures, several years. Walt Company purchased an 80% interest in Mitchell Company common stock on January 1, 20X1. Appraisals of Mitchell’s assets and liabilities were performed, and Walt ended up paying an amount that was greater than the fair value of Mitchell’s net assets. The following determination and distribution of excess schedule was created on December 31, 20X1, to assist in putting together the consolidated financial statements:

Determination and Distribution of Excess Schedule

Price paid for investment

$1,100,000

Less book value interest acquired:

Common stock

$100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Retained earnings

350,000

Total equity

$600,000

Interest acquired

X80%

480,000

Excess of cost over book value (debit)

$620,000

Adjustments to first priority accounts:

Life

Inventory

$5,000

1

Investments

20,000

5

Land

40,000

Bonds payable

10,000

5

Buildings (net)

200,000

20

Equipment (net)

138,000

5

Patent

18,000

10

Trademark

16,000

10

Goodwill

173,000

Total adjustments

$620,000

Prepare an amortization schedule for the years 20X1, 20X2, 20X3, and 20X4.

determine if goodwill is impaired if not explain your reasoning if so calculate the 589974

Impairment loss. The Albers Company purchased an 80% interest in the Baker Company on January 1, 20X1, for $850,000. The following determination and distribution of excess schedule was prepared at the time of purchase:

Price paid

$850,000

Stockholders’ equity

$600,000

Interest acquired

80%

480,000

Excess of cost over book value

$370,000

Attributed to:

Building, 80% $200,000 undervaluation, 20 year life

160,000

Goodwill

$210,000

Albers used the simple equity method for its investment in Baker. As of December 31, 20X5, Baker had earned $200,000 since it was purchased by Albers. Baker paid no dividends during 20X1–20X5. On December 31, 20X5, the following values were available:

Fair value of Baker’s identifiable net assets (100%)

$900,000

Estimated fair value of Baker Company (net of liabilities)

1,000,000

Determine if goodwill is impaired. If not, explain your reasoning. If so, calculate the adjustment needed to the investment account. (Albers will directly adjust its investment account for any impairment losses.)

prepare the elimination entries that would be made on the consolidated worksheet 589975

D&D for nontaxable exchange. Rainman Corporation is considering the acquisition of Lamb Company through the purchase of Lamb’s common stock. Rainman Corporation will issue 20,000 shares of its $5 par common stock, with a fair value of $25 per share, in exchange for all 10,000 outstanding shares of Lamb Company’s voting common stock.

The acquisition meets the criteria for a tax free exchange as to the seller. Because of this, Rainman Corporation will be limited for future tax returns to the book value of the depreciable assets. Rainman Corporation falls into the 30% tax bracket.

The appraisal of the assets of Lamb Company showed that the inventory has a fair value of $120,000, and the depreciable fixed assets have a fair value of $270,000. Any excess is attributed to goodwill. Lamb Company had the following balance sheet just before the acquisition:

Lamb Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X5

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$40,000

Current liabilities

$70,000

Accounts receivable

150,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Inventory

100,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Depreciable fixed assets

210,000

Common stock ($10 par)

$100,000

Retained earnings

230,000

330,000

Total assets

$500,000

Total liabilities and equity

$500,000

1. Record the acquisition of Lamb Company by Rainman Corporation.

2. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

3. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on the consolidated worksheet.

prepare the 20×1 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution s 589976

D&D and income statement for nontaxable exchange. Lucy Company issued securities with a fair value of $465,000 for a 90% interest in Desmond Company on January 1, 20X1, at which time Desmond Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$50,000

Current liabilities

$70,000

Inventory

80,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Land

20,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

130,000

Building (net)

200,000

Retained earnings

50,000

Total assets

$350,000

Total liabilities and equity

$350,000

It was believed that the inventory and the building were undervalued by $20,000 and $50,000, respectively. The building had a 10 year remaining life; the inventory on hand January 1, 20X1, was sold during the year. The deferred tax liability associated with the asset revaluations was to be reflected in the consolidated statements. Each company has an income tax rate of 30%. Any remaining excess is goodwill.

The separate income statements of the two companies prepared for 20X1 are as follows:

Lucy

Desmond

Sales

$400,000

$150,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

90,000

Gross profit

$200,000

$60,000

General expenses

50,000

25,000

Depreciation expense

60,000

15,000

Operating income

$90,000

$20,000

Subsidiary income

18,000

Net income before income tax

$108,000

$20,000

Provision for tax (does not include tax on subsidiary income)

27,000

6,000

Net income

$81,000

$14,000

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated income statement and its related income distribution schedules.

prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in sa 589978

Alternative investment account methods, effect on eliminations. On January 1, 20X1, Peter Company purchased an 80% interest in Saul Company by issuing 10,000 of its common stock shares with a par value of $10 per share and a fair value of $72 per share. The direct acquisition costs were $20,000. At the time of the purchase, Saul had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$80,000

Investments

150,000

Bonds payable

250,000

Land

120,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Building (net)

350,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Equipment (net)

160,000

Retained earnings

250,000

Total assets

$880,000

Total liabilities and equity

$880,000

Appraisals indicate that book values are representative of fair values with the exception of land and buildings. The land has a fair value of $190,000, and the building is appraised at $450,000. The building has an estimated remaining life of 20 years. Any remaining excess is goodwill. The following summary of Saul’s retained earnings applies to 20X1 and 20X2:

Balance, January 1, 20X1

$250,000

Net income for 20X1

60,000

Dividends paid in 20X1

10,000

Balance, December 31, 20X1

$300,000

Net income for 20X2

45,000

Dividends paid in 20X2

10,000

Balance, December 31, 20X2

$335,000

Required

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Saul Company. As a part of the schedule, indicate annual amortization of excess adjustments.

2. For 20X1 and 20X2, prepare the entries that Peter would make concerning its investment in Saul under the simple equity, sophisticated equity, and cost methods. It is suggested that you set up a worksheet with side by side columns for each method so that you can easily compare the entries.

3. For 20X1 and 20X2, prepare the worksheet elimination that would be made on a consolidated worksheet under the simple equity, sophisticated equity, and cost methods. It is suggested that you set up a worksheet with side by side columns for each method so that you can easily compare the entries.

complete a worksheet for consolidated financial statements for 20×2 include columns 589979

Equity method adjustments, consolidated worksheet. On January 1, 20X1, Peres Company purchased 80% of the common stock of Soll Company for $308,000. On this date, Soll had common stock, other paid in capital, and retained earnings of $50,000, $100,000, and $150,000, respectively. Net income and dividends for two years for Soll Company were as follows:

20X1

20X2

Net income

$60,000

$90,000

Dividends

20,000

30,000

On January 1, 20X1, the only tangible assets of Soll that were undervalued were inventory and the building. Inventory, for which FIFO is used, was worth $10,000 more than cost. The inventory was sold in 20X1. The building, which is worth $25,000 more than book value, has a remaining life of 10 years, and straight line depreciation is used. The remaining excess of cost over book value is attributable to goodwill.

Required

1. Using this information or the information in the following trial balances, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Peres Company carries the investment in Soll Company under the simple equity method. In general journal form, record the entries that would be made to apply the equity method in 20X1 and 20X2.

3. Compute the balance that should appear in Investment in Soll Company and in Soll Income on December 31, 20X2 (the second year). Fill in these amounts on Peres Company’s trial balance for 20X2.

4. Complete a worksheet for consolidated financial statements for 20X2. Include columns for eliminations and adjustments, consolidated income, NCI, controlling retained earnings, and balance sheet.

Peres Company

Soll Company

Inventory, December 31

100,000

50,000

Other Current Assets

148,000

180,000

Investment in Soll Company

Note 1

Land

50,000

50,000

Buildings and Equipment

350,000

320,000

Accumulated Depreciation

100,000

60,000

Goodwill

Other Intangibles

20,000

Current Liabilities

120,000

40,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Other Long Term Liabilities

200,000

Common Stock, P Company

200,000

Other Paid In Capital, P Company

100,000

Retained Earnings, P Company

214,000

Common Stock, S Company

50,000

Other Paid In Capital, S Company

100,000

Retained Earnings, S Company

190,000

Net Sales

520,000

450,000

Cost of Goods Sold

300,000

260,000

Operating Expenses

120,000

100,000

Soll Income

Note 1

Dividends Declared, P Company

50,000

Dividends Declared, S Company

30,000

compute the balance that should appear in investment in soll company and in soll inc 589980

Sophisticated equity method adjustments, consolidated worksheet. (This is the same as Problem 3 2, except the sophisticated equity method is used.) On January 1, 20X1, Peres Company purchased 80% of the common stock of Soll Company for $308,000. On this date, Soll had common stock, other paid in capital, and retained earnings of $50,000, $100,000, and $150,000, respectively. Net income and dividends for two years for Soll Company were as follows:

20X1

20X2

Net income

$60,000

$90,000

Dividends

20,000

30,000

On January 1, 20X1, the only tangible assets of Soll that were undervalued were inventory and the building. Inventory, for which FIFO is used, was worth $10,000 more than cost. The inventory was sold in 20X1. The building, which is worth $25,000 more than book value, has a remaining life of 10 years, and straight line depreciation is used. The remaining excess of cost over book value is attributable to goodwill.

Required

1. Using this information or the information in the following trial balances, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Peres Company carries the investment in Soll Company under the sophisticated equity method. In general journal form, record the entries that would be made to apply the equity method in 20X1 and 20X2.

3. Compute the balance that should appear in Investment in Soll Company and in Soll Income on December 31, 20X2 (the second year). Fill in these amounts on Peres Company’s trial balance for 20X2.

4. Complete a worksheet for consolidated financial statements for 20X2. Include columns for eliminations and adjustments, consolidated income, NCI, controlling retained earnings, and balance sheet.

Peres Company

Soll Company

Inventory, December 31

100,000

50,000

Other Current Assets

148,000

180,000

Investment in Soll Company

Note 1

Land

50,000

50,000

Buildings and Equipment

350,000

320,000

Accumulated Depreciation

100,000

60,000

Goodwill

Other Intangibles

20,000

Current Liabilities

120,000

40,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Other Long Term Liabilities

200,000

Common Stock, P Company

200,000

Other Paid In Capital, P Company

100,000

Retained Earnings, P Company

204,000

Common Stock, S Company

50,000

Other Paid In Capital, S Company

100,000

Retained Earnings, S Company

190,000

Net Sales

520,000

450,000

Cost of Goods Sold

300,000

260,000

Operating Expenses

120,000

100,000

Soll Income

Note 1

Dividends Declared, P Company

50,000

Dividends Declared, S Company

30,000

prepare the 20×3 consolidated statements including the income statement retained ear 589981

Cost method, consolidated statements. The trial balances of Chango Company and its subsidiary, Lhasa Inc., are as follows on December 31, 20X3:

Chango

Lhasa

Current Assets

530,000

130,000

Depreciable Fixed Assets

1,805,000

440,000

Accumulated Depreciation

405,000

70,000

Investment in Lhasa Inc

460,000

Liabilities

900,000

225,000

Common Stock ($1 par)

220,000

Common Stock ($5 par)

50,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

1,040,000

15,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X3

230,000

70,000

Revenues

460,000

210,000

Expenses

450,000

170,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

Total

0

0

On January 1, 20X1, Chango Company exchanged 20,000 shares of its common stock, with a fair value of $23 per share, for all the outstanding stock of Lhasa Inc. Any excess of cost over book value was attributed to goodwill. The stockholders’ equity of Lhasa Inc. on the purchase date was as follows:

Common stock ($5 par)

$50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

15,000

Retained earnings

135,000

Total equity

$200,000

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X3 consolidated statements, including the income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet. (A worksheet is not required.)

assume that a 70 percent average room occupancy for the motels in this resort would 590049

There are five competitive motels in a resort area with the following number of rooms and current occupancy rates:

Motel

Rooms

Occupancy (%)

A

74

82

B

45

73

C

58

85

D

48

70

E

52

75

Demand for rooms in the area is broken down into the following sources and growth rates:

Source

Percentage

Growth Rate (%)

Business traveler

10

5

Vacation traveler

80

8

Other travelers

10

1

a. Calculate the current average occupancy of the five motels.

b. Calculate the composite rate of growth in demand.

c. Apply the composite growth rate to the demand figures to obtain projected demand for each of the next four years.

d. Assume that a 70 percent average room occupancy for the motels in this resort would be profitable. Calculate the future supply of rooms that could be supported for each of the next four years.

apply the composite growth rate to the demand figures to obtain projected demand for 590050

Six competitive motor hotels have the following number of rooms and current occupancy rates.

Motor Hotel

Rooms

Occupancy (%)

1

150

80

2

140

90

3

90

70

4

110

80

5

66

75

6

120

75

Demand for rooms in the area where the motor hotels are located is broken down into the following sources and growth rates:

Source

Percentage

Growth Rate (%)

Business traveler

60

6

Vacation traveler

30

5

Other travelers

10

4

a. Calculate the current average occupancy of the six motor hotels.

b. Calculate the composite rate of growth in demand.

c. Apply the composite growth rate to the demand figures to obtain projected demand for each of the next four years.

d. Assume the average room occupancy is 75 percent for the motor hotels in this area and is considered profitable. Assume also that motor hotel 3 is due to be demolished in year 2 to make way for a new highway. Calculate the future supply of rooms that could be supported for each of the next four years.

prepare the chattel mortgage repayment schedule round calculated figures to the near 590052

A new 50 room budget motel is being planned. Total cost will be $1,450,000, of which land will be $150,000, building $900,000, furniture and equipment $300,000, and the balance for preopening interest and other expenses. The building will be financed 70 percent by an 8 percent mortgage for 21 years. The annual payment to amortize (pay back principal and interest) this mortgage will be $63,000. The furniture and equipment will be financed 75 percent by a chattel mortgage at 11 percent, repayable in five equal installments of $61,000 principal and interest. Apart from the mortgage and chattel mortgage amounts, the balance of the total investment required will be from equity.

a. Calculate the amount of the equity investment.

b. Prepare the building mortgage repayment schedule for the first five years. Round calculated figures to the nearest $1,000.

c. Prepare the chattel mortgage repayment schedule. Round calculated figures to the nearest $1,000.

however that if there are any losses they may be carried forward and deducted from e 590054

prepare the pro forma income statements for each of the first five years:

Year

Average Room Rate

Occupancy (%)

1

$30.00

70

2

$30.00

75

3

$33.00

75

4

$35.00

75

5

$35.00

80

Rooms operating costs average 60 percent of total room revenue. Indirect expenses will be $40,000 in year 1 and will increase by $4,000 a year for each of the next four years. The preopening interest and other expenses total $100,000 and will be amortized equally over each of the first five years. Income tax, if any, will be 25 percent of earnings before income tax. Note, however, that if there are any losses, they may be carried forward and deducted from earnings before income tax, before the 25 percent tax rate is applied. (Round all calculated figures to the nearest $1,000.)

which you would eventually need more detailed information that would support the nee 590056

Although Charlie (4C) has been in business for only a short time, he is thinking about opening a second restaurant similar to his current operation; a relatively medium priced operation catering to the local neighborhood’s family and small business trade.

Assume that he has asked you to do some preliminary work on a feasibility study for this second restaurant. Select a specific geographic location in your town with which you are familiar and which you think would be suitable for this new operation. Prepare a two or three page report for Charlie describing this location (include a map if you think it will help), explaining why that location might be suitable, and briefly discussing the economic and demographic factors (about which you would eventually need more detailed information) that would support the need for a restaurant in this location.

evaluate each of these objectives comment about how each of them does or does not sa 590070

Following are performance objectives for three different organizations:

a. A restaurant’s manager: “To establish a position in the market by providing top quality menu items created from the freshest locally grown produce.”

b. Year round recreational resort hotel’s marketing manager: “To establish an image for the resort as an exclusive one providing a luxurious atmosphere and environment.”

c. A hotel’s nightclub manager: “To considerably increase visits to the nightclub by residents of the area living within driving distance.”

Evaluate each of these objectives. Comment about how each of them does, or does not, satisfy the criteria for a good objective. Rewrite each objective in your own words in such a way that it meets the criteria for a well stated objective.

complete a consolidated worksheet for purnell company and its subsidiary soma compan 589927

100% purchase, goodwill, several adjustments, worksheet. Use the preceding information for Purnell’s purchase of Soma common stock. Assume Purnell exchanged 24,000 shares of its own stock for 100% of the common stock of Soma. The stock had a market value of $50 per share and a par value of $1. Purnell had the following trial balance immediately after the purchase:

Purnell Company
Trial Balance
December 31, 20X1

Cash

170,000

Accounts Receivable

300,000

Inventory

410,000

Land

800,000

Investment in Soma

1,200,000

Buildings

2,800,000

Accumulated Depreciation

500,000

Equipment

600,000

Accumulated Depreciation

230,000

Current Liabilities

150,000

Bonds Payable

300,000

Common Stock ($1 par)

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

3,900,000

Retained Earnings

1,100,000

Total

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Soma.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Purnell Company and its subsidiary Soma Company as of December 31, 20X1.

prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for 589930

80% purchase, bargain, several adjustments, worksheet. Use the preceding information for Purnell’s purchase of Soma common stock. Assume Purnell exchanged 10,000 shares of its own stock for 80% of the common stock of Soma. The stock had a market value of $50 per share and a par value of $1. Purnell had the following trial balance immediately after the purchase:

Purnell Company
Trial Balance
December 31, 20X1

Cash

170,000

Accounts Receivable

300,000

Inventory

410,000

Land

800,000

Investment in Soma

500,000

Buildings

2,800,000

Accumulated Depreciation

500,000

Equipment

600,000

Accumulated Depreciation

230,000

Current Liabilities

150,000

Bonds Payable

300,000

Common Stock ($1 par)

86,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

3,214,000

Retained Earnings

1,100,000

Total

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Soma.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Purnell Company and its subsidiary Soma Company as of December 31, 20X1.

prepare the 20×7 consolidated statements including the income statement retained ear 589937

Cost method, 80% interest, worksheet, statements. Bell Corporation purchased all of the outstanding stock of Stockdon Corporation for $220,000 in cash on January 1, 20X7. On the purchase date, Stockdon Corporation had the following condensed balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$60,000

Liabilities

$150,000

Inventory

40,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Land

120,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

50,000

Building (net)

180,000

Retained earnings

100,000

Total assets

$400,000

Total liabilities and equity

$400,000

Any excess of book value over cost was attributable to the building, which is currently overstated on Stockdon’s books. All other assets and liabilities have book values equal to fair values. The building has an estimated 10 year life with no salvage value. The trial balances of the two companies on December 31, 20X7, appear as follows:

Bell

Stockdon

Cash

180,000

143,000

Inventory

60,000

30,000

Land

120,000

120,000

Buildings (net)

600,000

162,000

Investment in Stockdon Corp

220,000

Accounts Payable

405,000

210,000

Common Stock ($3 par)

300,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

180,000

50,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X7

255,000

100,000

Sales

210,000

40,000

Cost of Goods Sold

120,000

35,000

Other Expenses

45,000

10,000

Dividends Declared

5,000

Total

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X7 consolidated worksheet. Include columns for the eliminations and adjustments, the consolidated income statement, the controlling retained earnings, and the consolidated balance sheet.

3. Prepare the 20X7 consolidated statements, including the income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

prepare the 20×2 consolidated statements including the income statement retained ear 589938

Equity method, 80% interest, worksheet, statements. Scully Company prepared the following balance sheet on January 1, 20X1:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$50,000

Liabilities

$140,000

Land

75,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Buildings

350,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

120,000

Accumulated depreciation

Retained earnings (deficit)

25,000

—Buildings

140,000

Total assets

$335,000

Total liabilities and equity

$335,000

On this date, Prescott Company purchased 8,000 shares of Scully Company’s outstanding stock for a total price of $270,000. Also on this date, the buildings were understated by $40,000 and had a 10 year remaining life. Any remaining discrepancy between the price paid and book value was attributed to goodwill. Since the purchase, Prescott Company has used the simple equity method to record the investment and its related income. Prescott Company and Scully Company have prepared the following separate trial balances on December 31, 20X2:

Prescott

Scully

Current Assets

180,000

115,000

Land

150,000

75,000

Buildings

590,000

350,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

265,000

182,000

Investment in Scully Company

294,000

Liabilities

175,000

133,000

Common Stock ($10 par)

200,000

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

120,000

Retained Earnings, January 1, 20X2

503,000

15,000

Sales

360,000

120,000

Cost of Goods Sold

179,000

50,000

Expenses

120,000

45,000

Subsidiary Income

20,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

5,000

Total

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X2 consolidated worksheet. Include columns for the eliminations and adjustments, the consolidated income statement, the NCI, the controlling retained earnings, and the consolidated balance sheet. Prepare supporting income distribution schedules.

3. Prepare the 20X2 consolidated statements including the income statement, retained earnings statement, and the balance sheet.

prepare the 20×1 consolidated statements including the income statement retained ear 589939

Interperiod purchase. Jeter Corporation purchased 80% of the outstanding stock of Summer Company for $275,000 on May 1, 20X1. Summer Company had the following stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($5 par)

$150,000

Retained earnings

50,000

Total equity

$200,000

The fair values of Summer’s assets and liabilities agreed with the book values, except for the equipment and the building. The equipment was undervalued by $10,000 and was thought to have a 5 year life; the building was undervalued by $50,000 and was thought to have a 20 year life. The remaining excess of cost over book value is attributable to goodwill. Jeter Corporation uses the simple equity method to record its investments.

Since the purchase date, both firms have operated separately, and no intercompany transactions have occurred. Summer Company did not close its books on the date of acquisition. Therefore, the income amounts in the trial balance reflect amounts earned during the whole year. Income is earned evenly throughout the year. The separate trial balances of the firms on December 31, 20X1, are as follows:

Cash

296,600

97,000

Land

160,000

90,000

Buildings

225,000

135,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Building

100,000

50,000

Equipment

450,000

150,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

115,000

60,000

Investment in Summer Company

284,600

Liabilities

480,000

150,000

Common Stock ($100 par)

400,000

Common Stock ($5 par)

150,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

40,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X1

251,600

50,000

Sales

460,000

120,000

Cost of Goods Sold

220,000

60,000

Other Expenses

210,000

48,000

Subsidiary Income

9,600

Dividends Declared

10,000

Total

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated worksheet. Include columns for the eliminations and adjustments, the consolidated income statement, the NCI, the controlling retained earnings, and the consolidated balance sheet. Prepare supporting income distribution schedules as well.

3. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated statements, including the income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pcraft corporation and its subsidiary sailair 589941

Pcraft Corporation builds powerboats. On January 1, 20X1, Pcraft acquired Sailair Corporation, a company that manufactures sailboats. Pcraft paid cash in exchange for Sailair common stock. Sailair had the following balance sheet on January 1, 20X1:

Sailair Corporation
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$32,000

Current liabilities

$90,000

Inventory

40,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Land

60,000

Common stock

10,000

Buildings

250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

90,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

112,000

Equipment

100,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Total assets

$402,000

Total liabilities and equity

$402,000

An appraisal indicated that the following assets and liabilities had fair values that differed from their book values:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$38,000

Land

150,000

Buildings (20 year life)

300,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Bonds payable (5 year life)

96,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

100%, equity method worksheet, several adjustments, third year. Refer to the preceding information for Pcraft’s acquisition of Sailair’s common stock. Assume that Pcraft paid $500,000 for 100% of Sailair common stock. Pcraft uses the simple equity method to account for its investment in Sailair. Pcraft and Sailair had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X3:

Pcraft

Sailair

Cash

80,000

60,000

Accounts Receivable

90,000

55,000

Inventory

120,000

86,000

Land

100,000

60,000

Investment in Sailair

595,000

Buildings

800,000

300,000

Accumulated Depreciation

220,000

80,000

Equipment

150,000

100,000

Accumulated Depreciation

90,000

72,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

102,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Common Stock

100,000

10,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

900,000

90,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X3

385,000

182,000

Sales

800,000

350,000

Cost of Goods Sold

450,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

30,000

15,000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

15,000

14,000

Other Expenses

140,000

68,000

Interest Expense

8,000

Subsidiary Income

35,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sailair.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pcraft Corporation and its subsidiary Sailair Corporation as of December 31, 20X3. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pcraft corporation and its subsidiary sailair 589942

Pcraft Corporation builds powerboats. On January 1, 20X1, Pcraft acquired Sailair Corporation, a company that manufactures sailboats. Pcraft paid cash in exchange for Sailair common stock. Sailair had the following balance sheet on January 1, 20X1:

Sailair Corporation
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$32,000

Current liabilities

$90,000

Inventory

40,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Land

60,000

Common stock

10,000

Buildings

250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

90,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

112,000

Equipment

100,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Total assets

$402,000

Total liabilities and equity

$402,000

An appraisal indicated that the following assets and liabilities had fair values that differed from their book values:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$38,000

Land

150,000

Buildings (20 year life)

300,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Bonds payable (5 year life)

96,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

100%, cost method worksheet, several adjustments, third year. Refer to the preceding information for Pcraft’s acquisition of Sailair’s common stock. Assume that Pcraft paid $500,000 for 100% of Sailair common stock. Pcraft uses the cost method to account for its investment in Sailair. Pcraft and Sailair had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X3:

Pcraft

Sailair

Cash

80,000

60,000

Accounts Receivable

90,000

55,000

Inventory

120,000

86,000

Land

100,000

60,000

Investment in Sailair

500,000

Buildings

800,000

300,000

Accumulated Depreciation

220,000

80,000

Equipment

150,000

100,000

Accumulated Depreciation

90,000

72,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

102,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Common Stock

100,000

10,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

900,000

90,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X3

315,000

182,000

Sales

800,000

350,000

Cost of Goods Sold

450,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

30,000

15,000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

15,000

14,000

Other Expenses

140,000

68,000

Interest Expense

8,000

Dividend Income

10,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sailair.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pcraft Corporation and its subsidiary Sailair Corporation as of December 31, 20X3. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pcraft corporation and its subsidiary sailair 589943

Pcraft Corporation builds powerboats. On January 1, 20X1, Pcraft acquired Sailair Corporation, a company that manufactures sailboats. Pcraft paid cash in exchange for Sailair common stock. Sailair had the following balance sheet on January 1, 20X1:

Sailair Corporation
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$32,000

Current liabilities

$90,000

Inventory

40,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Land

60,000

Common stock

10,000

Buildings

250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

90,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

112,000

Equipment

100,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Total assets

$402,000

Total liabilities and equity

$402,000

An appraisal indicated that the following assets and liabilities had fair values that differed from their book values:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$38,000

Land

150,000

Buildings (20 year life)

300,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Bonds payable (5 year life)

96,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

70%, cost method worksheet, several adjustments, first year. Refer to the preceding information for Pcraft’s acquisition of Sailair’s common stock. Assume that Pcraft paid $400,000 for 70% of Sailair common stock. Pcraft uses the cost method to account for its investment in Sailair. Pcraft and Sailair had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X1:

Pcraft

Sailair

Cash

177,000

31,000

Accounts Receivable

80,000

35,000

Inventory

90,000

52,000

Land

100,000

60,000

Investment in Sailair

400,000

Buildings

800,000

250,000

Accumulated Depreciation

200,000

60,000

Equipment

150,000

100,000

Accumulated Depreciation

75,000

44,000

Current Liabilities

50,000

88,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Common Stock

100,000

10,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

900,000

90,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X1

300,000

112,000

Sales

750,000

300,000

Cost of Goods Sold

400,000

180,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

30,000

10,000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

15,000

14,000

Other Expenses

120,000

54,000

Interest Expense

8,000

Dividend Income

7,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sailair.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pcraft Corporation and its subsidiary Sailair Corporation as of December 31, 20X1. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pcraft corporation and its subsidiary sailair 589944

70%, cost method worksheet, several adjustments, third year. Refer to the preceding information for Pcraft’s acquisition of Sailair’s common stock. Assume that Pcraft paid $400,000 for 70% of Sailair common stock. Pcraft uses the cost method to account for its investment in Sailair. Pcraft and Sailair had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X3:

Pcraft

Sailair

Cash

177,000

60,000

Accounts Receivable

90,000

55,000

Inventory

120,000

86,000

Land

100,000

60,000

Investment in Sailair

400,000

Buildings

800,000

300,000

Accumulated Depreciation

220,000

80,000

Equipment

150,000

100,000

Accumulated Depreciation

90,000

72,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

102,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Common Stock

100,000

10,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

900,000

90,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X3

315,000

182,000

Sales

800,000

350,000

Cost of Goods Sold

450,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

30,000

15,000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

15,000

14,000

Other Expenses

140,000

68,000

Interest Expense

8,000

Dividend Income

7,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sailair.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pcraft Corporation and its subsidiary Sailair Corporation as of December 31, 20X3. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pcraft corporation and its subsidiary sailair 589945

100%, sophisticated equity method, several excesses, third year. Refer to the preceding information for Pcraft’s acquisition of Sailair’s common stock. Assume that Pcraft paid $500,000 for 100% of Sailair common stock. Pcraft uses the sophisticated equity method to account for its investment in Sailair. Pcraft and Sailair had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X3:

Pcraft

Sailair

Cash

80,000

60,000

Accounts Receivable

90,000

55,000

Inventory

120,000

86,000

Land

100,000

60,000

Investment in Sailair

561,600

Buildings

800,000

300,000

Accumulated Depreciation

220,000

80,000

Equipment

150,000

100,000

Accumulated Depreciation

90,000

72,000

Current Liabilities

60,000

102,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Common Stock

100,000

10,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

900,000

90,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X3

363,400

182,000

Sales

800,000

350,000

Cost of Goods Sold

450,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

30,000

15,000

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

15,000

14,000

Other Expenses

140,000

68,000

Interest Expense

8,000

Subsidiary Income

23,200

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sailair.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pcraft Corporation and its subsidiary Sailair Corporation as of December 31, 20X3. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for fast cool company and its subsidiary hd air co 589946

Fast Cool Company and HD Air Company are both manufacturers of air conditioning equipment. On January 1, 20X1, Fast Cool acquired the common stock of HD Air by exchanging its own $1 par, $20 fair value common stock. On the date of acquisition, HD Air had the following balance sheet:

HD Air Company
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$40,000

Current liabilities

$30,000

Inventory

60,000

Mortgage payable

200,000

Land

50,000

Common stock

100,000

Buildings

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

180,000

Equipment

150,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Patent (net)

40,000

Goodwill

50,000

Total assets

$710,000

Total liabilities and equity

$710,000

Fast Cool requested that an appraisal be done to determine whether the book value of HD Air’s net assets reflected their fair values. The appraiser determined that several intangible assets existed, although they were unrecorded. If the intangible assets did not have an observable market, the appraiser estimated their value. The following are the fair values and estimates determined by the appraiser:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$65,000

Land

100,000

Buildings (20 year life)

500,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Patent (5 year life)

50,000

Mortgage payable (5 year life)

205,000

Production backlog (2 year life)

10,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

100%, complicated excess, first year. Refer to the preceding information for Fast Cool’s acquisition of HD Air’s common stock. Assume Fast Cool issued 40,000 shares of its $20 fair value common stock for 100% of HD Air’s common stock. Fast Cool uses the simple equity method to account for its investment in HD Air. Fast Cool and HD Air had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X1:

Fast Cool

HD Air

Cash

147,000

37,000

Accounts Receivable

70,000

100,000

Inventory

150,000

60,000

Land

60,000

50,000

Investment in HD Air

837,500

Buildings

1,200,000

400,000

Accumulated Depreciation

176,000

67,500

Equipment

140,000

150,000

Accumulated Depreciation

68,000

54,000

Patent (net)

32,000

Goodwill

50,000

Current Liabilities

80,000

40,000

Mortgage Payable

200,000

Common Stock

100,000

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

1,500,000

200,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X1

400,000

180,000

Sales

700,000

400,000

Cost of Goods Sold

380,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

10,000

17,500

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

7,000

24,000

Other Expenses

50,000

85,000

Interest Expense

16,000

Subsidiary Income

47,500

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in HD Air.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Fast Cool Company and its subsidiary HD Air Company as of December 31, 20X1. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for fast cool company and its subsidiary hd air co 589947

Fast Cool Company and HD Air Company are both manufacturers of air conditioning equipment. On January 1, 20X1, Fast Cool acquired the common stock of HD Air by exchanging its own $1 par, $20 fair value common stock. On the date of acquisition, HD Air had the following balance sheet:

HD Air Company
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$40,000

Current liabilities

$30,000

Inventory

60,000

Mortgage payable

200,000

Land

50,000

Common stock

100,000

Buildings

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

180,000

Equipment

150,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Patent (net)

40,000

Goodwill

50,000

Total assets

$710,000

Total liabilities and equity

$710,000

Fast Cool requested that an appraisal be done to determine whether the book value of HD Air’s net assets reflected their fair values. The appraiser determined that several intangible assets existed, although they were unrecorded. If the intangible assets did not have an observable market, the appraiser estimated their value. The following are the fair values and estimates determined by the appraiser:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$65,000

Land

100,000

Buildings (20 year life)

500,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Patent (5 year life)

50,000

Mortgage payable (5 year life)

205,000

Production backlog (2 year life)

10,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

100%, complicated excess, equity, second year. Refer to the preceding information for Fast Cool’s acquisition of HD Air’s common stock. Assume Fast Cool issued 40,000 shares of its $20 fair value common stock for 100% of HD Air’s common stock. Fast Cool uses the simple equity method to account for its investment in HD Air. Fast Cool and HD Air had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X2:

Fast Cool

HD Air

Cash

396,000

99,000

Accounts Receivable

200,000

120,000

Inventory

120,000

95,000

Land

60,000

50,000

Investment in HD Air

895,000

Buildings

1,200,000

400,000

Accumulated Depreciation

200,000

85,000

Equipment

140,000

150,000

Accumulated Depreciation

80,000

78,000

Patent (net)

24,000

Goodwill

50,000

Current Liabilities

150,000

50,000

Mortgage Payable

200,000

Common Stock

100,000

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

1,500,000

200,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X2

680,500

217,500

Sales

700,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

380,000

260,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

10,000

17,500

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

7,000

24,000

Other Expenses

50,000

115,000

Interest Expense

16,000

Subsidiary Income

67,500

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in HD Air.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Fast Cool Company and its subsidiary HD Air Company as of December 31, 20X2. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for fast cool company and its subsidiary hd air co 589949

Fast Cool Company and HD Air Company are both manufacturers of air conditioning equipment. On January 1, 20X1, Fast Cool acquired the common stock of HD Air by exchanging its own $1 par, $20 fair value common stock. On the date of acquisition, HD Air had the following balance sheet:

HD Air Company
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$40,000

Current liabilities

$30,000

Inventory

60,000

Mortgage payable

200,000

Land

50,000

Common stock

100,000

Buildings

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

180,000

Equipment

150,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Patent (net)

40,000

Goodwill

50,000

Total assets

$710,000

Total liabilities and equity

$710,000

Fast Cool requested that an appraisal be done to determine whether the book value of HD Air’s net assets reflected their fair values. The appraiser determined that several intangible assets existed, although they were unrecorded. If the intangible assets did not have an observable market, the appraiser estimated their value. The following are the fair values and estimates determined by the appraiser:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$65,000

Land

100,000

Buildings (20 year life)

500,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Patent (5 year life)

50,000

Mortgage payable (5 year life)

205,000

Production backlog (2 year life)

10,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

80%, first year, complicated excess. Refer to the preceding information for Fast Cool’s acquisition of HD Air’s common stock. Assume Fast Cool issued 35,000 shares of its $20 fair value common stock for 80% of HD Air’s common stock. Fast Cool uses the simple equity method to account for its investment in HD Air. Fast Cool and HD Air had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X1:

Fast Cool

HD Air

Cash

145,000

37,000

Accounts Receivable

70,000

100,000

Inventory

150,000

60,000

Land

60,000

50,000

Investment in HD Air

730,000

Buildings

1,200,000

400,000

Accumulated Depreciation

176,000

67,500

Equipment

140,000

150,000

Accumulated Depreciation

68,000

54,000

Patent (net)

32,000

Goodwill

50,000

Current Liabilities

80,000

40,000

Mortgage Payable

200,000

Common Stock

95,000

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

1,405,000)

200,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X1

400,000

180,000

Sales

700,000

400,000

Cost of Goods Sold

380,000

210,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

10,000

17,500

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

7,000

24,000

Other Expenses

50,000

85,000

Interest Expense

16,000

Subsidiary Income

38,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in HD Air.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Fast Cool Company and its subsidiary HD Air Company as of December 31, 20X1. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

complete a consolidated worksheet for fast cool company and its subsidiary hd air co 589950

Fast Cool Company and HD Air Company are both manufacturers of air conditioning equipment. On January 1, 20X1, Fast Cool acquired the common stock of HD Air by exchanging its own $1 par, $20 fair value common stock. On the date of acquisition, HD Air had the following balance sheet:

HD Air Company
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$40,000

Current liabilities

$30,000

Inventory

60,000

Mortgage payable

200,000

Land

50,000

Common stock

100,000

Buildings

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

50,000

Retained earnings

180,000

Equipment

150,000

Accumulated depreciation

30,000

Patent (net)

40,000

Goodwill

50,000

Total assets

$710,000

Total liabilities and equity

$710,000

Fast Cool requested that an appraisal be done to determine whether the book value of HD Air’s net assets reflected their fair values. The appraiser determined that several intangible assets existed, although they were unrecorded. If the intangible assets did not have an observable market, the appraiser estimated their value. The following are the fair values and estimates determined by the appraiser:

Inventory (sold during 20X1)

$65,000

Land

100,000

Buildings (20 year life)

500,000

Equipment (5 year life)

100,000

Patent (5 year life)

50,000

Mortgage payable (5 year life)

205,000

Production backlog (2 year life)

10,000

Any remaining excess is attributed to goodwill.

80%, second year, complicated excess. Refer to the preceding information for Fast Cool’s acquisition of HD Air’s common stock. Assume Fast Cool issued 35,000 shares of its $20 fair value common stock for 80% of HD Air’s common stock. Fast Cool uses the simple equity method to account for its investment in HD Air. Fast Cool and HD Air had the following trial balances on December 31, 20X2:

Fast Cool

HD Air

Cash

392,000

99,000

Accounts Receivable

200,000

120,000

Inventory

120,000

95,000

Land

60,000

50,000

Investment in HD Air

776,000

Buildings

1,200,000

400,000

Accumulated Depreciation

200,000

85,000

Equipment

140,000

150,000

Accumulated Depreciation

80,000

78,000

Patent (net)

24,000

Goodwill

50,000

Current Liabilities

150,000

50,000

Mortgage Payable

200,000

Common Stock

95,000

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

1,405,000

200,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X2

671,000

217,500

Sales

700,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

380,000

260,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

10,000

17,500

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

7,000

24,000

Other Expenses

50,000

115,000

Interest Expense

16,000

Subsidiary Income

54,000

Dividends Declared

20,000

10,000

Totals

0

0

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in HD Air.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Fast Cool Company and its subsidiary HD Air Company as of December 31, 20X2. Prepare supporting amortization and income distribution schedules.

using this information or the information in the following statements prepare a dete 589951

Equity method adjustments, vertical consolidated worksheet. (Same as Problem 3 2 except vertical format worksheet is used.) On January 1, 20X1, Peres Company purchased 80% of the common stock of Soll Company for $308,000. On this date, Soll had common stock, other paid in capital, and retained earnings of $50,000, $100,000, and $150,000, respectively. Net income and dividends for two years for Soll Company were as follows:

20X1

20X2

Net income

$60,000

$90,000

Dividends

20,000

30,000

On January 1, 20X1, the only tangible assets of Soll that were undervalued were inventory and the building. Inventory, for which FIFO is used, was worth $10,000 more than cost. The inventory was sold in 20X1. The building, which is worth $25,000 more than book value, has a remaining life of 10 years, and straight line depreciation is used. The remaining excess of cost over book value is attributable to goodwill.

Required

1. Using this information or the information in the following statements, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Peres Company carries the Investment in Soll Company under the simple equity method. In general journal form, record the entries that would be made to apply the equity method in 20X1 and 20X2.

3. Complete the vertical worksheet for consolidated financial statements for 20X2.

Statement—Accounts

Peres Company

Soll Company

Income Statement:

Net Sales

520,000

450,000

Cost of Goods Sold

300,000

260,000

Operating Expenses

120,000

100,000

Subsidiary Income

72,000

Noncontrolling Interest in Income

Net Income

172,000

90,000

Retained Earnings Statement:

Balance, Jan 1, 20X2, P Company

214,000

Balance, Jan 1, 20X2, S Company

190,000

Net Income (from above)

172,000

90,000

Dividends Declared, P Company

50,000

Dividends Declared, S Company

30,000

Balance, December 31, 20X2

336,000

250,000

Consolidated Balance Sheet:

Inventory, December 31

100,000

50,000

Other Current Assets

148,000

180,000

Investment in Soll Company

Note 1

Land

50,000

50,000

Building and Equipment

350,000

320,000

Accumulated Depreciation

100,000

60,000

Goodwill

Other Intangibles

20,000

Current Liabilities

120,000

40,000

Bonds Payable

100,000

Other Long Term Liabilities

200,000

Common Stock, P Company

200,000

Other Paid In Capital, P Company

100,000

Common Stock, S Company

50,000

Other Paid In Capital, S Company

100,000

Retained Earnings, Dec 31, 20X2 (from above)

336,000

250,000

Totals

0

0

using the vertical format prepare a consolidated worksheet for december 31 20×7 prec 589952

Equity method, later period, vertical worksheet, several excess adjustments. Booker Enterprises purchased an 80% interest in Kobe International for $850,000 on January 1, 20X5. Booker Enterprises also paid $4,000 in direct acquisition costs. On the purchase date, Kobe International had the following stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par)

$150,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Retained earnings

400,000

$750,000

Also on the purchase date, it was determined that Kobe International’s assets were understated as follows:

Equipment, 10 year remaining life

$80,000

Land

20,000

Building, 20 year remaining life

60,000

The remaining excess of cost over book value was attributed to goodwill. The following summarized statements of Booker Enterprises and Kobe International are for the year ended December 31, 20X7:

Booker Enterprises

Kobe International

Income Statements:

Sales

650,000

320,000

Cost of Goods Sold

260,000

240,000

Operating Expenses

170,000

70,000

Depreciation Expense

65,000

30,000

Subsidiary (Income)/Loss

16,000

Net (Income)/Loss

139,000

20,000

Retained Earnings:

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X7, Booker

625,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X7, Kobe

460,000

Net (Income)/Loss

139,000

20,000

Dividends Declared

10,000

Retained Earnings, Dec 31, 20X7

764,000

430,000

Balance Sheets:

Cash

334,000

170,000

Inventory

135,000

400,000

Land

145,000

150,000

Buildings

900,000

500,000

Accum Depreciation—Building

345,000

360,000

Equipment

350,000

250,000

Accum Depreciation—Equipment

135,000

90,000

Investment in Kobe International

828,000

Liabilities

248,000

40,000

Balance Sheets (cont’d):

Bonds Payable

200,000

Common Stock, Booker

1,200,000

Common Stock, Kobe

150,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

200,000

Retained Earnings, Dec 31, 20X7

764,000

430,000

Balance

0

0

Required

Using the vertical format, prepare a consolidated worksheet for December 31, 20X7. Precede the worksheet with a determination and distribution of excess schedule. Include income distribution schedules to allocate the consolidated net income to the noncontrolling and controlling interests.

Suggestion: Remember that all adjustments to retained earnings are to beginning retained earnings, and it is the beginning balance of the subsidiary retained earnings account which is subject to elimination. Carefully follow the “carrydown” procedure to calculate the ending retained earnings balances.

record the investment and prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedul 589954

D&D only, nontaxable exchange, tax loss carryover. On December 31, 20X5, Bryant Company exchanged 10,000 of its $10 par value shares for a 90% interest in Joshua Company. The purchase was recorded at the $80 per share fair value of Bryant shares. Joshua Company had the following balance sheet on the date of the purchase:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$100,000

Current liabilities

$130,000

Accounts receivable

200,000

Deferred rental income

120,000

Inventory

150,000

Bonds payable

250,000

Investment in marketable securities

150,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Depreciable fixed assets

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Retained earnings

250,000

Total assets

$1,000,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,000,000

It was determined that the following fair values differed from book values for the assets of Joshua Company:

Inventory

$200,000

Depreciable fixed assets (net)

500,000

Investment in marketable securities

170,000

The purchase is a tax free exchange to the seller, which means Bryant Company will use the book value of Joshua’s assets for tax purposes. Joshua Company has $200,000 of tax loss carryovers. Bryant will be able to utilize $40,000 of the losses to offset taxes to be paid in 20X6. The balance of the tax loss carryover will not be used within a year but is considered fully realizable in the future. The tax rate for both firms is 30%.

Required

Record the investment and prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule. Suggestion: Asset adjustments should be accompanied by the appropriate deferred tax liability.

prepare a consolidated worksheet and a consolidated balance sheet as of december 31 589955

Worksheet for nontaxable exchange with tax loss carryover. The balance sheets of Tip Company and Kim Company as of December 31, 20X6, are as follows:

Tip

Kim

Cash

$1,200,000

$50,000

Accounts receivable

2,400,000

300,000

Inventory

11,200,000

1,500,000

Prepayments

422,000

47,000

Depreciable fixed assets

18,978,000

2,100,000

Investment in Kim Company

2,400,000

Total assets

$36,600,000

$3,997,000

Payables

$7,200,000

$1,750,000

Accruals

1,615,000

400,000

Common stock ($100 par)

10,000,000

1,000,000

Retained earnings

17,785,000

847,000

Total liabilities and equity

$36,600,000

$3,997,000

An appraisal on December 31, 20X6, which was considered carefully and approved by the boards of directors of both companies, placed a total replacement value, less depreciation, of $3,000,000 on Kim’s depreciable fixed assets.

Tip Company offered to purchase all the assets of Kim Company, subject to its liabilities, as of December 31, 20X6, for $3,000,000. However, 20% of the stockholders of Kim Company objected to the price because it did not include any consideration for goodwill, which they believed to be worth at least $500,000. A counterproposal was made, and a final agreement was reached. In exchange for its own shares, Tip acquired 80% of the common stock of Kim at the agreedupon fair value of $300 per share. The purchase is structured as a tax free exchange to the seller; thus, Tip will use the book value of the assets for future tax purposes. The tax rate for both companies is 30%.

Prepare a consolidated worksheet and a consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 20X6. Include a determination and distribution schedule.

Required

Prepare a consolidated worksheet and a consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 20X6. Include a determination and distribution schedule.

prepare the 20×1 consolidated worksheet include columns for the eliminations and adj 589956

Worksheet for nontaxable exchange with tax loss carryover. The trial balances of Campton Corporation and Deer Corporation as of December 31, 20X1, are as follows:

Campton Corporation

Deer Corporation

Current Assets

167,000

80,000

Land

400,000

100,000

Building and Equipment (net)

900,000

240,000

Investment in Deer Corporation

625,600

Current Tax Liability

4,200

6,000

Other Current Liabilities

130,000

100,000

Common Stock ($5 par)

500,000

Common Stock ($50 par)

200,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

750,000

Retained Earnings, Jan 1, 20X1

650,000

100,000

Sales

309,000

150,000

Subsidiary Income

12,600

Cost of Goods Sold

170,000

80,000

Expenses

89,000

50,000

Provision for Tax

4,200*

6,000

Total

0

0

*$15,000 tax liability ($50,000 income X 30%) $10,800 tax loss carryover ($40,000 X 90% X 30%) On January 1, 20X1, Campton purchased 90% of the outstanding stock of Deer Corporation for $600,000, plus direct acquisition costs of $13,000. The acquisition was a tax free exchange for the seller. At the purchase date, Deer’s equipment was undervalued by $100,000 and had a remaining life of 10 years. All other assets had book values that approximated their fair values. Deer Corporation had a tax loss carryover of $200,000, of which $40,000 was utilizable in 20X1 and the balance in future periods. The tax loss carryover is expected to be fully utilized. Any remaining excess is considered to be goodwill. A tax rate of 30% applies to both companies.

Required

1. Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment.

2. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated worksheet. Include columns for the eliminations and adjustments, the consolidated income statement, the NCI, the controlling retained earnings, and the consolidated balance sheet. Prepare supporting income distribution schedules as well.

3. Prepare the 20X1 consolidated statements, including the income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

Suggestion: A deferred tax liability results from the increase in the fair value of the equipment. As the added depreciation is recognized on the equipment, the deferred tax liability becomes payable. Note that income distribution schedules record net of tax income. Therefore, be sure that any adjustments to the income distribution schedules consider tax where appropriate.

prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in hi 589964

Compare alternative methods for recording income. Cooke Company purchased an 80% interest in Hill Company common stock for $360,000 cash on January 1, 20X1. At that time, Hill Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$60,000

Accounts payable

$60,000

Land

100,000

Common stock ($5 par)

50,000

Equipment

350,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

100,000

Accumulated depreciation

150,000

Retained earnings

150,000

Total assets

$360,000

Total liabilities and equity

$360,000

Appraisals indicated that accounts are fairly stated except for the equipment which has a fair value of $225,000 and a remaining life of five years. Any remaining excess is goodwill. Hill Company experienced the following changes in retained earnings during 20X1 and 20X2:

Retained earnings, January 1, 20X1

$120,000

Net income, 20X1

$60,000

Dividends paid in 20X1

10,000

50,000

Balance, December 31, 20X1

170,000

Net income, 20X2

$40,000

Dividends paid in 20X2

10,000

30,000

Balance, December 31, 20X2

$200,000

Prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Hill Company. Prepare journal entries that Cooke Company would make on its books to record income earned and/or dividends received on its investment in Hill Company during 20X1 and 20X2 under the following methods: simple equity, sophisticated equity, and cost.

using the values derived in requirement 1 record the purchase on the caswell books 589897

Estimate goodwill, record purchase. Caswell Company is contemplating the purchase of LaBelle Company as of January 1, 20X6. LaBelle Company has provided the following current balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash and receivables

$150,000

Current liabilities

$120,000

Inventory

180,000

9% bonds payable

300,000

Land

50,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Building

600,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Accumulated depreciation

150,000

Retained earnings

150,000

Goodwill

40,000

Total assets

$870,000

Total liabilities and equity

$870,000

The following information exists relative to balance sheet accounts:

a. The inventory has a fair value of $200,000.

b. The land is appraised at $100,000 and the building at $600,000.

c. The 9% bonds payable have five years to maturity and pay annual interest each December 31. The current interest rate for similar bonds is 8% per year.

d. It is likely that there will be a payment for goodwill based on projected income in excess of the industry average, which is 10% on total assets. Caswell will project the average past five years’ operating income and will pay for excess income based on an assumption of a 5 year life and a risk rate of return of 16%. The past five years’ net incomes for LaBelle are as follows:

20X1

$120,000

20X2

140,000

20X3

150,000

20X4

200,000

20X5

180,000

Required

1. Provide an estimate of fair value for the bonds and for goodwill.

2. Using the values derived in Requirement 1, record the purchase on the Caswell books.

record the acquisition on the books of grant corporation using pooling of interests 589898

Recording a pooling with acquisition costs. Grant Corporation has been looking to expand its operations and has decided to acquire the assets of Turner Company and Murray Company. Grant will issue 25,000 shares of its $10 par common stock to acquire the net assets of Turner Company and will issue 12,000 shares to acquire the net assets of Murray Company.

Turner and Murray have the following balance sheets as of December 31, 20X1:

Assets

Turner

Murray

Accounts receivable

$200,000

$80,000

Inventory

150,000

85,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land

150,000

50,000

Building

500,000

300,000

Accumulated depreciation

150,000

110,000

Total assets

$850,000

$405,000

Liabilities and Equity

Turner

Murray

Current liabilities

$160,000

$55,000

Bonds payable

100,000

100,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained earnings

290,000

150,000

Total liabilities and equity

$850,000

$405,000

The following fair values are agreed upon by the two firms:

Assets

Turner

Murray

Inventory

$200,000

$100,000

Bonds payable

80,000

95,000

Land

200,000

60,000

Buildings

400,000

350,000

Grant’s stock is currently trading at $40 per share. Grant will incur $5,000 of direct acquisition costs in Turner and $4,000 of direct acquisition costs in Murray. Grant also incurred $13,000 of indirect acquisition costs and $15,000 of registration and issuance costs. Grant’s stockholders’ equity is as follows:

Common stock

$1,200,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

800,000

Retained earnings

750,000

Required

Record the acquisition on the books of Grant Corporation, using pooling of interests accounting principles.

assume instead that new company has 50 000 shares of 16 par value common stock outst 589899

Equity transfer procedures with alternative facts. New Company wishes to obtain total control over one of its suppliers, Thompson Corporation. New Company is offering to exchange 120,000 shares of its common stock on a 1 to 1 basis for Thompson’s common stock.

Thompson Corporation has the following balance sheet on December 31, 20X1:

Thompson Corporation
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$275,000

Accounts payable

$275,000

Inventory

400,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Property, plant, and equipment:

Common stock ($5 par, 120,000 shares outstanding)

$600,000

Land

$125,000

Paid in capital in exess of par

200,000

Building

950,000

Retained earnings

494,500

1,294,500

Accumulated depreciation

180,500

894,500

Total assets

$1,569,500

Total liabilities and equity

$1,569,500

Thompson Corporation has been depreciating its building using the double declining balance method. New Company intends to use the straight line method, which it uses for its own assets. Had the straight line method been used by Thompson Corporation, the depreciation charges would have been $90,000.

The transaction meets all of the pooling criteria. The stockholders’ equity of New Company on January 1, 20X1, is as follows:

Common stock ($2 par value, 400,000 shares outstanding)

$800,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

100,000

Retained earnings

700,000

Required

Support all work with equity transfer diagrams. (Ignore tax effects.)

1. Record the pooling of interests on the books of New Company.

2. Assume, instead, that New Company has 100,000 shares of $8 par value common stock outstanding. Record the pooling of interests on the books of New Company if it issues 100,000 new shares.

3. Assume, instead, that New Company has 50,000 shares of $16 par value common stock outstanding. Record the pooling of interests on the books of New Company if it then issues 60,000 shares to acquire Thompson. All other equity items remain unchanged.

what adjustments to recorded values of sleep company rsquo s accounts will be made i 589907

Pillow Company is purchasing a 100% interest in the common stock of Sleep Company. Sleep’s balance sheet amounts at book and fair value are as follows:

Account

Book Value

Fair Value

Current assets

$200,000

$250,000

Fixed assets

350,000

800,000

Liabilities

200,000

200,000

What adjustments to recorded values of Sleep Company’s accounts will be made in the consolidation process (including the creation of new accounts), if the price paid for the 100% is:

a. $1,000,000.

b. $500,000.

c. $30,000.

what adjustments to recorded values of sleep company rsquo s accounts will be made i 589908

Pillow Company is purchasing an 80% interest in the common stock of Sleep Company. Sleep’s balance sheet amounts at book and fair value are as follows:

Account

Book Value

Fair Value

Current assets

$200,000

$250,000

Fixed assets

350,000

800,000

Liabilities

200,000

200,000

What adjustments to recorded values of Sleep Company’s accounts will be made in the consolidation process (including the creation of new accounts), if the price paid for the 100% is:

a. $800,000.

b. $600,000.

c. $30,000.

what will be the amount of the noncontrolling interest in the consolidated balance s 589909

Pillow Company is purchasing an 80% interest in the common stock of Sleep Company. Sleep’s balance sheet amounts at book and fair value are as follows:

Account

Book Value

Fair Value

Current assets

$200,000

$250,000

Fixed assets

350,000

800,000

Liabilities

200,000

200,000

What will be the amount of the noncontrolling interest in the consolidated balance sheet, and how will it be displayed in the consolidated balance sheet?

prepare a pro forma income statement for solara corporation that compares income und 589910

Investment recording methods. Solara Corporation is considering investing in Focus Corporation, but is unsure about what level of ownership should be undertaken. Solara and Focus have the following reported incomes:

Solara

Focus

Sales

$640,000

$370,000

Cost of goods sold

300,000

230,000

Gross profit

$340,000

$140,000

Selling and administrative expenses

120,000

75,000

Net income

$220,000

$65,000

Focus paid $15,000 in cash dividends to its investors. Prepare a pro forma income statement for Solara Corporation that compares income under 10%, 20%, and 70% ownership levels.

assume that 100 of the outstanding stock of plastic company is purchased from the fo 589911

Asset compared to stock purchase. Glass Company is thinking about acquiring Plastic Company. Glass Company is considering two methods of accomplishing control and is wondering how the accounting treatment will differ under each method. Glass Company has estimated that the fair values of Plastic’s net assets are equal to their book values, except for the equipment which is understated by $20,000. The following balance sheets have been prepared on the date of acquisition:

Assets

Glass

Plastic

Cash

$520,000

$40,000

Accounts receivable

50,000

70,000

Inventory

50,000

100,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

250,000

250,000

Total assets

$870,000

$460,000

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

$140,000

$80,000

Bonds payable

250,000

100,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock, ($100 par)

200,000

150,000

Retained earnings

280,000

130,000

Total liabilities and equity

$870,000

$460,000

1. Assume Glass Company purchased the net assets directly from Plastic Company for $530,000.

a. Prepare the entry that Glass Company would make to record the purchase.

b. Prepare the balance sheet for Glass Company immediately following the purchase.

2. Assume that 100% of the outstanding stock of Plastic Company is purchased from the former stockholders for a total of $530,000.

a. Prepare the entry that Glass Company would make to record the purchase.

b. State how the investment would appear on Glass’s unconsolidated balance sheet prepared immediately after the purchase.

c. Indicate how the consolidated balance sheet would appear.

below what price would fixed assets be recorded at less than full fair value 589912

Simple price zone analysis. Flower Company is considering the cash purchase of 100% of the outstanding stock of Vase Company. The terms are not set, and alternative prices are being considered for negotiation. The balance sheet of Vase Company shows the following values:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash equivalents

$60,000

Current liabilities

$60,000

Inventory

120,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Land

50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Building (net)

200,000

Retained earnings

120,000

Total assets

$430,000

Total liabilities and equity

$430,000

Appraisals reveal that the inventory has a fair value of $160,000 and that the land and building have fair values of $100,000 and $300,000, respectively. The questions to be answered concern the price to be paid for Vase’s common stock:

1. Above what price would goodwill be recorded?

2. Below what price would fixed assets be recorded at less than full fair value?

3. Below what price would an extraordinary gain be recorded?

prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for 589913

Recording purchase with goodwill. Wood’n Wares Inc. purchased all the outstanding stock of Pine Inc. for $950,000. Wood’n Wares also paid $10,000 in direct acquisition costs and $3,000 for indirect acquisition costs. Just before the investment, the two companies had the following balance sheets:

Assets

Wood’n Wares Inc.

Pine Inc.

Accounts receivable

$900,000

$500,000

Inventory

600,000

200,000

Depreciable fixed assets (net)

1,500,000

600,000

Total assets

$3,000,000

$1,300,000

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

$950,000

$400,000

Bonds payable

500,000

200,000

Common stock ($10 par)

400,000

300,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

500,000

380,000

Retained earnings

650,000

20,000

Total liabilities and equity

$3,000,000

$1,300,000

Appraisals for the assets of Pine Inc. indicate that fair values differ from recorded book values for the inventory and for the property, plant, and equipment which have fair values of $250,000 and $700,000, respectively.

1. Prepare the entry to record the purchase of the Pine Inc. common stock including all acquisition costs.

2. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Pine Inc.

3. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet.

prepare the zone analysis the determination and distribution of excess schedule and 589914

Purchase at alternative prices. Libra Company is purchasing 100% of the outstanding stock of Gemini Company, which has the following balance sheet on the date of acquisition:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$300,000

Current liabilities

$250,000

Inventory

200,000

Bonds payable

200,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

500,000

Common stock ($5 par)

200,000

Computer software

125,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

300,000

Retained earnings

175,000

Total assets

$1,125,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,125,000

Appraisals indicate that the following fair values should be acknowledged:

Inventory

$215,000

Property, plant, and equipment

700,000

Bonds payable

210,000

Computer software

130,000

1. Above what price would goodwill be recorded?

2. Below what price would an extraordinary gain be recorded?

Prepare the zone analysis, the determination and distribution of excess schedule and the worksheet elimination entries that would be made if:

3. The price paid for the 100% interest was $1,000,000.

4. The price paid for the 100% interest was $810,000.

prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepa 589915

Bargain purchase, allocation. Lancaster Company is purchasing 100% of the outstanding common stock of Villard Company for $600,000 plus $20,000 of direct acquisition costs. The following balance sheet was prepared for Villard on the date of the purchase:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Inventory

$50,000

Current liabilities

$150,000

Mineral rights

250,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Equipment (net)

150,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

300,000

Goodwill

50,000

Retained earnings

50,000

Total assets

$500,000

Total liabilities and equity

$500,000

Appraisals are as follows for the assets of Villard Company:

Inventory

$10,000

Mineral rights

700,000

Equipment

100,000

Based on the preceding facts,

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepared on the date of purchase.

prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepa 589916

80% purchase, goodwill. Quincy Company purchased 80% of the common stock of Cooker Company for $700,000 plus direct acquisition costs of $30,000. At the time of the purchase, Cooker Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash equivalents

$120,000

Current liabilities

$200,000

Inventory

200,000

Bonds payable

400,000

Land

100,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Building (net)

450,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Equipment (net)

230,000

Retained earnings

250,000

Total assets

$1,100,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,100,000

Fair values differ from book values for all assets other than cash equivalents. The fair values are as follows:

Inventory

$300,000

Land

200,000

Building

600,000

Equipment

200,000

Based on the preceding facts,

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepared on the date of purchase.

prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepa 589917

80% purchase, alternative prices. Venus Company purchased 8,000 shares of Saturn Company for $82 per share. Just prior to the purchase, Saturn Company had the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$20,000

Current liabilities

$250,000

Inventory

280,000

Common stock ($5 par)

50,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

400,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

130,000

Goodwill

100,000

Retained earnings

370,000

Total assets

$800,000

Total liabilities and equity

$800,000

Venus Company believes that the inventory has a fair value of $400,000 and that the property, plant, and equipment is worth $500,000. Business consultants have suggested that the goodwill is worth no more than $50,000. Based on these facts,

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

2. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepared on the date of acquisition.

3. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepared on the date of acquisition assuming Venus pays $64 per share.

prepare the entries that would be made on the consolidated worksheet to eliminate th 589918

Push down accounting. On January 1, 20X7, Knight Corporation purchased all the outstanding shares of Craig Company for $950,000. It has been decided that Craig Company will use push down accounting principles to account for this transaction. The current balance sheet is stated at historical cost. The following balance sheet was prepared for Craig Company on January 1, 20X7:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets:

Current liabilities

$90,000

Cash

$80,000

Long term liabilities:

Accounts receivable

260,000

Bonds payable

$300,000

Prepaid expenses

20,000

$360,000

Deferred taxes

50,000

350,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Stockholders’ equity:

Land

$200,000

Common stock ($10 par)

$300,000

Building (net)

600,000

800,000

Retained earnings

420,000

720,000

Total assets

$1,160,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,160,000

Knight Corporation received the following appraisals for Craig Company’s assets and liabilities:

Accounts receivable

$280,000

Land

230,000

Building (net)

700,000

Bonds payable

280,000

Deferred tax liability

40,000

1. Record the investment.

2. Record the adjustments on the books of Craig Company.

3. Prepare the entries that would be made on the consolidated worksheet to eliminate the investment.

prepare a consolidated balance sheet for july 1 20×6 immediately subsequent to the p 589919

100% purchase, goodwill, consolidated balance sheet. On July 1, 20X6, Rose Company exchanged 18,000 of its $35 fair value ($10 par value) shares for all the outstanding shares of Daisy Company. Rose paid direct acquisition costs of $20,000 and $5,000 in stock issuance costs. The two companies had the following balance sheets on July 1, 20X6:

Assets

Rose

Daisy

Other current assets

$50,000

$70,000

Inventory

120,000

60,000

Land

100,000

40,000

Buildings (net)

300,000

120,000

Equipment (net)

430,000

110,000

Total assets

$1,000,000

$400,000

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

$180,000

$60,000

Common stock ($10 par)

400,000

200,000

Retained earnings

420,000

140,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,000,000

$400,000

The following fair values differ from book values for Daisy’s assets:

Inventory

$65,000

Land

100,000

Building

150,000

Equipment

75,000

Required

1. Record the investment in Daisy Company and any other entry necessitated by the purchase.

2. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

3. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet for July 1, 20X6, immediately subsequent to the purchase.

prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepa 589920

100% purchase, bargain, elimination entries only. On March 1, 20X5, Carlson Enterprises purchased a 100% interest in Express Corporation for $400,000. Express Corporation had the following balance sheet on February 28, 20X5:

Express Corporation
Balance Sheet
For the Month Ended February 28, 20X5

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$60,000

Current liabilities

$50,000

Inventory

80,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Land

40,000

Common stock

50,000

Buildings

300,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

250,000

Accum depr—building

120,000

Retained earnings

70,000

Equipment

220,000

Accum depr—equipment

60,000

Total assets

$520,000

Total liabilities and equity

$520,000

Carlson Enterprises received an independent appraisal on the fair values of Express Corporation’s assets. The controller has reviewed the following figures and accepts them as reasonable.

Inventory

$100,000

Land

40,500

Building

202,500

Equipment

162,000

Bonds payable

95,000

Required

1. Record the investment in Express Corporation.

2. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

3. Prepare the elimination entries that would be made on a consolidated worksheet prepared on the date of acquisition.

prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule 589921

100% purchase, goodwill, push down accounting. On March 1, 20X5, Collier Enterprises purchased a 100% interest in Robby Corporation for $480,000. It was decided that Robby Corporation will apply push down accounting principles to account for this acquisition. Robby Corporation had the following balance sheet on February 28, 20X5:

Robby Corporation
Balance Sheet
For the Month Ended February 28, 20X5

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$60,000

Current liabilities

$50,000

Inventory

80,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Land

40,000

Common stock

50,000

Buildings

300,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

250,000

Accum depr—building

120,000

Retained earnings

70,000

Equipment

220,000

Accum depr—equipment

60,000

Total assets

$520,000

Total liabilities and equity

$520,000

Collier Enterprises received an independent appraisal on the fair values of Robby Corporation’s assets. The controller has reviewed the following figures and accepts them as reasonable.

Inventory

$100,000

Land

55,000

Building

200,000

Equipment

150,000

Bonds payable

98,000

Required

1. Record the investment in Robby Corporation.

2. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

3. Give Robby Corporation’s adjusting entry.

complete a consolidated worksheet for adam company and its subsidiary scott company 589922

100% purchase, goodwill, worksheet. On December 31, 20X1, Adam Company purchased 100% of the common stock of Scott Company for $475,000. On this date, any excess of cost over book value was attributed to accounts with fair values that differed from book values. These accounts of the Scott Company had the following fair values:

Inventory

$140,000

Land

45,000

Buildings and equipment

225,000

Bonds payable

105,000

Copyrights

25,000

The following comparative balance sheets were prepared for the two companies immediately after the purchase:

Adam

Scott

Cash

$160,000

$40,000

Accounts receivable

70,000

30,000

Inventory

130,000

120,000

Investment in Scott Company

475,000

Land

50,000

35,000

Building and equipment

350,000

230,000

Accumulated depreciation

100,000

50,000

Copyrights

40,000

10,000

Total assets

$1,175,000

$415,000

Current liabilities

$192,000

$65,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Common stock ($10 par), Adam

100,000

Common stock ($5 par), Scott

50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

250,000

70,000

Retained earnings

633,000

130,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,175,000

$415,000

Required

1. Prepare zone and price analyses and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Scott Company.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Adam Company and its subsidiary Scott Company as of December 31, 20X1.

complete a consolidated worksheet for pantera company and its subsidiary sader compa 589923

100% purchase, goodwill, limited adjustments, worksheet. Use the preceding information for Pantera’s purchase of Sader common stock. Assume Pantera purchased 100% of the common stock for $410,000. Pantera had the following balance sheet immediately after the purchase:

Pantera Company
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$51,000

Current liabilities

$80,000

Accounts receivable

65,000

Bonds payable

200,000

Inventory

80,000

Common stock

20,000

Land

100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

180,000

Investment in Sader

410,000

Retained earnings

446,000

Buildings

250,000

Accumulated depreciation

80,000

Equipment

90,000

Accumulated depreciation

40,000

Total assets

$926,000

Total liabilities and equity

$926,000

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis and a determination and distribution of excess schedule for the investment in Sader.

2. Complete a consolidated worksheet for Pantera Company and its subsidiary Sader Company as of January 1, 20X1.

assuming a 30 tax rate what amounts will be recorded for the machine deferred tax li 589874

Deferred tax liability. Your client, Lewison International, has informed you that it has reached an agreement with Herro Company for the purchase of all of Herro’s assets. This transaction will be accomplished through the issue of Lewison’s common stock. After your examination of the financial statements and the purchase agreement, you have discovered the following important facts.

The Lewison common stock issued has a fair value of $800,000. The fair value of Herro’s assets, net of all liabilities, is $700,000. All asset book values equaled their fair values except for one machine valued at $200,000. This machine was originally purchased two years ago by Herro for $180,000. This machine has been depreciated using the straight line method with an assumed useful life of 10 years and no salvage value. The acquisition is to be considered a tax free exchange for tax purposes.

Assuming a 30% tax rate, what amounts will be recorded for the machine, deferred tax liability, and goodwill?

lake company had the following balance sheet on december 31 20×1 when it was purchas 589875

Tax loss carryover. Lake Company had the following balance sheet on December 31, 20X1, when it was purchased for $900,000 in cash by Atlantic Corporation:

Lake Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$60,000

Equipment (net)

200,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Building (net)

270,000

Common stock ($5 par)

$100,000

Retained earnings

410,000

510,000

Total assets

$570,000

Total liabilities and equity

$570,000

All assets have fair values equal to their book values. The combination is structured as a tax free exchange. Lake Company has a tax loss carryforward of $400,000, which it has not recorded.

The balance of the $400,000 tax loss carryover is considered fully realizable. Atlantic is taxed at a rate of 30%. Record the purchase of Lake Company by Atlantic Corporation.

make the required entry on january 1 20×3 for each of the two following independent 589876

Contingent consideration. Gonring Company purchased the net assets of Helm Company on January 1, 20X1, and made the following entry to record the purchase:

Current Assets

100,000

Equipment

150,000

Land

50,000

Buildings

300,000

Goodwill

100,000

Liabilities

80,000

Common Stock ($1 par)

100,000

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par

520,000

Make the required entry on January 1, 20X3, for each of the two following independent contingency agreements:

1. An additional cash payment would be made on January 1, 20X3, equal to twice the amount by which average annual earnings of the Helm Division exceed $25,000 per year, prior to January 1, 20X3. Net income was $50,000 in 20X1 and $60,000 in 20X2.

2. Added shares would be issued on January 1, 20X3, to compensate for any fall in the value of Gonring common stock below $6 per share. The settlement would be to cure the deficiency by issuing added shares based on their fair value on January 1, 20X3. The market price of the shares on January 1, 20X3, was $4.

determine the actual goodwill recorded if green pays 900 000 cash for the net assets 589877

Estimating goodwill. Green Company is considering acquiring the assets of Gold Corporation by assuming Gold’s liabilities and by making a cash payment. Gold Corporation has the following balance sheet on the date negotiations occur:

Gold Corporation
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X6

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$100,000

Total liabilities

$200,000

Inventory

100,000

Capital stock ($10 par)

100,000

Land

100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Buildings (net)

220,000

Retained earnings

300,000

Equipment (net)

280,000

Total assets

$800,000

Total liabilities and equity

$800,000

Appraisals indicate that the inventory is undervalued by $25,000, the building is undervalued by $80,000, and the equipment is overstated by $30,000. Past earnings have been considered above average and were as follows:

Year

Net Income

20X1

$90,000

20X2

110,000

20X3

120,000

20X4

140,000*

20X5

130,000

It is assumed that the average operating income of the past five years will continue. In this industry, the average return on assets is 12% on the fair value of the total identifiable assets.

1. Prepare an estimate of goodwill based on each of the following assumptions:

a. The purchasing company paid for five years of excess earnings.

b. Excess earnings will continue indefinitely and are to be capitalized at the industry normal return.

c. Excess earnings will continue for only five years and should be capitalized at a higher rate of 16%, which reflects the risk applicable to goodwill.

2. Determine the actual goodwill recorded if Green pays $900,000 cash for the net assets of Gold Corporation and assumes all existing liabilities.

determine the number of general company shares that are eligible to meet the 90 test 589878

Meeting 90% text. Onan Company intends to engage in a pooling of interests with General Company. General Company has 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding on the initiation date. Onan will issue one of its shares for every two General shares. On the initiation date, Onan already owns 1,000 General shares, and a wholly owned subsidiary of Onan owns another 1,500 shares. By the consummation date, Onan issued 22,000 of its shares in accord with the predetermined exchange rate. Onan also purchased 1,000 General shares from dissident shareholders of General Company for cash.

Determine the number of General Company shares that are eligible to meet the 90% test which is required to record the acquisition as a pooling of interests. Has the 90% test been satisfied?

what entry would taylor international make to record the receipt of the shares and t 589880

Calculate shares to be issued, record pooling. After lengthy negotiations, Fischer Industries and Taylor International decided to merge on January 1, 20X2. This transaction meets the requirements for a pooling of interests, and Fischer will be the issuer. Immediately prior to the pooling, Taylor International prepared the following balance sheet:

Taylor International
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$400,000

Current liabilities

$100,000

Property, plant, and equipment

2,200,000

Bonds payable

800,000

Accumulated depreciation

500,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par)

$200,000

Retained earnings

1,000,000

1,200,000

Total assets

$2,100,000

Total liabilities and equity

$2,100,000

Negotiations revolved around what Taylor felt its business was worth and what Fischer was willing to pay. It was finally agreed that the value of Taylor’s net assets, including company goodwill, was $1,800,000 and would be paid with $5 par common stock having a fair value of $50. Fischer Industries will issue the required number of previously unissued shares in exchange for all of the net assets of Taylor International. The following independent appraisals have been made:

Property, plant, and equipment

$2,000,000

Bonds payable

750,000

In consummating the transaction, Fischer Industries incurred $5,000 of direct acquisition costs and $20,000 for stock registration and issuance.

1. Determine the number of shares of stock that Fischer Industries will issue.

2. Record the pooling of interests on the books of Fischer Industries.

3. What entry would Taylor International make to record the receipt of the shares and their distribution to the shareholders in order to liquidate the company?

prepare the pooling entry for each of the following independent cases 589881

Equity transfer situations. KC Company is issuing 110,000 shares of its common stock for the 100,000 outstanding shares of Hill Company in a pooling of interests. KC stockholders’ equity is as follows:

Common stock

$1,000,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Retained earnings

600,000

The balance sheet of Hill Company at the time of the pooling is as follows:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$50,000

Accounts payable

$25,000

Inventory

75,000

Note payable

100,000

Equipment (net)

180,000

Common stock, $1 par

100,000

Plant (net)

215,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

120,000

Retained earnings

175,000

Total assets

$520,000

Total liabilities and equity

$520,000

Prepare the pooling entry for each of the following independent cases:

1. The par value of KC Company’s shares is $2.

2. The par value of KC Company’s shares is $5.

Suggestion: Use equity transfer diagrams.

prepare the entry that zeeco company will make to record the pooling of interests su 589882

Adjusting entries prior to pooling. On December 31, 20X5, Lumina Company has the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$100,000

Liabilities

$150,000

Receivables

150,000

Common stock ($5 par)

50,000

Inventory

200,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

450,000

Land

50,000

Retained earnings

210,000

Building (net)

280,000

Equipment (net)

80,000

Total assets

$860,000

Total liabilities and equity

$860,000

Zeeco Company will issue its $10 par value shares on a 1 for 1 basis to accomplish a pooling of interests. There are, however, some adjustments that may need to be acknowledged before the pooling can be recorded. The inventory of Lumina Company is recorded on a LIFO basis. Zeeco uses the FIFO method and will also convert Lumina’s inventory to FIFO. This will increase the inventory cost to $250,000.

The building is obsolete and has an appraised value of only $100,000. The recorded liabilities do not include accrued interest of $5,000.

1. Prepare the adjusting entries needed on the books of Lumina Company prior to the pooling of interests.

2. Prepare the entry that Zeeco Company will make to record the pooling of interests. Support the entry with an equity transfer diagram.

prepare the journal entries for marcus company to record the pooling of interests wi 589883

Pooling using treasury stock. Marcus Company is going to exchange its 10,000 treasury shares for all 50,000 outstanding shares of Koempfer Company in a business combination to be recorded as a pooling of interests. Just prior to the pooling, the two companies had the following balance sheets:

Assets

Marcus

Koempfer

Current assets

$310,000

$200,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

1,400,000

800,000

Total assets

$1,710,000

$1,000,000

Liabilities and Equity

Marcus

Koempfer

Current liabilities

$170,000

$90,000

Common stock

($5 par)

500,000

($2 par)

100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

800,000

170,000

Retained earnings

360,000

640,000

Treasury stock at cost, 10,000 shares

120,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,710,000

$1,000,000

Prepare the journal entries for Marcus Company to record the pooling of interests with Koempfer Company. Hint: Prepare an entry for Koempfer to retire the treasury stock. Then, adjust Koempfer’s balance sheet for this entry prior to recording the pooling.

use zone analysis to prepare the entry on the books of browne corporation to purchas 589884

Zone analysis, alternative prices. Browne Corporation agreed to purchase the net assets of White Corporation on January 1, 20X1. White had the following balance sheet on the date of acquisition:

White Corporation
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$79,000

Current liabilities

$145,000

Inventory

112,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Other current assets

55,000

Common stock

200,000

Equipment (net)

294,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

50,000

Trademark

30,000

Retained earnings

75,000

Total assets

$570,000

Total liabilities and equity

$570,000

An appraiser determines that In Process R&D exists and has an estimated value of $14,000. The appraisal indicates that the following assets had fair values that differed from their book values:

Fair Value

Inventory

$120,000

Equipment

307,000

Trademark

27,000

Required

Use zone analysis to prepare the entry on the books of Browne Corporation to purchase the net assets of White Corporation under each of the following purchase price scenarios:

a. $500,000

b. $250,000

c. $5,000

record the acquisition on the books of barker corporation using purchase accounting 589885

Purchase of two companies with goodwill. Barker Corporation has been looking to expand its operations and has decided to acquire the assets of Verk Company and Kent Company. Barker will issue 30,000 shares of its $10 par common stock to acquire the net assets of Verk Company and will issue 15,000 shares to acquire the net assets of Kent Company.

Verk and Kent have the following balance sheets as of December 31, 20X1:

Assets

Verk

Kent

Accounts receivable

$200,000

$80,000

Inventory

150,000

85,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land

150,000

50,000

Building

500,000

300,000

Accumulated depreciation

150,000

110,000

Total assets

$850,000

$405,000

Verk

Kent

Liabilities and Equity

$160,000

$55,000

Current liabilities

100,000

100,000

Bonds payable

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par)

300,000

100,000

Retained earnings

290,000

150,000

Total liabilities and equity

$850,000

$405,000

The following fair values are agreed upon by the two firms:

Assets

Verk

Kent

Inventory

$200,000

$100,000

Bonds payable

90,000

95,000

Land

300,000

80,000

Buildings

450,000

400,000

Barker’s stock is currently trading at $40 per share. Barker will incur $5,000 of direct acquisition costs in Verk and $4,000 of direct acquisition costs in Kent. Barker also incurred $13,000 of indirect acquisition costs and $15,000 of registration and issuance costs. Barker stockholders’ equity is as follows:

Common stock, $10 par

$1,200,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

800,000

Retained earnings

750,000

Required

Record the acquisition on the books of Barker Corporation, using purchase accounting principles. Zone analysis is suggested to guide your work.

prepare a pro forma income statement for the combined firm for 20×1 show supporting 589886

Pro forma income after a purchase. Molitor Company is contemplating the acquisition of Yount Inc. on January 1, 20X1. If Molitor proceeded to acquire Yount, it would pay $730,000 in cash to Yount and direct acquisition costs of $20,000. The January 1, 20X1 balance sheet of Yount Inc. is anticipated to be as follows:

Yount Inc.
Pro Forma Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash equivalents

$100,000

Current liabilities

$30,000

Accounts receivable

120,000

Long term liabilities

165,000

Inventory

50,000

Common stock ($10 par)

80,000

Depreciable fixed assets

200,000

Retained earnings

115,000

Accumulated depreciation

80,000

Total assets

$390,000

Total liabilities and equity

$390,000

Fair values agree with book values except for the inventory and the depreciable fixed assets, which have fair values of $70,000 and $400,000, respectively. Your projections of the combined operations for 20X1 are as follows:

Combined sales

$200,000

Combined cost of goods sold, including beginning inventory of Yount at book value which will be sold in 20X1

120,000

Other expenses not including depreciation of Yount assets or goodwill amortization

25,000

Depreciation on Yount fixed assets is straight line using a 20 year life.

Required

1. Prepare a zone analysis for the purchase, and record the purchase.

2. Prepare a pro forma income statement for the combined firm for 20X1. Show supporting calculations for consolidated income. Ignore tax issues.

record the purchase entry for kent corporation that would result under each of the a 589887

Alternate consideration, bargain. Kent Corporation is considering the purchase of Williams Incorporated. Kent has asked you, its accountant, to evaluate the various offers it might make to Williams Incorporated. The December 31, 20X1 balance sheet of Williams is as follows:

Williams Incorporated
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Current assets:

Accounts payable

$40,000

Accounts receivable

$50,000

Inventory

300,000

$350,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Noncurrent assets:

Common stock

$40,000

Land

$20,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

110,000

Building (net)

70,000

90,000

Retained earnings

250,000

400,000

Total assets

$440,000

Total liabilities and equity

$440,000

The following fair values differ from existing book values:

Inventory

$250,000

Land

40,000

Building

120,000

Required

Record the purchase entry for Kent Corporation that would result under each of the alternative offers. Price zone analysis is suggested.

1. Kent Corporation issues 20,000 of its $10 par common stock with a fair value of $25 per share for the net assets of Williams Incorporated.

2. Kent Corporation pays $385,000 in cash.

using the above information do zone analysis and prepare the entry on the books of t 589889

Cash purchase, several of each priority, with goodwill. Tweedy Corporation is contemplating the purchase of the net assets of Sylvester Corporation in anticipation of expanding its operations. The balance sheet of Sylvester Corporation on December 31, 20X1, is as follows:

Sylvester Corporation
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Notes receivable

$24,000

Accounts payable

$45,000

Accounts receivable

56,000

Payroll and benefit related

Inventory

31,000

liabilities

12,500

Other current assets

18,000

Debt maturing in one year

10,000

Total current assets

$129,000

Total current liabilities

$67,500

Investments

65,000

Fixed assets:

Other liabilities:

Land

$32,000

Long term debt

$248,000

Building

245,000

Payroll and benefit related

Equipment

387,000

liabilities

156,000

Total fixed assets

664,000

Total other liabilities

404,000

Intangibles:

Stockholders’ equity:

Goodwill

$45,000

Common stock

$100,000

Patents

23,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

250,000

Trade names

10,000

Retained earnings

114,500

Total intangibles

78,000

Total equity

464,500

Total assets

$936,000

Total liabilities and equity

$936,000

An appraiser for Tweedy determined the fair values of the assets and liabilities to be as follows:

Assets

Liabilities

Notes receivable

$24,000

Accounts payable

$45,000

Accounts receivable

56,000

Payroll and benefit related

Inventory

30,000

liabilities

12,500

Other current assets

15,000

Debt maturing in one year

10,000

Investments

63,000

Land

55,000

Long term debt

248,000

Building

275,000

Payroll and benefit related

Equipment

426,000

liabilities—long term

156,000

Goodwill

Patents

20,000

Trade names

15,000

The agreed upon purchase price was $580,000 in cash. Direct acquisition costs paid in cash totaled $20,000.

Required

Using the above information, do zone analysis, and prepare the entry on the books of Tweedy Corporation to purchase the net assets of Sylvester Corporation on December 31, 20X1.

do zone analysis and prepare the entry on the books of ht corporation to record the 589890

Stock purchase, goodwill. HT Corporation is contemplating the acquisition of the net assets of Smith Company on December 31, 20X1. It is considering making an offer, which would include a cash payout of $290,000 along with giving 10,000 shares of its $2 par value common stock that is currently selling for $20 per share. The balance sheet of Smith Company is given below, along with estimated fair values of the net assets to be acquired.

Smith Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Book Value

Fair Value

Book Value

Fair Value

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Notes receivable

$33,000

$33,000

Accounts payable

$63,000

$63,000

Inventory

89,000

80,000

Taxes payable

15,000

15,000

Prepaid expenses

15,000

15,000

Interest payable

3,000

3,000

Total current assets

$137,000

$128,000

Total current liabilities

$81,000

$81,000

Investments

$36,000

$55,000

Fixed assets:

Other liabilities:

Land

$15,000

$90,000

Bonds payable

$250,000

$250,000

Buildings

115,000

170,000

Discount on bonds payable

18,000

30,000

Equipment

256,000

250,000

Vehicles

32,000

25,000

Total fixed assets

$418,000

$535,000

Total other liabilities

$232,000

$220,000

Intangibles:

Stockholders’ equity:

Franchise

$56,000

$70,000

Common stock

$50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

200,000

Retained earnings

84,000

Total equity

$334,000

Total assets

$647,000

$788,000

Total liabilities and equity

$647,000

Required

Do zone analysis and prepare the entry on the books of HT Corporation to record the acquisition of Smith Company.

using the above information prepare a pro forma income statement for the combined co 589892

Pro forma income after purchase. On January 1, 20X1, Arthur Enterprises acquired Ann’s Tool Company. Prior to the merger of the two companies, each company had prepared an estimate of its income for the year ended December 31, 20X1. These estimates are as follows:

Income Statement Accounts

Arthur Enterprises

Ann’s Tool Company

Sales revenue

$550,000

$140,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

50,000

Gross profit

$350,000

$90,000

Selling expenses

$125,000

$30,000

Administrative expenses

150,000

45,000

Depreciation expense

13,800

7,500

Amortization expense

5,600

2,000

Total operating expenses

$294,400

$84,500

Operating income

$55,600

$5,500

Nonoperating revenues and expenses:

Interest expense

4,000

Interest income

7,000

Dividend income

4,000

Income before taxes

$66,600

$1,500

Provision for income taxes (30% rate)

19,980

450

Net income

$46,620

$1,050

An analysis of the merger agreement revealed that the purchase price exceeded the fair value of all assets by $40,000. The book and fair values of Ann’s Tool Company are given in the table below along with an estimate of the useful lives of each of these asset categories.

Asset Account

Book Value

Fair Value

Useful Life

Inventory

$30,000

$28,000

Sold during 20X1

Land

50,000

80,000

Unlimited

Buildings

75,000

125,000

25 years

Equipment

32,000

56,000

8 years

Truck

1,000

3,000

2 years

Patent

12,000

18,000

6 years

Computer software

0

10,000

2 years

Copyright

0

20,000

10 years

Management believes the company will be in a combined tax bracket of 30%. The company uses the straight line method of computing depreciation and amortization and assigns a zero salvage value.

Required

Using the above information, prepare a pro forma income statement for the combined companies.

part b using the above information prepare a pro forma income statement for garden i 589893

Issue stock, several of each priority accounts, goodwill, purchase entry and pro forma income.

Part A. Garden International has been looking to expand its operations and has decided to acquire the net assets of Iris Company. Garden will be issuing 10,000 shares of its $5 par value common stock for the net assets of Iris. Garden’s stock is currently selling for $27 per share. In addition, Garden paid $10,000 in direct acquisition costs. A balance sheet for Iris Company as of December 31, 20X1, is as follows:

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Accounts receivable

$15,000

Accounts payable

$22,000

Inventory

38,000

Interest payable

2,000

Prepaid expenses

12,000

Total current assets

$65,000

Total current liabilities

$24,000

Investments

19,000

Fixed assets:

Other liabilities:

Land

$30,000

Long term notes payable

40,000

Building

70,000

Equipment

56,000

Total fixed assets

156,000

Total liabilities

$64,000

Intangibles:

Stockholders’ equity:

Patent

$17,000

Common stock

$40,000

Copyrights

22,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

120,000

Goodwill

8,000

Retained earnings

63,000

Total intangibles

47,000

Total equity

223,000

Total assets

$287,000

Total liabilities and equity

$287,000

In reviewing Iris’s balance sheet and in consulting with various appraisers, Garden has determined that the inventory is understated by $2,000, the land is understated by $10,000, the building is understated by $15,000, and the copyrights are understated by $4,000. Garden has also determined that the equipment is overstated by $6,000, and the patent is overstated by $5,000. The investments have a fair value of $33,000 on December 31, 20X1, and the amount of goodwill (if any) must be determined.

Required

Part A. Using the information above, do zone analysis, and record the acquisition of Iris Company on Garden International’s books.

Part B. Garden International wishes to estimate its net income after the acquisition of Iris. Projected income statements for 20X2 are as follows:

Income Statement Accounts

Garden International

Iris Company

Sales revenue

($350,000)

($125,000)

Cost of goods sold

147,000

55,000

Gross profit

($203,000)

($70,000)

Selling expenses*

$100,000

$20,000

Administrative expenses*

50,000

30,000

Depreciation expense

12,500

8,600

Amortization expense

1,000

3,900

Total operating expenses

$163,500

$62,500

Operating income

($39,500)

($7,500)

Nonoperating revenues and expenses:

Interest expense

3,000

Investment income

12,000

4,500

Income before taxes

($51,500)

($9,000)

Provision for income taxes (40% rate)

20,600

3,600

Net income

($30,900)

($5,400)

Garden International estimates that the following amount of depreciation and amortization should be taken on the revalued assets of Iris Company.

Building depreciation

$4,000

Equipment depreciation

5,000

Patent amortization

1,200

Copyright amortization

2,600

Required

Part B. Using the above information, prepare a pro forma income statement for Garden International combined with Iris Company for the year ended December 31, 20X2.

record the purchase of new equipment leasing company by sentry inc carefully support 589894

Revaluation of leases. Sentry Inc. purchased for $2,300,000 in cash the net assets of New Equipment Leasing Company. The purchase was made on December 31, 20X1, at which time New Equipment had prepared the following balance sheet:

New Equipment Leasing Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$150,000

Assets under operating leases

520,000

Obligation under capital lease of equipment

35,000

Net investment in direct financing (capital leases)

730,000

Common stock ($5 par)

100,000

Leased equipment under capital lease (net)

40,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

400,000

Buildings (net)

200,000

Retained earnings

955,000

Land

50,000

Total assets

$1,640,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,640,000

The following information is available concerning the assets and liabilities of New Equipment:

a. Current assets and liabilities are stated fairly. No payments resulting from leases are included in current accounts, since all payments are due each December 31, and payment for 20X1 has been made.

b. Assets under operating leases have an estimated value of $580,000. This figure includes consideration of remaining rents and the value of the assets at the end of the lease terms.

c. The net investment in direct financing leases represents receivables at their discounted present values. All leases are written at the current market interest rate of 12%, except one equipment lease requiring payments of $50,000 per year for five remaining years. The $50,000 payments include interest at 8%.

d. The buildings and the land have appraised fair values of $400,000 and $100,000, respectively.

e. The leased equipment under the capital lease pertains to a computer used by New Equipment.

The obligation under the capital lease of equipment includes the present value of five remaining payments of $9,233 due at the end of each year and discounted at 10%. The current interest rate for this type of transaction is 12%. The fair value of the equipment under the lease is $60,000.

f. New Equipment has expended $100,000 on R&D leading to new equipment applications. Sentry estimates the value of this work to be $200,000.

g. New Equipment has been named in a $200,000 lawsuit involving an accident by a lessee using its equipment. It is likely that New Equipment will be found liable in the amount of $50,000.

Record the purchase of New Equipment Leasing Company by Sentry Inc. Carefully support your entry. You may assume that the price will allow goodwill to be recorded.

record the purchase of the net assets of marco incorporated by gusty company you may 589895

Tax free exchange, tax loss carryover. Gusty Company issued 10,000 shares of $10 par common stock for the net assets of Marco Incorporated on December 31, 20X2. The stock has a fair value of $60 per share. Direct acquisition costs were $10,000, and the cost of issuing the stock was $3,000. At the time of the purchase, Marco had the following summarized balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$150,000

Bonds payable

$200,000

Equipment (net)

200,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Land and buildings (net)

250,000

Retained earnings

300,000

Total assets

$600,000

Total liabilities and equity

$600,000

The only fair value differing from book value is equipment, which is worth $300,000. Marco has $120,000 in operating losses in prior years. The previous asset values are also the tax basis of the assets, which will be the tax basis for Gusty, since the acquisition is a tax free exchange. Gusty is confident that it will recover the entire tax loss carryforward applicable to the past losses of Marco. The applicable tax rate is 30%.

Required

Record the purchase of the net assets of Marco Incorporated by Gusty Company. You may assume the price paid will allow goodwill to be recorded.

record payment if any of contingent consideration on january 1 20×3 assuming that th 589896

Contingent consideration. Dodd Corporation is purchasing the net assets, exclusive of cash, of Walsh Company as of January 1, 20X1, at which time Walsh Company’s balance sheet is as follows:

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$30,000

Accounts receivable

50,000

$80,000

Noncurrent assets:

Investments in marketable securities

$120,000

Land

600,000

Buildings (net)

450,000

Equipment (net)

800,000

Goodwill

100,000

2,070,000

Total assets

$2,150,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$150,000

Income tax payable

190,000

$340,000

Equity:

Common stock ($5 par)

$1,200,000

Retained earnings

610,000

1,810,000

Total liabilities and equity

$2,150,000

Dodd Corporation feels that the following fair values should be substituted for Walsh’s book values:

Accounts receivable

$60,000

Investment in marketable securities

150,000

Land

450,000

Buildings

450,000

Equipment

600,000

Accounts payable

120,000

Dodd will issue 20,000 shares of its common stock with a $2 par value and a quoted fair value of $60 per share on January 1, 20X1, to Walsh Company to acquire the net assets. Dodd also agrees that two years from now it will issue additional securities to compensate Walsh for any decline in value below that on the date of issue.

Required

1. Record the purchase on the books of Dodd Corporation on January 1, 20X1. Include support for calculations used to arrive at the values assigned to the assets and liabilities. Use price zone analysis to aid your solution.

2. Indicate the disclosure that would be necessary in the financial statements of Dodd Corporation on December 31, 20X1, assuming the quoted value of the stock is $62 per share.

3. Record payment (if any) of contingent consideration on January 1, 20X3, assuming that the quoted value of the stock is $57.50. (Round shares to nearest whole share.)

compute the fica withholdings that should be made for each employee for the december 589642

Employee earnings records for Brantley Company reveal the following gross earnings for four employees through the pay period of December 15.

C. Mays

$83,500

D. Delgado

$105,600

L. Jeter

$104,500

T. Rolen

$106,800

For the pay period ending December 31, each employee’s gross earnings is $4,000. Employees are required to pay a FICA tax rate of 8% gross earnings of $106,800.

Instructions

Compute the FICA withholdings that should be made for each employee for the December 31 pay period. (Show computations.)

journalize the february payroll and the payment of the payroll 589643

Selected data from a February payroll register for Landmark Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.

Gross earnings:

State income taxes

$(3)

Regular

$8,900

Union dues

100

Overtime

(1)

Total deductions

(4)

Total

(2)

Net pay

$7,215

Deductions:

Accounts debited:

FICA taxes

$ 760

Warehouse wages

(5)

Federal income taxes

1,140

Store wages

$4,000

FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts.

(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll

a the payroll procedures used by three different companies are described below 589645

A The payroll procedures used by three different companies are described below.

1. In Brewer Company each employee is required to mark on a clock card the hours worked .At the end of each pay period, the employee must have this clock card approved by the department manager. The approved card is then given to the payroll department by the employee. Subsequently, the treasurer’s department pays the employee by check.

2. In Hilyard Computer Company clock cards and time clocks are used. At the end of each pay period, the department manager initials the cards, indicates the rates of pay, and sends them to payroll. A payroll register is prepared from the cards by the payroll department. Cash equal to the total net pay in each department is given to the department manager, who pays the employees in cash.

3. In Hyun chan Company employees are required to record hours worked by “punching” clock cards in a time clock. At the end of each pay period, the clock cards are collected by the department manager. The manager prepares a payroll register in duplicate and forwards the original to payroll. In payroll, the summaries are checked for mathematical accuracy, and a payroll supervisor pays each employee by check.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the weakness(es) in internal control in each company.

(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedure(s) that will provide effective internal control. Use the following format for your answer:

(a) Weaknesses (b) Recommended Procedures

prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees 589647

The following payroll liability accounts are included in the ledger of Eikleberry Company on January 1, 2011.

FICA Taxes Payable

$ 662.20

Federal Income Taxes Payable

1,254.60

State Income Taxes Payable

102.15

Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable

312.00

State Unemployment Taxes Payable

1,954.40

Union Dues Payable

250.00

U.S. Savings Bonds Payable

350.00

In January, the following transactions occurred.

Jan. 10 Sent check for $250.00 to union treasurer for union dues.

12 Deposited check for $1,916.80 in Federal Reserve bank for FICA taxes and federal income taxes withheld.

15 Purchased U.S. Savings Bonds for employees by writing check for $350.00.

17 Paid state income taxes withheld from employees.

20 Paid federal and state unemployment taxes.

31 Completed monthly payroll register, which shows office salaries $17,600, store wages $27,400, FICA taxes withheld $3,600, federal income taxes payable $1,770, state income

taxes payable $360, union dues payable $400, United Fund contributions payable

$1,800, and net pay $37,070.

31 Prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees.

At January 31, the company also makes the following accrual for employer payroll taxes: FICA taxes 8%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment taxes 0.8%.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjustments pertaining to employee compensation at January 31.

indicate the weaknesses in internal control 589649

Selected payroll procedures of Wallace Company are described below.

1. Department managers interview applicants and on the basis of the interview either hire or reject the applicants. When an applicant is hired, the applicant fills out a W 4 form (Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate). One copy of the form is sent to the human resources department, and one copy is sent to the payroll department as notice that the individual has been hired. On the copy of the W 4 sent to payroll, the managers manually indicate the hourly pay rate for the new hire.

2. The payroll checks are manually signed by the chief accountant and given to the department managers for distribution to employees in their department. The managers are responsible for seeing that any absent employees receive their checks.

3. There are two clerks in the payroll department. The payroll is divided alphabetically; one clerk has employees A to L and the other has employees M to Z. Each clerk computes the gross earnings, deductions, and net pay for employees in the section and posts the data to the employee earnings records.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal control.

(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedures that will provide effective internal control.

Use the following format for your answer:

(a) Weaknesses (b) Recommended Procedures

prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll use the wage bracket withholding t 589650

Lee Hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus time and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 a week. Payroll data for the week ended March 15, 2011, are presented below.

Federal

Hours

Hourly

Income Tax

United

Employee

Worked

Rate

Withholdings

Way

Joe Coomer

40

$15.00

$?

$5.00

Mary Walker

42

13.00

?

5.00

Andy Dye

44

13.00

60

8.00

Kim Shen

48

13.00

67

5.00

Coomer and Walker are married. They claim 0 and 4 withholding allowances, respectively. The following tax rates are applicable: FICA 8%, state income taxes 3%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment 0.8%. The first three employees are sales clerks (store wages expense). The fourth employee performs administrative duties (office wages expense).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll. (Use the wage bracket withholding table in the text for federal income tax withholdings.)

(b) Journalize the payroll on March 15, 2011, and the accrual of employer payroll taxes.

(c) Journalize the payment of the payroll on March 16, 2011.

(d) Journalize the deposit in a Federal Reserve bank on March 31, 2011, of the FICA and federal income taxes payable to the government.

the following payroll liability accounts are included in the ledger of nordlund comp 589651

The following payroll liability accounts are included in the ledger of Nordlund Company on January 1, 2011.

FICA Taxes Payable

$ 760.00

Federal Income Taxes Payable

1,204.60

State Income Taxes Payable

108.95

Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable

288.95

State Unemployment Taxes Payable

1,954.40

Union Dues Payable

870.00

U.S. Savings Bonds Payable

360.00

In January, the following transactions occurred.

Jan. 10 Sent check for $870.00 to union treasurer for union dues.

12 Deposited check for $1,964.60 in Federal Reserve bank for FICA taxes and federal income taxes withheld.

15 Purchased U.S. Savings Bonds for employees by writing check for $360.00.

17 Paid state income taxes withheld from employees.

20 Paid federal and state unemployment taxes.

31 Completed monthly payroll register, which shows office salaries $21,600, store wages $28,400, FICA taxes withheld $4,000, federal income taxes payable $1,958, state income taxes payable $414, union dues payable $400, United Fund contributions payable $1,888, and net pay $41,340.

31 Prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees.

At January 31, the company also makes the following accrued adjustment for employer payroll taxes: FICA taxes 8%, federal unemployment taxes 0.8%, and state unemployment taxes 5.4%.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjustments pertaining to employee compensation at January 31.

for the year ended december 31 2011 niehaus electrical repair company reports the fo 589652

For the year ended December 31, 2011, Niehaus Electrical Repair Company reports the following summary payroll data.

Gross earnings:

Administrative salaries

$180,000

Electricians’ wages

370,000

Total

$550,000

Deductions:

FICA taxes

$ 38,000

Federal income taxes withheld

168,000

State income taxes withheld (2.6%)

14,300

United Way contributions payable

27,500

Hospital insurance premiums

17,200

Total

$265,000

Niehaus Company’s payroll taxes are: FICA 8%, state unemployment 2.5% (due to a stable employment record), and 0.8% federal unemployment. Gross earnings subject to FICA taxes total $475,000, and unemployment taxes total $125,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a summary journal entry at December 31 for the full year’s payroll.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entry at December 31 to record the employer’s payroll taxes.

(c) The W 2 Wage and Tax Statement requires the following dollar data.

Wages, Tips,

Federal Income

State Income

FICA

FICA

Other Compensation

Tax Withheld

Tax Withheld

Wages

Tax Withheld

Complete the required data for the following employees.

Employee

Gross Earnings

Federal Income Tax Withheld

Anna Hashmi

$59,000

$28,500

Sharon Bishop

26,000

10,200

where should the employer deposit social security taxes withheld or contributed 589653

The Internal Revenue Service provides considerable information over the Internet. The following demonstrates how useful one of its sites is in answering payroll tax questions faced by employers.,

Steps

1. Go to the site shown above.

2. Choose View Online, Tax Publications.

3. Choose Publication 15, Circular E, Employer’s Tax Guide.

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

(a) How does the government define “employees”?

(b) What are the special rules for Social Security and Medicare regarding children who are employed by their parents?

(c) How can an employee obtain a Social Security card if he or she doesn’t have one?

(d) Must employees report to their employer tips received from customers? If so, what is the process?

(e) Where should the employer deposit Social Security taxes withheld or contributed?

what other factors should nancy consider before finalizing her decision 589654

Summerville Processing Company provides word processing services for business clients and students in a university community. The work for business clients is fairly steady throughout the year. The work for students peaks significantly in December and May as a result of term papers, research project reports, and dissertations. Two years ago, the company attempted to meet the peak demand by hiring part time help. However, this led to numerous errors and considerable customer dissatisfaction. A year ago, the company hired four experienced employees on a permanent basis instead of using part time help. This proved to be much better in terms of productivity and customer satisfaction. But, it has caused an increase in annual payroll costs and a significant decline in annual net income. Recently, Valarie Flynn, a sales representative of Davidson Services Inc., has made a proposal to the company. Under her plan, Davidson Services will provide up to four experienced workers at a daily rate of $80 per person for an 8 hour workday. Davidson workers are not available on an hourly basis. Summerville Processing would have to pay only the daily rate for the workers used. The owner of Summerville Processing, Nancy Bell, asks you, as the company’s accountant, to prepare a report on the expenses that are pertinent to the decision. If the Davidson plan is adopted, Nancy will terminate the employment of two permanent employees and will keep two permanent employees. At the moment, each employee earns an annual income of $22,000. Summerville Processing pays 8% FICA taxes, 0.8% federal unemployment taxes, and 5.4% state unemployment taxes. The unemployment taxes apply to only the first $7,000 of gross earnings. In addition, Summerville Processing pays $40 per month for each employee for medical and dental insurance. Nancy indicates that if the Davidson Services plan is accepted, her needs for workers will be as follows.

Working

Months

Number

Days per Month

January–March

2

20

April–May

3

25

June–October

2

18

November–December

3

23

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a report showing the comparative payroll expense of continuing to employ permanent workers compared to adopting the Davidson Services Inc. plan.

(b) What other factors should Nancy consider before finalizing her decision?

what internal control principle is violated in this payroll process 589656

Johnny Fuller owns and manages Johnny’s Restaurant, a 24 hour restaurant near the city’s medical complex. Johnny employs 9 full time employees and 16 part time employees. He pays all of the full time employees by check, the amounts of which are determined by Johnny’s public accountant, Mary Lake. Johnny pays all of his part time employees in cash. He computes their wages and withdraws the cash directly from his cash register. Mary has repeatedly urged Johnny to pay all employees by check. But as Johnny has told his competitor and friend, Steve Hill, who owns the Greasy Diner, “First of all, my part time employees prefer the cash over a check, and secondly I don’t withhold or pay any taxes or workmen’s compensation insurance on those wages because they go totally unrecorded and unnoticed.”

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the legal and ethical considerations regarding Johnny’s handling of his payroll?

(c) Mary Lake is aware of Johnny’s payment of the part time payroll in cash. What are her ethical responsibilities in this case?

(d) What internal control principle is violated in this payroll process?

determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger what ac 589658

Presented below is information related to Sims Company for its first month of operations. Determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger. What Accounts Payable balance appears in the general ledger at the end of January?

Credit Purchases

Cash Paid

Jan. 5

Devon Co.

$11,000

Jan. 9

Devon Co.

$7,000

11

Shelby Co.

7,000

14

Shelby Co.

2,000

22

Taylor Co.

14,000

27

Taylor Co.

9,000

what values will be assigned to current assets land buildings and equipment the cust 589862

Pallos Company is purchasing the net assets of Shrilly Company. The book and fair values of Shrilly’s accounts are as follows:

Accounts

Book

Fair

Current assets

$100,000

$120,000

Land

50,000

80,000

Building and equipment

300,000

400,000

Customer list

0

20,000

Liabilities

100,000

100,000

What values will be assigned to current assets, land, buildings and equipment, the customer list, liabilities, goodwill, and extraordinary gain under each of the following purchase price scenarios?

a. $800,000

b. $450,000

c. $15,000

assuming that income is earned evenly throughout the year compare combined current y 589866

Historical comparison—income effect of purchase versus pooling. World Corporation acquired the net assets of Globe Company on July 1, 1998. In exchange for Globe’s net assets, World issued 10,000 shares of its $5 par common stock, which had a $40 fair value on the date of acquisition. Globe Company had the following balance sheet on the date of acquisition:

Globe Company
Balance Sheet
July 1, 1998

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$50,000

125,000

$450,000

Inventory

100,000

25,000

125,000

Buildings (net)

300,000

50,000

25,000

Equipment (net)

200,000

$650,000

50,000

Total assets

$650,000

Total liabilities and equity

$650,000

Appraisals have determined that fair values agree with the book values of the net assets. Reported income amounts for both World and Globe for the year ended December 31, 1998, are as follows:

Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 1998

World

Globe

Sales

$800,000

$500,000

Less: Cost of goods sold

400,000

300,000

Operating expenses

150,000

75,000

Other expenses

50,000

25,000

Net income

$200,000

$100,000

No goodwill is reflected in the above income statement. Assuming that income is earned evenly throughout the year, compare combined current year income using the purchase method and the pooling method.

record the purchase of 100 of the common stock of cardinal company on benz rsquo s b 589867

Asset versus stock purchase. Benz Company is contemplating the purchase of the net assets of Cardinal Company for $800,000 cash. To complete the transaction, direct acquisition costs are $15,000. The balance sheet of Cardinal Company on the purchase date is as follows:

Cardinal Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$80,000

Liabilities

$100,000

Land

50,000

Common stock ($10 par)

100,000

Building

450,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

150,000

Accumulated depreciation, building

200,000

Retained earnings

230,000

Equipment

300,000

Accumulated depreciation, equipment

100,000

Total assets

$580,000

Total liabilities and equity

$580,000

The following fair values have been obtained for Cardinal’s assets and liabilities:

Current assets

$100,000

Land

75,000

Building

300,000

Equipment

275,000

Liabilities

102,000

1. Record the purchase of the net assets of Cardinal Company on Benz Company’s books.

2. Record the sale of the net assets on the books of Cardinal Company.

3. Record the purchase of 100% of the common stock of Cardinal Company on Benz’s books. Cardinal Company will remain a separate legal entity.

record the purchase of smith company on the books of rogers corporation 589868

Purchase with goodwill. Smith Company was acquired by Rogers Corporation on July 1, 20X1. Rogers exchanged 60,000 shares of its $5 par stock, with a fair value of $20 per share, for the net assets of Smith Company. Rogers incurred the following costs as a result of this transaction:

Direct acquisition costs

$25,000

Indirect acquisition costs

30,000

Stock registration and issuance costs

10,000

Total costs

$65,000

The balance sheet of Smith Company, on the day of the acquisition, was as follows:

Smith Company
Balance Sheet
July 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$100,000

Current liabilities

$80,000

Inventory

300,000

Bonds payable

550,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Stockholders’ equity:

Land

$200,000

Common stock

$200,000

Buildings (net)

250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

100,000

Equipment (net)

200,000

650,000

Retained earnings

120,000

420,000

Total assets

$1,050,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,050,000

The appraised fair values as of July 1, 20X1, are as follows:

Inventory

$250,000

Equipment

220,000

Land

180,000

Buildings

300,000

Current liabilities

140,000

Bonds payable

410,000

Record the purchase of Smith Company on the books of Rogers Corporation.

prepare an adjusted 20×2 pro forma income statement for the combined company fixed a 589869

Income after a purchase. On December 31, 20X1, Panama Corporation acquired the net assets of Keyes Corporation. On the date of acquisition, book values agreed with fair values of the net assets, with the following exceptions:

Book Value

Fair Value

Inventory

$100,000

$125,000

Land

200,000

250,000

Equipment (net)

350,000

380,000

Buildings (net)

400,000

475,000

Despite these markups, there was still an excess of purchase price over fair values, and goodwill of $75,000 was recorded by Panama Corporation. The following pro forma income statement for 20X2 was prepared just prior to the acquisition:

Panama

Keyes

Sales

$400,000

$300,000

Less: Cost of goods sold

200,000

140,000

Operating expenses

100,000

85,000

Other expenses

30,000

20,000

Net income

$70,000

$55,000

Prepare an adjusted 20X2 pro forma income statement for the combined company. Fixed assets are depreciated using the straight line method over a 20 year life.

record the purchase on the books of nectar corporation assuming the cash paid to pyr 589870

Bargain purchase. Nectar Corporation has agreed to purchase the net assets of Pyramid Corporation. Just prior to the purchase, Pyramid’s balance sheet was as follows:

Pyramid Corporation
Balance Sheet
January 1, 20X1

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts receivable

$200,000

Current liabilities

$80,000

Inventory

270,000

Mortgage payable

250,000

Equipment (net)

100,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par)

$100,000

Retained earnings

140,000

240,000

Total assets

$570,000

Total liabilities and equity

$570,000

Fair values agree with book values except for the equipment, which has an estimated fair value of $40,000. Also, it has been determined that brand name copyrights have an estimated value of $15,000. Nectar Corporation paid $10,000 in direct acquisition costs and $15,000 in indirect acquisition costs to consummate the transaction.

Record the purchase on the books of Nectar Corporation assuming the cash paid to Pyramid Corporation was $180,000. Suggestion: Use zone analysis to guide your calculations and entries.

prepare the entries to record the purchase of bass company assuming the cash payment 589871

Bargain purchase with allocation. Carp Corporation is purchasing the net assets of Bass Company on December 31, 20X6, when Bass Company has the following balance sheet:

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current assets

$100,000

Liabilities

$90,000

Land

50,000

Common stock ($10 par)

200,000

Buildings (net)

200,000

Retained earnings

140,000

Equipment (net)

60,000

Patents

20,000

Total assets

$430,000

Total liabilities and equity

$430,000

Carp has obtained the following fair values for Bass Company accounts:

Current assets

$120,000

Land

80,000

Buildings

250,000

Equipment

150,000

Liabilities

92,000

Patents

20,000

Direct acquisition costs are $18,000, and indirect acquisition costs are $5,000.

Prepare the entries to record the purchase of Bass Company assuming the cash payment by Carp Corporation to Bass Company is $400,000. Carp Corporation will assume the liabilities of Bass Company. Zone analysis is recommended.

the fair value of the net assets exclusive of goodwill was estimated to be 340 000 t 589873

Goodwill impairment. Anton Company purchased the net assets of Hair Company on January 1, 20X1, for $600,000. Using a business valuation model, the estimated value of Anton Company was $650,000 immediately after the purchase. The fair value of Anton’s net assets was $400,000.

1. What amount of goodwill was recorded by Anton Company when it purchased Hair Company?

2. Using the information above, answer the questions posed in the following two independent situations:

a. On December 31, 20X2, there were indications that goodwill might have been impaired.

At that time, the existing recorded book value of Anton Company’s net assets, including goodwill, was $500,000. The fair value of the net assets, exclusive of goodwill, was estimated to be $340,000. The value of the business was estimated to be $520,000. Is goodwill impaired? If so, what adjustment is needed?

b. On December 31, 20X4, there were indications that goodwill might have been impaired. At that time, the existing recorded book value of Anton Company’s net assets, including goodwill, was $450,000. The fair value of the net assets, exclusive of goodwill, was estimated to be $340,000. The value of the business was estimated to be $400,000. Is goodwill impaired? If so, what adjustment is needed?

comment on management s efficiency in controlling manufacturing overhead costs in oc 589432

Chamberlin Company estimates that 360,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the coming year, 2012, in the Packaging Department. On this basis, the following budgeted manufacturing overhead cost data are computed for the year.

Fixed Overhead Costs

Variable Overhead Costs

Supervision

$ 90,000

Indirect labor

$126,000

Depreciation

60,000

Indirect materials

90,000

Insurance

30,000

Repairs

54,000

Rent

24,000

Utilities

72,000

Property taxes

18,000

Lubricants

18,000

$222,000

$360,000

It is estimated that direct labor hours worked each month will range from 27,000 to 36,000 hours.

During October, 27,000 direct labor hours were worked and the following overhead costs were incurred.

Fixed overhead costs: Supervision $7,500, Depreciation $5,000, Insurance $2,470, Rent $2,000, and Property taxes $1,500.

Variable overhead costs: Indirect labor $10,360, Indirect materials, $6,400, Repairs $4,000, Utilities $5,700, and Lubricants $1,640.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for each increment of 3,000 direct labor hours over the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for October.

(c) Comment on management’s efficiency in controlling manufacturing overhead costs in October.

state the formula for computing the total budgeted costs for taylor company 589433

Taylor Company manufactures tablecloths. Sales have grown rapidly over the past 2 years. As a result, the president has installed a budgetary control system for 2012. The following data were used in developing the master manufacturing overhead budget for the Ironing Department, which is based on an activity index of direct labor hours.

Rate per Direct

Variable costs

Labor Hour

Indirect labor

$0.40

Supervision

$42,000

Indirect materials

0.50

Depreciation

18,000

Factory utilities

0.30

Insurance

12,000

Factory repairs

0.20

Rent

24,000

The master overhead budget was prepared on the expectation that 480,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the year. In June, 42,000 direct labor hours were worked. At that level of activity, actual costs were as shown below.

Variable—per direct labor hour: Indirect labor $0.43, Indirect materials $0.49, Factory utilities $0.32, and Factory repairs $0.24.

Fixed: same as budgeted.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for the year ending December 31, 2012, assuming production levels range from 35,000 to 50,000 direct labor hours. Use increments of 5,000 direct labor hours.

(b) Prepare a budget report for June comparing actual results with budget data based on the flexible budget.

(c) Were costs effectively controlled? Explain.

(d) State the formula for computing the total budgeted costs for Taylor Company.

(e) Prepare the flexible budget graph, showing total budgeted costs at 35,000 and 45,000 direct labor hours. Use increments of 5,000 direct labor hours on the horizontal axis and increments of $10,000 on the vertical axis.

state the total monthly budgeted cost formula 589434

Buckner Company uses budgets in controlling costs. The August 2012 budget report for the company’s Assembling Department is as follows.

Difference

Favorable F

Manufacturing Costs

Budget

Actual

Unfavorable U

Variable costs

Direct materials

$ 48,000

$ 47,000

$1,000 F

Direct labor

54,000

51,300

2,700 F

Indirect materials

24,000

24,200

200 U

Indirect labor

18,000

17,500

500 F

Utilities

15,000

14,900

100 F

Maintenance

9,000

9,200

200 U

Total variable

168,000

164,100

3,900 F

Fixed costs

Rent

12,000

12,000

–0–

Supervision

17,000

17,000

–0–

Depreciation

7,000

7,000

–0–

Total fixed

36,000

36,000

–0–

Total costs

$204,000

$200,100

$3,900 F

The monthly budget amounts in the report were based on an expected production of 60,000units per month or 720,000 units per year. The Assembling Department manager is pleased with the report and expects a raise, or at least praise for a job well done. The company president, however, is unhappy with the results for August because only 58,000 units were

produced.

Instructions

(a) State the total monthly budgeted cost formula.

(b) Prepare a budget report for August using flexible budget data. Why does this report provide a better basis for evaluating performance than the report based on static budget data?

(c) In September, 64,000 units were produced. Prepare the budget report using flexible budget data, assuming (1) each variable cost was 10% higher than its actual cost in August, and (2) fixed costs were the same in September as in August.

identify any costs excluded from the responsibility report and explain why they were 589435

Johnson Manufacturing Inc. operates the Patio Furniture Division as a profit center. Operating data for this division for the year ended December 31, 2012, are as shown on the page.

Difference

Budget

from Budget

Sales

$2,500,000

$60,000 F

Cost of goods sold

1,300,000

41,000 F

Variable

200,000

6,000 U

Controllable fixed

Selling and administrative

220,000

7,000 U

Variable

50,000

2,000 U

Controllable fixed

70,000

4,000 U

In addition, Johnson Manufacturing incurs $180,000 of indirect fixed costs that were budgeted at $175,000. Twenty percent (20%) of these costs are allocated to the Patio Furniture Division.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the Patio Furniture Division for the year.

(b) Comment on the manager’s performance in controlling revenues and costs.

(c) Identify any costs excluded from the responsibility report and explain why they were excluded.

evaluate the manager s performance which items will likely be investigated by top ma 589436

Namath Manufacturing Company manufactures a variety of tools and industrial equipment. The company operates through three divisions. Each division is an investment center. Operating data for the Home Division for the year ended December 31, 2012, and relevant budget data are as follows.

Actual

Comparison with Budget

Sales

$1,500,000

$100,000 favorable

Variable cost of goods sold

700,000

60,000 unfavorable

Variable selling and administrative expenses

125,000

25,000 unfavorable

Controllable fixed cost of goods sold

170,000

On target

Controllable fixed selling and

administrative expenses

80,000

On target

Average operating assets for the year for the Home Division were $2,500,000 which was also the budgeted amount.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report (in thousands of dollars) for the Home Division.

(b) Evaluate the manager’s performance. Which items will likely be investigated by top management?

(c) Compute the expected ROI in 2013 for the Home Division, assuming the following independent changes to actual data.

(1) Variable cost of goods sold is decreased by 6%.

(2) Average operating assets are decreased by 10%.

(3) Sales are increased by $200,000, and this increase is expected to increase contribution margin by $90,000.

in january 2012 controllable actual and budget manufacturing overhead cost data for 589437

Niekro Company uses a responsibility reporting system. It has divisions in Portland, Tacoma, and San Francisco. Each division has three production departments: Cutting, Shaping, and Finishing. The responsibility for each department rests with a manager who reports to the division production manager. Each division manager reports to the vice president of production. There are also vice presidents for marketing and finance. All vice presidents report to the president.

In January 2012, controllable actual and budget manufacturing overhead cost data for the departments and divisions were as shown below.

Manufacturing Overhead

Actual

Budget

Individual costs—Cutting Department—Tacoma

Indirect labor

$ 73,000

$ 70,000

Indirect materials

47,700

46,000

Maintenance

20,500

18,000

Utilities

20,100

17,000

Supervision

22,000

20,000

$183,300

$171,000

Total costs

Shaping Department—Tacoma

$158,000

$148,000

Finishing Department—Tacoma

210,000

206,000

Denver division

676,000

673,000

San Diego division

722,000

715,000

Additional overhead costs were incurred as follows: Tacoma division production manager— actual costs $52,500, budget $51,000; vice president of production—actual costs $65,000, budget $64,000; president—actual costs $76,400, budget $74,200. These expenses are not allocated.

The vice presidents who report to the president, other than the vice president of production, had the following expenses.

Vice President

Actual

Budget

Marketing

$133,600

$130,000

Finance

109,000

105,000

Instructions

(a)Prepare the following responsibility reports.

(1) Manufacturing overhead—Cutting Department manager—Tacoma division.

(2) Manufacturing overhead—Tacoma division manager.

(3) Manufacturing overhead—vice president of production.

(4) Manufacturing overhead and expenses—president.

(b) Comment on the comparative performances of:

(1) Department managers in the Tacoma division.

(2) Division managers.

(3) Vice presidents.

state the formula for computing the total monthly budgeted costs in the lombardi man 589439

Lombardi Manufacturing Company produces one product, Olpe. Because of wide fl uctuation in demand for Olpe, the Assembly Department experiences significant variations in monthly production levels.

The annual master manufacturing overhead budget is based on 300,000 direct labor hours. In July, 27,500 labor hours were worked. The master manufacturing overhead budget for the year and the actual overhead costs incurred in July are as follows.

Master Budget

Actual

Overhead Costs

(annual)

in July

Variable

Indirect labor

$330,000

$29,000

Indirect materials

180,000

14,000

Utilities

90,000

8,100

Maintenance

60,000

5,400

Fixed

Supervision

150,000

12,500

Depreciation

96,000

8,000

Insurance and taxes

60,000

5,000

Total

$966,000

$82,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a monthly overhead flexible budget for the year ending December 31, 2012, assuming monthly production levels range from 22,500 to 30,000 direct labor hours. Use increments of 2,500 direct labor hours.

(b) Prepare a budget report for the month of July 2012 comparing actual results with budget data based on the flexible budget.

(c) Were costs effectively controlled? Explain.

(d) State the formula for computing the total monthly budgeted costs in the Lombardi Manufacturing Company.

(e) Prepare the flexible budget graph showing total budgeted costs at 25,000 and 27,500 direct labor hours. Use increments of 5,000 on the horizontal axis and increments of $10,000 on the vertical axis.

identify any costs excluded from the responsibility report and explain why they were 589440

Jordan Company uses budgets in controlling costs. The May 2012 budget report for the company’s Packaging Department is as follows.

Difference

Budget

from Budget

Sales

$2,400,000

$100,000 U

Cost of goods sold

Variable

1,200,000

60,000 U

Controllable fixed

200,000

8,000 F

Selling and administrative

Variable

240,000

8,000 F

Controllable fixed

60,000

4,000 U

Noncontrollable fixed costs

50,000

2,000 U

In addition, Collins Manufacturing incurs $150,000 of indirect fixed costs that were budgeted at$155,000. Twenty percent (20%) of these costs are allocated to the Home Appliance Division. None of these costs are controllable by the division manager.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the Home Appliance Division (a profit center) for the year.

(b) Comment on the manager’s performance in controlling revenues and costs.

(c) Identify any costs excluded from the responsibility report and explain why they were excluded.

what course of action do you recommend for the management of organic pastures 589443

Organic Pastures is a 400 acre farm on the outskirts of the Kentucky Bluegrass, specializing in the boarding of broodmares and their foals. A recent economic downturn in the thoroughbred industry has led to a decline in breeding activities, and it has made the boarding business extremely competitive. To meet the competition, Organic Pastures planned in 2012 to entertain clients, advertise more extensively, and absorb expenses formerly paid by clients such as veterinary and blacksmith fees. The budget report for 2012 is presented below. As shown, the static income statement budget for the year is based on an expected 21,900 boarding days at $25 per mare. The variable expenses per mare per day were budgeted: Feed $5, Veterinary fees $3, Blacksmith fees $0.30, and Supplies $0.55. All other budgeted expenses were either semi fixed or fixed.

During the year, management decided not to replace a worker who quit in March, but it did issue a new advertising brochure and did more entertaining of clients.1

ORGANIC PASTURES

Static Budget Income Statement

Year Ended December 31, 2012

Master

Actual

Budget

Difference

Number of mares per day

52

60

8*

Number of boarding days

18,980

21,900

2,920*

Sales

$379,600

$547,500

$167,900*

Less variable expenses:

Feed

104,390

109,500

5,110

Veterinary fees

58,838

65,700

6,862

Blacksmith fees

6,074

6,570

496

Supplies

10,178

12,045

1,867

Total variable expenses

179,480

193,815

14,335

Contribution margin

200,120

353,685

153,565*

Less fixed expenses:

Depreciation

40,000

40,000

–0–

Insurance

11,000

11,000

–0–

Utilities

12,000

14,000

2,000

Repairs and maintenance

10,000

11,000

1,000

Labor

88,000

96,000

8,000

Advertisement

12,000

8,000

4,000*

Entertainment

7,000

5,000

2,000*

Total fixed expenses

180,000

185,000

5,000

Net income

$ 20,120

$168,685

$148,565*

*Unfavorable.

1Data for this case are based on Hans Sprohge and John Talbott, “New Applications for Variance Analysis,” Journal of Accountancy (AICPA, New York), April 1989, pp. 137–141.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Based on the static budget report:

(1) What was the primary cause(s) of the loss in net income?

(2) Did management do a good, average, or poor job of controlling expenses?

(3) Were management’s decisions to stay competitive sound?

(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for the year based on boarding days.

(c) Based on the flexible budget report, answer the three questions in part (a) above.

(d) What course of action do you recommend for the management of Organic Pastures?

determine which of the items should be included in the responsibility report for eac 589444

Rambis Company manufactures expensive watch cases sold as souvenirs. Three of its sales departments are: Retail Sales, Wholesale Sales, and Outlet Sales. The Retail Sales Department is a profit center. The Wholesale Sales Department is a cost center. Its managers merely take orders from customers who purchase through the company’s wholesale catalog. The Outlet Sales Department is an investment center, because each manager is given full responsibility for an outlet store location. The manager can hire and discharge employees; purchase, maintain, and sell equipment; and in general is fairly independent of company control.

Maria Diego is a manager in the Retail Sales Department. Phil Jackson manages the Wholesale Sales Department. Dan Hsu manages the Golden Gate Club outlet store in San Francisco. The following are the budget responsibility reports for each of the three departments.

Budget

Retail

Wholesale

Outlet

Sales

Sales

Sales

Sales

$ 750,000

$ 400,000

$200,000

Variable costs

Cost of goods sold

150,000

100,000

25,000

Advertising

100,000

30,000

5,000

Sales salaries

75,000

15,000

3,000

Printing

10,000

20,000

5,000

Travel

20,000

30,000

2,000

Fixed costs

Rent

50,000

30,000

10,000

Insurance

5,000

2,000

1,000

Depreciation

75,000

100,000

40,000

Investment in assets

$1,000,000

$1,200,000

$800,000

Actual Results

Retail

Wholesale

Outlet

Sales

Sales

Sales

Sales

$ 750,000

$ 400,000

$200,000

Variable costs

Cost of goods sold

195,000

120,000

26,250

Advertising

100,000

30,000

5,000

Sales salaries

75,000

15,000

3,000

Printing

10,000

20,000

5,000

Travel

15,000

20,000

1,500

Fixed costs

Rent

40,000

50,000

12,000

Insurance

5,000

2,000

1,000

Depreciation

80,000

90,000

60,000

Investment in assets

$1,000,000

$1,200,000

$800,000

Instructions

(a) Determine which of the items should be included in the responsibility report for each of the three managers.

(b) Compare the actual results with the budget. Decide which results should be called to the attention of each manager.

what type of budgeting seems appropriate for the computer associates situation 589445

Computer Associates International, Inc., the world’s leading business software company, delivers the end to end infrastructure to enable e business through innovative technology, services, and education. Computer Associates has 19,000 employees worldwide and recently had revenue of over $6 billion.

Presented below is information from the company’s annual report.

Computer Associates International

Management Discussion

The Company has experienced a pattern of business whereby revenue for its third and fourth fiscal quarters reflects an increase over first and second quarter revenue. The Company attributes this increase to clients’ increased spending at the end of their calendar year budgetary periods and the culmination of its annual sales plan. Since the

Company’s costs do not increase proportionately with the third and fourth quarters’ increase in revenue, the higher revenue in these quarters results in greater profit margins and income. Fourth quarter profitability is traditionally affected by significant new hirings, training, and education expenditures for the succeeding ye ar.

Instructions

(a) Why don’t the company’s costs increase proportionately as the revenues increase in the third and fourth quarters?

(b) What type of budgeting seems appropriate for the Computer Associates situation?

determine which items would be controllable by bart starr the production manager 589447

The manufacturing overhead budget for Barkley Company contains the following items.

Variable costs

Fixed costs

Indirect materials

$24,000

Supervision

$18,000

Indirect labor

12,000

Inspection costs

1,000

Maintenance expense

10,000

Insurance expense

2,000

Manufacturing supplies

6,000

Depreciation

15,000

Total variable

$52,000

Total fixed

$36,000

The budget was based on an estimated 2,000 units being produced. During the past month, 1,500 units were produced, and the following costs incurred.

Variable costs

Fixed costs

Indirect materials

$24,200

Supervision

$18,000

Indirect labor

13,500

Inspection costs

1,000

Maintenance expense

8,200

Insurance expense

2,000

Manufacturing supplies

5,100

Depreciation

15,000

Total variable

$51,000

Total fixed

$36,000

Instructions

(a) Determine which items would be controllable by Bart Starr, the production manager.

(b) How much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1,500 units?

(c) Prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget report for Mr. Starr.

(d) Prepare a responsibility report. Include only the costs that would have been controllable by Mr. Starr. Assume that the supervision cost above includes Mr. Starr’s salary of $10,000, both at budget and actual. In an attached memo, describe clearly for Mr. Starr the areas in which his performance needs to be improved.

identify the ethical implications conflicts or dilemmas in the above described situa 589448

Continental Products Corporation participates in a highly competitive industry. In order to meet this competition and achieve profit goals, the company has chosen the decentralized form of organization. Each manager of a decentralized investment center is measured on the basis of profit contribution, market penetration, and return on investment. Failure to meet the objectives established by corporate management for these measures has not been acceptable and usually has resulted in demotion or dismissal of an investment center manager.

An anonymous survey of managers in the company revealed that the managers feel the pressure to compromise their personal ethical standards to achieve the corporate objectives. For example, at certain plant locations there was pressure to reduce quality control to a level which could not assure that all unsafe products would be rejected. Also, sales personnel were encouraged to use questionable sales tactics to obtain orders, including gifts and other incentives to purchasing agents.

The chief executive officer is disturbed by the survey findings. In his opinion, such behavior cannot be condoned by the company. He concludes that the company should do something about this problem.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders (the affected parties) in this situation?

(b) Identify the ethical implications, conflicts, or dilemmas in the above described situation.

(c) What might the company do to reduce the pressures on managers and decrease the ethical conflicts?

compute the total variance for manufacturing overhead 589456

Manlow Company makes a cologne called Allure. The standard cost for one bottle of Allure is as follows.

Standard

Manufacturing Cost Elements

Quantity

3

Price

5

Cost

Direct materials

6 oz.

3

$ 0.90

5

$ 5.40

Direct labor

0.5 hrs.

3

$12.00

5

6.00

Manufacturing overhead

0.5 hrs.

3

$ 4.80

5

2.40

$13.80

During the month, the following transactions occurred in manufacturing 10,000 bottles of Allure.

1. 58,000 ounces of materials were purchased at $1.00 per ounce.

2. All the materials purchased were used to produce the 10,000 bottles of Allure.

3. 4,900 direct labor hours were worked at a total labor cost of $56,350.

4. Variable manufacturing overhead incurred was $15,000 and fixed overhead incurred was $10,400.

The manufacturing overhead rate of $4.80 is based on a normal capacity of 5,200 direct labor hours. The total budget at this capacity is $10,400 fixed and $14,560 variable.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total variance for the three cost elements, and the price and quantity variances for direct materials and direct labor.

(b) Compute the total variance for manufacturing overhead.

compute sergey s total standard cost per unit 589504

Sergey Company has gathered the information shown below about its product.

Direct materials: Each unit of product contains 4.5 pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is 0.5 pounds. Materials cost $4 per pound, but Sergey always takes the 2% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.25 per pound.

Direct labor: Each unit requires 2 hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average 0.2 hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Sergey’s employees is $12. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional $3 per hour.

Manufacturing overhead: Overhead is applied at a rate of $6 per direct labor hour.

Instructions

Compute Sergey’s total standard cost per unit.

determine the standard direct labor cost per oil change 589505

Rush Repair Services, Inc. is trying to establish the standard labor cost of a typical oil change. The following data have been collected from time and motion studies conducted over the past month.

Actual time spent on the oil change

1.0 hour

Hourly wage rate

$10

Payroll taxes

10% of wage rate

Setup and downtime

10% of actual labor time

Cleanup and rest periods

30% of actual labor time

Fringe benefits

25% of wage rate

Instructions

(a) Determine the standard direct labor hours per oil change.

(b) Determine the standard direct labor hourly rate.

(c) Determine the standard direct labor cost per oil change.

(d) If an oil change took 1.5 hours at the standard hourly rate, what was the direct labor quantity variance?

compute the total price and quantity variances for materials and labor 589508

Injin Inc., which produces a single product, has prepared the following standard cost sheet for one unit of the product.

Direct materials (8 pounds at $2.50 per pound)

$20

Direct labor (3 hours at $12.00 per hour)

$36

During the month of April, the company manufactures 230 units and incurs the following actual costs.

Direct materials purchased and used (1,900 pounds)

$4,940

Direct labor (700 hours)

$8,120

Instructions

Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.

compute the total price and quantity variances for materials and labor 589509

The direct materials and direct labor data shown below pertain to the operations of Viet Manufacturing Company for the month of August.

Costs

Quantities

Actual labor rate

$13 per hour

Actual hours incurred

and used

4,200 hours

Actual materials price

$128 per ton

Actual quantity of

materials purchased

and used

1,200 tons

Standard labor rate

$12 per hour

Standard hours used

1,200 tons

Standard materials price

$130 per ton

Standard quantity of

materials used

1,200 tons

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.

(b) Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.

prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labor cost variances for march 589510

During March 2012, Tyson Tool & Die Company worked on four jobs. A review of direct labor costs reveals the following summary data.

Job

Actual

Standard

Total

Number

Hours

Costs

Hours

Costs

Variance

A257

220

$4,400

225

$4,500

$ 100 F

A258

450

9,900

430

8,600

1,300 U

A259

300

6,150

300

6,000

150 U

A260

115

2,070

110

2,200

130 F

Total variance

$1,220 U

Analysis reveals that Job A257 was a repeat job. Job A258 was a rush order that required overtime work at premium rates of pay. Job A259 required a more experienced replacement worker on one shift. Work on Job A260 was done for one day by a new trainee when a regular worker was absent.

Instructions

Prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labor cost variances for March. The report should have columns for (1) Job No., (2) Actual Hours, (3) Standard Hours, (4) Quantity Variance, (5) Actual Rate, (6) Standard Rate, (7) Price Variance, and (8) Explanation.

betty williams rsquo regular hourly wage rate is 14 and she receives a wage of 11 fr 589641

Betty Williams’ regular hourly wage rate is $14, and she receives a wage of 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for work in excess of 40 hours. During a March weekly pay period Betty worked 42 hours. Her gross earnings prior to the current week were $6,000. Betty is married and claims three withholding allowances. Her only voluntary deduction is for group hospitalization insurance at $15 per week.

Instructions

(a) Compute the following amounts for Betty’s wages for the current week.

(1) Gross earnings.

(2) FICA taxes. (Assume an 8% rate on maximum of $106,800.)

(3) Federal income taxes withheld. (Use the withholding table in the text, page D7.)

(4) State income taxes withheld. (Assume a 2.0% rate.)

(5) Net pay.

(b) Record Betty’s pay, assuming she is an office computer operator.

compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs show physical uni 589367

FIFO method, spoilage, equivalent units. Suppose Gray Manufacturing Company uses the FIFO method of process costing instead of the weighted average method. Compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs. Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

Physical Units (Pennants)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, November 1a

1,000

$ 1,423

$ 1,110

Started in November 2012

?

Good units completed and transferred

out during November 2012

9,000

Normal spoilage

100

Abnormal spoilage

50

Work in process, November 30b

2,000

Total costs added during November 2012

$12,180

$27,750

compute the controllable margin and the return on investment for 2012 589372

The service division of Metro Industries reported the following results for 2012.

Sales

$400,000

Variable costs

320,000

Controllable fixed costs

40,800

Average operating assets

280,000

Management is considering the following independent courses of action in 2013 in order to maximize the return on investment for this division.

1. Reduce average operating assets by $80,000, with no change in controllable margin.

2. Increase sales $80,000, with no change in the contribution margin percentage.

(a) Compute the controllable margin and the return on investment for 2012.

(b) Compute the controllable margin and the expected return on investment for each proposed alternative.

prepare a flexible budget report for the packaging department for july 589373

Glenda Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. For 2012, the master overhead budget for the Packaging Department based on 300,000 direct labor hours was as follows.

Variable Costs

Fixed Costs

Indirect labor

$360,000

Supervision

$ 60,000

Supplies and lubricants

150,000

Depreciation

24,000

Maintenance

210,000

Property taxes

18,000

Utilities

120,000

Insurance

12,000

Indirect labor

$840,000

$114,000

During July, 24,000 direct labor hours were worked. The company incurred the following variable costs in July: indirect labor $30,200, supplies and lubricants $11,600, maintenance $17,500, and utilities $9,200. Actual fixed overhead costs were the same as monthly budgeted fixed costs.

Instructions

Prepare a flexible budget report for the Packaging Department for July.

how much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1 500 un 589374

The manufacturing overhead budget for Reebles Company contains the following items:

Variable costs

Indirect materials

$25,000

Indirect labor

12,000

Maintenance expenses

10,000

Manufacturing supplies

6,000

Total variable

$53,000

Fixed costs

Supervision

$17,000

Inspection costs

1,000

Insurance expenses

2,000

Depreciation

15,000

Total fixed

$35,000

The budget was based on an estimated 2,000 units being produced. During November, 1,500 units were produced, and the following costs incurred.

Variable costs

Indirect materials

$25,000

Indirect labor

13,500

Maintenance expenses

8,200

Manufacturing supplies

5,100

Total variable

$52,000

Fixed costs

Supervision

$19,300

Inspection costs

1,200

Insurance expenses

2,200

Depreciation

14,700

Total fixed

$37,400

Instructions

(a) Determine which items would be controllable by Ed Lopat, the production manager. (Assume “supervision” excludes Lopat’s own salary.)

(b) How much should have been spent during the month for the manufacture of the 1,500 units?

(c) Prepare a flexible manufacturing overhead budget report for Mr. Lopat.

(d) Prepare a responsibility report. Include only the costs that would have been controllable by Mr. Lopat. In an attached memo, describe clearly for Mr. Lopat the areas in which his performance needs to be improved.

prepare a responsibility report for the far west division at december 31 2012 589377

The Far West Division operates as a profit center. It reports the following for the year.

Budgeted

Actual

Sales

$2,000,000

$1,800,000

Variable costs

800,000

750,000

Controllable fixed costs

550,000

550,000

Noncontrollable fixed costs

250,000

250,000

Prepare a responsibility report for the Far West Division at December 31, 2012.

prepare a responsibility report for april for the cost center 589410

In the Assembly Department of Mantle Company, budgeted and actual manufacturing overhead costs for the month of April 2012 were as follows.

Budget

Actual

Indirect materials

$15,000

$14,300

Indirect labor

20,000

20,600

Utilities

10,000

10,750

Supervision

5,000

5,000

All costs are controllable by the department manager. Prepare a responsibility report for April for the cost center.

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 589415

Bruce Willis has prepared the following list of statements about budgetary control.

1. Budget reports compare actual results with planned objectives.

2. All budget reports are prepared on a weekly basis.

3. Management uses budget reports to analyze differences between actual and planned results and determine their causes.

4. As a result of analyzing budget reports, management may either take corrective action or modify future plans.

5. Budgetary control works best when a company has an informal reporting system.

6. The primary recipients of the sales report are the sales manager and the vice president of production.

7. The primary recipient of the scrap report is the production manager.

8. A static budget is a projection of budget data at one level of activity.

9. Top management’s reaction to unfavorable differences is not influenced by the materiality of the difference.

10. A static budget is not appropriate in evaluating a manager’s effectiveness in controlling costs unless the actual activity level approximates the static budget activity level or the behavior of the costs is fixed.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for 2012 for the expected r 589417

Rooney Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per direct labor hour are as follows.

Indirect labor

$1.00

Indirect materials

0.50

Utilities

0.40

Fixed overhead costs per month are: Supervision $4,000, Depreciation $1,500, and Property Taxes $800. The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 7,000–10,000 direct labor hours per month.

Instructions

Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for 2012 for the expected range of activity, using increments of 1,000 direct labor hours.

prepare a flexible budget performance report assuming that the company worked 9 000 589418

Using the information in E24 3, assume that in July 2012, Rooney Company incurs the following manufacturing overhead costs.

Variable Costs

Fixed Costs

Indirect labor

$8,700

Supervision

$4,000

Indirect materials

4,300

Depreciation

1,500

Utilities

3,200

Property taxes

800

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget performance report, assuming that the company worked 9,000 direct labor hours during the month.

(b) Prepare a flexible budget performance report, assuming that the company worked 8,500 direct labor hours during the month.

(c) Comment on your findings.

comment on the importance of using flexible budgets in evaluating the performance of 589420

The actual selling expenses incurred in March 2012 by Russell Company are as follows.

Variable Expenses

Fixed Expenses

Sales commissions

$9,200

Sales salaries

$34,000

Advertising

7,000

Depreciation

7,000

Travel

5,100

Insurance

1,000

Delivery

3,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget performance report for March using the budget data in E24 5, assuming that March sales were $170,000. Expected and actual sales are the same.

(b) Prepare a flexible budget performance report, assuming that March sales were $180,000.Expected sales and actual sales are the same.

(c) Comment on the importance of using flexible budgets in evaluating the performance of the sales manager.

prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget report for the first quarter 589421

Byrd Company’s manufacturing overhead budget for the first quarter of 2012 contained the following data.

Variable Costs

Fixed Costs

Indirect materials

$12,000

Supervisory salaries

$36,000

Indirect labor

10,000

Depreciation

7,000

Utilities

8,000

Property taxes and insurance

8,000

Maintenance

6,000

Maintenance

5,000

Actual variable costs were: indirect materials $13,800, indirect labor $9,600, utilities $8,700, and maintenance $4,900. Actual fixed costs equaled budgeted costs except for property taxes and insurance, which were $8,200.

All costs are considered controllable by the production department manager except for depreciation, and property taxes and insurance.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a manufacturing overhead flexible budget report for the first quarter.

(b) Prepare a responsibility report for the first quarter.

prepare a budget report based on flexible budget data to help magic 589422

As sales manager, Magic Johnson was given the following static budget report for selling expenses in the Clothing Department of Lakers Company for the month of October.

LAKERS COMPANY

Clothing Department

Selling Expense Budget Report

For the Month Ended October 31, 2012

Difference

Favorable F

Budget

Actual

Unfavorable U

Sales in units

8,000

10,000

2,000 F

Variable expenses

Sales commissions

$ 2,000

$ 2,600

$ 600 U

Advertising expense

800

850

50 U

Travel expense

3,600

4,000

400 U

Free samples given out

1,600

1,300

300 F

Total variable

8,000

8,750

750 U

Fixed expenses

Rent

1,500

1,500

–0–

Sales salaries

1,200

1,200

–0–

Office salaries

800

800

–0–

Depreciation—autos (sales staff)

500

500

–0–

Total fixed

4,000

4,000

–0–

Total expenses

$12,000

$12,750

$ 750 U

As a result of this budget report, Magic was called into the president’s office and congratulated on his fine sales performance. He was reprimanded, however, for allowing his costs to get out of control. Magic knew something was wrong with the performance report that he had been given. However, he was not sure what to do, and comes to you for advice.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a budget report based on flexible budget data to help Magic.

(b) Should Magic have been reprimanded? Explain.

write a memo to peyton manning discussing the principles that should be used when pr 589423

Manning Plumbing Company is a newly formed company specializing in plumbing services for home and business. The owner, Peyton Manning, had divided the company into two segments: Home Plumbing Services and Business Plumbing Services. Each segment is run by its own supervisor, while basic selling and administrative services are shared by both segments.

Peyton has asked you to help him create a performance reporting system that will allow him tomeasure each segment’s performance in terms of its profitability. To that end, the following information has been collected on the Home Plumbing Services segment for the first quarter of 2012.

Budgeted

Actual

Service revenue

$25,000

$26,000

Allocated portion of:

Building depreciation

11,000

11,000

Advertising

5,000

4,200

Billing

3,500

3,000

Property taxes

1,200

1,000

Material and supplies

1,500

1,200

Supervisory salaries

9,000

9,400

Insurance

4,000

3,500

Wages

3,000

3,300

Gas and oil

2,700

3,400

Equipment depreciation

1,600

1,300

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the first quarter of 2012 for the Home Plumbing Services segment.

(b) Write a memo to Peyton Manning discussing the principles that should be used when preparing performance reports.

brees company has two production departments fabricating and assembling 589424

Brees Company has two production departments, Fabricating and Assembling. At a department managers’ meeting, the controller uses flexible budget graphs to explain total budgeted costs. Separate graphs based on direct labor hours are used for each department. The graphs show the following.

1. At zero direct labor hours, the total budgeted cost line and the fixed cost line intersect the vertical axis at $40,000 in the Fabricating Department and $30,000 in the Assembling Department.

2. At normal capacity of 50,000 direct labor hours, the line drawn from the total budgeted cost line intersects the vertical axis at $150,000 in the Fabricating Department, and $110,000 in the Assembling Department.

Instructions

(a) State the total budgeted cost formula for each department.

(b) Compute the total budgeted cost for each department, assuming actual direct labor hours worked were 53,000 and 47,000, in the Fabricating and Assembling Departments, respectively.

(c) Prepare the flexible budget graph for the Fabricating Department, assuming the maximum direct labor hours in the relevant range is 100,000. Use increments of 10,000 direct labor hours on the horizontal axis and increments of $50,000 on the vertical axis.

the new orleans plant manager s office costs were 95 000 actual and 92 000 budget 589425

Bush Company’s organization chart includes the president; the vice president of production; three assembly plants—New Orleans, Houston, and Mobile; and two departments within each plant—Machining and Finishing. Budget and actual manufacturing cost data for July 2012 are as follows:

Finishing Department—New Orleans: Direct materials $41,500 actual, $45,000 budget; direct labor $83,000 actual, $82,000 budget; manufacturing overhead $51,000 actual, $49,200 budget.

Machining Department—New Orleans: Total manufacturing costs $220,000 actual, $216,000 budget.

Houston Plant: Total manufacturing costs $424,000 actual, $421,000 budget.

Mobile Plant: Total manufacturing costs $494,000 actual, $496,500 budget.

The New Orleans plant manager’s office costs were $95,000 actual and $92,000 budget. The vice president of production’s office costs were $132,000 actual and $130,000 budget. Office costs are not allocated to departments and plants.

Instructions

Prepare the reports in a responsibility system for:

(a) The Finishing Department—New Orleans.

(b) The plant manager—New Orleans.

(c) The vice president of production.

what would be the likely result of management s analysis of the report 589426

The Mixing Department manager of Vikings Company is able to control all overhead costs except rent, property taxes, and salaries. Budgeted monthly overhead costs for the Mixing Department, in alphabetical order, are:

Indirect labor

$12,000

Property taxes

$ 1,000

Indirect materials

7,500

Rent

1,800

Lubricants

1,700

Salaries

10,000

Maintenance

3,500

Utilities

5,000

Indirect labor

$12,000

Property taxes

$ 1,000

Actual costs incurred for January 2012 are indirect labor $12,200; indirect materials $10,200; lubricants $1,650; maintenance $3,500; property taxes $1,100; rent $1,800; salaries $10,000; and utilities $6,500.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for January 2012.

(b) What would be the likely result of management’s analysis of the report?

compute the missing amounts show computations 589427

Maguire Manufacturing Inc. has three divisions which are operated as profit centers. Actual operating data for the divisions listed alphabetically are as follows.

Operating Data

Women’s Shoes

Men’s Shoes

Children’s Shoes

Contribution margin

$240,000

(3)

$180,000

Controllable fixed costs

100,000

(4)

(5)

Controllable margin

(1)

$ 90,000

96,000

Sales

600,000

450,000

(6)

Variable costs

(2)

330,000

250,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the missing amounts. Show computations.

(b) Prepare a responsibility report for the Women’s Shoes Division assuming (1) the data are forthe month ended June 30, 2012, and (2) all data equal budget except variable costs which are $10,000 over budget.

prepare a responsibility report for the sports equipment division for 2012 589428

The Sports Equipment Division of Bob Gibson Company is operated as a profit center.Sales for the division were budgeted for 2012 at $900,000. The only variable costs budgeted for the division were cost of goods sold ($440,000) and selling and administrative ($60,000). Fixed costs were budgeted at $100,000 for cost of goods sold, $90,000 for selling and administrative, and $70,000 for noncontrollable fixed costs. Actual results for these items were:

Sales

$880,000

Cost of goods sold

Variable

409,000

Fixed

105,000

Selling and administrative

Variable

61,000

Fixed

67,000

Noncontrollable fixed

80,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the Sports Equipment Division for 2012.

(b) Assume, instead, the division is an investment center, and average operating assets were $1,000,000. Compute ROI.

compute the return on investment roi for the current year 589429

The Red Division of Tarkington Company reported the following data for the current year.

Sales

$3,000,000

Variable costs

1,950,000

Controllable fixed costs

600,000

Average operating assets

5,000,000

Top management is unhappy with the investment center’s return on investment (ROI). It asks the manager of the Red Division to submit plans to improve ROI in the next year. The manager believes it is feasible to consider the following independent courses of action.

1. Increase sales by $320,000 with no change in the contribution margin percentage.

2. Reduce variable costs by $100,000.

3. Reduce average operating assets by 4%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the return on investment (ROI) for the current year.

(b) Using the ROI formula, compute the ROI under each of the proposed courses of action. (Round to one decimal.)

determine the missing pieces of information above 589431

The Panamerican Transportation Company uses a responsibility reporting system to measure the performance of its three investment centers: Planes, Taxis, and Limos. Segment performance is measured using a system of responsibility reports and return on investment calculations. The allocation of resources within the company and the segment managers’ bonuses are based in part on the results shown in these reports.

Recently, the company was the victim of a computer virus that deleted portions of the company’s accounting records. This was discovered when the current period’s responsibility reports were being prepared. The printout of the actual operating results appeared as follows.

Planes

Taxis

Limos

Service revenue

$ ?

$500,000

$ ?

Variable costs

5,500,000

?

320,000

Contribution margin

?

200,000

480,000

Controllable fixed costs

1,500,000

?

?

Controllable margin

?

80,000

240,000

Average operating assets

25,000,000

?

1,600,000

Return on investment

12%

10%

?

Instructions

Determine the missing pieces of information above.

summarize total costs to account for and assign total costs to units completed and t 589335

Weighted average method, assigning costs. Bio Doc Corporation is a biotech company based in Milpitas. It makes a cancer treatment drug in a single processing department. Direct materials are added at the start of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. Bio Doc uses the weighted average method of process costing. The following information for July 2011 is available.

Equivalent Units

Physical Units

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, July 1

8,500

8,500

1,700

Started during July

35,000

Completed and transferred out during July

33,000

33,000

33,000

Work in process, July 31

10,500

10,500

6,300

Total Costs for July 2008

Work in process, beginning

Direct materials

$63,100

Conversion costs

45,510

$108,610

Direct materials added during July

284,900

Conversion costs added during July

485,040

Total costs to account for

$878,550

1. Calculate cost per equivalent unit for direct materials and conversion costs.

2. Summarize total costs to account for, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

to complete beginning work in process to start and complete new units and to produce 589336

FIFO method, assigning costs.

using the FIFO method. Note that you first need to calculate the equivalent units of work done in the current period (for direct materials and conversion costs) to complete beginning work in process, to start and complete new units, and to produce ending work in process.

Equivalent Units

Physical Units

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, July 1

8,500

8,500

1,700

Started during July

35,000

Completed and transferred out during July

33,000

33,000

33,000

Work in process, July 31

10,500

10,500

6,300

Total Costs for July 2008

Work in process, beginning

Direct materials

$63,100

Conversion costs

45,510

$108,610

Direct materials added during July

284,900

Conversion costs added during July

485,040

Total costs to account for

$878,550

compute the total direct materials and conversion costs variances for july 2011 589337

Standard costing method, assigning costs. Suppose Bio Doc determines standard costs of $8.25 per equivalent unit for direct materials and $12.70 per equivalent unit for conversion costs for both beginning work in process and work done in the current period.

1. Using the standard costing method.

Note that you first need to calculate the equivalent units of work done in the current period (for direct materials and conversion costs) to complete beginning work in process, to start and complete new units, and to produce ending work in process.

2. Compute the total direct materials and conversion costs variances for July 2011.

Equivalent Units

Physical Units

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, July 1

8,500

8,500

1,700

Started during July

35,000

Completed and transferred out during July

33,000

33,000

33,000

Work in process, July 31

10,500

10,500

6,300

Total Costs for July 2008

Work in process, beginning

Direct materials

$63,100

Conversion costs

45,510

$108,610

Direct materials added during July

284,900

Conversion costs added during July

485,040

Total costs to account for

$878,550

calculate equivalent units of transferred in costs direct materials and conversion c 589338

Transferred in costs, weighted average method. Asaya Clothing, Inc., is a manufacturer of winter clothes. It has a knitting department and a finishing department. This exercise focuses on the finishing department. Direct materials are added at the end of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. Asaya uses the weighted average method of process costing. The following information for June 2012 is available.

A

B

C

D

E

1

Physical Units (tons)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

2

Work in process, beginning inventory (June 1)

75

$ 75,000

$ 0

$30,000

3

Degree of completion, beginning work in process

100%

0%

60%

4

Transferred in during June

135

5

Completed and transferred out during June

150

6

Work in process, ending inventory (June 30)

60

7

Degree of completion, ending work in process

100%

0%

75%

8

Total costs added during June

$142,500

$37,500

$78,000

1. Calculate equivalent units of transferred in costs, direct materials, and conversion costs. Required

2. Summarize total costs to account for, and calculate the cost per equivalent unit for transferred in costs, direct materials, and conversion costs.

3. Assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

using the fifo method note that you first need to calculate equivalent units of work 589339

Transferred in costs, FIFO method. Suppose that Asaya uses the FIFO method instead of the weighted average method in all of its departments. The only changes to under the FIFO method are that total transferred in costs of beginning work in process on June 1 are $60,000 (instead of $75,000) and total transferred in costs added during June are $130,800 (instead of $142,500).Using the FIFO method. Note that you first need to calculate equivalent units of work done in the current period (for transferred in costs, direct materials, and conversion costs) to complete beginning work in process, to start and complete new units, and to produce ending work in process.

A

B

C

D

E

1

Physical Units (tons)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

2

Work in process, beginning inventory (June 1)

75

$ 75,000

$ 0

$30,000

3

Degree of completion, beginning work in process

100%

0%

60%

4

Transferred in during June

135

5

Completed and transferred out during June

150

6

Work in process, ending inventory (June 30)

60

7

Degree of completion, ending work in process

100%

0%

75%

8

Total costs added during June

$142,500

$37,500

$78,000

calculate the budgeted cost of goods manufactured for vitamin a vitamin b and the mu 589340

Operation Costing. UB Healthy Company manufactures three different types of vitamins: vitamin A, vitamin B, and a multivitamin. The company uses four operations to manufacture the vitamins: mixing, tableting, encapsulating, and bottling. Vitamins A and B are produced in tablet form (in the tableting department) and the multivitamin is produced in capsule form (in the encapsulating department). Each bottle contains 200 vitamins, regardless of the product. Conversion costs are applied based on the number of bottles in the tableting and encapsulating departments. Conversion costs are applied based on labor hours in the mixing department. It takes 1.5 minutes to mix the ingredients for a 200 unit bottle for each product. Conversion costs are applied based on machine hours in the bottling department. It takes 1 minute of machine time to fill a 200 unit bottle, regardless of the product. UB Healthy is planning to complete one batch of each type of vitamin in July. The budgeted number of bottles and expected direct material cost for each type of vitamin is as follows:

Vitamin A

Vitamin B

Multivitamin

Number of 200 unit bottles

12,000

9,000

18,000

Direct material cost

$23,040

$21,600

$47,520

The budgeted conversion costs for each department for July are as follows:

Department

Budgeted Conversion Cost

Mixing

$ 8,190

Tableting

24,150

Encapsulating

25,200

Bottling

3,510

1. Calculate the conversion cost rates for each department.

2. Calculate the budgeted cost of goods manufactured for vitamin A, vitamin B, and the multivitamin for the month of July.

3. Calculate the cost per 200 unit bottle for each type of vitamin for the month of July.

for each cost category compute equivalent units in the assembly department show phys 589341

Weighted average method. Larsen Company manufactures car seats in its San Antonio plant. Each car seat passes through the assembly department and the testing department. This problem focuses on the assembly department. The process costing system at Larsen Company has a single direct cost category (direct materials) and a single indirect cost category (conversion costs). Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. When the assembly department finishes work on each car seat, it is immediately transferred to testing. Larsen Company uses the weighted average method of process costing. Data for the assembly department for October 2012 are as follows:

Physical Units (Car Seats)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, October 1

5,000

$1,250,000

$ 402,750

Started during October 2012

20,000

Completed during October 2012

22,500

Work in process, October 31

2,500

Total costs added during October 2012

$4,500,000

$2,337,500

1. For each cost category, compute equivalent units in the assembly department. Show physical units in

the first column of your schedule.

2. For each cost category, summarize total assembly department costs for October 2012 and calculate the

cost per equivalent unit.

3. Assign total costs to units completed and transferred out and to units in ending work in process.

journal entries prepare a set of summarized journal entries for all october 2012 tra 589342

Journal entries. Prepare a set of summarized journal entries for all October 2012 transactions affecting Work in Process Assembly. Set up a T account for Work in Process Assembly and post your entries to it.

Physical Units (Car Seats)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, October 1

5,000

$1,250,000

$ 402,750

Started during October 2012

20,000

Completed during October 2012

22,500

Work in process, October 31

2,500

Total costs added during October 2012

$4,500,000

$2,337,500

fifo method using the fifo method of process costing explain any difference between 589343

FIFO method. Using the FIFO method of process costing. Explain any difference between the cost per equivalent unit in the assembly department under the weighted average method and the FIFO method.

Physical Units (Car Seats)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, October 1

5,000

$1,250,000

$ 402,750

Started during October 2012

20,000

Completed during October 2012

22,500

Work in process, October 31

2,500

Total costs added during October 2012

$4,500,000

$2,337,500

prepare journal entries for october transfers from the assembly department to the te 589344

Transferred in costs, weighted average method. Larsen Company, as you know, is a manufacturer of car seats. Each car seat passes through the assembly department and testing department. This problem focuses on the testing department. Direct materials are added when the testing department process is 90% complete. Conversion costs are added evenly during the testing department’s process. As work in assembly is completed, each unit is immediately transferred to testing. As each unit is completed in testing, it is immediately transferred to Finished Goods. Larsen Company uses the weighted average method of process costing. Data for the testing department for October 2012 are as follows:

Physical Units (Car Seats)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, October 1

7,500

$2,932,500

$ 0

$ 835,460

Transferred in during October 2012

?

Completed during October 2012

26,300

Work in process, October 31

3,700

Total costs added during October 2012

$7,717,500

$9,704,700

$3,955,900

1. What is the percentage of completion for (a) transferred in costs and direct materials in beginning work in process inventory, and (b) transferred in costs and direct materials in ending work in process inventory?

2. For each cost category, compute equivalent units in the testing department. Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

3. For each cost category, summarize total testing department costs for October 2012, calculate the cost per equivalent unit, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

4. Prepare journal entries for October transfers from the assembly department to the testing department and from the testing department to Finished Goods.

transferred in costs fifo method suppose that larsen company uses the fifo method in 589345

Transferred in costs, FIFO method. Suppose that Larsen Company uses the FIFO method instead of the weighted average method in all of its departments. The only changes to this Problem under the FIFO method are that total transferred in costs of beginning work in process on October 1 are $2,881,875 (instead of $2,932,500) and that total transferred in costs added during October are $7,735,250 (instead of $7,717,500). Using the FIFO process costing method.

Physical Units (Car Seats)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, October 1

7,500

$2,932,500

$ 0

$ 835,460

Transferred in during October 2012

?

Completed during October 2012

26,300

Work in process, October 31

3,700

Total costs added during October 2012

$7,717,500

$9,704,700

$3,955,900

summarize total assembly department costs for april 2012 and assign total costs to u 589346

Weighted average method. Ashworth Handcraft is a manufacturer of picture frames for large retailers. Every picture frame passes through two departments: the assembly department and the finishing department. This problem focuses on the assembly department. The process costing system at Ashworth has a single direct cost category (direct materials) and a single indirect cost category (conversion costs). Direct materials are added when the assembly department process is 10% complete. Conversion costs are added evenly during the assembly department’s process. Ashworth uses the weighted average method of process costing. Consider the following data for the assembly department in April 2012:

Physical Unit (Frames)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, April 1a

95

$ 1,665

$ 988

Started during April 2012

490

Completed during April 2012

455

Work in process, April 30b

130

Total costs added during April 2012

$17,640

$11,856

Summarize total assembly department costs for April 2012, and assign total costs to units completed (and

transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

if you did explain any difference between the cost of work completed and transferred 589348

FIFO method. Using the FIFO method of process costing. If you did explain any difference between the cost of work completed and transferred out and the cost of ending work in process in the assembly department under the weighted average method and the FIFO method.

Physical Unit (Frames)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, April 1a

95

$ 1,665

$ 988

Started during April 2012

490

Completed during April 2012

455

Work in process, April 30b

130

Total costs added during April 2012

$17,640

$11,856

prepare journal entries for april transfers from the printing department to the bind 589349

Transferred in costs, weighted average method. Bookworm, Inc., has two departments: printing and binding. Each department has one direct cost category (direct materials) and one indirect cost category (conversion costs). This problem focuses on the binding department. Books that have undergone the printing process are immediately transferred to the binding department. Direct material is added when the binding process is 80% complete. Conversion costs are added evenly during binding operations. When those operations are done, the books are immediately transferred to Finished Goods. Bookworm, Inc., uses the weighted average method of process costing. The following is a summary of the April 2012 operations of the binding department.

A

B

C

D

E

1

Physical Units (books)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

2

Beginning work in process

1,050

$ 32,550

$ 0

$13,650

3

Degree of completion, beginning work in process

100%

0%

50%

4

Transferred in during April 2012

2,400

5

Completed and transferred out during April

2,700

6

Ending work in process (April 30)

750

7

Degree of completion, ending work in process

100%

0%

70%

8

Total costs added during April

$129,600

$23,490

$70,200

1. Summarize total binding department costs for April 2012, and assign these costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

2. Prepare journal entries for April transfers from the printing department to the binding department and from the binding department to Finished Goods.

explain any difference between the cost of work completed and transferred out and th 589350

Transferred in costs, FIFO method. Suppose that Bookworm, Inc., uses the FIFO method instead of the weighted average method in all of its departments. The only changes to this Problem under the FIFO method are that total transferred in costs of beginning work in process on April 1 are $36,750 (instead of $32,550) and that total transferred in costs added during April are $124,800 (instead of $129,600).

1. Using the FIFO process costing method.

2. Explain any difference between the cost of work completed and transferred out and the cost of ending work in process in the binding department under the weighted average method and the FIFO method.

A

B

C

D

E

1

Physical Units (books)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

2

Beginning work in process

1,050

$ 32,550

$ 0

$13,650

3

Degree of completion, beginning work in process

100%

0%

50%

4

Transferred in during April 2012

2,400

5

Completed and transferred out during April

2,700

6

Ending work in process (April 30)

750

7

Degree of completion, ending work in process

100%

0%

70%

8

Total costs added during April

$129,600

$23,490

$70,200

using the weighted average method summarize the total drying and packaging departmen 589351

Transferred in costs, weighted average and FIFO methods. Frito Lay, Inc., manufactures convenience foods, including potato chips and corn chips. Production of corn chips occurs in four departments: cleaning, mixing, cooking, and drying and packaging. Consider the drying and packaging department, where direct materials (packaging) are added at the end of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. The accounting records of a Frito Lay plant provide the following information for corn chips in its drying and packaging department during a weekly period (week 37):

Physical Units (books)

Transferred In Costs

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Beginning work in process

1,200

$26,750

$ 0

$ 4,020

Transferred in during week 37

from cooking department

4,200

Completed during week 37

4,000

Ending work in process, week 37

1,400

Total costs added during week 37

$91,510

$23,000

$27,940

1. Using the weighted average method, summarize the total drying and packaging department costs for week 37, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

2. Assume that the FIFO method is used for the drying and packaging department. Under FIFO, the transferred in costs for work in process beginning inventory in week 37 are $28,920 (instead of $26,750 under the weighted average method), and the transferred in costs during week 37 from the cooking department are $93,660 (instead of $91,510 under the weighted average method). All other data are unchanged. Summarize the total drying and packaging department costs for week 37, and assign total costs to units completed and transferred out and to units in ending work in process using the FIFO method.

compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs show physical uni 589352

Standard costing with beginning and ending work in process. Penelope’s Pearls Company (PPC) is a manufacturer of knock off jewelry. Penelope attends Fashion Week in New York City every September and February to gauge the latest fashion trends in jewelry. She then makes trendy jewelry at a fraction of the cost of those designers who participate in Fashion Week. This Fall’s biggest item is triple stranded pearl necklaces. Because of her large volume, Penelope uses process costing to account for her production. In October, she had started some of the triple strands. She continued to work on those in November. Costs and output figures are as follows:

Penelope’s Pearls Company Process Costing For the Month Ended November 30, 2012

Units

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Standard cost per unit

$3.00

$10.50

Work in process, beginning inventory (Nov. 1)

24,000

$72,000

$176,400

Degree of completion of beginning work in process

100%

70%

Started during November

124,400

Completed and transferred out

123,000

Work in process, ending inventory (Nov. 30)

25,400

Degree of completion of ending work in process

100%

50%

Total costs added during November

$329,000

$1,217,000

1. Compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs. Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

2. Compute the total standard costs of pearls transferred out in November and the total standard costs of the November 30 inventory of work in process.

3. Compute the total November variances for direct materials and conversion costs.

calculate the completion percentages of beginning work in process with respect to th 589353

Standard costing method. Ozumo’s Gardening makes several different kinds of mulch. Its busy period is in the summer months. In August, the controller suddenly quit due to a stress related disorder. He took with him the standard costing results for RoseBark, Ozumo’s highest quality mulch. The controller had already completed the assignment of costs to finished goods and work in process, but Ozumo does not know standard costs or the completion levels of inventory. The following information is available:

Physical and Equivalent Units for RoseBark For the Month Ended August 31, 2012

Equivalent Units (yards)

Physical Units (Yards of Mulch)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Completion of beginning work in process

965,000

434,250

Started and completed

845,000

845,000

845,000

Work on ending work in process

1,817,000

1,817,000

1,090,200

2,662,000

2,369,450

Units to account for

3,627,000

Costs

Cost of units completed from beginning work in process

$ 7,671,750

Cost of new units started and completed

6,717,750

Cost of units completed in August

14,389,500

Cost of ending work in process

12,192,070

Total costs accounted for

$26,581,570

1. Calculate the completion percentages of beginning work in process with respect to the two inputs. Required

2. Calculate the completion percentages of ending work in process with respect to the two inputs.

3. What are the standard costs per unit for the two inputs?

4. What is the total cost of work in process inventory as of August 1, 2012?

compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs show physical uni 589365

Weighted average method, spoilage, equivalent units. (CMA, adapted) Consider the following data for November 2012 from Gray Manufacturing Company, which makes silk pennants and uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are added evenly during the process. Spoilage is detected upon inspection at the completion of the process. Spoiled units are disposed of at zero net disposal value. Gray Manufacturing Company uses the weighted average method of process costing.

Physical Units (Pennants)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, November 1a

1,000

$ 1,423

$ 1,110

Started in November 2012

?

Good units completed and transferred

out during November 2012

9,000

Normal spoilage

100

Abnormal spoilage

50

Work in process, November 30b

2,000

Total costs added during November 2012

$12,180

$27,750

Compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs. Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

weighted average method assigning costs summarize total costs to account for calcula 589366

Weighted average method, assigning costs. summarize total costs to account for; calculate the cost per equivalent unit for direct materials and conversion costs; and assign total costs to units completed and transferred out (including normal spoilage), to abnormal spoilage, and to units in ending work in process.

Physical Units (Pennants)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Work in process, November 1a

1,000

$ 1,423

$ 1,110

Started in November 2012

?

Good units completed and transferred

out during November 2012

9,000

Normal spoilage

100

Abnormal spoilage

50

Work in process, November 30b

2,000

Total costs added during November 2012

$12,180

$27,750

what are the inventory costs reported in the balance sheet on september 30 2012 for 589303

Joint cost allocation: sell immediately or process further. Iowa Soy Products (ISP) buys soy beans and processes them into other soy products. Each ton of soy beans that ISP purchases for $300 can be converted for an additional $200 into 500 pounds of soy meal and 100 gallons of soy oil. A pound of soy meal can be sold at split off for $1 and soy oil can be sold in bulk for $4 per gallon. ISP can process the 500 pounds of soy meal into 600 pounds of soy cookies at an additional cost of $300. Each pound of soy cookies can be sold for $2 per pound. The 100 gallons of soy oil can be packaged at a cost of $200 and made into 400 quarts of Soyola. Each quart of Soyola can be sold for $1.25. There were no beginning inventories on September 1, 2012.

1. What is the gross margin for Tasty, Inc., under the production method and the sales method of byproduct accounting?

2. What are the inventory costs reported in the balance sheet on September 30, 2012, for the main product and byproduct under the two methods of byproduct accounting in requirement 1?

should isp have processed each of the products further what effect does the allocati 589304

Joint costs and byproducts. (W. Crum adapted) Royston, Inc., is a large food processing company. It processes 150,000 pounds of peanuts in the peanuts department at a cost of $180,000 to yield 12,000 pounds of product A, 65,000 pounds of product B, and 16,000 pounds of product C.Product A is processed further in the salting department to yield 12,000 pounds of salted peanuts at a cost of $27,000 and sold for $12 per pound. Product B (raw peanuts) is sold without further processing at $3 per pound. Product C is considered a byproduct and is processed further in the paste department to yield 16,000 pounds of peanut butter at a cost of $12,000 and sold for $6 per pound. The company wants to make a gross margin of 10% of revenues on product C and needs to allow 20% of revenues for marketing costs on product C. An overview of operations follows:

1. Allocate the joint cost to the cookies and the Soyola using the following:

a. Sales value at split off method

b. NRV method

2. Should ISP have processed each of the products further? What effect does the allocation method have on this decision?

accounting for a main product and a byproduct cheatham and green adapted tasty inc i 589305

Accounting for a main product and a byproduct. (Cheatham and Green, adapted) Tasty, Inc., is a producer of potato chips. A single production process at Tasty, Inc., yields potato chips as the main product and a byproduct that can also be sold as a snack. Both products are fully processed by the split off point, and there are no separable costs. For September 2012, the cost of operations is $500,000. Production and sales data are as follows:

Production (in pounds)

Sales (in pounds)

Selling Price per Pound

Main Product:

Potato Chips

52,000

42,640

$16

Byproduct

8,500

6,500

$10

discuss the difference between the two methods of accounting for byproducts 589306

Accounting for a byproduct. Sunny Day Juice Company produces oranges from various organic growers in Florida. The juice is extracted from the oranges and the pulp and peel remain. Sunny Day considers the pulp and peel byproducts of its juice production and can sell them to a local farmer for $2.00 per pound. During the most recent month, Sunny Day purchased 4,000 pounds of oranges and produced 1,500 gallons of juice and 900 pounds of pulp and peel at a joint cost of $7,200. The selling price for a half gallon of orange juice is $2.50. Sunny Day sold 2,800 half gallons of juice and 860 pounds of pulp and peel during the most recent month. The company had no beginning inventories.

1. Assuming Sunny Day accounts for the byproduct using the production method, what is the inventoriable cost for each product and Sunny Day’s gross margin?

2. Assuming Sunny Day accounts for the byproduct using the sales method, what is the inventoriable cost for each product and Sunny Day’s gross margin?

3. Discuss the difference between the two methods of accounting for byproducts.

could southern have increased its december operating income by making different deci 589307

Alternative methods of joint cost allocation, product mix decisions. The Southern Oil Company buys crude vegetable oil. Refining this oil results in four products at the splitoff point: A, B, C, and D. Product C is fully processed by the splitoff point. Products A, B, and D can individually be further refined into Super A, Super B, and Super D. In the most recent month (December), the output at the splitoff point was as follows:

Product A, 322,400 gallons

Product B, 119,600 gallons

Product C, 52,000 gallons

Product D, 26,000 gallons

The joint costs of purchasing and processing the crude vegetable oil were $96,000. Southern had no beginning or ending inventories. Sales of product C in December were $24,000. Products A, B, and D were further refined and then sold. Data related to December are as follows:

Separable Processing Costs to Make Super Products

Revenues

Super A

$249,600

$300,000

Super B

102,400

160,000

Super D

152,000

160,000

Southern had the option of selling products A, B, and D at the split off point. This alternative would have yielded the following revenues for the December production:

Product A, $84,000

Product B, $72,000

Product D, $60,000

1. Compute the gross margin percentage for each product sold in December, using the following methods for allocating the $96,000 joint costs:

a. Sales value at split off

b. Physical measure

c. NRV

2. Could Southern have increased its December operating income by making different decisions about the further processing of products A, B, or D? Show the effect on operating income of any changes you recommend.

what are the gross margin percentages of chocolate powder and milk chocolate under e 589308

Comparison of alternative joint cost allocation methods, further processing decision, chocolate products. The Chocolate Factory manufactures and distributes chocolate products. It purchases cocoa beans and processes them into two intermediate products: chocolate powder liquor base and milk chocolate liquor base. These two intermediate products become separately identifiable at a single split off point. Every 1,500 pounds of cocoa beans yields 60 gallons of chocolate powder liquor base and 90 gallons of milk chocolate liquor base. The chocolate powder liquor base is further processed into chocolate powder. Every 60 gallons of chocolate powder liquor base yield 600 pounds of chocolate powder. The milk chocolate liquor base is further processed into milk chocolate. Every 90 gallons of milk chocolate liquor base yield 1,020 pounds of milk chocolate. Production and sales data for August 2012 are as follows (assume no beginning inventory):Cocoa beans processed, 15,000 pounds Costs of processing cocoa beans to split off point (including purchase of beans), $30,000

Production

Sales

Selling Price

Separable Processing Costs

Chocolate powder

6,000 pounds

6,000 pounds

$4 per pound

$12,750

Milk chocolate

10,200 pounds

10,200 pounds

$5 per pound

$26,250

Chocolate Factory fully processes both of its intermediate products into chocolate powder or milk chocolate. There is an active market for these intermediate products. In August 2012, Chocolate Factory could have sold the chocolate powder liquor base for $21 a gallon and the milk chocolate liquor base for $26 a gallon. Product yields and average sales values on a per unit basis from the joint process are as follows: Production and sales data for August 2012 are as follows (assume no beginning inventory): Cocoa beans processed, 15,000 pounds Costs of processing cocoa beans to split off point (including purchase of beans), $30,000

Production Sales Selling Price Separable Processing Costs Chocolate powder 6,000 pounds 6,000 pounds $4 per pound $12,750 Milk chocolate 10,200 pounds 10,200 pounds $5 per pound $26,250

1. Calculate how the joint costs of $30,000 would be allocated between chocolate powder and milk chocolate under the following methods:

a. Sales value at split off

b. Physical measure (gallons)

c. NRV

d. Constant gross margin percentage NRV

2. What are the gross margin percentages of chocolate powder and milk chocolate under each of the methods in requirement 1?

3. Could Chocolate Factory have increased its operating income by a change in its decision to fully process both of its intermediate products? Show your computations.

some claim that the sales value at split off method is the best method to use discus 589310

Joint cost allocation. Elsie Dairy Products Corp. buys one input, full cream milk, and refines it in a churning process. From each gallon of milk Elsie produces three cups of butter and nine cups of buttermilk. During May 2010, Elsie bought 12,000 gallons of milk for $22,250. Elsie spent another $9,430 on the churning process to separate the milk into butter and buttermilk. Butter could be sold immediately for $2.20 per pound and buttermilk could be sold immediately for $1.20 per quart (note: two cups = one pound; four cups = one quart). Elsie chooses to process the butter further into spreadable butter by mixing it with canola oil, incurring an additional cost of $1.60 per pound. This process results in two tubs of spreadable butter for each pound of butter processed. Each tub of spreadable butter sells for $2.30.

1. Allocate the $31,680 joint cost to the spreadable butter and the buttermilk using the following: Required

a. Physical measure method (using cups) of joint cost allocation

b. Sales value at split off method of joint cost allocation

c. NRV method of joint cost allocation

d. Constant gross margin percentage NRV method of joint cost allocation

2. Each of these measures has advantages and disadvantages; what are they?

3. Some claim that the sales value at split off method is the best method to use. Discuss the logic behind this claim.

discuss the difference between the two methods of accounting for byproducts focusing 589312

Joint cost allocation with a byproduct. Mat Place purchases old tires and recycles them to produce rubber floor mats and car mats. The company washes, shreds, and molds the recycled tires into sheets. The floor and car mats are cut from these sheets. A small amount of rubber shred remains after the mats are cut. The rubber shreds can be sold to use as cover for paths and playgrounds. The company can produce 25 floor mats, 75 car mats, and 40 pounds of rubber shreds from 100 old tires. In May, Mat Place, which had no beginning inventory, processed 125,000 tires and had joint production costs of $600,000. Mat Place sold 25,000 floor mats, 85,000 car mats, and 43,000 pounds of rubber shreds. The company sells each floor mat for $12 and each car mat for $6. The company treats the rubber shreds as a byproduct that can be sold for $0.70 per pound.

1. Assume that Mat Place allocates the joint costs to floor mats and car mats using the sales value at split off method and accounts for the byproduct using the production method. What is the ending inventory cost for each product and gross margin for Mat Place?

2. Assume that Mat Place allocates the joint costs to floor mats and car mats using the sales value at split off method and accounts for the byproduct using the sales method. What is the ending inventory cost for each product and gross margin for Mat Place?

3. Discuss the difference between the two methods of accounting for byproducts, focusing on what conditions are necessary to use each method.

how would your analysis be affected if the cost of producing raw coal could be held 589314

Process further or sell, byproduct. (CMA, adapted) Rochester Mining Company (RMC) mines coal, puts it through a one step crushing process, and loads the bulk raw coal onto river barges for shipment to customers. RMC’s management is currently evaluating the possibility of further processing the raw coal by sizing and cleaning it and selling it to an expanded set of customers at higher prices. The option of building a new sizing and cleaning plant is ruled out as being financially infeasible. Instead, Amy Kimbell, a mining engineer, is asked to explore outside contracting arrangements for the cleaning and sizing process. Kimbell puts together the following summary:

A

B

C

Selling price of raw coal

$ 27

per ton

Cost of producing raw coal

$ 21

per ton

Selling price of sized and cleaned coal

$ 35

per ton

Annual raw coal output

9,800,000

tons

Percentage of material weight loss in sizing/cleaning coal

10%

Incremental Costs of Sizing & Cleaning Processes

Heavy equipment: rental, operating, maintenance costs

$ 820,000

per year

Direct labor

$ 225,000

per year

Supervisory personnel

$ 15,000

per month

Contract sizing and cleaning

$ 3.60

per ton of raw coal

Outbound rail freight

$ 210

per 60 ton rail car

Percentage of sizing/cleaning waste that can be salvaged for coal fines

75%

Range of costs per ton for preparing coal fine for sale

$2

$4

Range of coal fine selling prices (per ton)

$16

$27

Kimbell also learns that 75% of the material loss that occurs in the cleaning and sizing process can be salvaged as coal fines, which can be sold to steel manufacturers for their furnaces. The sale of coal fines is erratic and RMC may need to stockpile it in a protected area for up to one year. The selling price of coal fine ranges from $16 to $27 per ton and costs of preparing coal fines for sale range from $2 to $4 per ton.

1. Prepare an analysis to show whether it is more profitable for RMC to continue selling raw bulk coal or to process it further through sizing and cleaning. (Ignore coal fines in your analysis.)

2. How would your analysis be affected if the cost of producing raw coal could be held down to $17 per ton?

3. Now consider the potential value of the coal fines and prepare an addendum that shows how their value affects the results of your analysis prepared in requirement 1.

allocate joint costs of each batch to deluxe modules and standard modules using a th 589315

Joint Cost Allocation. Memory Manufacturing Company (MMC) produces memory modules in a two step process: chip fabrication and module assembly. In chip fabrication, each batch of raw silicon wafers yields 400 standard chips and 600 deluxe chips. Chips are classified as standard or deluxe on the basis of their density (the number of memory bits on each chip). Standard chips have 500 memory bits per chip, and deluxe chips have 1,000 memory bits per chip. Joint costs to process each batch are $28,900. In module assembly, each batch of standard chips is converted into standard memory modules at a separately identified cost of $1,050 and then sold for $14,000. Each batch of deluxe chips is converted into deluxe memory modules at a separately identified cost of $2,450 and then sold for $26,500. Kimbell also learns that 75% of the material loss that occurs in the cleaning and sizing process can be salvaged as coal fines, which can be sold to steel manufacturers for their furnaces. The sale of coal fines is erratic and RMC may need to stockpile it in a protected area for up to one year. The selling price of coal fine ranges from $16 to $27 per ton and costs of preparing coal fines for sale range from $2 to $4 per ton.

1. Allocate joint costs of each batch to deluxe modules and standard modules using (a) the NRV method, (b) the constant gross margin percentage NRV method, and (c) the physical measure method, based on the number of memory bits. Which method should MMC use?

2. MMC can process each batch of 400 standard memory modules to yield 350 DRAM modules at an additional cost of $1,600. The selling price per DRAM module would be $46. Assume MMC uses the physical measure method. Should MMC sell the standard memory modules or the DRAM modules?

compute the gross margin percentages for extreme chocolate and very strawberry under 589316

Joint cost allocation, ending work in process inventories. Tastee Freez, Inc., produces two specialty ice cream mix flavors for soft serve ice cream machines. The two flavors, Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry, both start with a vanilla base. The vanilla base can be sold for $2 per gallon. The company did not have any beginning inventories but produced 8,000 gallons of the vanilla base during the most recent month at a cost of $5,200. The 8,000 gallons of base was used to begin production of 5,000 gallons of Extreme Chocolate and 3,000 gallons of Very Strawberry. At the end of the month, the company had some of its ice cream mix still in process. There were

1,200 gallons of Extreme Chocolate 30% complete and 200 gallons of Very Strawberry 80% complete. Processing costs during the month for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry were $9,152 and $8,880, respectively. The selling prices for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry are $4 and $5, respectively.

1. Allocate the joint costs to Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under the following methods: Required

a. Sales value at splitoff

b. Net realizable value

c. Constant gross margin percentage NRV

2. Compute the gross margin percentages for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under each of the methods in requirement 1.

joint cost allocation processing further and ethics unified chemical company has a j 589317

Joint Cost Allocation, processing further and ethics. Unified Chemical Company has a joint production process that converts Zeta into two chemicals: Alpha and Beta. The company purchases Zeta for $12 per pound and incurs a cost of $30 per pound to process it into Alpha and Beta. For every 10 pounds of Zeta, the company can produce 8 pounds of Alpha and 2 pounds of Beta. The selling price for Alpha and Beta are $76.50 and $144.00, respectively.

Unified Chemical generally processes Alpha and Beta further in separable processes to produce more refined products. Alpha is processed separately into Alphalite at a cost of $25.05 per pound. Beta is processed separately into Betalite at a cost of $112.80 per pound. Alphalite and Betalite sell for $105 and $285 per pound, respectively. In the most recent month, Unified Chemical purchased 15,000 pounds of Zeta. The company had no beginning or ending inventory of Zeta.

1. Allocate the joint costs to Alphalite and Betalite under the following methods: Required

a. Sales value at splitoff

b. Physical measure (pounds)

c. Net realizable value

d. Constant gross margin percentage NRV

2. Unified Chemical is considering an opportunity to process Betalite further into a new product called Ultra Betalite. The separable processing will cost $85 per pound and expects an additional $15 per pound packaging cost for Ultra Betalite. The expected selling price would be $360 per pound. Should Unified Chemical sell Betalite or Ultra Betalite? What selling price for Ultra Betalite would make Unified Chemical indifferent between selling Betalite and Ultra Betalite?

3. Independent of your answer to requirement (2), suppose Danny Dugard, the assistant controller, has completed an analysis that shows Ultra Betalite should not be produced. Before presenting his results to top management, he received a visit from Sally Kemper. Sally had been personally responsible for developing Ultra Betalite and was upset to learn that it would not be manufactured.

Sally: The company is making a big mistake by passing up this opportunity. Ultra Betalite will be a big seller and will get us into new markets.

Danny: But the analysis shows that we would be losing money on every pound of Ultra Betalite we manufacture.

Sally: But that is a temporary problem. Eventually the cost of processing will be reduced.

Danny: Do you have any estimates on the cost reductions you expect?

Sally: There is no way of knowing that right now. Can’t you just fudge the numbers a little to help me get approval to produce Ultra Betalite. I am confident that cost reductions will follow. Comment on the ethical issues in this scenario. What should Danny do?

compute equivalent units under 1 the weighted average method and 2 the fifo method 589318

Allied Chemicals operates a thermo assembly process as the second of three processes at its plastics plant. Direct materials in thermo assembly are added at the end of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. The following data pertain to the thermo assembly department for June 2012:

A

B

C

D

E

1

Physical
Units

Transferred In
Costs

Direct
Materials

Conversion
Costs

2

Work in process, beginning inventory

50,000

3

Degree of completion of beginning work in process

100%

0%

80%

4

Transferred in during current period

200,000

5

Completed and transferred out during current period

210,000

6

Work in process, ending inventory

?

7

Degree of completion of ending work in process

100%

0%

40%

Compute equivalent units under (1) the weighted average method and (2) the FIFO method.

what is the unit cost of an assembled camera in january 589327

Equivalent units, zero beginning inventory. Nihon, Inc., is a manufacturer of digital cameras. It has two departments: assembly and testing. In January 2012, the company incurred $750,000 on direct materials and $798,000 on conversion costs, for a total manufacturing cost of $1,548,000.

1. Assume there was no beginning inventory of any kind on January 1, 2012. During January, 10,000 cameras were placed into production and all 10,000 were fully completed at the end of the month. What is the unit cost of an assembled camera in January?

2. Assume that during February 10,000 cameras are placed into production. Further assume the same total assembly costs for January are also incurred in February, but only 9,000 cameras are fully completed at the end of the month. All direct materials have been added to the remaining 1,000 cameras. However, on average, these remaining 1,000 cameras are only 50% complete as to conversion costs. (a) What are the equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs and their respective costs per equivalent unit for February? (b) What is the unit cost of an assembled camera in February 2012?

3. Explain the difference in your answers to requirements 1 and 2.

prepare summary journal entries for the use of direct materials and incurrence of co 589328

Journal entries.Prepare summary journal entries for the use of direct materials and incurrence of conversion costs. Also prepare a journal entry to transfer out the cost of goods completed. Show the postings to the Work in Process account. It has two departments: assembly and testing. In January 2012, the company incurred $750,000 on direct materials and $798,000 on conversion costs, for a total manufacturing cost of $1,548,000.

1. Assume there was no beginning inventory of any kind on January 1, 2012. During January, 10,000 cameras were placed into production and all 10,000 were fully completed at the end of the month.

2. Assume that during February 10,000 cameras are placed into production. Further assume the same total assembly costs for January are also incurred in February, but only 9,000 cameras are fully completed at the end of the month. All direct materials have been added to the remaining 1,000 cameras. However, on average, these remaining 1,000 cameras are only 50% complete as to conversion costs.

compute the equivalent units in the mixing department for july 2012 for each cost ca 589329

Zero beginning inventory, materials introduced in middle of process. Roary Chemicals has a mixing department and a refining department. Its process costing system in the mixing department has two direct materials cost categories (chemical P and chemical Q) and one conversion costs pool. The following data pertain to the mixing department for July 2012:

Units

Work in process, July 1

0

Units started

50,000

Completed and transferred to refining department

35,000

Costs

Chemical P

$250,000

Chemical Q

70,000

Conversion costs

135,000

Chemical P is introduced at the start of operations in the mixing department, and chemical Q is added when the product is three fourths completed in the mixing department. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. The ending work in process in the mixing department is two thirds complete.

1. Compute the equivalent units in the mixing department for July 2012 for each cost category. Required

2. Compute (a) the cost of goods completed and transferred to the refining department during July and (b) the cost of work in process as of July 31, 2012.

compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs show physical uni 589330

Weighted average method, equivalent units. Consider the following data for the assembly division of Fenton Watches, Inc.: The assembly division uses the weighted average method of process costing.

Physical Units (Watches)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Beginning work in process (May 1)

80

$ 493,360

$ 91,040

Started in May 2012

500

Completed during May 2012

460

Ending work in process (May 31)

120

Total costs added during May 2012

$3,220,000

$1,392,000

Compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs. Show physical units in the first column Required of your schedule.

weighted average method assigning costs summarize total costs to account for calcula 589331

Weighted average method, assigning costs. summarize total costs to account for, calculate cost per equivalent unit for direct materials and conversion costs, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

Physical Units (Watches)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Beginning work in process (May 1)

80

$ 493,360

$ 91,040

Started in May 2012

500

Completed during May 2012

460

Ending work in process (May 31)

120

Total costs added during May 2012

$3,220,000

$1,392,000

compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs show physical uni 589332

FIFO method, equivalent units. Suppose the assembly division at Fenton Watches, Inc., uses the FIFO method of process costing instead of the weighted average method. Compute equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs. Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

Physical Units (Watches)

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Beginning work in process (May 1)

80

$ 493,360

$ 91,040

Started in May 2012

500

Completed during May 2012

460

Ending work in process (May 31)

120

Total costs added during May 2012

$3,220,000

$1,392,000

calculate the cost per package of dinner rolls and multigrain loaves for work order 589334

Operation Costing. Whole Goodness Bakery needs to determine the cost of two work orders for the month of June. Work order 215 is for 1,200 packages of dinner rolls and work order 216 is for 1,400 loaves of multigrain bread. Dinner rolls are mixed and cut into individual rolls before being baked and then packaged. Multigrain loaves are mixed and shaped before being baked, sliced, and packaged. The following information applies to work order 215 and work order 216:

Work Order 215

Work Order 216

Quantity (packages)

1,200

1,400

Operations

1. Mix

Use

Use

2. Shape loaves

Do not use

Use

3. Cut rolls

Use

Do not use

4. Bake

Use

Use

5. Slice loaves

Do not use

Use

6. Package

Use

Use

Selected budget information for June follows:

Dinner Rolls

Multigrain Loaves

Total

Packages

4,800

6,500

11,300

Direct material costs

$2,640

$5,850

$ƒ8,490

Budgeted conversion costs for each operation for June follow:

Mixing

$9,040

Shaping

1,625

Cutting

720

Baking

7,345

Slicing

650

Packaging

8,475

1. Using budgeted number of packages as the denominator, calculate the budgeted conversion cost rates for each operation.

2. Using the information in requirement 1, calculate the budgeted cost of goods manufactured for the two June work orders.

3. Calculate the cost per package of dinner rolls and multigrain loaves for work order 215 and 216.

for each perspective select those strategic objectives from the list that best relat 589248

Balanced scorecard. Following is a random order listing of perspectives, strategic objectives, and performance measures for the balanced scorecard.

Perspectives

Performance Measures

Internal business process

Percentage of defective product units

Customer

Return on assets

Learning and growth

Number of patents

Financial

Employee turnover rate

Strategic Objectives

Net income

Acquire new customers

Customer profitability

Increase shareholder value

Percentage of processes with real time feedback

Retain customers

Return on sales

Improve manufacturing quality

Average job related training hours per employee

Develop profitable customers

Return on equity

Increase proprietary products

Percentage of on time deliveries by suppliers

Increase information system capabilities

Product cost per unit

Enhance employee skills

Profit per salesperson

On time delivery by suppliers

Percentage of error free invoices

Increase profit generated by each salesperson

Customer cost per unit

Introduce new products

Earnings per share

Minimize invoice error rate

Number of new customers

Percentage of customers retained

For each perspective, select those strategic objectives from the list that best relate to it. For each strategic objective, select the most appropriate performance measure(s) from the list.

do you agree with caltex rsquo s decision not to include measures of changes in oper 589249

Balanced scorecard. (R. Kaplan, adapted) Caltex, Inc., refines gasoline and sells it through its own Caltex Gas Stations. On the basis of market research, Caltex determines that 60% of the overall gasoline market consists of “service oriented customers,” medium to high income individuals who are willing to pay a higher price for gas if the gas stations can provide excellent customer service, such as a clean facility, a convenience store, friendly employees, a quick turnaround, the ability to pay by credit card, and high octane premium gasoline. The remaining 40% of the overall market are “price shoppers” who look to buy the cheapest gasoline available. Caltex’s strategy is to focus on the 60% of service oriented customers. Caltex’s balanced scorecard for 2011 follows. For brevity, the initiatives taken under each objective are omitted.

Objectives

Measures

Target Performance

Actual Performance

Financial Perspective

Increase shareholder value

Operating income changes from price recovery

$90,000,000

$95,000,000

Operating income changes from growth

$65,000,000

$67,000,000

Customer Perspective

Increase market share

Market share of overall gasoline market

10%

9.8%

Internal Business Process Perspective

Improve gasoline quality

Quality index

94 points

95 points

Improve refinery performance

Refinery reliability index (%)

91%

91%

Ensure gasoline availability

Product availability index (%)

99%

100%

Learning and Growth Perspective

Increase refinery process capability

Percentage of refinery processes with advanced controls

88%

90%

1. Was Caltex successful in implementing its strategy in 2011? Explain your answer.

2. Would you have included some measure of employee satisfaction and employee training in the learning and growth perspective? Are these objectives critical to Caltex for implementing its strategy? Why or why not? Explain briefly.

3. Explain how Caltex did not achieve its target market share in the total gasoline market but still exceeded its financial targets. Is “market share of overall gasoline market” the correct measure of market share? Explain briefly.

4. Is there a cause and effect linkage between improvements in the measures in the internal business process perspective and the measure in the customer perspective? That is, would you add other measures to the internal business process perspective or the customer perspective? Why or why not? Explain briefly.

5. Do you agree with Caltex’s decision not to include measures of changes in operating income from productivity improvements under the financial perspective of the balanced scorecard? Explain briefly.

how can gerhart company use the information from the partial productivity calculatio 589250

Partial productivity measurement. Gerhart Company manufactures wallets from fabric. In 2011, Gerhart made 2,520,000 wallets using 2,000,000 yards of fabric. In 2011, Gerhart has capacity to make 3,307,500 wallets and incurs a cost of $9,922,500 for this capacity. In 2012, Gerhart plans to make 2,646,000 wallets, make fabric use more efficient, and reduce capacity. Suppose that in 2012 Gerhart makes 2,646,000 wallets, uses 1,764,000 yards of fabric, and reduces capacity to 2,700,000 wallets, incurring a cost of $8,370,000 for this capacity.

1. Calculate the partial productivity ratios for materials and conversion (capacity costs) for 2012, and compare them to a benchmark for 2011 calculated based on 2012 output.

2. How can Gerhart Company use the information from the partial productivity calculations?

what additional information does tfp provide that partial productivity measures do n 589251

Total factor productivity. Gerhart Company manufactures wallets from fabric. In 2011, Gerhart made 2,520,000 wallets using 2,000,000 yards of fabric. In 2011, Gerhart has capacity to make 3,307,500 wallets and incurs a cost of $9,922,500 for this capacity. In 2012, Gerhart plans to make 2,646,000 wallets, make fabric use more efficient, and reduce capacity. Suppose that in 2012 Gerhart makes 2,646,000 wallets, uses 1,764,000 yards of fabric, and reduces capacity to 2,700,000 wallets, incurring a cost of $8,370,000 for this capacity.

Assume the fabric costs $3.70 per yard in 2012 and $3.85 per yard in 2011.

1. Compute Gerhart Company’s total factor productivity (TFP) for 2012.

2. Compare TFP for 2012 with a benchmark TFP for 2011 inputs based on 2012 prices and output.

3. What additional information does TFP provide that partial productivity measures do not?

what insights do the variances calculated in requirements 1 and 2 provide about payn 589252

The Payne Company manufactures two types of vinyl flooring. Budgeted and actual operating data for 2012 are as follows:

Static Budget

Actual Results

Commercial

Residential

Total

Commercial

Residential

Total

Unit sales in rolls

20,000

60,000

80,000

25,200

58,800

84,000

Contribution margin

$10,000,000

$24,000,000

$34,000,000

$11,970,000

$24,696,000

$36,666,000

In late 2011, a marketing research firm estimated industry volume for commercial and residential vinyl flooring for 2012 at 800,000 rolls. Actual industry volume for 2012 was 700,000 rolls.

1. Compute the sales mix variance and the sales quantity variance by type of vinylflooring and in total. (Compute all variances in terms of contribution margins.)

2. Compute the market share variance and the market size variance.

3. What insights do the variances calculated in requirements 1 and 2 provide about Payne Company’s performance in 2012?

which allocation base do you think the manager of the florida division would prefer 589260

Cost allocation and decision making. Greenbold Manufacturing has four divisions named after its locations: Arizona, Colorado, Delaware, and Florida. Corporate headquarters is in Minnesota. Greenbold corporate headquarters incurs $5,600,000 per period, which is an indirect cost of the divisions. Corporate headquarters currently allocates this cost to the divisions based on the revenues of each division. The CEO has asked each division manager to suggest an allocation base for the indirect headquarters costs from among revenues, segment margin, direct costs, and number of employees. The following is relevant information about each division:

Arizona

Colorado

Delaware

Revenues

$7,800,000

$8,500,000

$6,200,000

Direct costs

5,300,000

4,100,000

4,300,000

Segment margin

$2,500,000

$4,400,000

$1,900,000

Number of employees

2,000

4,000

1,500

1. Allocate the indirect headquarters costs of Green bold Manufacturing to each of the four divisions using revenues, direct costs, segment margin, and number of employees as the allocation bases. Calculate operating margins for each division after allocating headquarters costs.

2. Which allocation base do you think the manager of the Florida division would prefer? Explain.

3. What factors would you consider in deciding which allocation base Green bold should use?

4. Suppose the Green bold CEO decides to use direct costs as the allocation base. Should the Florida division

be closed? Why or why not?

would you recommend closing any of the three divisions and possibly reallocating res 589261

Cost allocation to divisions. Rembrandt Hotel & Casino is situated on beautiful Lake Tahoe in Nevada. The complex includes a 300 room hotel, a casino, and a restaurant. As Rembrandt’s new controller, you are asked to recommend the basis to be used for allocating fixed overhead costs to the three divisions in 2012. You are presented with the following income statement information for 2011:

Hotel

Restaurant

Casino

Revenues

$16,425,000

$5,256,000

$12,340,000

Direct costs

9,819,260

3,749,172

4,248,768

Segment margin

$6,605,740

$1,506,828

$8,091,232

You are also given the following data on the three divisions:

Hotel

Restaurant

Casino

Floor space (square feet)

80,000

16,000

64,000

Number of employees

200

50

250

You are told that you may choose to allocate indirect costs based on one of the following: direct costs, floor space, or the number of employees. Total fixed overhead costs for 2011 was $14,550,000.

1. Calculate division margins in percentage terms prior to allocating fixed overhead costs.

2. Allocate indirect costs to the three divisions using each of the three allocation bases suggested. For each allocation base, calculate division operating margins after allocations in dollars and as a percentage of revenues.

3. Discuss the results. How would you decide how to allocate indirect costs to the divisions? Why?

4. Would you recommend closing any of the three divisions (and possibly reallocating resources to other divisions) as a result of your analysis? If so, which division would you close and why?

use the abc information to compute the operating income of each customer in august 2 589262

Customer profitability, distribution. Figure Four is a distributor of pharmaceutical products. Its ABC system has five activities:

Activity Area

Cost Driver Rate in 2012

Order processing

$40 per order

Line item ordering

$3 per line item

Store deliveries

$50 per store delivery

Carton deliveries

$1 per carton

Shelf stocking

$16 per stocking hour

Rick Flair, the controller of Figure Four, wants to use this ABC system to examine individual customer profitability within each distribution market. He focuses first on the Ma and Pa single store distribution market. Two customers are used to exemplify the insights available with the ABC approach. Data pertaining to these two customers in August 2012 are as follows:

Charleston Pharmacy

Chapel Hill Pharmacy

Total orders

13

10

Average line items per order

9

18

Total store deliveries

7

10

Average cartons shipped per store delivery

22

20

Average hours of shelf stocking per store delivery

0

0.5

Average revenue per delivery

$2,400

$1,800

Average cost of goods sold per delivery

$2,100

$1,650

1. Use the ABC information to compute the operating income of each customer in August 2012. Comment on the results and what, if anything, Flair should do.

2. Flair ranks the individual customers in the Ma and Pa single store distribution market on the basis of monthly operating income. The cumulative operating income of the top 20% of customers is $55,680. Figure Four reports operating losses of $21,247 for the bottom 40% of its customers. Make four recommendations that you think Figure Four should consider in light of this new customer profitability information.

compute the sales quantity and sales mix variances for each type of ticket and in to 589263

Variance analysis, multiple products. The Detroit Penguins play in the American Ice Hockey League. The Penguins play in the Downtown Arena (owned and managed by the City of Detroit), which has a capacity of 15,000 seats (5,000 lower tier seats and 10,000 upper tier seats). The Downtown Arena charges the Penguins a per ticket charge for use of its facility. All tickets are sold by the Reservation Network, which charges the Penguins a reservation fee per ticket. The Penguins’ budgeted contribution margin for each type of ticket in 2012 is computed as follows:

Lower Tier Tickets

Upper Tier Tickets

Selling price

$35

$14

Downtown Arena fee

10

6

Reservation Network fee

5

3

Contribution margin per ticket

$20

$5

The budgeted and actual average attendance figures per game in the 2012 season are as follows:

Budgeted Seats Sold

Actual Seats Sold

Lower tier

4,000

3,300

Upper tier

6,000

7,700

Total

10,000

11,000

There was no difference between the budgeted and actual contribution margin for lower tier or upper tier seats.

The manager of the Penguins was delighted that actual attendance was 10% above budgeted attendance per game, especially given the depressed state of the local economy in the past six months.

1. Compute the sales volume variance for each type of ticket and in total for the Detroit Penguins in 2012. Required

2. Compute the sales quantity and sales mix variances for each type of ticket and in total in 2012.

3. Present a summary of the variances in requirements 1 and 2. Comment on the results.

briefly describe the conclusions you can draw from the variances 589264

Variance analysis, working backward. The Jinwa Corporation sells two brands of wine glasses: Plain and Chic. Jinwa provides the following information for sales in the month of June 2011:

Static budget total contribution margin

$11,000

Budgeted units to be sold of all glasses

2,000 units

Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Plain

$4 per unit

Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Chic

$10 per unit

Total sales quantity variance

$2,200 U

Actual sales mix percentage of Plain

60%

All variances are to be computed in contribution margin terms.

1. Calculate the sales quantity variances for each product for June 2011.

2. Calculate the individual product and total sales mix variances for June 2011. Calculate the individual product and total sales volume variances for June 2011.

3. Briefly describe the conclusions you can draw from the variances.

compute the total sales volume variance the total sales mix variance and the total s 589265

Variance analysis, multiple products. Soda King manufactures and sells three soft drinks: Kola, Limor, and Orlem. Budgeted and actual results for 2011 are as follows:

Budget for 2011

Actual for 2011

Product

Selling Price

Variable Cost per Carton

Cartons Sold

Selling Price

Variable Cost per Carton

Cartons Sold

Kola

$8.00

$5.00

480,000

$8.20

$5.50

467,500

Limor

$6.00

$3.80

720,000

$5.75

$3.75

852,500

Orlem

$7.50

$5.50

1,200,000

$7.80

$5.60

1,430,000

1. Compute the total sales volume variance, the total sales mix variance, and the total sales quantity variance. (Calculate all variances in terms of contribution margin.) Show results for each product in your computations.

2. What inferences can you draw from the variances computed in requirement 1?

market share and market size variances continuation of 14 25 soda king prepared the 589266

Market share and market size variances . Soda King prepared the budget for 2011 assuming a 12% market share based on total sales in the western region of the United States. The total soft drinks market was estimated to reach sales of 20 million cartons in the region. However, actual total sales volume in the western region was 27.5 million cartons. Calculate the market share and market size variances for Soda King in 2011. (Calculate all variances in terms of contribution margin.) Comment on the results.

Budget for 2011

Actual for 2011

Product

Selling Price

Variable Cost per Carton

Cartons Sold

Selling Price

Variable Cost per Carton

Cartons Sold

Kola

$8.00

$5.00

480,000

$8.20

$5.50

467,500

Limor

$6.00

$3.80

720,000

$5.75

$3.75

852,500

Orlem

$7.50

$5.50

1,200,000

$7.80

$5.60

1,430,000

allocate headquarter costs to the individual divisions using the proposed allocation 589267

Cost allocation to divisions. Forber Bakery makes baked goods for grocery stores, and has three divisions: bread, cake, and doughnuts. Each division is run and evaluated separately, but the main headquarters incurs costs that are indirect costs for the divisions. Costs incurred in the main headquarters are as follows:

Human resources (HR) costs

$1,900,000

Accounting department costs

1,400,000

Rent and depreciation

1,200,000

Other

600,000

Total costs

$5,100,000

The Forber upper management currently allocates this cost to the divisions equally. One of the division managers has done some research on activity based costing and proposes the use of different allocation bases for the different indirect costs—number of employees for HR costs, total revenues for accounting department costs, square feet of space for rent and depreciation costs, and equal allocation among the divisions of “other” costs. Information about the three divisions follows:

Bread

Cake

Doughnuts

Total revenues

$20,900,000

$4,500,000

$13,400,000

Direct costs

14,500,000

3,200,000

7,250,000

Segment margin

$6,400,000

$1,300,000

$6,150,000

Number of employees

400

100

300

Square feet of space

10,000

4,000

6,000

1. Allocate the indirect costs of Forber to each division equally. Calculate division operating income after allocation of headquarter costs.

2. Allocate headquarter costs to the individual divisions using the proposed allocation bases. Calculate the division operating income after allocation. Comment on the allocation bases used to allocate headquarter costs.

3. Which division manager do you think suggested this new allocation. Explain briefly. Which allocation do you think is “better?”

are any customers unprofitable what is causing this what should ring delights do wit 589268

Customer profitability. Ring Delights is a new company that manufactures custom jewelry. Ring Delights currently has six customers referenced by customer number: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, and 06. Besides the costs of making the jewelry, the company has the following activities:

1. Customer orders. The salespeople, designers, and jewelry makers spend time with the customer. The cost driver rate is $40 per hour spent with a customer.

2. Customer fittings. Before the jewelry piece is completed the customer may come in to make sure it looks right and fits properly. Cost driver rate is $25 per hour.

3. Rush orders. Some customers want their jewelry quickly. The cost driver rate is $100 per rush order.

4. Number of customer return visits. Customers may return jewelry up to 30 days after the pickup of the jewelry to have something refitted or repaired at no charge. The cost driver rate is $30 per return visit. Information about the six customers follows. Some customers purchased multiple items. The cost of the jewelry is 70% of the selling price.

Customer number

01

02

03

04

05

06

Sales revenue

$600

$4,200

$300

$2,500

$4,900

$700

Cost of item(s)

$420

$2,940

$210

$1,750

$3,430

$490

Hours spent on customer order

2

7

1

5

20

3

Hours on fittings

1

2

0

0

4

1

Number of rush orders

0

0

1

1

3

0

Number of returns visits

0

1

0

1

5

1

1. Calculate the customer level operating income for each customer. Rank the customers in order of most to least profitable and prepare a customer profitability analysis.

2. Are any customers unprofitable? What is causing this? What should Ring Delights do with respect to these customers?

allocate the joint costs of 100 000 between caustic soda and pvc under the nrv metho 589285

Inorganic Chemicals (IC) processes salt into various industrial products. In July 2012, IC incurred joint costs of $100,000 to purchase salt and convert it into two products: caustic soda and chlorine. Although there is an active outside market for chlorine, IC processes all 800 tons of chlorine it produces into 500 tons of PVC (polyvinyl chloride), which is then sold. There were no beginning or ending inventories of salt, caustic soda, chlorine, or PVC in July. Information for July 2012 production and sales follows:

A

B

C

D

1

Joint Costs

PVC

2

Joint costs (costs of salt and processing to splitoff point)

$100,000

3

Separable cost of processing 800 tons chlorine into 500 tons PVC

$20,000

4

5

Caustic Soda

Chlorine

PVC

6

Beginning inventory (tons)

0

0

0

7

Production (tons)

1,200

800

500

8

Transfer for further processing (tons)

800

9

Sales (tons)

1,200

500

10

Ending inventory (tons)

0

0

0

11

Selling price per ton in active outside market (for products not actually sold)

$ 7 5

12

Selling price per ton for products sold

$ 50

$ 200

1. Allocate the joint costs of $100,000 between caustic soda and PVC under (a) the sales value at split off method and (b) the physical measure method.

2. Allocate the joint costs of $100,000 between caustic soda and PVC under the NRV method.

3. Under the three allocation methods in requirements 1 and 2, what is the gross margin percentage of (a) caustic soda and (b) PVC?

4. Lifetime Swimming Pool Products offers to purchase 800 tons of chlorine in August 2012 at $75 per ton. Assume all other production and sales data are the same for August as they were for July. This sale of chlorine to Lifetime would mean that no PVC would be produced by IC in August. How would accepting this offer affect IC’s August 2012 operating income?

what joint cost allocation method would you recommend quality chicken use explain 589297

Joint cost allocation, insurance settlement. Quality Chicken grows and processes chickens. Each chicken is disassembled into five main parts. Information pertaining to production in July 2012 is as follows:

Parts

Pounds of Product

Wholesale Selling Price per Pound When Production Is Complete

Breasts

100

$0.55

Wings

20

0.20

Thighs

40

0.35

Bones

80

0.10

Feathers

10

0.05

Joint cost of production in July 2012 was $50. A special shipment of 40 pounds of breasts and 15 pounds of wings has been destroyed in a fire. Quality Chicken’s insurance policy provides reimbursement for the cost of the items destroyed. The insurance company permits Quality Chicken to use a joint cost allocation method. The split off point is assumed to be at the end of the production process.

1. Compute the cost of the special shipment destroyed using the following:

a. Sales value at split off method

b. Physical measure method (pounds of finished product)

2. What joint cost allocation method would you recommend Quality Chicken use? Explain.

what are the ending inventory values for each joint product on july 31 2012 assuming 589298

Joint products and byproducts. Quality Chicken is computing the ending inventory values for its July 31, 2012, balance sheet. Ending inventory amounts on July 31 are 15 pounds of breasts, 4 pounds of wings, 6 pounds of thighs, 5 pounds of bones, and 2 pounds of feathers. Quality Chicken’s management wants to use the sales value at split off method. However, management wants you to explore the effect on ending inventory values of classifying one or more products as a byproduct rather than a joint product.

1. Assume Quality Chicken classifies all five products as joint products. What are the ending inventory values of each product on July 31, 2012?

2. Assume Quality Chicken uses the production method of accounting for byproducts. What are the ending inventory values for each joint product on July 31, 2012, assuming breasts and thighs are the joint products and wings, bones, and feathers are byproducts?

3. Comment on differences in the results in requirements 1 and 2.

allocate the 325 000 joint costs using the nrv method required 589299

Net realizable value method. Convad Company is one of the world’s leading corn refiners. It produces two joint products—corn syrup and corn starch—using a common production process. In July 2012, Convad reported the following production and selling price information:

A

B

C

D

1

Corn Syrup

Corn Starch

Joint Costs

2

Joint costs (costs of processing corn to split off point)

$3 2 5,000

3

Separable cost of processing beyond split off point

$375,000

$ 93,750

4

Beginning inventory (cases)

0

0

5

Production and Sales (cases)

12,500

6,250

6

Ending inventory (cases)

0

0

7

Selling price per case

50

$ 25

Allocate the $325,000 joint costs using the NRV method. Required

compare the gross margin percentages for x y and z using the two methods given in re 589301

Alternative methods of joint cost allocation, ending inventories. The Evrett Company operates a simple chemical process to convert a single material into three separate items, referred to here as X, Y, and Z. All three end products are separated simultaneously at a single split off point. Products X and Y are ready for sale immediately upon splitoff without further processing or any other additional costs. Product Z, however, is processed further before being sold. There is no available market price for Z at the splitoff point. The selling prices quoted here are expected to remain the same in the coming year. During 2012, the selling prices of the items and the total amounts sold were as follows:

X—75 tons sold for $1,800 per ton

Y—225 tons sold for $1,300 per ton

Z—280 tons sold for $800 per ton

The total joint manufacturing costs for the year were $328,000. Evrett spent an additional $120,000 to finish product Z. There were no beginning inventories of X, Y, or Z. At the end of the year, the following inventories of completed units were on hand: X, 175 tons; Y, 75 tons; Z, 70 tons. There was no beginning or ending work in process.

1. Compute the cost of inventories of X, Y, and Z for balance sheet purposes and the cost of goods sold for income statement purposes as of December 31, 2012, using the following joint cost allocation methods:

a. NRV method

b. Constant gross margin percentage NRV method

2. Compare the gross margin percentages for X, Y, and Z using the two methods given in requirement 1.

joint cost allocation sales value physical measure nrv methods instant foods produce 589302

Joint cost allocation, sales value, physical measure, NRV methods. Instant Foods produces two types of microwavable products—beef flavored ramen and shrimp flavored ramen. The two products share common inputs such as noodle and spices. The production of ramen results in a waste product referred to as stock, which Instant dumps at negligible costs in a local drainage area. In June 2012, the following data were reported for the production and sales of beef flavored and shrimp flavored ramen:

A

B

C

1

Joint Costs

2

Joint costs (costs of noodles, spices, and other inputs and processing to splitoff point)

$240,000

3

4

Beef Ramen

Shrimp
Ramen

5

Beginning inventory (tons)

0

0

6

Production (tons)

10,000

20,000

7

Sales (tons)

10,000

20,000

8

Selling price per ton

$ 10

$ 15

Due to the popularity of its microwavable products, Instant decides to add a new line of products that targets dieters. These new products are produced by adding a special ingredient to dilute the original ramen and are to be sold under the names Special B and Special S, respectively. The following is the monthly data for all the products:

A

B

C

D

E

11

Joint Costs

Special B

Special S

12

Joint costs (costs of noodles, spices, and other inputs and processing to split off point)

$240,000

13

Separable costs of processing 10,000 tons of Beef Ramen into 12,000 tons of Special B

$48,000

14

Separable cost of processing 20,000 tons of Shrimp Ramen into 24,000 tons of Special S

$168,000

15

16

Beef
Ramen

Shrimp
Ramen

Special B

Special S

17

Beginning inventory (tons)

0

0

12,000

24,000

18

Production (tons)

10,000

20,000

0

0

19

Transfer for further processing (tons)

10,000

20,000

20

Sales (tons)

12,000

24,000

21

Selling price per ton

$ 10

$ 15

$ 18

$ 25

1. Calculate Instant’s gross margin percentage for Special B and Special S when joint costs are allocated using the following:

a. Sales value at split off method

b. Physical measure method

c. Net realizable value method

2. Recently, Instant discovered that the stock it is dumping can be sold to cattle ranchers at $5 per ton. In a typical month with the production levels shown, 4,000 tons of stock are produced and can be sold by incurring marketing costs of $10,800. Sherrie Dong, a management accountant, points out that treating the stock as a joint product and using the sales value at split off method, the stock product would lose about $2,228 each month, so it should not be sold. How did Dong arrive at that final number, and what do you think of her analysis? Should Instant sell the stock?

prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with 589220

On September 1, the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger of Montgomery Company was $10,960. The customers’ subsidiary ledger contained account balances as follows: Hurley $1,440, Andino $2,640, Fowler $2,060, Sogard $4,820. At the end of September, the various journals contained the following information.

Sales journal: Sales to Sogard $800; to Hurley $1,260; to Giambi $1,330; to Fowler $1,600.

Cash receipts journal: Cash received from Fowler $1,310; from Sogard $3,300; from Giambi $380; from Andino $1,800; from Hurley $1,240.

General journal: An allowance is granted to Sogard $220.

Instructions

(a) Set up control and subsidiary accounts and enter the beginning balances. Do not construct the journals.

(b) Post the various journals. Post the items as individual items or as totals, whichever would be the appropriate procedure. (No sales discounts given.)

(c) Prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with the subsidiary ledger at September 30, 2014.

compute the balances in the subsidiary accounts at the end of the month 589221

Kieschnick Company has a balance in its Accounts Receivable control account of $10,000 on January 1, 2014. The subsidiary ledger contains three accounts: Bixler Company, balance $4,000; Cuddyer Company, balance $2,500; and Freeze Company. During January, the following receivable related transactions occurred.

Credit Sales

Collections

Returns

Bizler Company

$9,000

$8,000

$ 0

Cuddyer Company

7,000

2,500

3,000

Freeze Company

8,500

9,000

0

Instructions

(a) What is the January 1 balance in the Freeze Company subsidiary account?

(b) What is the January 31 balance in the control account?

(c) Compute the balances in the subsidiary accounts at the end of the month.

(d) Which January transaction would not be recorded in a special journal?

what is the january 1 balance in the valdez company subsidiary account 589222

Pennington Company has a balance in its Accounts Payable control account of $9,250 on January 1, 2014. The subsidiary ledger contains three accounts: Hale Company, balance $3,000; Janish Company, balance $1,875; and Valdez Company. During January, the following payable related transactions occurred.

Purchases

Payments

Returns

Ilale Company

$6,750

$6,000

$ 0

Janish Company

5,250

1,875

2,250

Valdez Company

6,375

6,750

0

Instructions

(a) What is the January 1 balance in the Valdez Company subsidiary account?

(b) What is the January 31 balance in the control account?

(c) Compute the balances in the subsidiary accounts at the end of the month.

(d) Which January transaction would not be recorded in a special journal?

record the transaction s for september that should be journalized in the sales journ 589223

Gomes Company uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during September 2014.

2

Sold merchandise on account to H. Drew, invoice no. 101, $620, terms n/30.

The cost of the merchandise sold was $420.

10

Purchased merchandise on account from A. Pagan $650, terms 2/10, n/30.

12

Purchased office equipment on account from R. Cairo $6,500.

21

Sold merchandise on account to G. Holliday, invoice no. 102 for $800, terms

2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $480.

25

Purchased merchandise on account from D. Downs $860, terms n/30.

27

Sold merchandise to S. Miller for $700 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $400.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a sales journal and a single column purchases journal.

(b) Record the transaction(s) for September that should be journalized in the sales journal and the purchases journal.

record the transaction s for may that should be journalized in the cash receipts jou 589224

R. Santiago Co. uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during May 2014.

May

1

R. Santiago invested $40,000 cash in the business.

2

Sold merchandise to Lawrie Co. for $6,300 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,200.

3

Purchased merchandise for $7,700 from J. Moskos using check no. 101.

14

Paid salary to H. Rivera $700 by issuing check no. 102.

16

Sold merchandise on account to K. Stanton for $900, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $630.

22

A check of $9,000 is received from M. Mangini in full for invoice 101; no discount given.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple column cash receipts journal a multiple column cash payments journal

(b) Record the transaction(s) for May that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal and cash payments journal.

indicate a the journal and b the columns in the journal that should be used in recor 589225

Francisco Company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook. In April, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

1. Made a refund to a customer as an allowance for damaged goods.

2. Received collection from customer within the 3% discount period.

3. Purchased merchandise for cash.

4. Paid a creditor within the 3% discount period.

5. Received collection from customer after the 3% discount period had expired.

6. Paid freight on merchandise purchased.

7. Paid cash for office equipment.

8. Received cash refund from supplier for merchandise returned.

9. Withdrew cash for personal use of owner.

10. Made cash sales.

Instructions

Indicate (a) the journal, and (b) the columns in the journal that should be used in recording each transaction.

in a brief memo to the president of hasselback company explain the postings to the c 589226

Hasselback Company has the following selected transactions during March.

2

Purchased equipment costing $7,400 from Bole Company on account.

5

Received credit of $410 from Carwell Company for merchandise damaged in shipment to Hasselback.

7

Issued credit of $400 to Dempsey Company for merchandise the customer returned. The returned merchandise had a cost of $260.

Hasselback Company uses a one column purchases journal, a sales journal, the columnar cash journals used in the text, and a general journal.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions in the general journal.

(b) In a brief memo to the president of Hasselback Company, explain the postings to the control and subsidiary accounts from each type of journal.

how successful has westwood been in implementing its strategy explain 589228

Following a strategy of product differentiation, Westwood Corporation makes a high end kitchen range hood, KE8. Westwood’s data for 2010 and 2011 follow:

2010

2011

Units of KE8 produced and sold

40,000

42,000

Selling price

$100

$110

Direct materials (square feet)

120,000

123,000

Direct material cost per square foot

$10

$11

Manufacturing capacity for KE8

50,000 units

50,000 units

Conversion costs

$1,000,000

$1,100,000

Conversion cost per unit of capacity (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$20

$22

Selling and customer service capacity

30 customers

29 customers

Selling and customer service costs

$720,000

$725,000

Cost per customer of selling and customer service capacity(row 9 ÷ row 8)

$24,000

$25,000

In 2011, Westwood produced no defective units and reduced direct material usage per unit of KE8. Conversion costs in each year are tied to manufacturing capacity. Selling and customer service costs are related to the number of customers that the selling and service functions are designed to support. Westwood has 23 customers (wholesalers) in 2010 and 25 customers in 2011.

1. Describe briefly the elements you would include in Westwood’s balanced scorecard.

2. Calculate the growth, price recovery, and productivity components that explain the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011.

3. Suppose during 2011, the market size for high end kitchen range hoods grew 3% in terms of number of units and all increases in market share (that is, increases in the number of units sold greater than 3%) are due to Westwood’s product differentiation strategy. Calculate how much of the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011 is due to the industry market size factor, cost leadership, and product differentiation.

4. How successful has Westwood been in implementing its strategy? Explain.

for each strategic objective indicate a measure you would expect to see in ridgecres 589231

Balanced scorecard. Ridgecrest Corporation manufactures corrugated cardboard boxes. It competes and plans to grow by selling high quality boxes at a low price and by delivering them to customers quickly after receiving customers’ orders. There are many other manufacturers who produce similar boxes. Ridgecrest believes that continuously improving its manufacturing processes and having satisfied employees are critical to implementing its strategy in 2012.

1. Is Ridgecrest’s 2012 strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly. Required

2. Kearney Corporation, a competitor of Ridgecrest, manufactures corrugated boxes with more designs and color combinations than Ridgecrest at a higher price. Kearney’s boxes are of high quality but require more time to produce and so have longer delivery times. Draw a simple customer preference map as in Kearney using the attributes of price, delivery time, quality, and design.

3. Draw a strategy map as in Exhibit 13 2 with two strategic objectives you would expect to see under each balanced scorecard perspective.

4. For each strategic objective indicate a measure you would expect to see in Ridgecrest’s balanced scorecard for 2012.

comment on your answers in requirement 2 what does each of these components indicate 589233

Strategic analysis of operating income. Strategy, balanced scorecard, merchandising operation. Roberto & Sons buys T shirts in bulk, applies its own trendsetting silk screen designs, and then sells the T shirts to a number of retailers. Roberto wants to be known for its trendsetting designs, and it wants every teenager to be seen in a distinctive Roberto T shirt. Roberto presents the following data for its first two years of operations, 2010 and 2011.

1. Is Roberto ‘s strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly.

2. Describe briefly the key measures Roberto should include in its balanced scorecard and the reasons it should do so

1. Calculate Roberto‘s operating income in both 2010 and 2011.

2. Calculate the growth, price recovery, and productivity components that explain the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011.

3. Comment on your answers in requirement 2. What does each of these components indicate?

how successful has roberto been in implementing its strategy explain 589234

Analysis of growth, price recovery, and productivity components Strategy, balanced scorecard, merchandising operation. Roberto & Sons buys T shirts in bulk, applies its own trendsetting silk screen designs, and then sells the T shirts to a number of retailers. Roberto wants to be known for its trendsetting designs, and it wants every teenager to be seen in a distinctive Roberto T shirt. Roberto presents the following data for its first two years of operations, 2010 and 2011.

1. Is Roberto ‘s strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly.

2. Describe briefly the key measures Roberto should include in its balanced scorecard and the reasons it should do so. Suppose that the market for silk screened T shirts grew by 10% during 2011. All increases in sales greater than 10% are the result of Roberto’s strategic actions.Calculate the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011 due to growth in market size, product differentiation, and cost leadership. How successful has Roberto been in implementing its strategy? Explain.

what factors other than cost should roberto consider before it downsizes administrat 589235

Identifying and managing unused capacity Strategy, balanced scorecard, merchandising operation. Roberto & Sons buys T shirts in bulk, applies its own trendsetting silk screen designs, and then sells the T shirts to a number of retailers. Roberto wants to be known for its trendsetting designs, and it wants every teenager to be seen in a distinctive Roberto T shirt. Roberto presents the following data for its first two years of operations, 2010 and 2011.

1. Is Roberto ‘s strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly.

2. Describe briefly the key measures Roberto should include in its balanced scorecard and the reasons it should do so.

1. Calculate the amount and cost of unused administrative capacity at the beginning of 2011, based on the actual number of customers Roberto served in 2011.

2. Suppose Roberto can only add or reduce administrative capacity in increments of 250 customers. What is the maximum amount of costs that Roberto can save in 2011 by downsizing administrative capacity?

3. What factors, other than cost, should Roberto consider before it downsizes administrative capacity?

calculate the growth price recovery and productivity components that explain the cha 589237

Strategic analysis of operating income.

1. Calculate the operating income of Stanmore Corporation in 2010 and 2011. Required

2. Calculate the growth, price recovery, and productivity components that explain the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011.

3. Comment on your answer in requirement 2. What do these components indicate?

2010

2011

Units of D4H produced and sold

200

210

Selling price

$40,000

$42,000

Direct materials (kilograms)

300,000

310,000

Direct material cost per kilogram

$8

$8.50

Manufacturing capacity in units of D4H

250

250

Total conversion costs

$2,000,000

$2,025,000

Conversion cost per unit of capacity (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$8,000

$8,100

Selling and customer service capacity

100 customers

95 customers

Total selling and customer service costs

$1,000,000

$940,500

Selling and customer service capacity cost per customer(row 9 ÷ row 8)

$10,000

$9,900

calculate the amount and cost of a unused manufacturing capacity and b unused sellin 589239

Identifying and managing unused capacity.

1. Calculate the amount and cost of (a) unused manufacturing capacity and (b) unused selling and customer service capacity at the beginning of 2011 based on actual production and actual number of customers served in 2011.

2. Suppose Stanmore can add or reduce its manufacturing capacity in increments of 30 units. What is the maximum amount of costs that Stanmore could save in 2011 by downsizing manufacturing capacity?

3. Stanmore, in fact, does not eliminate any of its unused manufacturing capacity. Why might Stanmore not downsize?

2010

2011

Units of D4H produced and sold

200

210

Selling price

$40,000

$42,000

Direct materials (kilograms)

300,000

310,000

Direct material cost per kilogram

$8

$8.50

Manufacturing capacity in units of D4H

250

250

Total conversion costs

$2,000,000

$2,025,000

Conversion cost per unit of capacity (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$8,000

$8,100

Selling and customer service capacity

100 customers

95 customers

Total selling and customer service costs

$1,000,000

$940,500

Selling and customer service capacity cost per customer(row 9 ÷ row 8)

$10,000

$9,900

describe key measures you would include in westlake rsquo s balanced scorecard and y 589240

Strategy, balanced scorecard, service company. Westlake Corporation is a small information systems consulting firm that specializes in helping companies implement standard sales management software. The market for Westlake’s services is very competitive. To compete successfully, Westlake must deliver quality service at a low cost. Westlake presents the following data for 2010 and 2011.

2010

2011

Number of jobs billed

60

70

Selling price per job

$50,000

$48,000

Software implementation labor hours

30,000

32,000

Cost per software implementation labor hour

$60

$63

Software implementation support capacity (number of jobs it can do)

90

90

Total cost of software implementation support

$360,000

$369,000

Software implementation support capacity cost per job (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$4,000

$4,100

Software implementation labor hour costs are variable costs. Software implementation support costs for each year depend on the software implementation support capacity Westlake chooses to maintain each year (that is the number of jobs it can do each year). It does not vary with the actual number of jobs done that year.

1. Is Westlake Corporation’s strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly.

2. Describe key measures you would include in Westlake’s balanced scorecard and your reasons for doing so.

calculate the operating income of westlake corporation in 2010 and 2011 589241

Strategic analysis of operating income.

2010

2011

Number of jobs billed

60

70

Selling price per job

$50,000

$48,000

Software implementation labor hours

30,000

32,000

Cost per software implementation labor hour

$60

$63

Software implementation support capacity (number of jobs it can do)

90

90

Total cost of software implementation support

$360,000

$369,000

Software implementation support capacity cost per job (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$4,000

$4,100

1. Calculate the operating income of Westlake Corporation in 2010 and 2011.

2. Calculate the growth, price recovery, and productivity components that explain the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011.

3. Comment on your answer in requirement 2. What do these components indicate?

westlake in fact does not eliminate any of its unused software implementation suppor 589243

Identifying and managing unused capacity.

2010

2011

Number of jobs billed

60

70

Selling price per job

$50,000

$48,000

Software implementation labor hours

30,000

32,000

Cost per software implementation labor hour

$60

$63

Software implementation support capacity (number of jobs it can do)

90

90

Total cost of software implementation support

$360,000

$369,000

Software implementation support capacity cost per job (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$4,000

$4,100

1. Calculate the amount and cost of unused software implementation support capacity at the beginning of 2011, based on the number of jobs actually done in 2011.

2. Suppose Westlake can add or reduce its software implementation support capacity in increments of 15 units. What is the maximum amount of costs that Westlake could save in 2011 by downsizing software implementation support capacity?

3. Westlake, in fact, does not eliminate any of its unused software implementation support capacity. Why might Westlake not downsize?

for each strategic objective suggest a measure you would recommend in music master r 589244

Balanced scorecard and strategy. Music Master Company manufactures an MP3 player called the Mini. The company sells the player to discount stores throughout the country. This player is significantly less expensive than similar products sold by Music Master’s competitors, but the Mini offers just four gigabytes of space, compared with eight offered by competitor Vantage Manufacturing. Furthermore, the Mini has experienced production problems that have resulted in significant rework costs. Vantage’s model has an excellent reputation for quality, but is considerably more expensive.

1. Draw a simple customer preference map for Music Master and Vantage using the attributes of price, quality, and storage capacity.

2. Is Music Master’s current strategy that of product differentiation or cost leadership?

3. Music Master would like to improve quality and decrease costs by improving processes and training workers to reduce rework. Music Master’s managers believe the increased quality will increase sales. Draw a strategy map as in describing the cause and effect relationships among the strategic objectives you would expect to see in Music Master’s balanced scorecard.

  1. For each strategic objective suggest a measure you would recommend in Music Master’s balanced scorecard.

comment on your answer in requirement 2 what do these components indicate 589245

Strategic analysis of operating income. 30 Balanced scorecard and strategy. Music Master Company manufactures an MP3 player called the Mini. The company sells the player to discount stores throughout the country. This player is significantly less expensive than similar products sold by Music Master’s competitors, but the Mini offers just four gigabytes of space, compared with eight offered by competitor Vantage Manufacturing. Furthermore, the Mini has experienced production problems that have resulted in significant rework costs. Vantage’s model has an excellent reputation for quality, but is considerably more expensive. As a result of the actions taken, quality has significantly improved in 2011 while rework and unit costs of the Mini have decreased. Music Master has reduced manufacturing capacity because capacity is no longer needed to support rework. Music Master has also lowered the Mini’s selling price to gain market share and unit sales have increased. Information about the current period (2011) and last period (2010) follows:

2010

2011

Units of Mini produced and sold

8,000

9,000

Selling price

$45

$43

Ounces of direct materials used

32,000

33,000

Direct material cost per ounce

$3.50

$3.50

Manufacturing capacity in units

12,000

11,000

Total conversion costs

$156,000

$143,000

Conversion cost per unit of capacity (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$13

$13

Selling and customer service capacity

90 customers

90 customers

Total selling and customer service costs

$45,000

$49,500

Selling and customer service capacity cost per customer (row 9 ÷ row 8)

$500

$550

Conversion costs in each year depend on production capacity defined in terms of units of Mini that can be produced, not the actual units produced. Selling and customer service costs depend on the number of customers that Music Master can support, not the actual number of customers it serves. Music Master has 70 customers in 2010 and 80 customers in 2011.

1. Calculate operating income of Music Master Company for 2010 and 2011. Required

2. Calculate the growth, price recovery, and productivity components that explain the change in operating income from 2010 to 2011.

3. Comment on your answer in requirement 2. What do these components indicate?

music master in fact does not eliminate any of its unused selling and customer servi 589247

Identifying and managing unused capacity Strategic analysis of operating income. 30 Balanced scorecard and strategy. Music Master Company manufactures an MP3 player called the Mini. The company sells the player to discount stores throughout the country. This player is significantly less expensive than similar products sold by Music Master’s competitors, but the Mini offers just four gigabytes of space, compared with eight offered by competitor Vantage Manufacturing. Furthermore, the Mini has experienced production problems that have resulted in significant rework costs. Vantage’s model has an excellent reputation for quality, but is considerably more expensive. As a result of the actions taken, quality has significantly improved in 2011 while rework and unit costs of the Mini have decreased. Music Master has reduced manufacturing capacity because capacity is no longer needed to support rework. Music Master has also lowered the Mini’s selling price to gain market share and unit sales have increased. Information about the current period (2011) and last period (2010) follows:

2010

2011

Units of Mini produced and sold

8,000

9,000

Selling price

$45

$43

Ounces of direct materials used

32,000

33,000

Direct material cost per ounce

$3.50

$3.50

Manufacturing capacity in units

12,000

11,000

Total conversion costs

$156,000

$143,000

Conversion cost per unit of capacity (row 6 ÷ row 5)

$13

$13

Selling and customer service capacity

90 customers

90 customers

Total selling and customer service costs

$45,000

$49,500

Selling and customer service capacity cost per customer (row 9 ÷ row 8)

$500

$550

1. Calculate the amount and cost of (a) unused manufacturing capacity and (b) unused selling and customer service capacity at the beginning of 2011 based on actual production and actual number of customers served in 2011.

2. Suppose Music Master can add or reduce its selling and customer service capacity in increments of five customers. What is the maximum amount of costs that Music Master could save in 2011 by downsizing selling and customer service capacity?

3. Music Master, in fact, does not eliminate any of its unused selling and customer service capacity. Why might Music Master not downsize?

the super donut owns and operates six doughnut outlets in and round kansas city 589174

CVP exercises. The Super Donut owns and operates six doughnut outlets in and round Kansas City.

You are given the following corporate budget data for next year:

Revenues

$10,000,000

Fixed costs

$ 1,800,000

Variable costs

$ 8,000,000

Variable costs change with respect to the number of doughnuts sold.

Compute the budgeted operating income for each of the following deviations from the original budget data. Consider each case independently.)

1. A 10% increase in contribution margin, holding revenues constant

2. A 10% decrease in contribution margin, holding revenues constant

3. A 5% increase in fixed costs

4. A 5% decrease in fixed costs

5. An 8% increase in units sold

6. An 8% decrease in units sold

7. A 10% increase in fixed costs and a 10% increase in units sold

8. A 5% increase in fixed costs and a 5% decrease in variable costs

what is the current annual operating income 589175

CVP exercises. The Doral Company manufactures and sells pens. Currently, 5,000,000 units are sold per year at $0.50 per unit. Fixed costs are $900,000 per year. Variable costs are $0.30 per unit.

Consider each case separately:

1a. What is the current annual operating income?

b. What is the present breakeven point in revenues?

Compute the new operating income for each of the following changes:

2. A $0.04 per unit increase in variable costs

3. A 10% increase in fixed costs and a 10% increase in units sold

4. A 20% decrease in fixed costs, a 20% decrease in selling price, a 10% decrease in variable cost per unit, and

a 40% increase in units sold

Compute the new breakeven point in units for each of the following changes:

5. A 10% increase in fixed costs

6. A 10% increase in selling price and a $20,000 increase in fixed costs

calculate the breakeven point in units for a option 1 and b option 2 589179

CVP analysis, margin of safety. Suppose Doral Corp.’s breakeven point is revenues of $1,100,000. Fixed costs are $660,000.

1. Compute the contribution margin percentage.

2. Compute the selling price if variable costs are $16 per unit.

3. Suppose 95,000 units are sold. Compute the margin of safety in units and dollars.

Operating leverage. Color Rugs is holding a two week carpet sale at Jerry’s Club, a local warehouse store. Color Rugs plans to sell carpets for $500 each. The company will purchase the carpets from a local distributor for $350 each, with the privilege of returning any unsold units for a full refund. Jerry’s Club has offered Color Rugs two payment alternatives for the use of space.

Option 1: A fixed payment of $5,000 for the sale period

Option 2: 10% of total revenues earned during the sale period

Assume Color Rugs will incur no other costs.

1. Calculate the breakeven point in units for (a) option 1 and (b) option 2.

2. At what level of revenues will Color Rugs earn the same operating income under either option?

a. For what range of unit sales will Color Rugs prefer option 1?

b. For what range of unit sales will Color Rugs prefer option 2?

3. Calculate the degree of operating leverage at sales of 100 units for the two rental options.

4. Briefly explain and interpret your answer to requirement 3.

what is the breakeven point if the music society hires the marketing director and re 589181

CVP, Not for profit. Monroe Classical Music Society is a not for profit organization that brings guest artists to the community’s greater metropolitan area. The Music Society just bought a small concert hall in the center of town to house its performances. The mortgage payments on the concert hall are expected to be $2,000 per month. The organization pays its guest performers $1,000 per concert and anticipates corresponding ticket sales to be $2,500 per event. The Music Society also incurs costs of approximately $500 per concert for marketing and advertising. The organization pays its artistic director $50,000 per year and expects to receive $40,000 in donations in addition to its ticket sales.

1. If the Monroe Classical Music Society just breaks even, how many concerts does it hold?

2. In addition to the organization’s artistic director, the Music Society would like to hire a marketing director for $40,000 per year. What is the breakeven point? The Music Society anticipates that the addition of a marketing director would allow the organization to increase the number of concerts to 60 per year. What is the Music Society’s operating income/(loss) if it hires the new marketing director?

3. The Music Society expects to receive a grant that would provide the organization with an additional $20,000 toward the payment of the marketing director’s salary. What is the breakeven point if the Music Society hires the marketing director and receives the grant?

compute the contribution margin of lurvey men rsquo s clothing 589182

Contribution margin, decision making. Lurvey Men’s Clothing’s revenues and cost data for 2011 are as follows:

Revenues

$600,000

Cost of goods sold

ƒ300,000

Gross margin

300,000

Operating costs:

Salaries fixed

$170,000

Sales commissions (10% of sales)

60,000

Depreciation of equipment and fixtures

20,000

Store rent ($4,500 per month)

54,000

Other operating costs

45,000

349,000

Operating income (loss)

$(49,000)

Mr. Lurvey, the owner of the store, is unhappy with the operating results. An analysis of other operating costs reveals that it includes $30,000 variable costs, which vary with sales volume, and $15,000 (fixed) costs.

1. Compute the contribution margin of Lurvey Men’s Clothing.

2. Compute the contribution margin percentage.

3. Mr. Lurvey estimates that he can increase revenues by 15% by incurring additional advertising costs of $13,000. Calculate the impact of the additional advertising costs on operating income.

in addition to the information systems costs what other factors should foodmart cons 589183

Uncertainty and expected costs. Foodmart Corp, an international retail giant, is considering implementing a new business to business (B2B) information system for processing purchase orders. The current system costs Foodmart $2,500,000 per month and $50 per order. Foodmart has two options, a partially automated B2B and a fully automated B2B system. The partially automated B2B system will have a fixed cost of $10,000,000 per month and a variable cost of $40 per order. The fully automated B2B system has a fixed cost of $20,000,000 per month and $25 per order.

Based on data from the last two years, Foodmart has determined the following distribution on monthly orders:

Monthly Number of Orders

Probability

350,000

0.15

450,000

0.20

550,000

0.35

650,000

0.20

750,000

0.10

1. Prepare a table showing the cost of each plan for each quantity of monthly orders.

2. What is the expected cost of each plan?

3. In addition to the information systems costs, what other factors should Foodmart consider before deciding to implement a new B2B system?

if fixed costs increase by 32 000 what decrease in variable cost per person must be 589184

CVP analysis, service firm. Lifetime Escapes generates average revenue of $5,000 per person on its five day package tours to wildlife parks in Kenya. The variable costs per person are as follows:

Airfare

$1,400

Hotel accommodations

1,100

Meals

300

Ground transportation

100

Park tickets and other costs

800

Total

$3,700

Annual fixed costs total $520,000.

1. Calculate the number of package tours that must be sold to break even.

2. Calculate the revenue needed to earn a target operating income of $91,000.

3. If fixed costs increase by $32,000, what decrease in variable cost per person must be achieved to maintain the breakeven point calculated in requirement 1?

technology solutions must generate for 2012 to maintain the current year rsquo s ope 589185

CVP analysis, margin of safety. (CMA, adapted) Technology Solutions sells a ready to use software product for small businesses. The current selling price is $300. Projected operating income for 2011 is $490,000 based on a sales volume of 10,000 units. Variable costs of producing the software are $120 per unit sold plus an additional cost of $5 per unit for shipping and handling. Technology Solutions annual fixed costs are $1,260,000.

1. Calculate Technology Solutions breakeven point and margin of safety in units.

2. Calculate the company’s operating income for 2011 if there is a 10% increase in unit sales.

3. For 2012, management expects that the per unit production cost of the software will increase by 30%, but the shipping and handling costs per unit will decrease by 20%. Calculate the sales revenue

Technology Solutions must generate for 2012 to maintain the current year’s operating income if the selling price remains unchanged, assuming all other data as in the original problem.

increase both selling price by 10 per unit and variable costs by 7 per unit by using 589186

CVP, sensitivity analysis. The Brown Shoe Company produces its famous shoe, the Divine Loafer that sells for $60 per pair. Operating income for 2011 is as follows:

Sales revenue ($60 per pair)

$300,000

Variable cost ($25 per pair)

125,000

Contribution margin

175,000

Fixed cost

100,000

Operating income

$75,000

Brown Shoe Company would like to increase its profitability over the next year by at least 25%. To do so, the company is considering the following options:

1. Replace a portion of its variable labor with an automated machining process. This would result in a 20% decrease in variable cost per unit, but a 15% increase in fixed costs. Sales would remain the same.

2. Spend $30,000 on a new advertising campaign, which would increase sales by 20%.

3. Increase both selling price by $10 per unit and variable costs by $7 per unit by using a higher quality c leather material in the production of its shoes. The higher priced shoe would cause demand to drop by approximately 10%.

4. Add a second manufacturing facility which would double Brown’s fixed costs, but would increase sales by 60%.

Evaluate each of the alternatives considered by Brown Shoes. Do any of the options meet or exceed Brown’s targeted increase in income of 25%? What should Brown do?

what is the company rsquo s breakeven point under the current leasing agreement what 589188

Alternate cost structures, uncertainty, and sensitivity analysis. Stylewise Printing Company currently leases its only copy machine for $1,000 a month. The company is considering replacing this leasing agreement with a new contract that is entirely commission based. Under the new agreement Style wise would pay a commission for its printing at a rate of $10 for every 500 pages printed. The company currently charges $0.15 per page to its customers. The paper used in printing costs the company $.03 per page and other variable costs, including hourly labor amount to $.04 per page.

1. What is the company’s breakeven point under the current leasing agreement? What is it under the new commission based agreement?

2. For what range of sales levels will Stylewise prefer (a) the fixed lease agreement (b) the commission agreement?

3. Do this question only if you have covered the chapter appendix in your class. Stylewise estimates that the company is equally likely to sell 20,000; 40,000; 60,000; 80,000; or 100,000 pages of print. Using information from the original problem, prepare a table that shows the expected profit at each sales level under the fixed leasing agreement and under the commission based agreement. What is the expected value of each agreement? Which agreement should Stylewise choose?

determine which alternative agro engine should select to achieve its net income obje 589190

CVP analysis, income taxes, sensitivity. (CMA, adapted) Agro Engine Company manufactures and sells diesel engines for use in small farming equipment. For its 2012 budget, Agro Engine Company estimates the following:

Selling price

$ 3,000

Variable cost per engine

$ 500

Annual fixed costs

$3,000,000

Net income

$1,500,000

Income tax rate

25%

The first quarter income statement, as of March 31, reported that sales were not meeting expectations. During the first quarter, only 300 units had been sold at the current price of $3,000. The income statement showed that variable and fixed costs were as planned, which meant that the 2012 annual net income projection would not be met unless management took action. A management committee was formed and presented the following mutually exclusive alternatives to the president:

a. Reduce the selling price by 20%. The sales organization forecasts that at this significantly reduced price, 2,000 units can be sold during the remainder of the year. Total fixed costs and variable cost per unit will stay as budgeted.

b. Lower variable cost per unit by $50 through the use of less expensive direct materials. The selling price will also be reduced by $250, and sales of 1,800 units are expected for the remainder of the year.

c. Reduce fixed costs by 20% and lower the selling price by 10%. Variable cost per unit will be unchanged. Sales of 1,700 units are expected for the remainder of the year.

1. If no changes are made to the selling price or cost structure, determine the number of units that Agro Engine Company must sell (a) to break even and (b) to achieve its net income objective.

2. Determine which alternative Agro Engine should select to achieve its net income objective. Show your calculations.

what would operating income be if 20 000 units of a 80 000 units of b and 100 000 un 589191

Sales mix, three products. The Ronowski Company has three product lines of belts—A, B, and C— with contribution margins of $3, $2, and $1, respectively. The president foresees sales of 200,000 units in the coming period, consisting of 20,000 units of A, 100,000 units of B, and 80,000 units of C. The company’s fixed costs for the period are $255,000.

1. What is the company’s breakeven point in units, assuming that the given sales mix is maintained? Required

2. If the sales mix is maintained, what is the total contribution margin when 200,000 units are sold? What is the operating income?

3. What would operating income be if 20,000 units of A, 80,000 units of B, and 100,000 units of C were sold? What is the new breakeven point in units if these relationships persist in the next period?

if total sales are expected to be 30 000 units should pure water buy the new product 589192

Multiproduct CVP and decision making. Pure Water Products produces two types of water filters. One attaches to the faucet and cleans all water that passes through the faucet. The other is a pitcher cum filter that only purifies water meant for drinking.

The unit that attaches to the faucet is sold for $80 and has variable costs of $20.

The pitcher cum filter sells for $90 and has variable costs of $25.

Pure Water sells two faucet models for every three pitchers sold. Fixed costs equal $945,000.

1. What is the breakeven point in unit sales and dollars for each type of filter at the current sales mix?

2. Pure Water is considering buying new production equipment. The new equipment will increase fixed cost by $181,400 per year and will decrease the variable cost of the faucet and the pitcher units by $5 and $9 respectively. Assuming the same sales mix, how many of each type of filter does Pure Water need to sell to break even?

3. Assuming the same sales mix, at what total sales level would Pure Water be indifferent between using the old equipment and buying the new production equipment? If total sales are expected to be 30,000 units, should Pure Water buy the new production equipment?

prepare last year rsquo s profit report using the contribution margin format 589193

Gross margin and contribution margin. The Museum of America is preparing for its annual appreciation dinner for contributing members. Last year, 525 members attended the dinner. Tickets for the dinner were $24 per attendee. The profit report for last year’s dinner follows.

Ticket sales

$12,600

Cost of dinner

15,300

Gross margin

(2,700)

Invitations and paperwork

2,500

Profit (loss)

$(5,200)

This year the dinner committee does not want to lose money on the dinner. To help achieve its goal, the committee analyzed last year’s costs. Of the $15,300 cost of the dinner, $9,000 were fixed costs and $6,300 were variable costs. Of the $2,500 cost of invitations and paperwork, $1,975 were fixed and $525 were variable.

1. Prepare last year’s profit report using the contribution margin format.

2. The committee is considering expanding this year’s dinner invitation list to include volunteer members (in addition to contributing members). If the committee expands the dinner invitation list, it expects attendance to double. Calculate the effect this will have on the profitability of the dinner assuming fixed costs will be the same as last year.

given max lemond rsquo s comments what should lester bush do 589194

Ethics, CVP analysis. Allen Corporation produces a molded plastic casing, LX201, for desktop computers. Summary data from its 2011 income statement are as follows:

Revenues

$5,000,000

Variable costs

3,000,000

Fixed costs

2,160,000

Operating income

$(160,000)

Jane Woodall, Allen’s president, is very concerned about Allen Corporation’s poor profitability. She asks Max Lemond, production manager, and Lester Bush, controller, to see if there are ways to reduce costs.

After two weeks, Max returns with a proposal to reduce variable costs to 52% of revenues by reducing the costs Allen currently incurs for safe disposal of wasted plastic. Lester is concerned that this would expose the company to potential environmental liabilities. He tells Max, “We would need to estimate some of these potential environmental costs and include them in our analysis.” “You can’t do that,” Max replies. “We are not violating any laws. There is some possibility that we may have to incur environmental costs in the future, but if we bring it up now, this proposal will not go through because our senior management always assumes these costs to be larger than they turn out to be. The market is very tough, and we are in danger of shutting down the company and costing all of us our jobs. The only reason our competitors are making money is because they are doing exactly what I am proposing.”

1. Calculate Allen Corporation’s breakeven revenues for 2011. Required

2. Calculate Allen Corporation’s breakeven revenues if variable costs are 52% of revenues.

3. Calculate Allen Corporation’s operating income for 2011 if variable costs had been 52% of revenues.

4. Given Max Lemond’s comments, what should Lester Bush do?

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 589208

Benji Borke has prepared the following list of statements about accounting information systems.

1. The accounting information system includes each of the steps of the accounting cycle, the documents that provide evidence of transactions that have occurred, and the accounting records.

2. The benefits obtained from information provided by the accounting information system need not outweigh the cost of providing that information.

3. Designers of accounting systems must consider the needs and knowledge of various users.

4. If an accounting information system is cost effective and provides useful output, it does not need to be flexible.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

presented below is information related to gantner company for its first month of ope 589209

Presented below is information related to Gantner Company for its first month of operations. Identify the balances that appear in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the accounts receivable balance that appears in the general ledger at the end of January.

Credit Sales

Cash Collections

Jan. 7

Austin Co.

$10,000

Jan. 17

Austin Co.

$7,000

15

Diaz Co.

8,000

24

Diaz Co.

4,000

23

Noble Co.

9,000

29

Noble Co.

9,000

presented below is information related to rizzo company for its first month of opera 589216

Presented below is information related to Rizzo Company for its first month of operations. Determine the balances that appear in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger. What Accounts Payable balance appears in the general ledger at the end of January?

Credit Purchases

Cash Paid

Jan. 6

Gorst Company

$11,000

Jan. 11

Gorst Company

$6,500

Jan. 10

Ilan Company

12,000

Jan. 16

Ilan Company

12,000

Jan. 23

Maddox Company

10,000

Jan. 29

Maddox Company

7,700

what is the balance of the accounts receivable control account after the monthly pos 589218

Nex Company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this chapter. On June 30, after all monthly postings had been completed, the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger had a debit balance of $340,000; the Accounts Payable control account had a credit balance of $77,000.

The July transactions recorded in the special journals are summarized below. No entries affecting accounts receivable and accounts payable were recorded in the general journal for July.

Sales journal

Total sales $161,400

Purchases journal

Total purchases $66,400

Cash receipts journal

Accounts receivable column total $131,000

Cash payments journal

Accounts payable column total $47,500

Instructions

(a) What is the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(b) What is the balance of the Accounts Payable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(c) To what account(s) is the column total of $161,400 in the sales journal posted?

(d) To what account(s) is the accounts receivable column total of $131,000 in the cash receipts journal posted?

missing records computing inventory costs ron williams recently took over as the con 589165

Missing records, computing inventory costs. Ron Williams recently took over as the controller of Johnson Brothers Manufacturing. Last month, the previous controller left the company with little notice and left the accounting records in disarray. Ron needs the ending inventory balances to report first quarter numbers.

For the previous month (March 2011) Ron was able to piece together the following information:

Direct materials purchased

$ 240,000

Work in process inventory, 3/1/2011

$ 70,000

Direct materials inventory, 3/1/2011

$ 25,000

Finished goods inventory, 3/1/2011

$ 320,000

Conversion Costs

$ 660,000

Total manufacturing costs added during the period

$ 840,000

Cost of goods manufactured

4 times direct materials used

Gross margin as a percentage of revenues

20%

Revenues

$1,037,500

Required Calculate the cost of:

1. Finished goods inventory, 3/31/2011

2. Work in process inventory, 3/31/2011

3. Direct materials inventory, 3/31/2011

show numerically how operating income would improve by 325 000 just by classifying t 589166

Cost Classification; Ethics. Scott Hewitt, the new Plant Manager of Old World Manufacturing Plant Number 7, has just reviewed a draft of his year end financial statements. Hewitt receives a year end bonus of 10% of the plant’s operating income before tax. The year end income statement provided by the plant’s controller was disappointing to say the least. After reviewing the numbers, Hewitt demanded that his controller go back and “work the numbers” again. Hewitt insisted that if he didn’t see a better operating income number the next time around he would be forced to look for a new controller.

Old World Manufacturing classifies all costs directly related to the manufacturing of its product as product costs. These costs are inventoried and later expensed as costs of goods sold when the product is sold. All other expenses, including finished goods warehousing costs of $3,250,000 are classified as period expenses. Hewitt had suggested that warehousing costs be included as product costs because they are “definitely related to our product.” The company produced 200,000 units during the period and sold 180,000 units.

As the controller reworked the numbers he discovered that if he included warehousing costs as product costs, he could improve operating income by $325,000. He was also sure these new numbers would make Hewitt happy.

1. Show numerically how operating income would improve by $325,000 just by classifying the preceding costs as product costs instead of period expenses?

2. Is Hewitt correct in his justification that these costs “are definitely related to our product.”

3. By how much will Hewitt profit personally if the controller makes the adjustments in requirement 1.

4. What should the plant controller do?

should garrett accept schoenen rsquo s proposal explain 589172

CVP computations. Garrett Manufacturing sold 410,000 units of its product for $68 per unit in 2011. Variable cost per unit is $60 and total fixed costs are $1,640,000.

1. Calculate (a) contribution margin and (b) operating income.

2. Garrett’s current manufacturing process is labor intensive. Kate Schoenen, Garrett’s production manager, has proposed investing in state of the art manufacturing equipment, which will increase the annual fixed costs to $5,330,000. The variable costs are expected to decrease to $54 per unit. Garrett expects to maintain the same sales volume and selling price next year. How would acceptance of Schoenen’s proposal affect your answers to (a) and (b) in requirement 1?

3. Should Garrett accept Schoenen’s proposal? Explain.

calculate the number of tickets sunny spot must sell each month to a break even and 589173

CVP analysis, changing revenues and costs. Sunny Spot Travel Agency specializes in flights between Toronto and Jamaica. It books passengers on Canadian Air. Sunny Spot’s fixed costs are $23,500 per month. Canadian Air charges passengers $1,500 per round trip ticket.

Calculate the number of tickets Sunny Spot must sell each month to (a) break even and (b) make a target operating income of $17,000 per month in each of the following independent cases.

1. Sunny Spot’s variable costs are $43 per ticket. Canadian Air pays Sunny Spot 6% commission on ticket price.

2. Sunny Spot’s variable costs are $40 per ticket. Canadian Air pays Sunny Spot 6% commission on ticket price.

3. Sunny Spot’s variable costs are $40 per ticket. Canadian Air pays $60 fixed commission per ticket to Sunny Spot. Comment on the results.

4. Sunny Spot’s variable costs are $40 per ticket. It receives $60 commission per ticket from Canadian Air. It charges its customers a delivery fee of $5 per ticket. Comment on the results.

which plan should ashton choose if she expects to make 100 minutes of long distance 589147

Classification of costs, manufacturing sector. The Fremont, California, plant of New United Motor Manufacturing, Inc. (NUMMI), a joint venture of General Motors and Toyota, assembles two types of cars (Corollas and Geo Prisms). Separate assembly lines are used for each type of car.

Classify each cost item (A–H) as follows: Required

a. Direct or indirect (D or I) costs with respect to the total number of cars of each type assembled (Corolla or Geo Prism).

b. Variable or fixed (V or F) costs with respect to how the total costs of the plant change as the total number of cars of each type assembled changes. (If in doubt, select on the basis of whether the total costs will change substantially if there is a large change in the total number of cars of each type assembled.)

You will have two answers (D or I; V or F) for each of the following items:

Required

1. Draw a graph of the total monthly costs of the three plans for different levels of monthly long distance calling.

2. Which plan should Ashton choose if she expects to make 100 minutes of long distance calls? 240 minutes? 540 minutes?

what is the variable cost per ton of beach sand mined what is the fixed cost to cm p 589148

Variable costs and fixed costs. Consolidated Minerals (CM) owns the rights to extract minerals from beach sands on Fraser Island. CM has costs in three areas:

a. Payment to a mining subcontractor who charges $80 per ton of beach sand mined and returned to the beach (after being processed on the mainland to extract three minerals: ilmenite, rutile, and zircon).

b. Payment of a government mining and environmental tax of $50 per ton of beach sand mined.

c. Payment to a barge operator. This operator charges $150,000 per month to transport each batch of beach sand—up to 100 tons per batch per day—to the mainland and then return to Fraser Island (that is, 0 to 100 tons per day = $150,000 per month; 101 to 200 tons per day = $300,000 per month, and so on).

Each barge operates 25 days per month. The $150,000 monthly charge must be paid even if fewer than 100 tons are transported on any day and even if CM requires fewer than 25 days of barge transportation in that month.

CM is currently mining 180 tons of beach sands per day for 25 days per month.

Required

1. What is the variable cost per ton of beach sand mined? What is the fixed cost to CM per month?

2. Plot a graph of the variable costs and another graph of the fixed costs of CM. Is the concept of relevant range applicable to your graphs? Explain.

3. What is the unit cost per ton of beach sand mined (a) if 180 tons are mined each day and (b) if 220 tons are mined each day? Explain the difference in the unit cost figures.

annual fire insurance policy cost for nummi plant 589149

Variable costs, fixed costs, relevant range. Sweetum Candies manufactures jaw breaker candies in a fully automated process. The machine that produces candies was purchased recently and can make 4,100 per month. The machine costs $9,000 and is depreciated using straight line depreciation over 10 years assuming zero residual value. Rent for the factory space and warehouse, and other fixed manufacturing overhead costs total $1,200 per month. Sweetum currently makes and sells 3,800 jaw breakers per month. Sweetum buys just enough materials each month to make the jaw breakers it needs to sell. Materials cost 30 cents per jawbreaker.

Next year Sweetum expects demand to increase by 100%. At this volume of materials purchased, it will get a 10% discount on price. Rent and other fixed manufacturing overhead costs will remain the same.

Required

1. What is Sweetum’s current annual relevant range of output?

2. What is Sweetum’s current annual fixed manufacturing cost within the relevant range? What is the annual variable manufacturing cost?

3. What will Sweetum’s relevant range of output be next year? How if at all, will total annual fixed and variable manufacturing costs change next year? Assume that if it needs to Sweetum could buy an identical machine at the same cost as the one it already has.

Cost Item D or I V or F

A. Cost of tires used on Geo Prisms

B. Salary of public relations manager for NUMMI plant

C. Annual awards dinner for Corolla suppliers

D. Salary of engineer who monitors design changes on Geo Prism

E. Freight costs of Corolla engines shipped from Toyota City, Japan, to Fremont, California

F. Electricity costs for NUMMI plant (single bill covers entire plant)

G. Wages paid to temporary assembly line workers hired in periods of high production (paid on hourly basis)

H. Annual fire insurance policy cost for NUMMI plant

which plan should ashton choose if she expects to make 100 minutes of long distance 589150

Variable costs, fixed costs, total costs. Bridget Ashton is getting ready to open a small restaurant. She is on a tight budget and must choose between the following long distance phone plans:

Plan A: Pay 10 cents per minute of long distance calling.

Plan B: Pay a fixed monthly fee of $15 for up to 240 long distance minutes, and 8 cents per minute thereafter (if she uses fewer than 240 minutes in any month, she still pays $15 for the month).

Plan C: Pay a fixed monthly fee of $22 for up to 510 long distance minutes and 5 cents per minute thereafter (if she uses fewer than 510 minutes, she still pays $22 for the month).

1. Draw a graph of the total monthly costs of the three plans for different levels of monthly long distance calling.

2. Which plan should Ashton choose if she expects to make 100 minutes of long distance calls? 240 minutes? 540 minutes?

what is the unit cost per ton of beach sand mined a if 180 tons are mined each day a 589151

Variable costs and fixed costs. Consolidated Minerals (CM) owns the rights to extract minerals from beach sands on Fraser Island. CM has costs in three areas:

a. Payment to a mining subcontractor who charges $80 per ton of beach sand mined and returned to the beach (after being processed on the mainland to extract three minerals: ilmenite, rutile, and zircon).

b. Payment of a government mining and environmental tax of $50 per ton of beach sand mined.

c. Payment to a barge operator. This operator charges $150,000 per month to transport each batch of beach sand—up to 100 tons per batch per day—to the mainland and then return to Fraser Island (that is, 0 to 100 tons per day = $150,000 per month; 101 to 200 tons per day = $300,000 per month, and so on).

Each barge operates 25 days per month. The $150,000 monthly charge must be paid even if fewer than 100 tons are transported on any day and even if CM requires fewer than 25 days of barge transportation in that month. CM is currently mining 180 tons of beach sands per day for 25 days per month.

Required

1. What is the variable cost per ton of beach sand mined? What is the fixed cost to CM per month?

2. Plot a graph of the variable costs and another graph of the fixed costs of CM. Is the concept of relevant range applicable to your graphs? Explain.

3. What is the unit cost per ton of beach sand mined (a) if 180 tons are mined each day and (b) if 220 tons are mined each day? Explain the difference in the unit cost figures.

what is sweetum rsquo s current annual fixed manufacturing cost within the relevant 589152

Variable costs, fixed costs, relevant range. Sweetum Candies manufactures jaw breaker candies in a fully automated process. The machine that produces candies was purchased recently and can make 4,100 per month. The machine costs $9,000 and is depreciated using straight line depreciation over 10 years assuming zero residual value. Rent for the factory space and warehouse, and other fixed manufacturing overhead costs total $1,200 per month.

Sweetum currently makes and sells 3,800 jaw breakers per month. Sweetum buys just enough materials each month to make the jaw breakers it needs to sell. Materials cost 30 cents per jawbreaker. Next year Sweetum expects demand to increase by 100%. At this volume of materials purchased, it will get a 10% discount on price. Rent and other fixed manufacturing overhead costs will remain the same.

Required

1. What is Sweetum’s current annual relevant range of output?

2. What is Sweetum’s current annual fixed manufacturing cost within the relevant range? What is the annual variable manufacturing cost?

3. What will Sweetum’s relevant range of output be next year? How if at all, will total annual fixed and variable manufacturing costs change next year? Assume that if it needs to Sweetum could buy an identical machine at the same cost as the one it already has.

match each function with its representative cost driver 589154

Cost drivers and functions. The list of representative cost drivers in the right column of this table are randomized with respect to the list of functions in the left column. That is, they do not match.

Function

Representative Cost Driver

1. Accounting

A. Number of invoices sent

2. Human resources

B. Number of purchase orders

3. Data processing

C. Number of research scientists

4. Research and development

D. Hours of computer processing unit (CPU)

5. Purchasing

E. Number of employees

6. Distribution

F. Number of transactions processed

7. Billing

G. Number of deliveries made

Required 1. Match each function with its representative cost driver.

2. Give a second example of a cost driver for each function.

will you use the per attendee cost numbers to make your case why or why not 589155

Total costs and unit costs. A student association has hired a band and a caterer for a graduation party. The band will charge a fixed fee of $1,000 for an evening of music, and the caterer will charge a fixed fee of $600 for the party setup and an additional $9 per person who attends. Snacks and soft drinks will be provided by the caterer for the duration of the party. Students attending the party will pay $5 each at the door.

1. Draw a graph depicting the fixed cost, the variable cost, and the total cost to the student association Required for different attendance levels.

2. Suppose 100 people attend the party. What is the total cost to the student association? What is the cost per person?

3. Suppose 500 people attend the party. What is the total cost to the student association and the cost per attendee?

4. Draw a graph depicting the cost per attendee for different attendance levels. As president of the student association, you want to request a grant to cover some of the party costs. Will you use the per attendee cost numbers to make your case? Why or why not?

how would your answer to requirement 2 differ if gayle rsquo s glassworks made and s 589156

Total and unit cost, decision making. Gayle’s Glassworks makes glass flanges for scientific use. Materials cost $1 per flange, and the glass blowers are paid a wage rate of $28 per hour. A glass blower blows 10 flanges per hour. Fixed manufacturing costs for flanges are $28,000 per period. Period (nonmanufacturing) costs associated with flanges are $10,000 per period, and are fixed.

1. Graph the fixed, variable, and total manufacturing cost for flanges, using units (number of flanges) on the x axis.

2. Assume Gayle’s Glassworks manufactures and sells 5,000 flanges this period. Its competitor, Flora’s Flasks, sells flanges for $10 each. Can Gayle sell below Flora’s price and still make a profit on the flanges?

3. How would your answer to requirement 2 differ if Gayle’s Glassworks made and sold 10,000 flanges this period? Why? What does this indicate about the use of unit cost in decision making?

classify each of the cost items a ndash h as an inventoriable cost or a period cost 589157

Inventoriable costs versus period costs. Each of the following cost items pertains to one of these companies: General Electric (a manufacturing sector company), Safeway (a merchandising sector company), and Google (a service sector company):

a. Perrier mineral water purchased by Safeway for sale to its customers

b. Electricity used to provide lighting for assembly line workers at a General Electric refrigeratorassembly plant

c. Depreciation on Google’s computer equipment used to update directories of Web sites

d. Electricity used to provide lighting for Safeway’s store aisles

e. Depreciation on General Electric’s computer equipment used for quality testing of refrigerator components during the assembly process

f. Salaries of Safeway’s marketing personnel planning local newspaper advertising campaigns

g. Perrier mineral water purchased by Google for consumption by its software engineers

h. Salaries of Google’s marketing personnel selling banner advertising

Required

1. Distinguish between manufacturing , merchandising , and service sector companies.

2. Distinguish between inventoriable costs and period costs.

3. Classify each of the cost items (a–h) as an inventoriable cost or a period cost. Explain your answers.

compute a the cost of goods purchased and b the cost of goods sold 589158

Computing cost of goods purchased and cost of goods sold. The following data are for Marvin Department Store. The account balances (in thousands) are for 2011.

Marketing, distribution, and customer service costs

$ 37,000

Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2011

27,000

Utilities

17,000

General and administrative costs

43,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31, 2011

34,000

Purchases

155,000

Miscellaneous costs

4,000

Transportation in

7,000

Purchase returns and allowances

4,000

Purchase discounts

6,000

Revenues

280,000

1. Compute (a) the cost of goods purchased and (b) the cost of goods sold.

2. Prepare the income statement for 2011.

compute a the cost of goods purchased and b the cost of goods sold 589159

Cost of goods purchased, cost of goods sold, and income statement. The following data are for Montgomery Retail Outlet Stores. The account balances (in thousands) are for 2011.

Marketing and advertising costs

$ 24,000

Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2011

45,000

Shipping of merchandise to customers

2,000

Building depreciation

$ 4,200

Purchases

260,000

General and administrative costs

32,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31, 2011

52,000

Merchandise freight in

10,000

Purchase returns and allowances

11,000

Purchase discounts

9,000

Revenues

320,000

Required 1. Compute (a) the cost of goods purchased and (b) the cost of goods sold.

2. Prepare the income statement for 2011.

revenues for 2011 were 600 million prepare the income statement for 2011 589161

Cost of goods manufactured, income statement, manufacturing company. Consider the following account balances (in thousands) for the Piedmont Corporation:

Piedmont Corporation

Beginning of 2011

End of 2011

Direct materials inventory

65,000

34,000

Work in process inventory

83,000

72,000

Finished goods inventory

123,000

102,000

Purchases of direct materials

128,000

Direct manufacturing labor

106,000

Indirect manufacturing labor

48,000

Indirect materials

14,000

Plant insurance

2,000

Depreciation—plant, building, and equipment

21,000

Plant utilities

12,000

Repairs and maintenance—plant

8,000

Equipment leasing costs

32,000

Marketing, distribution, and customer service costs

62,000

General and administrative costs

34,000

1. Prepare a schedule for the cost of goods manufactured for 2011.

2. Revenues for 2011 were $600 million. Prepare the income statement for 2011.

prepare an income statement and a supporting schedule of cost of goods manufactured 589162

Income statement and schedule of cost of goods manufactured. The Howell Corporation has the following account balances (in millions):

For Specific Date

For Year 2011

Direct materials inventory, Jan. 1, 2011

$15

Purchases of direct materials

$325

Work in process inventory, Jan. 1, 2011

10

Direct manufacturing labor

100

Finished goods inventory, Jan. 1, 2011

70

Depreciation—plant and equipment

80

Direct materials inventory, Dec. 31, 2011

20

Plant supervisory salaries

5

Work in process inventory, Dec. 31, 2011

5

Miscellaneous plant overhead

35

Finished goods inventory, Dec. 31, 2011

55

Revenues

950

Marketing, distribution, and customer service costs

240

Plant supplies used

10

Plant utilities

30

Indirect manufacturing labor

60

Prepare an income statement and a supporting schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31, 2011. (For additional questions regarding these facts, see the next problem.)

assume that the implied cost behavior patterns in requirement 4 persist 589163

Interpretation of statements.

1. How would the answer to Problem 2 34 be modified if you were asked for a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and sold instead of a schedule of cost of goods manufactured? Be specific.

2. Would the sales manager’s salary (included in marketing, distribution, and customer service costs) be accounted for any differently if the Howell Corporation were a merchandising sector company instead of a manufacturing sector company? How the wages of an assembler in the plant would be accounted for in this manufacturing company.

3. Plant supervisory salaries are usually regarded as manufacturing overhead costs. When might some of these costs be regarded as direct manufacturing costs? Give an example.

4. Suppose that both the direct materials used and the plant and equipment depreciation are related to the manufacture of 1 million units of product. What is the unit cost for the direct materials assigned to those units? What is the unit cost for plant and equipment depreciation? Assume that yearly plant and equipment depreciation is computed on a straight line basis.

5. Assume that the implied cost behavior patterns in requirement 4 persist. That is, direct material costs behave as a variable cost, and plant and equipment depreciation behaves as a fixed cost. Repeat the computations in requirement 4, assuming that the costs are being predicted for the manufacture of 1.2 million units of product. How would the total costs be affected?

6. As a management accountant, explain concisely to the president why the unit costs differed in requirements 4 and 5.

assume that depreciation on the equipment but not the plant is computed based on the 589164

Terminology, interpretation of statements.

1. Calculate total prime costs and total conversion costs.

2. Calculate total inventoriable costs and period costs.

3. Design costs and R&D costs are not considered product costs for financial statement purposes. When might some of these costs be regarded as product costs? Give an example.

4. Suppose that both the direct materials used and the depreciation on plant and equipment are related to the manufacture of 2 million units of product. Determine the unit cost for the direct materials assigned to those units and the unit cost for depreciation on plant and equipment. Assume that yearly depreciation is computed on a straight line basis.

5. Assume that the implied cost behavior patterns in requirement 4 persist. That is, direct material costs behave as a variable cost and depreciation on plant and equipment behaves as a fixed cost. Repeat the computations in requirement 4, assuming that the costs are being predicted for the manufacture of 3 million units of product. Determine the effect on total costs.

6. Assume that depreciation on the equipment (but not the plant) is computed based on the number of units produced because the equipment deteriorates with units produced. The depreciation rate on equipment is $1 per unit. Calculate the depreciation on equipment assuming (a) 2 million units of product are produced and (b) 3 million units of product are produced.

do you think this individual would have been guilty of insider trading if he had pur 589119

Business Ethics

What is insider trading anyway?

Consider the following:

Many years ago, a student in a consolidated financial statements class came to me and said that Grand Central (a multi store grocery and variety chain in Salt Lake City and surrounding towns and cities) was going to be acquired and that I should try to buy the stock and make lots of money. I asked him how he knew and he told me that he worked part time for Grand Central and heard that Fred Meyer was going to acquire it. I did not know whether the student worked in the accounting department at Grand Central or was a custodian at one of the stores. I thanked him for the information but did not buy the stock. Within a few weeks, the announcement was made that Fred Meyer was acquiring Grand Central and the stock price shot up, almost doubling. It was clear that I had missed an opportunity to make a lot of money … I don”t know to this day whether or not that would have been insider trading. However, I have never gone home at night and asked my wife if the SEC called. From “Don”t go to jail and other good advice for accountants,” by Ron Mano, Accounting Today, October 25, 1999.

Question: Do you think this individual would have been guilty of insider trading if he had purchased the stock in Grand Central based on this advice? Why or why not? Are there ever instances where you think it would be wise to miss out on an opportunity to reap benefits simply because the behavior necessitated would have been in a gray ethical area, though not strictly illegal? Defend your position.

classify each of the cost items a ndash h into one of the business functions of the 589125

Value chain and classification of costs, computer company. Compaq Computer incurs the following costs:

a. Electricity costs for the plant assembling the Presario computer line of products

b. Transportation costs for shipping the Presario line of products to a retail chain

c. Payment to David Kelley Designs for design of the Armada Notebook

d. Salary of computer scientist working on the next generation of minicomputers

e. Cost of Compaq employees’ visit to a major customer to demonstrate Compaq’s ability to interconnect with other computers

f. Purchase of competitors’ products for testing against potential Compaq products

g. Payment to television network for running Compaq advertisements

h. Cost of cables purchased from outside supplier to be used with Compaq printers

Required Classify each of the cost items (a–h) into one of the business functions of the value chain.

cost of redesigning blister packs to make drug containers more tamperproof 589126

Value chain and classification of costs, pharmaceutical company. Merck, a pharmaceutical company, Incurs the following costs:

a. Cost of redesigning blister packs to make drug containers more tamperproof

b. Cost of videos sent to doctors to promote sales of a new drug

c. Cost of a toll free telephone line used for customer inquiries about drug usage, side effects of drugs, and so on

d. Equipment purchased to conduct experiments on drugs yet to be approved by the government

e. Payment to actors for a television infomercial promoting a new hair growth product for balding men

f. Labor costs of workers in the packaging area of a production facility

g. Bonus paid to a salesperson for exceeding a monthly sales quota

h. Cost of Federal Express courier service to deliver drugs to hospitals

Required Classify each of the cost items (a–h) as one of the business functions of the value chain.

value chain and classification of costs fast food restaurant burger king a hamburger 589127

Value chain and classification of costs, fast food restaurant. Burger King, a hamburger fast food restaurant, incurs the following costs:

Required

a. Cost of oil for the deep fryer

b. Wages of the counter help who give customers the food they order

c. Cost of the costume for the King on the Burger King television commercials

d. Cost of children’s toys given away free with kids’ meals

e. Cost of the posters indicating the special “two cheeseburgers for $2.50”

f. Costs of frozen onion rings and French fries

g. Salaries of the food specialists who create new sandwiches for the restaurant chain

h. Cost of “to go” bags requested by customers who could not finish their meals in the restaurant

Classify each of the cost items (a–h) as one of the business functions of the value chain.

benchmark the company rsquo s gross margin percentages against its major competitors 589128

Key success factors. Grey Brothers Consulting has issued a report recommending changes for its newest manufacturing client, Energy Motors. Energy Motors currently manufactures a single product, which is sold and distributed nationally. The report contains the following suggestions for enhancing business performance:

Required

a. Add a new product line to increase total revenue and to reduce the company’s overall risk.

b. Increase training hours of assembly line personnel to decrease the currently high volumes of scrap and waste.

c. Reduce lead times (time from customer order of product to customer receipt of product) by 20% in order to increase customer retention.

d. Reduce the time required to set up machines for each new order.

e. Benchmark the company’s gross margin percentages against its major competitors.

conner estimates the costs it will incur to sell 30 000 units of the new product in 589129

Planning and control decisions. Conner Company makes and sells brooms and mops. It takes the following actions, not necessarily in the order given. For each action (a–e) state whether it is a planning decision or a control decision.

a. Conner asks its marketing team to consider ways to get back market share from its newest competitor, Swiffer.

b. Conner calculates market share after introducing its newest product.

c. Conner compares costs it actually incurred with costs it expected to incur for the production of the new product.

d. Conner’s design team proposes a new product to compete directly with the Swiffer.

e. Conner estimates the costs it will incur to sell 30,000 units of the new product in the first quarter of next fiscal year.

classify each of the actions a ndash g as a step in the five step decision making pr 589130

Five step decision making process, manufacturing. Garnicki Foods makes frozen dinners that it sells through grocery stores. Typical products include turkey dinners, pot roast, fried chicken, and meat loaf. The managers at Garnicki have recently introduced a line of frozen chicken pies. They take the following actions with regard to this decision.

a. Garnicki performs a taste test at the local shopping mall to see if consumers like the taste of its proposed new chicken pie product.

b. Garnicki sales managers estimate they will sell more meat pies in their northern sales territory than in their southern sales territory.

c. Garnicki managers discuss the possibility of introducing a new chicken pie.

d. Garnicki managers compare actual costs of making chicken pies with their budgeted costs.

e. Costs for making chicken pies are budgeted.

f. Garnicki decides to introduce a new chicken pie.

g. To help decide whether to introduce a new chicken pie, the purchasing manager calls a supplier to check the prices of chicken.

Classify each of the actions (a–g) as a step in the five step decision making process (identify the problem and equired uncertainties, obtain information, make predictions about the future, choose among alternatives, implement the decision, evaluate performance, and learn). The actions are not listed in the order they are performed.

classify each of the actions a f according to its step in the five step decision mak 589131

Five step decision making process, service firm. Brite Exteriors is a firm that provides house painting services. Robert Brite, the owner, is trying to find new ways to increase revenues. Mr. Brite performs the following actions, not in the order listed.

a. Mr. Brite calls Home Depot to ask the price of paint sprayers.

b. Mr. Brite discusses with his employees the possibility of using paint sprayers instead of hand painting

to increase productivity and thus revenues.

c. The workers who are not familiar with paint sprayers take more time to finish a job than they did when painting by hand.

d. Mr. Brite compares the expected cost of buying sprayers to the expected cost of hiring more workers who paint by hand, and estimates profits from both alternatives.

e. The project scheduling manager confirms that demand for house painting services has increased.

f. Mr. Brite decides to buy the paint sprayers rather than hire additional painters.

Classify each of the actions (a f) according to its step in the five step decision making process (identify the equired problem and uncertainties, obtain information, make predictions about the future, choose among alternatives, implement the decision, evaluate performance, and learn).

what should miller do if maloney gives her a direct order to book the sales 589132

Professional ethics and reporting division performance. Marcia Miller is division controller and Tom Maloney is division manager of the Ramses Shoe Company. Miller has line responsibility to Maloney, but she also has staff responsibility to the company controller.

Maloney is under severe pressure to achieve the budgeted division income for the year. He has asked Miller to book $200,000 of revenues on December 31. The customers’ orders are firm, but the shoes are still in the production process. They will be shipped on or around January 4. Maloney says to Miller, “The key event is getting the sales order, not shipping the shoes. You should support me, not obstruct my reaching division goals.”

1. Describe Miller’s ethical responsibilities.

2. What should Miller do if Maloney gives her a direct order to book the sales?

give two examples of other planning decisions and two examples of other control deci 589133

Planning and control decisions, Internet company. WebNews.com offers its subscribers several services, such as an annotated TV guide and local area information on weather, restaurants, and movie theaters. Its main revenue sources are fees for banner advertisements and fees from subscribers. Recent data are as follows:

Month/Year

Advertising Revenues

Actual Number of Subscribers

Monthly Fee Per Subscriber

June 2009

$ 415,972

29,745

$15.50

December 2009

867,246

55,223

20.50

June 2010

892,134

59,641

20.50

December 2010

1,517,950

87,674

20.50

June 2011

2,976,538

147,921

20.50

The following decisions were made from June through October 2011:

a. June 2011: Raised subscription fee to $25.50 per month from July 2011 onward. The budgeted number of subscribers for this monthly fee is shown in the following table.

b. June 2011: Informed existing subscribers that from July onward, monthly fee would be $25.50.

c. July 2011: Offered e mail service to subscribers and upgraded other online services.

d. October 2011: Dismissed the vice president of marketing after significant slowdown in subscribers and subscription revenues, based on July through September 2011 data in the following table.

e. October 2011: Reduced subscription fee to $22.50 per month from November 2011 onward.

Results for July–September 2011 are as follows:

Month/Year

Budgeted Number of Subscribers

Actual Number of Subscribers

Monthly Fee per Subscriber

July 2011

145,000

129,250

$25.50

August 2011

155,000

142,726

25.50

September 2011

165,000

145,643

25.50

1. Classify each of the decisions (a–e) as a planning or a control decision.

2. Give two examples of other planning decisions and two examples of other control decisions.

for each decision discuss what information the management accountant can provide abo 589134

Strategic decisions and management accounting. A series of independent situations in which a firm is about to make a strategic decision follow.

Decisions:

a. Roger Phones is about to decide whether to launch production and sale of a cell phone with standard features.

b. Computer Magic is trying to decide whether to produce and sell a new home computer software package that includes the ability to interface with a sewing machine and a vacuum cleaner. There is no such software currently on the market.

c. Christina Cosmetics has been asked to provide a “store brand” lip gloss that will be sold at discount retail stores.

d. Marcus Meats is entertaining the idea of developing a special line of gourmet bologna made with sun dried tomatoes, pine nuts, and artichoke hearts.

1. For each decision, state whether the company is following a low price or a differentiated product strategy. Required

2. For each decision, discuss what information the management accountant can provide about the source of competitive advantage for these firms.

deciding to give bonuses for superior performance to the employees in a japanese sub 589135

Management accounting guidelines. For each of the following items, identify which of the management accounting guidelines applies: cost benefit approach, behavioral and technical considerations, or different costs for different purposes.

1. Analyzing whether to keep the billing function within an organization or outsource it

2. Deciding to give bonuses for superior performance to the employees in a Japanese subsidiary and extra vacation time to the employees in a Swedish subsidiary

3. Including costs of all the value chain functions before deciding to launch a new product, but including only its manufacturing costs in determining its inventory valuation

4. Considering the desirability of hiring one more salesperson

5. Giving each salesperson the compensation option of choosing either a low salary and a high percentage sales commission or a high salary and a low percentage sales commission

6. Selecting the costlier computer system after considering two systems

7. Installing a participatory budgeting system in which managers set their own performance targets, instead of top management imposing performance targets on managers

8. Recording research costs as an expense for financial reporting purposes (as required by U.S. GAAP) but capitalizing and expensing them over a longer period for management performance evaluation purposes

9. Introducing a profit sharing plan for employees

based on this table and your understanding of the two roles what types of training o 589136

Role of controller, role of chief financial officer. George Perez is the controller at Allied Electronics, a manufacturer of devices for the computer industry. He is being considered for a promotion to chief financial officer.

1. In this table, indicate which executive is primarily responsible for each activity.

Activity

Controller

CFO

Managing accounts payable

Communicating with investors

Strategic review of different lines of businesses

Budgeting funds for a plant upgrade

Managing the company’s short term investments

Negotiating fees with auditors

Assessing profitability of various products

Evaluating the costs and benefits of a new product design

Evaluating the costs and benefits of a new product design

2. Based on this table and your understanding of the two roles, what types of training or experiences will George find most useful for the CFO position?

what would you recommend johnson do 589137

Pharmaceutical company, budgeting, ethics. Eric Johnson was recently promoted to Controller of Research and Development (R&D) for PharmaCor, a Fortune 500 pharmaceutical company, which manufactures prescription drugs and nutritional supplements. The company’s total R&D cost for 2012 was expected (budgeted) to be $5 billion. During the company’s mid year budget review, Eric realized that current R&D expenditures were already at $3.5 billion, nearly 40% above the mid year target. At this current rate of expenditure, the R&D division was on track to exceed its total year end budget by $2 billion!

In a meeting with CFO, James Clark, later that day, Johnson delivered the bad news. Clark was both shocked and outraged that the R&D spending had gotten out of control. Clark wasn’t any more understanding when Johnson revealed that the excess cost was entirely related to research and development of a new drug, Lyricon, which was expected to go to market next year. The new drug would result in large profits for PharmaCor, if the product could be approved by year end.

Clark had already announced his expectations of third quarter earnings to Wall Street analysts. If the R&D expenditures weren’t reduced by the end of the third quarter, Clark was certain that the targets he had announced publicly would be missed and the company’s stock price would tumble. Clark instructed Johnson to make up the budget short fall by the end of the third quarter using “whatever means necessary.”

Johnson was new to the Controller’s position and wanted to make sure that Clark’s orders were followed.

Johnson came up with the following ideas for making the third quarter budgeted targets:

a. Stop all research and development efforts on the drug Lyricon until after year end. This change would delay the drug going to market by at least six months. It is also possible that in the meantime a PharmaCor competitor could make it to market with a similar drug.

b. Sell off rights to the drug, Markapro. The company had not planned on doing this because, under current market conditions, it would get less than fair value. It would, however, result in a onetime gain that could offset the budget short fall. Of course, all future profits from Markapro would be lost.

c. Capitalize some of the company’s R&D expenditures reducing R&D expense on the income statement. This transaction would not be in accordance with GAAP, but Johnson thought it was justifiable, since the Lyricon drug was going to market early next year. Johnson would argue that capitalizing R & D costs this year and expensing them next year would better match revenues and expenses.

Required

1. Standards of Ethical Behavior for Practitioners of Management Accounting and Financial Management. Which of the preceding items (a–c) are acceptable to use? Which are unacceptable?

2. What would you recommend Johnson do?

what should allen do about the pressure to improve performance collaborative learnin 589139

Professional ethics and end of year actions. Deacon Publishing House is a publishing company that produces consumer magazines. The house and home division, which sells home improvement and home decorating magazines, has seen a 20% reduction in operating income over the past nine months, primarily due to the recent economic recession and the depressed consumer housing market. The division’s Controller, Todd Allen, has felt pressure from the CFO to improve his division’s operating results by the end of the year. Allen is considering the following options for improving the division’s performance by year end:

a. Cancelling two of the division’s least profitable magazines, resulting in the layoff of twenty five employees.

b. Selling the new printing equipment that was purchased in January and replacing it with discarded equipment from one of the company’s other divisions. The previously discarded equipment no longer meets current safety standards.

c. Recognizing unearned subscription revenue (cash received in advance for magazines that will be delivered in the future) as revenue when cash is received in the current month (just before fiscal year end) instead of showing it as a liability.

d. Reducing the division’s Allowance for Bad Debt Expense. This transaction alone would increase operating income by 5%.

e. Recognizing advertising revenues that relate to January in December.

f. Switching from declining balance to straight line depreciation to reduce depreciation expense in the current year.

1. What are the motivations for Allen to improve the division’s year end operating earnings? Required

2. From the point of view of the “Standards of Ethical Behavior for Practitioners of Management Accounting and Financial Management,” Which of the preceding items (a–f) are acceptable? Which are unacceptable?

3. What should Allen do about the pressure to improve performance? Collaborative Learning Problem

what should the management accountant do with respect to those items that are in vio 589140

Global company, ethical challenges. Bredahl Logistics, a U.S. shipping company, has just begun distributing goods across the Atlantic to Norway. The company began operations in 2010, transporting goods to South America. The company’s earnings are currently trailing behind its competitors and Bredahl’s investors are becoming anxious. Some of the company’s largest investors are even talking of selling their interest in the shipping newcomer. Bredahl’s CEO, Marcus Hamsen, calls an emergency meeting with his executive team. Hamsen needs a plan before his upcoming conference call with uneasy investors. Brehdal’s executive staff make the following suggestions for salvaging the company’s short term operating results:

a. Stop all transatlantic shipping efforts. The start up costs for the new operations are hurting current profit margins.

b. Make deep cuts in pricing through the end of the year to generate additional revenue.

c. Pressure current customers to take early delivery of goods before the end of the year so that more revenue can be reported in this year’s financial statements.

d. Sell off distribution equipment prior to year end. The sale would result in one time gains that could offset the company’s lagging profits. The owned equipment could be replaced with leased equipment at a lower cost in the current year.

e. Record executive year end bonus compensation for the current year in the next year when it is paid after the December fiscal year end.

f. Recognize sales revenues on orders received, but not shipped as of the end of the year.

g. Establish corporate headquarters in Ireland before the end of the year, lowering the company’s corporate tax rate from 28% to 12.5%.

1. As the management accountant for Brehdahl, evaluate each of the preceding items (a–g) in the con Required text of the “Standards of Ethical Behavior for Practitioners of Management Accounting and Financial Management,” Which of the items are in violation of these ethics standards and which are acceptable?

2. What should the management accountant do with respect to those items that are in violation of the ethical standards for management accountants?

why might the july 2011 information on manufacturing cost per unit be misleading whe 589143

Computing and interpreting manufacturing unit costs. Minnesota Office Products (MOP) produces three different paper products at its Vaasa lumber plant: Supreme, Deluxe, and Regular. Each product has its own dedicated production line at the plant. It currently uses the following three part classification for its manufacturing costs: direct materials, direct manufacturing labor, and manufacturing overhead costs. Total manufacturing overhead costs of the plant in July 2011 are $150 million ($15 million of which are fixed). This total amount is allocated to each product line on the basis of the direct manufacturing labor costs of each line. Summary data (in millions) for July 2011 are as follows:

Supreme

Deluxe

Regular

Direct material costs

$ 89

$ 57

$ 60

Direct manufacturing labor costs

$ 16

$ 26

$ 8

Manufacturing overhead costs

$ 48

$ 78

$ 24

Units produced

125

150

140

1. Compute the manufacturing cost per unit for each product produced in July 2011.

2. Suppose that in August 2011, production was 150 million units of Supreme, 190 million units of Deluxe, and 220 million units of Regular. Why might the July 2011 information on manufacturing cost per unit be misleading when predicting total manufacturing costs in August 2011?

which preceding costs would now be direct instead of indirect costs 589144

Direct, indirect, fixed, and variable costs. Best Breads manufactures two types of bread, which are sold as wholesale products to various specialty retail bakeries. Each loaf of bread requires a three step process. The first step is mixing. The mixing department combines all of the necessary ingredients to create the dough and processes it through high speed mixers. The dough is then left to rise before baking. The second step is baking, which is an entirely automated process. The baking department molds the dough into its final shape and bakes each loaf of bread in a high temperature oven. The final step is finishing, which is an entirely manual process. The finishing department coats each loaf of bread with a special glaze, allows the bread to cool, and then carefully packages each loaf in a specialty carton for sale in retail bakeries.

1. Costs involved in the process are listed next. For each cost, indicate whether it is a direct variable, direct fixed, indirect variable, or indirect fixed cost, assuming “units of production of each kind of bread” is the cost object.

Costs:

Yeast

Mixing department manager

Flour

Materials handlers in each department

Packaging materials

Custodian in factory

Depreciation on ovens

Night guard in factory

Depreciation on mixing machines

Machinist (running the mixing machine)

Rent on factory building

Machine maintenance personnel in each department

Fire insurance on factory building

Maintenance supplies for factory

Factory utilities

Cleaning supplies for factory

Finishing department hourly laborers

2. If the cost object were the “mixing department” rather than units of production of each kind of bread, which preceding costs would now be direct instead of indirect costs?

a consumer focus staff member attends each session to ensure that all the logistical 589145

Classification of costs, service sector. Consumer Focus is a marketing research firm that organizes focus groups for consumer product companies. Each focus group has eight individuals who are paid $50 per session to provide comments on new products. These focus groups meet in hotels and are led by a trained, independent, marketing specialist hired by Consumer Focus. Each specialist is paid a fixed retainer to conduct a minimum number of sessions and a per session fee of $2,000. A Consumer Focus staff member attends each session to ensure that all the logistical aspects run smoothly.

Classify each cost item (A–H) as follows: Required

a. Direct or indirect (D or I) costs with respect to each individual focus group.

b. Variable or fixed (V or F) costs with respect to how the total costs of Consumer Focus change as the number of focus groups conducted changes. (If in doubt, select on the basis of whether the total costs will change substantially if there is a large change in the number of groups conducted.)

You will have two answers (DorI; Vor F) for each of the following items:

Cost Item D or I V or F

A. Payment to individuals in each focus group to provide comments on new products

B. Annual subscription of Consumer Focus to Consumer Reports magazine

C. Phone calls made by Consumer Focus staff member to confirm individuals will attend a focus group session (Records of individual calls are not kept.)

D. Retainer paid to focus group leader to conduct 20 focus groups per year on new medical products

E. Meals provided to participants in each focus group

F. Lease payment by Consumer Focus for corporate office

G. Cost of tapes used to record comments made by individuals in a focus group session

(These tapes are sent to the company whose products are being tested.)

H. Gasoline costs of Consumer Focus staff for company owned vehicles (Staff members submit monthly bills with no mileage breakdowns.)

cost of popcorn provided free to all customers of the hec store 589146

Classification of costs, merchandising sector. Home Entertainment Center (HEC) operates a large store in San Francisco. The store has both a video section and a music (compact disks and tapes) section. HEC reports revenues for the video section separately from the music section.

Classify each cost item (A–H) as follows: Required

a. Direct or indirect (D or I) costs with respect to the total number of videos sold.

b. Variable or fixed (V or F) costs with respect to how the total costs of the video section change as the total number of videos sold changes. (If in doubt, select on the basis of whether the total costs will change substantially if there is a large change in the total number of videos sold.)

You will have two answers (D or I; V or F) for each of the following items:

Cost Item D or I V or F

A. Annual retainer paid to a video distributor

B. Electricity costs of the HEC store (single bill covers entire store)

C. Costs of videos purchased for sale to customers

D. Subscription to Video Trends magazine

E. Leasing of computer software used for financial budgeting at the HEC store

F. Cost of popcorn provided free to all customers of the HEC store

G. Earthquake insurance policy for the HEC store

H. Freight in costs of videos purchased by HEC

prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper as of january 2 2011 any difference b 589050

Parent and Two Subsidiaries, Intercompany Notes

On January 2, 2011, Phillips Company purchased 80% of Sanchez Company and 90% of Thomas Company for $225,000 and $168,000, respectively. Immediately before the acquisitions, the balance sheets of the three companies were as follows:

Phillips

Sanchez

Thonws

Cash

$400,000

$ 43,700

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable

28,000

24,000

20,000

Note receivable

o

10,000

0

Interest receivable

o

300

0

Inventory

120,000

96,000

43,000

Equipment

60,000

40,000

30,000

Land

180,000

80,000

70,000

Total

$788,000

$294,000

$183,000

Accounts payable

$ 28,000

$ 20,000

$ 18,000

Note payable

0

0

10,000

Common stock

800,000

120,000

75,000

Other contributed capital

300,000

90,000

40,000

Retained earnings

160,000

64,000

40,000

Total

$788,000

$294,000

$183,000

The note receivable and interest receivable of Sanchez relate to a loan made to Thomas Company on October 1, 2010. Thomas failed to record the accrued interest expense on the note.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper as of January 2, 2011. Any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to subsidiary land.

determine the amount of total assets appearing on solo company s separate balance sh 589051

Determining Balance Sheet Prior to Consolidation

On January 1, 2011, Pat Company purchased 90% of the outstanding common stock of Solo Company for $236,000 cash. The balance sheet for Pat Company just before the acquisition of Solo Company stock, along with the consolidated balance sheet prepared at the date of acquisition, follows.

Pat Company
December 31, 2010

Consolidated
January I, 2011

Cash

$ 540,000

$ 352,000

Accounts receivable

272,000

346,000

Advances to Solo Company

10,000

Inventory

376,000

451,000

Plant and equipment

622,000

820,000

Land

350,000

421,000

Total

$2,170,000

$2,390,000

Accounts payable

$ 280,000

$ 386,000

Long term liabilities

520,000

605,500

Noncontrolling interest in subsidiary

28,500

Common stock

890,000

890,000

Other contributed capital

300,000

300,000

Retained earnings

180,000

180,000

Total

$2,170,000

$2,390,000

One week before the acquisition, Pat Company had advanced $10,000 to Solo Company. Solo Company had not yet recorded the transaction on the date of acquisition. In addition, on the date of acquisition, Solo Company owed Pat Company $4,000 for purchases of merchandise on account. The merchandise had been sold to outside parties prior to the date of acquisition.

Required:

  1. Determine the amount of cash that appeared on Solo Company”s balance sheet immediately prior to the acquisition of its stock by Pat Company.
  2. Determine the amount of total stockholders” equity on Solo Company”s separate balance sheet at the date of acquisition.
  3. Determine the amount of total assets appearing on Solo Company”s separate balance sheet on the date of acquisition.

prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper on july 31 2011 589052

In Transit Items

On July 31, 2011, Ping Company purchased 90% of Santos Company”s common stock for $2,010,000 cash. Immediately after the acquisition, the two companies” balance sheets were as follows:

Ping

Santas

Cash

$ 320,000

$ 150,000

Accounts receivable

600,000

300,000

Note receivable

100,000

0

Inventory

1,840,000

400,000

Advance to Santos Company

60,000

0

Investment in Santos Company

2,010,000

0

Plant and equipment (net)

3,000,000

1,500,000

Land

90,000

90,000

Total

$8,020,000

$2,440,000

Accounts payable

$ 800,000

$ 140,000

Notes payable

900,000

100,000

Common stock

2,400,000

900,000

Other contributed capital

2,200,000

680,000

Retained earnings

1,720,000

620,000

Total

$8,020,000

$2,440,000

Santos Company has not yet recorded the $60,000 cash advance from Ping Company. Ping Company”s accounts receivable include $20,000 due from Santos Company. Santos Company”s $100,000 note payable is payable to Ping Company. Neither company has recorded $7,000 of interest accrued on the note from January 1 to July 31. Any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to land.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper on July 31, 2011.

prepare a consolidated balance sheet as of january 1 2011 under each of the followin 589053

Purchase Using Cash and Using Stock

Balance sheets for Prego Company and Sprague Company as of December 31, 2010, follow:

Argo Company

Sprague Company

Cash

$ 700,000

$111,000

Accounts receivable (net)

892,000

230,000

Inventory

544,000

60,000

Property and equipment (net)

$1,927,000

$468,000

Land

120,000

94,000

Total assets

$4,183,000

$963,000

Accounts payable

$ 302,000

$152,000

Notes payable

588,000

61,000

Long tenn debt

350,000

90,000

Common stock

1,800,000

500,000

Other contributed capital

543,000

80,000

Retained earnings

600,000

80,000

Total equities

$4,183,000

$963,000

The fair values of Sprague Company”s assets and liabilities are equal to their book values.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet as of January 1, 2011, under each of the following assumptions:

  1. On January 1, 2011, Prego Company purchased 90% of the outstanding common stock of Sprague Company for $594,000.
  2. On January 1, 2011, Prego Company exchanged 11,880 of its $20 par value common shares with a fair value of $50 per share for 90% of the outstanding common shares of Sprague Company. The transaction is a purchase.

on february 1 2011 punto company purchased 95 of the outstanding common stock of sar 589054

Intercompany Items, Two Subsidiaries

On February 1, 2011, Punto Company purchased 95% of the outstanding common stock of Sara Company and 85% of the outstanding common stock of Rob Company. Immediately before the two acquisitions, balance sheets of the three companies were as follows:

Pun to

Sara

Rob

Cash

$165,000

$ 45,000

$17,000

Accounts receivable

35,000

35,000

26,000

Notes receivable

18,000

0

0

Merchandise inventory

106,000

35,500

14,000

Prepaid insurance

13,500

2,500

500

Advances to Sara Company

10,000

Advances to Rob Company

5,000

Land

248,000

43,000

15,000

Buildings (net)

100,000

27,000

16,000

Equipment (net)

35,000

10,000

2,500

Total

$735,500

$198,000

$91,000

Accounts payable

$ 25,500

$ 20,000

$10,500

Income taxes payable

30,000

10,000

0

Notes payable

0

6,000

10,500

Bonds payable

100,000

0

0

Common stock, $10 par value

300,000

144,000

42,000

Other contributed capital

150,000

12,000

38,000

Retained earnings (deficit)

130,000

6,000

(10,000)

Total

$735,500

$198,000

$91,000

The following additional information is relevant.

  1. One week before the acquisitions, Punto Company had advanced $10,000 to Sara Company and $5,000 to Rob Company. Sara Company recorded an increase to Accounts Payable for its advance, but Rob Company had not recorded the transaction.
  2. On the date of acquisition, Punto Company owed Sara Company $12,000 for purchases on account, and Rob Company owed Punto Company $3,000 and Sara Company $6,000 for such purchases. The goods purchased had all been sold to outside parties prior to acquisition.
  3. Punto Company exchanged 13,400 shares of its common stock with a fair value of $12 per share for 95% of the outstanding common stock of Sara Company. In addition, stock issue fees of $4,000 were paid in cash. The acquisition was accounted for as a purchase.
  4. Punto Company paid $50,000 cash for the 85% interest in Rob Company.
  5. Three thousand dollars of Sara Company”s notes payable and $9,500 of Rob Company”s notes payable were payable to Punto Company.
  6. Assume that for Sara, any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to subsidiary land. However, for Rob, assume that any excess of book value over the value implied by the purchase price is due to overvalued buildings.

Required:

  1. Give the book entries to record the two acquisitions in the accounts of Punto Company.
  2. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper immediately after acquisition.
  3. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition for Punto Company and its subsidiaries.

prepare a computation and allocation schedule for the difference between book value 589055

Intercompany Notes, 90% Acquisition

On January 1, 2009, Pope Company purchased 90% of Sun Company”s common stock for $5,800,000 cash. Immediately after the acquisition, the two companies” balance sheets were as follows:

Pope

Sun

Cash

$ 297,000

$ 165,000

Accounts receivable

432,000

468,000

Notes receivable

90,000

Inventory

1,980,000

1,447,000

Investment in Sun Company

5,800,000

Plant and equipment (net)

5,730,000

3,740,000

Land

1,575,000

908,000

Total

$15,904,000

$6,728,000

Accounts payable

$ 698,000

$ 247,000

Notes payable

2,250,000

110,000

Common stock ($15 par)

4,500,000

5,250,000

Other contributed capital

5,198,000

396,000

Treasury stock held

(1,200,000)

Retained earnings

3,258,000

1,925,000

Total

$15,904,000

$6,728,000

Sun Company”s note payable includes a $90,000 note payable to Pope Company, plus $20,000 payable to a bank. Any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to subsidiary property and equipment.

Required:

  1. Prepare a Computation and Allocation Schedule for the difference between book value of equity and the value implied by the purchase price.
  2. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet workpaper on January 1, 2009.

prepare the eliminating entries for a consolidated statements workpaper on january 1 589056

Deferred Tax Effects

On January 1, 2012, Pruitt Company issued 25,500 shares of its common stock in exchange for 85% of the outstanding common stock of Shah Company. Pruitt”s common stock had a fair value of $28 per share at that time (par value of $2 per share). Pruitt Company uses the cost method to account for its investment in Shah Company and files a consolidated income tax return. A schedule of the Shah Company assets acquired and liabilities assumed at book values (which are equal to their tax bases) and fair values follows.

Book Value/

Item

Tax Basis

Fair Value

Excess

Receivables (net)

$125,000

$ 125,000

$ 0

Inventory

167,000

195,000

28,000

Land

86,500

120,000

33,500

Plant assets (net)

467,000

567,000

100,000

Patents

95,000

200,000

105,000

Total

$940,500

$1,207,000

$266,500

Current liabilities

$ 89,500

$89,500

$ 0

Bonds payable

300,000

360,000

60,000

Common stock

120,000

Other contributed capital

164,000

Retained earnings

267,000

Total

$940,500

Additional Information:

  1. Pruitt”s income tax rate is 35%.
  2. Shah”s beginning inventory was all sold during 2012.
  3. Useful lives for depreciation and amortization purposes are:

Plant assets

10 years

Patents

8 years

Bond premium

10 years

  1. Pruitt uses the straight line method for all depreciation and amortization purposes.

Required:

  1. Prepare the stock acquisition entry on Pruitt Company”s books.
  2. Prepare the eliminating entries for a consolidated statements workpaper on January 1, 2012, immediately after acquisition.

where are the three components of the purchase price reported on the statement of ca 589082

eBay Acquires Skype

On October 14, 2005, eBay acquired all of the outstanding securities of Skype Technologies S.A. (“Skype”), for a total initial consideration of approximately $2.6 billion, plus potential performance based payments of approximately $1.3 billion (based on the euro–dollar exchange rate at the time of the acquisition and using an income approach to estimating the value of the earnout). The initial consideration of approximately $2.6 billion was comprised of approximately $1.3 billion in cash and 32.8 million shares of eBay”s common stock. For accounting purposes, the stock portion of the initial consideration was valued at approximately $1.3 billion based on the average closing price of eBay common stock surrounding the acquisition announcement date of September 12, 2005.

Required:

  1. Prepare the journal entry on eBay”s books to record the acquisition.
  2. Where are the three components of the purchase price reported on the statement of cash flows? Be specific as to category and amount, and include required note disclosures in your answer.

prepare journal entries on the books of percy company from the date of purchase thro 589084

Parent Company Entries, Liquidating Dividend

Percy Company purchased 80% of the outstanding voting shares of Song Company at the beginning of 2009 for $387,000. At the time of purchase, Song Company”s total stockholders” equity amounted to $475,000. Income and dividend distributions for Song Company from 2009 through 2011 are as follows:

2009

2010

2011

Net income (loss)

$63,500

$52,500

($55,000)

Dividend distribution

25,000

50,000

35,000

Required:

Prepare journal entries on the books of Percy Company from the date of purchase through 2011 to account for its investment in Song Company under each of the following assumptions:

  1. Percy Company uses the cost method to record its investment.
  2. Percy Company uses the partial equity method to record its investment.
  3. Percy Company uses the complete equity method to record its investment. The difference between book value of equity acquired and the value implied by the purchase price was attributed solely to an excess of market over book values of depreciable assets, with a remaining life of 10 years.

prepare in general journal form the workpaper entries that would be made in the prep 589085

Workpaper Eliminating Entries, Cost Method

Park Company purchased 90% of the stock of Salt Company on January 1, 2009, for $465,000, an amount equal to $15,000 in excess of the book value of equity acquired. This excess payment relates to an undervaluation of Salt Company”s land. On the date of purchase, Salt Company”s retained earnings balance was $50,000. The remainder of the stockholders” equity consists of no par common stock. During 2013, Salt Company declared dividends in the amount of $10,000, and reported net income of $40,000. The retained earnings balance of Salt Company on December 31, 2012, was $160,000. Park Company uses the cost method to record its investment.

Required:

Prepare in general journal form the workpaper entries that would be made in the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper on December 31, 2013.

prepare in general journal form the workpaper entries necessary in the compilation o 589086

Workpaper Eliminating Entries, Equity Method

At the beginning of 2009, Presidio Company purchased 95% of the common stock of Succo Company for $494,000. On that date, Succo Company”s stockholders” equity consisted of the following:

Common stock

$300,000

Other contributed capital

100,000

Retained earnings

120,000

Total

$520,000

During 2017, Succo Company reported net income of $40,000 and distributed dividends in the amount of $19,000. Succo Company”s retained earnings balance at the end of 2016 amounted to $160,000. Presidio Company uses the equity method.

Required:

Prepare in general journal form the workpaper entries necessary in the compilation of consolidated financial statements on December 31, 2017. Explain why the partial and complete equity methods would result in the same entries in this instance.

assume that poco company uses the cost method prepare in general journal form the en 589087

Workpaper Eliminating Entries, Losses by Subsidiary

Poco Company purchased 85% of the outstanding common stock of Serena Company on December 31, 2009, for $310,000 cash. On that date, Serena Company”s stockholders” equity consisted of the following:

Common stock

$240,000

Other contributed capital

55,000

Retained earnings

50,000

$345,000

During 2012, Serena Company distributed a dividend in the amount of $12,000 and at year end reported a net loss of $10,000. During the time that Poco Company has held its investment in Serena Company, Serena Company”s retained earnings balance has decreased $29,500 to a net balance of $20,500 after closing on December 31, 2012. Serena Company did not declare or distribute any dividends in 2010 or 2011. The difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to goodwill.

Required:

  1. Assume that Poco Company uses the equity method. Prepare in general journal form the entries needed in the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper on December 31, 2012. Explain why the partial and complete equity methods would result in the same entries in this instance.
  2. Assume that Poco Company uses the cost method. Prepare in general journal form the entries needed in the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper on December 31, 2012.

determine the total noncontrolling interest that will be reported on the consolidate 589088

Eliminating Entries, Noncontrolling Interest

On January 1, 2009, Plate Company purchased a 90% interest in the common stock of Set Company for $650,000, an amount $20,000 in excess of the book value of equity acquired. The excess relates to the understatement of Set Company”s land holdings.

Excerpts from the consolidated retained earnings section of the consolidated statements workpaper for the year ended December 31, 2009, follow:

Set Company

Consolidated Balances

1/1/09 retained earnings

190,000

880,000

Net income from above

132,000

420,000

Dividends declared

(50,000)

(88,000)

12/31/09 retained earnings to the balance sheet

272,000

1.212.000

Set Company”s stockholders” equity is composed of common stock and retained earnings only.

Required:

  1. Prepare the eliminating entries required for the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper on December 31, 2009, assuming the use of the cost method.
  2. Prepare the eliminating entries required for the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper on December 31, 2009, assuming the use of the equity method.
  3. Determine the total noncontrolling interest that will be reported on the consolidated balance sheet on December 31, 2009. How does the noncontrolling interest differ between the cost method and the equity method?

prepare the workpaper eliminating entries for a workpaper on december 31 2009 589089

Parent Entries and Eliminating Entries, Equity Method, Year of Acquisition

On January 1, 2009, Pert Company purchased 85% of the outstanding common stock of Sales Company for $350,000. On that date, Sales Company”s stockholders” equity consisted of common stock, $100,000; other contributed capital, $40,000; and retained earnings, $140,000. Pert Company paid more than the book value of net assets acquired because the recorded cost of Sales Company”s land was significantly less than its fair value.

During 2009 Sales Company earned $148,000 and declared and paid a $50,000 dividend. Pert Company used the partial equity method to record its investment in Sales Company.

Required:

  1. Prepare the investment related entries on Pert Company”s books for 2009.
  2. Prepare the workpaper eliminating entries for a workpaper on December 31, 2009.

calculate consolidated net income and consolidated retained earnings for 2010 and 20 589091

Interim Purchase of Stock, Full Year Reporting Alternative, Cost Method

On May 1, 2010, Peters Company purchased 80% of the common stock of Smith Company for $50,000. Additional data concerning these two companies for the years 2010 and 2011 are:

2010

2011

Pet es

Smith

Peters

Smith

Common stock

$100,000

$25,000

$100,000

$25,000

Other contributed capital

40,000

10,000

40,000

10,000

Retained earnings, 1/1

80,000

10,000

129,000

53,000

Net income (loss)

64,000

45,000

37,500

(5,000)

Cash dividends (11/30)

15,000

2,000

5,000

—0—

Any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to Smith Company”s land. Peters Company uses the cost method to record its investment.

Required:

  1. Prepare the workpaper entries that would be made on a consolidated statements workpaper for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011 for Peters Company and its subsidiary, assuming that Smith Company”s income is earned evenly throughout the year. (Use the full year reporting alternative.)
  2. Calculate consolidated net income and consolidated retained earnings for 2010 and 2011.

prepare workpaper eliminating entries for a workpaper on december 31 2010 star compa 589093

Interim Purchase, Partial Year Reporting Alternative, Equity Method

On October 1, 2010, Para Company purchased 90% of the outstanding common stock of Star Company for $210,000. Additional data concerning Star Company for 2010 follows:

Common stock

$70,000

Other contributed capital

30,000

Retained earnings, 1/1

70,000

Net income

60,000

Dividends declared and paid (12/15)

10,000

Any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price relates to goodwill. Para Company uses the partial equity method to record its investment in Star Company.

Required:

  1. Prepare on Para Company”s books journal entries to record the investment related activities for 2010.
  2. Prepare workpaper eliminating entries for a workpaper on December 31, 2010. Star Company”s net income is earned evenly throughout the year. (Use alternative two—the partial year reporting alternative.)
  3. Repeat part B, but use the full year reporting alternative.

prepare the cash flow from operating activities section of a consolidated statement 589094

Cash Flow from Operations

A consolidated income statement and selected comparative consolidated balance sheet data for Palano Company and subsidiary follow:

Palano Company and Subsidiary
Consolidated Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales

$701,000

Cost of sales

263,000

Gross profit

438,000

Operating expenses:

Depreciation expense

$ 76,000

Selling expenses

122,000

Administrative expenses

85,000

283,000

Consolidated net income

155,000

Less noncontrolling interest in consolidated net income

38,750

Controlling interest in consolidated net income

$116,250

December 31

2009

2010

Accounts receivable

$229,000

$318,000

Inventory

194,000

234,000

Prepaid selling expenses

26,000

30,000

Accounts payable

99,000

79,000

Accrued selling expenses

96,000

84,000

Accrued administrative expenses

56,000

39,000

Required:

Prepare the cash flow from operating activities section of a consolidated statement of cash flows assuming use of the:

  1. Direct method.
  2. Indirect method.

was there any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase pr 589095

Subsidiary Loss

The following accounts appeared in the separate financial statements at the end of 2014 for Pressing Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiary, Stressing Inc. Stressing was acquired in 2009.

Pmssing Inc.

Stressing Inc.

Investment in subsidiary Dividends receivable

660,000

5,000

Dividends payable

20,000

$5,000

Common stock

300,000

20,000

Additional paid in capital

500,000

380,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/14

500,000

260,000

Dividends declared

(75,000)

(24,000)

Equity in net loss of subsidiary

$(55,000)

Retained earnings at 1/1/14

380,000

Required:

  1. How can you determine whether Pressing is using the cost or equity method to account for its investment in Stressing?
  2. Compute controlling interest in consolidated income.
  3. How much income did Pressing Inc. earn from its own independent operations?
  4. Compute consolidated retained earnings at 12/31/14.
  5. What are consolidated dividends?
  6. Compute retained earnings at 1/1/14 for Stressing Inc.
  7. Was there any difference between book value and the value implied by the purchase price at acquisition? Prepare workpaper entries needed at the end of 2014.
  8. If Pressing used the cost method instead of the equity method, how would Pressing Inc”s retained earnings change at the end of 2014? Describe in words.
  9. If Pressing uses the cost method instead of the equity method, what workpaper entries would be required at the end of 2014? Describe in words.

prepare the entry s needed at the end of 2009 to report the income tax consequences 589096

Entries for Deferred Taxes from Undistributed Income, Cost and Equity (Appendix)

On January 1, 2009, Plenty Company purchased a 70% interest in the common stock of Set Company for $650,000, an amount $20,000 in excess of the book value of equity acquired. The excess relates to the understatement of Set Company”s land holdings.

Excerpts from both company”s financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2009, follow:

Set Company

Plenty Company

1/1/09 retained ear gs

190,000

880,000

Income from independent operations

132,000

420,000

Dividends declared

(50,000)

(88,000)

Set Company”s stockholders” equity is composed of common stock and retained earnings only. Both companies file separate tax returns, and the expected tax rate is 40%. The capital gains tax rate is 20%, and there is an 80% dividend exclusion rate.

Required:

  1. Prepare the entry(s) needed at the end of 2009 to report the income tax consequences of undistributed income assuming the use of the cost method, under each of the following assumptions. Indicate whether the entry is recorded on the books of Set, Plenty, or worksheet only.

(1) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized in the form of future dividends.

(2) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized only when the stock is sold, in the form of capital gains.

  1. Prepare the entry(s) needed at the end of 2009 to report the income tax consequences of undistributed income assuming the use of the partial equity method, under each of the following assumptions. Indicate whether the entry is recorded on the books of Set, Plenty, or worksheet only.

(1) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized in the form of future dividends.

(2) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized only when the stock is sold, in the form of capital gains.

  1. Prepare the entry(s) needed at the end of 2009 to report the income tax consequences of undistributed income assuming the use of the complete equity method, under each of the following assumptions. Indicate whether the entry is recorded on the books of Set, Plenty, or worksheet only.

(1) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized in the form of future dividends.

(2) Plenty expects the undistributed income will be realized only when the stock is sold, in the form of capital gains.

corporation a purchased the net assets of corporation b for 80 000 on the date of a 589116

Corporation A purchased the net assets of Corporation B for $80,000. On the date of A”s purchase, Corporation B had no long term investments in marketable securities and $10,000 (book and fair value) of liabilities. The fair values of Corporation B”s assets, when acquired, were

Current assets

$ 90.000

Noncurrent assets

60.000

Total

$100,000

Under FASB Statement No. 141R and No.160 [Topics 805 and 810], how should the $10,000 difference between the fair value of the net assets acquired ($90,000) and the value implied by the purchase price ($80,000) be accounted for by Corporation A?

(a) The $10,000 difference should be credited to retained earnings.

(b) The noncurrent assets should be recorded at $50,000.

(c) The current assets should be recorded at $36,000, and the noncurrent assets should be recorded at $54,000.

(d) A current gain of $10,000 should be recognized.

identify any factors that may inhibit the comparability of these companies also comp 589001

Comprehensive Financial Statement Analysis

Using a library or other information sources, obtain financial statements or summaries of financial information for one set of three companies in the same industry:

1. IBM

Storage Tek

Compaq

2. UAL (United Airlines)

American Airlines (AMR)

Delta Air Lines

3. General Motors

Ford Motor Company

Chrysler

Required (for each company)

a. Examine the liability section of each company’s balance sheet. Calculate the relevant subtotals for current liabilities, noncurrent liabilities, and shareholders’ equity.

b. Identify any unusual trends and terms.

c. Read the relevant notes and identify any major measurement and valuation issues.

d. Calculate the debt and equity composition ratios.

e. Assess the relative changes in debt and equity for each year. Also identify the relative default and any other risks in these statements.

f. Calculate liquidity ratios for each company and evaluate your results.

g. Calculate profitability ratios and evaluate the results.

h. Identify any factors that may inhibit the comparability of these companies. Also compile any other information that is needed to make a better intercompany comparison.